MiCOM P125,
P126 & P127
Directional/Non-Directional Relay
P12y/EN M/Fa5_
Version
Software version: V15
Hardware version: 5
Technical Manual
Note:
The technical manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation.
However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all
topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization.
Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical sales office and request the necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of
Schneider Electric including settlements of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract,
which is not affected by the contents of the technical manual.
This device MUST NOT be modified. If any modification is made without the express permission of
Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.
The Schneider Electric logo and any alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of Schneider Electric.
MiCOM is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric. All trade names or trademarks mentioned herein whether
registered or not, are the property of their owners.
This manual is provided for informational use only and is subject to change without notice.
© 2011, Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Technical Manual
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN M/Fa5
Page 1/2
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Directional/Non-directional Relay
CONTENT
Safety Section
Pxxxx/EN SS/G11
Introduction
P12y/EN IT/Fa5
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions
P12y/EN IN/Fa5
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
Menu Content Tables
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Technical Data and Characteristic Curves
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Getting Started
P12y/EN GS/Fa5
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Communication Database
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
Commissioning and Maintenance Guide
P12y/EN CM/Fa4
Connection Diagrams
P12y/EN CO/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
P12y/EN M/Fa5
Technical Manual
Page 2/2
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
BLANK PAGE
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
SAFETY SECTION
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
Safety Section
Page 1/8
STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL
LABEL INFORMATION FOR SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
EQUIPMENT
1.
INTRODUCTION
3
2.
HEALTH AND SAFETY
3
3.
SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT
4
3.1
Symbols
4
3.2
Labels
4
4.
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING
4
5.
DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL
7
6.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
8
6.1
Protective fuse rating
8
6.2
Protective Class
8
6.3
Installation Category
8
6.4
Environment
8
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
Page 2/8
Safety Section
BLANK PAGE
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
Safety Section
1.
Page 3/8
INTRODUCTION
This guide and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe
handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Guide also includes
descriptions of equipment label markings.
Documentation for equipment ordered from Schneider Electric is despatched separately from
manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is
provided to ensure that printed information which may be present on the equipment is fully
understood by the recipient.
The technical data in this safety guide is typical only, see the technical data section of the
relevant product publication(s) for data specific to a particular equipment.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the
contents of this Safety Guide and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is
installed, commissioned or serviced.
Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some
equipment.
2.
HEALTH AND SAFETY
The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure
that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with
the contents of that Safety Section, or this Safety Guide.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts
of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may
endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
•
Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and
of the system to which it is being connected;
•
Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorised to energize and de-energize equipment and
to isolate, ground, and label it;
•
Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety
engineering practices;
•
Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and
operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include
detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take
any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical
sales office and request the necessary information.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
Page 4/8
3.
Safety Section
SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT
For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the
equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the
equipment is installed or commissioned.
3.1
Symbols
Caution: refer to equipment documentation
Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal
Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth)
terminal.
Note: This symbol may also be used for a
Protective Conductor (Earth) Terminal if that
terminal is part of a terminal block or subassembly e.g. power supply.
*NOTE:
3.2
THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE
DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM
GROUND.
Labels
See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M/G11) for equipment labelling information.
4.
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING
Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this
equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.
The equipment documentation should
commissioning, or servicing the equipment.
be
consulted
before
installing,
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may
present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
The clamping screws of all terminal block connectors, for field wiring, using M4
screws shall be tightened to a nominal torque of 1.3 Nm.
Equipment intended for rack or panel mounting is for use on a flat surface of a
Type 1 enclosure, as defined by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also
electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD)
precautions are not taken.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by
all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.
Voltage and current connections shall be made using insulated crimp terminations
to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety.
Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided in numerical relays to indicate
the health of the device. Schneider Electric strongly recommends that these
contacts are hardwired into the substation's automation system, for alarm
purposes.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
Safety Section
Page 5/8
To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool
for the wire size should be used.
The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection
diagram.
Protection Class I Equipment
-
Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective
conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the
supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.
-
The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since
the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be
lost.
-
When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to
terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the
protective (earth) conductor is checked after the addition or removal of
such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the
protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or
similar.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm²
(3.3 mm² for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section
of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring
regulations.
The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short
as possible.
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that
are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs
and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are
connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be
connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked:
-
Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation),
-
CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections,
-
Protective fuse rating,
-
Integrity of
applicable),
-
Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.
the
protective
conductor
(earth)
connection
(where
Accidental touching of exposed terminals
If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of
electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with
IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided.
Equipment use
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts,
which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
Page 6/8
Safety Section
UL and CSA/CUL Listed or Recognized equipment
To maintain UL and CSA/CUL Listing/Recognized status for North America the
equipment should be installed using UL or CSA Listed or Recognized parts for
the following items: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit
breakers, insulation crimp terminals and replacement internal battery, as
specified in the equipment documentation.
For external protective fuses a UL or CSA Listed fuse shall be used. The Listed
type shall be a Class J time delay fuse, with a maximum current rating of 15 A
and a minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c., for example type AJT15.
Where UL or CSA Listing of the equipment is not required, a high rupture
capacity (HRC) fuse type with a maximum current rating of 16 Amps and a
minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c. may be used, for example Red Spot type NIT or
TIA.
Equipment operating conditions
The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and
environmental limits.
Current transformer circuits
Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced
may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety,
the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to
it.
For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block
for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the
module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the
equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies.
For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for
current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal
of the module.
External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs)
Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted
to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched.
Battery replacement
Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended
type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the
equipment, buildings and persons.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the
end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to
discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion of modules and pcb cards
Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the
equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage.
Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards
Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used,
this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized.
This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may
be accessible on the extender card.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
Safety Section
Page 7/8
External test blocks and test plugs
Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such
as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be
accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the
insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
*Note: When a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test
Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making
them safe.
Fiber optic communication
Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or
signal level of the device.
Cleaning
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water,
when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally
protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed.
5.
DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL
De-commissioning
The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the
supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely
isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the
capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to
de-commissioning.
Disposal
It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided.
The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment
containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking
precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of
operation, may apply to the disposal of the equipment.
Pxxx/EN SS/G11
Page 8/8
6.
Safety Section
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable.
6.1
Protective fuse rating
The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A,
high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. Unless otherwise
stated in equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable. The protective fuse
should be located as close to the unit as possible.
CAUTION -
6.2
Protective Class
IEC 60255-27: 2005
EN 60255-27: 2006
6.3
CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may
produce lethal hazardous voltages.
Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment
documentation). This equipment requires a protective
conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety.
Installation Category
IEC 60255-27: 2005
Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III):
EN 60255-27: 2006
Distribution level, fixed installation.
Equipment in this category is qualification tested at
5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500 Ω, 0.5 J, between all
supply circuits and earth and also between
independent circuits.
6.4
Environment
The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an
outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will
enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of
protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected).
Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2
Altitude - Operation up to 2000m
IEC 60255-27:2005
EN 60255-27: 2006
Compliance is demonstrated by reference
to safety standards.
Introduction
P12y/EN IT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
INTRODUCTION
Introduction
P12y/EN IT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 1/8
CONTENTS
1.
INTRODUCTION
3
2.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
4
3.
INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM RANGE
5
4.
INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 RELAYS
6
5.
MAIN FUNCTIONS
7
5.1
Main functions
7
5.2
General functions
8
P12y/EN IT/Fa5
Introduction
Page 2/8
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
BLANK PAGE
Introduction
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
1.
P12y/EN IT/Fa5
Page 3/8
INTRODUCTION
The MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays have been designed for controlling, protecting and
monitoring industrial installations, public distribution networks and substations. They can also
be used as part of a protection scheme for transformers and generator transformers. The
P125, P126 & P127 relays can also provide back-up protection for HV and EHV transmission
systems.
P12y/EN IT/Fa5
Introduction
Page 4/8
2.
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This manual provides a description of MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 functions and settings.
The goal of this manual is to allow the user to become familiar with the application,
installation, setting and commissioning of these relays.
This manual has the following format:
P12y/EN IT
Introduction
The introduction presents the documentation structure and a
brief presentation of the relay, including functions.
P12y/EN IN
Handling, installation and case dimensions
This section provides logistics general instructions for handling,
installing and stocking..
P12y/EN FT
User Guide
This section provides relay settings with a brief explanation of
each setting and detailed description. It also provides recording
and measurements functions including the configuration of the
event and disturbance recorder and measurement functions.
P12y/EN HI
Menu content tables
This section shows the menu structure of the relays, with a
complete list of all of the menu settings.
P12y/EN AP
Application Notes
This section includes a description of common power system
applications of the relay, calculation of suitable settings, some
typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the
relay.
P12y/EN TD
Technical data and curve characteristics
This section provides technical data including setting ranges,
accuracy limits, recommended operating conditions, ratings and
performance data. Compliance with norms and international
standards is quoted where appropriate.
P12y/EN CT
Communication mapping data bases
This section provides an overview regarding the communication
interfaces of the relay. Detailed protocol mappings, semantics,
profiles and interoperability tables are not provided within this
manual. Separate documents are available per protocol,
available for download from our website.
P12y/EN CM
Commissioning and Maintenance Guide
Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks
on the calibration and functionality of the relay.
P12y/EN CO
Connection diagrams
This section provides the mechanical and electrical description.
External wiring connections to the relay are indicated.
P12y/EN RS
Commissioning test records
This section contains checks on the calibration and functionality
of the relay.
P12y/EN VC
Hardware/Software version history
History of all hardware and software releases for the product.
Introduction
P12y/EN IT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
3.
Page 5/8
INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM RANGE
MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply requirements. It
comprises of a range of components, systems and services from Schneider Electric.
Flexibility is central to the MiCOM concept.
MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive
communication capabilities, to integrate this solution with your power supply control system.
The components within MiCOM are:
•
P range protection relays
•
C range control products
•
M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring
•
S range versatile PC support and substation control packages
MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state and
behaviour of a power system, using disturbance and fault records.
They can also provide measurements of the power system at regular intervals to a control
centre enabling remote monitoring and control to take place.
For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, refer to the technical publications, which
can be obtained from: Schneider Electric or your local sales office; alternatively visit our web
site.
P12y/EN IT/Fa5
Introduction
Page 6/8
4.
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 RELAYS
The MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays are based on the successful K, MODN and MX3
range.
Each relay includes a large number of protection and control functions for most demanding
applications.
On the front panel the relays are equipped with a liquid crystal display (LCD) with 2 x 16
backlit alphanumeric characters, a tactile 7-button keypad (to gain access to all parameters,
alarms and measurements) and 8 LEDs to display the status of the MiCOM P125, P126 &
P127.
A dedicated Schneider Electric setting software package is available that allows the user to
read, initialise and change the relay parameter settings via the RS485 rear communications
port(s) and/or the RS232 front port.
The MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays provide comprehensive directional overcurrent
protection for utilities networks, industrial plants and networks in addition to other
applications where directional or non-directional overcurrent protection is required.
The directional earth fault element is sensitive enough to be used in impedance-earthed
systems (such as resistance or Peterson Coil) or insulated systems.
The models available are:
MiCOM P125:
Directional earth fault relay with earth fault wattmetric element.
MiCOM P126:
Three phase overcurrent and directional earth fault relay with earth
fault wattmetric element and autoreclose function.
MiCOM P127:
Directional overcurrent and directional earth fault relay with overpower
element, overvoltage/undervoltage, under/overfrrequency protection
and autoreclose function.
Introduction
P12y/EN IT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
5.
MAIN FUNCTIONS
5.1
Main functions
Page 7/8
The following table shows the functions available with the models.
ANSI
CODES
FEATURES
50/51P/N
1 phase or earth overcurrent
50/51
3 phase overcurrent
50/51N
Earth overcurrent
64N
Restricted Earth Fault
67P
3 phase directional overcurrent
67N
Earth fault directional overcurrent
67N
Derived earth fault
51V
Voltage controlled overcurrent
37
3 phase undercurrent
46
Negative phase sequence overcurrent
27/59
Phase under/over voltage (AND & OR mode)
59N
Residual over voltage
47
Negative overvoltage
32
Directional power (active / reactive, under / over
power)
32N
Wattmetric Earth Fault
81U/O
Under/over frequency
81R
Rate of Frequency
49
Thermal overload
86
Output relay latching
79
Autoreclose
50BF
Circuit breaker failure detection
46BC
Broken conductor detection I2/I1
P125
P126
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
P127
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Circuit Breaker Maintenance and Trip Circuit
Supervision
•
•
Cold load pick up
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Blocking Logic
Test of output relays (Maintenance)
CB control Local/remote
Selective relay scheme logic
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inrush blocking
Switch on to fault (SOTF)
Phase rotation
VT supervision (VTS)
CT Supervision (CTS)
•
P12y/EN IT/Fa5
Introduction
Page 8/8
5.2
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
General functions
The following table shows the general features available.
GENERAL FEATURES
Number of digital inputs
Standard configuration
P125
P126
4
7
Optional configuration
Total number of outputs
relays
P127
7
12
6
8
8
Events recording
250
250
250
Fault recording
25
25
25
Disturbance recording
5
5
5
Setting group
2
2
8
4
7
7
Auxiliary timers
Standard configuration
Optional configuration
Communication
IEC60870-5-103, DNP 3.0 &
Modbus RTU (port 1)
12
•
•
IEC60870-5-103 or Modbus
(port 2 – optional)
Time synchronisation
•
Via rear communication port
(DCS)
•
•
•
Via digital input (external clock)
•
•
•
IRIG-B Synchronization
(optional)
Settings software
MiCOM S1 using RS232 front
port
•
•
•
MiCOM S1 using optional
RS485 rear port
Logic equation
AND, OR and NOT gates (8
equations)
Measurements
RMS currents values &
frequency
•
•
•
•
•
•
Peak and rolling currents
values
•
•
Max and average currents
values
•
•
•
•
Phase and/or neutral angle
Metering (optional)
•
•
•
Max and average voltage
values
•
Power and Energy
•
Apparent power and apparent
energy
•
harmonics values, THD & TDD
•
Class 0.5 measurements
values (P, Q, S, E)
•
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions
P12y/EN IN/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
HANDLING, INSTALLATION
AND CASE DIMENSIONS
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN IN/Fa5
Page 1/12
CONTENT
1.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
3
1.1
Receipt of relays
3
1.2
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
3
2.
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
4
3.
RELAY MOUNTING
5
4.
UNPACKING
6
5.
STORAGE
7
6.
CONNECTIONS
8
6.1
Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals
8
6.2
Communication port RS485
9
6.3
RS232 port
9
6.4
IRIG-B connections (P127 option)
9
6.4.1
IRIG-B Modulated
9
6.4.2
IRIG-B demodulated
10
6.5
Protective Conductor (Earthing)
10
7.
CASE DIMENSIONS
11
7.1
MiCOM P126 & P127
11
7.2
MiCOM P125
11
P12y/EN IN/Fa5
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions
Page 2/12
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
BLANK PAGE
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.
P12y/EN IN/Fa5
Page 3/12
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE
USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
GUIDE SFTY/4LM/G11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND
TECHNICAL DATA SECTIONS OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND
ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
1.1
Receipt of relays
Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment prior to
installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no
damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained during transit a claim
should be made to the transport contractor and Schneider Electric should be promptly
notified.
Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation should be
returned to their protective polythene bags.
1.2
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
The relays use components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges.
The electronic circuits are well protected by the metal case and the internal module should
not be withdrawn unnecessarily. When handling the module outside its case, care should be
taken to avoid contact with components and electrical connections. If removed from the case
for storage, the module should be placed in an electrically conducting antistatic bag.
There are no setting adjustments within the module and it is advised that it is not
unnecessarily disassembled. Although the printed circuit boards are plugged together, the
connectors are a manufacturing aid and not intended for frequent dismantling; in fact
considerable effort may be required to separate them. Touching the printed circuit board
should be avoided, since complementary metal oxide semiconductors (CMOS) are used,
which can be damaged by static electricity discharged from the body.
P12y/EN IN/Fa5
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions
Page 4/12
2.
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
A person’s normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several
thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling
electronic circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent
but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the
case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily.
Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices.
However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following precautions should be
taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed
and manufactured.
1.
Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as
the equipment by touching the case.
2.
Handle the module by its front-plate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid
touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or connectors.
3.
Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the
same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
4.
Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the
same potential as yourself.
5.
Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.
If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment in
service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap. Wrist
straps should have a resistance to ground between 500kΩ – 10MΩ.
If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent a
build-up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should be
earthed to the case whenever possible.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in
BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on
electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a special handling area such
as described in the above-mentioned BS and IEC documents.
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions
P12y/EN IN/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.
Page 5/12
RELAY MOUNTING
Relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly.
If an MMLG test block is to be included it should be positioned at the right-hand side of the
assembly (viewed from the front). Modules should remain protected by their metal case
during assembly into a panel or rack.
If external test blocks are connected to the relay, great care should be taken when using the
associated test plugs such as MMLB and MiCOM P992 since their use may make hazardous
voltages accessible. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of
MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
NOTE:
NOTE: When a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM
P991 Test Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically
shorted, making them safe.
For individually mounted relays an outline diagram is supplied in section 6 of this chapter
showing the panel cut-outs and hole centres.
P12y/EN IN/Fa5
Page 6/12
4.
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts is
damaged or the settings altered. Relays must only be handled by skilled persons. The
installation should be clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration. The
site should be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays that have been removed from their cases
should not be left in situations where they are exposed to dust or damp. This particularly
applies to installations which are being carried out at the same time as construction work.
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
5.
P12y/EN IN/Fa5
Page 7/12
STORAGE
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt they should be stored in a place
free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been
included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the de-humidifier crystals will
be impaired if the bag has been exposed to ambient conditions and may be restored by
gently heating the bag for about an hour, prior to replacing it in the carton.
Dust which collects on a carton may, on subsequent unpacking, find its way into the relay; in
damp conditions the carton and packing may become impregnated with moisture and the dehumifier will lose its efficiency.
Storage temperature: –25°C to +70°C.
SUSTAINED EXPOSURE TO HIGH HUMIDITY DURING STORAGE MAY
CAUSE DAMAGE TO ELECTRONICS AND REDUCE THE LIFETIME OF
THE EQUIPMENT.
THEREFORE, ONCE THE MICOM PRODUCTS HAVE BEEN
UNPACKED, WE RECOMMEND THAT THEY ARE ENERGIZED WITHIN
THE THREE FOLLOWING MONTHS.
WHERE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IS BEING INSTALLED, SUFFICIENT
TIME SHOULD BE ALLOWED FOR ACCLIMATISATION TO THE
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE OF THE ENVIRONMENT, BEFORE
ENERGISATION.
P12y/EN IN/Fa5
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions
Page 8/12
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
6.
CONNECTIONS
6.1
Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE
USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
GUIDE SFTY/4LM/G11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND
TECHNICAL DATA SECTIONS OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND
ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
The individual equipment is delivered with sufficient M4 screws and washers to connect the
relay via insulated crimp ring terminals. The maximum number of crimped terminations, per
terminal block terminal, is two.
If necessary, Schneider Electric can provide 4 types of insulated crimp terminals (see below)
according to the cross sectional area of the wire and the type of terminal. Each reference
corresponds to a sachet of 100 terminals.
Push-on connector 4.8 x 0.8 (wire size 0.75 - 1.5mm²)
Schneider Electric reference: ZB9128 015
Push-on connector 4.8 x 0.8mm (wire size 1.5 - 2.5mm²)
Schneider Electric reference: ZB9128 016
P0166ENc
M4 90˚ Ring Tongue terminal (wire size 0.25 - 1.65mm²)
Schneider Electric reference, Stafford part number ZB9124 901
M4 90˚ Ring Tongue terminal (wire size 1.5 - 2.5mm²)
Schneider Electric reference, Stafford part number ZB9124 900
P0167ENc
To ensure the isolation of adjacent terminals, and to respect the security and safety
instructions, an insulated sleeve must be used.
We recommend the following cable cross-sections:
−
Auxiliary sources
Vaux: 1.5 mm²
−
Communication Ports
see paragraphs 6.2 and 6.3
−
Other circuits
1.0 mm²
Because of the limitations of the ring terminals, the maximum wire cross-section which can
be used for the connector blocks (for current inputs and signals) is 6mm² by using noninsulated ring terminals. When only pre-insulated terminals can be used, the maximum wire
cross-section is reduced to 2,63 mm² per ring terminal. If a more significant wire crosssection is necessary, two wires can be connected in parallel, each one terminated by a
separate ring terminal.
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions
P12y/EN IN/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 9/12
Except for the RS485 port(s) all the terminal blocks used for connections, can withstand a
maximum working voltage of 300V.
We recommend the auxiliary supply is protected by a NIT or TIA fuse type with a maximum
breaking capacity of 16A. For safety reasons, never install fuses in current transformers
circuits. Other circuits must be protected by fuses.
6.2
Communication port RS485
Connections to RS485 are made using ring terminals. It is recommended that a two core
screened cable, is used with a maximum total length of 1000 m or a 200nF total cable
capacitance.
Typical specification:
6.3
−
Each core:
16/0.2 mm copper conductor, PVC insulated
−
Nominal conductor area:
0.5 mm² per core
−
Screen:
Overall braid, PVC sheathed
−
Linear capacitance between
conductor and earth:
100pF/m
RS232 port
Short term connections to the RS232 port, located behind the bottom access cover, can be
made using a screened multi-core communication cable up to 15m long, or a total
capacitance of 2500pF. The cable should be terminated at the relay end with a 9-way, metal
shelled, D-type male plug.
6.4
IRIG-B connections (P127 option)
The IRIG-B option integrates modulated and demodulated versions.
6.4.1
IRIG-B Modulated
IRIG-B modulated terminals: “+” = terminal 82, “–” = terminal 81.
NOTE:
As IRIG-B signal is polarized, insure that BNC ground is connected on
pin n°81.
The IRIG-B input and BNC connector (including BNC adaptor) have a characteristic
impedance of 50Ω. It is recommended that connections between the IRIG-B equipment and
the relay are made using coaxial cable of type RG59LSF with a halogen free, fire retardant
sheath.
To connect the BNC connector to the relay, use the BNC adaptor fixed on the rear
connector:
−
Remove the two retaining screws and the washers,
−
Insert the two spacers in the 81 and 82 terminals,
−
Position the BNC adaptor (“+” side on terminal 82) and screw the scre/washer
assembly (“+” and “GND” sides are marked on the adaptor).
Retaining screw
washer
spacer
P3953ENa
P12y/EN IN/Fa5
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions
Page 10/12
6.4.2
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
IRIG-B demodulated
IRIG-B demodulated terminals: “+” = terminal 84, “–” = terminal 83.
The connections to IRIG-B unmodulated terminals are classical connections.
6.5
Protective Conductor (Earthing)
The equipment must be connected to the protective conductor via the M4 earth terminal of
the terminal block numbered 1 to 28, marked with the earth symbol. We recommend a wire
of minimal cross section of 2,5 mm². Because of the limitations of the ring terminals, the
maximum possible wire cross section is 6mm². If a larger section is necessary, one can use
cables connected in parallel, each one terminated with a ring terminal. Alternatively a
suitably sized metal strip may be used.
NOTE:
To prevent any electrolytic risk between copper conductor or brass
conductors and the back plate of the equipment, it is necessary to
take precautions to isolate them one from the other. This can be done
in several ways, for example by inserting between the conductor and
the case a plated nickel washer or by using tinned terminations.
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions
P12y/EN IN/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
7.
CASE DIMENSIONS
7.1
MiCOM P126 & P127
Page 11/12
P0077ENb
NOTE:
7.2
For P127 with IRIG-B option with BNC adaptor, add 25 mm to the
length.
MiCOM P125
P0078ENb
NOTE:
The chassis is normally secured in the case by four screws (Self
tapping screws 6x1,4), to ensure good seating. The fixing screws
should be fitted in normal service (do not add washers). Do not
discard these screws.
P12y/EN IN/Fa5
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions
Page 12/12
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
BLANK PAGE
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
USER GUIDE
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 1/96
CONTENT
1.
PRESENTATION OF MiCOM P125, P126 AND P127 RELAYS
5
1.1
User Interface
5
1.1.1
Relay Overview
5
1.1.2
Front Panel Description
6
1.1.3
LCD display and keypad description
7
1.1.4
LEDs
8
1.1.5
Description of the two areas under the top and bottom flaps
9
1.1.6
Description of rear Terminal Block for P125, P126 & P127
10
1.2
Menu structure
13
1.3
Password
13
1.3.1
Password Protection
13
1.3.2
Password Entry
13
1.3.3
Changing the Password
14
1.3.4
Change of Setting Invalidation
14
1.4
Displays of Alarm & Warning Messages
14
1.4.1
Electrical Network Alarms
14
1.4.2
Relay Hardware or Software Warning Messages
14
1.5
General characteristics
19
1.5.1
Analogue Inputs
19
2.
MENU
21
2.1
OP PARAMETERS menu
22
2.2
ORDERS menu
23
2.3
CONFIGURATION menu
24
2.3.1
Submenu General Options
24
2.3.2
Voltage Connections
26
2.3.3
Submenu Transfo. Ratio
27
2.3.4
Submenus to Configure LEDs 5 to 8
28
2.3.5
Submenu Logic Inputs Choice: Active High/Low
32
2.3.6
Submenu Output Relays
32
2.3.7
Submenu Group Select
33
2.3.8
Submenu Alarms
34
2.3.9
Submenu Date
35
2.4
MEASUREMENTS menu
36
2.5
METERING Menu (P127)
39
2.5.1
Submenu “Frequency”
39
2.5.2
Submenu “Currents”
40
2.5.3
Submenu “Voltages”
41
2.5.4
Submenu Powers
42
2.5.5
Submenu Energies
43
2.5.6
Plus and minus signes for power and energy calculation.
44
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
Page 2/96
User Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.6
COMMUNICATION menu
45
2.6.1
HMI submenu
45
2.6.2
COMM1 and COMM2 submenus
45
2.6.3
IEC60870-5-103 protocol additional cells
46
2.7
PROTECTION menu
47
2.7.1
Submenu [67/50/51] PHASE OC (P126 and P127 only)
47
2.7.2
Submenu [67N] E/GND
50
2.7.3
Submenu [32] DIRECTIONAL POWER (P127 only)
56
2.7.4
Submenu [32N] EARTH WATTMETRIC (P126 and P127 only)
60
2.7.5
Submenu [46] NEG SEQ OC (P126 & P127 only)
63
2.7.6
Submenu [49] Therm OL (P126 & P127 only)
64
2.7.7
Submenu [37] UNDERCURRENT PROTECTION (P126 & P127)
65
2.7.8
Submenu [59] PHASE OVERVOLTAGE Protection (P127)
66
2.7.9
Submenu [27] PHASE UNDER-VOLTAGE Protection (P127)
67
2.7.10
Submenu [59N] RESIDUAL OVERVOLTAGE Protection
68
2.7.11
Submenu [47] NEGATIVE OVERVOLTAGE Protection (P127)
68
2.7.12
Submenu [79] AUTORECLOSE (P126 & P127 only)
69
2.7.13
Submenu [81] Frequency (P127 only)
72
2.7.14
Submenu [81R] Freq. rate of change (P127 only)
72
2.8
AUTOMAT. CTRL menu
73
2.8.1
Submenu Trip Commands
73
2.8.2
Submenu Latch Relays
74
2.8.3
Submenu Blocking Logic
75
2.8.4
Submenu Inrush Blocking Logic (P127 only)
76
2.8.5
Submenu Logic Select
77
2.8.6
Submenu Outputs Relays
77
2.8.7
Submenu Inputs
80
2.8.8
Submenu Broken Conductor (P126 & P127 only)
82
2.8.9
Submenu Cold Load PU (P126 & P127 only)
83
2.8.10
Submenu 51V (Overcurrent controlled by voltage transformer control (P127 only))
84
2.8.11
Submenu VT Supervision (P127 only)
84
2.8.12
Submenu CT Supervision (P127)
85
2.8.13
Submenu Circuit Breaker Fail (P126 & P127 only)
85
2.8.14
Submenu Circuit Breaker Supervision (P126 & P127 only)
86
2.8.15
Submenu SOTF (Switch on to fault) (P126 & P127 only)
87
2.8.16
Submenu Logic Equations (P126 & P127 only)
88
2.8.17
Submenu Comm. Order delay (P127 only)
90
2.9
RECORDS menu
91
2.9.1
Submenu CB Monitoring (P126 & P127 only)
91
2.9.2
Submenu Disturb Record
94
User Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
Page 3/96
3.
WIRING
95
3.1
Auxiliary Power Supply
95
3.2
Current Measurement Inputs
95
3.3
Digital Inputs
95
3.4
Output Relays
95
3.5
Communication
95
3.5.1
RS485 Rear Communication Port
95
3.5.2
RS232 Front Communication Port
96
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 4/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
BLANK PAGE
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.
Page 5/96
PRESENTATION OF MiCOM P125, P126 AND P127 RELAYS
MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 are fully numerical relays designed to perform electrical
protection and control functions.
The following sections describe content and structure of the menu.
The five keys situated in the middle of the MiCOM relay front panel are dedicated to set
parameters.
With the keys it is possible to move in the direction indicated to the various levels
of the menus. The key validates the settings modification.
The two keys and c are dedicated to acknowledging/clearing and displaying/reading of
data. For example if successive alarms are to be displayed, press on key c.
The alarms are presented in reverse order of their detection (the most recent alarm first, the
oldest last). The user can either acknowledge and clear each alarm from the LCD by using
or go to the end of the ALARM menu and carry out a general acknowledgement.
1.1
User Interface
1.1.1
Relay Overview
The next figures show the P125 and P126/P127 relays.
P125
P126/P127
As can be seen in above figures the case width dimensions differ between the P125 and the
P126/P127.
The table shows the case size for the relays.
Version
Height
Depth
Width
Type P125
4U (177mm)
226mm
20 TE
Type P126 & P127
4U (177mm)
226mm
30 TE
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 6/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
The hinged covers at the top and bottom of the relay are shown closed. Extra physical
protection for the front panel can be provided by an optional transparent front cover; this
allows read only access to the relays settings and data but does not affect the relays IP
rating. When full access to the relay keypad is required to edit the settings, the transparent
cover can be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom hinged covers are open. If
the lower cover is secured with a wire seal, this will need to be removed. Using the side
flanges of the transparent cover, pull the bottom edge away from the relay front panel until it
is clear of the seal tab. The cover can then be moved vertically down to release the two
fixing lugs from their recesses in the front panel.
1.1.2
Front Panel Description
MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relay front panel allows the user to easily enter relay settings,
display measured values and alarms and to clearly display the status of the relay.
FIGURE 1: MiCOM P125, P126 AND P127 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION
The front panel of the relay has three separate sections:
1.
The LCD display and the keypad,
2.
The LEDs
3.
The two zones under the upper and lower flaps.
NOTE:
Starting from Hardware 5, there is no need of battery in the front of the
relay. Indeed, disturbance, fault and event records are stored on a
flash memory card that doesn’t need to be backed up by a battery.
The compartment is fitted with a blanking cover.
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.1.3
Page 7/96
LCD display and keypad description
The front panel components are shown below. The front panel functionality is identical for
the P125, P126 & P127 relays.
1.1.3.1
LCD display
In the front panel, a liquid crystal display (LCD) displays settings, measured values and
alarms. Data is accessed through a menu structure.
The LCD has two lines, with sixteen characters each. A back-light is activated when a key is
pressed and will remain lit for five minutes after the last key press. This allows the user to be
able to read the display in most lighting conditions.
1.1.3.2
Keypad
The keypad has seven keys divided into two groups:
•
Two keys located just under the screen (keys and c).
Keys and c are used to read and acknowledge alarms. To display successive alarms,
press key c. Alarms are displayed in reverse order of their detection (the most recent alarm
first, the oldest alarm last). To acknowledge the alarms, the user can either acknowledge
each alarm using or go to the end of the ALARM menu and acknowledge all the alarms
at the same time.
When navigating through submenus, key is also used to come back to the head line of
the corresponding menu.
NOTE:
•
To acknowledge a relay latched refer to the corresponding submenu
section.
Four main keys , , , located in the middle of the front panel.
They are used to navigate through the different menus and submenus and to do the setting
of the relay.
The key is used to validate a choice or a value (modification of settings).
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 8/96
1.1.4
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
LEDs
The LED labels on the front panel are by default written in English, however the user has
self-adhesive labels available with MiCOM relays on which it is possible to write using a ball
point pen.
The top four LEDs indicate the status of the relay (Trip condition, alarm LED, equipment
failure, auxiliary supply).
The four lower LEDs are freely programmable by the user and can be assigned to display a
threshold crossing for example (available for all models) or to show the status of the logic
inputs.The description of each one of these eight LEDs located in the left side of the front
view is given hereafter (numbered from the top to bottom from 1 to 8):
LED 1
LED 8
LED 1
P3951ENa
Colour: RED
Label: Trip
LED 1 indicates when a trip command has been issued by the relay to the cut-off element
(circuit breaker, protection trip). This LED copies the trip command issued to the trip output
relay contact (RL1). In its normal state the LED is not lit. It is illuminated as soon as a trip
order is issued. It is reset when the associated alarm is acknowledged.
LED 2
Colour: ORANGE
Label: Alarm
LED 2 indicates that an alarm has been registered by MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays.
The alarms are either threshold crossings (instantaneous) or tripping orders (time delayed).
The LED will flash until the alarms have been accepted (read key), after which the LED will
change to constant illumination. It will extinguish when the alarms have been cleared (clear
key) and the trip cause is reset.
LED 3
Colour: ORANGE
Label: Warning
LED 3 is dedicated to the internal alarms of MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays.
When a "non critical" internal alarm (i.e. a communication fault) is detected, the LED flashes
continuously. When the fault is classed as "critical", the LED is illuminated continuously. The
LED only extinguishes after the cause that provoked this fault has been removed (i.e. repair
of the module, disappearance of the fault).
LED 4
Colour: GREEN
Label: Healthy
LED 4 indicates that MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays are in correct working order and
the auxiliary power supply is present.
LED 5 to 8
Colour: RED
Label: Aux.1 to 4.
These LEDs can be programmed by the user on the basis of information on available
thresholds (instantaneous and time-delayed). The user selects the information he wishes to
see associates with each LED from the menu element (Logic OR). Each LED illuminates
when the associated information is valid. The extinguishing of each LED is linked to the
acknowledgement of the associated alarms.
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.1.5
Description of the two areas under the top and bottom flaps
1.1.5.1
Relay Identification
Page 9/96
Under the top hinged cover there is an adhesive paper label that contains the relay model
number, serial number, sensitive earth current range, rating information and the Cortec code
for ordering etc.
Each item on the label is described below:
P127CAF11: CORTEC code
This code allows the user to identify
the characteristics of the relay.
No.: 0000000: Serial number
Cde: 00000/000: Reference to the
purchasing order.
These numbers are needed when
contacting Schneider Electric in case of
problems.
Un = 57 – 130V: Voltage input range.
Modbus: Communication protocol of the
RS485 communication port situated on
the rear of the relay.
0.002 Ien: Sensitivity of the earth fault
current (available are three sensitivity
levels).
Ua = 48-150V DC: Auxiliary power
supply range. In this example, the
power supply must be a DC voltage.
1.1.5.2
Battery compartment (no longer used) and Communication Port
Under the bottom hinged cover of the relay there was a battery compartment to hold the
½AA size battery, which is no longer used. Starting from Hardware 5, disturbance, fault and
event records are stored on a flash memory card that doesn’t need to be backed up by a
battery. Therefore battery in the front compartment of the relay are no longer needed. The
battery compartment is fitted with a blanking cover.
Next to the (empty) battery compartment there is a 9-pin female D-type socket, which can be
used to communicate with a local PC (up to 15m distance) via a RS232 serial data link cable
(SK1 port).
1.1.5.3
The USB/RS232 cable (to power and set the relay)
The USB/RS232 cable is able to perform the following functions:
1.
It is able to power the relay from its front port. This allows the user to view or modify
data on the relay even when the auxiliary power supply of the relay has failed or when
the relay is not connected to any power supply. The USB port of the PC supplies the
power necessary to energize the relay. This lasts as long as the battery of the PC can
last.
2.
It provides an USB / RS 232 interface between the MiCOM relay and the PC. This
allows the user to be able to change the setting of the relay using a PC with its USB
port.
It eases the use of the relay allowing the retrieval of records and disturbance files for
example when the auxiliary supply has failed or is not available.
The associated driver (supplied with the relay) needs to be installed in the PC. For more
information , please refer to MiCOM E2 User Manual.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 10/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.1.6
Description of rear Terminal Block for P125, P126 & P127
1.1.6.1
Description of rear Terminal Block for P125
Case earth
1
2
29
30
3
4
31
32
5
6
33
34
7
8
35
36
9
10
37
38
11
12
39
40
13
14
41
42
15
16
43
44
17
18
45
46
19
20
47
48
21
22
49
50
23
24
51
52
25
26
53
54
27
28
55
56
Module terminal blocks
viewed from rear
(with integral case earth link)
P0071ENb
Output 5
1
2
Common
output 1
Case earth
connection
29
30
Terminal
RS485
Common
output 5
3
4
Output 1
(NC)
RS485 terminal
31
32
RS485 +
Output 6
5
6
Output1
(NO)
Vaux
+ terminal
33
34
Vaux
– terminal
Common
output 6
7
8
Common
output 2
Relay failed
(WD)
35
36
Common
"Watchdog
"
9
10
Output 2
(NC)
Relay healthy
(WD)
37
38
11
12
Output 2
(NO)
Residual volt.
input
39
40
13
14
Output 3
41
42
15
16
Common
output 3
43
44
Input 3
+ terminal
17
18
Output 4
45
46
Input 3
– terminal
19
20
Common
output 4
47
48
Input 4
+ terminal
21
22
Input 1
+ terminal
49
50
Input 4
– terminal
23
24
Input 1
– terminal
51
52
25
26
Input 2
+ terminal
53
54
27
28
Input 2
– terminal
55
56
Current input
(5A)
Current input
(1A)
Residual
volt. input
Current
input (5A)
Current
input (1A)
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.1.6.2
Page 11/96
Description of rear Terminal Block for P126
Case earth
57
58
1
2
29
30
59
60
3
4
31
32
61
62
5
6
33
34
63
64
7
8
35
36
65
66
9
10
37
38
67
68
11
12
39
40
69
70
13
14
41
42
71
72
15
16
43
44
73
74
17
18
45
46
75
76
19
20
47
48
77
78
21
22
49
50
79
80
23
24
51
52
81
82
25
26
53
54
83
84
27
28
55
56
Module terminal blocks
viewed from rear
(with integral case earth link)
P0072ENb
Input 7
+ terminal
57
58
Input 6
+ terminal
Output 5
1
2
Common
output 1
Case earth
connection
29
30
Terminal
RS485
Input 7
– terminal
59
60
Input 6
– terminal
Common
output 5
3
4
Output 1
(NC)
RS485 terminal
31
32
RS485 +
61
62
Output 6
5
6
Output1
(NO)
Vaux
+ terminal
33
34
Vaux
– terminal
63
64
Common
output 6
7
8
Common
output 2
Relay failed
(WD)
35
36
Common
"Watchdog"
65
66
Common
output 7
9
10
Output 2
(NC)
Relay
healthy
(WD)
37
38
67
68
Output 7
11
12
Output 2
(NO)
39
40
69
70
Common
output 8
13
14
Output 3
Current input 41
IA (5A)
42
Current
input IA (5A)
71
72
Output 8
15
16
Common
output 3
Current input 43
IB (5A)
44
Current
input IB (5A)
73
74
Input 3
+ terminal
17
18
Output 4
Current input 45
IC(5A)
46
Current
input IC(5A)
75
76
Input 3
– terminal
19
20
Common
output 4
Current input 47
Ie (5A)
48
Current
input Ie(5A)
77
78
Input 4
+ terminal
21
22
Input 1
+ terminal
Current input 49
IA (1A)
50
Current
input IA (1A)
79
80
Input 4
– terminal
23
24
Input 1
– terminal
Current input 51
IB (1A)
52
Current
input IB (1A)
81
82
Input 5
+ terminal
25
26
Input 2
+ terminal
Current input 53
IC (1A)
54
Current
input IC (1A)
83
84
Input 5
– terminal
27
28
Input 2
– terminal
Current input 55
Ie (1A)
56
Current
input Ie (1A)
Voltage
input Vr
Voltage
input Vr
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 12/96
1.1.6.3
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Description of rear Terminal Block for P127
Case earth
Module terminal blocks
viewed from rear
(with integral case earth link)
P0072ENc
Input 7
+ terminal
57
58
Input 6
+ terminal
Output 5
1
2
Common
output 1
Case earth
connection
29
30
Terminal
RS485
Input 7
– terminal
59
60
Input 6
– terminal
Common
output 5
3
4
Output 1
(NC)
RS485 terminal
31
32
RS485 +
Input 8
61
(1)
+ terminal
62
Input COM
(1)
– terminal
Output 6
5
6
Output1
(NO)
Vaux
+ terminal
33
34
Vaux
– terminal
Input A
63
(1)
+ terminal
64
Input 9
(1)
+ terminal
Common
output 6
7
8
Common
output 2
Relay failed
(WD)
35
36
Common
"Watchdog"
Input C
65
(1)
+ terminal
66
Input B
(1)
+ terminal
Common
output 7
9
10
Output 2
(NC)
Relay
37
healthy (WD)
38
Current I1
67
meas. 1A/5A
68
Current I1
meas. 1A/5A
Output 7
11
12
Output 2
(NO)
39
40
Voltage
input VA
69
70
Voltage input
VA
Common
output 8
13
14
Output 3
Current input 41
IA (5A)
42
Current
input IA (5A)
Voltage
input VB
71
72
Voltage input
VB
Output 8
15
16
Common
output 3
Current input 43
IB (5A)
44
Current
input IB (5A)
Voltage
input VC/Vr
73
74
Voltage
input VC/Vr
Input 3
+ terminal
17
18
Output 4
Current input 45
IC(5A)
46
Current
input IC(5A)
Current I2
75
meas. 1A/5A
76
Current I2
meas. 1A/5A
Input 3
– terminal
19
20
Common
output 4
Current input 47
Ie (5A)
48
Current
input Ie(5A)
Case earth
77
(2)
connection
78
RS485-2
(2)
term. Z
Input 4
+ terminal
21
22
Input 1
+ terminal
Current input 49
IA (1A)
50
Current
input IA (1A)
RS485-2
79
(2)
– terminal
80
RS485-2
(2)
+ terminal
Input 4
– terminal
23
24
Input 1
– terminal
Current input 51
IB (1A)
52
Current
input IB (1A)
IRIG-B mod 81
(2)
– terminal
82
IRIG-B mod
(2)
+ terminal
Input 5
+ terminal
25
26
Input 2
+ terminal
Current input 53
IC (1A)
54
Current
input IC (1A)
IRIG-B dem 83
(2)
– terminal
84
IRIG-B dem
(2)
+ terminal
Input 5
– terminal
27
28
Input 2
– terminal
Current input 55
Ie (1A)
56
Current
input Ie (1A)
(3)
(3)
(1)
(3)
(3)
Available only for P127 “5 opto-inputs” option (product codes P127xx1 or P127xx3).
“Input COM – terminal” is the common terminal for inputs 8 to 12.
(2)
Available only for P127 “IRIG-B and 2nd rear port option” option (product codes P127xx2
or P127xx3).
The “81” and “82” terminals are used to connect the optional BNC adaptor. This one must
be plugged according to the “+” and “GND” positions marked on the adaptor.
(3)
With I1 = IA or IB or IC and I2 = IA or IB or IC. Available only for P127 with additional
measurement CT option (product codes P127xx4, P127xx5, P127xx6 or P127xx7).
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.2
Page 13/96
Menu structure
The relay’s menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each setting in the menu is referred to
as a cell, and each cell in the menu may be accessed by reference to a row and column
address. The settings are arranged so that each column contains related settings, for
example all of the disturbance recorder settings are contained within the same column. As
shown in the figure, the top row of each column contains the heading that describes the
settings contained within that column. Movement between the columns of the menu can only
be made at the column heading level. A complete list of all of the menu settings is given in
the Menu Content tables (P12y/EH HI section).
Column header
OP
param
Config.
Measur.
Comm.
Protections
Autom. Ctrl
Records
Column
data
settings
P0106ENb
MENU STRUCTURE
1.3
Password
1.3.1
Password Protection
Password protection is applicable to most of the relay settings, especially to the selection of
the various alarm thresholds, trip thresholds, communication parameters, allocation of logic
inputs and outputs.
The password consists of four capital characters. When leaving the factory, the password is
set to AAAA. The user can define any combination of four characters.
Should the password be lost or forgotten, modification of the stored parameters is blocked. It
is then necessary to contact the manufacturer or his agent and a stand-by password specific
to the relay concerned may be obtained.
The programming mode is indicated with the letter "P" on the right hand side of the display
on each menu heading. The letter "P" remains present as long as the password is active
(5 minutes if there is no action on the keypad).
1.3.2
Password Entry
The input of the password is requested as soon as a modification of a parameter is made for
any one of the six/eight menus and the submenus. The user enters each of the 4 characters
and then validates the entire password with .
After 5 seconds, the display returns to the point of the preceding menu.
If no key is pressed inside of 5 minutes, the password is deactivated. A new password
request is associated with any subsequent parameter modification.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
Page 14/96
1.3.3
User Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Changing the Password
To change an active password, go to the OP. PARAMETERS menu and then to the
Password submenu. Enter the current password and validate. Then press and enter the
new password character by character and validate the new password using .
The message NEW PASSWORD OK is displayed to indicate that the new password has
been accepted.
1.3.4
Change of Setting Invalidation
The procedure to modify a setting is shown in the next part of this document.
If during this action it occurs the need to get back to the old setting it is necessary push the
key before validating the setting change. After this action the following message will
appear on the LCD for some seconds and the old setting will be maintained.
UPGRADE
CANCEL
1.4
Displays of Alarm & Warning Messages
Alarm messages are displayed directly on the front panel LCD. They have priority over the
default current value. As soon as an alarm situation is detected by the relay (threshold
crossing for example), the associated message is displayed on the MiCOM relay front panel
LCD and the LED Alarm (LED 2) lights up.
The alarm and warning messages are classed as follows:
– Alarm messages generated by the electrical power network.
– Warning messages caused by hardware or software faults from the relay.
1.4.1
Electrical Network Alarms
Any crossing of a threshold (instantaneous or time delay) generates an "electrical network
alarm". The involved threshold is indicated. Regarding the phase thresholds, the phase
designation (A, B or C) is also displayed.
If several alarms are triggered, they are all stored in their order of appearance and presented
on the LCD in reverse order of their detection (the most recent alarm first, the oldest alarm
last). Each alarm message is numbered and the total stored is shown.
The user can read all the alarm messages by using c.
The user acknowledges and clears the alarm messages from the LCD by using .
The user can acknowledge each alarm message one by one or all by going to the end of the
list to acknowledge, and clear, all the alarm messages by using .
The control of the ALARM LED (LED 2) is directly assigned to the status of the alarm
messages stored in the memory.
If one or several messages are NOT READ and NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the ALARM LED
(LED 2) flashes.
If all the messages have been READ but NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the ALARM LED (LED 2)
lights up continuously.
If all the messages have been ACKNOWLEDGED, and cleared, if the cause was reset, the
ALARM LED (LED 2) is extinguished.
1.4.2
Relay Hardware or Software Warning Messages
Any software or hardware fault internal to MiCOM relay generates a "hardware/software
alarm" that is stored in memory as a "Hardware Alarm". If several hardware alarms are
detected they are all stored in their order of appearance. The warning messages are
presented on the LCD in reverse order of their detection (the most recent first and the oldest
last). Each warning message is numbered and the total stored is shown.
The user can read all warning messages by using c, without entering the password.
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 15/96
The acknowledgement, and clearing, of a warning message caused by internal relay
hardware or software faults is not possible. A warning message can only be made to
disappear if the cause of the fault has been removed.
The control of the WARNING LED (LED 3) is directly assigned to the status of the warning
messages stored in the memory:
The Watch Dog relay controls the correct operation of the protection and automation
function. This relay fault “RL0 relay” is activated if the following functions or checks are
faulty:
−
microprocessor operation,
−
power supply check,
−
reconstituted internal power supply check,
−
heating of a circuit board component monitoring,
−
analog channel monitoring (acquisition sampling),
−
programm execution monitoring,
−
communication ports monitoring.
If the internal hardware or software fault is major (i.e. the relay cannot perform protection
functions), the WARNING LED (LED 3) lights up continuously.
If the internal hardware or software fault is minor (i.e. a communication failure that has no
influence on the protection and automation functions), the WARNING LED (LED 3) will flash.
Warning messages caused by internal hardware or software faults are:
< CALIBRATION ERROR >>
<< CLOCK ERROR >>
<< DEFAULT SETTINGS (*) >>
<< SETTING ERROR (**) >>
<< CT ERROR >>
<< COMMUNIC. ERROR >>
<< WATCH DOG >>
<< STAT RESET>>
(*) DEFAULT SETTINGS: Each time the relay is powered ON it will check its memory
contents to determine whether the settings are set to the factory defaults. If the relay detects
that the default settings are loaded an alarm is raised. The ALARM LED (YELLOW) will light
up and the Watch Dog contact will be activated.
Only one parameter in the relay's menu needs to be changed to suppress these messages
and to reset the watch dog. This alarm is only an indication to the user that the relay has its
default settings applied.
(**) SETTING ERROR: Should the CPU fails to get correctly store data during a setting
change, a "HARDWARE" ALARM will appear on the LCD display followed by "SETTING
ERROR" message (when pushing on the button). In addition, the ALARM LED (YELLOW)
will light up and the Watch Dog contact will be activated To reset this alarm it is necessary to
power ON and OFF the relay. Following this, the last unsuccessful setting change will then
need to be re-applied. If the alarm persists, i.e. the "SETTING ERROR" alarm is still
displayed, please contact Schneider Electric Customer Care Center for advice and
assistance.
Possible software alarm messages are:
I>
instantaneous 1st threshold directional/non directional overcurrent
tI>
time delayed 1st threshold directional/non directional overcurrent
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 16/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
For the I> and tI> a particular attention has to be taken.
The P126 & P127 are able to identify the phase where the fault occurs, and the relevant
alarm messages are shown in the below listed table.
Menu ALARMS
I> PHASE
tI> PHASE
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
C
C
C
C
A
AB
AB
A
AB
AB
A
AB
ABC
A
AB
ABC
ABC
ABC
ABC
ABC
ABC
ABC
ABC
ABC
ABC
ABC
The following messages are sorted in alphabetical order
The following table gives the list of alarms (sorted in alphabetical order) with description and
type of acknowledgement. The five types of acknowledgement of alarm are:
−
Man = alarm must be acknowledged manually (front panel or communication port),
−
Self = self reset when time delayed alarm occurs (i.e. I> alarm is acknowledged when
tI> occurs),
−
Inhib = the alarm can be inhibited by setting (“CONFIGURATION/Alarms” menu),
−
Auto = alarm is automatically acknowledged when the event disappears.
−
manual reset using “ORDERS / Record Reset” menu.
Alarm
Description
Type
ΣAmps(n)
total Total measured current broken by CB is higher
than the value set in AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB
Supervision menu.
man
Recloser[79]
Blockedint.
locked
[79] ext. locked
re-close (internal or external) blocking signal.
Generated by:
– external breaker failure signal (ex. SF6 low).
– signal provided via logic input assigned to the CB
Fail function in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu.
– external blocking signal. External blocking can be set
by the user in the PROTECTION G1 / [79]
AUTORECLOSE/Ext Block menu. This blocking signal
is provided via a logic input assigned to the Block_79
function in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu.
– definitive trip.
– breaker operating time (or tripping time) longer than
the set time, but only if the function is enabled.
– Trip of protection (See AP document for further
information)
auto
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 17/96
Alarm
Description
Type
Brkn.Cond.
Broken conductor signal. I2/I1 element threshold
exceeded for longer than tBC; tBC is settable in the
AUTOMAT. CTRL/Broken Conductor menu.
man
CB Fail
Circuit breaker failure signal; the CB does not trip on
Tbf (time-out). tBF is settable in the AUTOMAT.
CTRL/CB Fail menu.
man
CB Open NB
number of circuit breaker operation higher that the
value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision
menu.
man
Conflict Recloser
configuration conflict of the re-close function. This
signal is generated by:
– None digital input assigned to the position of the CB
52a
– no output relay assigned to the CB Close function
(AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output Relays menu ).
– None protection is assigned to the trip command
– no re-close cycle assigned to the protection
functions (PROTECTION G1/ [79] Autoreclose menu ).
auto
CTS
Current Transformer Supervision alarm
auto
dF/dt1 to dF/dt6
Rates of change of frequency (1 to 6).
man
EQU. A to EQU.
H
Equation logic A, B, C, D, E, F, G or H set
inhib
F OUT
Frequency out of range
man
F1 to F6
Instantaneous 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th frequency
threshold
man & self
I<
alarm threshold undercurrent fault
man & self
I>>
2nd alarm threshold directional/non directional
overcurrent
man & self
I>>>
3rd alarm threshold directional/non directional
overcurrent
man & self
I2>
1st alarm threshold negative sequence overcurrent
man & self
I2>>
I2>>>
nd
man & self
rd
man & self
st
2 alarm threshold negative sequence overcurrent
3 alarm threshold negative sequence current
Ie>
1 alarm threshold directional/non directional earth
fault
man & self
Ie>>
2nd alarm threshold directional/non directional earth
fault
man & self
Ie>>>
3rd alarm threshold directional/non directional earth
fault
man & self
Ie_d>
First derived earth overcurrent threshold
man & self
Ie_d>>
Second derived earth overcurrent threshold
man & self
Latched Relays
at least one output relay is latched.
auto
Maintenance
mode
The relay is in Maintenance mode
auto
P<
1st alarm threshold active underpower
man & self
P<<
P>
nd
man & self
st
man & self
2 alarm threshold active underpower
1 alarm threshold active overpower
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 18/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Alarm
Description
Type
P>>
2nd alarm threshold active overpower
man & self
st
Pe/IeCos>
1 alarm threshold wattmetric/IeCos earth fault
man & self
Pe/IeCos>>
2nd alarm threshold wattmetric/IeCos earth fault
man & self
st
Q<
1 alarm threshold reactive underpower
man & self
Q<<
2nd alarm threshold reactive underpower
man & self
st
Q>
1 alarm threshold reactive overpower
man & self
Q>>
2nd alarm threshold reactive overpower
man & self
Recloser
Successful
successful re-close signal. Indicates that the fault has
been cleared upon circuit breaker re-closure, and has
not re- appeared before expiry of the reclaim time.
auto
SF6 Low
faulty circuit breaker signal at assignable logic input
(set in AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu).
auto
t U<
1st trip threshold undervoltage
inhib
nd
t U<<
2 trip threshold undervoltage
inhib
tAux1 to tAuxC
timer t Aux1 (to tAux C) associated with logic input
Aux1 (tAux2, 3…C) Alarm occurs when the timer is
expired and for any output relay assignement
inhib
tF1 to tF6
Time delayed 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th frequency
threshold
man
Thermal Alarm
threshold thermal alarm
man
Thermal
Overload
thermal overload trip
man
tI<
trip threshold undercurrent fault
man
tI>
1st trip threshold directional/non directional overcurrent
man
nd
tI>>
2 trip threshold directional/non directional overcurrent
man
tI>>>
3rd trip threshold directional/non directional overcurrent
man
st
tI2>
1 trip threshold negative sequence overcurrent
man
tI2>>
2nd trip threshold negative sequence current
man
rd
tI2>>>
3 trip threshold negative sequence current
man
tIe>
1st trip threshold directional/non directional earth fault
man
nd
tIe>>
2 trip threshold directional/non directional earth fault
man
tIe>>>
3rd trip threshold directional/non directional earth fault
man
tIe_d>
Time delayed first derived earth overcurrent threshold
man
tIe_d>>
Time delayed second derived earth overcurrent
threshold
man
Toperating CB
operating Operating (or tripping) time of the circuit
breaker longer than the value set in the AUTOMAT.
CTRL/CB Supervision menu.
man
tP<
1st trip threshold active underpower
man
tP<<
tP>
tP>>
tPe/IeCos>
nd
man
st
man
nd
man
st
man & self
2 trip threshold active underpower
1 trip threshold active overpower
2 trip threshold active overpower
1 trip threshold wattmetric/IeCos earth fault
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 19/96
Alarm
Description
Type
tPe/IeCos>>
2nd trip threshold wattmetric/IeCos earth fault
man & self
st
tQ<
1 trip threshold reactive underpower
man
tQ<<
2nd trip threshold reactive underpower
man
st
tQ>
1 trip threshold reactive overpower
man
tQ>>
2nd trip threshold reactive overpower
man
Trip Circuit
Super.
Circuit breaker trip circuit failure for longer than the
supervision timer t SUP settable in the
AUTOMAT.CTRL/CB Supervision menu or RL1
energised (trip circuit supervision not enabled).
man
tU>
1st trip threshold overvoltage
man
tU>>
2nd trip threshold overvoltage
man
tUe>>>>
trip threshold residual overvoltage
man
U<
1st alarm threshold undervoltage
inhib & self
nd
U<<
2 alarm threshold undervoltage
inhib & self
U>
1st alarm threshold overvoltage
man & self
nd
U>>
2 alarm threshold overvoltage
man & self
Ue>>>>
alarm threshold residual overvoltage
man & self
VTS
VTS alarm (internal VT fault, overloading, or faults on
the interconnecting wiring) if enable (VT
Supervision/VTS Alarm? = yes).
auto
1.5
General characteristics
1.5.1
Analogue Inputs
The analogue inputs for each relay are shown in the following table:
Type of Analogue Inputs
MiCOM
P125
Phase current inputs (Protection CTs)
MiCOM
P126
MiCOM
P127
3
3
Optional phase current inputs
(Measurements CTs)
2
Earth current inputs (high, medium, low
sensitivity by Cortec code)
1
1
1
Residual voltage input
1
1
1/0
Phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage
inputs
Total analogue inputs
2/3
2
5
7
Following is a description of the voltage inputs connection for the P127 relay.
Case A
2 phase to neutral voltage inputs
1 residual voltage input
VC is then calculated as VC= – (VA+ VB)
To obtain a correct reading of the input voltage the exact voltage transformer ratio for Ve has
to be set.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
Page 20/96
User Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Case B
2 phase to phase voltage inputs
VCA is then calculated as VCA= –(VAB + VBC)
Case C
3 phase to phase voltage inputs
No residual voltage input
Ve can be calculated as Ve = (VA+ VB+ VC )/3
•
On the MiCOM P125 relays rear terminals there is one current input rated 1A and one
current input rated 5A available and one voltage input. On the MiCOM P126 relay rear
terminals there are four current inputs rated 1A and four current inputs rated 5A
available and one voltage input. On the MiCOM P127 relay rear terminals there are
four current inputs rated 1A and four current inputs rated 5A available and three
voltages input.
•
By using the Cortec code (see the appropriate section) the user can choose the
voltage range for voltage inputs for the MiCOM P125 & P126 (one input) and P127
(three inputs).
All logic outputs can be programmed to respond to any of the available control or protection
functions. Logic inputs can be assigned to various control functions.
All logic digital inputs can be programmed to respond to any of the available control or
protection functions. Their supply level is the same as the power supply selected of the relay
by Cortec. They can be supplied in A.C or D.C current by Cortec choice.
The MiCOM relays are powered either from a DC or an AC auxiliary power supply.
Any short time voltage interruption (<50ms) is filtered and regulated through the auxiliary
power supply.
The front panel enables the user to navigate through the menu to access data, change
settings, read measurements etc.
Eight LEDs on the front panel allow a clear and simple presentation of events. The various
detected alarms are stored and can be displayed on the back-lit LCD.
No Password is required to read and acknowledge (clear) these alarm messages.
On their rear terminals the MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays have a standard RS485 port
available. The user can choose, by ordering, the communication protocol ModBus RTU, IEC
60870-5-103 or DNP3 (when available).
Using the communication channel RS485, all stored information (measurements, alarms,
and parameters) can be read and the settings can be modified if this functionality is allowed
by the chosen protocol.
Evaluation and modification of this data can be carried out on site with a normal PC and the
appropriate Schneider Electric software.
RS485 based communication allows MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays to be directly linked
to a digital control system.
All the available data is then placed at the disposal of the supervisor and can be processed
either local or remotely.
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.
Page 21/96
MENU
The menu for the MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays is divided into the following sections.
To access these menus from the default display press .
To return to the default display from these menus or submenus press .
DEFAULT DISPLAY
OP PARAMETERS
ORDERS
CONFIGURATION
MEASUREMENTS
METERING
When displayed
COMMUNICATION
PROTECTION Gx
x = 1,2 or 1 to 8 (P127)
AUTOMAT. CTRL
RECORDS
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 22/96
2.1
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
OP PARAMETERS menu
To gain access to the OP PARAMETERS menu from the default display, press .
OP PARAMETERS
Heading of OP PARAMETERS menu.
To gain access to the menu content, press .
Password
Entry of the password to be able to modify the MiCOM
relay settings and parameters (see § 1.3).
****
Password
AAAA
WARNING:
The password entry is made letter by letter, using or
to go up or down in the alphabet. After each letter,
press to enter the following letter. At the end press to validate the password. If the password is correct, the
following message is displayed on the LCD:
PASSWORD OK.
The password is initially set in the factory to AAAA.
NO SETTING CHANGES DONE EITHER LOCALLY (THROUGH RS232)
OR REMOTELY (THROUGH RS485) WILL BE ALLOWED DURING THE 5
FIRST MINUTES FOLLOWING A CHANGE OF PASSWORD.
Language
ENGLISH
Description
P125-2
Reference
MiCOM
Indicates the language used in the display.
Indicates the type of relay, the near number is the sensitivity
for the earth input circuit: from 0.1 to 40 Ien, from 0.01 to 8
Ien and from 0.002 to 1 Ien
Displays the reference number that lists the equipment
associated with the relay.
Software Version
xx.x
Displays the software version downloaded
Frequency
Nominal value of the network frequency. Select either 50 or
60 Hz.
50 Hz
Active Group
1
Input
Status
7654321
0110110
Input
Status
CBA98
00000
Relay
Status
87654321
01011101
Date
Time
10/11/01
13:57:44
This window displays the active protection and automatic
features group.The display value can be 1 or 2 for
P125/P126 and 1 to 8 for P127.
Displays the status of the logic Inputs.
Logic inputs are numbered from 1 to 4 for P125 and 1 to 7
for P126 and P127. When the indicated status is
- 0 the logic input is inactive;
* 1 the logic input is active.
Displays the status of the logic Inputs 8 to 12, only for P127
“5 opto-inputs” option (product codes P127xx1 or P127xx3)
Displays the status of the logic outputs.
Logic output relays are numbered from 1 to 6 for P125 and
1 to 8 for P126 and P127.
When the indicated status is:
- 1 the logic output relay is active;
- 0 the logic output relay is inactive.
To activate an unlatching operation, the password is
requested.
NOTE: The Watch-dog output (RL0) is not displayed in the
output status menu.
Displays the date (10/11/01 = November 10th 2001).
Displays the time (13:57:44 = 1:57:44 pm).
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.2
Page 23/96
ORDERS menu
This menu gives the possibility:
− to send open or close orders to the Circuit Breakers from the front panel. Open and close
orders are written in the event file. This action generates a “Control Trip” alarm, which can
be inhibited. If inhibited, the “trip” LED and the “Alarm” LED are not lit if the relay RL1 is
ordered by a control trip information (affected to an input in the “configuration/inputs”
submenu).
− to start a disturbance recording from the protection relay.
ORDERS
Heading of the ORDERS menu
Record reset
“Record reset” clears LEDs, alarms, counters,
disturbance records, fault records, disturbance records
triggers, event records, measurements values (maximum
phase currents), CB monitoring records (“CB opening
time” and “CB closing time” values).
No
The reset order does not reset the latched trip output
relay RL1 or the latched output relays.
To change the setting, enter the password (if necessary).
In the “confirmation ?” cell, select Yes to apply the reset.
Open Order
Close Order
Disturb rec start
No
Sends manually an open order from the local control
panel. This order is permanently assigned to the Trip
output relay (selected with “automatic control/output
relay” menu).
Setting range: No, Yes. (the “confirmation ?” cell will be
displayed after setting change)
No
Sends manually a close order from the local control
panel: RL2 to RL8 (if configured)
Setting range: No, Yes (the “confirmation ?” cell will be
displayed after setting change)
No
Trigs a disturbance recording from the relays HMI.
Setting range: No, Yes (the “confirmation ?” cell will be
displayed after setting change).
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 24/96
2.3
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
CONFIGURATION menu
The following parameters can be set in the CONFIGURATION menu:
•
labels used to display currents and voltages,
•
ratios for the earth and phase current transformers (CT)
•
ratios for the phase measurements current transformers (CTm)
•
ratios for the residual voltage and phase voltage transformers (VT),
•
LEDs 5 to 8 assigned to several functions,
•
The polarisation of the digital inputs by voltage present or lacking,
•
The possibility to have the trip relay normally ON or OFF,
•
The choice to enable alarms functionality as well as self reset on trip or instantaneous
protection or other function,
•
By the maintenance way to drive the output relays,
•
To set the management date for the network in using.
The submenus are:
CONFIGURATION
Transfo. ratio
Led 5
Led 6
Led 7
Led 8
Inputs
configuration
Output
relays
Group
Select
Alarms
Date
General
options
(1)
(1)
P126 and P127 only
To gain access to the CONFIGURATION menu from the default display, press followed
by until the desired submenu header is displayed.
2.3.1
Submenu General Options
The following submenu displays the connection mode only for the P127 and the default and
phase rotation display only for the P126.The default display is fixed to IN and there is no VT
connection setting choice.
CONFIGURATION
Heading of CONFIGURATION menu.
General Options
Heading of General Options submenu (1).
VT Connection
2Vpp+Vr
P127 only
Selection of the VT connection type (3Vpn, 2Vpp+Vr, 2Vpn+Vr).
3Vpn = 3 Phase-Neutral connection
2Vpp+Vr = two phase to phase plus an open delta connection
2Vpn+Vr = two phase to neutral plus an open delta connection
See § 2.3.2 to select VTs configuration
VT Protection
Protect P–N
P127 only, visible only if VT connection is “2Vpn+Vr” or
“3Vpn”.
Selection of the protection type: Phase – Phase or Phase Neutral
Setting choice “Protect P-N”, “Protect P-P”
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Phase rotation
A-B-C
CTm1 phase ?
CTm2 phase ?
Page 25/96
P126 and P127 only
Choose the phase rotation between either A-B-C or A-C-B.
none
P127 only
Configuration the first measurement CT phase: select the
phase physically connected to CTm1.
(Setting choices: none, IA, IB, IC)
none
P127 only
Configuration the second measurement CT phase: select
the phase physically connected to CTm2.
(Setting choices: none, IA, IB, IC)
Quadrant conv ?
Quadrant 1
P127 only
Configuration of the active and reactive power quadrant
according to the following diagram.
(Setting choices: 1 to 4)
Im (+)
Quadrant 1
Quadrant 2
V
Re (–)
Re (+)
I
Quadrant 3
Quadrant 4
Im (–)
Default Displays
RMS IA IB IC IN
P3976ENa
P126 and P127 only
Configuration of the default current value displayed on the
LCD panel, by selecting either Phase A (“RMS IA”), Phase
B (“RMS IB”), Phase C (“RMS IC”), Earth N (“RMS IN”) or
the four values simultaneously) (“RMS IA IB IC IN”)
If the four values are simultaneously chosen, the values will
be displayed as follows:
IA RMS current
IC RMS current
IB RMS current
IN RMS current
Setting choice: “RMS IA”, “RMS IB”, “RMS IC”, “RMS IN” or
“RMS IA IB IC IN.”
Earth Text
N
P125 only
Choose a label (displayed with the associated
measurement value or in alarms messages) for earth
Possible choices: N, o or E (modified after entering the
password)
Phases/Earth Text
L1 L2 L3 N
P126 and P127 only
Choose a label (displayed with the associated
measurement value, in alarms messages or in the default
display) for the 3 phases and earth
Possible choices: “L1 L2 L3 N”, “A B C o” or “R S T E”
(modified after entering the password)
Iam Tdd denom
P127 only, with CT connected (measurement CT option).
Set the value of IL (magnitude of the load of the system). IL
is used to calculate the Total Demand Distorsion (TDD)
(see metering menu, § 2.5.2 for detail).
Ibm Tdd denom
Icm Tdd denom
xx A
xx A
xx A
The default value is IAm, IBm or ICm value.
If only one value is entered (for instance Iam Tdd denom =
IAm), IAm will be the default value for “Ibm Tdd denom” and
“Icm Tdd denom”.
Setting Range: from 0.00% In to 200% In, step 1% In
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 26/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Prot. Freq. Block
U<
5V
Sets the voltage threshold below which frequency protection
is blocked (1).
Setting range:
– from 5 to 130V, step 0.1 (voltage input range 57 to 130V,
P127xA)
– from 20 to 480V, step 0.1V (voltage input range 220 to
480V, P127xB)
dF/dt Cycles.nb.
The dF/dt detection (rate of change of frequency) is defined
as a calculation of an average frequency variation of the
instantaneous values over a programmable number of
cycles.
This menu (1) adjusts the number of periods to calculate a
dF/dt detection.
(setting range from 1 to 200, step 1)
dF/dt Validat.nb=
Inh.Block dF/dt
>20 Hz/s
5
4
No
If Yes is selected, the measurement of the frequency blocks the
calculation when dF/dt exceeds ± 20Hz/s to avoid noise samples
(1)
in the calculation ,
No: dF/dt measurement is always used for the calculation
Setting choice: Yes or No)
Time Synchro.
IRIG-B
Sets the time synchronization mode (2).
Setting choices:
– IRIG-B, Opto input, COMM1, COMM2: time is
synchronized with the selected signal.
– Automatic: the relay scans automatically IRIG-B, opto
inputs, comm1 then comm2 to select the synchronization
signal.
IRIG B
Selects the modulated or unmodulated IRIG-B
synchronization signal (2).
Setting choice: Modulated/Demodulated
MODULATED
(1)
(2)
2.3.2
Sets the number of dF/dt detection to validate the dF/dt
fault (1).
(setting range from 1 to 12, step 1)
P127
P127 with optional functions only.
only
Voltage Connections
For the P127, it is important to select the VTs configuration in the ‘Configuration / General
Options / VT Connection” submenu, according to the relay wiring for a correct functionality of
the voltage protections, or of the three phase and earth fault directional protections.
For the P127, there are three connection schemes for the VTs (see section P12y/EN CT).
2.3.2.1
Vpn (Three phase-neutral connection):
In this configuration, the relay directly measures Ua, Ub, and Uc and calculates internally the
zero sequence voltage Ue = (1/3)[Ua+Ub+Uc]. This internal value Ue will be used to be
compared to the threshold of Ue (the Earth Overvoltage Protection threshold and to evaluate
the angle with the earth current for the earth fault directional protection). However, the Ue is
displayed in the measurement Menu as well as the earth fault current and the relevant angle
between them as IN, IN^UN.
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.3.2.2
Page 27/96
2Vpn + Vr (Two phase-neutral plus an Open Delta connection):
In this configuration, the relay directly measures Ua and Ub. The input voltage of phase C of
the relay (terminals 73-74) which is connected to the summation of the three voltage phases
is used to be compared to the Ue (The earth Overvoltage Protection function threshold). This
voltage at C input is considered as Ur and it is displayed in the measurement menu as UN.
Moreover for the phase Overvoltage and Undervoltage protection functions, the phase C
voltage value Uc is internally reconstituted using the equation:
Uc = –(Ua+Ub). This value will be compared to the U/V or O/V threshold in case of a fault in
phase C. Uc is not displayed in the measurement menu.
The reconstruction is valid if the Ur is measured from a transformer with 5 limbs; two used
for the phase voltage Ua and Uc and the others used in Open delta configuration for the Ur.
BE CAREFUL: IF THE Ur IS MEASURED FROM A SEPARATE TRANSFORMER THE
ABOVE RECONSTRUCTION IS NOT VALID AND CAN NOT BE USED.
2.3.2.3
Vpp + Vr (Two phase-phase plus an Open Delta connection)
The relay directly measures Uab and Ubc, the phase to phase (A-C) voltage value Uca is
internally reconstituted using the equation Uca=–(Uab+Ubc).
The third input of voltage of the relay (terminals 73-74) can be connected to the output of a
delta transformer or to a dedicated voltage transformer, the measured value can be used to
compare to the earth overvoltage threshold.
This voltage is displayed in the measurement menu as UN and it is designed as the earth
voltage.
The shown measurements are functions of system voltages taken at the relay inputs.
2.3.3
Submenu Transfo. Ratio
CONFIGURATION
Heading of Transfo. Ratio submenu.
Transfo. Ratio
Use to scroll and set available selections. Press
to confirm choice.
To gain access to the next window press . To gain
access to the previous window press .
5A
Displays the rated primary current of the line CT, from 1 to
9999 (1).
5A
Displays the rated secondary current of the line CT (setting
value: 1or 5) (1).
E/Gnd CT primary
5A
Displays the rated primary current of the earth CT from 1 to
9999.
E/Gnd CT sec
Displays the rated secondary current of the earth CT
(setting value: 1 or 5).
Line CT primary
Line CT sec
5A
Line VT primary
0.10 kV
Displays the rated primary voltage of the line VT (the rated
voltage input range is given by relay Cortec code) from 0.1
to 1000kV (step 0.01kV).
For the 10-480V model the setting range is from 10 to 480V,
in steps of 1V (2).
Line VT sec
Displays the rated secondary voltage of the line VT (Cortec
code) from 2 to 130V (step 0.1V)
This window is not available for the 10-480V model (2).
100.0 V
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 28/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
The two following lines are only displayed when the connection mode 2Vpp+Vr or 2Vpn+Vr
is selected.
E/Gnd VT primary
0.10 kV
Displays the rated primary voltage of the earth VT (Cortec
code) from 0.1 to 1000kV (step 0.01kV).
For the 10-480V model the setting range is from 10 to 480V,
in steps of 1V (2).
E/Gnd VT sec
Displays the rated secondary voltage of the earth VT
(Cortec code): from 2 to 130V (step 0.1V).
This window is not available for the 10-480V model (2).
100.0 V
The following lines are only displayed when the “measurement CT” option is present.
Displays the rated primary current of the measurement CT,
from 1 to 9999 (2).
Line CTm primary
1°A
Setting range from 1 to 9999 A (step 1A)
Line CTm sec
(1)
(2)
Displays the rated secondary current of the measurement
CT (setting value: 1or 5) (2).
1°A
P126 and P127 only
P127 only
WARNING:
WITH THE P127 RELAY, NOT ALL MEASUREMENTS CAN BE READ IN
THE DIRECT MODE. THESE MEASUREMENTS MUST BE READ IN THE
INDIRECT MODE.
These measurement values are called derived measurements. They depend on the selected
electrical voltage connection mode.
2.3.4
Submenus to Configure LEDs 5 to 8
To gain access to the CONFIGURATION menu from the default display press . Then
press until the submenu Led is reached.
To reach the LED configuration submenu press for Led 5. Press to reach Led 6, again
to reach Led 7 and again to reach Led 8.
The following table lists the protection functions that can be assigned to the LEDs (5 to 8) for
each MiCOM relay model.
Directional (P127) or three phase (P126) overcurrent protection.
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
Information
st
I>, I>, I>>>
X
X
Instantaneous 1 , 2nd and 3rd phase overcurrent
thresholds
tI>, tI>>, tI>>>
X
X
Time delayed 1st, 2nd and 3rd phase overcurrent
thresholds
tIA>, tIB>, tIC>
X
X
Time delayed first threshold trip on phases A, B, C
Information
Directional earth fault protection
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
Ie>, Ie>>,
Ie>>>
X
X
X
Instantaneous 1st, 2nd and 3rd earth thresholds
tIe>, tIe>>,
tIe>>>
X
X
X
Time delayed 1st, 2nd and 3rd earth thresholds
Ie_d>, Ie_d>>
X
Instantaneous 1st and 2nd derived earth overcurrent
thresholds
tIe_d>,
tIe_d>>
X
Time delayed 1st and 2nd derived earth overcurrent
thresholds
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 29/96
Wattmetric Pe/IeCOS protection
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
Information
st
Pe/IeCos>
Pe/IeCos>>
X
X
X
Instantaneous 1 and 2nd earth overpower/IeCos
(wattmetric) thresholds
tPe/IeCos>
tPe/IeCos>>
X
X
X
Time delayed 1st and 2nd earth overpower/IeCos
(wattmetric) thresholds
Negative phase sequence overcurrent protection
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
Information
st
I2>, I2>>,
I2>>>
X
X
Instantaneous 1 , 2nd and 3rd negative phase
sequence overcurrent thresholds
tI2>, tI2>>,
tI2>>>
X
X
Time delayed 1st, 2nd and 3rd negative phase
sequence overcurrent thresholds
P126
P127
X
X
Thermal protection
TEXT
P125
Therm Trip
Information
Trip on Thermal overload
Three phase undercurrent protection
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
Information
I<
X
X
Instantaneous undercurrent threshold
tI<
X
X
Time delayed undercurrent threshold
P126
P127
Overvoltage protection
TEXT
P125
Information
st
U>, U>>
X
Instantaneous 1 and 2nd overvoltage thresholds
tU>, tU>>
X
Time delayed 1st and 2nd overvoltage thresholds
Undervoltage protection
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
Information
U<, U<<
X
Instantaneous 1st and 2nd undervoltage thresholds
tU<, tU<<
X
Time delayed 1st and 2nd undervoltage thresholds
Residual overvoltage protection
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
Information
Ue>>>>
X
X
X
Instantaneous derived earth overvoltage threshold
tUe>>>>
X
X
X
Time delayed derived earth overvoltage threshold
Negative overvoltage protection
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
Information
V2>, V2>>
X
Instantaneous 1st and 2nd negative overvoltage
thresholds
tV2>, tV2>>
X
Time delayed 1st and 2nd negative overvoltage
thresholds
Broken conductor protection
TEXT
Brkn. Cond
P125
P126
P127
X
X
Information
Broken conductor detection
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 30/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
CB Fail
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
Information
X
X
Detection of a Circuit Breaker failure (CB not open
at the end of tBF timer)
P125
P126
P127
Information
X
X
X
Copy of the status of logic inputs no 1, 2, 3 and 4
(“automat ctrl/inputs” menu)
X
X
Copy of the status of logic inputs no 5, 6 and 7.
X
Copy of the status of logic inputs no 8, 9, 10, 11
and 12 (option)
CB Fail
Logic inputs
TEXT
Input1 to
Input4
Input5 to
Input7
Input8 to
InputC
Autoreclose function
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
Information
79 Run
X
X
Signal that Autoreclose cycle is working
79i.Blocked
X
X
Autoreclose lock activated by the internal process
of the autoreclose
79e.Blocked
X
X
Autoreclose lock activated by the input “block 79”
Auxiliary timers
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
Information
tAux1 to tAux4
X
X
X
Copy of Aux1 to Aux 4 logic input delayed by Aux1
to Aux4 time (Aux1…Aux4 logic input and
aux1…aux4 time are set with “automat ctrl/inputs”
menu)
X
X
Copy of Aux5 to Aux7 logic inputs delayed by Aux 5
to Aux7 times
X
Copy of Aux8 to tAuxC logic inputs delayed by Aux
8 to tAuxC times (option)
P126
P127
Information
X
X
tAux5 to tAux7
tAux8 to tAuxC
t SOTF FUNCTION
TEXT
P125
t SOTF
Switch on to fault timer expired
Active overpower protection
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
Information
st
P>, P>>
X
Instantaneous 1 and 2nd active overpower
thresholds
tP>, tP>>
X
Time delayed 1st and 2nd active overpower
thresholds
Active underpower protection
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
Information
st
P<, P<<
X
Instantaneous 1 and 2nd active underpower
thresholds
tP<, tP<<
X
Time delayed 1st and 2nd active underpower
thresholds
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 31/96
Reactive overpower protection
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
Information
st
Q>, Q>>
X
Instantaneous 1 and 2nd reactive overpower
thresholds
tQ>, tQ>>
X
Time delayed 1st and 2nd reactive overpower
thresholds
Reactive underpower protection
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
Information
st
Q<, Q<<
X
Instantaneous 1 and 2nd reactive underpower
thresholds
tQ<, tQ<<
X
Time delayed 1st and 2nd reactive underpower
thresholds
Voltage / Current Supervision function
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
Information
VTS
X
Voltage Transformer Supervision alarm, if enabled
(VT Supervision/VTS Alarm? = yes)
CTS
X
Current Transformer Supervision alarm
Frequency protection
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
Information
st
F1 to F6
X
Instantaneous 1 to 6th frequency thresholds
tF1 to tF6
X
Time delayed 1st to 6th frequency thresholds
F Out
X
Frequency out of range signal
Rate of change of frequency
TEXT
P125
P126
dF/dt1 to
dF/dt6
P127
X
Information
st
Instantaneous 1 to 6th rates of change of frequency.
Logic Equation
TEXT
P125
P126
P127
X
X
X
tEQU.A to
tEQU.H
Information
Results of equations A to H.
MiCOM S1 Studio setting:
The LED 5 (6, 7 or 8) submenu contains up to 3 or 5 lines parameter settings. In the value
column, each line represents a setting value. State “1” means that the corresponding
parameter is associated to the LED.
The corresponding parameters are displayed in the setting panel: from 00 (last digit) up to
0D (first digit).
P12x Front panel setting:
Press to access the LED 5 CONFIGURATION submenu, then twice (press to access
to others LEDs CONFIGURATION submenus).
Select “Yes” to assignate a LED to a function.
NOTES:
Each parameter can be assigned to one or more LEDs.
One or more parameters (OR logic) can light each LED.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 32/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
CONFIGURATION
Heading Led submenu.
Led
Activate (select choice “Yes” or inhibit (“No”) LED 5
operation when:
Led 5
protection function
Activate (select choice “Yes” or inhibit (“No”) LED 5
No operation when:
- an alarm is exceeded,
- a threshold time delay has elapsed.
Refer to previous tables for protection functions list.
2.3.5
Submenu Logic Inputs Choice: Active High/Low
The inversion of the logic input in this menu inverts its allocated function status in the logic
inputs allocation (AUTOMAT CTRL/INPUTS menu). For example: if EL 2 logic input is 1,
then tAux1 = 0 when logic input is 1 and tAux1 = 1 when logic input is 0.
CONFIGURATION
Heading of configuration inputs submenu.
Inputs
Inputs
:7654321
↑↓↓↓↑↑↑
Inputs
:CBA98
↑↓↓↓↑
Voltage Input
2.3.6
DC
P125 (4 inputs), P126 and P127 (7 inputs)
This menu is used to assign active high or low functionality
to each logic input (1 to 7).
↑= active high, ↓= active low
P127 (optional 12 inputs configuration): as above for input 8
to 12.
Set choice AC or DC power supply for the digital input. The
power supply for any input is the same one as much as the
power supply for the relay.
Submenu Output Relays
CONFIGURATION
Output Relays
Heading of the CONFIGURATION RELAYS
MAINTENANCE submenu.
Fail Safe R.
P125 (6 relays), P126 and P127 (8 relays)
This menu allows the user to invert each of the output
relay contacts for the de-energised state.
1 = relay activated when driving signal is not active
0 = relay not activated when driving signal is not active
87654321
0000000
Maintenance Mode
Yes
Choose if you want to activate the MAINTENANCE
MODE of the relay. If the user selects Yes, output relays
are disconnected from the protection and automation
functions.
Relays CMD 8765W4321
000000001
P125 (6 relays + watchdog), P126 and P127 (8 relays +
Watchdog)
If the MAINTENANCE MODE is activated (set to Yes),
this menu allows the user to activate each one of the
output relay (from RL1 to RL8, W = Watchdog)
1 = relay activated
0 = relay not activated
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.3.7
Page 33/96
Submenu Group Select
This submenu is used to select the active setting protection group, and to control the mode
of changing of group.
The changing of the group is blocked when an alarm is active, except if this alarm is
generated by a logic equation. If an order to change the group is generated when an alarm is
active, the group will change when the alarm is cleared because the changing group order is
recorded.
The setting group change is only executed when none protection function is running (except
thermal overload function).
CONFIGURATION
Group Select
Heading of the Group Select submenu.
Change Group
INPUT
Selects the way to active the protection setting group.
When “Input” is selected, “change set” should be assigned
to a logical input in the ‘AUTOMAT. CTRL / Inputs’ menu.
When “Menu” is selected, the setting group is activated:
– locally by HMI, using “Setting Group” cell,
– remotely, using communications port.
Setting choice: Input or menu
Setting Group
1
Displayed only when “Change group” = Menu.
This cell is used either to activate locally a specific setting
group or to define which value should be used when remote
group switch command is received.
A local setting change command can be perfomed by
changing this value manually among [1 ; 2] for P125/P126
and among [1; 2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7 ; 8] for P127.
On P127, when remote group switch command is received,
settings group will switch form ‘setting Group’ to ‘Target
group’ and vice-versa. On P125/P126, ‘Target group’
doesn’t exist as remote group switch command will switch
from 1 to 2 or 2 to 1 by default
Note:
Target group
2
-
Group will be actived only if no alarm is active
-
Active setting group is available in ‘OP PARAMETERS /
Active group’ cell.
Available on P127 only with setting choices from 0 to 8.
‘Target group’ defines the destination setting group. When
remote group switch command is received, settings group
will switch form ‘setting Group’ to ‘Target group’ and viceversa.
NOTE: If “0” is selected and remote group switch
command is sned, the setting group will be
switched from ‘Active group’ to 1. Next commands
will switch settings group from 1 to 2 and viceversa.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 34/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Group if low
level
G1
Group if high
level
G2
Group Copy ?
No
copy from
G1
copy to
G1
P127 only; displayed when “Change group” = Input.
“Group if low level” defines which setting group should be
activated when no voltage is received on the digital input
(according ‘AUTOMAT. CTRL / Inputs’ menu)
“Group if high level” defines which setting group should be
activated when polarization voltage is received on the
digital input (according ‘AUTOMAT. CTRL / Inputs’ menu)
P127 only.
Yes: Copy the “copied from” selected group settings to
“copied to” selected group.
P127 only.
“Copy from” and “copy to” cells select the copy
configuration.
Setting are unchanged when a setting group is copied to
itself.
A copy to an active group will overwrite the active setting.
Setting choices: G1 to G8.
The “Execution ?” cell will be displayed after “copy to” cell
change: select Yes to apply the copy.
2.3.8
Submenu Alarms
CONFIGURATION
Heading of Alarms submenu.
Alarms
Inst. Self-reset
Reset Led on
Fault
Yes
Yes
INH Alarm function ?
No
Enable/disable auto-acknowledgment mecanism of any
instantaneous alarms/LEDs
If selected, Reset Led on Fault will insure that only the
latest active alarms/LEDs are present (other will be
removed)
Yes: the function will not raise an alarm. Alarm LED stays
OFF no message will be displayed on the HMI.
No: the function will raise an alarm.
The default value is No (except “Inh Alarm Ctrl Trip”=Yes),
In the inh Alarm sub-menus, when the event is noted as a
time delayed threshold, the alarm is inhibited by the time
delayed threshold and the corresponding instantaneous
threshold (for instance, if “Inh Alarm tU<”= yes, U< and tU<
will not raise an alarm. Note, If one of this function is set to
Yes, the alarm will be inhibited if this one is NOT affected to
RL1.
Refer to the following table for trip list.
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 35/96
Event
Label description
P125 P126 P127
Ctrl_Trip ?
Control trip function assigned to the input. The
default value value is Yes. The next table
summarises the behaviour of control trip function
when a control trip order is received by the relay.
tI< ?
X
X
X
Instantaneous and time delayed undercurrent
threshold
X
X
tU< ?, tU<< ?
Instantaneous and time delayed 1st and 2nd
undervoltage thresholds
X
X
tU> ?, tU>> ?
Instantaneous and time delayed 1st and 2nd
overvoltage thresholds
X
tV2> ?, tV2>> ?
Instantaneous and time delayed 1st and 2nd negative
overvoltage thresholds
X
tP< ? / tP<< ?
Instantaneous and time delayed first / second active
underpower thresholds
X
tQ< ? / tQ<< ?
Instantaneous and time delayed first / second
reactive underpower thresholds
X
F1 ? to F6 ?
Instantaneous 1st to 6th frequency threshold
X
F.out
Frequency out of range
X
[79] ext blk ?
Autoreclose locked by digital input
X
X
taux1? to tAux4? Aux1 (to Aux 4) delayed by tAux1 (to tAux 4) time
X
X
taux5? to tAux7? Aux5 (to Aux 7) delayed by tAux5 (to tAux 7) time
X
X
taux8? to tAuxC? As above for tAux8 to tAuxC (optional configuration)
Eq A to Eq H
Logical output of boolean equation A to equation H
X
X
X
X
Case
RL1 assigned to “Ctrl Trip”
No
No
Yes
Yes
“Ctrl trip” alarm inhibited
No
Yes
No
Yes
Off
Off
On
Off
blinking
Off
blinking
Off
Alarm message on display
Yes
No
Yes
No
Event “EVT_TC_TRIP_X1” generated in the event file
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Default recorded in the records/faul record menu
No
No
Yes
Yes
RL1 activated
No
No
Yes
Yes
Result:
LED trip
LED Alarm
2.3.9
Submenu Date
CONFIGURATION
Date
Heading type date submenu.
Date Format
PRIVATE
Assigns free format date or IEC format date (This operation
is seen from remote)
Select choice: Private or IEC
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 36/96
2.4
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
MEASUREMENTS menu
By going to the MEASUREMENTS menu various system measurement values can be
shown on the LCD.
The displayed voltage measures depend on which wiring scheme is choose.
The direct measure is the signal wires to the terminal.
The derived measure is the calculated.
The RMS value is provided for the direct measures.
The fundamental value is provided for the derived (calculated) measures.
To gain access to the MEASUREMENTS menu from the default display, press then until the header of menu is reached.
The following table lists the items available in the measurements menu for the P125, P126 &
P127 relays.
DISPLAY
UNIT
MEASUREMENTS
INFORMATION
Heading Measurements menu
Frequency
50.00 Hz
Hz Displays the network frequency taken from analogue inputs
having a reliable signal level. In case of non reliable analogue
signal input level present the display shows XX.XX Hz.
I A (or I L1, or I R)
I B (or I L2, or I S)
I C (or I L3, or I T)
IN (or I o, or I E)
A
Displays the A (or B, C or N) phase current (true RMS value)
taking into account the phase CT ratio
(CONFIGURATION/Transfo. Ratio submenu) (1).
The displayed label depends on the “Configuration /
Phase/Earth Text” setting.
I1
I2
A
Displays the positive (I1) or negative (I2) sequence
component (1).
RATIO I2/I1
%
Displays the ratio of I2/I1. This derived measurement is used
by the Broken Conductor detection function. (Automat. Ctrl
menu) (1).
UA
UB
UC
V
When a 3Vpn (three phases – neutral) or 2Vpn+Vr (two phaseneutral + open delta connection) connection mode is choosen,
displays the RMS voltage value of phase A, or B or C (2),
UAB
UBC
UCA
V
When a 2Vpp+Vr (two phase-phase + open delta connection)
connection mode is choosen, displays the calculated
fondamental value of the line voltage UAB, or UBC, or UCA
(vector calculus) (2).
UN
V
Displays the earth voltage taking in account the earth VT
connection mode and ratio (General Options and Transfo.
Ratio submenu).
Pe
W
Displays the neutral power based on neutral current value,
neutral voltage and the relevant angle.
IeCos
A
Displays the active neutral current value.
IN ^ UN Angle
°
Displays the angle value between the Zero sequence voltage
and earth fault current relevant.
IA ^ IB Angle
IA ^ IC Angle
°
Displays the angle value between phase IA and IB, or between
IA and IC (1).
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
DISPLAY
IA ^ VA Angle
IA ^ VB Angle
IA ^ VC Angle
Page 37/96
UNIT
INFORMATION
°
When a 3Vpn (three phases – neutral) or 2Vpn+Vr (two phaseneutral + open delta connection) connection mode is choosen,
displays the angle value between phase IA and voltage VA, or
between phase IA and voltage VB, or between phase IA and
voltage VC
Va
Ia
Ic
Vc
Ib
IA ^ VAB Angle
IA ^ VBC Angle
IN ^ UN Angle
°
Vb
P03978ENa
When a 2Vpp+Vr (two phase-phase + open delta connection)
connection mode is choosen, displays the angle value between
phase IA and voltage VAB, or between phase IA and voltage
VBC, or between the Zero sequence voltage and earth fault
current.relevant.
UAB
IAm
UBC
ICm
IBm
UCA
P
W
P03978ENa
Displays the positive & negative active power.
The maximum measured value displayed is 9999MW. If the
measured value is above 9999MW this display remains on the
LCD.
Q
S
Cos (Phi)
Energy
RST=[C]
VAR As above for the positive & negative reactive power (see
P12y/EN AP).
Maximum measured value displayed is 9999MVAr. If the
measured value is above, this display remains on the LCD.
VA As above for the total apparent power (product of the perelement Volts and Amps).
The maximum measured value displayed is 9999MVA. If the
measured value is above, this display remains on the LCD.
°
Displays the three phases power factor (cosine of the angle
between the fundamental voltage vector and the fundamental
current vector, see the following diagram).
Header for energy measurements.
Allows the user to reset the measured energy value. To clear
these values, press .
Note: Password is requested to clear the display.
3Ph WHours Fwd
Wh Displays the three phase active positive energy (forward). If the
measured energy value is higher than 4200GWh then the
display shows XXXX GWh
3Ph WHours Rev
Wh Displays the three phase active negative energy (reverse). If
the measured energy value is higher than 4200GWh then the
display shows XXXX GWh
3Ph VArHours Fwd
Varh Displays the three phase reactive energy forward. If the
measured energy value is higher than 4200GVarh then the
display shows XXXX GVarh
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 38/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
DISPLAY
UNIT
INFORMATION
3Ph VArHours Rev
Varh Displays the three phase reactive energy reverse. If the
measured energy value is higher than 4200GVarh then the
display shows XXXX GVarh
3Ph VAHours
Vah Displays the three phase apparent energy. If the measured
energy value is higher than 4200 GVah then the display shows
XXXX GVah
I N – fn
RST=[C]
A
Displays the earth current I N (true RMS value) minus the earth
current value at the fundamental frequency (value of the
harmonic).
To clear the value, press THERMAL STATUS
RST = [C]
%
Displays the % thermal state based on true RMS current phase
values.
To clear the % value, press (1).
MAX & AVERAGE
RST = [C]
Allows the user to clear the maximum (peak) and average
(rolling) memorised values of the current.
To clear these values, press (1).
Max IA Rms
Max IB Rms
Max IC Rms
A
Displays the true RMS maximum current value for phase A,
phase B or phase C (1).
Average IA Rms
Average IB Rms
Average IC Rms
A
Displays the true RMS average current value for phase A,
phase B or phase C (1).
Max UAB Rms
Max UBC Rms
V
Displays the true RMS maximum line voltage value for UAB or
UBC (2).
Average UAB Rms
Average UBC Rms
V
Displays the true RMS average line voltage value for UAB or
UBC (2).
MAX SUBPERIOD
RST = [C]
MAX SUBPERIOD
IA Rms
IB Rms
IC Rms
Allows the user to clear the maximum subperiod values of the
3 currents for each phase
To clear the values, press (1).
A
ROLLING AVERAGE
RST = [C]
ROLLING AVERAGE
IA Rms
IB Rms
IC Rms
Display the IA, IB or IC peak value demand. The value is the
true RMS maximum value on a subperiod (1).
Allows the user to clear the rolling average values of the 3
currents
To clear the values, press (1).
A
Display the IA, IB or IC average value demand. The value is
the true RMS average value on a number of subperiod set in
Record menu (1).
Reclose Stats
RST = [C]
Allows the user to clear the statistics stored for the autoreclose
function
To clear the values, press (1).
Total recloses
Displays the total number of re-closings (1).
Cycle1 Recloses
Cycle2 Recloses
Cycle3 Recloses
Cycle4 Recloses
Displays the total number of re-closings for cycle 1, cycle 2,
cycle 3 or cycle 4 (1).
Total Trip &
Lockout
Displays the total number of definitive trips issued by the
autoreclose function (1).
(1)
(2)
P126 and P127 only
P127 only
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.5
Page 39/96
METERING Menu (P127)
The “METERING” menu is only displayed when measurement current transformers are
connected (optional configuration with product codes P127xx4, P127xx5, P127xx6 and
P127xx7).
This menu is used to display:
−
frequency,
−
measured currents, total harmonics distortion (THD) and total demand distortion
(TDD), K Factor, measured harmonics,
−
voltages, total harmonics distortion (THD), harmonics,
−
active / reactive / apparent powers,
−
positive / negative energies (active / reactive),
To activate this menu, activate at least one “CTm1 phase ?” or CTm2 phase ?” in the
‘CONFIGURATION / General options’ menu (a measurement CT must be connected). The
“metering” menu displays currents and voltages according to the table presented in the
P12y/EN AP section.
To access METERING menu from the default display, press then until the header of
menu is reached. The submenus of the Metering are:
The following table lists the items available in the Metering menu for the P127 relay:
2.5.1
Submenu “Frequency”
DISPLAY
UNIT
INFORMATION
Submenu FREQUENCY
Frequency
Hz Displays the network frequency.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 40/96
2.5.2
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Submenu “Currents”
DISPLAY
UNIT
INFORMATION
Submenu CURRENTS
Phase A Phase B Phase C
IAm
IBm
ICm
THDAm THDBm THDCm
Use or keys to select phase B or phase C
A
Displays the magnitude of the measured current (true
RMS value), taking in account the Quadrant convention
and CTM ratio (‘CONFIGURATION / General options’
and ‘Transfo ratio’)
%
Displays the percentage of the Total Harmonic Distortion
(THD) measured for the current (irregular harmonics).
For phase A:
THDAm = 100% ×
IAmh2² + IAmh3² + IAmh4² + …
I1
with I1 = magnitude of fundamental current.
TDDAm TDDBm TDDCm
%
Displays the percentage of the Total Demand Distortion
(TDD) measured for the current. For phase A:
TDDAm = 100% ×
IAmh2² + IAmh3² + IAmh4² + …
IL
with IL = magnitude of the load of the system (set this
value using ‘CONFIGURATION / General options / IAm
TDD denom.’ menu.
Iam^Ibm Iam^Icm
°
Displays the angle value between phase IAm and IBm,
or between phase IAm and ICm (Phase B only).
Ia
Ic
KAm
KBm
KCm
P03978ENa
Ib
Displays the K factor. K factor is a measure of the
heating effects on transformers. For phase A:
10
KAM = 100 ×
∑ IAmhi² × i²
i=1
10
∑ IAmhi²
i =1
with i = harmonic number.
IAmh2 IBmh2 ICmh2
to
to
to
IAmh10 IBmh10 ICmh10
%
Displays the magnitude of the 2
the fundamental current
nd
to 10th harmonics of
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.5.3
Page 41/96
Submenu “Voltages”
The voltage metering depends on the VT connection and VT Protection settings
(‘Configuration / General options’ menu). For more information about connection modes,
refer to § 2.3.2. The voltage calculation mode, according to the connection, is given in the
section P12y/EN AP.
2.5.3.1
Connection mode = 3Vpn AND “Protect P-N”, or 2Vpn+Vr AND “Protect P-N”
DISPLAY
UNIT
INFORMATION
Submenu VOLTAGES:
Phase A Phase B Phase C
VAm
VBm
VCm
THDAm THDBm THDCm
Use or keys to select phase B or phase C
V
Displays the magnitude of the VA, VB or VC voltage
(true RMS value), taking in account the CTm ratio
(‘CONFIGURATION / General options / Transfo ratio’)
%
Displays the percentage of the Total Harmonic
Distortion (THD) measured for the voltages (irregular
harmonics). For phase A:
VAm2² + VAm3² + VAm4² + …
THDAm = 100% ×
V1
with V1 = magnitude of fundamental Voltage.
Iam ^ Va Iam ^ Vb Iam ^ Vc
°
Displays the angle value between phase IA and voltage
VA, VB or VC.
Va
Ia
Ic
Vc
Vb
Ib
Ibm ^ Vb Icm ^ Vc
°
P03978ENa
Displays the angle value between phase IB and voltage
VB, or between phase IC and voltage VC.
Va
Iam
Icm
Vc
Ibm
VAmh2
to
VAmh10
%
Vb
P03978ENa
Displays the magnitude of the 2nd to 10th harmonics of
the fundamental voltage
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 42/96
2.5.3.2
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Connection mode = 3Vpp+Vr or “Protect P-P”
DISPLAY
UNIT
INFORMATION
Submenu VOLTAGES:
Phase A Phase B Phase C
UABm
UBCm
THDAm THDBm
Use or keys to select phase B or phase C
UCAm
V
Displays the calculated value of the line voltage UAB.
(vector calculus), taking in account the CTm ratio
(‘CONFIGURATION / General options / Transfo ratio’)
THDCm
%
Displays the percentage of the Total Harmonic
Distortion (THD) measured for the voltages (irregular
harmonics). See § 2.5.3.1
°
Displays the angle value between phase IA and
voltage UAB, UBC or UCA.
Iam^Uab Iam^Ubc Iam^Uca
UAB
IAm
UBC
ICm
IBm
P03978ENa
UCA
Icm^Uab Ibm^Ubc Ibm^Uca
°
Displays the angle value between phase IC and
voltage UAB, or between phase IB and voltage UBC
or UCA, or between phase IC and voltage UCA.
UAB
Iam
UBC
Icm
Ibm
UCA
VABmh2 VBCmh2 VCAmh2
to
to
to
VABmh10 VBCmh10 VCAmh10
2.5.4
%
P03978ENa
Displays the magnitude of the 2
the fundamental voltage
nd
to 10th harmonics of
Submenu Powers
DISPLAY
UNIT
INFORMATION
Submenu POWERS
Pm
Qm
Sm
DPF
W
Displays the measured positive & negative active power.
VAR Displays the measured positive & negative reactive power.
VA Displays the measured total apparent power (product of the perelement Volts and Amps).
°
Displays the three Displacement Phase Power (DPF) factor
(cosine of the angle between the fundamental voltage vector
and the fundamental current vector).
See § 2.5.6 to see the convention for the positive (+) or negative (–) sign.
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.5.5
Page 43/96
Submenu Energies
DISPLAY
UNIT
INFORMATION
Submenu ENERGIES
RST = [C]
Allows the user to clear the measured energy values (export
power, import power, lagging and Leading VARs).
To clear these values, press .
Note: Password is requested to clear the values.
Date
Displays the date of the beginning of the energies calculation
(date of the last reset)
(10/11/09 = November 10th 2009)
Time
Displays the hour of the beginning of the energies calculation
(hour of the last reset)
(13:57:44 = 1:57:44 pm).
Export Power
Wh Displays the three phase active energy (forward) measured
since the previously displayed date and time.
Import Power
Wh Displays the three phase active energy (reverse) measured
since the previously displayed date and time.
Lagging VARs
Varh Displays the three phase reactive energy (forward) measured
since the previously displayed date and time.
Leading VARs
Varh Displays the three phase reactive energy (reverse) measured
since the previously displayed date and time.
See § 2.5.6 to see the convention for the positive (+) or negative (–) sign.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 44/96
2.5.6
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Plus and minus signes for power and energy calculation.
Plus or minus signs are defined as follows:
Reference direction
SOURCE
LOAD
Metering point
ACTIVE POWER: P is positive when the power is from the source to the load
REACTIVE POWER: Q is positive when the load is inductive.
Im (+)
Quadrant 1
Quadrant 2
V
Re (–)
Re (+)
I
Quadrant 3
Quadrant 4
Im (–)
P3976ENa
with:
Quadrant 1
Quadrant 2
Quadrant 3
Quadrant 4
Active (P)
+
–
–
+
Reactive (Q)
–
–
+
+
Export Wh (Ea+)
+
–
–
+
Import Wh(Ea–)
–
+
+
–
Lagging VARh (Er+)
–
–
+
+
Leading VARh (Er–)
+
+
–
–
Power
Energy
NOTE:
Quadrant 1 is the default setting. See ‘CONFIGURATION / General
options / Quadrant conv.’ menu to configure the active / reactive
power quadrant.
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.6
Page 45/96
COMMUNICATION menu
The COMMUNICATION menu depends:on the type of communications protocol: ModBus,
IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3.0 and on the connection type (P127 optional configuration)
To gain access to the COMMUNICATION menu from the default display, press then until the menu is reached.
COMMUNICATION
Heading of COMMUNICATION menu.
HMI ?
Select Yes in order to use the front panel communication
port.
Setting choice: Yes or No
No
COMM1 ?
No
COMM2 ?
WARNING:
2.6.1
No
Select Yes in order to use the first communication port.
Setting choice: Yes or No
P127 optional configuration only.
Select Yes in order to use the second communication
port.
Setting choice: Yes or No
A MODBUS NETWORK CAN ONLY COMPRISE 31 RELAY ADDRESSES
+ 1 RELAY MASTER ON THE SAME MODBUS SUB-LAN.
HMI submenu
The following menu is displayed when “HMI” = Yes is selected.
HMI ?
Yes
Relay Address
Modbus
Date format
2.6.2
1
Private
Indicates the front port communication address (MODBUS
has native protocol)
Choose the format of the date, either PRIVATE or IEC
protocol.
Select from: Private or IEC.
COMM1 and COMM2 submenus
The following menu is displayed when “COMM1” or “COMM2” = Yes is selected. The first
part of the following presentation is identical for the two communivation options.
COMM1 (or 2) ?
Baud Rate
Yes
19200 bd
Parity
Stop Bits
Relay Address
None
1
1
This cell controls the communication speed between relay
and master station.
It is important that both relay and master station are set at
the same speed setting.
Select from: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or
38400 bd.
Choose the parity in the ModBus data frame.
Select parity: Even, Odd or None
Choose the number of stop bits in the DNP3.0 frame. Select
0 or 1 using . Press to validate your choice.
This cell sets the unique address for the relay such that only
one relay is accessed by master station software.
Select from 1 to 255.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 46/96
2.6.3
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
IEC60870-5-103 protocol additional cells
The following menu is specific to IEC60870-5-103 protocol.
Spont. event. &GI
A11
None
Selection of spontaneous events and General Interrogation
(events during a period) format.
The events created by the relay have two formats (see
P12y/EN CT chapter):
- public range, using IEC protocol,
- private range, using private number format.
This command activates or deactivates private and public
format transmission of the events to the master station.
Select choice: None / Private only / IEC only / all
GI select.
Basic
Selection of the General Interrogation data transmission:
the list of basic (spontaneous messages) and advanced
data sent to the master station during general interrogation
is detailed in section P12y/EN CT, IEC 60870-5-103 part,
§ 1.3.
Setting choice: Basic / Advanced
Measur. upload
ASDU 3.4
Yes
Activates or deactivates the ASDU 3.4 measures
transmission filtering mode. This option allows
communication to the master station of earth current and
earth voltage measures (IN and VN).
Setting choice: Yes or No
Measur. upload
ASDU 9
Yes
Activates or deactivates the ASDU 9 measures tansmission
filtering mode. This option allows communication to the
master station of:
- phase current measures (IA, IB and IC),
- phase voltage measures (VA, VB and VC)
- frequency measures,
- active and reactive power measures.
Setting choice: Yes or No
Measur. upload
Other
Yes
Selects the measures transfert mode. This option allows
communication of all measures.
Setting choice: Yes or No
Events + Measur.
Blocking
Yes
Allows or blocks events and measurement communication
Setting choice: Yes or No
Command
Blocking
Allows or blocks remote commands.
Setting choice: Yes or No
Yes
Command duration
0.1s
COMM1 only
In order to avoid a transmission conflict between the two
RS485 ports (optional configuration), transmission using the
second port can be time-delayed. Transmission and
reception with comm2 will start after the end of the
“Command duration”.
Setting range: from 0.1 to 30s, step 0.1s
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.7
Page 47/96
PROTECTION menu
The protection menus are designated as PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 menu
(available for the MiCOM P125 and P126) and PROTECTION G1 to PROTECTION G8
menu available for the MiCOM P127 relay. By opening the PROTECTION menu the user
can program the parameters of various protection functions and settings (thresholds, time
delay, logic) associated with each of the phase or earth protection functions.
The various submenus are:
PROTECTION
G1 / G2 …G8
[32] Phase
power
(2)
[32N] Earth
Wattmetric
[37] Under
current
(1)
[59] Phase (2)
Over Voltage
(1)
[79]
Autoreclose
[67/50/51]
Phase OC
(1)
[67N]E/
Gnd
[46] Neg
Seq OC
(1)
[49] Therm
OL
[27] phase (2)
under voltage
[59N] residual(1)
over voltage
[81R] Freq. (2)
rate of change
(1)
(2)
2.7.1
(1)
[81]
Frequency
(1)
(2)
P126 and P127 only
P127 only
Submenu [67/50/51] PHASE OC (P126 and P127 only)
The MiCOM P126 and P127 allow the following protections:
−
P126: [50/51], three phase overcurrent,
−
P127 [67/50/51], directional three phase overcurrent.
PROTECTION G1
[67/50/51] Phase OC
Heading of [67/50/51] phase overcurrent submenu (“[50/51]
PHASE OVERCURRENT”).
I> ?
Setting choice: No, Yes, DIR.
- Yes, the first phase overcurrent threshold (I>) protection is
enabled. The first phase overcurrent threshold protection
submenu (see § 2.7.1.1) is displayed,
- DIR: the relay operates like a three-phase directional
overcurrent protection and the directional choice window
(see § 2.7.1.1) is shown (P127 only),
- No, the first phase overcurrent threshold (I>) protection is
not enabled, and the next menu is the “I>> ?” menu.
I>> ?
No
Yes
Selection of the second phase overcurrent threshold (I>>)
protection. Setting choice: No, Yes, DIR,
- Yes, the second phase overcurrent threshold (I>>)
protection submenu is displayed (see § 2.7.1.2),
- DIR, the relay operates like a three-phase directional
overcurrent protection and the directional choice window is
shown (P127 only),
- No, the next window will show the “I>>> ?” menu.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 48/96
I>>> ?
2.7.1.1
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Yes
Selection of the third phase overcurrent threshold (I>>>)
protection. Setting choice: No, Yes, PEAK, DIR.
- Yes: the third overcurrent threshold submenu is shown
(see § 2.7.1.3) and I>>> threshold operates on Discrete
Fourier transformation base,
- DIR: the relay operates like a three-phase directional
overcurrent protection, the directional windows are shown
and I>>> threshold operates on Discrete Fourier
transformation base (see § 2.7.1.3),
- PEAK: The third threshold can be set to operate on the
peak of the measured phase current. It compares the
biggest peak value of the measured current against the
setting (see § 2.7.1.3) ,
- No, next window will show the submenu [67] Phase OC.
Submenu First phase overcurrent threshold (I>) protection
I> ?
I>
I>
Torque
I>
Trip Zone
Delay Type
Yes
10.00 In
“No”, “Yes” or “DIR” option is selected.
The first phase overcurrent threshold (I>) protection is
enabled.
If “DIR” is selected, “I> Torque” and “I> Trip zone”
submenus are displayed.
Sets the value for the overcurrent threshold I>. The
threshold setting range is from 0.1 to 25In (step 0.01In).
90 °
If “I> ?” = “DIR” only (P127 only).
Displays setting value for the angle between voltage and
current (see P12y/EN AP section) from 0° to 359° (step
1°).
±10 °
If “I> ?” = “DIR” only (P127 only).
Displays angle value for the Trip Zone. This defines the
operating region to either side of the torque angle from
±10° to ±170°, in steps of 1°.
DMT
Selects the time delay type associated with I>.
Setting choices are:
- “DMT” (definite minimum time): see a,
- “RI” (electromechanical inverse time curve): section b,
- IEC-xxx, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve,
see section c,
- RECT curve, see section c.
a) Delay type = Definite Minimum Time
Delay Type
tI >
DMT
150.00 s
“DMT” is selected
Sets the time delay associated with I>. The setting range
is from 0.040 to 150.0s (step 10ms).
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 49/96
b) Delay type = RI - electromechanical inverse time curve
Delay Type
K
t Reset
I> >> >>>
Interlock
RI
2.500
60 ms
Yes
Display of the I> inverse time delay (electromechanical
RI curve).
Selects the RI curve K value from 0.100 to 10 (step
0.005)
Sets the reset time value from 0 to 100 s (step 10 ms)
Interlock of first threshold by the second and third
thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT.
Setting choice: No, Yes
c) Delay type = IEC-xxx, RECT, COx or IEEE/ANSI
Delay Type
TMS
1.000
Sets Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) value for the curve
from 0.025 to 1.5 (step 0,001).
Reset Delay Type
DMT
if “Delay type” = IEEE/ANSI or COx curve is selected
only.
Selects the reset delay time type. Select between DMT
(Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time).
Rtms
If “Reset Delay Type” = IDMT is selected.
Sets the Reverse Time Multiplier Setting (RTMS) value
associated with the IDMT reset time choice from 0.025 to
3.200 (step 0.001)
t Reset
I> >> >>>
Interlock
2.7.1.2
IEC-STI
Display threshold delay type.
0.025
0.10 s
Yes
If “Reset Delay Type” is not “IDMT”.
Sets the reset time value from 0 to 100 s (step 10 ms)
Interlock of first threshold by the second and third
thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT.
Setting choice: No, Yes
Submenu second overcurrent threshold I>> protection
This section presents the main specific points for this submenu (I>> = Yes). Refer to §
2.7.1.1 for details (setting ranges, setting choices and availabilities).
I>> ?
I>>
I>>
Torque
I>>
Trip Zone
Trip
Trip +/-
Yes
10.00 In
90 °
±10 °
“Yes” or “DIR” option is selected.
The second phase overcurrent threshold (I>) protection is
enabled.
If “DIR” is selected, “I> Torque” and “I> Trip zone”
submenus are displayed.
Sets the value for the overcurrent threshold.
The threshold setting range is from 0.1 to 40 In (step 0.01)
In.
If “I>> ?” = “DIR” only.
Displays setting value for the torque angle between voltage
and current (see P12y/EN AP section) from 0° to 359° (step
1°).
If “I>> ?” = “DIR” only.
Displays angle value for the Trip Zone. This defines the
operating region to either side of the torque angle. Setting
range is from ±10° to ±170°, in steps of 1°.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 50/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Delay Type
DMT
Selects the time delay type associated with I>.
Setting choices are:
- “DMT” (definite minimum time): see a,
- “RI” (electromechanical inverse time curve): section b,- IEC-xxx, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve, see
c,
- RECT curve, see section c..
a) Delay type = Definite Minimum Time
Identical to § 2.7.1.1, section a).
b) Delay type = RI - electromechanical inverse time curve
Identical to § 2.7.1.1, section b), excluding the “I> >> >>> Interlock” submenu.
c) Delay type = IEC-xxx, RECT, Cox or IEEE/ANSI
Identical to § 2.7.1.1, section b), excluding the “I> >> >>> Interlock” submenu.
2.7.1.3
Submenu Third phase overcurrent threshold (I>>>) protection
I>>> ?
I>>>
Yes
10.00 In
I>>>
Torque
90 °
I>>>
Trip Zone
tI>>>
2.7.2
±10 °
150.00 s
“Yes” or “No” or “DIR” or “PEAK” option is selected.
The third phase overcurrent threshold (I>>>) protection is
enabled.
If “DIR” is selected, “I>>> Torque” and “I>>> Trip zone”
submenus are displayed.
Displays setting value for the third overcurrent threshold
I>>> from 0.1 to 40In (step 0.01In).
If “>>> ?” = “DIR” only.
Displays setting value for the torque angle between
current and voltage (see P12y/EN AP section), from 0° to
359° (step 1°).
If “>>> ?” = “DIR” only.
Displays angle value for the Trip Zone.
This defines the operating region to either side of the
torque angle, from ±10° to 170° (step 1°).
Sets the time delay associated with I>>>. The setting
range is from 0 to 150 s (step 10ms).
Submenu [67N] E/GND
PROTECTION
Heading of Protection menu.
[67N] E/GND
Heading of the earth overcurrent protection submenu.
Ie> ?
Setting choice: DIR, Yes or No
- Yes: the first earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>) protection is
enabled. The first earth overcurrent threshold submenu (see
§ 2.7.2.1) is displayed.
- DIR: the relay operates like a three-phase directional
overcurrent protection and the directional choice window
(see § 2.7.2.1) is shown.
- No: the first earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>) protection is
not enabled, and the next menu is the “Ie>> ?” menu.
No
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Ie>> ?
Ie>>> ?
Ie_d> ?
Ie_d>> ?
2.7.2.1
No
No
No
No
Page 51/96
Setting choice: DIR, Yes or No
- Yes: the second earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>>)
protection is enabled. The second earth overcurrent
threshold submenu (see § 2.7.2.2) is displayed.
- DIR: the relay operates like a three-phase directional
overcurrent protection and the directional choice window
(see § 2.7.2.2) is displayed.
- No: the second earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>>) is not
enabled, and the next menu is the “Ie>>> ?” menu.
Setting choice Yes, No, DIR and Peak
- Yes: the third earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>>>)
protection is enabled. The third earth overcurrent threshold
submenu protection (see § 2.7.2.3) is displayed.
- DIR: the relay operates like a three-phase directional
overcurrent protection and the directional choice window
(see § 2.7.2.3) is shown.
- PEAK: The third threshold can be set to operate on the
peak of the measured phase current. It compares the
biggest peak value of the measured current against the
setting (see § 2.7.2.3).
- No: the third earth fault threshold (Ie>>>) is not enabled.
P127 only.
Setting choice Yes, No or DIR
Yes: the first derived earth overcurrent threshold (see §
2.7.2.4) is enabled.
No: the first derived earth overcurrent threshold is disabled.
P127 only.
Setting choice Yes, No or DIR
Yes: the second derived earth overcurrent threshold (see §
2.7.2.5) is enabled.
No: the second derived earth overcurrent threshold is
disabled.
Submenu First earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>) protection
Ie> ?
Ie>
Ue>
Ie>
Torque
Ie>
Trip Zone
Yes
1.000 Ien
5.0V
“Yes” or “DIR” option is selected.
The first earth overcurrent threshold (I>) protection is
enabled.
If “DIR” is selected, “Ue>”, “Ie> Torque” and “Ie> Trip
zone” submenus are displayed.
Sets the value for the earth overcurrent threshold Ie>.
The threshold setting range is from 0.002 to 1.000Ien
(step 0.001Ien).
If “Ie> ?” = “DIR” only.
Displays setting value for the earth overvoltage threshold
associated to Ie> (see P12y/EN AP section).
Input voltage range 2–130V: The threshold setting range
is from 1 to 260V, in steps of 0.1V.
Input voltage range 10–480V: The threshold setting
range is from 4 to 960V, in steps of 0.5V.
0°
If “Ie> ?” = “DIR” only.
Displays setting value for the torque angle between
voltage and current (see P12y/EN AP section), from 0°
to 359° (step 1°).
±10 °
If “Ie> ?” = “DIR” only.
Displays angle value for the Trip Zone. This defines the
operating region to either side of the torque angle from
±10° to ±170°, in steps of 1°.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 52/96
Delay Type
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
DMT
Selects the time delay type associated with I>.
Setting choices are:
- “DMT” (definite minimum time): see section a,
- “RI” (electromechanical inverse time curve): section b,- IEC-xxx, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve,
see section c,
- RECT curve, see section c..
a) Delay type = Definite Minimum Time
Delay Type
tIe >
tReset
DMT
150.00 s
150.0 s
“DMT” is selected
Sets the time delay associated with Ie>. The setting
range is from 0.040 to 150.0s (step 10ms).
Sets the reset time value from 0 to 100s (step 10ms).
b) Delay type = RI - electromechanical inverse time curve
Delay Type
K
t Reset
Ie> >> >>>
Interlock
RI
1.000
0.10 s
Yes
Display of the I> inverse time delay (electromechanical
RI curve).
Selects the RI curve K value from 0.100 to 10 (step
0.005).
Sets the reset time value from 0 to 100s (step 10ms).
Interlock of first threshold by the second and third
thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT.
Setting choice: No, Yes
c) Delay type = IEC-xxx, RECT, COx or IEEE/ANSI
Delay Type
TMS
IEC-STI
1.000
Display threshold delay type.
Sets time multiplier setting (TMS) value for the curve
from 0.025 to 1.5 (step 0.001).
Reset Delay Type
DMT
if “Delay type” = IEEE/ANSI or COx curve is selected
only.
Selects the reset delay time type. Select between DMT
(Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time).
Rtms
If “Reset Delay Type” = IDMT is selected.
Sets the Reverse Time Multiplier Setting (RTMS) value
associated with the IDMT reset time choice from 0.025 to
1.5 (step 0.001)
t Reset
Ie> >> >>>
Interlock
0.025
0.10 s
Yes
If “Reset Delay Type” is not “IDMT”.
Sets the reset time value from 0 to 100s (step 10ms)
Interlock of first threshold by the second and third
thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT.
Setting choice: No, Yes
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.7.2.2
Page 53/96
Submenu Second earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>>) protection
This section presents the main specific points for this submenu (Ie>> = Yes). Refer to §
2.7.2.1 for details (setting ranges, setting choices and availabilities).
Ie>> ?
Ie>>
Ue>>
Ie>>
Torque
Ie>>
Trip Zone
Delay Type
Yes
1.000 Ien
5.0 V
“Yes” or “DIR” option is selected.
The second earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>>) protection is
enabled.
If “DIR” is selected, “Ue>>”, “Ie>> Torque” and “Ie>> Trip
zone” submenus are displayed.
Sets the value for the second earth overcurrent threshold
(Ie>>). Three earth overcurrent ranges are available:
- from 0.002 to 1 Ien, in steps of 0.001 Ien. Cortec code C
- from 0.01 to 8 Ien, in steps of 0.005 Ien. Cortec code B
- from 0.1 to 40 Ien, in steps of 0.01 Ien. Cortec code A
If “Ie>> ?” = “DIR” only.
Sets the value for the earth overvoltage threshold
associated to Ie>> (see P12y/EN AP section).
Input voltage range 2–130V: The threshold setting range is
from 1 to 260V, in steps of 0.1V.
Input voltage range 10–480V: The threshold setting range is
from 4 to 960V, in steps of 0.5V.
90 °
If “Ie>> ?” = “DIR” only.
Sets the value for the torque angle between voltage and
current (see P12y/EN AP section), from 0° to 359 ° (step
1°).
±10 °
If “Ie>> ?” = “DIR” only.
Sets angle value for the Trip Zone. This defines the
operating region to either side of the torque angle. Setting
range is from ±10° to ±170°, in steps of 1°.
DMT
Selects the time delay type associated with I>>.
Setting choices are:
- “DMT” (definite minimum time): see section a,
- “RI” (electromechanical inverse time curve): section b,- IEC-xxx, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve, see
section c,
- RECT curve, see section c..
a) Delay type = Definite Minimum Time
Identical to § 2.7.2.1, section a), with tIe> displaying setting value for the trip threshold (from
0 to 150s, step 10ms) and excluding the “Ie> >> >>> Interlock” submenu.
b) Delay type = RI - electromechanical inverse time curve
Identical to § 2.7.2.1, section b), excluding the “Ie> >> >>> Interlock” submenu.
c) Delay type = IEC-xxx, RECT, Cox or IEEE/ANSI
Identical to § 2.7.2.1, section b), excluding the “Ie> >> >>> Interlock” submenu.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 54/96
2.7.2.3
Submenu Third earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>>>) protection
Ie>>> ?
Ie>>>
Ue>>>
Ie>>>
Torque
Ie>>>
Trip Zone
tIe>>>
tReset
2.7.2.4
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Yes
1.000 Ien
5.0 V
“Yes”, “No”, “DIR” or “PEAK” option is selected.
The third earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>>>) protection is
enabled.
If “DIR” is selected, “Ue>>>”, “Ie>>> Torque” and “Ie>>>
Trip zone” submenus are displayed.
Sets the value for the third overcurrent threshold Ie>>>.
Three earth overcurrent ranges are available:
- from 0.002 to 1 Ien, in steps of 0.001 Ien. Cortec code C
- from 0.01 to 8 Ien, in steps of 0.005 Ien. Cortec code B
- from 0.1 to 40 Ien, in steps of 0.01 Ien. Cortec code A
If “Ie>>> ?” = DIR only
Sets the values for the earth overvoltage threshold Ue>>>
associated to Ie>>> (see P12y/EN AP section).
Input voltage range 2–130V: The threshold setting range is
from 1 to 260V, in steps of 0.1V.
Input voltage range 10–480V: The threshold setting range is
from 4 to 960V, in steps of 0.5V.
90 °
If “Ie>>> ?” = DIR only
Sets the value for the torque angle between voltage and
current (see P12y/EN AP section), from 0° to 359 °, (step
1°).
±10 °
If “Ie>>> ?” = DIR only
Sets angle value for the Trip Zone. This defines the
operating region to either side of the torque angle. Setting
range is from ±10° to ±170°, in steps of 1°.
0.04 s
Sets the time delay associated with Ie>>>, from 0 to 150 s,
in steps of 10ms.
0.10 s
Sets the value for the reset time, from 0 to 100 s, in steps of
10ms.
Submenu first derived earth overcurrent threshold (Ie_d>) protection
This section presents the main specific points for this submenu (tIe_d> = Yes or DIR). The
first stage of derived earth protection, Ie_d>, represents the vectorial sum of the three
phases. Refer to § 2.7.2.1 for details (setting ranges, setting choices and availabilities).
Ie_d> ?
Ie_d>
Ue(Ie_d>)
Ie_d>
Torque
Yes
1.000 Ien
100.0 V
90 °
“Yes” or “DIR” option is selected.
The first derived earth overcurrent threshold (Ie_d>)
protection is enabled.
Sets the value for the derived earth overcurrent Ie_d>
Setting range from 0.10 Ien to 40.00 Ien, in steps of 0.01
Ien, default value: 1.00 Ien
If “Ie_d> ?” = DIR only
Sets the values for the earth overvoltage threshold
Ue>>>> associated to Ie_d>.
Input voltage range 2–130V: The threshold setting range
is from 1 to 260V, in steps of 0.1V.
Input voltage range 10–480V: The threshold setting range
is from 4 to 720V, in steps of 0.5V.
If “Ie_d> ?” = DIR only
Sets the value for the torque angle between voltage and
current. Setting range from 0° to 359 ° (step 1°).
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Ie_d>
Trip Zone
Delay Type
±10 °
DMT
Page 55/96
If “Ie_d> ?” = DIR only
Sets angle value for the Trip Zone. This defines the
operating region to either side of the torque angle. Setting
range is from ±10° to ±170°, in steps of 1°.
Selects the time delay type associated with Ie_d>.
Setting choices “DMT”: see a, “IDMT”: see b, “RI”: see c.
a) Delay type = Definite Minimum Time
Delay Type
tIe_d>
t Reset
DMT
“DMT” is selected
0.000 s
Set the value for the time delay associated with Ie_d>
from 0.00s to 150.0s (step 0.01s)
0 ms
Reset time value. Setting range from 0.00s to 100.0s,
step 0.01s.
b) Delay type = Inverse Definite Minimum Time
Identical to § 2.7.2.1, section b).
c) Delay type = RI - electromechanical inverse time curve
Identical to § 2.7.2.1, section c).
2.7.2.5
Submenu second derived earth overcurrent threshold (Ie_d>>) protection
This section presents the main specific points for this submenu (tIe_d>> = Yes or DIR).
Ie_d>> is the second stage of derived earth protection. Refer to § 2.7.2.1 for details (setting
ranges, setting choices and availabilities).
Ie_d>> ?
Ie_d>>
Ue(Ie_d>>)
Ie_d>>
Torque
Ie_d>>
Trip Zone
Delay Type
Yes
“Yes” or “DIR” option is selected.
The second derived earth overcurrent threshold (Ie_d>>)
protection is enabled.
1.000 Ien
Sets the value for the derived earth overcurrent Ie_d>>
Setting range from 0.10 Ien to 40.00 Ien, in steps of 0.01
Ien, default value: 1.00 Ien
100.0 V
90 °
±10 °
DMT
If “Ie_d>> ?” = DIR only
Sets the values for the earth overvoltage threshold
Ue>>>> associated to Ie_d>>.
Input voltage range 2–130V: The threshold setting range
is from 1 to 260V, in steps of 0.1V.
Input voltage range 10–480V: The threshold setting range
is from 4 to 720V, in steps of 0.5V.
If “Ie_d>> ?” = DIR only
Sets the value for the torque angle between voltage and
current. Setting range from 0° to 359 ° (step 1°).
If “Ie_d>> ?” = DIR only
Sets angle value for the Trip Zone. This defines the
operating region to either side of the torque angle. Setting
range is from ±10° to ±170°, in steps of 1°.
Selects the time delay type associated with Ie_d>>.
Setting choices “DMT”: see a, “IDMT”: see b, “RI”: see c.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 56/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
a) Delay type = Definite Minimum Time
Delay Type
tIe_d>>
t Reset
“DMT” is selected
DMT
Set the value for the time delay associated with Ie_d>>
from 0.00s to 150.0s (step 0.01s)
0.000 s
Reset time value. Setting range from 0.00s to 100.0s,
step 0.01s.
0 ms
b) Delay type = Inverse Definite Minimum Time
Identical to § 2.7.2.1, section b).
c) Delay type = RI - electromechanical inverse time curve
Identical to § 2.7.2.1, section c).
2.7.3
Submenu [32] DIRECTIONAL POWER (P127 only)
The following table is a summary table of the measured parameters in according to the
configuration scheme:
Configuration Displayed Configuration Displayed Configuration Displayed
3Vpn
on HMI
2Vpn+Vr
on HMI
2Vpp + Vr
on HMI
Direct
measurement
Direct
Q (KVAr)
measurement
Direct
S (KVA)
measurement
Direct
Cos(Phi) [°]
measurement
3Ph WHours Direct
Fwd
measurement
3Ph WHours Direct
Rev
measurement
3Ph VArDirect
Hours Fwd measurement
3Ph VArDirect
Hours Rev
measurement
3Ph VADirect
Hours
measurement
P (kW)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Derived
measurement
Derived
measurement
Derived
measurement
Derived
measurement
Derived
measurement
Derived
measurement
Derived
measurement
Derived
measurement
Derived
measurement
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Derived
measurement
Derived
measurement
Derived
measurement
Derived
measurement
Derived
measurement
Derived
measurement
Derived
measurement
Derived
measurement
Derived
measurement
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.7.3.1
Page 57/96
Threshold setting
In the following menu, default menu displayed for P>, P>>, P<, P<<, Q>, Q>>, Q< and Q<<
is noted “10000× 1W”. The value displayed on MiCOM P127 HMI depends on the “input
voltage range” and “line secondary CT” parameters. The following table gives the various
cases of the setting ranges:
Input voltage
range
2-130V
10-480V
Line
secondary
CT
Setting range
Min
Max
Step
Default value
Overpower
Underpower
1A
1× 1W
10000× 1W
1× 1W
10000× 1W
1× 1W
5A
1× 5W
10000× 5W
1× 5W
10000× 5W
1× 5W
1A
5× 1W
40000× 1W
1× 1W
40000× 1W
5× 1W
5A
5× 5W
40000× 5W
1× 5W
40000× 5W
5× 5W
To obtain the power value in W, multiply the selected number by 1W or 5W. Example, for
100:
−
if the secondary of the CT = 1A, the HMI will display “100× 1W” and P> = 100W,
−
if the secondary of the CT = 5A, the HMI will display “100× 5W” and P> = 500W.
PROTECTION
[32] Directional Power
Heading of three-phase active or reactive over power
protection.
This protection monitors:
– the active overpower limits for the two thresholds P> and
P>>,
– the active underpower limits for the two thresholds P<
and P<<,
– the reactive overpower limits for the two thresholds Q>
and Q>>,
– the reactive underpower limits for the two thresholds Q<
and Q<<,
For all the threshods, a directional angle can be adjusted
between triggering power
2.7.3.2
Active overpower protection
This directional power protection part follows “[32] directional power” menu. This part of the
menu monitors the active overpower thresholds P> and P>>.
P> ?
P>
No
10000x 1W
Selection of the first active overpower threshold (P>)
protection.
Setting choice: No, Yes
Yes: “P>”, “Directional Angle” and “tP>” menu are displayed
and P> protection is active,
No, the next window will show the threshold menu “P>> ?”.
If “P> ?” = Yes only
Sets the value for the first active overpower threshold P>.
Default value: 10kW or 40kW or 50kW or 200kW (see
§ 2.7.3.1)
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 58/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Directional Angle
tP>
0.00 s
P>> ?
P>>
No
10000x 1W
Directional Angle
tP>>
2.7.3.3
0°
0°
0.00 s
If “P>> ?” = Yes only
Selection of the directional angle between active power and
triggering power.
Setting range from 0° to 359°, step 1°
If “P> ?” = Yes only
Sets the time delay associated with P>.
The setting range is from 0 to 150s, in steps of 10ms.
Selection of the second active overpower threshold (P>>)
protection.
Setting choice: No, Yes
Yes: “P>>”, “Directional Angle” and “tP>>” menu are
displayed and P>> protection is active,
No: the next menu is “P< ?”
If “P>> ?” = Yes only
Sets the value for the second active overpower threshold
P>>.
Default value: 10kW or 40kW or 50kW or 200kW (see
§ 2.7.3.1)
If “P>> ?” = Yes only
Selection of the directional angle between active power and
triggering power.
Setting range from 0° to 359°, step 1°
If “P>> ?” = Yes only
Sets the time delay associated with P>>..
The setting range is from 0 to 150s, in steps of 10ms.
Reactive overpower protection
This directional power protection part follows “P<” (if No) or “tP<” menu. This part of the
menu monitors the active overpower thresholds Q> and Q>>.
Q> ?
Q>
No
10000x 1W
Directional Angle
tQ>
Q>> ?
0°
0.00 s
No
Selection of the first reactive overpower threshold (Q>)
protection.
Setting choice: No, Yes
Yes: “Q>”, “Directional Angle” and “tQ>” menu are displayed
and Q> protection is active,
No, the next window will show the threshold menu “Q>> ?”.
If “Q> ?” = Yes only
Sets the value for the first reactive overpower threshold Q>.
Default value: 10kW or 40kW or 50kW or 200kW (see
§ 2.7.3.1)
If “Q>> ?” = Yes only
Selection of the directional angle between reactive power
and triggering power.
Setting range from 0° to 359°, step 1°
If “Q> ?” = Yes only
Sets the time delay associated with Q>.
The setting range is from 0 to 150s, in steps of 10ms.
Selection of the second reactive overpower threshold (Q>>)
protection.
Setting choice: No, Yes
Yes: “Q>>”, “Directional Angle” and “tQ>>” menu are
displayed and Q>> protection is active,
No: the next menu is “Q< ?”
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Q>>
10000x 1W
Directional Angle
tQ>>
2.7.3.4
0°
0.00 s
Page 59/96
If “Q>> ?” = Yes only
Sets the value for the second reactive overpower threshold
Q>>.
Default value: 10kW or 40kW or 50kW or 200kW (see
§ 2.7.3.1)
If “Q>> ?” = Yes only
Selection of the directional angle between reactive power
and triggering power.
Setting range from 0° to 359°, step 1°
If “Q>> ?” = Yes only
Sets the time delay associated with Q>>.
The setting range is from 0 to 150s, in steps of 10ms.
Active underpower protection
This directional power protection part follows “P>>” (if No) or “tP>>” menu. This part of the
menu monitors the active underpower thresholds P< and P<<.
P< ?
P<
No
1x 1W
Directional Angle
tP<
0.00 s
P<< ?
P<<
No
10000x 1W
Directional Angle
tP<<
0°
0°
0.00 s
Selection of the first active underpower threshold (P<)
protection.
Setting choice: No, Yes
Yes: “P<”, “Directional Angle” and “tP<” menu are displayed
and P< protection is active,
No, the next window will show the threshold menu “P<< ?”.
If “P< ?” = Yes only
Sets the value for the first active underpower threshold P<.
Default value: 1W or 5W or 20W or 25W (see § 2.7.3.1)
If “P< ?” = Yes only
Selection of the directional angle between active power and
triggering power.
Setting range from 0° to 359°, step 1°
If “P< ?” = Yes only
Sets the time delay associated with P<.
The setting range is from 0 to 150s, in steps of 10ms.
Selection of the second active underpower threshold (P<<)
protection.
Setting choice: No, Yes
Yes: “P<<”, “Directional Angle” and “tP<<” menu are
displayed and P<< protection is active,
If “P<< ?” = Yes only
Sets the value for the second active underpower threshold
P<<.
Default value: 1W or 5W or 20W or 25W (see § 2.7.3.1)
If “P<< ?” = Yes only
Selection of the directional angle between active power and
triggering power.
Setting range from 0° to 359°, step 1°
If “P<< ?” = Yes only
Sets the time delay associated with P<<..
The setting range is from 0 to 150s, in steps of 10ms.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 60/96
2.7.3.5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Underpower protection
This directional power protection part follows “Q>>” (if No) or “tQ>>” menu. This part of the
menu monitors the active underpower thresholds Q< and Q<<.
Q< ?
No
Q<
1x 1W
Directional Angle
tQ<
0.00 s
Q<< ?
Q<<
No
10000x 1W
Directional Angle
tQ<<
2.7.4
0°
0°
0.00 s
Selection of the first reactive underpower threshold (Q<)
protection.
Setting choice: No, Yes
Yes: “Q<”, “Directional Angle” and “tQ<” menu are displayed
and Q< protection is active,
No, the next window will show the threshold menu “Q<< ?”.
If “Q< ?” = Yes only
Sets the value for the first reactive underpower threshold Q<.
Default value: 1W or 5W or 20W or 25W (see § 2.7.3.1)
If “Q< ?” = Yes only
Selection of the directional angle between reactive power
and triggering power.
Setting range from 0° to 359°, step 1°
If “Q< ?” = Yes only
Sets the time delay associated with Q<.
The setting range is from 0 to 150s, in steps of 10ms.
Selection of the second reactive underpower threshold
(Q<<) protection.
Setting choice: No, Yes
Yes: “Q<<”, “Directional Angle” and “tQ<<” menu are
displayed and Q<< protection is active,
If “Q<< ?” = Yes only
Sets the value for the second reactive underpower
threshold Q<<.
Default value: 1W or 5W or 20W or 25W (see § 2.7.3.1)
If “Q<< ?” = Yes only
Selection of the directional angle between reactive power
and triggering power.
Setting range from 0° to 359°, step 1°
If “Q<< ?” = Yes only
Sets the time delay associated with Q<<.
The setting range is from 0 to 150s, in steps of 10ms.
Submenu [32N] EARTH WATTMETRIC (P126 and P127 only)
PROTECTION
Heading of [32N] earth wattmetric protection submenu.
[32N] Earth
Wattmetric
[32N] Mode:
Pe> ?
Pe
No
Selection of the function mode: “Pe” (wattmetric) or “Ie Cos”
(active component of the earth fault current).
Each Pe and IeCos threshold has its own setting (time
delay, threshold value etc), and the following instructionas
are also valid for the two modes (Pe will change to IeCos>.
Selection of the first alarm threshold function for Pe>. These
instructions are also valid for IeCos>.
Setting choice: No, Yes
Yes: the first earth wattmetric threshold (Pe> - Ie Cos)
protection window is shown (see § 2.7.4.1)
No: the next window will show the threshold menu “Pe>> ?”
- “IeCos>> ?”).
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Pe>> ?
Pe> Pe>>
ANGLE
2.7.4.1
No
90°
Page 61/96
Selection of the second earth wattmetric threshold (Pe>>)
protection. Setting choice: No, Yes
Yes the second earth wattmetric threshold (Pe>> IeCos>>) protection menu is shown (see § 0)
Only activated if at least one of the Pe/IeCos thresholds is
enabled.
Displays the setting angle for Pe/IeCos from 0° to 359°
(step 1°). This angle is the RCA angle for the directional
earth fault power.
First earth wattmetric threshold (Pe>) protection
Pe>
20 x 1 W
Sets the value for the first earth wattmetric threshold Pe>.
High sensitivity current: 0.001 to 1 In
Input voltage range 2-130V: The setting range is from 0.2
to 20 x Ien W, in steps of 0.02 x Ien W.
Input voltage range 10-480V: The setting range is from 1
to 80 x Ien W, in steps of 0.1 x Ien W.
The setting range for IeCos> is from 0.002 to 1Ien, in steps
of 0.001.
Medium sensitivity current: 0.01 to 8 In
Input voltage range 2-130V: The setting range is from 1
to 160 x Ien W, in steps of 0.1 x Ien W.
Input voltage range 10-480V: The setting range is from 4
to 640 x Ien W, in steps of 0.5 x Ien W.
The setting range for IeCos> is from 0.01 to 8 Ien, in steps
of 0.005.
Low sensitivity current: 0.1 to 40 In
For range 2-130V from 10 to 800 x Ien W, in steps of 1 x
Ien W.
For range 10-480V from 40 to 3200 x Ien W, in steps of 5
x Ien W.
The setting range for IeCos> is from 0.1 to 40 Ien, in steps
of 0.01.
Delay Type
t Pe>
K
TMS
DMT
150.00 s
Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are:
DMT (definite time) RI for the electromechanical inverse
time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay
curve and RECT curve.:
If “Delay type” = DMT only
Sets the value for the time delay associated with Pe> -or
IeCos>), from 0 to 150s (step 10ms).
1.000
If “Delay type” = RI only
Selection of K value for the RI curve from 0.100 to 10 (step
0.005).
1.000
If “Delay type” ≠ DMT and RI
Sets the time multiplier setting (TMS) value for the curve
from 0.025 to 1.5 (step 0,001).
Reset Delay Type
IDMT
If “Delay type” = IEEE/ANSI only.
Sets the reset delay time type.
Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse
Time).
If IDMT is selected, “RTMS” menu is displayed.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 62/96
RTMS
tReset
2.7.4.2
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.000
0.10 s
If “Reset Delay type” = IDMT only.
Sets the Reverse Time Multiplier Setting (RTMS) value
associated with the IDMT reset time choice, from 0.025 to
1.5 (step 0,001).
tReset menu is not displayed.
Sets the the reset time value.
The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms.
Second earth wattmetric threshold (Pe>>) protection
Pe>> ?
Pe>>
Yes
20 x 1 W
If the user selects Yes the following menu is shown.
Sets the value for the earth second wattmetric threshold
Pe>>.
High sensitivity current: 0.001 to 1 In
Input voltage range 2-130V: The setting range is from 0.2
to 20 x Ien W, in steps of 0.02 x Ien W.
Input voltage range 10-480V: The setting range is from 1
to 80 x Ien W, in steps of 0.1 x Ien W.
The setting range for IeCos>> is from 0.002 to 1In, in steps
of 0.001.
Medium sensitivity current: 0.01 to 8 In
Input voltage range 2-130V: The setting range is from 1
to 160 x Ien W, in steps of 0.1 x Ien W.
Input voltage range 10-480V: The setting range is from 4
to 640 x Ien W, in steps of 0.5 x Ien W.
The setting range for IeCos>> is from 0.01 to 8 In, in steps
of 0.005.
Low sensitivity current: 0,1 to 40 In
Input voltage range 2-130V: The setting range is from 10
to 800 x Ien W, in steps of1x Ien W.
Input voltage range 10-480V: The setting range is from
40 to 3200 x Ien W, in steps of 5 x Ien W.
The setting range for IeCos>> is from 0.5 to 40 In, in steps
of 0.01.
tPe>>
tReset
1.00 s
Sets the value for the second earth wattmetric threshold,
from 0 to 150 s (step 10ms).
1.00 s
Sets the value for the reset time from 0 to 100 s, in steps of
10ms.
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.7.5
Page 63/96
Submenu [46] NEG SEQ OC (P126 & P127 only)
PROTECTION G1
Heading of the negative phase sequence overcurrent
threshold (I2>) protection submenu.
[46] Neg Seq OC
I2> ?
I2>> ?
I2>>> ?
2.7.5.1
No
No
No
Setting choice: Yes or No
Yes: the first negative phase sequence overcurrent
threshold (I2>) protection is enabled. The first negative
phase sequence overcurrent threshold submenu (see §
2.7.5.1) is displayed.
No: the first negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold
(I2>) is not enabled, and the next menu is the “I2>> ?”
menu.
Setting choice Yes or No
Yes: the second negative phase sequence overcurrent
threshold (I2>>) is enabled. The second negative phase
sequence overcurrent threshold submenu (see § 2.7.5.2) is
displayed.
No: the second negative phase sequence overcurrent
threshold (I2>>) is not enabled, and the next menu is the
“I2>>> ?” menu.
Setting choice Yes or No
Yes: the third negative phase sequence overcurrent
threshold (I2>>>) is enabled. The third negative phase
sequence overcurrent threshold submenu (see § 2.7.5.3) is
displayed.
No: the third negative phase sequence overcurrent
threshold (I2>>>) is not enabled.
Submenu First negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (I2>) protection
I2> ?
I2>
Delay Type
tI2>
K
TMS
Yes
“Yes” option is selected.
The first negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold
(I2>) is enabled
1.00 In
Sets the value for the first negative phase sequence
overcurrent threshold I2>. The threshold setting range is
from 0.1 to 25In (steps 0.01In).
DMT
Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are:
SMT, RI, RECT, IEEE EI, IEEE VI, C08, IEEE MI, C02,
IEC LTI, IEC EI, IEC VI, IEC SI and IEC STI
150.00 s
If “Delay type” = DMT only
Sets the time delay associated with the first negative phase
sequence overcurrent threshold I2>, from 0 to 150 s (step
10ms).
1.000
If “Delay type” = RI only
Selection of K value for the RI curve from 0.100 to 10 (step
0.005).
1.000
If “Delay type” ≠ DMT and RI
Sets time multiplier setting (TMS) value associated to IEC
family of curves from 0.025 to 1.5 (step 0,001).
Reset Delay Type
IDMT
If “Delay type” = IEEE/ANSI only.
Displays the reset delay time type.
Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse
Time).
If IDMT is selected, “RTMS” menu is displayed.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 64/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
RTMS
1.000
tReset
2.7.5.2
0.10 s
Yes
I2>> =
t I2>>
5.00 In
150.00 s
“Yes” option is selected.
second threshold of the negative phase sequence
overcurrent I2>> is enabled
Sets the second threshold of the negative phase sequence
overcurrent I2>>
The threshold setting range is from 0.5 to 40 In, in steps of
0.01 In.
Sets the time delay associated with I2>> from 0 to 150s
(steps 10ms).
Threshold Menu I2>>>
I2>>> ?
I2>>>
t I2>>>
2.7.6
Displays setting value for the reset time.
The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms.
Threshold Menu I2>>
I2>> ?
2.7.5.3
If “Reset Delay type” = IDMT only.
Displays the Reverse Time Multiplier Setting (RTMS) value
associated with the IDMT reset time choice, from 0.025 to
1.5 (step 0,001).
tReset menu is not displayed.
Yes
“Yes” option is selected.
Third threshold of the negative phase sequence overcurrent
I2>> is enabled
10.00 In
Sets the value for the third threshold of the negative phase
sequence overcurrent I2>>, from 0.5 to 40In (step 0.01In).
150.00 s
Sets the time delay associated with I2>> from 0 to 150s
(step 10ms)
Submenu [49] Therm OL (P126 & P127 only)
PROTECTION G1
Heading of [49] submenu.
[49] Therm OL
Therm OL ?
Iθ >
Te
K
θ Trip
Yes
0.50 In
10 mn
Setting choice Yes or No
Yes: the thermal overload function is enabled. Then the
following menu is displayed.
No: the thermal overload function is not enabled, and no
menu content is displayed.
Sets the value for the thermal current threshold Iθ> from 0.1
to 3.2In (step 0.01In).
Sets value for the Te thermal time constant associated with
the thermal overload formula from 1 min to 200mn (step
1mn).
1.00
Sets the value for the K factor associated with the thermal
overload function, from 1 to 1.50 (step 0.01).
100%
Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal overload
trip threshold, from 50 to 200% (step 0.01).
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
θ Alarm ?
θ Alarm
2.7.7
Yes
80%
Page 65/96
Setting choice Yes or No.
Yes: the thermal overload alarm function is enabled. Then
the following menu is displayed.
No: the thermal overload function is not enabled and the
next menu is not activated.
Sets the percentage applicable to the thermal overload
alarm threshold, from 50 to 200% (step 0.01).
Submenu [37] UNDERCURRENT PROTECTION (P126 & P127)
Undercurrent function will:
−
start as soon as the current of one phase is below I< threshold value (OR of the 3
phases current)
−
trip if the current of one phase - at least - remains below this threshold during more
than tI<.
I< starting could be inhibited when CB is open (52a)
PROTECTION G1
Heading of [37] undercurrent submenu.
[37] Under
Current
I< ?
I<
t I<
Yes
Setting choice Yes or No
Yes: the first undercurrent threshold (I<) protection is
enabled. Then the following menu is displayed.
No: the first undercurrent threshold (I<) protection is not
enabled, and the next menu is not activated.
0.10 In
Sets the value for the undercurrent threshold I<, from 0.1 to
1In, in steps of 0.01In.
150.00 s
Sets the time delay associated with I<, from 0 to 150 s (step
10ms).
I< inhibited on 52A
No
I< inhibited on U<
No
I< inhibited on U<
10 V
When Yes is selected, this function inhibits undercurrent
protection on circuit breaker (52A) trip.
P127 only
When “Yes” is selected, this function inhibits undercurrent
protection on threshold undervoltage and displays the
following menu
When “I< inhibited on U<” = Yes only
Displays setting value for the I< threshold, from 10 to 480V
(step 0.1V)
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 66/96
2.7.8
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Submenu [59] PHASE OVERVOLTAGE Protection (P127)
PROTECTION G1
Heading of [59] Phase over-Voltage submenu.
[59] Phase
Over Voltage
U> ?
AND
Setting choice: No, AND or OR
Selection of the first phase overvoltage threshold (U>)
protection.
If AND or OR is selected, the first phase overvoltage
threshold (U>) protection is enabled. The first phase
overvoltage threshold (U>) submenu is displayed,
if OR is selected, the first overvoltage stage alarm is emitted if one
phase (at least) is faulty. If AND is selected, this alarm appears
when the stage appears on the three phases.
If No is selected, the first phase overvoltage threshold (U>)
protection is not enabled and the next menu is the “U>> ?”
menu.
U>
t U>
U>> ?
260.0 V
600.00 s
OR
If “U> ?” = AND or OR
Sets the value for the alarm threshold:
- Input voltage range 2–130V: from 1 to 260V (step 0.1V).
- Input voltage range 10–480V: from 10 to 960V (step0.5V).
If “U> ?” = AND or OR
Sets the time delay associated with U>, from 0 to 600s
(step 10ms).
Setting choice: No, AND or OR
Selection of the second phase overvoltage threshold (U>>)
protection.
If AND or OR is selected, the second phase overvoltage
threshold (U>>) protection is enabled. The second phase
overvoltage threshold (U>>) submenu is displayed,
if OR is selected, the second overvoltage stage alarm is emitted if
one phase (at least) is faulty. If AND is selected, this alarm
appears when the stage appears on the three phases.
If No is selected, the second phase overvoltage threshold
(U>) protection is not enabled and no new window will be
shown.
U>>
t U>>
260.0 V
600.00 s
If “U>> ?” = AND or OR
Sets the value for the second phase overvoltage threshold
(U>>).
- Input voltage range 2–130V: from 2 to 260V (step of 0.1V).
- Input voltage range 10–480V: from 10 to 960V (step 0.5V).
If “U>> ?” = AND or OR
Sets the time delay associated with U>>, from 0 to 600s
(step 10ms)
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.7.9
Page 67/96
Submenu [27] PHASE UNDER-VOLTAGE Protection (P127)
PROTECTION G1
Heading of [27] phase under voltage submenu.
[27] Phase
Under Voltage
U< ?
Yes
Setting choice: No, AND or OR
Selection of the first phase undervoltage threshold (U<)
protection.
If AND or OR is selected, the first phase undervoltage
threshold (U<) protection is enabled. The first phase
undervoltage threshold (U<) submenu is displayed,
if OR is selected, the first undervoltage stage alarm is emitted if
one phase (at least) is faulty. If AND is selected, this alarm
appears when the stage appears on the three phases.
If No is selected, the first phase undervoltage threshold
(U<) protection is not enabled and the next menu is the
“U<< ?” menu.
U<
t U<
5.0 V
150.00 s
52a Inhib. U< ?
No
U<< ?
U<<
t U<<
Yes
2.0 V
600.00 s
52a Inhib. U<< ?
No
If “U< ?” = AND or OR
Sets the value for the first phase undervoltage threshold
(U<).
- Input voltage range 2–130V: from 2 to130V (step 0.1V).
- Input voltage range 10 –480V: from 10 to 480V (step
0.5V).
If “U< ?” = AND or OR
Sets the time delay associated with U< from 0 to 600s,
(steps 10ms).
If “U< ?” = AND or OR
This function inhibits undervoltage protection on circuit
breaker (52A) trip. Setting choice Yes or No.
Setting choice: Yes or No
Selection of the second phase undervoltage threshold
(U<<) protection.
Yes, the second phase undervoltage threshold (U<<) is
enabled. The second phase undervoltage threshold (U<<)
protection submenu is displayed.
No: The second phase undervoltage threshold (U<<)
protection is not enabled, and no new window will be
shown.
If “U<< ?” = AND or OR
Sets the value for the second phase undervoltage threshold
(U<<).
- Input voltage range 2–130V: from 2 to 260V (step 0.1V),
- Input voltage range 10–480V: from 10 to 960V (step 0.5V).
If “U<< ?” = AND or OR
Sets the time delay associated with U<< from 0 to 600s
(step 10ms).
If “U<< ?” = AND or OR
This function inhibits undervoltage protection on circuit
breaker (52A) trip. Setting choice Yes or No.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 68/96
2.7.10
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Submenu [59N] RESIDUAL OVERVOLTAGE Protection
PROTECTION G1
Heading of [59N] residual (earth) overvoltage protection
submenu.
[59N] Residual
Over Voltage
Ue>>>> ?
Yes
Ue>>>>
t Ue>>>>
2.7.11
5.0 V
600.00 s
Setting choice: Yes or No
Selection of the residual overvoltage threshold (Ue>>>>)
protection.
Yes, the residual overvoltage threshold (Ue>>>>) is
enabled. The residual overvoltage threshold (Ue>>>>)
protection submenu is displayed,
No: The residual overvoltage threshold (Ue>>>>) is not
enable and no new window will be shown.
If “Ue>>>> ?” = Yes
Sets the value for the residual overvoltage threshold
(Ue>>>>).
- Input voltage range 2–130V: from 1 to 260V (step0.1V).
- Input voltage range 10–480V: from 10 to 960V (step 0.5V).
If “Ue>>>> ?” = Yes
Sets the time associated with Ue>>>>.from 0 to 600 s (step
10ms).
Submenu [47] NEGATIVE OVERVOLTAGE Protection (P127)
PROTECTION G1
[47] Negative
Over Voltage
Heading of [47] Negative overvoltage submenu.
V2> ?
Setting choice: No or Yes
Selection of the first negative overvoltage threshold (V2>)
protection.
If YES is selected, the first negative overvoltage threshold
(V2>) protection is enabled. The first negative overvoltage
threshold (V2>) submenu is displayed,
NO
If No is selected, the first negative overvoltage threshold
(V2>) protection is disabled and the next menu is the
“V2>> ?” menu.
V2>
tV2>
V2>> ?
15.0 V
If “V2> ?” = YES
Sets the voltage for the first V2> alarm threshold:
- Input voltage range 57–130V: from 1 to 130V (step 0.1V).
- Input voltage range 220–480V: from 4 to 480V (step 0.5V).
5.00 s
If “U> ?” = YES
Sets the operating time delay associated with V2>, from 0
to 100s (step 10ms).
YES
Setting choice: No or Yes
Selection of the first negative overvoltage threshold (V2>)
protection.
If YES is selected, the second negative overvoltage
threshold (V2>>) protection is enabled and the submenu is
displayed,
If No is selected, the second negative overvoltage threshold
(V2>) protection is disabled and no window will be shown
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
V2>>
260.0 V
tV2>>
2.7.12
5.00 s
Page 69/96
If “V2>> ?” = YES
Sets the voltage for the second V2>> alarm threshold:
- Input voltage range 57–130V: from 1 to 130V (step 1V).
- Input voltage range 220–480V: from 4 to 480V (step 0.5V).
If “U>> ?” = YES
Sets the operating time delay associated with V2>>, from 0
to 100s (step 10ms).
Submenu [79] AUTORECLOSE (P126 & P127 only)
The autoreclose function provides the ability to automatically close the circuit breaker after a
fault.
Up to 4 shot cycles can be configured . Each cycle implements a dead time and a reclaim
time.
During the autorecloser cycle, if the relay receives an order to change setting group, this
order is kept in memory, and will only be executed after the timer has elapsed.
Autoreclose function is available if:
•
•
and
a logical input is assigned to 52a state,
trip output relay is not latched to the earth and/or phase protection.
In addition to these settings, the user can fully link the autoreclose function to the protection
function using the menus “PROTECTION G1 / Phase OC” and “PROTECTION/ E/Gnd”.
PROTECTION G1
Heading of [79] AUTORECLOSE submenu.
[79] Autoreclose
Autoreclose ?
2.7.12.1
Yes
Selection of autoreclose function.
Yes: the autoreclose function is enabled. Then the “Ext CB
Fail ?” menu is shown,
Immediately could appear the message:“Conflict Recloser”.
Do not worry, you are hardly beginning to set your ARC and
some settings must be worked out.
No: no new window will be shown.
Selection Menu [79] EXTERNAL CB FAILURE
Ext CB Fail ?
Yes
Ext CB Fail Time
1.00 s
Allows the use of a dedicated input (CB FLT) to inform the
autoreclose function of the state of the CB (failed or
operational). This signal has to be assigned to a digital input
by the Automatic Control inputs submenu
Setting choice Yes or No.
Yes: The CB will be declared fault and the autoreclose will
move in the locked status when the Ext. CB Fail time will be
elapsed and the Ext CB Fail will stand active. The Ext. CB
Fail timer will start when the tD will be expired. If during this
time the signal Ext CB Fail will disappear the ARC will
continue with its programmed cycles
No: next window will show the submenu “Ext Block ?”.
If “Ext CB Fail”=Yes option is selected only.
Set the value for the external CB failure time delay tCFE.
The Ext. CB Fail timer will start when the tD will be expired.
If during this time the signal Ext CB Fail will disappear, the
ARC will continue with its programmed cycles. Once this set
time has elapsed, the information Ext CB Fail is validated.
Setting range is from 10ms to 600s (step 10ms).
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 70/96
2.7.12.2
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Selection Menu [79] EXTERNAL BLOCKING
Ext Block ?
2.7.12.3
Setting choice: Yes or No
Allows the use of a dedicated input (Block_79) to block the
autoreclose function.
If you set this item to Yes to make it active you have to
assign to a digital input the function Block 79 by the inputs
submenu in Automatic control function. With the Ext. Block
actived (the relevant digital input supplied) the autoreclose
will move to the locked status after a protection trip involved
in the sequences matrix of the ARC.
Circuit breaker activity supervision
Rolling demand ?
Yes
Setting choice: Yes or No
Yes: activates the trip activity supervision. At the first trip
order generated, the relay starts a temporization during
which, if the current trip number reaches the
programmed max trips number, the relay stops the
pending autoreclose cycle (definitive trip).
Max cycles nb
Setting range from 2 to 100 (step 1).
Sets the programmed maximum trip number.
Time period
2.7.12.4
Yes
10
10 mn
Setting range from 10mn to 1440mn (24h) (step 10mn).
Sets the temporization for trip activity supervision.
[79] Dead and Reclaim Time
The dead time (tD1, tD2, tD3 and tD4) starts when the digital input connected to the 52a,
auxiliary contact of the CB, is de-energised and the involved protection threshold reset. It
means that CB has tripped. If on trip protection the CB opening signal (52a) is lacking, after
a fixed time out of 2.00 s at 50 Hz or 1.67 s at 60 Hz, the ARC resets to the initial status. If
on trip protection the 52a signal changes status but the protection threshold trip stands the
tD timer will start when the protection trip threshold will disappear.
In the above case .
The 52a signal has to be assigned to a digital input by the inputs submenu in Automatic
control function. The 52a signal is in accordance with the CB status
Auxiliary Contact status
CB Status
52A
52B
-------------------
Valid
Invalid
Circuit Breaker open
Invalid
Valid
Circuit Breaker closed
Within the tD a further time window is active.This time window starts together to the td.It
expires after 50ms.
If within this time window a threshold involved in the trip of the CB and in the ARC cycle is
intermittent the ARC will be lock.
Dead Time
tD1
0.30 s
Displays setting value of the first cycle dead time (tD1) for
the autoreclose function from 0.01 to 300s (step 10ms).
Dead Time
tD2
180.00 s
As above for the second cycle dead time (tD2).
Dead Time
tD3
180.00 s
As above for the third cycle dead time (tD3).
Dead Time
tD4
180.00 s
As above fir fourth cycle dead time (tD4).
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.7.12.5
Dead Time
tI>
tI>>
tI>>>
0.05 s
0.05 s
0.05 s
DeadTime
tIe>
tIe>>
tIe>>>
0.05 s
0.05 s
0.05 s
Sets the value after a first, second and third trip This dead
time is used with an IDMT electromagnetic relay, and starts
when the CB opens. The induction disk returns to its initial
position during this additional time
Setting range is from 50ms to 600s (step 10ms).
As above for IE>, IE>> and IE>>>
Setting range is from 50ms to 600s (step 10ms).
Reclaim Time
tR
180.00 s
Set the Reclaimer time value (tR). The reclaim time , starts
when the CB has closed. Setting range is from 20ms to
600s (step 10ms).
After the reclaim time, if the circuit breaker does not trip
again, the autoreclose function resets; otherwise, the relay
either advances to the next shot that is programmed in the
autoreclose cycle, or, if all the programmed reclose
attempts have been accomplished, it locks out.
If the protection element operates during the reclaim time
following the final reclose attempt, the relay will lockout and
the autoreclose function is disabled until the lockout
condition resets.
Inhib Time
tI
The “Inhib Time tI” timer is used to block the autoreclose
being initiated after the CB is manually closed onto a fault.
The lockout condition can reset by a manual closing after
the "Inhib Time tI".
Setting range from 0.01s to 600s, in steps of 10ms.
5.00 s
[79] Phase and Earth Re-closing Cycles
Phase Cycles
E/Gnd Cycles
2.7.12.6
Page 71/96
4
Displays setting of autoreclose cycles externally started by
a phase protection trip signal or by tAux1.
Setting choice is from 0 to 4 cycles.
4
Displays setting of autoreclose cycles externally started by
an earth protection trip signal or by tAux2.
Setting choice is from 0 to 4 cycles.
[79] Cycles allocation
CYCLES
tI>
4321
1101
4321 are the cycles associated to the trip on tI> pick up
1201 are the actions to be executed after the tI> time delay
has elapsed:
0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip (autoreclose will
move in the lock status),
1 = trip on tI> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle
2 = no trip on tI> pick-up: and this whatever the setting is in
the “AUTOMAT. CRTL/Trip commands/Trip tI>” menu.
CYCLES
tI>>
4321
1101
As above for tI>>.
CYCLES
tI>>>
4321
1101
As above for tI>>>.
CYCLES
tIe>
4321
1101
As above for tIe>.
CYCLES
tIe>>
4321
1101
As above for tIe>>.
CYCLES
tIe>>>
4321
1101
As above for tIe>>>.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 72/96
2.7.13
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
CYCLES
tPe/Iecos>
4321
1101
As above for tPe/Iecos>.
CYCLES
tPe/Iecos>>
4321
1101
As above for tPe/Iecos>>.
CYCLES
tAux1
4321
1101
4321 are the cycles associated to the trip on tI> pick up
1201 are the actions to be executed after the tI> time delay
has elapsed:
0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip (autoreclose will
move in the lock status),
1 = trip on tI> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle
2 = no trip on tI> pick-up: and this whatever the setting is in
the “AUTOMAT. CRTL/Trip commands/Trip tI>” menu.
3 = autoreclose without trip (trip order is inhibited and no trip
is performed from autoreclose function).
CYCLES
tAux2
4321
1101
As above for tAux2
Submenu [81] Frequency (P127 only)
The following HMI description is given for F1 frequency. These menus are identical for F2,
F3, F4, F5 and F6 frequencies.
PROTECTION G1
Heading of [81] Frequency protection submenu.
[81] Frequency
F1 ?
No
F1 (Fn +/- 4.9Hz)
tF1
2.7.14
Selection of the first alarm threshold function for
over/underfrequency (F1). Setting choice: No, 81< or 81>.
If the user selects 81< or 81>, the “F1 (Fn +/- 4.9Hz)”
window is shown.
50 Hz
Displays setting value for the first alarm threshold, from 45.1
to 64.9Hz (step 0.01 Hz).
0.00 s
Displays setting value for the trip threshold from 0 to 600s
(step 10ms).
Submenu [81R] Freq. rate of change (P127 only)
The following HMI description is given for dF/dt1 rate of frequency. The menu is identical for
the 2nd to the 6th rates.
PROTECTION G1
[81R] Freq. rate of
change
Heading of [81R] rate of change of frequency protection
function.
dF/dt1 ?
Activation of the 1st rate of frequency stage (delta f / delta t)
Setting choice: Yes or No
dF/dt1=
No
1.0 Hz/s
Setting of the 1st frequency variation (ΔF) per second (Δt) in
Hz/s with Δt = 1 period (20ms at 50Hz)
Average value of dF/dt1 will be calculated using the number
of cycles set in the ‘CONFIGURATION / dF/dt Cycles.nb.’
menu.
The value is validated if it is repeted x times (x is set in the
‘CONFIGURATION / dF/dt Cycles.nb.’ menu)
Setting range; from –10Hz/s to +10Hz/s, step = 0.1Hz/s
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.8
Page 73/96
AUTOMAT. CTRL menu
The AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu makes it possible to programme the various automation
functions included in the MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays.
The different submenus are:
AUTOMAT.
CTRL
Trip
Commands
Latch
Relays
Blockin
Logic
Inrush
Blocking
(3)
Inputs
1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Brkn.
Cond ?
(2)
(3)
CT
Supervision
Logic
select 1/2
(2)
Output
relays
Cold
Load PU
(2)
51V
(3)
(3)
VT
Supervision
CB Fail
(2)
(2)
CB
Supervision
SOTF
Comm.Order
(3)
delay
(1)
(2)
(3)
2.8.1
(1)
(2)
Logic
Equations
(2)
P126 and P127: Blocking Logic 1/2
P126 and P127 only
P127 only
Submenu Trip Commands
This submenu makes it possible to assign some or all the selected thresholds to the trip logic
output (RL1).
TEXT
P125 P126 P127
INFORMATION
X
X
Time delayed 1 , 2nd or 3rd phase overcurrent
threshold trip
X
X
Time delayed 1st, 2nd or 3rd earth overcurrent
threshold trip
Trip tIe_d> or
tIe_d>>
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd derived earth overcurrent
threshold trip
Trip tP> or tP>>
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd directional power threshold
trip.
Trip tP< or tP<<
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd active underpower threshold
trip.
Trip tQ> or tQ>>
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd reactive overpower threshold
trip.
Trip tQ<< or tQ<<
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd reactive underpower
threshold trip.
X
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd earth overpower/IeCos
(wattmetric) threshold trip
Trip tI2>, tI2>> or
tI2>>>
X
X
Time delayed 1st, 2nd or 3rd negative phase
sequence overcurrent threshold (tI2>) trip.
Trip Thermal θ
X
X
Thermal overload threshold trip
Trip tU> or tU>>
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd overvoltage threshold trip.
Trip tU< or tU<<
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd undervoltage threshold trip.
Trip tI>, tI>> or
tI>>>
Trip tIe>, tIe>> or
tIe>>>
Trip tPe/IeCos>,
tPe/IeCos>>
X
X
st
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 74/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
TEXT
P125 P126 P127
tUe>>>>
X
X
Time delayed derived earth overvoltage threshold
Trip tV2> or tV2>>
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd negative overvoltage
threshold trip.
Trip tF1 to tF6
X
Time delayed 1st to 6th frequency threshold trips.
Trip dF/dt1 to
dF/dt6
X
1st to 6th rates of change of frequency protections
X
X
Broken conductor detection signal trip.
X
X
Time delayed auxiliary input Aux1 to Aux4 trips.
X
X
Time delayed auxiliary input Aux5 to Aux7 trips.
X
Time delayed auxiliary input Aux8 to Aux C trips
(option).
X
X
SOTF function to the trip output. When the tSOTF
has elapsed, the trip command is ordered. .
X
X
Control Trip function to the trip output relay RL1.
X
X
Logical output of Boolean Equations A to H.
Trip Brkn. Cond
Trip tAux1 to tAux4
X
Trip tAux5 to tAux7
X
INFORMATION
Trip tAux8 to tAuxC
Trip SOTF
Ctrl Trip
X
Trip tEQU A to
tEQU H
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of Trip Commands submenu.
Trip Commands
function
No
Setting choice Yes: Assign the corresponding time delay or
function to the trip output relay RL1. Then the trip output
relay (RL1) will be activated at the end of the time delay tI>.
Setting choice No: the trip output relay (RL1) will never be
activated, even at the end of the corresponding time delay
or function.
Refer to previous tables for protection functions list.
2.8.2
Submenu Latch Relays
With this submenu the user can program trip functions so that the resulting output signal will
remain latched after the cause for exceeding the threshold has disappeared.
2.8.2.1
Submenu Latch Relays
With the following menu the user can set each output relay as latched or not latched.
A “0” assigned to an output relay means that the relay is not latched. The output relay will be
active when the relevant command will be active; the relay will not be active when the
relevant command will reset.
A “1” setting assigned to an output relay means that the relay is latched. The output relay will
be active when the relevant command will be active; the relay will remain active, if the
relevant command will reset.
The active latched output relays can be reset by a logic input assigned to this function.
Further, the active latched output relays can be reset from the front panel by pushing .
This action is available if the window status Output Relays in OP. PARAMETERS submenu
is displayed.
The alarm string “Latched Relays” appears on LCD and the yellow LED is lighted.
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 75/96
AUTOMAT. CTRL
2.8.3
Latch Relays
Heading of submenu.
Latch
P125: only relays 1 to 6 are displayed.
In this example, the output relays set to Latch function are
number 4 and 7 (RL4 & RL7).
:87654321
01001000
Submenu Blocking Logic
The MiCOM P125 relay has the submenu Blocking Logic available for setting. MiCOM P126
& P127 relays have the submenu Blocking Logic 1 and Blocking Logic 2 available for setting.
By opening the Blocking Logic submenu the user can assign each delayed threshold to the "Blk
Log" input (refer to Inputs menu).
It is possible to enable or disable the “blocking” of most protection functions even if a logic
input has been assigned to that function.
TEXT
P125 P126 P127
INFORMATION
X
X
Time delayed 1st, 2nd or 3rd phase overcurrent threshold
X
X
Time delayed 1st, 2nd or 3rd earth threshold
tIe_d> or
tIe_d>>
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd derived earth overcurrent
threshold trip
tP> or P>>
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd active overpower threshold
tP< or tP<<
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd active underpower thresholds.
tQ> or tQ>>
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd reactive overpower thresholds.
tQ< or tQ<<
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd reactive underpower thresholds.
X
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd earth overpower/IeCos
(wattmetric) threshold
tI2>, tI2>>or
tI2>>>
X
X
Time delayed 1st, 2nd or 3rd negative phase sequence
overcurrent threshold.
tThermal θ
X
X
Time delayed thermal overload threshold.
tI<
X
X
Time delayed undercurrent threshold
X
Time delayed 1 or 2
tI>, tI>> or
tI>>>
tIe>, tIe>> or
tIe>>>
tPe/IeCos>,
tPe/IeCos>>
X
X
tU> or tU>
tU< or tU<<
st
nd
st
nd
overvoltage threshold
X
Time delayed 1 or 2
X
Time delayed derived earth overvoltage threshold
tV2> or
tV2>>
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd negative overvoltage threshold
tF1 to tF6
X
Time delayed 1st, 2nd, to 6th frequency thresholds.
dF/dt1 to
dF/dt6
X
Rates of change of frequency 1 to 6.
X
X
Broken Conductor trip signal.
X
X
Aux1 (to tAux4) delayed by tAux1 (to tAux4) time (Aux1,
2, 3 and 4 logic inputs and aux1, 2, 3 and 4 times are set
with “automat ctrl/inputs” menu)
X
X
Aux5, 6 and 7 delayed by tAux 5, tAux6 and tAux 7 times
tUe>>>>
X
tBrk. Cond
tAux1 to
tAux4
tAux5 to
tAux7
X
X
undervoltage threshold.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 76/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
TEXT
P125 P126 P127
tAux8 to
tAuxC
X
INFORMATION
Aux8 to Aux C delayed by tAux 8 to tAux C times (option)
Blocking of a protection function can be prevented if “No” is selected in the relevant window.
Blocking of a protection function can be enabled if “Yes” is selected in the relevant window.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of Blocking Logic submenu.
Blocking Logic
Block function
2.8.4
No
Enables or disables blocking logic of the function on the
level (logic state =1) of logic input “Blk Log”
Refer to previous tables for protection functions list.
Submenu Inrush Blocking Logic (P127 only)
Through the Inrush Blocking Logic submenu, the user can set a 2nd harmonic blocking
threshold and block each delayed overcurrent threshold by setting.
It is possible to enable or disable the “blocking” of most protection functions even if a logic
input has been assigned to that function. Blocking of a protection function can be prevented
if “No” is selected in the relevant window (see below). Blocking of a protection function can
be enabled if “Yes” is selected in the relevant window.
TEXT
INFORMATION
I>, I>> or I>>>
Instantaneous 1st, 2nd or 3rd phase overcurrent threshold
Ie>, Ie>> or Ie>>>
Instantaneous 1st, 2nd or 3rd earth overcurrent threshold
Ie_d> or Ie_d>>
Instantaneous 1st or 2nd derived earth overcurrent threshold
I2>, I2>> or I2>>>
Instantaneous 1st, 2nd or 3rd negative phase sequence overcurrent
threshold
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of the Inrush Blocking logic submenu.
Blocking Inrush
Blocking Inrush
Yes
Setting choice Yes: The crossing of the Harmonic H2
ratio threshold on any phase activates the Inrush
Blocking Logic function instantaneously.
Setting choice No: The crossing of the Harmonic H2 ratio
threshold doesn’t activate the Inrush Blocking logic
function.
Inr. Harmonic 2 Ratio =
20%
Set the value for the 2nd harmonic threshold ratio
calculated as a percentage of the fundamental
component from 10 to 35% (step 0.1%). Press to
validate your choice.
T Inrush reset =
Set the value for the Inrush tReset time. This provides a
reset delay of the Inrush Blocking signal (logic state=1)
once the 2nd harmonic level falls below the set threshold.
The setting range is from 0.0s to 2 s (step 10ms).
0 ms
Blocking Inrush Function
No
Enables or disables Inrush blocking for the function.
Refer to previous tables for protection functions list.
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.8.5
Page 77/96
Submenu Logic Select
With the submenu Logic Select. 1 or Logic Select. 2 the user can assign each trip threshold to
the "Log Sel" input (refer to Inputs menu).
The submenu Logic Select. 1 / Logic Select. 2 is only available in the software of the P126 &
P127 relays. The thresholds I>>, I>>> are from the protection function [67/50/51] and Ie>>,
Ie>>> from the protection function [67N/50N/51N].
Setting Yes or No enables or disables Logic Selectivity 1 of the following protection
functions:
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Logic Select. 1
Heading of Logic Select submenu.
Sel1 tI>>
Second trip threshold for phase overcurrent (tI>>).
Sel1 tI>>>
Third trip threshold for phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>).
Sel1 tIe>>
Second trip threshold for earth fault overcurrent (tIe>>).
Sel1 tIe>>>
Third trip threshold for earth fault overcurrent (tIe>>>).
Sel1 tIe_d>
P127 only
First time delayed derived earth overcurrent threshold trip
Sel1 tIe_d>>
P127 only
Second time delayed derived earth overcurrent threshold
trip
t Sel1
2.8.6
Displays time delay t Sel1 for Logic Select 1 .
The setting range for t Sel1 is from 0 s to 150 s, in steps of
10 ms.
150.00 s
Submenu Outputs Relays
This submenu makes it possible to assign various alarm and trip thresholds (instantaneous
and/or time delay) to a logic output. Excepted from this option are the Watchdog (RL0) and
the Tripping (RL1) outputs (refer to Trip Commands submenu).
The total number of programmable logic outputs for the three relay models is listed in the
table:
Model
P125
P126
P127
6
8
8
Output relays
The following functions can be assigned to output relays using this submenu.
Function
P125 P126 P127
INFORMATION
Trip
X
X
output signal Trip (RL1).
I>, I>> or I>>>
X
X
Instantaneous 1st, 2nd or 3rd phase overcurrent
threshold
tI>, tI>> or tI>>>
X
X
Time delayed 1st, 2nd or 3rd phase overcurrent
threshold
I_R>, I_R>> or
I_R>>>
X
X
1st, 2nd or 3rd trip threshold for directional phase OC
from the inverse trip zone (I_R>).
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 78/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Function
P125 P126 P127
tIA>, tIB> or tIC>
INFORMATION
X
X
Linking first delayed threshold for phase A (tIA>),
phase B (tIB>) or phase C (tIC>)
Ie>, Ie>> or Ie>>>
X
X
X
Instantaneous 1st, 2nd or 3rd earth overcurrent
threshold
tIe>, tIe>> or
tIe>>>
X
X
X
Time delayed 1st, 2nd or 3rd earth overcurrent
threshold.
Ie_R>, Ie_R>> or
Ie_R>>>
X
1st, 2nd or 3rd trip threshold for directional earth fault
overcurrent from the inverse trip zone (Ie_R>).
Ie_d> or Ie_d>>
X
1st or 2nd derived earth overcurrent threshold.
tIe_d> or tIe_d>>
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd derived earth overcurrent
threshold.
Ie_dR> or tIe_dR>>
X
1st or 2nd trip threshold for directional derived earth
overcurrent fault from the inverse trip zone.
P> or P>>
X
Instantaneous 1st or 2nd active overpower threshold.
tP> or tP>>
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd active overpower threshold.
P< or P<<
X
Instantaneous 1st or 2nd active underpower
threshold.
tP< or tP<<
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd active underpower
threshold.
Q> or Q>>
X
Instantaneous 1st or 2nd reactive overpower
threshold.
tQ> or tQ>>
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd reactive overpower
threshold.
Q< or Q<<
X
Instantaneous 1st or 2nd reactive underpower
threshold.
tQ< or tQ<<
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd reactive underpower
threshold.
Pe/IeCos> or
Pe/IeCos>>
X
X
X
Instantaneous 1st or 2nd earth overpower/IeCos
(wattmetric) threshold
tPe/IeCos> or
tPe/IeCos>>
X
X
X
Time delayed 1st or 2nd earth overpower/IeCos
(wattmetric) threshold
I2>, I2>> or I2>>>
X
X
Instantaneous 1st, 2nd or 3rd negative phase
sequence overcurrent threshold
tI2>, tI2>> or
tI2>>>
X
X
Time delayed 1st, 2nd or 3rd negative phase
sequence overcurrent threshold
ThermAlarm
X
X
thermal alarm.
ThermTrip
X
X
thermal trip threshold.
I<
X
X
Instantaneous undercurrent threshold
tI<
X
X
Time delayed undercurrent threshold
U> or U>>
X
Instantaneous 1 or 2
tU> or tU>>
X
Time delayed 1 or 2
st
st
st
nd
U< or U<<
X
Instantaneous 1 or 2
tU< or tU<<
X
Time delayed 1 or 2
st
nd
nd
nd
overvoltage threshold
overvoltage threshold
undervoltage threshold
undervoltage threshold
Ue>>>>
X
X
X
Instantaneous derived earth overvoltage threshold
tUe>>>>:
X
X
X
Time delayed derived earth overvoltage threshold
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Function
Page 79/96
P125 P126 P127
V2> or V2>>
X
INFORMATION
st
nd
negative overvoltage threshold
st
nd
negative overvoltage threshold
Time delayed 1 or 2
tV2> or tV2>>
X
Time delayed 1 or 2
F1 to F6
X
Instantaneous 1st to 6th frequency threshold
tF1 to tF6
X
Time delayed 1st to 6th frequency threshold
F.OUT
X
frequency out of range signal
dF/dt1 to dF/dt6
X
1st to 6th rates of change of frequency
BrknCond
X
X
Broken Conductor alarm signal.
CBAlarm
X
X
Circuit breaker alarm function signal (CB Open NB,
Amps(n), CB Open Time and CB Close Time).
52 Fail
X
X
circuit breaker trip supervision failure function
signal.
CBFail
X
X
circuit breaker failure function timer signal (tBF).
CB Close
X
X
circuit breaker closing order signal.
X
X
Aux1 to Aux4 delayed by Aux1 to Aux4 times
X
X
Aux5 to Aux7 delayed by Aux 5 to Aux7 times.
X
Aux8 to AuxC delayed by Aux 8 to Aux C times
(optional configuration).
tAux1 to tAux6
X
tAux5 ti Aux7
tAux8 to tAuxC
79 Run
X
X
"autoreclose in progress" information.
79 Trip
X
X
autoreclose final trip signal.
79 int. Lock
X
X
Autoreclose lock activated by the internal process
of the autoreclose
79 ext. Lock
X
X
Autoreclose lock activated by the input “block 79”
SOTF
X
X
SOTF functionality.
CONTROLTRIP
X
X
X
Control Trip command.
CONTROLCLOSE
X
X
X
Control Close command.
ActiveGroup
X
X
X
Close when Group 2 is active
Input1 to Input4
X
X
X
opto input 1 status to opto input 4 status.
X
X
opto input 5 status. to opto input 7 status
Input8 to inputC
X
opto input 8 status to opto input C status (optional
configuration).
VTS
X
Voltage Transformer Supervision signal
CTS
X
Current Transformer Supervision signal (P127)
X
logic equation A to logic equation H results trip
signals.
X
Remote communication orders (pulse commands
from remote devices through communication
protocols).
Input5 to input7
tEQU.A to tEQU.H
Order Comm1 to
Order Comm4
X
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 80/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
AUTOMAT. CTRL
2.8.7
Output Relays
Heading of Output Relays submenu.
Function
:8765432
0000010
Assigning the corresponding porotection function to the
output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3)
Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no
assignement
Function
:65432
00010
Submenu for P125
Submenu Inputs
Each relay model has a fixed number of opto-isolated logic inputs.
Logic inputs:
Model
Logic Input
P125
P126
P127
P127 with additional
inputs (option)
4
7
7
12
With the submenu Inputs it is possible to assign a label or an automation function to each
logic input (see the following table):
Label
designation
Label description
Unlatch
Unlocks latched output relays
X
X
X
Blk Log 1
Blocking logic 1
X
X
X
Blk Log 2
Blocking logic 2
X
X
52 a
Position of the circuit breaker (open)
X
X
52 b
Position of the circuit breaker (close)
X
X
CB FLT
External failure information from the CB
X
X
Aux 1 to Aux 4
Assigning external information to inputs Aux1 to Aux4
X
X
Aux 5 to Aux 7
Assigning external information to inputs Aux5 to Aux7
X
X
P125 P126 P127
X
Aux 8 to Aux C Assigning external information to inputs Aux8 to AuxC
(optional configuration)
X
Strt Dist
Starting of the disturbance recording function
X
X
Cold L PU
Cold load pick up assignment
X
X
Log Sel 1
Logic selectivity 1
X
X
Log Sel 2
Logic selectivity 2
X
X
Change set
Change of setting group (default setting group 1) when
the changing group parameter (‘CONFIGURATION /
Group select / change group’) is set to input.
X
X
Block_79
Blocking of the autoreclose function [79]
X
X
θ Reset
Reset of the thermal state
X
X
Trip Circ
Trip circuit supervision input
X
X
Start t BF
Start CB fail timer from external input
X
X
Maint. M
Maintenance Mode ON/OFF change
X
X
X
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Label
designation
Label description
SOTF
Start the Switch On To Fault automatism
Local
Local mode condition (if active, any remote operation
involving the output relays is forbidden)
Synchro.
Assign a Time synchronisation input
LED Reset or
Reset Led
Reset of the "Trip" & "Alarm" leds
Ctrl Trip
Assign a control trip function to the input. When
activated, it is possible to order output relay(s) affected
to the control trip function.
Ctr Close
Assign a control close function to the input. When
activated, it is possible to order output relays affected
to the CB Close (P126) or control close (P125 or P126)
function. For P127, this input can be started by the
SOTF feature.
P125 P126 P127
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inputs
…
Input 2
2.8.7.1
Page 81/96
AUTOMAT.
CTRL
Input 1
...
Input 8/C
Aux Times
Setting auxiliary timers at the end of submenu Inputs
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of Inputs submenu.
Inputs
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8 …
Input C
52a
Assigning label 52a to logic input 1.
To modify see above windows.
52b
Assigning label 52b to logic input 2.
To modify see above windows.
Aux1
Assigning label Aux1 to logic input 3.
To modify see above windows.
Log Sel 1
Assigning label Log Sel 1 to logic input 5 (P126 & P127
only).
To modify see above windows.
Block_79
Assigning label Block_79 to logic input 6 (P126 & P127
only).
To modify see above windows.
Cold L PU
Assigning label Cold L PU to logic input 7 (P126 & P127
only).
To modify see above windows.
Assigning label to logic inputs 8 to 12 (C) (P127 with
optional board only).
To modify see above windows.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 82/96
2.8.8
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Aux1 Time
tAux1
200.00 s
Displays setting value of timer assigned to logic input Aux1
from 0 ms to 200 s, in steps of 10 ms.
Aux2 Time
tAux2
200.00 s
As Aux1 for input Aux2.
Aux 3 Time
tAux 3
200.00 s
As Aux1 for input Aux3.
Aux4 Time
tAux4
200.00 s
As Aux1 for input Aux4.
Aux5 Time
tAux5
200.00 s
As Aux1 for input Aux 5.
Setting value: from 0ms to 20000s (step 10ms)
Aux6 Time
tAux6
200.00 s
As Aux1 for input Aux 6.
Setting value: from 0ms to 20000s (step 10ms)
Aux7 Time
tAux7
200.00 s
As Aux1 for input Aux 7.
Setting value: from 0ms to 20000s (step 10ms)
Aux8 Time
tAux8
200.00 s
…
Aux C Time
tAuxC
200.00 s
As Aux1 for input Aux 8, Aux 9, Aux 10, Aux 11 and Aux 12
(optional configuration only).
Submenu Broken Conductor (P126 & P127 only)
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Broken Conductor
Heading of Broken Conductor detector submenu.
Brkn. Cond ?
No
Selection of the Broken Conductor function.
If Yes is selected, the “Brkn.Cond Time” menu is displayed:
If No is selected, the Broken Conductor function is inactive.
Brkn.Cond Time
tBC
14400 s
Displays delay timer setting (tBC) for the Broken Conductor
function. from 0 to 14400s (step 1s).
Ratio I2/I1
Displays value, in percent, for the Broken Conductor
threshold. This threshold is the ratio between negative and
positive phase sequence current.
Setting range is from 20 to 100% by, in steps of 1%.
20 %
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.8.9
Page 83/96
Submenu Cold Load PU (P126 & P127 only)
The Cold Load Pick-Up (CLP) submenu allows enabling of the cold load pick-up function and
the associated settings.
TEXT
P126 P127
INFORMATION and COMMENTS
tI> ?
X
X
Time delayed I> threshold.
tI>> ?
X
X
Time delayed I>> threshold.
tI>>> ?
X
X
Time delayed tI>>> threshold.
tIe> ?
X
X
Time delayed tIe> threshold.
tIe>> ?
X
X
Time delayed tIe>> threshold.
tIe>>> ?
X
X
Time delayed tIe>>> threshold.
tIe_d> ?
X
Time delayed first derived earth overcurrent
threshold.
tIe_d>> ?
X
Time delayed second derived earth
overcurrent threshold.
tI2> ?
X
X
Time delayed tI2> threshold.
tI2>> ?
X
X
Time delayed tI2>> threshold.
ti2>>> ?
X
X
Time delayed tI2>>> threshold.
t Therm. ?
X
X
Time delayed Thermal overload threshold
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of Cold Load Pick-Up submenu.
Cold Load PU
In the following list, setting choice “Yes” assigns the corresponding function with the
loading pick-up function:
Cold Load PU ?
Input?
Auto?
No
Yes
No
Cold load pick-up function.
If Yes is selected, the following menu is displayed:
If No is selected, the cold load pick-up function is inactive
Setting choice “Yes” / “No”
If selected, the CLP will be started by digital input 52A
(selected using the “Cold Load PU xxx” menus),
Setting choice “Yes” / “No”
If selected, the CLP will be started by the automatic
detection of the CB closing when I grows from 5% IN to
more than IN in less than 200ms.
If “Input?” and “Auto?” are selected, CLP will be started by
digital input 52A and automatic detection of CB closing..
Cold Load PU
Function ?
No
Setting choice “Yes” assigns the corresponding function
(see the previous table) with the loading pick-up function.
Cold Load PU
Level
200 %
Displays scaling value, in percent, for the cold load pick up
assigned to the selected thresholds from 20% to 800%
(step 1%).
Cold Load PU
tCL
3600.0 s
Displays delay timer setting (tCL) for the Cold Load Pick-up
function, from 0.1 to 3600s (step 100ms).
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 84/96
2.8.10
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Submenu 51V (Overcurrent controlled by voltage transformer control (P127 only))
The 51V function can be inhibited when a VT fault occurs, using “Automatic Ctrl” / “VT
Supervision” / “VTS Blocks 51V” menu
2.8.11
51V
Heading of 51V submenu.
(U< OR V2>) & I>>?
No
Enable or disable the control of the start of the I>> by U<
and V2 > stages value. Setting choice: Yes or No
V2>?
Assigning the V2> threshold value for the inverse voltage
47 for the I>> control. Select from 3V to 200V (step 0.1V).
130V
(U<< OR V2>>) & I>>>?
No
Enable or disable the control of the start of the I>>> by U<<
and V2 >> stages value.Setting choice: Yes or No
V2>>?
Assigning the V2>> threshold value for the inverse voltage
47 for the I>>> control. Select from 3V to 200V by step of
0.1V.
130V
Submenu VT Supervision (P127 only)
Heading of the Voltage Transformer Supervision(VTS)
VT Supervision
VTS?
No
VTS Alarm?
No
Enable or disable the VT supervision function. Setting
choice: Yes or No
If Yes is selected, the “VT Supervision” menu is activated
and displayed:
If No is selected, the VT Supervision function is inactive.
The VTS function can issue an alarm signal when the
Voltage Transformer is lost. Setting choice: Yes or No
If No is selected, the Alarm (message and LED) will not be
displayed.
An alarm can be caused by an internal VT fault,
overloading, or faults on the interconnecting wiring.
VTS Blocks 51V?
No
VTS Blocks Protections?
No
The VTS function can block the 51V function when a VTS
alarm occurs (see § 2.8.10). Setting choice: Yes or No
The VTS function can be used to block voltage dependent
functions and to change directional overcurrent into nondirectional functions. Setting choice: Yes or No.
Note: all voltage and power protections are blocked if VT
fault occurs.
VTS Non-dir
I>
I>>
I>>>
Ie>
Ie>>
Ie>>>
Ie_d>
Ie_d>>
tVTS
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0.0s
Displayed when “VTS blocks protections?” = Yes, This
menu is used to change directional overcurrent in nondirectional function.
If Yes is selected, the directional overcurrent will be
changed into a non-directional overcurrent protection
function for the corresponding threshold,
If No is selected, even if VTS.
Sets the VTS timer. The VTS alarm will occur if VT fault
occurs during more than the VTS timer.
Setting range is from 0 to 100s, in steps of 10ms.
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.8.12
Page 85/96
Submenu CT Supervision (P127)
The Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) is used to detect failure of one or more of the ac
phase current inputs to the relay. The CT supervision feature operates on detection of
derived zero sequence current, in the absence of corresponding derived zero sequence
voltage normally associated. The CTS alarm will occur when zero sequence current is above
Ie> and zero sequence voltage is below Ue<, during more than tCTS time delay.
CT Supervision
Heading of the Current Transformer Supervision (CTS)
CT Supervision?
Enable or disable the CT supervision function. Setting
choice: Yes or No.
If Yes is selected, the “CT Supervision” menu is activated
and displayed:
If No is selected, the CT Supervision function is inactive.
Ie>
Ue<
tCTS
2.8.13
No
0.08 In
5V
0.2s
Selection of the zero sequence current threshold associated
to the CT Supervision detection function, from 0.08 × In to
1.0 × In (step 0.01 × In)
Selection of the zero sequence voltage threshold
associated to the CT Supervision detection function,
Setting ranges:
– from 0.5V to 22V, in steps of 0.1V (voltage input range 57
to 130V, P127xA)
– from 2V to 88V, in steps of 0.5V (for voltage input range
220 to 480V, P127xB)
Displays time delay setting (tCTS) for the CTS function.
Setting range from 0s to 100s, in steps of 10ms.
Submenu Circuit Breaker Fail (P126 & P127 only)
With the CB Fail submenu circuit breaker failure can be detected and associated parameters
can be set. This protection feature is only available for P126 & P127 relays.
Heading of CB Fail sub menu.
CB Fail
CB Fail ?
I< BF
CB Fail Time
tBF
Block I>?
Block Ie>?
No
0.02 In
0.00 s
Selection of the circuit breaker failure function. Setting
choice: Yes or No
If Yes is selected, the following menu is displayed:
If No is selected, the CB Fail function is inactive.
Selection of the under current threshold associated to the
CB failure detection function, from 0.02In to 1In (step
0.01In).
Displays time delay setting (tBF) for the CB Fail function.
Setting range is from 0 to 10 s, in steps of 10 ms.
Yes
Select the possibility to block the instantaneous signal I> in
case of circuit breaker failure detection. Setting choice: Yes
or No
Yes
Select the possibility to block the instantaneous signal Ie> in
case of circuit breaker failure detection.Setting choice: Yes
or No
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 86/96
2.8.14
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Submenu Circuit Breaker Supervision (P126 & P127 only)
With the CB Supervision submenu circuit breakers can be supervised and monitored, and
associated parameters can be set.
AUTOMAT.
CTRL
CB Supervision
TC Supervision
No
CB Open S'vision
Yes
Yes
tTrip Circuit tSUP
No
ΣAmps(n) ?
No
CB Close S'vision
No
CB Open Alarm ?
Yes
CB Open Time
CB Close Time
n
t Open Pulse
Yes
CB Open NB =
t Close Pulse
Yes
ΣAmps(n) ?
AUTOMAT. CTRL
CB Supervision
Heading of the CB Supervision submenu.
TC Supervision
Selection of the trip circuit supervision function.
If Yes is selected, the “t Trip Circuit t SUP” menu is
displayed.
Displays the delay timer setting (tSUP) for TC supervision,
from 0.1 to 10s (step 10ms).
Yes
t Trip Circuit
t SUP
200 ms
CB Open S'vision
Yes
CB Open Time
100 ms
CB Close S'vision
Yes
CB Close Time
100 ms
CB Open Alarm ?
Yes
CB Open NB =
ΣAmps(n) ?
ΣAmps(n) ?
0
Yes
1000 E6
n
t Open Pulse
t Close Pulse
1
100 ms
100 ms
Selection of the time monitoring function of CB open
operations.
If Yes is selected, the “CB Open Time” menu is displayed.
Displays monitoring time for CB open operations. from
0.05 to 1.0s (step 10ms).
Selection of the time monitoring function of CB close
operations. If Yes is selected, “CB Close” window is
displayed.
If No is selected the next window is CB Open Alarm.
Displays monitoring time for CB close operations, from
0.050 to 1.0s (steps of 10 ms).
Selection of the monitor function for maximum count of CB
operations.
If Yes is selected, the “CB Open NB” window is displayed.
Displays alarm threshold for CB open count from 0 to
50000 (step 1).
Selection of the monitoring function that continuously sums
the current (in Amps or square Amps) interrupted by the CB.
Setting choice: Yes, No.
If Yes is selected, “ΣAmps(n) ?” window is displayed.
Displays alarm threshold for the summation of the current
(in Amps or square Amps) interrupted by the CB, from 0 to
4000 E6 A (or A²) (step 1 E6). (E6 = 106)
Displays the exponent for the summation (I A or I² A²).
Setting choice for n: 1or 2
Displays and sets the tripping pulse time delay, from 0.1 to
5s, (step 10ms).
Displays and sets the closing pulse time delay, from 0.1 to
5s (step 10ms).
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.8.15
Page 87/96
Submenu SOTF (Switch on to fault) (P126 & P127 only)
With the Switch On To Fault (SOTF) submenu, it is possible to shorten the time to trip when
for example the relay has detected a fault that is still present on a feeder after energising.
Using this menu, when SOTF function is activated, it is possible to choose the origin of the
circuit breaker closing command which will start the SOTF feature. One or several origins
can be selected.
The SOTF function can be set using “Automatic Ctrl” menu, “Trip Command”, “Output relays”
and “Inputs”submenus.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of Switch On To Fault (SOTF) sub menu.
SOTF
Sotf?
t Sotf
No
Selection of the Sotf function.
Setting choice: Yes, No.
If Yes is selected, the following menu is displayed,
If No is selected, the Sotf sub menu is inactive.
0.10 s
Displays the delay timer setting (tSotf) for SOTF function,
from 0 to 500 ms (step 10 ms).
No
Enables/disables the possibility to start the SOTF by I>>.
Setting choice: Yes, No
No
Enables/disables the possibility to start the SOTF by I>>>.
Setting choice: Yes, No
I>>?
I>>>?
Yes/No
Enables/disables the possibility to start the SOTF function
by the dedicated logic input “Ctr Close”. This “Ctr Close”
input should be assigned to input 1, 2, 3 or 4 using
“Automat. ctrl/Inputs” menu.
Yes/No
Enables/disables the possibility to start the SOTF function
by the dedicated logic input “SOTF”. This “SOTF” input
should be assigned to input 1, 2, 3 or 4 using “Automat.
ctrl/Inputs” menu.
HMI closing order:
Yes/No
Enables/disables the possibility to start the SOTF function
by a user’s manual closing order, using interface.
[79] closing
Yes/No
Enables/disables the possibility to start the SOTF function
by an internal autoreclose order.
Front comm. order
Yes/No
Enables/disables the possibility to start the SOTF function
by a front port communication order.
Rear comm. order
Enables/disables the possibility to start the SOTF function
with an order sent to the rear port communication.
Ctrl close input
SOTF Input
Yes/No
Rear2 comm. order
Yes/No
When existing, enables/disables the possibility to start the
SOTF function with an order sent to the second rear port
communication.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 88/96
2.8.16
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Submenu Logic Equations (P126 & P127 only)
With the Logic Equations submenu, it is possible to form up to 8 complex Boolean functions
using NOT, AND and OR operators (in order of priority). Up to 16 operands can be used in
any single equation. The following logic signals are available for mapping to an equation:
TEXT
Information
None
No link/assignment
I>, I>> or I>>>
Instantaneous 1st, 2nd or 3rd phase overcurrent threshold
tI>, tI>> or tI>>>
Time delayed 1st, 2nd or 3rd phase overcurrent threshold
Ie>, Ie>> or Ie>>>
Instantaneous 1st, 2nd or 3rd earth overcurrent threshold
tIe>, tIe>> or tIe>>>
Time delayed 1st, 2nd or 3rd earth overcurrent threshold
Pe> or Pe>>
1st and 2nd earth wattmetric alarm threshold
tPe> or tPe>>
Time delayed 1st or 2nd earth wattmetric trip threshold
I2>, I2>> or I2>>>
Instantaneous 1st, 2nd or 3rd phase negative sequence
threshold
tI2>, tI2>> or tI2>>>
Time delayed negative phase sequence (1st; 2nd or 3rd
threshold)
θ Alarm
Thermal alarm output signal
θ Trip
Trip on Thermal overload
I<
Instantaneous undercurrent threshold
tI<
Time delayed undercurrent
U> or U>>
Instantaneous 1st or 2nd overvoltage threshold (P127)
tU> or tU>>
Time delayed 1st or 2nd overvoltage threshold (P127)
U< or U<<
Instantaneous 1st or 2nd undervoltage threshold (P127)
tU< or tU<<
Time delayed 1st or 2nd undervoltage threshold (P127)
Ue>>>>
Instantaneous threshold for residual overvoltage
tUe>>>>
Time delayed trip threshold for residual overvoltage
tBC
Time delayed broken conductor
79 Trip
Autoreclose final trip
Input1 to Input 7:
opto input 1 to input 7 status.
Input8 to Input C
opto input 8 to input C status (optional configuration).
t Aux 1 to tAux 7
Copy of the status of the Logic Input delayed by tAux1 (…
tAux7) time
t Aux 8 to tAux C
Copy of the status of the Logic Input delayed by tAux8 to tAux
C time (optional configuration)
P> or P>>
Instaneous 1st or 2nd active overpower trip threshold (P127)
tP> or tP>>
Time delayed 1st or 2nd active overpower trip threshold (P127)
P< or P<<
Instaneous 1st or 2nd active underpower trip threshold (P127)
tP< or tP<<
Time delayed 1st or 2nd active underpower trip threshold
(P127)
Q> or Q>>
Instaneous 1st or 2nd reactive overpower trip threshold (P127)
tQ> or tQ>>
Time delayed 1st or 2nd reactive overpower trip threshold
(P127)
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 89/96
TEXT
Information
Q< or Q<<
Instaneous 1st or 2nd reactive underpower trip threshold
(P127)
tQ< or tQ<<
Time delayed 1st or 2nd reactive underpower trip threshold
(P127)
V2>, V2>>
Instaneous 1st or 2nd negative overpower trip threshold (P127)
tV2>, tV2>>
Time delayed 1st or 2nd negative overpower trip threshold
(P127)
F1 to F6
Instantaneous first to sixth frequency trip threshold (P127)
tF1 to tF6
Time delayed first to sixth frequency trip threshold (P127)
dF/dt1 to dF/dt6
1st to 6th rates of change of frequency
VTS
Instantaneous Voltage Transformer Supervision output signal
(P127)
CTS
Instantaneous Current Transformer Supervision signal (P127)
Ie_d>, Ie_d>>
Instantaneous 1st or 2nd derived earth overcurrent threshold
tIe_d>, tIe_d>>
Time delayed 1st or 2nd derived earth overcurrent threshold
79 i.Blo
Autoreclose lock activated by the internal process of the
autoreclose (Internal Blocking)
79 e.Blo
Autoreclose lock activated by the input “block 79” (External
Blocking)
tEQU. A to tEQU. H
Results of equations A to H.
CB FLT
Circuit Breaker failure
C.Order1 to C.Order4
P127 only
Remote communication orders (pulse commands from
remote devices through communication protocols)
Example settings for Equation A
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Logic Equations
Equation A
Heading of Equation A submenu.
Equ.A Toperat.
0.00s
The time of operation setting is used to set the minimum
time of truth of the selected conditions before validating the
truth of the logic operation.
Setting choice: from 0 to 600s, step 10ms
0.00s
The reset time sets a minimum time before the logic
operation is not true when at least one condition is not true.
Setting choice: from 0 to 600s, step 10ms
Equ.A Treset.
The following submenu are identical from A.01 to A.15.
Equation A.00
=
1/2
Null
Equation A.00
2/2
=
None
Boolean function: Setting choice: “=”, “= Not”
Logic signal: Setting Choice: Null and logic signals (see
table)
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 90/96
2.8.17
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Submenu Comm. Order delay (P127 only)
It is possible to send to MiCOM P127 relays up to four remote communication orders. These
signals can be assigned to output relays 2-8, and are available in the Boolean Logic
equations.
This menu sets individually the pulse length of the "communication orders" pulses.
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of remote communication order sub menu.
Comm. Order
delay
tOrder Comm 1
0.1s
tOrder Comm 2 0.1s
tOrder Comm 3 0.1s
tOrder Comm 4 0.1s
Sets the pulse duration for the reception of the remote
“communication order 1” signal.
Setting range from 0s to 600s, in steps of 50ms.
As above for communication orders 2, 3 and 4.
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.9
Page 91/96
RECORDS menu
With the RECORDS menu stored data, events, disturbances and monitoring signals from
various submenus can be displayed and read.
The different submenus are:
RECORDS
CB
Monitoring
Fault Record
Disturb
Record
(1)
Time Peak
Value
(1)
2.9.1
(1)
Rolling
Demand
(1)
Instantaneous
P126 and P127 only
Submenu CB Monitoring (P126 & P127 only)
With the CB Monitoring submenu it is possible to read and clear counter values associated
with the circuit breaker.
RECORD
Heading the RECORD menu.
CB Monitoring
Heading the CB Monitoring submenu.
CB Opening Time
0.05 s
Displays the circuit breaker opening time.
CB Closing Time
0.05 s
Displays the circuit breaker closing time.
CB Operations
RST = [C]
Displays the number of opening commands executed by the
circuit breaker. To clear these values, press .
0
Displays the summation of the current (in Amps or square
Amps) interrupted by the CB. Stored current values for all 3
phases are cleared together. To clear these values, press
.
Σ Amps (n)
RST = [C]
Σ Amps (n) IA
Σ Amps (n) IB
Σ Amps (n) IC
2 E04
Displays the summation value of the current (in Amps or
square Amps) for phase A interrupted by the circuit breaker.
As above for phase B.
2 E04
As above for phase C.
2 E04
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 92/96
2.9.1.1
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Submenu Fault Record
The Fault Record submenu makes it possible to read up to 25 stored fault records, that
occurred when programmed thresholds were exceeded.
The fault records are generated by the operation of trip relay RL1.
NOTE:
All measurement magnitude values refer to the transformer primary
side.
RECORD
Heading of Fault Record submenu
Fault Record
Record Number
Fault Time
Fault Date
5
Selection one of the 25 Fault Record to be displayed
(selection = 5).
13:05:23
Displays the time when the fault was recorded. The format
of the time is hh:mm:ss.
In this example the fault was recorded at 1:05:23 pm.
12/11/01
Displays the date when the fault was recorded. The format
of the Date is DD/MM/YY.
In this example, the fault was recorded on November 12th
2001.
Active Set Group
1
Displays the active setting group (1 or 2).
Faulted Phase
PHASE A
Displays the phase, where a fault occurred, for the chosen
fault record. (NONE, PHASE A, B, C, EARTH)
Threshold
Displays the origin of the fault that generated the trip order
Magnitude
IA Magnitude
IB Magnitude
IC Magnitude
----1200 A
1200 A
1200 A
1280 A
IN Magnitude
103 A
Displays the magnitude value of the fault: Voltage, current,
earth power. The value is based on the amplitude at 50 or
60 Hz.
Displays the magnitude value of the phase A current at the
time of the fault.
As above for phase B.
As above for phase C.
As above for earth current.
VAB Magnitude
10 KV
Displays the magnitude value of the phase A to phase B
voltage at the time of the fault (P127 only).
VBC Magnitude
10 KV
Displays the magnitude value of the phase B to phase C
voltage at the time of the fault (P127 only).
VCA Magnitude
10 KV
Displays the magnitude value of the phase C to phase A
voltage at the time of the fault (P127 only).
VN Magnitude
Displays the magnitude value of the residual voltage at the
time of the fault.
IA^VBC Angle
100 V
----°
Displays the angle between phase A current and phase B to
phase C voltage at the time of the fault (P127 only).
The indication is ----° if the angle cannot be measured.
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
IB^VCA Angle
IC^VAB Angle
IN^VN Angle
2.9.1.2
Page 93/96
----°
Displays the angle between phase B current and phase C to
phase A voltage at the time of the fault (P127 only).
The indication is ----° if the angle cannot be measured.
----°
Displays the angle between phase C current and phase A to
phase B voltage at the time of the fault. (P127 only)
The indication is ----° if the angle cannot be measured.
----°
Displays the angle between earth current and voltage at the
time of the fault.
The indication is ----° if the angle cannot be measured.
Submenu Instantaneous
The instantaneous sub-menu makes possible to read the various parameters for each of the
last five starting information.
NOTE:
All measurement magnitude values refer to the transformer primary
side.
RECORD
Heading of the Instantaneous sub-menu.
Instantaneous
Number
Hour
Date
Origin
Lenght
Trip
5
Selection of the Istantaneous Record number 5 to be
displayed (selection: 1 to 5).
13:05:23
Displays the time when the istantaneous record was
recorded. The format of the time is hh:mm:ss.
In this example the fault was recorded at 1:05:23 pm.
12/11/01
Displays the date when the instantaneous record was
recorded. The format of the Date is DD/MM/YY.
In this example, the fault was recorded on November 12th
2001.
----70 ms
No
Display the origin of the start information.
Display the length of the start information.
Display if a trip has succeeded to the start information..
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
User Guide
Page 94/96
2.9.2
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Submenu Disturb Record
The Disturb Record submenu makes it possible to open and read disturbance records. Each
disturbance record consists of analogue and digital data. Up to 9 seconds disturbance
record(s) duration can be stored (5 x 3s, 4 x 3s, 3 x 5s, 2 x 7s or 1 x 9s). The beginning of
the record can be adjusted with a selected pre-time.
RECORD
Heading of Disturb Record submenu.
Disturb Record
Records number ?
Pre-Time
5
0.1 s
Disturb rec Trig
ON INST.
2.9.2.1
Setting choices: 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
Sets the disturbance record length. This setting choice
adjusts the number of records according to the record
length. Setting choice allows 5 records of 3 seconds, 4
records of 3 seconds, 3 records of 5 seconds, 2 records of
7 seconds or 1 record of 9 seconds.
Selection of the disturbance record pre-time from 100 ms to
2.9s, 4.9s, 6.9s or 8.9s (record length minus 0.1s) in steps
of 100 ms.
The pre-time adjusts the beginning of the disturbance
record: In this example, the record starts 100ms before the
disturbance. Its length is fixed.
Selection of start criteria for the disturbance recording
function. Select between ON INST. (start on instantaneous
thresholds) and ON TRIP (start on trip conditions) by
pressing or . Press to confirm choice.
Submenu Time Peak Value (P126 & P127 only)
The Time Peak Value submenu makes it possible to set parameters associated to this
function. (Peak and average values displayed in the Measurements menu).
RECORD
2.9.2.2
Time Peak Value
Heading of Time Peak Value submenu.
Time Window
Selection of the time window during which peak and
average values are stored. Selet choice: 5mn, 10mn,
15mn, 30mn, or 60mn.
5 mn
Submenu Rolling Demand (P126 & P127)
The Rolling Demand sub-menu makes possible to set the rolling sub-period and the number
of the sub-period for the calculation of the 3 phase Rolling Average and peak demand
values, available in the Measurement menu.
RECORD
Rolling Demand
Heading of the Rolling Demand sub-menu.
Sub Period
Set the window of time of the subperiod used to calculate
rolling average values, from 1mn to 60mn (step 1mn)
Num of Sub Per
1 mn
1
Select the number of sub-period used for the calculation of
the average of these average values.
User Guide
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.
Page 95/96
WIRING
The MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays have the same terminal layout for common
elements. The wiring diagram for each model is provided in Appendix 1 of the Technical
Guide.
3.1
Auxiliary Power Supply
The auxiliary power supply for the MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays can be either direct
current with a voltage range of 24-60 VDC, 48-250 VDC, 130-250 VDC, or alternative current
with a voltage of 48-250 VAC/ 50-60 Hz. The voltage range (Ua) is specified on the adhesive
paper label under the top hinged cover on the front of the relay.
The auxiliary power supply must only be connected to terminals 33 and 34.
3.2
Current Measurement Inputs
The MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays have up to eight current inputs (2 times 4 earth and
phase current inputs).
The nominal current value of the measuring inputs is either 1 Amp or 5 Amp (refer to wiring
diagram). For the same relay, the user can mix the 1 and 5 Amp inputs between phases and
earth.
NOTE:
3.3
All phase inputs must have the same rating (1 or 5 Amps).
Digital Inputs
The number of logic inputs depends on the relay model. The relays have programmable
opto-isolated logic inputs, which may be assigned to any available label or function.
Digital inputs for each relay model:
Model
Digital Inputs
P125
P126
P127
4
7
7 / 12
The voltage range of the inputs is universal (from 24-240Vac/250 Vdc).
3.4
Output Relays
The number of logic outputs depends on the relay model. The relays have configurable logic
outputs, which may be assigned to any available function.
The normally closed (NC) contact of the Watchdog (RL0) is not configurable. The other
contacts are configurable to functions available in the relay. A basic output matrix is included
in the relay. Some logic outputs have changeover contacts. RL1 and RL2 can be configured
to be fail safe or not.
Logic outputs for each relay model:
Model
Logic outputs
P125
P126
P127
6
8
8
The first logic output (RL0) is dedicated to indicate a relay failure (Watchdog, WD) and is not
part of this table.
3.5
Communication
3.5.1
RS485 Rear Communication Port
All MiCOM relays have one RS485 rear communication port by default. The terminals 29-3031-32 are dedicated to the RS485 communication port. An optional RS485 port is available
on P127.
See wiring diagrams in chapter P12y/EN CO of the Technical Guide.
P12y/EN FT/Fa5
Page 96/96
3.5.2
User Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
RS232 Front Communication Port
MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays provide the user with a RS232 communication port on
the front panel. This link is dedicated to MiCOM setting software.
The cable between the relays and the PC is a standard RS 232 shielded cable.
The relay requires a RS232 cable with a 9-pin male connector.
The wiring of the RS232 cable must be as follows:
RS232 PC PORT
9 pin male connector
MiCOM P125/6/7 end
9 pin female connector
P0073ENa
FRONT PANEL PORT COMMUNICATION RS232 CABLE WIRING
A USB/RS232 cable can also be used to communicate to the relay.
Menu Content Tables
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
MENU CONTENT TABLES
Menu Content Tables
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Page 1/24
CONTENTS
1.
MiCOM P125 – V15 SOFTWARE
3
2.
MiCOM P126 – V15 SOFTWARE
6
3.
MiCOM P127 – V15 SOFTWARE
13
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Menu Content Tables
Page 2/24
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
BLANK PAGE
****
11/06/07
Format Date
P rivate
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Time
14 : 15 : 34
Date
Date
654321
001011
Relay
Status
INH Alarm tAux2?
No
INH Alarm tAux1?
No
Reset Led on
Fault
No
Alarm.Inh. Eq A?
Alarm.Inh. Eq H?
65W4321
0000000
Input
Setting group
1
Menu
Inst. Self-reset
No
Change group
Input
4321
0101
No
Relays
CMD
Yes
Maintenance Mode
No
Fail
654321
safe re.000000
Alarms
Group Select
Input
Status
Voltage input
DC
Inputs :4321
↑↑↑↑
Output
relays
INH Alarm tAux4?
Yes
E/Gnd VT sec
100.0 V
Led
Ie>
tIe>
Ie>>
tIe>>
Ie>>>
tIe>>>
Pe/IeCos >
tPe/IeCos>
Pe/IeCos>>
tPe/IeCos>>
Ue>>>>
tUe>>>>
Input1/2/3/4
tAux1/2/3/4
Inputs
configuration
Active Group =
1
Dist rec start
No
Software version
15.x
E/Gnd primary
0.10 kV
E/Gnd VT sec
5A
E/Gnd VT primary
5A
LED 5/6/7/8
INH Alarm tAux3?
Yes
Close Order
No
Reference
MiCOM
N
Transfo ratio
Frequency
50 Hz
Open Order
No
No
Earth text
Confirm ation ?
No
Yes
General
options
C ONFIGURATION
Record Reset
No
Description
P125 -0
Language
EN GLISH
P assword
ORDERS
1.
OP PARAMETERS
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
Menu Content Tables
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Page 3/24
MiCOM P125 – V15 SOFTWARE
0.00A
0.00 W
3.15V
0.00A
IN^VN Angle
0.0°
IeCos
Pe
UN
IN-fn
RST=[C]
3.15 A
No
1
1
8
None
Relay address
Stop Bits
Data Bits
P arity
Baud rate
19200 bd
Yes
Communication ?
Yes
Frequency
50.00 Hz
IN
COMMUN ICATION
MEASUREMENTS
No
Dir
No
Ie>>>
10.00 In
Ue>
260.0V
Ie> Torque
0°
Ie> Trip ± 10.0%
tIe>>>
0.00s
tReset
0.04s
Ie>>> ?
Dir
Ie>>
10.00 In
Ie>> Torque
0°
Ie>> Trip
Delay type
DMT
tIe>>
0.00s
Ie>> ?
Ie>>>
tIe >>>
tReset
10.00 In
0.00s
0.04s
Yes / Peak
Ie>>
10.00 In
Delay type
DMT
tIe >>
0.00s
Yes
Ie>
10.00 In
Delay ty pe
DMT
tIe>
0.00s
tReset
0.04s
Yes
No
No
Yes
Pe
No
Pe
Yes
No
0°
160.0x1W
0.00s
0.04s
Pe/IeCos Angle
Pe>>
tPe>>
tReset
P e>>
Pe>
160.0x1W
Delay Type
DMT
tPe>
0.00s
tR eset
0.04s
Pe>
Mode
[32N] Earth
Wattmetric
No
No
Yes
No
IeCos
Yes
No
Pe/IeCos Angle
0°
IeCos>> 8.000Ien
tIeCos>>
0.00s
tReset
0.04s°
tIeCos>>
IeCos> 8.000Ien
Delay Type
DMT
tIeCos>
0.00s
tReset
0.04s
IeCos>
No
Ue>>>>
tU e>>>>
5.0 V
0.00s
Yes
Ue>>>> ?
260.0 V
[59N] residual
Over V oltage
Page 4/24
No
No
No
Dir
No
Ie>
10.00 In
Ue>
1.0V
Ie > Torque
0°
Ie> Trip ± 50.0%
Delay type
DMT
tIe >
0.00s
tReset
0.04s
Ie> ?
[67N] E/Gnd
PROTECTION G1/G 2
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Menu Content Tables
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
No
No
No
tAux1
tAux2
tAux3
tAux4
C trl Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip tUe>>>>
No
No
No
No
No
No
Trip tPe/IeCos>
No
Trip tPe/IeCos >>
No
Trip tIe>
Trip tIe>>
Trip tIe>>>
Trip Commands
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Latch
:654321
000000
Latch Relays
Block tAux1
Block tAux2
Block tAux3
Block tAux4
No
No
No
No
Block tUe>>>>
No
Block tPe/IeCos>
No
Block tPe/IeCos >>
No
Block tIe>
No
Block tIe>>
No
Block tIe>>> No
Blocking Loqic
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
65432
00100
Ie >
tle >
Ie >>
tle >>
Ie >>>
tle >>>
Pe/IeCos >
tPe/IeCos>
Pe/IeCos>>
tPe/IeCos>>
Ue>>>>
tUe>>>>
tAux1
tAux2
tAux3
tAux4
C ontrol trip
Control Close
Active Group
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Trip
Output Relays
Aux1 Time
tAux1
tAux2
tAux3
tAux4
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Aux Time
Unlatch
Blk Log
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Strt Dist
Changeset
Maint. M.
Local
Synchro
Led Reset
Ctrl Trip
Ctrl C lose
Inputs 1/2/3/4
Inputs
s
s
s
s
I>
No
1.3 s
Disturb Rec Trig
ON INST.
Pre-Time
Records number
5
Disturbance Record
Trip
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
IN^VN Angle
0°
VN Magnitude
0.00V
IN Magnitude
103 A
Magnitude
1200 A
Threshold
57 ms
Faulted Phase
EARTH
Length
Ie>
Origin
Active Set Group
2
09/01/01
Date
Fault Date
09/01/01
5
Hour
13:07:15:53
Number
Record Number
25
Fault Time
12:05:23:42
Instantaneous
Fault Record
RECORDS
Menu Content Tables
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Page 5/24
****
50 Hz
Time
14 : 15 : 34
11/06/07
87654321
00001011
Relay
Status
Date
754321
000101
Input
Status
No
No
No
Phases/Earth Text
L1 L2 L3 N
Default Displays
RMS IA IB IC IN
Phase rotation
A-B-C
General options
CON FIGURATION
5A
Line VT primary
0.10 kV
E/Gnd CT sec
5A
E/Gnd CT primary
5A
Line CT sec
Line CT primary
5A
Transfo ratio
Led
I>
tI>
I>>
tI>>
I>>>
tI>>>
tIA>
tIB>
tIC>
Ie>
tIe>
Ie>>
tIe>>
Ie>>>
tIe>>>
Pe/IeCos>
tPe/IeCos>
Pe/IeCos>>
tPe/IeCos >>
I2>
tI2>
I2>>
tI2>>
I2>>>
tI2>>>
Therm Trip
I<
tI<
Ue>>>>
tUe>>>>
Brkn. Cond
CB Fail
LED 5 / 6 / 7 / 8
No
Input1 /2 /3 /4
Input5 /6 /7
79 Run
79Int Locked
79Ext Locked
tAux1 /2/3/4/5/6/7
t SOTF
Voltage input
DC
Inputs :7654321
↑↑↑↑↑↑↑
Inputs
configuration
Relays8765W4321
CMD 000000000
Yes
Maintenance Mode
No
Fail 87654321
safe re.00000000
Output
relays
Input
Setting group
Menu
1
Change group
Input
Group Select
Page 6/24
Active Group =
1
Frequency
Software version
15.x
Dist rec start
Close Order
Reference
MiCOM
Open Order
No
Confirmation ?
No
Yes
Record Reset
No
Description
P126-2
Language
ENGLISH
Password
ORDERS
2.
OP PARAMETERS
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Menu Content Tables
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
MiCOM P126 – V15 SOFTWARE
Alarm.Inh. Eq A?
Alarm.Inh. Eq H?
0.00 A
600.00 A
3.15 A
600.00 A
IeCos
Pe
UN
0.00A
0.00 W
3.15V
RATIO I2 / I1 =
0%
I2
I1
IN
IC
IC Rms
600.00A
Average IA Rms
600.00A
Max
IB Rms
600.00A
IA Rms
600.00A
Max
Max
IA Rms
600.00A
Max
MAX & AVERAGE
RCT=[C]
THERMAL STATUS
RST=[C] 0%
0.00A
C ycle 2 recloses
0
ROLLING AVE RAGE
IA Rms
600.00A
Reclose Stats
RST=[C]
ROLLING AV ERAGE
IC Rms
600.00A
Total Trip &
Lockout 0
Cycle 4 recloses
0
Cycle 3 recloses
0
Cycle 1 recloses
0
ROLLING AVERAGE
RST=[C]
ROLLING AVERAGE
IB Rms
600.00A
Total recloses
0
MAX SUBPERIOD
IC Rms
600.00A
MAX SUBPERIOD
IB Rms
600.00A
MAX SUBP ERIOD
IA Rms
600.00A
No
1
1
8
None
Relay address
Stop Bits
Data Bits
P arity
Baud rate
19200 bd
Yes
Communication ?
Yes
COMMUN ICATION
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
IN H Alarm tAux4?
Yes
INH Alarm tAux3?
Yes
IN H Alarm tAux2?
No
INH Alarm tAux1?
No
INH Alarm[79]DI.Lock?
No
IN H Alarm tI<?
No
INH Alarm Ctrl_Trip?
No
No
600.00 A
IN -fn
RST=[C]
MAX SUBPERIOD
RST=[C] 0%
IB
IA^IC Angle
0.0°
Reset Led on
Faul t
IA
Format Date
Private
Inst. Self-reset
600.00 A
Average IC Rms
600.00A
IA^IB Angle
0.0°
Frequency
50.00 Hz
Date
Alarms
No
Average IB Rms
600.00A
IN^VN Angle
0.0°
MEASUREMENTS
CONFIGURATION
DEF AULT DISP LAY
IA = 1245 A
Menu Content Tables
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Page 7/24
No
No
I>>>
40.00 In
Delay type
DMT
(1)
0.00s
tI>>>
Yes
I>>> ?
I>>
40.00 In
Delay type
DMT
0.00s
tI>> (1)
Yes
I>> ?
No
No
No
Dir
No
No
Dir : Yes / Peak
Ie>>>
10.00 In
If Dir:
Ue >
260.0V
Ie> Torque
0°
Ie> Trip
± 10.0%
If Dir or Yes:
tIe>>>
0.00s
tReset
0.04s
Ie>>> ?
Ie>>
10.00 In
If Dir:
Ie>> Torque
0°
Ie>> Trip
If Dir or Yes
Delay type
DMT
0.00s
tIe>>(1)
Ie>> ?
Ie>
If Dir:
Ue>
1.0V
Ie> Torque
0°
Ie> Trip ± 50.0%
If Dir or Yes:
Delay type
DMT
0.00s
tIe>(1)
0.04s
tReset (1)
Dir
10.00 In
No
No
No
Yes
Pe
No
Pe
No
0°
160.0x1W
0.00s
0.04s
Yes
P e/IeCos Angle
Pe>>
tPe>>
tReset
Pe>>
Pe>
160.0x1W
Delay Type
DMT
(1)
tPe>
0.00s
(1)
0.04s
tReset
Pe>
Mode
[32N] Earth
Wattmetric
No
No
Yes
No
IeCos
Yes
No
P e/IeCos Angle
0°
IeCos>> 8.000Ien
tIeCos>>
0.00s
t Reset
0.04s°
tIeCos>>
IeCos> 8.000Ien
Delay Type
DMT
tIeCos> (1)
0.00s
(1)
0.04s
tReset
IeCos>
No
No
No
Yes
No
K
t Reset
I2>>>
tI2>>>
I2>>> ?
I2>>
tI2>>
I2>> ?
No
No
If Delay Type = DMT
Otherwise, the following
menus are displayed
0.025
0.00s
RI
IEEE, IEC,
RECT or CO
TMS
0.025
Reset Delay TypeDMT
If reset delay type=IDMT:
Rtms
0.025
tReset
0.00s
Delay Type ≠ DMT
(1)
40.00 In
0.00 s
Yes
Yes
40.00 In
0.00 s
Yes
I2>
25.00 In
Delay type
DMT
0.00 s
tI2> (1)
I2> ?
[46] Neg Seq OC
Page 8/24
No
No
No
I>
10.00 In
Delay type
DMT
(1)
tI>
0.00s
Yes
Ie> ?
I> ?
No
[67N] E/Gnd
[67] P hase OC
PROTECTION G1/G2
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Menu Content Tables
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
No
No
θ Alarm
θ Alarm
Iθ>
Te
K
θTrip
Yes
90%
No
0.10 In
1 mn
1.05
100 %
Yes
No
0.10 In
0.00s
I< Inhibited on
52 a
No
I<
tI<
Yes
No
I< ?
Therm OL
No
[37] Under current
[49] Therm OL
PROTECTION G1/G2
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
OR / AND
OR / AN D
No
Ue>>>>
tUe>>>>
5.0 V
0.00s
Yes
Ue>>>> ?
260.0 V
[59N] residual
Over Voltage
Yes
10 mn
Dead Time
TD1
5.00 s
TD2
5.00 s
TD3
5.00 s
TD4
5.00 s
Time period
Max cycles nb
10
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
s
s
s
s
s
s
4
4
Cycles
4321
tI>
1111
tI>>
1111
tI>>>
1111
tIe>
1111
tIe>>
1111
tIe>>>
1111
tPe/IeCos > 1111
tPe/IeCoss>>1111
tAux1
1111
tAux2
1111
tAux3
1111
tAux4
1111
E/Gnd Cycles
Phase Cycles
Inhib Time Time
tR
5.00 s
Reclaim Time
tR
5.00 s
Dead Time
tI>
tI>>
tI>>>
tIe>
tIe>>
tIe>>>
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
No
No
Ext Block
Rolling demand ?
No
Yes
No
No
No
Ext C B Fail Time
1.00 s
Yes
Ext CB Fail ?
Yes
Autoreclose
[79] Autoreclose
Menu Content Tables
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Page 9/24
No
No
No
Trip tIe>
Trip tIe>>
Trip tIe>>>
No
No
No
Trip Brkn.Cond
No
No
No
No
Trip SOFT
Ctrl Trip
Trip EQUATION A ?
No
…
Trip EQUATION H ?
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
tAux1
tAux2
tAux3
tAux4
tAux5
tAux6
tAux7
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Latch :87654321
00000000
Latch Relays
No
No
No
Block tAux1
Block tAux2
Block tAux3
Block tAux4
Block tAux5
Block tAux6
Block tAux7
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Block TBrk.Cond
No
Block tUe>>>>
No
Block Thermal θ No
Block tI<
No
Block tI2>
No
Block tI2>> N o
Block tI2>>> No
Block tPe/IeCos>
No
Block tPe/IeC os >>
No
Block tIe>
No
Block tIe>>
No
Block tIe>>> No
Block tI>
Block tI>>
Block tI>>>
Blocking Loqic
No
No
t Sel 1
150 ms
Sel 1 tle >>>
No
Sel1 tle >>
Sel 1 tI >>>
No
Sel1 tI >>
Logic Select 1/2
8765432
1000100
I>
tl >
I >>
tl >>
I >>>
tl >>>
tIA>
tIB>
tIC
Ie >
tle >
Ie >>
tle >>
Ie >>>
tle >>>
Pe/IeC os>
tPe/IeCos>
Pe/IeCos>>
tPe/IeC os >>
I2>
tI2>
I2>>
tI2>>
I2>>>
tI2>>>
Therm Alarm
Therm Trip
I<
tI<
Ue>>>>
tUe>>>>
Brkn Cond
Trip
Output Relays
8765432
1000100
CB Alarm
52 Fail
CB F ail
CB Close
tAux1
tAux2
tAux3
tAux4
tAux5
tAux6
tAux7
79 Run
79 Trip
79 int. Lock.
79 ext. Lock
SOFT
C ontrol trip
Control Close
Active G roup
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Equ. A
Equ. B
Equ. C
Equ. D
Equ. E
Equ. F
Equ. G
Equ. H
Trip
Page 10/24
Trip tUe>>>>
Trip Thermal θ No
Trip tI<
No
Trip tI2>
Trip tI2>>
Trip tI2>>>
Trip tPe/IeCos>
No
Trip tPe/IeC os >>
No
No
No
No
Trip tI>
Trip tI>>
Trip tI>>>
Trip Commands
AUTOMAT. CTRL
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Menu Content Tables
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Unlatch
Blk Log 1
Blk Log 2
52 a
52 b
CB FLT
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 7
Strt Dist
Cold L PU
Log Sel 1
Log Sel 2
Changeset
Block 79
θ Reset
Trip Circ
Start tBF
Maint. M.
SOTF
Local
Synchro
Led Reset
Ctrl Trip
Ctrl Close
Inputs 1/2/3/4/5/
6/7
Inputs
AUTOMAT. CTRL
Aux1 Time
tAux1
tAux2
tAux3
tAux4
tAux5
tAux6
tAux7
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Aux Time
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
Yes
No
Ratio I 2/I 1
20 %
Brkn.Cond Time
tBC
32 s
Yes
Brkn.Cond ?
Broken Conductor
DE FAULT DISP LAY
IA = 1245 A
No
No
Bloc Ie > ?
Yes
Block I > ?
No
CB Fail Time
tBF
0.10 s
0.1 In
Yes
No
n
ΣAmps (n)
No
2
3 E6
Yes
ΣAmps (n) ?
[79] closing
CB Open NB
1500
Rear comm order
Yes
Front comm order
Yes
Yes
HMI closing order
No
CB Open Alarm ?
Yes
Yes
SOTF Input
Yes
CB Close Time
150
Yes ms
Yes
Yes
100 ms
No
Ctrl close input
No
I >>>
I >>
tSotf
Sotf
Sotf
CB Close S’vision ?
Yes
CB Open Time
150 ms
CB Open S’vision ?
No
Yes
No tOpen Pulse
300ms
No
No
No
Yes
t trip circui t
tSUP
3s
TC Supervision ?
No
C B Supervision
No
OR
A.00
NONE
NONE
NONE
N one
2/2 A.00
NONE
1/2
OR
AND NOT
AN D
OR NOT
Equ.A Treset
=
0.00s
Equ. A Toperat.
=
0.00s
Equation
A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H
Logic Equations
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
No
Cold Load PU
tCL
2s
Cold Load PU
Level
120 %
C old Load PU
tl> ?
Yes
tI>> ?
Yes
tI>>> ?
Yes
tIe> ?
Yes
tIe>> ?
Yes
tIe>>> ? Yes
tIe>>>> ? Yes
tI2> ?
Yes
tI2>> ?
No
tI2>>> ? Yes
tTherm ?
Yes
Auto?
Yes
I < BF
CB Fail ?
Cold load PU ?
No
Input?
CB Fail
C old Load P U
Menu Content Tables
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Page 11/24
5 E6
5 E6
5 E6
Trip
Threshold
IN Magnitude
103 A
VN Magnitude
0.00V
IN^VN Angle
0°
IB Magnitude
500 A
IC Magnitude
480 A
No
57 ms
Ie>
IA Magnitude
1200 A
Magnitude
1200 A
I>
Length
Origin
Faulted Phase
EARTH
Active Set G roup
2
Disturb Rec Trig
ON INST.
0.1 s
Time Window
5 mn
Records number
5
Pre-Time
Time Peak Value
Disturbance Record
1mn
Num of Sub Per
1
Sub Period
Rolling Demand
Page 12/24
ΣAmps (n) IC
ΣAmps (n) IB
ΣAmps (n) IA
ΣAmps (n)
RST= [C]
09/01/01
Date
Fault Date
09/01/01
1312
CB Operations
RST = [C]
Hour
13:07:15:53
Fault Time
12:05:23:42
CB Closing Time
100 ms
5
Number
Record Number
25
CB Opening Time
83 ms
Instantaneous
Fault Record
CB Monitoring
RECORDS
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Menu Content Tables
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
** **
(2)
14 : 15 : 34
11/06/07
No
No
No
Dist rec start
No
Close Order
Open Order
Confirmation ?
No
Yes
Record Reset
No
(2) Available with P127 optional configuration
P hase rotation
A-B-C
Iam Tdd denom.
1A
(2)
IRIG B
Modulated
Time synchro
IRIG B
Phases/Earth Text
L1 L2 L3 N
(2)
Inh.Block dF/ dt
>20 Hz/s
No
5
Default Displays
RMS IA IB IC IN
dF/dt Cycles.nb
(2)
dF/dt Validat.nb=
4
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
Quadrant conv. ?
Quadrant 1
CTm2 phase ?
none
Prot. Freq . Block
5V
Icm Tdd denom.
1A
VT Protection
Protect P -N
CTm1 phase ?
none
Ibm Tdd denom.
1A
(2)
VT Connection
2Vpp+Vr
General options
CONFIGURATION
5A
Line CTm sec
1A
Line CTm primary
1A
E/Gnd VT sec
100.0 kV
E/Gnd VT primary
0.10 kV
Line VT sec
100.0 kV
Line VT primary
0.10 kV
E /G nd C T sec
5A
E/Gnd CT primary
5A
Line CT sec
Line CT primary
5A
Transfo. ratio
(1)
(1)
CONFIGURATION (contd)
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
(1) If the connection mode 2Vpp+Vr or 2Vpn+Vr is selected
Time
Date
87654321
00001011
Relay
Status
Active Group =
1
50 Hz
CBA98
00000
Input
Status
Frequency
754321
000101
Input
Status
MiCOM
Software version
15.x
Reference
Description
P127 -1
Language
ENGLISH
Password
ORDERS
3.
OP PARAMETERS
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
Menu Content Tables
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Page 13/24
MiCOM P127 – V15 SOFTWARE
Led
I>
tI>
I>>
tI>>
I>>>
tI>>>
tIA>
tIB>
tIC>
Ie>
tIe>
Ie>>
tIe>>
Ie>>>
tIe>>>
Ie_d>
tIe_d>
Ie_d>>
tIe_d>>
P>
tP>
P>>
tP>>
P<
tP<
P<<
tP<<
Q>
tQ>
Q>>
tQ>>
Q<
LED 5/6/7/8
CON FIGURATION
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
tQ<
tQ<<
Pe/IeC os>
tPe/IeCos>
Pe/IeCos>>
tPe/IeC os>>
I2>
tI2>
I2>>
tI2>>
I2>>>
tI2>>>
Therm Trip
I<
tI<
U>
tU>
U>>
tU>>
U<
tU<
U<<
tU<<
Ue>>>>
tUe>>>>
V2>
tV2>
V2>>
tV 2>>
F1
tF1
F2
tF2
F3
CONFIG URATION
tF3
F4
tF4
F5
tF5
F6
tF6
F.out
dF/dt1
dF /dt2
dF/dt3
dF/dt4
dF /dt5
dF/dt6
Brkn. Cond
CB Fail
VTS
CTS
Input 1 /2 /3 /4
Input 5 /6 /7
Input 8 /9 /A /B /C(2)
79 Run
79i.Blocked
79e.Blocked
tAux1 /2 /3 /4/5/6/7
tAux /8 /9 /A /B /C(2)
t SOFT
tEQU. A / B … /H
No
Relays8765W4321
CMD 000000000
Yes
Maintenance Mode
No
Execution ?
copy to
copy from
No
G1
G1
No
X
Group if high.
level
Group Copy ?
X
0
1
Group if low
level
Input
Target G roup
Setting group
Menu
Change Group
Input
Group Select
No
No
Inh. Alarm Ctrl_Trip ?
Inh. Alarm tI< ?
Inh. Alarm tU< ?
Inh. Alarm tU<< ?
Inh. Alarm tU> ?
Inh. Alarm tU>> ?
Inh. Alarm tV2> ?
Inh. Alarm tV2>> ?
Inh. Alarm tP< ?
Inh. Alarm tP<< ?
Inh. Alarm tQ< ?
Inh. Alarm tQ<< ?
Inh. Alarm F1 ?
…
Inh. Alarm F6 ?
Inh. Alarm F.out ?
Inh. Alarm [79] ext.blk ?
Inh Alarm tAux1?
…
Inh Alarm tAux7?
Inh Alarm tAux8?(1)
…
Inh Alarm tAuxC? (1)
Inh. Alarm Eq A ?
…
Inh. Alarm Eq. H ?
Reset Led on
Fault
Inst. Self-reset
Alarms
Page 14/24
(1) Available with P127 optional configuration
DC
:CBA98
↑↑↑↑↑
Voltage input
Input(2)
Fail
87654321
safe re. 00000000
Input
:7654321
↑↑↑↑↑↑↑
Output
relays
Inputs
configuration
MEASUREMENTS
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Menu Content Tables
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2Vpp+Vr
2Vpp+Vr
IN^UAB Angle
IA^UBC Angle
IA^IUN Angle
IN^VN Angle
IA^IB Angle
IA^IC Angle
Pe
IeCos
UAB
UBC
UCA
UN
RATIO I2 / I1 =
0%
IA
IB
IC
IN
I1
I2
Frequency
50.00 Hz
MEASUREMENTS
Fwd
Rev
Fwd
Rev
THERMAL STATUS
RST=[C] 0%
0.00A
WHours
WHours
VArHours
V ArHours
VAHours
IN-fn
RST=[C ]
3Ph
3Ph
3Ph
3Ph
3Ph
Energy
RST=[C ]
P
Q
S
C os(Phi)
MAX SUBPERIOD
IA Rms
IB Rms
IC Rms
Max
IA Rms
Max
IB Rms
Max
IC Rms
Average IA Rms
Average IB Rms
Average IC Rms
Max
UAB Rms
Max
UBC Rms
Average UAB Rms
Average UBC Rms
ROLLIN G AVERAGE
IA Rms
IB Rms
IC Rms
MAX SUBPERIOD
RST=[C] 0%
MAX & A VERAGE
RCT=[C]
Total Trip &
Lockout 0
Total recloses
Cycle 1 recloses
Cycle 2 recloses
Cycle 3 recloses
Cycle 4 recloses
Reclose Stats
RST=[C]
METERING
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
IA^UA Angle
IA^UB Angle
IA^UC Angle
3Vpn/
2Vpn+Vr
UA
UB
UC
UN
3Vpn/
2Vpn+Vr
CONFIG URATION
DE FAULT DISP LAY
IA = 1245 A
Menu Content Tables
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Page 15/24
IAm
THDAm
TDDAm
K Am:
IAmh2:
…
IAmh10:
Phase A
Currents
METERING
Ibm
THDBm
TDDBm
Iam^Ibm
KBm:
IBmh2
:…
IBmh10:
Phase B
(1)
3Vpp+Vr
or “Protect P-P”
ICm
THDCm
TDDCm
Iam^Icm
KCm:
ICmh2:
…
ICmh10:
Phase C
V ABm
THDAm
Iam^Uab
Icm^Uab
VABmh2:
…
V ABmh10:
P hase A
VAm
THDAm
Iam^Va
VAmh2:
…
VAmh10:
Phase A
VBCm:
THDBm
Iam^Ubc
Ibm^Ubc
VBCmh2:
…
VBCmh10:
P hase B
VBm:
THDBm
Iam^Vb
Ibm^Vb
VBmh2:
…
VBmh10:
Phase B
Phase C
Pm:
Qm:
Sm:
DP F:
VCAm:
THDCm
Iam^Uca
Ibm^ Uca
VCAmh2:
…
VCAmh10:
P hase C
VC m:
THDCm
Iam^Vc
Icm^Vc
VCmh2:
…
VC mh10:
3V pn AND “Protect P-N” ,
or 2Vpn+Vr AND “Protect P-N”
VT?
Voltages
Powers
HH:MM
DD/MM/YY
Export power
Import power
Lagging VARs
Leading VARs
Time
Date
RST = [C ]
Energies
COMMUNICATION
Page 16/24
(1) Available with P127 with measurements CT optional configuration
Frequency
50.00Hz
Frequency
MEASUREMENTS
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Menu Content Tables
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
1
1
8
None
Relay address
Stop Bits
Data Bits
Parity
Baud rate
19200 bd
COMM1
COMMUN ICATION
(1) Available with P127 with 2 nd port optional
configuration
Date Format
Private
Relay Address
MODBUS
HMI ?
PROTECTION (prev)
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
No
Yes
(1)
No
Basic
0.1s
Yes
IEC60870-5-103 only
C OMM1 only
Delay type
If Dir or Yes:
Rtms
0.025
tReset
0.00s
Ie> I>> I>>
Interlock
Yes
If reset delay
type= IDMT:
TMS
0.025
Reset Delay
Type
DMT
IEEE, IEC,
REC T or C O
K
0.025
tReset
0.00s
I> I>> I>>>
Interlock
Yes
0.025
0.00s
0.00s
DMT
Rtms
tReset
0.025
0.00s
If reset delay
type= IDMT:
TMS
0.025
Reset Delay
Type
DMT
IEEE, IEC,
REC T or C O
K
tReset
RI
tI>>
RI
Dir / Yes
No
I>>
10.00 In
If D ir:
I>> Torque
0°
I>> Trip Zone ± 50.0%
I>> ?
DMT
No
tI>
0.00s
DMT
0°
± 50.0%
10.00 In
Dir / Yes
No
DMT
Delay type
If Dir or Yes:
I>
If Dir:
I> Torque
I> Trip Zone
I> ?
[67] Phase OC
No
Dir / Yes
No
Delay type
If Dir or Yes :
DMT
I>>>
10.00 In
If Dir :
I>> Torque
0°
I>> Trip Zone ±50.0%
I>>> ?
PROTECTION (contd)
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
to COMM2
Command
duration
Command
Blocking
Events + Measur.
Blocking
Yes
Measur. upload
Other
Yes
Measur. upload
ASDU 9
Yes
Measur. upload
ASDU 3.4
Yes
GI select.
Spont. event. &GI
A11
None
COMM2
P ROTECTION G1/G2
(G3… G8)
Menu Content Tables
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Page 17/24
0.00s
0.00s
DMT
1.0V
0°
± 50.0%
0.010 Ien
Dir / Yes
No
Rtms
0.025
tReset
0.00s
Ie> I>> I>>
Interlock
Yes
If reset delay
type= IDMT:
TMS
0.025
Reset Delay
Type
DMT
IEEE, IEC,
REC T or CO
No
Delay type
tIe>> (1)
tReset
If Dir or Yes:
Ie>>
If Dir:
Ue>>
Ie>> Torque
Ie>> Trip
Ie>> ?
No
DMT
0.00s
0.00s
260.0V
0°
± 50.0°
8.000 Ien
Dir / Yes
P ROTECTION G1/G2
(G3… G8)
No
Dir / Yes
No
Delay type
tIe>>>
tReset
DMT
0.00s
0.00s
Ie>>>
8.000 Ien
If Dir:
Ue>>>
260.0V
Ie>>> Torque
0°
Ie>>> Trip
± 10.0°
If Dir or Yes:
Ie>>> ?
No
Delay type
tIe_d> (1)
tReset
If Dir or Yes:
DMT
0.00s
0.00s
100.0V
0°
± 10.0°
1.00 Ien
Dir / Yes
No
K
tReset
Ie_d>
If Dir:
Ue>(Ie_d>)
Ie_d> Tor que
Ie_d> Trip
Ie_d> ?
Delay type
tIe_d> (1)
tReset
If Delay Type = DMT
Otherwise, the following
menus are displayed
0.025
0.00s
RI
No
Dir / Yes
TMS
0.025
Reset Delay TypeDMT
If reset delay type=IDMT:
Rtms
0.025
tReset
0.00s
IEEE, IE C,
RECT or CO
DMT
0.00s
0.00s
Ie_d>>
1.00 Ien
If Dir :
U e>(Ie_d>>)
5.0V
Ie_d>> Torque ± 10.0°
Ie_d>> Trip
± 1.0°
If Dir or Yes:
Ie_d>> ?
Delay Type ≠ DMT
(1)
No
PROTECTION (contd)
Page 18/24
K
0.025
tReset
0.00s
Ie> I>> I>>>
Interlock
Yes
RI
tIe>
tReset
DMT
Delay type
If Dir or Yes:
Ie>
If Dir:
Ue>
Ie> Torque
Ie> Trip
Ie> ?
[67N] E/Gnd
METERING
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Menu Content Tables
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
No
0.00s
(1)
No
or 10000x5W
or 40000x1W
or 40000x5W
Q>> 10000x1W
tQ>>
0.00s
Yes
Q>> ?
Q> 10000x1W (1)
tQ>
0.00s
Yes
Q> ?
P>>
tP>>
No
10000x1W(1)
Yes
P>> ?
10000x1W (1)
0.00s
No
No
No
No
Yes
(2)
1x1W (2)
0.00s
No
1x1W(2)
0.00s
No
1x1W (2)
0.00s
No
1x1W
0.00s
(2)
No
or 1x5W or 4x1W
or 4x5W
Q<<
tQ<<
Yes
Q<< ?
Q<
tQ<
Yes
Q< ?
P <<
tP<<
Yes
P << ?
P<
tP<
P< ?
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
IeC os
Yes
No
IeCos>> 8.000Ien
tIeCos>>
0.00s
tReset
0.04s
Pe/IeCos Angle 0°
tIeCos>>
IeCos> 8.000Ien
Delay Type
DMT
0.00s
tIeCos>(1)
tReset
0.04s
IeC os>
Pe>> 160.0x1W
tPe>>
0.00s
tReset
0.04s
N o Pe/IeCos A ngle 0°
Pe>>
Pe>
160.0x1W
Delay Type
DMT
0.00s
tPe> (1)
tReset
0.04s
P e>
Pe
Pe
No
No
No
Yes
No
I2>>>
tI2>>>
I2>>> ?
I2>>
tI2>>
I2>> ?
No
40.00 In
0.00 s
Yes
Yes
40.00 In
0.00 s
Yes
No
I2>
25.00 In
Delay type
DMT
0.00 s
tI2> (1)
I2> ?
[46] Neg Seq OC
No
Yes
90%
No
0.10 In
1 mn
1.05
100 %
Yes
K
tReset
θ Alarm
θ Alarm
No
No
Iθ>
Te
K
θTrip
Therm OL
[49] Therm OL
If Delay Type = DMT
Otherwise, the following
menus are displayed
I< Inhibited on
U<
5.0 V
Yes
I< Inhibited on
U<
No
0.025
0.00s
RI
U>>
tU>>
U>> ?
IEEE, IEC,
REC T or C O
No
No
U>
tU>
U> ?
260.0 V
0.00s
OR / AND
No
260.0 V
0.00s
OR / AND
No
[59] Phase Over
Voltage
TMS
0.025
Reset Delay TypeDMT
If reset delay type=IDMT:
Rtms
0.025
t Reset
0.00s
Delay Type ≠ DMT
(1)
No
No
0.10 In
0.00s
Yes
No
I< Inhibited on
52 a
No
I<
tI<
I< ?
[37] Under current
PROTE CTION (contd)
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
(1)
No
No
No
No
P>
tP>
Yes
Mode
P> ?
No
[32N ] Earth
Wattmetric
PROTECTION G1/G2
(G3… G 8)
[32] Directional
Power
PROTECTION (prev)
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
Menu Content Tables
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Page 19/24
U<< ?
OR / AN D
No
U<<
5.0 V
tU <<
0.00s
52a Inhib. U<<? No
No
No
U<
5.0 V
tU<
0.00s
52a Inhib. U<? No
OR / AND
No
Ue>>>>
tU e>>>>
5.0 V
0.00s
Yes
No
No
V2>>
tV2>>
V2>> ?
V2>
tV2>
No
15.0 V
5.00s
OR / AND
No
15.0 V
5.00s
OR / AND
V2> ?
Ue>>>> ?
260.0 V
U< ?
No
[47 ] Negative
Over Voltage
[59 N] residual
Over Voltage
PROTECTION G1/G2
(G3… G8)
[27] Phase Under
Voltage
PROTE CTION (prev)
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
Ext Block
Yes
Yes
Dead Time
TD1
5.00 s
TD2
5.00 s
TD3
5.00 s
TD4
5.00 s
10 mn
Max cycles nb
10
Time period
No
No
Cycles
4321
tI>
1111
tI>>
1111
tI>>>
1111
tIe>
1111
tIe>>
1111
tIe>>>
1111
tPe/IeCos> 1111
tPe/IeCoss>>1111
tAux1
1111
tAux2
1111
4
4
5.00 s
E/Gnd Cycles
Phase Cycles
Inhib Time
tR
Reclaim Time
tR
5.00 s
No
F6
tF6
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F1
tF1
50.00 Hz
0.00 s
81> / 81<
No
No
No
No
No
50.00 Hz
0.00 s
81> / 81<
No
No
No
?
?
?
?
dF/dt6=
dF /dt6 ?
dF /dt2
dF /dt3
dF/dt4
dF /dt5
dF/dt1=
dF/dt1 ?
No
No
1.0 Hz/s
Yes
No
No
No
No
1.0 Hz/s
Yes
[81R] FREQ. RATE
OF CHANG E
PROTE CTION G 1/G2
(G 3… G8)
Page 20/24
No
No
Ext CB Fail Time
1.00 s
Yes
Ext CB Fail ?
Yes
Rolling demand ?
No
Yes
No
0.05 s
0.05 s
0.05 s
0.05 s
0.05 s
0.05 s
F1 ?
Dead Time
tI>
tI>>
tI>>>
tIe>
tIe>>
tIe>>>
Autoreclose
No
[81] Frequency
[79] Autoreclose
AUTOMAT CTRL
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Menu Content Tables
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Trip tIe>
Trip tIe>>
Trip tIe>>>
Trip tIe_d>
Trip tIe_d>>
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
No
No
No
Trip Thermal θ No
Trip tI<
No
Trip tI2>
Trip tI2>>
Trip tI2>>>
Trip tPe/IeCos > No
Trip tPe/IeCos >>No
tP>
tP >>
tP <
tP<<
tQ >
tQ >>
tQ<
tQ <
No
No
No
Trip tI>
Trip tI>>
Trip tI>>>
Trip Commands
P ROTECTION (prev)
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
No
No
No
No
tAux1
tAux2
tAux3
tAux4
tAux5
tAux6
tAux7
tAux8 (1)
tAux9 (1)
tAuxA (1)
tAuxB (1)
tAuxC (1)
tEQU. A ?
…
tEQU. H ?
Trip SOTF
Ctrl Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Latch :87654321
00000000
Latch Relays
No
No
No
Block Thermal θ No
Block tI<
No
Block tI2>
Block tI2>>
Block tI2>>>
Block tPe/IeCos>
No
Block tPe/IeC os >>
No
tQ>
tQ>>
tQ<
tQ<<
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
No
No
Block tIe_d>
Block tIe_d>>
tP>
tP >>
tP <
tP<<
No
No
No
No
No
No
Block tIe>
Block tIe>>
Block tIe>>>
Block tI>
Block tI>>
Block tI>>>
Blocking Loqic 1 / 2
No
No
Block tU<
Block tU<<
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Block TBrk.Cond
No
Block dF/dt1
Block dF/dt2
Block dF /dt3
Block dF/dt4
Block dF/dt5
Block dF /dt6
Block tF1
Block tF2
Block tF3
Block tF4
Block tF5
Block tF6
Block tV2> N o
Block tV2>> No
Block tUe>>>>
No
No
No
Block tU>
Block tU>>
No
Block tAux1 No
Block tAux2 No
Block tAux3 No
Block tAux4 No
Block tAux5 No
Block tAux6 No
Block tAux7 No
Block tAux8(1) No
Block tAux9(1) No
Block tAuxA(1) No
Block tAuxB(1) No
Block tAuxC(1)No
Inrush block. on
I>
Yes
I>>
No
I>>>
No
Ie>
Yes
Ie>>
No
Ie>>>
No
Ie_d>
No
Ie_d>>
No
I2>
Yes
I2>>
No
I2>>>
No
No
t Sel 1
150 ms
Sel 1 tle_d>>
No
Sel 1 tle_d>
Sel 1 tle >>>
No
No
Sel1 tle >>
T Inrush reset
0 ms
No
Sel 1 tI >>>
No
Sel1 tI >>
Logic Select 1/2
Inr. harmonic 2
ratio =
20.0%
Yes
Inrush blocking
No
Inrush blocking
AUTOMAT CTRL (contd)
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Trip Brkn.Cond No
Trip dF /dt1
Trip dF/dt2
Trip dF/dt3
Trip dF /dt4
Trip dF/dt5
Trip dF/dt6
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
tF1
tF2
tF3
tF4
tF5
tF6
No
No
Trip tV2>
Trip tV2>>
Trip tUe>>>> No
Trip tU<
Trip tU<<
Trip tU>
Trip tU>>
AUTOMAT. C TRL
Menu Content Tables
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Page 21/24
I>
tl >
I_R>
I >>
tl >>
I_R>>
I >>>
tl >>>
I_R>>>
tIA>
tIB>
tIC
Ie >
tle >
Ie_R>
Ie >>
tle >>
Ie_R>>
Ie >>>
tle >>>
Le_R >>>
Ie_d>
tIe_d>
tIe_dR>
Ie_d>>
tIe_d>>
tIe_dR>>
P>
tP>
P>>
tP>>
P<
tP<
P<<
tP<<
Q>
Trip
8765432
1000100
Output Relays
AUTOMAT. CTRL (prev)
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
tQ >
Q>>
tQ >>
Q<
tQ<
Q<<
tQ<<
Pe/IeCos>
tPe/IeCos>
Pe/IeCos>>
tPe/IeCos>>
I2>
tI2>
I2>>
tI2>>
I2>>>
tI2>>>
Therm Alarm
Therm Trip
I<
tI<
U>
tU>
U>>
tU>>
U<
tU<
U<<
tU<<
Ue>>>>
tUe>>>>
V2>
tV2>
V2>>
tV 2>>
8765432
1000100
AUTOMAT. CTRL
F1
tF1
F2
tF2
F3
tF3
F4
tF4
F5
tF5
F6
tF6
F .OUT
dF/dt1
dF /dt2
dF /dt3
dF/dt4
dF /dt5
dF/dt6
Brkn Cond
CB Alarm
52 Fail
CB Fail
CB Close
tAux1
tAux2
tAux3
tAux4
tAux5(1)
tAux5
tAux6
tAux7
tAux8(1)
tAux9(1)
tAuxA(1)
8765432
1000100
tAuxB(1)
tAuxC(1)
79 Run
79 Trip
79 int. Lock.
79 ext. Lock.
SOTF
Control trip
Control Close
Active G roup
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8 (1)
Input 9 (1)
Input A(1)
Input B (1)
Input C (1)
VTS
CTS
tEqu. A
tEqu. B
tEqu. C
tEqu. D
tEqu. E
tEqu. F
tEqu. G
tEqu. H
Order Comm1
Order Comm2
Order Comm3
Order Comm4
8765432
1000100
Unlatch
Blk Log 1
Blk Log 2
52 a
52 b
CB F LT
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Aux 5
Aux 6
Aux 7
Aux 8 (1)
Aux 9 (1)
Aux A (1)
Aux B (1)
Aux C (1)
Strt Dist
Cold L PU
Log Sel 1
Log Sel 2
Changeset
Block 79
θ Reset
Trip Circ
Start tBF
Maint. M.
SOTF
Local
Synchro.
Reset led
Ctrl Trip
Ctr Close
Inputs 1/2/3/4/5/
6/7
8/9/A/B/C(1)
Inputs
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
Yes
No
Ratio I 2/I 1
20 %
Brkn.Cond Time
tBC
32 s
Yes
Brkn.Cond ?
No
No
Yes
Cold Load PU
tCL
2s
Cold Load PU
Level
120 %
Cold Load PU
tl> ?
Yes
tI>> ?
Yes
tI>>> ?
Yes
tIe> ?
Yes
tIe>> ?
Yes
tIe>>> ? Yes
tIe_d > ?
Yes
tIe_d>> ? Yes
tI2> ?
Yes
tI2>> ?
No
tI2>>> ? Yes
tTherm ?
Yes
Auto?
Input?
Cold Load PU ?
Yes
Cold Load PU
Page 22/24
(1) Available with P127 optional configuration
Aux1 Time
tAux1
tAux2
tAux3
tAux4
tAux5
tAux6
tAux7
tAux8 (1)
tAux9 (1)
tAuxA (1)
tAuxB (1)
tAuxC(1)
Aux Time
Broken C onductor
AUTOMAT CTRL (contd)
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Menu Content Tables
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
130.0V
No
V2>>
130.0V
Yes
(U<< OR V2>>)
& I>>>
No
No
V2>
Yes
(U< OR V2>)
& I>>
No
51V
No
tVTS
130.0V
VTS Non-dir
I> ?
Yes
I>> ?
Yes
I>>> ?
Yes
Ie> ?
Yes
Ie>> ?
Yes
Ie>>> ? Yes
Ie_d> ?
Yes
Ie_d>> ? Yes
Yes
V TS Blocks Protections ?
No
VTS Blocks 51V ?
No
Yes
V TS Alarm ?
VT Supervision
AUTOMAT. CTRL (prev)
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
No
tC TS
Ue<
Ie>
0.2s
5V
0.08 In
Yes
CT Supervision ?
No
CT Supervision
AUTOMAT. C TRL
No
Bloc Ie > ?
Yes
Block I > ?
No
n
ΣAmps (n)
ΣAmps (n) ?
2
3 E6
No
Yes
C B Open NB
1500
Yes
CB Open Alarm ?
Yes
C B Close Time
150 ms
Yes
CB Close S’vision ?
Yes
CB Open Time
150 ms
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Rear2 comm order
Yes
Rear comm order
Yes
Front comm order
Yes
[79] closing
HMI closing order
No
SOTF Input
Yes
C trl close input
No
I >>>
I >>
Yes
100 ms
CB Open S’vision ?
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
t trip circuit
tSUP
3s
tSotf
No
Sotf
SOTF
TC Supervision ?
No
C B Supervision
(1)
A.00
N ON E
A.00
N ON E
NONE
NONE
N one
tOrder Comm
tOrder Comm
tOrder Comm
tOrder Comm
Comm. Order
delay
(1) Available with P127
optional configuration
2/2
OR
1/2
OR
AND NOT
AND
OR NOT
Equ.A Treset
=
0.00s
Equ.A Toperat.
=
0.00s
Equation
A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H
BOOL Logic Equat
1
2
3
4
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
tClose Pulse
500 ms
tOpen Pulse
300ms
No
0.1 In
CB Fail Time
tBF
0.10 s
I < BF
No
Yes
CB F ail ?
CB Fail
AUTOMAT CTRL (contd)
Menu Content Tables
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Page 23/24
5 E6
5 E6
5 E6
IC Magnitude
480 A
IB Magnitude
500 A
IA Magnitude
1200 A
Magnitude
1200 A
103 A
IN^VN ANGLE
103 A
IC^VBC ANGLE
103 A
IB^VBC AN GLE
IA^VBC ANGLE
103 A
Threshold
I>
VN Magnitude
103 A
VCA Magnitude
103 A
Faulted Phase
EARTH
Active Set Group
2
Trip
Length
Origin
No
57 ms
Ie>
Disturb Rec Trig
ON INST.
0.1 s
Time Window
5 mn
Records number
5
Pre-Time
Time Peak Value
Disturbance Record
1mn
N um of Sub P er
1
Sub Period
Rolling Demand
OP P ARAMETERS
Page 24/24
ΣAmps (n) IC
ΣAmps (n) IB
ΣAmps (n) IA
ΣAmps (n)
RST= [C]
09/01/01
Date
VBC Magnitude
103 A
Fault Date
09/01/01
1312
C B Operations
RST = [C]
Fault Time
12:05:23:42
CB Closing Time
100 ms
5
Hour
13:07:15:53
Number
Record Number
25
CB Opening Time
83 ms
VAB Magnitude
103 A
Instantaneous
Fault Record
RECORDS
CB Monitoring
AUTOMAT. CTRL (prev)
DEFAULT DISPLAY
IA = 1245 A
P12y/EN HI/Fa5
Menu Content Tables
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
TECHNICAL DATA AND
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 1/46
CONTENT
1.
RATINGS
3
1.1
Power Supply
3
1.2
Frequency
3
1.3
Current Inputs
3
1.4
Measurement Current Inputs (P127 with measurement CT)
4
1.5
Voltage Inputs
4
1.6
Logic Inputs
4
1.7
Output Relay Characteristic
5
2.
MECHANICAL DATA
6
3.
INSULATION WITHSTAND
7
4.
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
8
5.
ENVIRONMENT
9
6.
EU DIRECTIVE
10
6.1
EMC compliance
10
6.2
Product safety
10
7.
GENERAL INFORMATION AND DEVIATION OF THE PROTECTION
ELEMENTS
11
8.
DEVIATION OF AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS TIMERS
13
9.
DEVIATION OF MEASUREMENTS
14
9.1
Measurements
14
9.2
Metering (P127 with measurement CT)
14
10.
PROTECTION SETTING RANGES
15
10.1
[67/50/51] Directional/Non-Directional Phase Overcurrent (P127)
15
10.2
[50/51] Phase Overcurrent Protection (P126)
16
10.3
[67N/50N/51N] Dir./Non-Dir. Earth fault protection (P125, P126 & P127)
17
10.4
Earth Wattmetric Protection
20
10.5
Undercurrent Protection (P126 & P127)
22
10.6
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (P126 & P127)
23
10.7
Thermal Overload Protection (P126 & P127)
23
10.8
Undervoltage Protection (P127)
24
10.9
Overvoltage Protection (P127)
25
10.10
Under/over frequency Function (P127)
25
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Page 2/46
Technical Data
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
10.11
Rate of change of frequency (P127)
26
10.12
Directional power Function (P127)
26
10.13
Residual Overvoltage Protection
28
10.14
Negative overvoltage (P127)
28
10.15
Multishot Autoreclose Function (P126 & P127)
29
11.
AUTOMATION CONTROL FUNCTIONS
31
11.1
Trip commands
31
11.2
Latch relays
31
11.3
Blocking logic
31
11.4
Inrush blocking Logic (P127)
31
11.5
Logic select
32
11.6
Output relays
32
11.7
Inputs
32
11.8
Broken Conductor Detection (P126 & P127)
33
11.9
Cold Load Pickup (P126 & P127)
33
11.10
51V function (P127)
34
11.11
VT Supervision (P127 only)
34
11.12
CT Supervision (P127)
34
11.13
Circuit Breaker Failure (P126 & P127)
35
11.14
Trip Circuit Supervision (P126 & P127)
35
11.15
Circuit Breaker Control and Monitoring (P126 & P127)
35
11.16
SOTF/TOR Switch on to fault / Trip on reclose (P126 & P127)
36
11.17
Logic Equation (P126 & P127)
36
11.18
Communication order delay
39
12.
RECORDING FUNCTIONS
40
12.1
Event Records
40
12.2
Fault Records
40
12.3
Instantaneous recorder
40
12.4
Disturbance Records
40
13.
COMMUNICATION
41
14.
IRIG-B INTERFACE
42
15.
CURVES
43
15.1
General
43
15.2
Thermal Overload Curves
45
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.
RATINGS
1.1
Power Supply
1.2
1.3
Page 3/46
Nominal auxiliary voltage Vx
24 – 60Vdc / 48 – 250Vdc/ 24 – 250Vdc
24 – 240 Vac / 48-240 Vac
Operating range
DC ± 20% of Vx
AC – 20%, +10% of Vx
Residual ripple
Up to 12%
Stored energy time
≥50 ms for interruption of Vx
Burden P125
Stand by:
Max:
<3W DC or <8VA AC
<5W DC or <12VA AC
Burden P126
Stand by:
Max:
<3W DC or <8VA AC
<6W DC or <14VA AC
Burden P127
Stand by:
Max:
<3W DC or <8VA AC
<6W DC or <14VA AC
Frequency
Frequency protection functions
From 45 to 65Hz
Nominal frequency
50/60Hz
Current Inputs
Phase current inputs
1 and 5A by connection
Earth current inputs
1 and 5A by connection
Operating range
Selection by ordering code (Cortec)
Burden Phase Current
< 0.025VA
< 0.3VA
(1A)
(5A)
Burden Earth Current
< 0.08VA
< 0.42VA
(1A)
(5A)
Rrp (Impedance of relay phase
current input at 30In)
25 mΩ
8 mΩ
(1A input)
(5A input)
Rrn (Impedance of relay neutral
current input at 30In)
87 mΩ
15 mΩ
(1A input)
(5A input)
Thermal withstand
1s @ 100 x rated current
2s @ 40 x rated current
continuous @ 4 x rated current
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 4/46
1.4
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Measurement Current Inputs (P127 with measurement CT)
1.5
Phase current inputs
1 and 5A by connection
Operating range
Selection by ordering code (Cortec)
Burden Phase Current
< 0.5VA
Bandwidth
500Hz
Thermal withstand
1s
4s
continuous
@ 20 x rated current
@ 10 x rated current
@ 2 x rated current
Voltage Inputs
Voltage input range Un
57 to 130V
220 to 480V
Operating range (measuring range)
0 to 260V
0 to 960V
Burden
Resistive 44 kΩ:
438 kΩ:
0.074W/57V
0.38W/130V
1.54W/260V
0.1102W/220V
0.525W/480V
2.1W/960V
Thermal Withstand:
1.6
Continuous 260V ph-ph
960V ph-ph
10 seconds 300V ph-ph
1300V ph-ph
Logic Inputs
1.6.1
Ordering
Code
Logic input type
Independent optically insulated
Logic input burden
< 10 mAmps per input
Logic input recognition time
< 5ms
Supply
Relay auxiliary power supply
Nominal
voltage range
Vx
Logic Inputs
Operating
Nominal
voltage range Voltage range
19,2 – 76 Vdc
Minimal
polarisation
voltage
Maximum
polarisation
current
Holding
current
after 2 ms
Maximum
continuous
withstand
A
24 - 60 Vdc
F
48 – 250 Vdc
48 – 240 Vac
24 – 250 Vdc
38.4 – 300 Vdc 24 – 240 Vac
38.4 – 264 Vac
19,2 Vdc
19,2 Vac
35 mA
2.3 mA
300 Vdc
264 Vac
T
48 – 250 Vdc
48 – 240 Vac
Special EA (**)
38.4 – 300 Vdc 24 – 250 Vdc
38.4 – 264 Vac 24 – 240 Vac
19,2 Vdc
19,2 Vac
35 mA
2.3 mA
300 Vdc
264 Vac
H
48 – 250 Vdc
48 – 240 Vac
38.4 – 300 Vdc
38.4 – 264 Vac
129 Vdc
105 Vdc
3.0 mA @ 129 Vdc
145 Vdc
V
48 – 250 Vdc
48 – 240 Vac
38.4 – 300 Vdc
38.4 – 264 Vac
110 Vdc
77 Vdc
7.3 mA @ 110 Vdc
132 Vdc
W
48 – 250 Vdc
48 – 240 Vac
38.4 – 300 Vdc
38.4 – 264 Vac
220 Vdc
154 Vdc
3.4 mA @ 220 Vdc
262 Vdc
24 – 250 Vdc
24 – 250 Vac
19.2 – 300 Vdc 24 – 250 Vdc
38.4 – 264 Vac 24 – 240 Vac
19,2 Vdc
19,2 Vac
35 mA
300 Vdc
264 Vac
Z
2.3 mA
(**) Logic input recognition time for EA approval. Dedicated filtering on 24 samples (15 ms at
50 Hz)
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.7
Page 5/46
Output Relay Characteristic
Contact rating
Contact relay
Dry contact Ag Ni
Make current
Max. 30A and carrry for 3s
Carry capacity
5A continuous
Rated Voltage
250Vac
Breaking characteristic
Breaking capacity AC
1500 VA resistive
1500 VA inductive (P.F. = 0.5)
220 Vac, 5A (cos ϕ = 0.6)
Breaking capacity DC
135 Vdc, 0.3A (L/R = 30 ms)
250 Vdc, 50W resistive or
25W inductive (L/R=40ms)
Operation time
<7ms
Durability
Loaded contact
10000 operation minimum
Unloaded contact
100000 operation minimum
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 6/46
2.
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
MECHANICAL DATA
Design
MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays are available in a 4U metal case for panel or flush
mounting.
The table shows the case size of the different models:
Version
Height
Depth
Width
Type P125
4U (177mm)
230mm
20 TE
Type P126 & P127
4U (177mm)
230mm
30 TE
Weight
P125 approx.:
3.0 Kg
P126/7 approx.:
4.0 Kg
Mounting
Rack or flush mounting
Connections
Rear (double fast on + M4 screw per connection)
Full draw-out with automatic CT shorting in the case of the relay
Enclosure protection
Per IEC 60529: 2001:
−
IP 52 Protection (front panel) against dust and dripping water,
−
IP 50 Protection for the rear and sides of the case against dust,
−
IP 10 Product safety protection for the rear due to live connections on the terminal block
Dimensions
See dimensions diagram (P12y/EN IN chapter).
PC Interface
DIN 41652 connector (X6),
type D-Sub, 9-pin.
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.
Page 7/46
INSULATION WITHSTAND
Dielectric withstand
IEC 60255-5: 2000
2 kVrms 1 minute to earth and between
independent circuits.
IEEE C39.90:1989
1.5kV rms AC for 1 minute,
(reaffirmed 1994) across normally open
contacts
Impulse voltage
IEC 60255-5: 2000
5 kVp Between all terminals & all terminals
and case earth
Insulation resistance
IEC 60255-5: 2000
> 1000 MΩ at 500 Vdc
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 8/46
4.
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
High frequency
disturbance
IEC 60255-22-1:1998
2.5 kV common mode, class 3
1 kV differential mode, class 3
Fast transient
IEC 60255-22-4:2002
Class A
2 kV 5kHz terminal block comms
4 kV 2.5kHz all circuits excluding comms.
EN 61000-4-4:1995
Level 4
2 kV 5kHz all circuits excluding power
supply
4 kV 5kHz power supply
Electrostatic
discharge
EN 61000-4-2:1995 &
IEC60255-22-2:1996
8 kV contact discharge, class 4
15kV air discharge, class 4
Surge Immunity
EN 61000-4-5:1995 &
IEC 60255-22-5:2002
4kV common mode, level 4
2kV differential mode, level 4
Conducted emissions
EN55022:1998 &
IEC 60255-25:2000
0.15-0.5MHz, 79dBµV (quasi peak)
66 dBµV (average)
0.5-30MHz, 73dBµV (quasi peak)
60 dBµV (average)
Radiated emissions
EN55022:1998 &
IEC 60255-25:2000
30-230MHz, 40dBµV/m at 10m
measurement distance
230-1GHz, 47dBµV/m at 10m
measurement distance
Conducted immunity
EN 61000-4-6:1996 &
IEC 60255-22-6:2001
Level 3, 10V rms @ 1kHz 80% am,
150kHz to 80MHz
Radiated Immunity
EN 61000-4-3:2002 &
IEC 60255-22-3:2000
Level 3, 10V/m 80MHz to 1GHz @ 1kHz
80% am
Radiated Immunity
from digital
telephones
EN 61000-4-3:2002
Level 4, 30V/m 800MHz to 960MHz and
1.4GHz to 2GHz @ 1kHz 80% am
ANSI/
IEEE C37.90.2:2004
35V/m 80MHz to 1GHz @ 1kHz 80% am
35V/m 80MHz to 1GHz @ 100% pulse
modulated front face only
EN 61000-4-8:1994
Level 5, 100A/m applied continuously,
1000A/m for 3s
EN 61000-4-9:1993
Level 5, 1000A/m
EN 61000-4-10:1993
Level 5, 100A/m at 100kHz and 1MHz
IEEE/
ANSI C37.90.1:2002
4kV fast transient and 2.5kV damped
oscillatory applied common and
transverse mode
Magnetic field
immunity
ANSI Surge withstand
capability
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
5.
Page 9/46
ENVIRONMENT
Temperature
IEC 60255-6
Ambient temperature range
Operating temperature range
–25°C to +55°C (or –13°F to +131°F)
Storage and transit
–25°C to +70°C (or –13°F to +158°F)*
Tested as per
IEC 60068-2-1: 2007
–25°C (–13°F) storage (96 hours)
–40°C (–40°F) operation (96 hours)
IEC 60068-2-2: 2007
+85°C (+185°F) (storage (96 hours)
+85°C (+185°F) operation (96 hours)
(*) The upper limit is permissible for a
single
6 hour duration within any 24 hour
period.
Humidity
IEC 60068-2-78:2001
56 days at 93% RH and 40 °C
Enclosure
protection
IEC 60-529: 2001
IP 52 Protection (front panel) against
dust and dripping water,
IP 50 Protection for the rear and sides
of the case against dust,,
IP 10 Product safety protection for the
rear due to live connections on the
terminal block
Sinusoidal
Vibrations
IEC 60255-21-1:1998
Response and endurance, class 2
Shocks
IEC 60255-21-2:1998
Response and withstand, class 1 & 2
Bump
IEC 60255-21-2:1998
Response and withstand, class 1
Seismic
IEC 60255-21-3:1998
Class 2
Creepage
Distances and
Clearances
IEC 60255-27: 2005
Pollution degree 2, Overvoltage
category III, Impulse test voltage 5 kV
Corrosive
Environments
Per IEC 60068-2-60:
1995, Part 2, Test Ke,
Method (class) 3
Industrial corrosive environment/poor
environmental control, mixed gas flow
test.
21 days at 75% relative humidity and
+30°C
Exposure to elevated concentrations of
H2S, NO2, Cl2 and SO2.
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 10/46
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
6.
EU DIRECTIVE
6.1
EMC compliance
89/336/EEC
93/31/EEC
Compliance with European Commission EMC Directive.
Generic standards were used to establish conformity:
EN50081-2: 1994
EN60952-2: 1995
6.2
Product safety
2006/95/EC
(replacing 73/23/EEC from
01/2007)
Compliance with European Commission Low Voltage Directive. Compliance is demonstrated
by reference to generic safety standards:
−
EN61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995
−
EN60950: 1992/A11: 1997
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
7.
Page 11/46
GENERAL INFORMATION AND DEVIATION OF THE PROTECTION
ELEMENTS
Glossary
I
:
Phase current
Is
:
I>, I>>, I>>> & I<
I2s
:
I2>, I2>> & I2>>>
Ies
:
Ie>, Ie>>, Ie>>>, Ie_d> & Ie_d>>
IesCos :
IeCos> & IeCos>>
P
:
Active over / under power, P>, P>> and P<, P<<
Q
:
Reactive over / under power, Q>, Q>> and Q<, Q<<
Pe
:
Earth fault (wattmetric)
Pes
:
Pe> & Pe>>
Us
:
U>, U>>, U< & U<<
Urs
:
Ue>, Ue>>, Ue>>> & Ue>>>>
V2
:
V2> & V2>>
DT
:
Definite time
IDMT
:
Inverse definite minimum time
Element
Range
Deviation
Phase overcurrent
elements
I> & I>> & I>>>
0.1 to 40 In
± 2%
Relay characteristic
angle RCA
(RCA-Torque angle)
0° to 359°
≤ 3°
Trip zone
±10° to ±170°
≤ 3°
Earth fault overcurrent
elements
Ie> & Ie>> & Ie>>>
& Ie_d> & Ie_d>>
0.002 to 1Ien
0.01 to 8 Ien
0.1 to 40 Ien
Active overpower
P>&P>>
Active underpower
P<&P<<
Reactive overpower
Q>&Q>>
Reactive underpower
Q<&Q<<
Wattmetric earth fault
elements
1 to 10000*1W
4 to 40000*1W
1 to 10000*5W
4 to 40000*5W
1 to 10000*1W
4 to 40000*1W
1 to 10000*5W
4 to 40000*5W
1 to 10000*1W
4 to 40000*1W
1 to 10000*5W
4 to 40000*5W
1 to 10000*1W
4 to 40000*1W
1 to 10000*5W
4 to 40000*5W
57 to 130V
0.2 to 20W
1 to 160W
10 to 800W
Trigger
Reset
Time deviation
DT: Is ± 2%
IDMT: 1.1Is ±2%
0.95 Is ±2%
1.05 Is ±2%
±2% +30…50ms
±5% +30…50ms
± 2%
DT: Ies ± 2%
IDMT: 1.1Ies ±2%
0.95 Ies ±2%
1.05 Ies ±2%
±2% +30…50ms
±5% +30…50ms
± 5%
DT: P> & P>> ± 2% 0.95 P> ±2%
±2% +20…40ms
± 5%
DT: P< & P<< ± 2% 0.95 P< ±2%
±2% +20…40ms
± 5%
DT: Q> & Q>> ± 2% 0.95 Q> ±2%
±2% +20…40ms
± 5%
DT: Q< & Q<< ± 2% 0.95 Q< ±2%
±2% +20…40ms
±4% ± error
on cos ϕ
DT: Pes
± accuracy
IDMT: 1.1Pes
± accuracy
±2% +30…50ms
0.95 Pes
± accuracy
1.05 Pes
± accuracy
±5% +30…50ms
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 12/46
Element
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Range
Deviation
Trigger
Reset
Time deviation
Wattmetric earth fault
elements
Pe> & Pe>>
220 to 480V
1 to 80W
4 to 640W
40 to 3200W
±4% ± error
on cos ϕ
DT: Pes
± accuracy
IDMT: 1.1Pes
± accuracy
0.95 Pes
± accuracy
1.05 Pes
± accuracy
±2% +30…50ms
Active earth fault
overcurrent elements
IeCosϕ> & IeCosϕ>>
0.002 to 1Ien
0.01 to 8 Ien
0.1 to 40 Ien
±2% ± error
on cos ϕ
DT: IesCos
± accuracy
IDMT: 1.1 IesCos
± accuracy
0.95 IesCos
± accuracy
1.05 IesCos
± accuracy
±2% +30…50ms
Negative sequence
phase overcurrent
elements
I2>, I2>> & I2>>>
0.1 to 40 In
± 2%
DT: I2s ± 2%
IDMT: 1.1I2s ±2%
0.95 I2s ±2%
1.05 I2s ±2%
±2% +30…50ms
±5% +30…50ms
Thermal overload
Iθ>, θ Alarm, θ Trip
0.10 to 3.2 In
± 3%
IDMT: Iθ> ± 3%
0.97 Iθ>±3%
–5% +30…50ms
(ref. IEC 60255-8)
Phase undercurrent
element I<
0.1 to 1 In
± 2%
DT: I< ± 2%
1.05 I< ±2%
±2% +30…50ms
Broken conductor [I2/I1]. 20 to 100%
± 3%
DT: I2/I1 ± 3%
0.95 I2/I1 ±3% ±2% +30…50ms
57 to 130V
2 to 260V
± 2%
DT: Us ± 2%
0.95 Us ±2%
±2% +20…40ms
220 to 480V
10 to 960V
± 2%
DT: Us ± 2%
0.95 Us ±2%
±2% +20…40ms
57 to 130V
2 to 130V
± 2%
DT: Us ± 2%
1.05 Us ±2%
±2% +20…40ms
220 to 480V
10 to 480V
± 2%
DT: Us ± 2%
1.05 Us ±2%
±2% +20…40ms
57 to 130V
± 2%
DT: Urs ± 2%
0.95 Urs ±2%
±2% +20…40ms
± 2%
DT: Urs ± 2%
0.95 Urs ±2%
±2% +20…40ms
± 2%
or 0.2V
DT: Urs ± 2%
0.95 Urs ±2%
±2% +20…40ms
± 2%
or 1V
DT: Urs ± 2%
0.95 Urs ±2%
±2% +20…40ms
57 to 130V
1 to 130V
± 2%
DT: V2 ± 2%
IDMT: 1.1 V2 ±2%
0.95 V2 ±2%
1.05 V2±2%
±2% +30…50ms
±5% +30…50ms
220 to 480V
4 to 480V
± 2%
DT: V2 ± 2%
IDMT: 1.1 V2 ±2%
0.95 V2 ±2%
1.05 V2 ±2%
±2% +30…50ms
±5% +30…50ms
45,1 to 54,9Hz
± 2%
55,1 to 64,9Hz
DT: Fx ± 2%
0.95 Fx ±2%
±2% +80…100ms
45,1 to 54,9Hz
± 2%
55,1 to 64,9Hz
DT: Fx ± 2%
1.05 Fx ±2%
±2% +80…100ms
Overvoltage
U> & U>>
Undervoltage
U< & U<<
Residual overvoltage
(Direct input)
Ue>, Ue>>, Ue>>>,
Ue>>>>
±5% +30…50ms
±5% +30…50ms
1 to 260V
1 to 260V
220 to 480V
4 to 960V
5 to 960V
57 to 130V
Derived residual
overvoltage
Ue>, Ue>>, Ue>>>,
Ue>>>>
1 to 260V
1 to 260V
220 to 480V
4 to 960V
5 to 960V
Negative overvoltage
V2>, V2>>
Overfrequency
Fx>
Technical Data
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
8.
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Page 13/46
DEVIATION OF AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS TIMERS
Autoreclose timers tDs, tR, tI
±2% +10…30ms
CB fail & CB monitoring timers
±2% +10…30ms
Auxiliary timers tAUX1, tAUX2, tAUX3, tAUX4, tAUX5, tAUX6,
tAUX7, tAUX8, tAUX9, tAUX10, tAUX11 and tAUX12 (when
available)
±2% +10…30ms
Cold load pickup
±2% +20…40ms
Inrush blocking
±2% +20…40ms
SOTF/TOR
±2% +20…40ms
Programmable AND, OR & NOT logic
±2% +10…30ms
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 14/46
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
9.
DEVIATION OF MEASUREMENTS
9.1
Measurements
Measurement
Range
Deviation
Phase current
0.1 to 40 In
Typical ±0.5% at In
Earth current
0.002 to 1Ien
Typical ±0.5% at Ien
0.01 to 8 Ien
Typical ±0.5% at Ien
0.1 to 40 Ien
Typical ±0.5% at Ien
57 to 260V
Typical ±0.5% at Un
220 to 960V
Typical ±0.5% at Un
Alpha
Typical ±1° at Pn
P (active power)
Typical ±5% at Pn
Q (reactive power)
Typical ±5% at Pn
Voltage
Power
Active Power and Active Energy
9.2
Reactive Power and Reactive Energy
Cos ϕ
Deviation
Sin ϕ
Deviation
0.866
< 1.5%
0.866
< 3%
0.5
< 3%
0.5
< 1.5%
Metering (P127 with measurement CT)
Measurement
Accuracy
Phase current
<0.2% at IN
Voltage
<0.2% at VN
Power
<0.5% for Pm, Qm and Sm
Sampling rate
1600Hz
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
10.
PROTECTION SETTING RANGES
Relay
10.1
10.1.1
Number of protection group
P125
2
P126
2
P127
8
[67/50/51] Directional/Non-Directional Phase Overcurrent (P127)
−
Phase current
Fundamental only
−
Phase or phase to phase voltage
Fundamental only
−
Minimum voltage operation
0.6V (Un: 57 to 130V)
−
Minimum voltage operation
3.0V (Un: 220 to 480V)
Synchronous Polarisation
−
Minimum phase voltage fixed threshold enabling
synchronous polarising: 0.6V
−
Synchronous polarising permanence time
phase voltage thresholds: 5 s
NOTE:
10.1.2
Page 15/46
When I> is associated to an IDMT curve, the maximum setting
recommended should be 2In.
Protection Setting Ranges (P127)
Setting Range
[67] Phase OC
Min
Max
Step
I> ?
No or Yes or DIR
I>
0.1 In
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI,
IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08,
IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI,
RECT curve)
tI>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
I> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.001
I> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
I> RTMS
0.025
3.2
0.025
I> tReset
0.00 s
100 s
0.01 s
I> I>> I>>>
Interlock
No or Yes
I> Torque angle
0°
359°
1°
I> Trip zone
±10°
±170°
1°
I>> ?
No or Yes or DIR
I>>
0.1 In
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI,
IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08,
IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI,
RECT curve)
tI>>
0s
25 In
40 In
150 s
0.01 In
0.01 In
0.01 s
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 16/46
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Setting Range
[67] Phase OC
10.2
Max
I>> TMS
0.025
I>> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
I>> RTMS
Step
1.5
0.001
0.025
3,2
0.025
I>> tReset
0.00 s
100 s
0.01 s
I>> Torque angle
0°
359°
1°
I>> Trip zone
±10°
±170°
1°
I>>> ?
No or Yes or DIR or Peak
I>>>
0.1 In
40 In
0.01 In
tI>>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
I>>> Torque angle
0°
359°
1°
I>>> Trip zone
±10°
±170°
1°
[50/51] Phase Overcurrent Protection (P126)
−
Phase current
NOTE:
10.2.1.1
Min
Fundamental only
When I> and I>> is associated to an IDMT curve, the maximum
setting recommended should be 2In.
Protection Setting Ranges (P126)
Setting Range
[51] Phase OC
Min
Max
Step
I> ?
No or Yes
I>
0.1 In
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI,
IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08,
IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI,
RECT curve)
tI>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
I> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.001
I> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
I> RTMS
0.025
3.2
0.025
I> tReset
0.00 s
100 s
0.01 s
I> I>> I>>>
Interlock
No or Yes
I>> ?
No or Yes
I>>
0.5 In
40 In
0.01 In
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI,
IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08,
IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI,
RECT curve)
tI>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
I>> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.001
I>> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
25 In
0.01 In
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
10.3
I>> RTMS
0.025
3.2
0.025
I>> tReset
0.00 s
100 s
0.01 s
I>>> ?
No or Yes or Peak
I>>>
0.5 In
40 In
0.01 In
tI>>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
[67N/50N/51N] Dir./Non-Dir. Earth fault protection (P125, P126 & P127)
−
Earth fault current
Fundamental only
−
Earth fault current ranges
See following table
−
Residual voltage
Fundamental only
−
Residual voltage range
See following table
−
Minimum residual voltage operation
0.7V
(Uen: 57 to 130V)
−
Minimum residual voltage operation
3.0V
(Uen: 220 to 480V)
NOTE:
10.3.1
Page 17/46
When Ie> or Ie>> are associated to an IDMT curve, the maximum
setting recommended should be the maximum of the range divided by
20.
Protection Setting Ranges
[67N] Earth OC
Setting Range
Min
Max
Step
High sensitivity current set
Cortec code P12-C-X---X
Ie>
0.002 Ien
1 Ien
0.001 Ien
Ie>>
0.002 Ien
1 Ien
0.001 Ien
Ie>>>
0.002 Ien
1 Ien
0.001 Ien
Ie_d>
0.1 Ien
40 Ien
00.01 Ien
Ie_d>>
0.1 Ien
40 Ien
00.01 Ien
Med. sensitivity current set
Cortec code P12-B-X---X
Ie>
0.01 Ien
1 Ien
0.005 Ien
Ie>>
0.01 Ien
8 Ien
0.005 Ien
Ie>>>
0.01 Ien
8 Ien
0.005 Ien
Ie_d>
0.1 Ien
40 Ien
00.01 Ien
Ie_d>>
0.1 Ien
40 Ien
00.01 Ien
Low sensitivity current set
Cortec code P12-A-X---X
Ie>
0.1 Ien
25 Ien
0.1 Ien
Ie>>
0.5 Ien
40 Ien
0.1 Ien
Ie>>>
0.5 Ien
40 Ien
0.1 Ien
Ie_d>
0.1 Ien
40 Ien
00.01 Ien
Ie_d>>
0.1 Ien
40 Ien
00.01 Ien
Ie> ?
No or Yes or DIR
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 18/46
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Setting Range
[67N] Earth OC
Min
Max
Step
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI,
IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08,
IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI,
RECT curve)
tIe>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
Ie> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.025
Ie> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
Ie> RTMS
0.025
3.2
0.025
Ie> tReset
0.00 s
100 s
0.01 s
Ie> Ie>> Ie>>>
Interlock
No or Yes
Ie> Torque angle
0°
359°
1°
Ie> Trip zone
±10°
±170°
1°
Input residual voltage with range from 57 to 130V
Ue>
1V
260 V
0.1 V
Input residual voltage with range from 220 to 480V
Ue>
4V
960 V
0.5 V
Ie>> ?
No or Yes or DIR
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI,
IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08,
IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI,
RECT curve)
tIe>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
Ie>> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.025
Ie>> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
Ie>> RTMS
0.025
3.2
0.025
Ie>> tReset
0.00 s
100 s
0.01 s
tIe>>
0s
150
0.01 s
Ie>> Torque angle
0°
359°
1°
Ie>> Trip zone
±10°
±170°
1°
Ie>> tReset
0.00 s
100 s
0.01 s
Input residual voltage with range from 57 to 130V
Ue>>
1V
260 V
0.1 V
Input residual voltage with range from 220 to 480V
Ue>>
4V
960 V
Ie>>> ?
No or Yes or DIR or Peak
tIe>>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
Ie>>> Torque angle
0°
359°
1°
Ie>>> Trip zone
±10°
±170°
1°
Ie>>> tReset
0.00 s
100 s
0.01 s
Input residual voltage with range from 57 to 130V
0.5 V
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 19/46
Setting Range
[67N] Earth OC
Ue>>>
Min
1V
Max
260 V
Step
0.1 V
Input residual voltage with range from 220 to 480V
Ue>>>
4V
960 V
0.5 V
Input residual voltage with range from 57 to 130V
Ue>>
1V
260 V
0.1 V
Input residual voltage with range from 220 to 480V
Ue>>
4V
960 V
0.5 V
Ie>>> ?
No or Yes or DIR
tIe>>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
Ie>>> Torque angle
0°
359°
1°
Ie>>> Trip zone
±10°
±170°
1°
Ie>>> tReset
0.00 s
100 s
0.01 s
Input residual voltage with range from 57 to 130V
Ue>>>
1V
260 V
0.1 V
Input residual voltage with range from 220 to 480V
Ue>>>
4V
960 V
0.5 V
Ie_d> ?
No or Yes or DIR
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI,
IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08,
IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI,
RECT curve)
tIe_d>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
Ie_d> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.025
Ie> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
Ie> RTMS
0.025
3.2
0.025
Ie_d> tReset
0.00 s
100 s
0.01 s
Ie_d> Torque
0°
359°
1°
Ie> Trip zone
±10°
±170°
1°
Input residual voltage with range from 57 to 130V
Ue(Ie_d>)
1V
260 V
0.1 V
Input residual voltage with range from 220 to 480V
Ue(Ie_d>)
4V
720 V
0.5 V
Ie_d>> ?
No or Yes or DIR
Delay type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI,
IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08,
IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI,
RECT curve)
tIe_d>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
Ie_d>> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.025
Ie>> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
Ie>> RTMS
0.025
3.2
0.025
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 20/46
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Setting Range
[67N] Earth OC
Min
Max
Step
Ie_d>> tReset
0.00 s
100 s
0.01 s
Ie_d>> Torque
0°
359°
1°
Ie>> Trip zone
±10°
±170°
1°
Input residual voltage with range from 57 to 130V
Ue(Ie_d>>)
1V
130 V
0.1 V
Input residual voltage with range from 220 to 480V
Ue(Ie_d>>)
4V
480 V
0.5 V
ATTENTION: THE Ue THRESHOLD SETTINGS DEPEND ON THE ADOPTED
CONNECTION OPTION. IN CONFIGURATION/GENERAL OPTIONS
MENU OF THE P127 RELAY THE Ve INPUT CAN BE SET DIRECTLY
FROM A VT (I.E. FROM A DELTA VT) OR CAN BE DERIVED FROM THE
MEASUREMENT OF THE THREE PHASE TO NEUTRAL VOLTAGES
(3VPN). IN THIS CASE THE Ue IS CALCULATED AS:
1
Ue = x(UA + UB + UC)
3
THE SETTING OF THE Ue THRESHOLDS MUST TAKE THE ABOVE
FORMULA IN ACCOUNT.
10.4
Earth Wattmetric Protection
−
Earth fault current
Fundamental only
−
Residual voltage
Fundamental only
−
Minimum Operating Voltage
−
• ange from
57
to
130V
0.7 V
• Range from
220
to
480V
3.0 V
Minimum Operating Current with Ien=1A and Ien=5A
• Range from
0.002
to
1 Ien
1 mA
• Range from
0.01
to
8 Ien
5 mA
• Range from
0.1
to
NOTE:
10.4.1
40 Ien 50 mA
When Pe> or Iecos> is associated to an IDMT curve, the maximum
setting recommended should be the maximum of the range divided by 20.
Functionality Mode
This protection element can operate in Pe or IeCos mode.
10.4.2
Protection Setting Ranges
ATTENTION:
The PE thresholds are displayed in the format:
## x K W
with ## = threshold value, and K = Ien.
The threshold value is in watt [W] secondary.
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 21/46
The PE> threshold setting value is 20 W and is to be set from the front panel keypad:
−
if Ien = 1A, the internal relay setting value will be equal to 20 x 1 = 20W.
−
if Ien = 5a, the internal relay setting value will be equal to 20 x 5 = 100w.
Setting range
[32N] Earth Wattmetric
Min
Max
Step
Mode
Pe or IeCos
High sensitivity:
Current input from 0.002 to 1 Ien
57–130V Input voltage
Cortec code: P12-CAX---X
Pe> (*)
0.2xK W
20xK W
0.02xK W
Pe>> (*)
0.2xK W
20xK W
0.02xK W
220–480V Input voltage
Cortec code: P12-CBX---X
Pe> (*)
1xK W
80xK W
0.1xK W
Pe>> (*)
1xK W
80xK W
0.1xK W
Med. Sensitivity:
Current input from 0.01 to 8 Ien
57–130V Input voltage
Cortec code: P12-BAX---X
Pe> (*)
1xK W
160xK W
0.1xK W
Pe>> (*)
1xK W
160xK W
0.1xK W
220–480V Input voltage
Cortec code: P12-BBX---X
Pe> (*)
4xK W
640xK W
0.5xK W
Pe>> (*)
4xK W
640xK W
0.5xK W
Low sensitivity:
Current input from 0.1 to 40 Ien
57–130V Input voltage
Cortec code: P12-AAX---X
Pe> (*)
10xK W
800xK W
1xK W
Pe>> (*)
10xK W
800xK W
1xK W
220–480V Input voltage
Cortec code: P12-ABX---X
Pe> (*)
40xK W
3200xK W
5xK W
Pe>> (*)
40xK W
3200xK W
5xK W
Pe> ?
No or Yes
Delay Type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI,
IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08,
IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI,RI,
RECT curve)
tPe>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
Pe> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.025
Pe> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
Pe> RTMS
0.025
1.5
0.025
Pe> tReset
0.00 s
100 s
0.01 s
Pe>> ?
No or Yes
tPe>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
Pe>> tReset
0.00 s
100 s
0.01 s
High sensitivity IeCos
Cortec code P12-C-X---X
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 22/46
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Setting range
[32N] Earth Wattmetric
10.5
10.5.1
Min
Max
Step
IeCos>
0.002 Ien
1 Ien
0.001 Ien
IeCos>>
0.002 Ien
1 Ien
0.001 Ien
Med. sensitivity IeCos
Cortec code P12-B-X---X
IeCos>
0.01 Ien
8 Ien
0.005 Ien
IeCos>>
0.01 Ien
8 Ien
0.005 Ien
Low sensitivity IeCos
Cortec code P12-A-X---X
IeCos>
0.1 Ien
25 Ien
0.01 Ien
IeCos>>
0.5 Ien
40 Ien
0.01 Ien
IeCos> ?
Yes or No
Delay Type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI,
IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08,
IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI,
RECT curve)
tIeCos>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
IeCos> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.025
IeCos> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
IeCos> RTMS
0.025
1.5
0.025
IeCos> tReset
0.00 s
100 s
0.01 s
IeCos>> ?
Yes or No
tIeCos>>
0s
150 s
0.01 s
IeCos> tReset
0.00 s
100 s
0.01 s
Pe/IeCos Torque angle
0°
359°
1°
Undercurrent Protection (P126 & P127)
−
Undercurrent
−
Phase current:
Fundamental only
Protection Setting Ranges
Setting ranges
[37] Undercurrent
Min
Max
Step
I< ?
Yes or No
I<
0.1 In
1 In
0.01 In
tI<
0s
150 s
0.01 s
I< Inhibited on 52A
Yes or No
I< inhibited on U<
Yes or No
I< inhibited on U<
Yes or No
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
10.6
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (P126 & P127)
−
Phase current:
NOTE:
10.6.1
Page 23/46
Fundamental only
When I2> is associated to an IDMT curve, the maximum setting
recommended should be 2In.
Protection Setting Ranges
Setting ranges
[46] Neg.Seq. OC
10.7
Max
Step
I2> ?
No or Yes
I2>
0.1 In
Delay Type
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI,
IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08,
IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI,
RECT curve)
tI2>
0s
150s
0.01s
I2> TMS
0.025
1.5
0.025
I2> Reset Delay Type
DT or IDMT
I2> RTMS
0.025
1.5
0.025
I2> tReset
0.04 s
100 s
0.01 s
I2>> ?
No or Yes
I2>>
0.5 In
40 In
0.01 In
tI2>>
0s
150s
0.01s
I2>>> ?
No or Yes
I2>>>
0.5 In
40 In
0.01 In
tI2>>>
0s
150s
0.01s
25 In
0.01 In
Thermal Overload Protection (P126 & P127)
−
10.7.1
Min
Phase Current:
RMS
Protection Setting Ranges
[49] Therm. OL
Setting range
Min
Max
Step
Therm. OL ?
No or Yes
Iθ
0.1 In
3.2 In
0.01
Te
1 mn
200 mn
1mn
k
1
1,5
0.01
θ Trip
50%
200%
1%
θ Alarm ?
No or Yes
θ Alarm
50%
200%
1%
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 24/46
10.8
10.8.1
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Undervoltage Protection (P127)
−
Phase or phase to phase voltage Fundamental only
−
Thresholds selection mode
AND or OR (*)
Protection Setting Ranges (P127)
Setting ranges
[27] Phase Undervoltage
Min
Max
Step
57–130V Input voltage
Cortec code: P127-AX---X
U< ?
No or AND or OR
U<
2V
130 V
0.1 V
tU<
0s
600 s
0.01 s
52a Inhib. U< ?
Yes or No
U<< ?
No or AND or OR
U<<
2V
130 V
0.1 V
tU<<
0s
600 s
0.01 s
52a Inhib. U<< ?
Yes or No
220–480V Input voltage.
Cortec code: P127-BX---X
U< ?
No or AND or OR
U<
10 V
480 V
0.5 V
tU<
0s
600 s
0.01 s
52a Inhib. U< ?
Yes or No
U<< ?
No or AND or OR
U<<
10 V
480 V
0.5 V
tU<<
0s
600 s
0.01 s
52a Inhib. U<< ?
Yes or No
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
10.9
10.9.1
Page 25/46
Overvoltage Protection (P127)
−
Phase or phase to phase voltage Fundamental only
−
Thresholds selection mode
AND or OR (*)
Protection Setting Ranges (P127)
Setting ranges
[59] Phase Overvoltage
Max
Step
57–130V Input voltage
Cortec code: P127-AX---X
U> ?
No or AND or OR
U>
2V
260 V
0.1 V
tU>
0s
260 s
0.01 s
U>> ?
No or AND or OR
U>>
2V
260 V
0.1 V
tU>>
0s
600 s
0.01 s
220–480V Input voltage.
Cortec code: P127-BX---X
U> ?
No or AND or OR
U>
10 V
960 V
0.5 V
tU>
0s
600 s
0.01 s
U>> ?
No or AND or OR
U>>
10 V
960 V
0.5 V
tU>>
0s
600 s
0.01 s
(*)
10.10
Min
OR
trip caused by one or two or three phase values exceeding the threshold.
AND
trip caused by three phase values exceeding the threshold.
Under/over frequency Function (P127)
−
Phase or phase to phase voltage Fundamental only
10.10.1 Protection Setting Ranges (P127)
Setting ranges
OP PARAMETERS
Min
Max
Step
Frequency
50 Hz
60 Hz
N.A
[81] Frequency
Min
Max
Step
F1?
81> or 81< or No
F1
45,1 Hz
64,9 Hz
0.01 Hz
tF1
0s
600 s
0.01 s
F2?
81> or 81< or No
F2
45,1 Hz
64,9 Hz
0.01 Hz
tF2
0s
600 s
0.01 s
F3?
81> or 81< or No
F3
45,1 Hz
64,9 Hz
0.01 Hz
tF3
0s
600 s
0.01 s
F4?
81> or 81< or No
F4
45,1 Hz
64,9 Hz
0.01 Hz
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 26/46
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Setting ranges
OP PARAMETERS
10.11
Min
600 s
Step
tF4
0s
F5?
81> or 81< or No
F5
45,1 Hz
64,9 Hz
0.01 Hz
tF5
0s
600 s
0.01 s
F6?
81> or 81< or No
F6
45,1 Hz
64,9 Hz
0.01 Hz
tF6
0s
600 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
Rate of change of frequency (P127)
Setting ranges
OP PARAMETERS
10.12
Max
Min
dF/dt1 ?
Yes or No
dF/dt1
–10Hz/s
dF/dt2 ?
Yes or No
dF/dt2
–10Hz/s
dF/dt3 ?
Yes or No
dF/dt3
–10Hz/s
dF/dt4 ?
Yes or No
dF/dt4
–10Hz/s
dF/dt5 ?
Yes or No
dF/dt5
–10Hz/s
dF/dt6 ?
Yes or No
dF/dt6
–10Hz/s
Max
Step
+10Hz/s
0.1Hz/s
+10Hz/s
0.1Hz/s
+10Hz/s
0.1Hz/s
+10Hz/s
0.1Hz/s
+10Hz/s
0.1Hz/s
+10Hz/s
0.1Hz/s
Directional power Function (P127)
−
Phase or phase to phase voltage
Fundamental only
Power protection:
−
Active overpower (two thresholds P> and P>>),
−
Reactive Overpower (two thresholds Q> and Q>>),
−
Active Underpower (two thresholds P< and P<<),
−
Reactive Underpower (two thresholds Q< and Q<<).
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 27/46
10.12.1 Protection Setting Ranges
Setting ranges
[32] Directional Power
Min
Max
Step
57–130V Input voltage
Cortec code: P127AA or P127BA or P127CA
“P>?” or “Q>?” or “P<?” or “Q<?”
Yes or No
P> or Q> or P< or Q<
1 W*k (*)
10000 W*k (*) 1 W*k (*)
Directional angle
0°
359°
1°
tP> or tQ> or tP< or tQ<
0s
150 s
0.01 s
“P>>?” or “Q>>?” or “P<<?” or “Q<<?” Yes or No
P>> or Q>> or P<< or Q<<
1 W*k (*)
10000 W*k (*) 1 W*k (*)
Directional angle
0°
359°
1°
tP>> or tQ>> or tP<< or tQ<<
0s
150 s
0.01 s
220–480V Input voltage
Cortec code: P127AB or P127BA or P127CA
“P>?” or “Q>?” or “P<?” or “Q<?”
Yes or No
P> or Q> or P< or Q<
4 W*k (*)
40000 W*k (*) 1 W*k (*)
Directional angle
0°
359°
1°
tP> or tQ> or tP< or tQ<
0s
150 s
0.01 s
“P>>?” or “Q>>?” or “P<<?” or “Q<<?” Yes or No
P>> or Q>> or P<< or Q<<
4 W*k (*)
40000 W*k (*) 1 W*k (*)
Directional angle
0°
359°
1°
tP>> or tQ>> or tP<< or tQ<<
0s
150 s
0.01 s
(*)
k = 1 if TC secondary ration = 1A
k = 5 if TC secondary ration = 5A
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 28/46
10.13
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Residual Overvoltage Protection
−
Residual voltage: Fundamental only
10.13.1 Protection Setting Ranges
Setting range
[59] Residual Overvoltage
Min
Max
Step
57–130V Input voltage.
Cortec code: P127-AX---X
Ue>>>> ?
No or Yes
Ue>>>>
1V
260 V
0.1 V
tUe>>>>
0s
600 s
0.01 s
220–480V Input voltage.
Cortec code: P127-BX---X
Ue>>>> ?
No or Yes
Ue>>>>
5V
960 V
0.5 V
tUe>>>>
0s
600 s
0.01 s
ATTENTION:
THE Ue THRESHOLD SETTINGS DEPEND ON THE ADOPTED
CONNECTION OPTION. IN CONFIGURATION/GENERAL OPTIONS
MENU OF THE P127 RELAY THE Ve INPUT CAN BE SET DIRECTLY
FROM A VT (I.E. FROM A DELTA VT) OR CAN BE DERIVED FROM THE
MEASUREMENT OF THE THREE PHASE TO NEUTRAL VOLTAGES
(3VPN). IN THIS CASE THE Ue IS CALCULATED AS:
Ue =
1
x(UA + UB + UC)
3
THE SETTING OF THE Ue THRESHOLDS MUST TAKE THE ABOVE
FORMULA IN ACCOUNT.
10.14
Negative overvoltage (P127)
Setting range
[47] Negative Overvoltage
Min
Max
Step
57–130V Input voltage.
Cortec code: P127-AX---X
V2> ?
No or Yes
V2>
1V
130 V
0.1 V
tV2>
0s
100 s
0.01 s
V2>> ?
No or Yes
V2>>
1V
130 V
0.1 V
tV2>>
0s
100 s
0.01 s
220–480V Input voltage.
Cortec code: P127-BX---X
V2> ?
No or Yes
V2>
4V
480 V
0.5 V
tV2>
0s
100 s
0.01 s
V2>> ?
No or Yes
V2>>
4V
480 V
0.5 V
tV2>>
0s
100 s
0.01 s
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
10.15
Page 29/46
Multishot Autoreclose Function (P126 & P127)
Main shots: 4 independent shots.
External logic inputs: 6 inputs (CB opened signal, CB closed signal, manual opening
command, manual closing command, blocking order, cycle activation).
Internal programmable trigger from phase and earth fault on all re-closing cycles.
External trigger from logic input.
Inhibit time on manual closing.
Programmable dead times and reclaim time setting.
Maximum CB closing control equal to 5s (+t_Pulse setting).
10.15.1 Multishot Autoreclose Settings
Setting range
[79] Autoreclose
Min
Autoreclose ?
Yes or No
Ext. CB Fail ?
Yes or No
Ext. CB Fail time
0.01 s
Aux1 ((I>) ?
Yes or No
Aux2 (Ie>) ?
Yes or No
Ext Block ?
Yes or No
Rolling Demand
Yes or No
Max cycles nb
Time period
Max
Step
600 s
0.01 s
2
100
1
10mn
24h
10mn
tD1
0.01 s
300 s
0.01 s
tD2
0.01 s
300 s
0.01 s
tD3
0.01 s
600 s
0.01 s
tD4
0.01 s
600 s
0.01 s
tI>
0.05 s
600 s
0.01 s
tI>>
0.05 s
600 s
0.01 s
tI>>>
0.05 s
600 s
0.01 s
tIe>
0.05 s
600 s
0.01 s
tIe>>
0.05 s
600 s
0.01 s
tIe>>>
0.05 s
600 s
0.01 s
0.02 s
600 s
0.01 s
tI
0.02 s
600 s
0.01 s
Phase Cycles
0
4
1
E/Gnd Cycles
0
4
1
Cycles
4321
Settings
tI>
1111
0 or 1 or 2
tI>>
1111
0 or 1 or 2
tI>>>
1111
0 or 1 or 2
tIe>
1111
0 or 1 or 2
tIe>>
1111
0 or 1 or 2
Dead time
Reclaim time
tR
Inhib time
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 30/46
[79] Autoreclose
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Setting range
Min
Max
tIe>>>
1111
0 or 1 or 2
tPe/Iecos>
1111
0 or 1 or 2
tPe/Iecos>>
1111
0 or 1 or 2
tAux1
1111
0 or 1 or 2
tAux2
1111
0 or 1 or 2
Step
With:
0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip
1 = trip on pick up of the protection element, followed by reclosing cycle
2 = no trip on pick up of the protection element also if this has been set in the CRTL/Trip
commands/Trip menu
10.15.2 Further timing
Fixed time out for lacking of CB opening signal on trip protection:
Time out for lacking of CB closing signal on close control after dead time:
tClose Pulse(*): from 0.1 to 5.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
(*) Setting available in CB monitoring menu.
2.00 s at 50 Hz
1.67 s at 60 Hz
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 31/46
11.
AUTOMATION CONTROL FUNCTIONS
11.1
Trip commands
Assignation of the following thresholds to trip output relays:
11.2
−
all models: tIe>, tIe>>, tIe>>>, tPe/IeCos>, tPe/IeCos>> , tUe>>>>, tAux 1, tAux 2, tAux
3, tAux 4, Ctrl Trip,
−
P126 and P127 only, tI> , tI>> , tI>>> , tI2>, tI2>>, tI2>>>, Thermal θ, Brkn. Cond ,
SOTF, tEQUATION A, tEQUATION B, tEQUATION C ,t EQUATION D , tEQUATION E ,
tEQUATION F, tEQUATION G, tEQUATION H
−
P127 only: tIe_d>, tIe_d>>, tP>, tP>>, tU>, tU>>, tU<, tU<<, tV2>, tV2>>, tF1, tF2 , tF3 ,
tF4 , tF5 , tF6 , dF/dt1, dF/dt2, dF/dt3, dF/dt4, dF/dt5, dF/dt6, tAux 5, tAux 6, tAux 7,
tAux 8, tAux 9, tAux A, tAux B, tAux C
Latch relays
Number of relay settable:
11.3
P125
P126
P127
6
8
8
Blocking logic
Possibility to block the following delayed thresholds:
11.4
−
all models: tIe>, tIe>>, tIe>>>, tPe/IeCos>, tPe/IeCos>>, tUe>>>>, tAux1, tAux2, tAux3,
tAux4,
−
P126 and P127: tI>, tI>>, tI>>>, tI2>, tI2>>, tI2>>>, tThermal θ, tI<, tBrk. Cond
−
P127: tIe_d>, tIe_d>>, tP>, tP>>, tP<, tP<<, tQ>, tQ>>, tQ<, tQ<<, tU>, tU>>, tU<,
tU<<, tV2>, tV2>>, tF1 , tF2 , tF3 , tF4 , tF5 , tF6 , dF/dt1, dF/dt2, dF/dt3, dF/dt4, dF/dt5,
dF/dt6, tAux5, tAux6, tAux7, tAux8, tAux9, tAuxA, tAuxB, tAuxC,
Inrush blocking Logic (P127)
Inrush Block
Setting range
Min
Max
Step
Inrush Block
Yes or No
Inrush H2 ration
10 %
35 %
0,1 %
Inrush tReset
0 ms
2s
0,1 s
Block I>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block I>>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block I>>>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block Ie>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block Ie>>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block Ie>>>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block I2>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block I2>>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block I2>>>
No
Yes
Yes or No
Block Ie_d>, Ie_d>>
No
Yes
Yes or No
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 32/46
11.5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Logic select
Logic selectivity 1 and logic selectivity 2: this function is used to assign each time delay to
threshold to the “Log Sel” input.
Setting range
Blocking Inrush
11.6
Min
Sel1 tI>>
Yes or No
Sel1 tI>>>
Yes or No
Sel1 tIe>>
Yes or No
Sel1 tIe>>>
Yes or No
Sel1 tIe_d>
Yes or No
Sel1 tIe_d>>
Yes or No
T Sel1
0s
Max
150s
Step
10ms
Output relays
Alarm and trip threshold assignation to a logic output: 6 relays (P125), 8 relays (P126 and
P127).
Assignable functions:
−
all models: Ie>, tIe>, Ie_R>, Ie>>, tIe>>, Ie_R>>, Ie>>>, tIe>>>, Ie_R>>>, Pe/IeCos>,
tPe/IeCos>, Pe/IeCos>>, tPe/IeCos>>, Ue>>>>, tUe>>>>, tAux1, tAux2, tAux3, tAux4,
CONTROLTRIP, CONTROLCLOSE, ActiveGroup, Input1, Input2, Input3:, Input4,
−
P126 and P127: Trip, I>, tI>, I_R>, I>>, tI>>, I_R>>, I>>>, tI>>>, I_R>>>, tIA>, tIB>,
tIC>, I2>, tI2>, I2>>, tI2>>, I2>>>, tI2>>>, ThermAlarm, ThermTrip, I<, tI<, BrknCond,
CBAlarm, 52 Fail, CBFail , CB Close , 79 Run, 79 Trip, SOTF, Input5, Input6, Input7,
t EQU.A, t EQU.B, t EQU.C, t EQU.D, t EQU.E, t EQU.F, t EQU.G, t EQU.H, 79 int.
Lock, 79 Ext Lock,
−
P127: Ie_d>, tIe_d>, Ie_dR>, tIe_dR>, Ie_d>>, tIe_d>>, Ie_dR>>, tIe_dR>>, P>, tP>,
P>>, tP>>, U>, tU>, U>>, tU>>, U<, tU<, U<<, tU<<, V2>, tV2>, V2>>, tV2>>, F1, tF1,
F2, tF2, F3, tF3, F4, tF4, F5, tF5, F6, tF6, dF/dt1, dF/dt2, dF/dt3, dF/dt4, dF/dt5, dF/dt6,
F.OUT, tAux5, tAux6, tAux7, tAux8, tAux9, tAuxA, tAuxB, tAuxC, VTS, CTS,
Command1, Command2, Command3, Command4
11.7
Inputs
11.7.1
Inputs assignation
Single function or multiple automation functions assignable to 4 (P125) or 7 (P126 and P127)
logic inputs:
−
all models: None, Unlatch, Blk Log 1, Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux 3, Aux 4, Maint. M, Man.
Close, Local, Synchronisation, LED Reset (or reset LED),
−
P126 and P127: Blk Log 2, 52 a, 52 b, CB FLT, θ Reset, Change set, Log Sel 2, Cold
L PU, Strt Dist, Block_79, Trip Circ, Start t BF, Ctrl Trip, Ctrl Close
−
P127: Aux 5, Aux 6, Aux 7, Aux 8, Aux 9, Aux A, Aux B, Aux C, Log Sel 1
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
11.7.2
Page 33/46
Auxiliary Timers (P126 & P127)
Auxiliary timers:
Auxiliary timers
11.8
11.8.1
Setting range
Min
Max
Step
tAux1
0
200 s
0.01 s
tAux2
0
200 s
0.01 s
tAux3
0
200 s
0.01 s
tAux4
0
200 s
0.01 s
tAux5
0
200 s
0.01 s
tAux6
0
200 s
0.01 s
tAux7
0
20000 s
0.01 s
tAux8
0
20000 s
0.01 s
tAux9
0
20000 s
0.01 s
tAuxA (tAux10)
0
200 s
0.01 s
tAuxB (tAux11)
0
200 s
0.01 s
tAuxC (tAux12)
0
200 s
0.01 s
Broken Conductor Detection (P126 & P127)
Principle used:
I2/I1
Functionality available for:
(IA or IB or IC) > 10% In
Broken conductor detection setting range
Broken Conductor
11.9
up to 12 assigned to the logic inputs
Aux1, Aux2, Aux3, Aux4
+ optional auxiliary timers Aux5, Aux6, Aux7, Aux8 Aux9,
AuxA, AubB and AuxC
Setting range
Min
Max
Step
Brkn.Cond ?
Yes or No
Ratio I2/I1
20%
100%
1%
Brkn.Cond Time tBC
1s
14400s
1s
Cold Load Pickup (P126 & P127)
Cold Load PU
Setting range
Min
Cold Load PU ?
Yes or No
Input?
Yes or No
Auto?
Yes or No
Max
Step
Cold Load pickup activable with: tI>, tI>>, tI>>>, tIe>, tIe>>, tIe>>>,
tIe_d, tIe_d>>, tI2>, tI2>>, tI2>>> and/or tTherm
Cold Load PU level
20%
800%
1%
tCL
0.1s
3600s
0.1s
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 34/46
11.10
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
51V function (P127)
The 51V function means the control of the overcurrent elements by the monitoring of the
phase voltage; !The settings involved are listed below. The VTS function can also block the
51V.
51V
Setting range
Min
Max
Step
Voltage range 57-130V
(U<OR V2>) & I>>
Yes or No
V2>
3V
(U<<OR V2>>) & I>>>
Yes or No
V2>
3V
200V
0.1V
200V
0.1V
720V
0.5V
720V
0.5V
Voltage range 220-480V
11.11
(U<OR V2>) & I>>
Yes or No
V2>
20V
(U<<OR V2>>) & I>>>
Yes or No
V2>
20V
VTS Blocks 51V
Yes or No
VTS Alarm
Yes or No
VT Supervision (P127 only)
11.11.1 VT Supervision Setting range
VT Supervision
11.12
Setting range
Min
VTS?
Yes or No
VTS Alarm
Yes or No
VTS Blocks 51V
Yes or No
VTS Blocks protection ?
Yes or No
VTS Non Dir I>, I>>, I>>>, Ie>,
Ie>>, Ie>>>, Ie_d> and/or
Ie_d>>
Yes or No
tVTS
0s
Max
100s
Step
10ms
CT Supervision (P127)
11.12.1 CT Supervision Setting range
CT Supervision
Setting range
Min
Max
Step
CT Supervision
Yes or No
Ie>
0.08 × In
1.0 × In
0.01 × In
Ue< (P127xA)
0.5V
22V
0.1V
Ue< (P127xB)
2V
88V
0.5V
tCTS
0s
100s
0.01s
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
11.13
Page 35/46
Circuit Breaker Failure (P126 & P127)
11.13.1 Circuit Breaker Failure Setting range
CB Fail
11.14
Setting range
Min
Max
Step
CB Fail ?
Yes or No
I< BF
0.02 In
1In
0.01 In
CB Fail Time tBF
0s
10 s
0.01 s
Block I>
Yes or No
Block Ie>
Yes or No
Trip Circuit Supervision (P126 & P127)
11.14.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Setting range
TC Supervision
11.15
Setting range
Min
TC Supervision ?
Yes or No
t trip circuit tSUP
0.1 s
Max
10 s
Step
0.01 s
Circuit Breaker Control and Monitoring (P126 & P127)
11.15.1 Setting Ranges
CB Supervision
Setting range
Min
Max
Step
CB Open S’vision?
Yes or No
CB Open time
0.05 s
CB Close S’vision?
Yes or No
CB Close time
0.05 s
CB Open Alarm ?
Yes or No
CB Open NB
0
ΣAmps(n) ?
Yes or No
ΣAmps(n)
0 E6 A
4000 E6 A 1E6 A
n
1
2
1
tOpen Pulse(*)
0.10 s
5s
0.01 s
tClose Pulse(*)
0.10 s
5s
0.01 s
1s
0.01 s
1s
0.01 s
50000
1
(*) Note: The tOpen/Close Pulse is available in the P125 for the Local /Remote functionality
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 36/46
11.16
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
SOTF/TOR Switch on to fault / Trip on reclose (P126 & P127)
11.16.1 Setting Ranges
SOTF
11.17
Setting range
Min
SOTF?
Yes or No
t SOTF
0 ms
I>>
Yes or No
I>>>
Yes or No
Ctrl close input
Yes or No
SOTF input
Yes or No
HMI closing order
Yes or No
[79] closing
Yes or No
Front comm. order
Yes or No
Rear comm. order
Yes or No
Rear2 comm. order
Yes or No
Max
500 ms
Step
10ms
Logic Equation (P126 & P127)
The MiCOM P126 and P127 relays integrate complete logic equations to allow customization
of the product based on customer application.
Up to 8 independent Boolean equations can be used (from A to H). Every result of equation
can be time delayed and assigned to any output relays, trip, trip latching and/or HMI LEDs.
Up to 16 operands can be used (from 00 to 15). Within operands, there are two parts:
-
(1/2): logical gates (NOT, OR, AND, NOT AND, NOT OR)
-
(2/2): signals (I>, tI>>, Input1 …etc)
11.17.1 Timer Setting Ranges
logic equat
T delay
Setting range
EQU. A Toperat
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. A Treset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. B Toperat
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. B Treset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. C Toperat
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. C Treset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. D Toperat
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. D Treset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. E Toperat
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. E Treset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. F Toperat
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. F Treset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. G Toperat
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. G Treset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
Min
Max
Step
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 37/46
logic equat
T delay
Setting range
EQU. H Toperat
0s
600 s
0.01 s
EQU. H Treset
0s
600 s
0.01 s
Min
Max
Step
11.17.2 Available logical gates
Logical gates
Availability (1/2)
NOT
A00
B00
C00
D00
E00
F00
G00
H00
OR (by default)
A01 to A15
B01 to B15
C01 to C15
D01 to D15
E01 to E15
F01 to F15
G01 to G15
H01 to H15
AND
AND NOT
OR NOT
11.17.3 Available signals
With the Logic Equations submenu, 16 operands can be used in any single equation. The
following logic signals are available for mapping to an equation:
TEXT
Signals (2/2)
I>, I> and I>>
Instantaneous first, second and third phase overcurrent
thresholds
tI>, tI>> and tI>>>
Time delayed first, second and third phase overcurrent
thresholds
Ie>, Ie>> and Ie>>>
Instantaneous first, second and third earth overcurrent
thresholds
tIe>, tIe>> and tIe>>>
Time delayed first, second and third earth overcurrent
thresholds
Pe>, Pe>>
First and second earth wattmetric alarm thresholds
tPe>, tPe>>
Time delayed first and second earth wattmetric trip thresholds
t Aux 1 to t Aux 4
Copy of the status of the Logic Input delayed by tAux1, tAux2,
tAux3 and tAux4 times
t Aux 5 to t Aux C (when
available)
Copy of the status of the Logic Input delayed by tAux5, tAux6,
tAux7, tAux8, tAux9, tAuxA, tAuxB and tAuxC times
I2>, I2>> and I2>>>
Instantaneous first, second and third phase negative
sequence thresholds
tI2>, tI2>> and tI2>>>
Time delayed negative phase sequence (1st, 2nd and 3rd
threshold)
θ Alarm
Thermal alarm output signal
θ Trip
Trip on Thermal overload
I<
Instantaneous undercurrent threshold
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 38/46
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
TEXT
Signals (2/2)
tI<
Time delayed undercurrent
tBC
Time delayed broken conductor
U>, U>>
Instantaneous first and second overvoltage threshold (P127)
tU>, tU>>
Time delayed first and second overvoltage threshold (P127)
U<, U<<
Instantaneous first and second undervoltage threshold (P127)
tU<, tU<<
Time delayed first and second undervoltage threshold (P127)
Ue>>>>
Instantaneous threshold for residual overvoltage
tUe>>>>
Time delayed trip threshold for residual overvoltage
tBC
Time delayed broken conductor
79 Trip
Autoreclose final trip
Input 1 to Input C (when
available)
Opto input 1 to opto input C.
P>, P>>
Instaneous first and second active overpower trip threshold
(P127)
tP>, tP>>
Time delayed first and second active overpower trip threshold
(P127)
P<, P<<
Instaneous first and second active underpower trip threshold
(P127)
tP<, tP<<
Time delayed first and second active underpower trip
threshold (P127)
Q>, Q>>
Instaneous first and second reactive overpower trip threshold
(P127)
tQ>, tQ>>
Time delayed first and second reactive overpower trip
threshold (P127)
Q<, Q<<
Instaneous first and second reactive underpower trip
threshold (P127)
tQ<, tQ<<
Time delayed first and second reactive underpower trip
threshold (P127)
V2>, V2>>
Instaneous 1st or 2nd negative overpower trip threshold
(P127)
tV2>, tV2>>
Time delayed 1st or 2nd negative overpower trip threshold
(P127)
F1 to F6
Instantaneous first, second, third, fourth, fifth and sixth
frequency trip threshold (P127)
tF1 to tF6
Time delayed first, second, third, fourth, fifth and sixth
frequency trip threshold (P127)
dF/dt1 to dF/dt6
1st to 6th rates of change of frequency
VTS
Instantaneous VTS output signal (P127)
CTS
Instantaneous Current Transformer Supervision signal (P127)
Ie_d>, Ie_d>>
Instantaneous 1st or 2nd derived earth overcurrent threshold
tIe_d>, tIe_d>>
Time delayed 1st or 2nd derived earth overcurrent threshold
79 i.Blo
Autoreclose lock activated by the internal process of the
autoreclose (Internal Blocking)
79 e.Blo
Autoreclose lock activated by the input “block 79” (External
Blocking)
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
11.18
Page 39/46
TEXT
Signals (2/2)
tEQU. A to tEQU. H
Results of equations A to H.
CB FLT
Circuit Breaker failure
C.Order1 to C.Order4
Remote communication orders (P127)
Communication order delay
The following delay times set the duration for the reception of the remote “communication
order” signals.
logic equat
T delay
Setting range
tCommand 1
0s
600s
50ms
tCommand 2
0s
600s
50ms
tCommand 3
0s
600s
50ms
tCommand 4
0s
600s
50ms
Min
Max
Step
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 40/46
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
12.
RECORDING FUNCTIONS
12.1
Event Records
12.2
12.3
Capacity
250 events
Time-tag
1 millisecond
Triggers
Any selected protection alarm and threshold
Logic input change of state
Setting changes
Self test events
Fault Records
Capacity
25 faults
Time-tag
1 millisecond
Triggers
Any selected protection alarm and threshold
Data
Fault date
Protection thresholds
Setting Group
AC inputs measurements (RMS)
Fault measurements
Instantaneous recorder
Capacity
5 starting informations (instantaneous)
Time-tag
1 millisecond
Triggers
Any selected protection alarm and threshold
Data
date, hour
origin (any protection alarm)
length (duration of the instantaneous trip yes or no
12.4
Disturbance Records
12.4.1
Triggers; Data; Setting Ranges
Disturbance Records
Triggers
Any selected protection alarm and threshold, logic input, remote
command
Data
AC input channels
digital input and output states
frequency value
Default value
Setting range
Min
Max
Step
Records number
5
1
5
1
Pre-Time
0.1s
0.1
2.9 / 4.9 /
6.9 or 8.9
0.1
Disturb rec Trig
ON TRIP
ON TRIP or ON INST.
Trigger
Any selected protection alarm and threshold
Logic input
Remote command
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
13.
Type
Port
Page 41/46
COMMUNICATION
Relay
position
RS485 Rear port
Physical Link
Connectors Data Rate
Screened twister Screws or
pair
snap-on
RS485 Optional 2nd Screened twister Screws or
pair
snap-on
isolated rear port
RS232 Front port
Protocol
300 to 38400 baud ModBus RTU, ,
(programmable)
IEC60870-5-103, DNP3
300 to 38400 baud ModBus RTU,
(programmable)
IEC60870-5-103 (option)
Screened twister Sub–D 9 pin 300 to 38400 baud ModBus RTU
pair
female
(programmable)
connector
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Page 42/46
14.
Technical Data
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
IRIG-B INTERFACE
The IRIG-B is a P127 optional interface used to receive synchronization signal from a GPS
clock.
Type: Modulated (1kHz) or demodulated
Interface:
−
Modulated IRIG-B interface:
• BNC socket and BNC adaptor,
• total impedance: 50Ω
−
No modulated IRIG-B interface: screw,
SELV rated circuit
Date code: BCD
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
15.
CURVES
15.1
General
Page 43/46
Although the curves tend towards infinite when the current approaches Is (general
threshold), the minimum guaranteed value of the operating current for all the curves with the
inverse time characteristic is 1.1Is (with a tolerance of ± 0.05Is).
15.1.1
Inverse Time Curves:
The first stage thresholds for phase (earth) overcurrent can be selected with an inverse
definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic. The time delay is calculated with a
mathematical formula.
In all, there are eleven IDMT characteristics available.
The mathematical formula applicable to the first ten curves is:
⎛
⎞
K
⎟
t = T ×⎜
+
L
⎜ (I I S )α − 1
⎟
⎝
⎠
Where:
t
Operation time
K
Factor (see table)
I
Value of measured current
Is
Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value)
α
Factor (see table)
L
ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC and RECT curves)
T
Time multiplier setting from 0.025 to 1.5
Type of curve
Standard
K factor
α factor
L factor
Short time inverse
Schneider
Electric
0.05
0.04
0
Standard inverse
IEC
0.14
0.02
0
Very inverse
IEC
13.5
1
0
Extremely inverse
IEC
80
2
0
Long time inverse
Schneider
Electric
120
1
0
Short time inverse
C02
0.02394
0.02
0.01694
Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE
0.0515
0.02
0.114
Long time inverse
C08
5.95
2
0.18
Very inverse
ANSI/IEEE
19.61
2
0.491
Extremely inverse
ANSI/IEEE
28.2
2
0.1217
Rectifier protection
RECT
45900
5.6
0
The RI curve has the following definition:
t= K ⋅
1
0 .339 −
0.236
I
Is
( )
K setting is from 0.10 to 10 in steps of 0.05.
The equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I/Is ≤ 20.
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 44/46
15.1.2
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Reset Timer
The first stage thresholds for phase and earth overcurrent protection, negative sequence
overcurrent and wattmetric/IeCos are provided with a timer hold facility "t Reset".
It may be set to a definite time value or to an inverse definite minimum time characteristic
(IEEE/ANSI curves only). This may be useful in certain applications, for example when
grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays that have inherent reset time
delays.
The second and third stage thresholds for the wattmetric/IeCos protection and earth fault
overcurrent protection only have a definite time reset.
A possible situation where the reset timer may be used is to reduce fault clearance times
where intermittent faults occur.
An example may occur in a cable with plastic insulation. In this application it is possible that
the fault energy melts the cable insulation, which then reseals after clearance, thereby
eliminating the cause for the fault. This process repeats itself to give a succession of fault
current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until
the fault becomes permanent.
When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is set to minimum the P125, P126 and P127
relays will be repeatedly reset and will not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent.
By using the reset timer hold function the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby
reducing fault clearance time.
The mathematical formula applicable to the five curves is:
⎛
K
t = T ×⎜
⎜ 1 − (I I S )α
⎝
Where:
⎞
⎟
⎟
⎠
t
Reset time
K
Factor (see table)
I
Value of the measured current
Is
Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value)
α
Factor (see table)
T
Reset time multiplier (RTMS) setting between 0.025 and 1.5.
Type of curve
Standard
K factor
α factor
Short time inverse
C02
2.261
2
Moderately inverse
ANSI/IEEE
4.850
2
Long time inverse
C08
5.950
2
Very inverse
ANSI/IEEE
21.600
2
Extremely Inverse
ANSI/IEEE
29.100
2
Technical Data
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
15.2
Page 45/46
Thermal Overload Curves
The thermal time characteristic is given by:
⎛ −t ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
e⎝ τ ⎠
=
(I ² − (kxIFLC )² )
(I ² − Ip ² )
Where:
t
= Time to trip, following application of the overload current, I
τ
= Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant equipment
I
= Largest phase current
IFLC
= Full load current rating (relay setting 'Thermal Trip')
k
= 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 IFLC
IP
= Steady state pre-loading current before application of the overload
The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the
overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from "hot" or "cold".
Curves of the thermal overload time characteristic are given in Technical Data.
The mathematical formula applicable to MiCOM Relays is the following
⎛ K² - θ
t Trip = Te In ⎜⎜
⎝ K ² − θtrip
⎞
⎟
⎟
⎠
Where:
t Trip
= Time to trip (in seconds)
Te
= Thermal time constant of the equipment to be protected (in seconds)
K
= Thermal overload equal to Ieq/k Iθ> with:
Ieq
= Equivalent current corresponding to the RMS value of the largest phase
current
Iθ>
= Full load current rating given by the national standard or by the supplier
k
= Factor associated to the thermal state formula
θ alarm = Initial thermal state. If the initial thermal state = 30% then θ =0.3
θ trip
= Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then θ trip = 1
The settings of these parameters are available in the various menus. The calculation of the
thermal state is given by the following formula:
⎛ Ieq ⎞
Θ τ +1 = ⎜
⎟
⎝ kxIΘ > ⎠
²⎡
⎢1− e
⎢
⎣
⎛ −t ⎞ ⎤
⎜ ⎟
⎝ Te ⎠ ⎥
⎥
⎦
+ Θ τe
θ being calculated every 100ms.
⎛ −t ⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎝ Te ⎠
P12y/EN TD/Fa5
Technical Data
Page 46/46
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
BLANK PAGE
Getting Started
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
GETTING STARTED
Getting Started
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Page 1/30
CONTENT
1.
ENERGISING THE RELAY
3
1.1
System Connections
3
1.2
Auxiliary Power Supply Connections
3
2.
USER INTERFACE AND MENU STRUCTURE
4
2.1
User interfaces and menu structure
4
2.1.1
“Default settings” alarm
4
2.1.2
Password protection
4
2.1.3
Setting the language
5
2.1.4
Setting Date and time
5
2.1.5
Menu navigation
5
2.2
Menu structure
6
3.
LOCAL CONNECTION TO A PC
7
3.1
Configuration
7
3.1.1
REMOTE connection
7
3.2
Products plugged in the same panel
8
3.3
Communication between distant products
8
3.4
MiCOM S1 and MiCOM S1 Studio relay communications basics
9
3.5
MiCOM S1 Studio
9
3.5.1
Data Model Management
9
3.5.2
“Quick Connection” to the relay using MiCOM S1 Studio
12
3.5.3
Create a system
15
3.5.4
Create a new substation
16
3.5.5
Create a new voltage level
17
3.5.6
Create a new bay
17
3.5.7
Create a new device
18
3.5.8
Open Settings File
19
3.6
MiCOM S1
21
3.6.1
Starting MiCOM S1
21
3.6.2
Open communication link with relay
23
3.6.3
Off-line use of MiCOM S1
25
3.6.4
MiCOM monitoring
25
3.7
Presentation and analysis of disturbance
27
4.
WITHDRAWING MODULE FROM CASE
28
5.
COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION
30
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Getting Started
Page 2/30
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
BLANK PAGE
Getting Started
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
1.
Page 3/30
ENERGISING THE RELAY
To energise the relay correctly, follow the following instructions carefully.
1.1
1.2
System Connections
1.
Check the wiring scheme of your installation.
2.
Check that the contacts of output relay RL1 are included in your trip circuit.
Auxiliary Power Supply Connections
Connect a DC or AC (according to nominal supply rating Ua) voltage power supply.
POSITIVE Vaux TO TERMINAL 33
NEGATIVE Vaux TO TERMINAL 34
DO NOT FORGET TO CONNECT THE EARTH REFERENCE TO
TERMINAL 29!
Turn on the auxiliary power supply and set to approximately rated voltage as shown on the
front panel of the relay.
The display should show:
IA
1.00 A
Displays the A phase current (true RMS value) taking into
account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO
submenu).
LEDs should be in the following configuration:
 Green LED L3 "Healthy" (Vaux) is iluminated
 All the other LEDs should be off.
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Getting Started
Page 4/30
2.
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
USER INTERFACE AND MENU STRUCTURE
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the
contents of the safety section/safety guide SFTY/4LM/D11 or later issue, the technical
data section and the ratings on the equipment rating label.
Refer to “GETTING STARTED” (GS) section for the description of the following procedures
(interfaces and menu).
Before the initial operation of the relay, some of the parameter settings must be checked or
modified (otherwise, “Setting alarm” is displayed).
Lift the upper and lower hinged covers and remove the transparent cover over the front
panel. When the keypad is exposed, it provides full access to the menu options of the relay.
The relevant information is displayed on the LCD.
2.1
User interfaces and menu structure
The settings and functions of the MiCOM relay can be accessed both from the front panel
keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication ports. Information on each of
these methods is given in this section to describe how to start using the relay.
The front panel of the relay includes a keypad, a 16-character alphanumeric liquid crystal
display (LCD) and 8 LEDs.
2.1.1
“Default settings” alarm
When the relay is powered ON, it checks its memory contents. If the default settings are
loaded, an alarm is raised and The ALARM yellow LED lights up.
To suppress this message and to reset the watch dog, change one parameter in the relay's
menu:
 Press the  button,
 Modify, for instance, the password or the language (“OP parameters” menu.
2.1.2
Password protection
Password protection is applicable to most of the relay parameter settings, especially to the
selection of the various thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of
logic inputs and logic outputs.
The password consists of four capital characters. When leaving the factory, the password is
set to AAAA. The user can define any combination of four characters.
Should the password be lost or forgotten, the modification of stored parameters is blocked. It
is then necessary to contact the manufacturer or his agent and by specifying the serial
number of the relay, a stand-by password specific to the relay concerned may be obtained.
NOTE:
The programming mode is indicated with the letter "P" on the right
hand side of the display on each menu heading. The letter "P"
remains present as long as the password is active (5 minutes if there
is no action on the keypad).
 Go to the “OP. Parameters” menu by pressing  and then to the “password” menu by
pressing ,
 Enter the current password (default password = “AAAA”) and validate with  (this
operation is not necessary if the password has been entered some minutes ago),
 Enter the new password character by character, using  and  arrows to change a
letter (maintain the key pressed to scroll through the letter in the alphabet). Use  and 
arrows to select another character: a flashing cursor will indicate which character field of
the password may be entered.,
 Validate using  or cancel using . If the password is correct, the following message is
displayed on the LCD: PASSWORD OK
Getting Started
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 5/30
As soon as the password has been entered, no setting change will be accepted via the
remote or local communication port (RS485 or RS232).
Alternatively, the password can be entered by using the Password window in the
OP.PARAMETERS menu. This password entry procedure is the same as above.
NOTE:
2.1.3
In case of loss of password a back up password can be provided
contacting Schneider Electric Customer Care Center.
Setting the language
 Go to the “OP. Parameters” menu by pressing  and then to the “Language” menu by
pressing , ,
 If necessary, enter the current password and validate with ,
 Select the language using  or  arrows, and validate with ,
 Validate using  or cancel using .
2.1.4
Setting Date and time
NOTE:
If the optional IRIG-B board is installed (P127 option), date and time
synchronization could be automatic.
 Go to the “OP. Parameters” menu by pressing  and then to the “Date” menu by
pressing  (x9),
 If necessary, enter the current password and validate with ,
 Set the date using  or  arrow, and validate with  (10/11/08 means November 10th
2008),
NOTE:
When you modify the date, the first digit for the day or the month can
be selected according to the second digit. For instance, if 13/09/08 is
displayed, you cannot select 33 for the day, or 29 for the month.
 Validate using  or cancel using .
 Select the “Time ” menu by pressing 2 key,
 Set the date using  or  arrow, and validate with  (14:21:42 means 2:21:42 pm)
2.1.5
Menu navigation
A simple menu structure (refer to P12y/EN GS section) allows setting and reading of
parameters and functionality.
The keypad provides full access to the menu options, with informations displayed on the
LCD.
 Press , ,  and  keys for menu navigation:
 Press  or  keys to navigate from a menu heading to another menu heading (refer to
the figure below),
 Press  key to access to a sub menu, then navigate using  or  keys.
 Maintain these keys pressed to scroll through the menu,
 If necessary, modify a parameter by pressing  key.
 Modify the corresponding parameter using arrows,
 Validate using , or cancel using .
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Page 6/30
2.2
Menu structure
The menu structure is shown below.
Refer to P12y/EN HI section for the detail of the menu.
Getting Started
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Getting Started
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
3.
LOCAL CONNECTION TO A PC
3.1
Configuration
Page 7/30
MiCOM
io
S1 Stud
P0107ENc
For a local connection between a PC and the relay, a serial cable with metallic shield should
be used.
The wiring of the RS232 cable must be as shown in the following drawing.
RS232 PC PORT
9 pin male connector
MiCOM P125/6/7 end
9 pin female connector
P0073ENa
A USB/RS232 cable can also be used to communicate to the relay
3.1.1
REMOTE connection
The figure shows the recommended way to connect a RS485 cable to the relay to build a
local network.
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Getting Started
Page 8/30
3.2
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Products plugged in the same panel
Case earth connection
29
30
32
31
shield
RS485 cable
1. Connect a cable (green/yellow wire) on the case earth
connection of each product (with screw).
2. The communication cable shield must be connected
to the pin number 29 of each product.
3. The pin number 29 of each terminal block must be
connected to the case earth connection of each product
(with screw).
P0253ENa
3.3
Communication between distant products
EARTH
1. Connect a cable (green/yellow wire) on the case earth
connection of each product (with screw)
2. The communication cable shield must be connected to the pin
number 29 of each product .
3. The pin number 29 has to be connected to the case earth
connection (with screw) to only ONE panel (do not leave the
cable shield "floating")
Earth
P0254ENa
Getting Started
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
3.4
Page 9/30
MiCOM S1 and MiCOM S1 Studio relay communications basics
MiCOM S1 and MiCOM S1 Studio are the universal MiCOM IED Support Softwares and
provide users a direct and convenient access to all stored data in any MiCOM IED using the
EIA(RS)232 front communication port.
MiCOM S1 Studio provide full access to MiCOM Px20, Px30, Px40 relays and others IED,
The following sections give the main procedures to connect and to use MiCOM S1 and
MiCOM S1 Studio.
Before starting, verify that the EIA(RS)232 serial cable is properly connected to the
EIA(RS)232 port on the front panel of the relay. Please follow the instructions in section 3.1
to ensure a proper connection is made between the PC and the relay before attempting to
communicate with the relay.
This section is intended as a quick start guide to using MiCOM S1 and MiCOM S1 Studio,
and assumes you have a copy of MiCOM S1 or MiCOM S1 Studio installed on your PC.
Please refer to the MiCOM S1 or MiCOM S1 Studio User Manual for more detailed
information.
3.5
MiCOM S1 Studio
3.5.1
Data Model Management
The settings and parameters of the protection relay can be extracted from the relay or
loaded using Data Model manager. The Data Model Manager can load any model from Local
file, CD ROM or Internet server (if connected).
The Data Model Manager is used to add or to remove data models, to export and to import
data model files.
It is necessary to close MiCOM S1 Studio when the Data Model Manager is opened.
To Open Data Model manager, click on the icon:
"Data Model Manager" in the "Programs" menu.
, select "MiCOM S1 Studio" then
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Getting Started
Page 10/30
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
The following panel is displayed:
1
2
Select the “Add” option to add the new data model then click on the “Next” button.
The next panel is used to select the model source (CD ROM, local folder or Schneider
Electric FTP server [DEFAULT FTP]). Select the model source and click on the “next” button.
1
NOTE:
2
the following procedure is given with FTP server selected.
Getting Started
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 11/30
The Data Model Manager loads data models details, and then displays automatically the
language selection option panel. Select the menu language(s) and click on the “Next” button.
1
2
The data models panel is displayed. Select the data model for your product (for instance, to
download P12x data models, open the “Px10/Px20/Px20C/M/Modulex” sub-menu (click on
“+” then select data model according to your product). When data models are selected, the
Data Model Manager panel displays the selected models size to download.
1
2
3
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Getting Started
Page 12/30
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Click on “Install button”. The model files are downloaded and updated in the system.
When installation has been completed, close the Data Model Manager. This Data Model is
used with MiCOM S1 Studio when a system is opened or created. To open this default
setting file, refer to § 3.5.8.
3.5.2
“Quick Connection” to the relay using MiCOM S1 Studio
To start MiCOM S1 Studio, click on the icon:
In the "Programs" menu, select "MiCOM S1 Studio".
The MiCOM S1 Studio launcher screen is displayed:
Toolbar
Studio Explorer &
Properties views
Start page
Search results view
Click on the “Quick Connect” button at the top left of the application:
Getting Started
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Page 13/30
Create a new system (see § 3.5.3) or open an existing one:
When a system is opened (or created), the following “device type” window is displayed.
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Page 14/30
Getting Started
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Select “Px20 Series” from the presented options:
Select a port from the presented options:
Upon a successful connection, a dialog will be displayed showing device type, model
number and plant reference. Options for language, device name and comment are also
available.
The device is displayed in the Studio Explorer panel.
Getting Started
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
3.5.3
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Page 15/30
Create a system
In MiCOM S1 Studio, a System provides a root node in the Studio Explorer from which all
subsequent nodes are created.
Substations, bays, voltage levels and devices are added to the system. If a system is no
longer needed, It can be deleted using the delete command.
The use of Quick Connect will automatically create a default system, if one does not already
exist. Systems are not opened automatically, unless “Reopen last System at start-up” is
selected in “Options / Preferences…” menu.
To create a new system:
 By default, the window displays the message “create new or open existing system”: click
on “new” to create a new system.
 If a system is loaded in the “Studio Explorer” window, right-click on the panel background
and select New System or select the corresponding icon on Studio Explorer's toolbar.
The following window is displayed: Enter the name of the system, and the path to save the
system file.
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Getting Started
Page 16/30
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
The new System is displayed in the Studio Explorer panel:
NOTE:
3.5.4
In the Studio Explorer panel, if an item is selected, its properties are
displayed in the “Properties” panel
Create a new substation
Select the system: the menu bar is updated with “new device”, “new substation”, “close”,
“delete”, “paste”, “properties” and “options” icons.
Create a new substation
Create a new device
P0901ENa
Click on “new substation” icon (or select the menu using right-click). The following window is
displayed:
Getting Started
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 17/30
The new substation is displayed and the menu bar is updated when a substation is selected:
Import SCL
Create a new voltage level
P0902ENa
Click on “Import SCL” button to import a Substation Configuration File.
To create a substation configuration, click on “new voltage level” button.
3.5.5
Create a new voltage level
Select the substation and click on “new station level” button (or select the menu using rightclick).
In the “Create a new voltage level”, enter the voltage level of the station.
The “new voltage level” is displayed and the “new bay” icon is displayed.
Create new bay
P0903ENa
3.5.6
Create a new bay
Select the substation and click on “new bay” button (or select the menu using right-click).
In the “Create new bay…” window, enter the bay indication,
Th new bay is displayed.
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Getting Started
Page 18/30
3.5.7
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Create a new device
Click on “new device” button (or select the menu using right-click).
Select the device type and, if necessary, the communications protocol mode that will be
used to send the file to the device.
1
2
Select the device type, click “Next” button.
Select the model and click “Next” button.
1
2
3
4
Getting Started
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 19/30
Enter the name and add a description of the device:
The new device is created and displayed.
3.5.8
Open Settings File
To open an existing file:
 If the file is saved or if the relay is not connected: open the Settings folder and open the
Settings file,
 If the relay is connected, extract the settings from the relay: click on the “Extract Settings”
command or right click on the Settings folder.
Extract Settings
P0904ENa
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Getting Started
Page 20/30
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
To open default settings:
 Click on “Open Default Settings File” Option in the File menu.
 Select the device type then the communication protocol.
 Select the device type and click on the “Next” button:
1
2
 Select the Model and click on the “Finish” button. The default settings are displayed.
1
2
Getting Started
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
3.6
MiCOM S1
3.6.1
Starting MiCOM S1
To start MiCOM S1 Studio, click on the icon:
Page 21/30
.
In the "Programs" menu, select "MiCOM S1" then "MiCOM S1".
WARNING:
CLICKING ON "UNINSTALL MiCOM S1", WILL UNINSTALL MiCOM S1,
AND ALL DATA AND RECORDS USED IN MiCOM S1.
You access the MiCOM S1 launcher screen.
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Getting Started
Page 22/30
-
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Select the Px20 product: If necessary, click on the blue arrows (
).
Select the Setup button:
NOTE:
Select the “User Manual” button to read “setting & records” and
“Measurement Viewer” description and operating procedures.
Getting Started
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
3.6.2
Page 23/30
Open communication link with relay
To open the communications link from S1 to the relay, follow the following procedure.
First, if necessary, the communication setup must be adjusted. In the "Device" menu, select
"Communications Setup…"
This brings up the following screen:
COMMUNICATION SET-UP SCREEN
When the communications setup is correct, the link with the relay can be initialized. In the
"Device" menu, select "Open Connection…"
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Getting Started
Page 24/30
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
This brings up a prompt for the address of the relay to be interrogated.
When this has been entered, a prompt for the password appears.
When these have been entered satisfactorily the relay is then able to communicate with
MiCOM S1. When a communication link has been established between the PC and a
MiCOM IED, both are said to be online. Data and information can be directly transferred from
and to the IED using the menu available under the “DEVICE” menu.
For further instruction on how to extract, download and modify settings files, please refer to
the MiCOM S1 User Manual.
Select the main function in the right hand window.
To modify a setting value, double click the corresponding line in the left hand window. It
opens a setting window.
A red star () indicates that a setting value is modified.
3
1
2
Getting Started
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
3.6.3
Page 25/30
Off-line use of MiCOM S1
As well as being used for the on-line editing of settings, MiCOM S1 can also be used as an
off-line tool to prepare settings without access to the relay. In order to open a default setting
file for modification, in the “File” menu, select “New” and then “Settings File…”
This brings up a prompt for the relay model type where you can select the correct relay for
your application:
Clicking on “OK” will open the default file and you can start to edit settings. For further
instruction on how to extract, download and modify settings files, please refer to the MiCOM
S1 User Manual.
3.6.4
MiCOM monitoring
The monitoring module enables to connect to the front port, retrieve and monitor its
measurements.
Click on the monitoring button:
.
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Page 26/30
Getting Started
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
The monitoring module is displayed.
Use the “Device” menu to configure the communication:
The “Communications setup…” menu enables to select or to setup the communication
settings. The “Open Connection…” menu enables the PC to retrieve data from the online
device.
Getting Started
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
3.7
Page 27/30
Presentation and analysis of disturbance
The reading and analysis of disturbance is performed using Wavewin.
To open Wavewin with MiCOM S1:
 In the main page, select the function using the blue arrows (
),
 Click on the “presentation and Analysis of Disturbance Recording Data with “Wavewin”
window.
Using MiCOM S1 Studio, open Wavewin using “Tools” menu.
The Wavewin File Manager is displayed (refer to the Wavewin User’s guide to operate
Wavewin).
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Page 28/30
4.
Getting Started
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
WITHDRAWING MODULE FROM CASE
Remove the top and bottom hinged covers:
Depose the four retaining screws in the top and the bottom side of the relay. These screws
retain the relay to the case.
Getting Started
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Page 29/30
Insert a 3mm screwdriver into the hole situated under the upper hinged cover above the
LCD:
Turn the lock pin 90° to the left:
Insert the screwdriver into the second hole under the lower hinged cover, and the lower lock
pin is turned 90° to the right.
By this turning action, push slightly forward the module and
extract it by pulling on both sides of the front panel.
P12y/EN GS/Fa5_
Page 30/30
5.
Getting Started
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION
If you need information pertaining to the operation of this MiCOM product that you have
purchased, please contact your local Schneider Electric agent or the Customer Care Center
(www.schneider-electric.com/ccc). Do not forget to give the serial number and reference of
the MiCOM product.
The MiCOM product reference and serial numbers are documented under the upper hinged
cover on the front of the relay. For more precise information, refer to the section "Relay
Identification" in this chapter.
PLEASE GIVE THE FOLLOWING DATA WHEN MAKING A CALL TO Schneider Electric:
 CORTEC code of the MiCOM relay
 Serial number of the MiCOM relay
 Order reference
 Operator reference
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
APPLICATION GUIDE
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 1/96
CONTENT
1.
INTRODUCTION
5
1.1
Protection of Underground and Overhead Lines
5
2.
CURRENT PROTECTIONS & AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS
6
2.1
[67/50/51] Directional/non Directional Three Phase Overcurrent Protection (P127)
6
2.2
[67] Directional Overcurrent protection
6
2.2.1
Description
6
2.2.2
Synchronous Polarisation
9
2.2.3
I>…I>>…I>>> Interlock
10
2.2.4
Setting Guidelines
11
2.2.5
Directional three phase overcurrent applications
12
2.3
[50/51] Three phase Overcurrent protection (P126 – P127)
14
2.3.1
Instantaneous Function [50/51]
14
2.3.2
I>…I>>…I>>> Interlock
14
2.3.3
Three phase overcurrent protection applications
15
2.4
Directional Earth Fault Protection (P125, P126 & P127)
16
2.4.1
General Setting Guidelines
18
2.4.2
An application of 67N in an Insulated Systems
18
2.4.3
Wattmetric (Pe) Characteristic
20
2.4.4
Application Considerations
21
2.4.5
Iecos protection
21
2.4.6
Where use Iecos and where use Pe.
21
2.5
Derived earth overcurrent (Ie_d>, P127 only)
22
2.5.1
Ie>…Ie>>…Ie>>> Interlock
23
2.6
Application of a MiCOM P125 relay as a Single Element Power Relay
23
2.6.1
Overview
23
2.6.2
Relay Connection
24
2.6.3
Relay Characteristic Angle Setting
25
2.6.4
Replacing an MWTU11/TWL1111 Reverse Power / Forward Power Relay.
26
2.6.5
Application of the Power Function
26
2.7
Thermal Overload Protection (P126 & P127)
26
2.7.1
Time Constant Characteristic
27
2.7.2
Mathematical Formula Applicable to MiCOM Relays:
27
2.7.3
Setting Guidelines
28
2.8
Undercurrent Protection (P126 & P127)
28
2.9
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (P126 & P127)
28
2.9.1
I2 Thresholds Setting Guidelines
29
2.10
Restricted earth fault
30
2.10.1
Introduction
30
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Page 2/96
Application Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.10.2
High impedance principle
30
2.10.3
Setting guide
31
2.10.4
Use of METROSIL non linear resistors
32
3.
VOLTAGE PROTECTIONS
35
3.1
Setting for the Voltage Connections
35
3.2
Consideration on the measurement menu
36
3.3
(59N) Zero Sequence Overvoltage Protection (P125, P126 & P127)
36
3.3.1
Setting Guidelines
36
3.4
(27) Undervoltage Protection (P127)
36
3.4.1
Setting Guidelines
37
3.5
(59) Overvoltage Protection (P127)
37
3.5.1
Setting Guidelines
38
3.6
Negative sequence overvoltage protection
38
3.6.1
Setting guideline
38
4.
OTHER PROTECTION FUNCTION INTEGRATED IN P127
39
4.1
Under/Over frequency (81 U/O)
39
4.1.1
Description
39
4.2
Rate of frequency change protection (dF/dt) (81R)
39
4.2.1
Description
39
4.2.2
dF/dt functionning
40
4.3
3 phases directional Over / Under power (32)
42
4.3.1
Description
42
4.3.2
Power Measurement displayed
42
4.3.3
Overview
44
5.
DESCRIPTION AND SETTING GUIDE OF THE
AUTORECLOSE FUNCTION (P126 & P127)
45
5.1
Introduction
45
5.2
Description of the function
46
5.2.1
Autorecloser activation
46
5.2.2
Logic Inputs
46
5.2.3
Autoreclose Logic Outputs
47
5.2.4
Autoreclose logic description
48
5.2.5
Autoreclose Inhibit Following Manual Close
48
5.2.6
Recloser lockout
48
5.2.7
Setting group change lockout
48
5.2.8
Rolling demand
48
5.3
Setting Guidelines
49
5.3.1
Number Of Shots
49
5.3.2
Dead Timer Setting
49
5.3.3
Minimum drop-off time setting
49
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 3/96
5.3.4
Reclaim Timer Setting
52
5.3.5
Autoreclose setting guideline
53
5.3.6
Number Of Shots
56
5.3.7
Dead Timer Setting
56
5.3.8
Fuse application
58
6.
AUTOMATIC CONTROL FUNCTIONS
61
6.1
Trip Commands
61
6.2
Latch relays
61
6.3
Broken Conductor Detection (P126 & P127)
61
6.3.1
Setting Guidelines
61
6.3.2
Example Setting
62
6.4
Inrush Blocking (P127 only)
62
6.4.1
Overview
62
6.4.2
Operation
62
6.4.3
Principle
64
6.5
Cold Load Pick-up (P126 & P127)
65
6.6
VTS
66
6.6.1
VTS occurrence
66
6.6.2
VTS alarm
66
6.6.3
VTS Blocks 51V
66
6.6.4
Directional protection modification
67
6.6.5
Voltage/Power protection
67
6.7
Current Transformer Supervision (CTS)
67
6.7.1
The CT Supervision Feature
67
6.8
51V (voltage controlled overcurrent) features (P127 only)
68
6.9
Auxiliary Timers (P125, P126 & P127)
71
6.10
Selective Scheme Logic (P126 & P127)
71
6.11
Blocking logic function (Blocked directional/non directional overcurrent
protection)
72
6.12
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring
73
6.13
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring (P126 & P127)
73
6.14
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Features (P126 & P127)
73
6.14.1
Setting Guidelines
74
6.15
Circuit Breaker Failure (P126 & P127)
74
6.15.1
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Mechanism
75
6.15.2
Breaker Fail Settings
75
6.16
Trip Circuit Supervision (P126 & P127)
76
6.16.1
MiCOM P126 & P127 Trip Circuit Supervision Mechanism
76
6.16.2
External Resistor R1 Calculation
79
6.17
Switch onto Fault Protection & Trip on Reclose (SOTF/TOR) (P126 & P127)
81
6.17.1
General
81
6.17.2
SOTF/TOR description
81
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Page 4/96
Application Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
6.18
Local/Remote conditioning (P125, P126 & P127)
82
6.18.1
General
82
6.18.2
Settings
82
6.19
Logic equations (P126 & P127)
83
7.
RECORDS (P125, P126 & P127)
84
7.1
Event Records
84
7.2
Fault Records
84
7.3
Instantaneous Recorder
84
7.4
Disturbance Records
84
8.
ROLLING AND PEAK VALUE DEMANDS (P126 & P127)
85
8.1
Rolling demand
85
8.2
Peak value demand
86
9.
SETTING GROUP SELECTION (P125, P126 & P127)
87
9.1.1
Setting group change by digital input
87
9.1.2
Priority
87
10.
MEASUREMENTS
88
10.1
Power and Energy Measurements (P127)
88
10.2
Additional measurement CT (P127 optional configuration only)
89
10.2.1
Frequency
89
10.2.2
Currents
90
10.2.3
Voltages
91
10.2.4
Powers
91
10.2.5
Energies
92
10.2.6
Plus and minus signes for power and energy calculation.
92
11.
LOGIC INPUTS AND LOGIC OUTPUTS
93
11.1
Logic Inputs
93
11.2
Logic Outputs
93
12.
MAINTENANCE MODE
94
13.
CT REQUIREMENTS
95
13.1
Definite time / IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection
95
13.2
Instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection
95
13.3
Definite time / IDMT sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection
95
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Protection of Underground and Overhead Lines
Page 5/96
The secure and reliable transmission and distribution of power within a network is heavily
dependent upon the integrity of underground cables and overhead lines, which link the
various sections of the network together. Therefore the associated protection system must
also provide both secure and reliable operation.
The most common fault conditions, on underground cables and overhead lines, are short
circuit faults. These faults may occur between the phase conductors but will most often
involve one or more phase conductor becoming short-circuited to earth.
Faults caused by short circuits require the fastest faulted conductor clearance times but at
the same time allowing for suitable co-ordination with other downstream protection devices.
Fault sensitivity is an issue common to all voltage levels. For transmission systems, towerfooting resistance can be high. Also, high resistance faults might be prevalent where lines
pass over sandy or rocky terrain. Fast, discriminative faulted conductor clearance is required
for these fault conditions.
The effect of fault resistance is more pronounced on lower voltage systems, resulting in
potentially lower fault currents, which in turn increases the difficulty in the detection of high
resistance faults. In addition, many distribution systems use earthing arrangements designed
to limit the passage of earth fault current.
Earthed methods as such as using resistance, Petersen coil or insulated systems make the
detection of earth faults arduous. Special protection equipment is often used to overcome
these problems.
Nowadays, the supply continuity in the energy distribution is of paramount importance.
On overhead lines most of faults are transient or semi-permanent in nature.
In order to increase system availability multi-shot autoreclose cycles are commonly used in
conjunction with instantaneous tripping elements. For permanent faults it is essential that
only the faulted section of the network is isolated. High-speed, discriminative fault clearance
is therefore a fundamental requirement of any protection scheme on a distribution network.
Power transformers are installed at all system voltage levels and have their own specific
requirements with regard to protection. In order to limit the damage incurred by a transformer
under fault conditions, fast clearance of the windings with phase to phase and phase to earth
faults is a primary requirement.
Damage to electrical plant equipment such as transformers, cables and lines may also be
incurred by excessive loading conditions, which leads directly to overheating of the
equipment and subsequent degradation of their insulation. To protect against such fault
conditions, protective devices require thermal characteristics too.
Uncleared faults, arising either from the failure of the associated protection system or of the
switchgear itself, must also be considered. The protection devices concerned should be
fitted with logic to deal with breaker failure and relays located upstream must be able to
provide adequate back-up protection for such fault conditions.
Other situations may arise on overhead lines, such as broken phase conductors.
Traditionally, a series fault has been difficult to detect.
With today's digital technology, it is now possible to design elements, which are responsive
to such unbalanced system, conditions and to subsequently issue alarm and trip signals.
On large networks, time co-ordination of the overcurrent and earth fault protection relays can
often lead to problematic grading situations or, as is often the case, excessive fault
clearance times. Such problems can be overcome by relays operating in blocked overcurrent
schemes.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 6/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.
CURRENT PROTECTIONS & AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS
2.1
[67/50/51] Directional/non Directional Three Phase Overcurrent Protection (P127)
The directional/non directional overcurrent protection has three thresholds.
Each threshold can operate in directional or non-directional mode; if the setting is [Yes] it
operates like a typical three-phase overcurrent protection.
With the setting [DIR] the relay operates like a three-phase directional overcurrent protection
(only for the P127 relay), when the setting is [NO] it can not operate.
The third threshold can be set to operate on the peak of the measured phase current.
It compares the biggest peak value of the measured current against the setting.
The peak detection is applied where a CT saturation condition occurs and the measure is not
more trustworthy.
2.2
[67] Directional Overcurrent protection
2.2.1
Description
If a fault current can flow in both directions through a relay location, it is necessary to add
directionality to the overcurrent relays in order to obtain correct co-ordination. Typical
systems that require such protection are parallel feeders (both plain and transformer) and
ring main systems, each of which are relatively common in distribution networks.
In order to give directionality to an overcurrent relay, it is necessary to provide it with a
suitable reference, or polarising signal. The reference generally used is the system voltage,
as its angle remains relatively constant under fault conditions. The phase fault elements of
the directional relay are internally polarised by the quadrature phase-phase voltages, as
listed in the table below:
Protected Phase
Operating Current
Polarising Voltage
A Phase
IA
VBC
B Phase
IB
VCA
C Phase
IC
VAB
UAB
IA
UBC
IC
IB
UCA
P0354ENa
Under system fault conditions, the fault current vector will generally lag its nominal phase
voltage by an angle dependent on the system X/R ratio.
It is important that the relay operates with maximum sensitivity for currents lying in this
region.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 7/96
This is achieved by means of the relay
characteristic angle (RCA) setting (also
referred to as torque angle). RCA
defines the angle by which the current
applied to the relay must be displaced
from the voltage applied to the relay to
obtain maximum relay sensitivity.
RCA
Iph
Uph-ph
Forward
tripping zone
A programmable tripping zone with
reference to relay characteristic angle
(RCA) or torque angle is available.
Backward
tripping zone
Tripping zone is settable from:
±10˚ to ±170˚ in step of 1˚ with reference
to RCA (Torque angle)
RCA (Torque angle) is settable from
0˚ to 359˚ in step of 1˚
P0079ENa
U [V]
Non measurable angle zone
1.5
The calculation of the angle between
phase voltage and phase current
depends on the values for voltage and
current.
The close figure shows the calculation
zone.
1
0.5
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
I [In]
P0080ENa
Each directional threshold consists of:
−
Current threshold
−
RCA angle /Torque angle and Trip boundary zone
The system voltage provides the polarisation signal, the minimum voltage operating value is
0.6V secondary for the voltage input range 57-130V and 3V for the voltage input range 220480V.
The first and second thresholds can be set as definite delay time or inverse delay time using
the IEC, IEEE/ANSI, CO, RI and RECT curves where their parameters are shown in the
Technical Data of this Technical Guide.
The third threshold can be set as definite delay time only, but can be set to work on the peak
of the current measured in non-directional way.
The protection elements trip when the following conditions occur:
−
The phase current exceeds the set overcurrent threshold.
−
The current vector lies within the trip boundary zone.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 8/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
The following diagrams show the functionality for each threshold
LOGIC OF THE FIRST THRESHOLD I> FOR THE 67 PROTECTION
Rev. Inst. I>
≥
Fwd. Inst. I>
Fwd. IA> on relay 2...8
IA & (IA^VBC) >
DT/IDMT
IB & (IB^VCA) >
DT/IDMT
IC & (IC^VAB) >
DT/IDMT
Blocking Logic
Fwd. IB> on relay 2...8
Fwd. IC> on relay 2...8
Lock the timer
≥
Fwd. Trip I>
Fwd: forward
Rev: reverse
P0355ENb
LOGIC OF THE SECOND THRESHOLD I>> FOR THE 67 PROTECTION
Rev. Inst. I>>
≥
Fwd. Inst. I>>
IA & (IA^VBC) >>
≥
IB & (IB^VCA) >>
DT/IDMT
Fwd. Trip I>>
IC & (IC^VAB) >>
Blocking Logic
Lock the timer
Fwd: forward
Rev: reverse
P0356ENb
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 9/96
LOGIC OF THE THIRD THRESHOLD I>>> FOR THE 67 PROTECTION
Rev. Inst. I>>>
≥
Fwd. Inst. I>>>
IA & (IA^VBC) >>>
≥
IB & (IB^VCA) >>>
DT
Fwd. Trip I>>>
IC & (IC^VAB) >>>
Blocking Logic
Lock the timer
Fwd: forward
Rev: reverse
P0357ENa
The following figures show the windows where the first phase trip forward and instantaneous
reverse trip can be assigned to an output relay. The same one is for the 2nd and 3rd stages.
2.2.2
tI>
8765432
0000100
Assigning the first phase delayed forward directional
overcurrent threshold (tI>) to output 4 (RL4).
Setting choice: 1 is assigning an output relay; 0 no
assignment.
I_R>
8765432
0100010
Assigning the first phase instantaneous reverse directional
overcurrent (I_R>) to output 3 & 7 (RL3 & RL7).
Setting choice: 1 is assigning an output relay; 0 no
assignment.
Synchronous Polarisation
The directional overcurrent elements are polarised by the line voltage (phase to phase) in
quadrature to the considered phase current.
The absolute phase angle of line voltages is measured every cycle and the last value is
stored in the relay memory.
When with close-up three phase faults the polarisation voltage is collapsed, the synchronous
polarisation is switched on.
The polarisation discrimination voltage value is 0.6V (fixed value) for relays with a system
voltage of 57 to 130V and 3V (fixed value) for relays with a system voltage of 220 to 480V.
Over this value the directional relay uses standard polarisation (the measured voltage),
under this value the synchronous polarisation (stored vector) is used. The synchronous
polarisation is maintained up to the restoration of an input voltage value.
If the input voltage loss continues longer than 5s the directional overcurrent protection is
blocked.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 10/96
2.2.3
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
I>…I>>…I>>> Interlock
The choice of this functionality is available when the IDMT delay trip time is chosen on the
first threshold.
The following figures show the window where the functionality can be or not to be assigned
I> >> >>>
Interlock
Yes
Interlock of first threshold by the second and third
thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT.
Setting choice: No, Yes
The 2nd and 3rd threshold pickup can suspend 1st threshold output control to save selectivity
Below it is shown the trend of the delay trip time of the first threshold in the both cases Yes
or No.
t
t
t_I>
t_I>>
t_I>>>
I>
I>>
I
I> >> >>>Interlock NO
I>
I>>
I>>>
I
I> >> >>>Interlock YES
I>
t
I>
t
I>>
t
I>>
t
I>>>
t
I>>>
t
P0358ENa
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.2.4
Page 11/96
Setting Guidelines
The applied current settings for directional overcurrent relays depend on the specific
application. In a parallel feeder arrangement, load current is always flowing in the nonoperating direction. Consequently the relay current setting may be less than the full load
rating of the circuit, typically 50% of In.
Note that the minimum setting that may be applied has to take into account the thermal
rating of the relay. Some electro-mechanical directional overcurrent relays have continuous
withstand ratings of only twice the applied current setting. Therefore 50% of rating was the
minimum setting that had to be applied.
With the latest generation relays the continuous current rating is 4 x rated current. If required
it is now possible to apply much more sensitive settings.
In a ring main arrangement, it is possible for load current to flow in either direction through
the point where the relay is located. Consequently the current setting must be above the
maximum load current, as in a standard non-directional application.
The required relay characteristic angle (RCA) settings for directional relays will depend on
the exact application in which they are used.
For instance for plain feeders where the zero sequence source is behind the relay, a RCA of
30° should be set.
The following picture shows the above examples.
90˚ connection, RCA 30˚ (lead)
Plain feeder, zero sequence source behind the relay
UA
UA
TRIP ZONE +/-90˚
IA
IA fault
IA
RCA angle: 30˚
VBC
VBC
UB
UC
Normal:
UA^IA=30˚
UB
UC
Fault:
UA^IA=60˚- 80˚
P0359ENb
On the P127 relay, it is possible to set the relay characteristic angle (RCA) or torque angle,
as it is also called, in the range of 0° to +359° in steps of 1°. The trip boundary zone
associated to the RCA is settable in the range from ±10° to ±170° in steps of 1°.
Further information about the setting range for the directional overcurrent protection are
available in the Technical Data document.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 12/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.2.5
Directional three phase overcurrent applications
2.2.5.1
Parallel Feeders
R1
R2
P126
OC/EF
P126
OC/EF
R3
R4
P127
DOC/DEF
OC/EF
F
P127
DOC/DEF
OC/EF
11K
R5
P126
OC/EF
P0081ENa
TYPICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM USING PARALLEL TRANSFORMERS
The above figure shows a typical distribution system using parallel power transformers.
In such an application, a fault at ‘F’ could result in the tripping of both relays R3 and R4, and
the subsequent loss of supply to the 11kV busbar.
Consequently with this system configuration, it is necessary to apply directional relays at
these locations set to 'look into' their respective upstream transformers.
These relays should co-ordinate with the relays R1 and R2, so that discriminative relay
operation during such fault conditions is ensured.
In such an application, relays R3 and R4 may commonly require non-directional overcurrent
protection elements to provide protection to the 11kV busbar, in addition to providing a backup function to the overcurrent relays on the outgoing feeders (R5).
Note that the above requirements outlined for parallel transformer arrangements are equally
applicable for plain feeders, which are operating in parallel.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.2.5.2
Page 13/96
Ring Main Arrangement
A particularly common arrangement within distribution networks is the ring main circuit. The
primary reason for its use is to maintain supplies to consumers in the event of fault
conditions occurring on the interconnecting feeders.
A typical ring main with associated overcurrent protection is shown in the following figure.
A
2,1s
51
0,1s
2,1s
51
67
Load
F
B
0,1s
67
Load
1,7s
Load
67
0,5s
Load
67
Load
1,3s
67
0,5s
1,3s
67
E
67
1,7s
C
Load
0,9s
67
67
D
67
0,9s
P0082ENa
TYPICAL RING MAIN WITH ASSOCIATED OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
As with the previously described parallel feeder arrangement, it can be seen here that
current may flow in either direction through the various relay locations.
Therefore, directional overcurrent relays are again required in order to provide a
discriminative protection system.
The normal grading procedure for overcurrent relays protecting a ring main circuit is to open
the ring at the supply point and to grade the relays first clockwise and then counterclockwise. The arrows shown at the various relay locations in above figure depict the
direction for forward operation of the respective relays, i.e. in the same way as for parallel
feeders, the directional relays are set to 'look into' the feeder that they are protecting. The
above figure shows typical relay time settings (if definite delay time co-ordination was set),
from which it can be seen that faults on the interconnections between stations are cleared
without any discrimination by the relays at each end of the feeder.
Again, any of the three overcurrent stages may be configured to be directional and coordinated as per the previously outlined grading procedure, noting that IDMT characteristics
are selectable on the first and second stage.
Note that the above requirements outlined for the parallel transformer arrangements are
equally applicable for plain feeders, which are operating in parallel.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 14/96
2.3
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
[50/51] Three phase Overcurrent protection (P126 – P127)
The three phase overcurrent protection has three independent thresholds.
The first and second threshold can be set as definite delay time or inverse delay time using
the IEC, IEEE/ANSI, CO, RI and RECT curves where their parameters are shown in the
Technical Data of this Application Guide.
The third threshold can be set to operate on the peak of the measured phase current.
It compares the biggest peak value of the measured current against the setting.
The peak detection is applied where a CT saturation condition occurs and the measure is not
more trustworthy.
The logical current over-threshold functionality is defined below.
2.3.1
Instantaneous Function [50/51]
As soon as a phase threshold is running, the instantaneous output associated with this
threshold is activated. This output indicates that the protection element has detected a phase
fault and that the time delay associated with the threshold has started.
2.3.2
I>…I>>…I>>> Interlock
The choice of this functionality is available when the IDMT delay trip time is selected.
The 2nd and 3rd threshold pickup can suspend 1st threshold output control to save selectivity
Below it is shown the trend of the delay trip time of the first threshold in the both cases Yes
or No.
t
t
t_I>
t_I>>
t_I>>>
I>
I>>
I
I> >> >>>Interlock NO
I>
I>>
I>>>
I
I> >> >>>Interlock YES
I>
t
I>
t
I>>
t
I>>
t
I>>>
t
I>>>
t
P0358ENa
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.3.3
Page 15/96
Three phase overcurrent protection applications
Being P127 a three phase directional/non directional relay an overcurrent protection involves
the P127 used as non directional relay and the P126.
Some applications can be considered, but for indicative applications it is better to involve the
blocking logic and selective functions, so an overcurrent application will be shown in the part
of this TG regarding the blocking logic and selective function.
The following diagrams show the functionality for each thresholds
LOGIC OF THE FIRST THRESHOLD I> FOR THE 50/51 PROTECTION
≥
Inst. I>
Fwd. IA> on relay 2...8
IA >
DT/IDMT
IB >
DT/IDMT
IC >
DT/IDMT
Blocking Logic
Fwd. IB> on relay 2...8
Fwd. IC> on relay 2...8
≥
Lock the timer
Fwd. Trip I>
P0360ENb
LOGIC OF THE SECOND THRESHOLD I>> FOR THE 50/51 PROTECTION
≥
Inst. I>>
IA >>
≥
IB >>
DT/IDMT
Trip I>>
IC >>
Blocking Logic
Lock the timer
P0361ENb
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 16/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
LOGIC OF THE THIRD THRESHOLD I>>> FOR THE 50/51 PROTECTION
≥
Inst. I>>>
IA >>>
≥
IB >>>
DT
Trip I>>>
IC >>>
Blocking Logic
Lock the timer
P0362ENa
2.4
Directional Earth Fault Protection (P125, P126 & P127)
The MiCOM P125, P126, P127 relays have a directional/non directional earth fault
protection.
It provides three directional/non directional earth overcurrent thresholds and two wattmetric
and active earth fault current thresholds.
The first and second threshold can be set as definite or inverse delay time using the IEC,
IEEE/ANSI, CO2-8, RI and RECT curves as shown in the Technical Data of the relays; for
the wattmetric protection ( Pe / IeCos ) only the first threshold can be set as definite or
inverse delay time, always using IEC, IEEE/ANSI, CO, RI and RECT curves.
The directional earth fault overcurrent protection element compares the earth fault current,
residual voltage with the set thresholds Ie>, Ue>, Ie>>, Ue>>, Ie>>>, Ue>>>, the derived
earth currents Ie_d> and Ie_d>> and the relevant angle between the Ie and Ue for each
threshold. Once all the following listed requirements are met the tripping command is set:
−
thresholds for Ie and Ue are exceeded (earth fault OC protection element)
−
Ie current vector is in the tripping area (Ie^Ue)
−
Ie [mA] + Ue [V] > 18 (Ien=1A) or Ie [mA] + 5 x Ue [V] > 90 (Ien=5A)
−
the tripping timer expires
The protection's tripping area is defined by a tripping zone settable form ± 10° to ± 170° in
steps of 1° for each tripping threshold and a settable angle from 0° to 359° in steps of 1°
named torque/RCA angle (Ie^Ue), which can be separately set for each tripping threshold
and
The same threshold can be set as non-directional with definite or inverse delay time.
The third current threshold can be set as directional or non-directional but with only definite
delay time setting. The same applies to the Pe or IeCos second threshold.
The third threshold can work on the measured peak by an opportune choice in the dedicated
submenu. (See the FT part of the TG)
The peak detection is applied where a CT saturation condition occurs and the measure is not
more trustworthy.
The reset delay time for each threshold provides protection against intermittent faults.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 17/96
The close figure shows the forward and
reverse tripping zone for the directional
earth fault protection.
RCA
Ue
Ie
Forward
tripping zone
Backward
tripping zone
Tripping zone is settable from:
±10˚ to ±170˚ in step of 1˚ with reference
to RCA (Torque angle)
RCA (Torque angle) is settable from
0˚ to 359˚ in step of 1˚
P0083ENa
The protection element also provides a non-sensitive area to avoid instability due to small
asymmetries and unbalances that can generally be present in the network system. This
condition is represented by the characteristic reproduced below, where the hatched area is
the tripping zone.
The tripping zone is limited by the equation Ie +(k x Ue) < (k x 18). (18 is a value derived
experimentally where stability is guaranteed).
The K factor is 1, if Ien=1A, 5 if Ien=5A.
Ie [mA]
30
25
Ie [mA]
Ue>
Ue>>
Ue>>>
100
20
Tripping Zone
90
Ie + Ue= 18
80
Ue>
Ue>>
Ue>> >
Tripping Zone
15
Ie + 5 x Ue= 90
60
10
Ie>
Ie>>
Ie>>>
5
0
5
10
15
20
25
40
Ie>
Ie>>
Ie>> >
20
30
Ue [V]
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Ue [V]
P0068ENa
Ien=1A
P0067ENa
Ien=5A
The directional earth fault element needs a suitable voltage supply to provide the necessary
polarisation. (See the Technical data for further information)
The polarising signal must be representative of the earth fault condition. As residual voltage
is generated during earth fault conditions, and this quantity is used to polarise directional
earth fault elements. The P127 relay can derive this voltage internally from the 3 phase
voltage inputs when the VT connection option 3Vpn is set. It can also be measured directly
by a VT transformer when the VT connection option 2Vpp+Vr (two phase to phase) or
2Vpn+Vr (two phase to neutral) is set.
The P125 and P126 measures this voltage directly from a broken delta or single VT.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 18/96
2.4.1
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
General Setting Guidelines
When setting the relay characteristic/torque angle for the three phase directional overcurrent
element, a positive angle setting was specified. This was due to the fact that we consider as
polarising voltage, the phase voltage value in quadrature of the current under fault
conditions. With directional earth fault protection, the residual current under fault conditions
lies at an angle lagging the polarising residual earth fault voltage.
The following listed angle settings are recommended to fix the right direction of the earth
fault for the various earthed systems.
Resistance earthed systems
180°
Insulated systems
270°
Petersen Coil system
200°
Transmission Systems (solidly earthed)
90°-120°
The setting ranges for directional/non-directional earth fault and wattmetric protection
(Pe/IeCos) can be found in the FT and TD chapters of the technical guide.
2.4.2
An application of 67N in an Insulated Systems
The advantage with an insulated power system is that during a single phase to earth fault
condition, no high earth fault current will flow. Consequently, it is possible to maintain power
flow on the system even with an earth fault condition present. However, this advantage is
offset by the fact that the resultant steady state and transient over-voltages on the healthy
phases can be very high. In general insulated systems will only be used in low or medium
voltage networks where it does not prove too costly to provide the necessary insulation
against such over-voltages.
Higher system voltages would normally be solidly earthed or earthed via a low impedance.
Operational advantages may be obtained by the use of insulated systems.
However, it is still essential that detection of the earth fault condition is achieved. This is not
possible if standard current operated earth fault protection equipment is used. One possibility
for earth fault detection is by applying a residual over-voltage protection device. This
functionality is provided by the MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays.
However, fully discriminative earth fault protection on this type of system can only be
achieved by earth fault protection element. This protection element is included in directional
relays MiCOM P125, P126 & P127.
It is essential that a core balance CT is used for high sensitive earth fault detection. This
eliminates the possibility of spill current that may arise from slight mismatches between
residually connected line CTs. It also enables a much lower CT ratio to be applied, thereby
allowing the required protection sensitivity to be more easily achieved.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 19/96
A B C
Ia1
Ib1
IR1
-jXc1
IH1
Ia2
Ib2
IR2
-jXc2
IH2
Ia3
Ib3
IH1+IH2+IH3
IR3
-jXc3
IH3 IH1+ IH2
IR3=-(Ia1+Ib1+Ia2+Ib2)+Ia3+Ib3-(Ia3+Ib3)
IR3=-(IH1+IH2)+IH3-IH3
P0363ENa
From above figure and the vector diagram below it can be seen that the relays on the
healthy feeders see the unbalance in the charging currents on their own feeder. The relay on
the faulted feeder, however, sees the charging current from the rest of the system [IH1 and
IH2 in this case], with it’s own feeders charging current [IH3] being cancelled out
UA
O
UC
UB
UAf
IH1+IH2
Vr=3Ve
Ib1+Ib2
270˚
Ia1+Ia2
O'
UBf
TRIP ZONE
IR3=-(IH1+IH2)+IH3-IH3
A setting of Torque(RCA) angle of 270˚
shifts the center of the characteristic to
here
P0364ENa
Referring to the vector diagram, it can be seen that the C phase to earth fault causes the
phase voltages on the healthy phases to rise by a factor of
3.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 20/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
The A phase charging current (Ia), is then shown to be leading the resultant A phase voltage
by 90°. Likewise, the IB phase charging current leads the resultant voltage Vb by 90°.
The unbalance current detected by a core balance current transformer on the healthy
feeders can be seen as the vector addition of Ia1 and Ib1 (Ia2 and Ib2), giving a residual
current which lies at exactly 90° anticipating the polarising voltage (Vr=3Ve).
The vector diagram indicates that the residual currents on the healthy and faulted feeders,
IH1& IH2 and IR3 respectively, are in opposite direction to each other (180°). A directional
element could therefore be used to provide discriminative earth fault protection.
If the polarising voltage of this element, equal to 3Ve, is shifted through +270°, the residual
current seen by the relay on the faulted feeder will lie within the operate region (Trip Zone) of
the directional characteristic. As previously stated, the required RCA setting for the sensitive
earth fault protection when applied to insulated systems, is 270°.
2.4.3
Wattmetric (Pe) Characteristic
The P125, P126 and P127 relays include the zero sequence power measurement function.
They also offer the possibility to choose between a Wattmetric (Pe) protection and IeCos
(active component of the earth fault current) protection functionality mode.
The following figure shows the characteristic tripping zone for the wattmetric protection.
Pe/IeCos
Tripping zone
5˚
5˚
Pe> Pe>>
IeCos> IeCos>>
Q/IeSin
P0365ENa
In the following formula the power thresholds in the relay menu are called Pe> & Pe>>.
The Pe> and Pe>> settings are calculated as:
Vres x Ires x Cos (f – fc) = 9 x Ve x Ie x Cos (f – fc)
Where:
f
fc
Vres
Ires
Ve
Ie
2.4.3.1
= angle between the polarising voltage (Vres) and the residual current
= relay characteristic angle (RCA/torque angle)
= residual voltage
= residual current
= zero sequence voltage
= zero sequence current
Setting Guidelines for Pe Thresholds
The Pe thresholds are displayed in the format: ##.## x Ien W
In this formula the ##.## setting value is multiplied by the setting value of the Ien.
The threshold value is expressed in Watt secondary.
Example: The Pe> threshold is to be set from the relay front panel and the setting value is
20W.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 21/96
Ien = 1A, the internal relay setting value will be equal to 20 x 1 = 20W.
To set the thresholds for the Pe (Wattmetric/IeCos) protection the relay will display the menu
“Wattmetric Protection \ Pe>” (refer to P12y/EN FT section).
The same procedure is to be applied for setting the second Pe>> threshold.
For the settings of the trip delay time see the FT chapter of the TG)
2.4.4
Application Considerations
The protection Pe> and Pe>> require relay current and voltage connections to be actived.
The measurement of the Pe depends on the voltage wiring of the relay.
In case of 3Vpn wiring the Ve will be equal to Ve= 1/3(Va+VB+VC) in the other insertions
way the applied voltage to the relay is directly used to calculate the Pe.
Referring to the relevant application diagram for the P125, P126 and P127 relays, it should
be installed such that its direction for forward operation is 'looking into' the protected feeder
i.e. away from the busbar, with the appropriate RCA .
Resistance earthed systems
180°
Insulated systems
270°
Petersen Coil system
200°
Transmission Systems (solidly earthed)
90°-120°
As illustrated in the relay application diagram, it is usual for the earth fault element to be
driven from a core balance current transformer. This eliminates the possibility of spill current
that may arise from slight mismatches between residually connected line CTs. It also
enables a much lower CT ratio to be applied, thereby allowing the required protection
sensitivity to be more easily achieved.
2.4.5
Iecos protection
The Iecos protection follows the same concepts of the Pe protection.
The difference is that the thresholds take in account the active component of the earth fault
current.
The setting of the RCA follows the above listed table.
2.4.6
Where use Iecos and where use Pe.
The wattmetric protection Pe/Iecos is almost used in the Petersen Coil systems.
In a Petersen Coil scheme during a fault we have a resistive current and an inductive
current.
The resistive current is constant because the residual voltage is always present; the
inductive current is the summation of the capacitive contribution of the healthy line and the
reactive contribution of the fault line.
In this situation is difficult to discriminate the line and detect the fault current value because
the capacitive and reactive are of opposite sign.
Since the residual voltage is present to the parallel between the coil and resistance a
wattmetric protection is used to be sure to open the fault line.
The unique resistive present component depends on the fault line.
The discriminative for the using of Pe or Iecos protection is the fault current value and the
relative fault operating boundary.
In some applications, the residual current on the healthy feeder can lie just inside the
operating boundary following a fault condition. The residual current for the faulted feeder lies
close to the operating boundary.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 22/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
In this case, a correct discrimination is achieved by means of an Iecos characteristic, as the
faulted feeder will have a large active component of residual current, whilst the healthy
feeder will have a small value.
For insulated earth applications, it is common to use the Iesin characteristic that can be
obtained by the setting of the characteristic angle to 90° or 270°.
2.5
Derived earth overcurrent (Ie_d>, P127 only)
The derived earth overcurrent element protection is used to cover applications such as
HTB/HTA transformers. The derived earth current (Ie_d>) is the vectorial summation:
IA + IB + IC :
IA + IB + IC = Ie_d>.
The derived earth overcurrent has two independent thresholds: Ie_d> and Ie_d>>.
The two thresholds can be set as definite delay time or inverse delay time using the IEC,
IEEE/ANSI, CO, RI and RECT curves. Their parameters are shown in the Technical Data
chapter of this Technical Guide.
IA
IB
IC
IA+IB+IC = Ie_d>
Ie>>>>
Ie = Tank Earth
P3940ENb
As soon as Ie_d> threshold is running, the instantaneous output associated with this
threshold is activated. This output indicates that the protection element has detected an
earth fault and that the time delay associated with the threshold has started. This time delay
can be blocked via the logic input "Block Logic" associated with this threshold. If this blocking
input is activated by an output contact of a downstream relay, the logic that will lead to the
trip command is then blocked only if the relay that is the closest to the fault can see and
therefore eliminate the fault. This principle is known as «Blocking logic» or «Blocking». It is
described in more detail in this document.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.5.1
Page 23/96
Ie>…Ie>>…Ie>>> Interlock
The choice of this functionality is available when the IDMT delay trip time is selected for the
first earth threshold.
The following figures show the window where this functionality can be or not to be actived.
The 2nd and 3rd threshold pickup can suspend 1st threshold output control to save
selectivity.Below the trend of the delay trip time of the first threshold is shown for both cases
Yes or No.
t
t
t_I>
t_I>>
t_I>>>
I>
I>>
I>
I
I> >> >>>Interlock NO
I>>
I>>>
I
I> >> >>>Interlock YES
I>
t
I>
t
I>>
t
I>>
t
I>>>
t
I>>>
t
P0358ENa
2.6
Application of a MiCOM P125 relay as a Single Element Power Relay
2.6.1
Overview
The MiCOM P125 relay is a single phase relay designed for stand alone directional earth
fault protection. This relay incorporates both an IeCosø and a Zero Sequence Power
element. These elements can be configured to provide a single phase power measurement
or alternatively a sensitive directional overcurrent characteristic similar to that of the
MWTU11/TWL1111 Reverse Power relay.
Using a MiCOM P125 relay as a stand alone power relay provides a wide setting range, the
setting range available is dependent on the CT range ordered. The table below outlines the
settings available for each of the voltage and CT input ranges.
Analogue Input
P125AA
CT Range
VT Range
Pe
Ie Cosø
0.1 – 40
57 – 130
10 – 800W
0.1 – 40
220 - 480
40 – 3200W
57 – 130
1 – 60W
220 - 480
4 – 640W
57 – 130
0.2 – 20W
220 - 480
1 – 80W
P125AB
P125BA
0.01 – 8
P125BB
P125CA
P125CB
Setting Range (p.u.)
0.002 – 1
0.01 – 8
0.002 – 1
Flexible connection arrangements allow for phase to phase or phase to ground connection of
the polarising voltage, a wide range of angle settings allows the relay to operate for Watts or
Vars, Import or export.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 24/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
The VT inputs for the MiCOM P125 relay are rated 57 to 130 Vac or 220 – 480 Vac
(Selected at time of order) these ranges make the relay suitable for connection to a VT
secondary or direct connection to a 415V systems.
2.6.2
Relay Connection
The relay setting angle which is discussed in further detail below allows the user to
customise the VT connection to suit the primary plant, available VT secondaries and the
protection philosophy of the customer.
The VT connection can be made phase to phase or phase to ground using the connection
table below
For simplicity the connection has been made so as a reverse power setting will require an
angle of 180 degrees.
Polarising Voltage
Terminals
Leading Subscript
(Eg Va-n)
Laging Subscript
(Eg Va-n)
40
39
Va-n
Vb-n
Vc-n
Va-b
Vb-c
Vc-a
One of the possible line CT connection is shown below, The CT input can be connected to
any available phase CT, (A, B or C).
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.6.3
Page 25/96
Relay Characteristic Angle Setting
Below is a table of some of the possible settings to achieve various protection functions for
different CT and VT connections, the settings below are with reference to the connections
outlined above.
Function
Active Power Import
Reactive Power Import*
Active Power Export
Reactive Power Export*
Voltage
Current
Va-n
Ia
Vb-n
Ib
Vc-n
Ic
Va-b
Ic
Vb-c
Ia
Vc-a
Ib
Va-n
Ia
Vb-n
Ib
Vc-n
Ic
Va-b
Ic
Vb-c
Ia
Vc-a
Ib
Va-n
Ia
Vb-n
Ib
Vc-n
Ic
Va-b
Ic
Vb-c
Ia
Vc-a
Ib
Va-n
Ia
Vb-n
Ib
Vc-n
Ic
Va-b
Ic
Vb-c
Ia
Vc-a
Ib
Angle Setting
180
270
90
180
0
90
270
0
*Refers to lagging Vars import and export
Pe/IeCos
Tripping zone
5˚
5˚
Pe> Pe>>
IeCos> IeCos>>
Q/IeSin
P0365ENa
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Page 26/96
2.6.4
Application Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Replacing an MWTU11/TWL1111 Reverse Power / Forward Power Relay.
The MWTU11/TWL1111 was not strictly a power measuring relay. The relay operated using
an Icosø characteristic. Provided enough voltage was present to polarise the measuring
element, a 1% setting on a 1A relay would pickup at 10mA independent of the voltage
magnitude applied.
By selecting the 0.01 to 8Ien, model number MiCOM P125B, A setting range of 1 to 100% of
the nominal current in 0.1% steps is available.
2.6.5
Application of the Power Function
The standard configuration of the MiCOM P125 when set to use the wattmetric earth fault
protection can measure the zero sequence power, the connection for this can be found in the
sales publication and service manual. By adopting the connection above the relay can
measure the phase current and phase to phase, or phase to ground voltage, the operate
quantity when using these connections is a single phase power. As power protection is
generally required to operate for balanced three phase conditions basing the protection on a
single phase measured quantity is of no consequence.
When using the Power Function of the relay (Pe) care must be taken when selecting the
relay range. If the MiCOM P125CA relay is considered and is connected phase to ground
with 1A CT secondaries. A 0.2W setting would be equivalent to 0.2/63.5 Watts, 0.3% of the
nominal load.
2.7
Thermal Overload Protection (P126 & P127)
Thermal overload protection can be applied to prevent damages to the electrical plant
equipment when operating at temperatures in excess of the designed maximum withstand. A
prolonged overloading causes excessive heating, which may result in premature
deterioration of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation failure.
MiCOM P126 & P127 relays incorporate a current based thermal replica, using load current
to reproduce the heating and cooling of the equipment to be protected. The element thermal
overload protection can be set with both alarm and trip stages.
The heating within any plant equipment, such as cables or transformers, is of resistive type
(I²R x t). Thus, the quantity of heat generated is directly proportional to current squared (I²).
The thermal time characteristic used in the relay is based on current squared, integrated
over time.
The MiCOM P126 & P127 relays automatically use the highest phase current as input
information for the thermal model.
Protection equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to
its full load rating, where heat generated is balanced with heat dissipated by radiation etc.
Over-temperature conditions therefore occur when currents in excess of rating are allowed to
flow for a certain period of time. It can be shown that temperatures during heating follow
exponential time constants and a similar exponential decrease of temperature occurs during
cooling.
In order to apply this protection element, the thermal time constant (Te) of the plant
equipment to be protected is therefore required.
The following sections will show that different plant equipment possesses different thermal
characteristics, due to the nature of their construction.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.7.1
Page 27/96
Time Constant Characteristic
This characteristic is used to protect cables, dry type transformers (e.g. type AN), and
capacitor banks.
The thermal time characteristic is given by:
⎛ −t ⎞
⎜ ⎟
e⎝ τ ⎠
=
(I
2
− (k × I FLC )2
(I
2
− I 2p
)
)
Where:
t
τ
I
IFLC
k
IP
=
=
=
=
=
=
Time to trip, following application of the overload current, I
Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant equipment
Largest phase current
Full load current rating (relay setting ‘Thermal Trip’)
1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 IFLC
Steady state pre-loading current before application of the overload
The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the
overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from “hot” or “cold”.
Curves of the thermal overload time characteristic are given in Technical Data.
2.7.2
Mathematical Formula Applicable to MiCOM Relays:
The calculation of the Time to Trip is given by:
⎛ Ix 2 − θ
t Trip = Te In ⎜
⎜ Ix 2 − θtrip
⎝
⎞
⎟
⎟
⎠
With:
t Trip
Te
Ix
Ieq
=
=
=
=
Iθ >
k
θ
θtrip
=
=
=
=
Time to trip (in seconds)
Thermal time constant of the equipment to be protected (in seconds)
Thermal overload equal to Ieq/k Iθ >
Equivalent current corresponding to the RMS value of the largest
phase current
Full load current rating given by the national standard or by the supplier
Factor associated to the thermal state formula
Initial thermal state. If the initial thermal state = 30% then θ = 0.3
Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then θ trip = 1
The settings of these parameters are available in the various menus.
The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula:
Θ τ +1
⎛ I eq ⎞
⎟
= ⎜⎜
⎟
⎝ k × IΘ > ⎠
θ being calculated every 100ms.
2⎡
⎛ −t ⎞ ⎤
⎛ −t ⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎜ ⎟
⎢1 − e ⎜⎝ Te ⎟⎠ ⎥ + Θ e ⎜⎝ Te ⎟⎠
τ
⎢
⎥
⎢⎣
⎥⎦
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 28/96
2.7.3
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Setting Guidelines
The current setting is calculated as:
Thermal Trip (θtrip) = Permissible continuous loading of the plant equipment / CT ratio.
Typical time constant values are given in the following tables.
The relay setting, ‘Time Constant’, is in minutes.
Paper insulated lead sheathed cables or polyethylene insulated cables, placed above ground
or in conduits. The table shows τ in minutes, for different cable rated voltages and conductor
cross-sectional areas:
CSA mm2
6 -11 kV
22 kV
33 kV
66 kV
25 - 50
10
15
40
-
70 - 120
15
25
40
60
150
25
40
40
60
185
25
40
60
60
240
40
40
60
60
300
40
60
60
90
Time constant τ (minutes)
Other plant equipment:
Dry-type transformers
Time constant τ (minutes)
Limits
40
Rating < 400 kVA
60 - 90
Rating 400 - 800 kVA
Air-core reactors
40
Capacitor banks
10
Overhead lines
10
Busbars
60
Cross section ≥ 100 mm2 Cu
or 150mm² Al
An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip
threshold. A typical setting might be ‘Thermal Trip’ = 70% of thermal capacity.
2.8
Undercurrent Protection (P126 & P127)
The undercurrent function [37] makes it possible to detect a loss of load (for example the
draining of a pump or breakage of a conveyor belt). It uses definite delay time undercurrent
protection.
The user can set the following parameters:
2.9
−
undercurrent threshold I<
−
time delayed undercurrent threshold tI<
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (P126 & P127)
When applying traditional phase overcurrent protection, the overcurrent elements must be
set higher than maximum load current, thereby limiting the sensitivity of the element. Most
protection techniques also use an earth fault element operating from residual current, which
improves sensitivity for earth faults. However, certain faults may arise which can remain
undetected by such techniques.
Any unbalanced fault condition will produce negative sequence current of some magnitude.
Thus, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element can operate for both phase-to-phase
and phase to earth faults.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 29/96
This section describes how negative phase sequence overcurrent protection may be applied
in conjunction with standard overcurrent and earth fault protection in order to alleviate some
less common application difficulties.
−
Negative phase sequence overcurrent elements give greater sensitivity to resistive
phase-to-phase faults, where phase overcurrent elements may not operate.
−
In certain applications, residual current may not be detected by an earth fault relay
due to the system configuration. For example, an earth fault relay applied on the delta
side of a delta-star transformer is unable to detect earth faults on the star side.
However, negative sequence current will be present on both sides of the transformer
for any fault condition, irrespective of the transformer configuration. Therefore, a
negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be employed to provide timedelayed back-up protection for any un-cleared asymmetrical fault.
−
Where fuses protect motors on rotating machines, a blown fuse produces a large
amount of negative sequence current. This is a dangerous condition for the motor due
to the heating effects of negative phase sequence current at double frequency. A
negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be applied to provide efficient
back-up protection for dedicated motor protection relays.
−
It may also be required to simply set an alarm at the presence of negative phase
sequence currents on the system. Operators are then prompted to investigate the
cause of the unbalance.
The negative phase sequence overcurrent elements have a current pick up settings I2>,
I2>>, I2>>>, and are time delayed in operation by the adjustable timers tI2>, tI2>>, tI2>>>.
2.9.1
I2 Thresholds Setting Guidelines
This protection element includes three thresholds.
The first threshold can be set as DT or IDMT trip delay time.
The curves are the same as for the [50/51], [50N/51N] protection.
The current pick-up threshold (settable in the menu PROTECTION G1/[46] Neg. Seg. OC)
must be set higher than the normal negative phase sequence current due to the normal load
unbalance that is always present on the system. This can be set at the commissioning stage,
making use of the relay measurement function to display the standing negative phase
sequence current, and apply a setting at least 20% above.
Where the negative phase sequence element is required to operate for specific un-cleared
asymmetric faults, a precise threshold setting has to be based on an individual fault analysis
for that particular system due to the complexities involved. However, to ensure operation of
the protection element, the current pick-up setting must be set approximately 20% below the
lowest calculated negative phase sequence fault current for a specific remote fault condition.
The correct setting of the time delay is vital for this protection element. It should be also seen
that this element is applied primarily to provide back-up protection to other protective devices
or to provide an alarm. Therefore, it would be associated with a long delay time.
It must be ensured that the time delay is set longer than the operating time of any other
protective device (at minimum fault level) on the system, which may respond to unbalanced
faults, such as:
−
Phase overcurrent protection elements
−
Earth fault protection elements
−
Broken conductor protection elements
−
Negative phase sequence influenced thermal protection elements
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 30/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.10
Restricted earth fault
2.10.1
Introduction
The restricted earth fault relay is a high impedance differential scheme which balances zero
sequence current flowing in the transformer neutral against zero sequence current flowing in
the transformer phase windings. Any unbalance for in-zone fault will result in an increasing
voltage on the CT secondary and thus will activate the REF protection.
This scheme is very sensitive and can then protect against low levels of fault current in
resistance grounded systems where the earthing impedance and the fault voltage limit the
fault current.
In addition, this scheme can be used in a solidly grounded system. It provides a more
sensitive protection, even though the overall differential scheme provides a protection for
faults over most of the windings.
The high impedance differential technique ensures that the impedance of the circuit is of
sufficiently high impedance such that the differential voltage that may occur under external
fault conditions is lower than the voltage required to drive setting current through the relay.
This ensures stability against external fault conditions and then the relay will operate only for
faults occurring inside the protected zone.
2.10.2
High impedance principle
High impedance schemes are used in a differential configuration where one current
transformer is completely saturated and the other CTs are healthy.
Healthy CT
Saturated CT
Protected
circuit
Zm
Zm
A-G
RCT2
RCT1
IF
R L3
R L1
VS
R L2
R ST
R
R L4
HIGH IMPEDANCE SCHEME PRINCIPLE
The voltage applied across the relay is:
Vr=If (RCT + 2RL)
: Maximum secondary external fault current.
If
RCT : Resistance of the Current transformer secondary winding.
RL : Resistance of a single wire from the relay to the CT.
A stabilizing resistor R ST can be used in series with the relay circuit in order to improve the
stability of the relay under external fault conditions. This resistor will limit the spill current
under Is.
Vs=Is (RST)
Is: Current relay setting
Vs: Stability Voltage setting
Note that the relay consumption has been taken into account.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 31/96
The general stability conditions can be obtained when:
Vs> K.If (RCT + 2RL)
Where K is the stability factor.
This stability factor is influenced by the ratio Vk/Vs which in turns governs the stability of the
REF protection element for through faults .
Vk = The Knee point voltage of the CT.
To obtain a high speed operation for internal faults, the Knee point voltage Vk of the CT must
be significantly higher than the stability voltage Vs . A ratio of 4 or 5 would be appropriate.
For MiCOM P121, P122 and P123, we found the following results:
K= 1 for Vk/Vs less or equal to 16 and
K= 1.2 for Vk/Vs > 16.
NOTE:
The maximum internal fault level for stage 3 of 0.002 to 1In board
must not exceed 20In.
A
B
C
STAB
E/F Input
P0343ENa
CT CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR HIGH IMPEDANCE REF APPLICATION
2.10.3
Setting guide
The characteristics of the relay and the value of K influence the stability of the scheme as
explained here above.
The typical setting values shall be chosen to provide a primary operating current less than
30 % of the minimum earth fault level for a resistance earthed system. For a solidly earthed
system, the typical setting shall provide an operating current between 10 and 60 % of the
rated current.
The primary operating current, at the secondary, depends on the following factors:
−
Current Transformer ratio
−
Relay operating current IS
−
Number of CT in parallel with the relay element (n)
−
The inrush current of each CT (Ie) at the stability voltage
Iop= CTRatio .(Is + n.Ie)
Current setting should be selected for a high impedance element so that the primary current
reaches its nominal current with a given CT, according to the following equation:
Is < {(Iop / CTRatio) - n.Ie}
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 32/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
It is also possible to determine the maximum inrush current of the CT to reach a specific
primary operating current with a given relay setting.
The setting of the stabilising resistor must be calculated according to the above formula,
where the setting depends on the required stability voltage setting Vs and the relay setting Is
Vs k If (RCT+2RL)
Is =
IS
For MiCOM P12x, Is is equivalent to Ie>, so the above equation becomes:
Vs k If (RCT+2RL)
Ie> =
Ie>
with
K= 1 for Vk/Vs less or equal to 16 and
K= 1.2 for Vk/Vs > 16.
So
RST =
k If (RCT+2RL)
Ie>
with Vk ќ 4.Is.RST (A typical value to ensure the high speed operation for an internal fault).
CT requirements for High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection
The High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault element shall remain stable for through faults
and operate in less than 40ms for internal faults provided that the following equations are
met in determining CT requirements and the value of the associated stabilising resistor:
Rs
=
[k* (If) * (RCT + 2RL)] / IS
VK
≥
4 * Is * Rs
with
K= 1 for Vk/Vs less or equal to 16 and
K= 1.2 for Vk/Vs > 16.
2.10.4
Use of METROSIL non linear resistors
Metrosils are used to limit the peak voltage developed by the current transformers under
internal fault conditions, to a value below the insulation level of the current transformers,
relay and interconnecting leads, which are normally able to withstand 3KV peak.
The following formula should be used to estimate the peak transient voltage that could be
induced by an internal fault. This peak voltage depends on:
−
CT Knee point (VK)
−
Voltage that would be induced by an internal fault if CT doesn’t saturate (Vf)
This prospective voltage itself depends on:
−
Maximum internal fault secondary current
−
CT ratio
−
CT secondary winding resistance
−
CT lead resistance to the common point
−
Relay lead resistance
−
Stability resistor value
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 33/96
Vp = 2√ {2.VK (Vf - Vk)}
Vf = I'f.(Rct + 2RL + RST)
Where
−
Vp: peak voltage developed by the CT under internal fault conditions
−
Vf: maximum voltage that would be produced if CT saturation did not occur
−
Vk: current transformer Knee point voltage
−
I’f: is the maximum internal secondary fault current
−
Rct: current transformer secondary winding transformer
−
RL: maximum lead burden from CT to relay
−
RST: Relay stabilising resistor.
When the value given by the formula is greater than 3KV peak, it is necessary to use
Metrosils. They are connected across the relay circuit and they allow to shunt the secondary
current output of the current transformer from the relay in order to prevent very high
secondary voltages.
Metrosils are externally mounted and have annular discs shape.
Their operating characteristics is according to the formula:
V = C.I0.25
Where
−
V: Instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor (Metrosil)
−
C: Constant of the non-linear resistor (Metrosil)
−
I: Instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor (Metrosil)
With the sinusoidal voltage applied across the Metrosil, the RMS current would be
approximately 0.25 times the peak current. This current value can be calculated as follows:
⎧Vs(rms). 2 ⎫
Irms = 0.52⎨
⎬
C
⎩
⎭
4
Where
−
Vs(rms): RMS value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the Metrosil.
This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the Metrosil is not sinusoidal but
appreciably distorted.
For satisfactory application of the non-linear resistor (Metrosil), its characteristics should
comply with the following requirements:
−
At the relay voltage setting, the non-linear resistor (Metrosil) current should be as
low as possible, but no greater than approximately 30mA rms for 1A current
transformers and approximately 100mA rms for 5A current transformer.
−
At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor (Metrosil) should limit
the voltage to 1500V rms or 2120V peak for 0.25 second. At higher relay voltage
settings, it is not always possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms, so higher
fault voltage may have to be tolerated.
The following tables show the typical types of Metrosil that will be required, depending on
relay current rating, REF voltage setting etc.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 34/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Metrosil units for relays with 1A CT
The Metrosil units with 1A CTs have been designed to comply with the following restrictions:
−
At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 30mA rms.
−
At the maximum secondary internal fault current, the Metrosil unit should limit the
voltage to 1500V rms if possible.
The Metrosil units normally recommended to be used with 1Amp CTs are shown in the
following table:
Relay Voltage
setting
Nominal Characteristics
C
Recommended Metrosil Type
Single pole Relay
β
Triple pole relay
Up to 125V rms
450
0.25
600A/S1/S256
600A/S3/1/S802
125 to 300V rms
900
0.25
600A/S1/S1088
600A/S3/1/S1195
NOTE:
Single pole Relay Metrosil Units are normally supplied without
mounting brackets unless otherwise specified by the customer.
Metrosil units for relays with 5A CT
These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following requirements:
−
At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 100mA rms (the
actual maximum currents passed by the units shown below their type description)
−
At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the
voltage to 1500V rms for 0.25 second. At the higher relay settings, it is not possible to
limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms, hence higher voltage have to be tolerated
( indicated by * ,** , *** ).
The Metrosil units normally recommended for the used with 5 Amps CTs and single pole
relays are shown in the following table:
Secondary
Internal fault
current
Recommended Metrosil Type
Amps rms
Up to 200V rms
250V rms
275V rms
300V rms
600A/S1/S1213
600A/S1/S1214
600A/S1/S1214
600A/S1/S1223
C= 540/640
C= 670/800
C= 670/800
C= 740/870*
35mA rms
40mA rms
50mA rms
50mA rms
600A/S2/P/S1217
600A/S2/P/S1215
600A/S2/P/S1215
600A/S2/P/S1196
C= 470/540
C= 570/670
C= 570/670
C= 620/740*
35mA rms
75mA rms
100mA rms
100mA rms
600A/S3/P/S1219
600A/S3/P/S1220
600A/S3/P/S1221
600A/S3/P/S1222
C= 430/500
C= 520/620
C= 570/670**
C= 620/740***
100mA rms
100mA rms
100mA rms
100mA rms
50A
100A
150A
Relay Voltage Setting
NOTE:
* 2400V peak
** 2200V peak
*** 2600V peak
In some cases, single disc assemblies may be acceptable, contact
Schneider Electric for detailed information.
The Metrosil units used with 5 Amps CTs can also be used with triple
pole relays and consist of three single pole units mounted on the
same central stud but electrically insulated from each other. To order
these units please specify “Triple pole Metrosil type”, followed by the
single pole type reference.
Application Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.
VOLTAGE PROTECTIONS
3.1
Setting for the Voltage Connections
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Page 35/96
For the P127, it is important to select the VTs configuration and VT protection in the
Configuration/ General Options/ VT Connection and VT protection submenu in according to
the relay wiring for a corrected functionality of the voltage protections.
Protection thresholds are not automatically converted when the protection mode is modified;
they are directly expressed into the set protection mode. So, if the protection mode is
modified, the thresholds have to be recalculated. For example, to keep the same protection
level when the mode is converted from P-P to P-N, it is necessary to divide thresholds by √3.
In the above mentioned is menu you will find that for the P127 relay there are three
configurations of VTs.
1.
3Vpn (Three phase-neutral connection):
In this configuration, the relay directly measures Ua, Ub, and Uc and calculates internally the
zero sequence voltage Ue = (1/3)[Ua+Ub+Uc]. This internal value Ue will be used to be
compared to the threshold of Ue (the Earth Overvoltage Protection threshold and to evaluate
the angle with the earth current for the earth fault directional protection). However, none UN
is displayed in the measurement Menu.
2.
2Vpn + Vr (Two phase-neutral plus an Open Delta connection):
In this configuration, the relay directly measures Ua and Ub. The input voltage of phase C of
the relay (terminals 73-74) which is connected to the summation of the three voltage phases
is used to be compared to the Ue (The earth Overvoltage Protection function threshold). This
voltage at C input is considered as Ur and it is displayed in the measurement menu as UN.
Moreover for the phase Overvoltage and Undervoltage protection functions, the phase C
voltage value Uc is internally reconstituted using the equation:
−
Uc = Ua+Ub+Ur. This value will be compared to the U/V or O/V threshold in case of a
fault in phase C. Uc is not displayed in the measurement menu.
−
The reconstruction is valid if the Ur is measured from a transformer with 5 limb;
−
two used for the phase voltage Ua and Uc and the others used in Open delta
configuration for the Ur.
BE CAREFUL: IF THE Ur IS MEASURED FROM A SEPARATE TRANSFORMER THE
ABOVE RECONSTRUCTION IS NOT VALID AND CAN NOT BE USED.
3.
2Vpp + Vr (Two phase-phase plus an Open Delta connection):
The relay directly measures Uab and Ubc, the phase to phase (A-C) voltage value Uca is
internally reconstituted using the equation Uca=Uab+Ubc.
The third input of voltage of the relay (terminals 73-74) can be connected to the output of a
delta transformer or to a dedicated voltage transformer, the measured value can be used to
compare to the earth overvoltage threshold.
This voltage is displayed in the measurement menu as UN and it is designed as the earth
voltage.
4.
VT Protection:
This setting is only available for 3VPN or 2VPN+Vr connection.
−
If “VT Protection” = “Protect P-P”, threshold (P-P voltage) is the P-N threshold
multiplied by √3 to match to wished physical thresholds. Example: U> flag will be
activated for measured P-N voltage higher than 57V, if threshold = 100V.
−
if "VT Protection" = "Protect P-N", set thresholds are P-N voltages, and effective
thresholds used for protections algorithm are set thresholds multiplied by √3. Example:
U> flag will be activated for measured P-N voltage higher than 57V, if threshold = 57V.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Page 36/96
3.2
Application Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Consideration on the measurement menu
Why UN for the earth voltage measurement?
The neutral, earth or residual or zero sequence voltage are considered a single voltage and
because it is not possible to modify the label in the display we have used the following
terminology:
−
Ue for the thresholds.
−
UN for the measurement menu.
−
UN in the fault recorder.
UN for the measurement and fault record menu is to intend residual, zero sequence voltage
earth voltage etc.
3.3
(59N) Zero Sequence Overvoltage Protection (P125, P126 & P127)
On a healthy three phase power system, the addition of each of the three phase to earth
voltages is nominally zero, as this results from the vector addition of three balanced vectors
set at 120° to one another. However, when an earth fault occurs on the primary system this
balance is upset and a ‘residual’ voltage is produced. This can be measured, for example, at
the secondary terminals of a voltage transformer having a “broken delta” secondary
connection. Hence, a residual voltage-measuring relay can be used to offer earth fault
protection on such a system. Note that this condition causes a rise in the neutral voltage with
respect to earth, which is commonly referred to as “neutral voltage displacement”.
3.3.1
Setting Guidelines
The voltage setting applied to the protection elements is dependent upon the magnitude of
residual voltage that is expected to occur during an earth fault condition.
This in turn is dependent upon the method of system earthing employed. It must also be
ensured that the relay is set above any standing level of residual voltage that is present on
the system.
The protection element has one programmable element with delay time tUe>>>>.
The setting range and the functionality limits for the residual over-voltage are described in
the TD chapter, the setting menu is described in the User Guide chapter.
3.4
(27) Undervoltage Protection (P127)
Under-voltage conditions may occur on a power system for a variety of reasons, some of
which are outlined below:
Increased system loading
Generally, some corrective action would be taken by voltage regulating equipment such as
AVRs or On Load Tap Changers, in order to bring the system voltage back to its nominal
value. If this voltage regulating equipment is unsuccessful in restoring healthy system
voltage, then tripping by means of an under-voltage relay will be required following a suitable
time delay.
Faults occurring on the power system result in a reduction in voltage of the phases involved
in a fault. The proportion by which the voltage decreases is directly dependent upon the type
of fault, method of system earthing and it’s location with respect to the relay installation point.
Consequently, co-ordination with other voltage and current-based protection devices is
essential in order to achieve sufficient discrimination.
Complete loss of bus-bar voltage
This may occur due to fault conditions present on the incomer or busbar itself, resulting in
total isolation of the incoming power supply. For this condition, it may be a requirement for
each of the feeders to be isolated, so that when supply voltage is restored, the load is not
connected. Hence, the automatic tripping of a CB on a feeder upon detection of complete
loss of voltage on the busbar may be required. This may be achieved by a three-phase
undervoltage protection element.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.4.1
Page 37/96
Setting Guidelines
In the majority of applications, undervoltage protection is not required to operate during
system earth fault conditions. If this is the case, the protection element should be selected in
the menu to operate from a phase-to-phase voltage measurement, as this quantity is less
affected by the decrease of a single-phase voltage due to an earth fault.
The voltage threshold setting for the undervoltage protection element should be set at some
value below the voltage decreases which may be expected under normal system operating
conditions. This threshold is dependent upon the system in question but typical healthy
system voltage decreases may be in the order of -10% of nominal value.
The undervoltage protection element has two programmable thresholds with delay timers:
tU<, tU<<
After a trip command the thresholds will be reset when all phase voltages have risen above
105% of setting values.
The undervoltage protection element, which can be set as OR or AND logic, operates by
comparing each UAB, UBC and UCA voltage input with the U<, U<< thresholds.
The relay continuously monitors the phase-to-phase voltages.
NOTE:
If the relay is connected in the mode 3 Vpn to control the phase to
neutral voltages, the thresholds must be multiplied by
3.
Exemple with a 400V analog VT input and a setting at 85% of this voltage:
– if this voltage is a phase to phase (Vpp) setting, U< = 85% x Un, the setting will
be 340V
– if this voltage is a phase to neutral (Vpn = 230V) setting, U< = (85% x Un) x
3 , the setting will be 340V
When OR operating logic is set and one or more voltage values fall below the threshold
value, the tripping command is sent after the tripping timer has reached the set overtime
condition.
When AND operating logic is set and all of the voltage values have fallen below the
threshold value, the tripping command is sent after the tripping timer has reached the set
overtime condition.
The protection element under-voltage has two programmable thresholds with definite delay
time tU< and tU<<.
The two thresholds can be individually inhibited when circuit breaker is opened (52A).
Information as to the thresholds setting range can be found in the FT and TD parts of the
technical guide.
3.5
(59) Overvoltage Protection (P127)
As previously discussed, under-voltage conditions are relatively common, as they are related
to fault conditions etc. However, over-voltage conditions are also a possibility and are
generally related to loss of load conditions as described below.
Under load shedding conditions, the supply voltage will increase in magnitude. This situation
would normally be rectified by voltage regulating equipment such as AVRs or on-load tap
changers. However, failure of this equipment to bring the system voltage back within
prescribed limits, leaving the system with an over-voltage condition which must be cleared in
order to preserve the life of the system insulation. Hence, over-voltage protection, which is
suitably time delayed to allow for normal regulator action, may be applied. During earth fault
conditions on a power system there may be an increase in the healthy phase voltages.
Ideally, the system should be designed to withstand such over-voltages for a defined period
of time.
Normally, there will be a relay with a primary protection element employed to detect the earth
fault condition and to issue a trip command if the fault is non-cleared after a nominal time.
However, in this instance it would be possible to use a relay with an over-voltage protection
element as back-up protection. Sufficient would be a single stage of protection, having a
definite delay time.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 38/96
3.5.1
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Setting Guidelines
The relay with this type of protection element must be co-ordinated with any other overvoltage relay at other locations on the system. This should be carried out in a similar manner
to that used for grading current operated protection devices.
The protection element over-voltage has two programmable thresholds and two delay timers,
tU>, tU>>.
After a trip command the thresholds will be reset when all phase voltages have fallen below
95% of setting values.
The overvoltage protection element, which can be set as OR or AND logic, operates by
comparing each UAB, UBC and UCA voltage input with the U>, U>> thresholds.
NOTE:
If the relay is connected in the mode 3Vpn to control the phase to
neutral voltages, the thresholds must be multiplied by
3.
When OR operating logic is set and one or more voltage has risen above the threshold
value, the tripping command is sent after the tripping timer has reached the set overtime
condition.
When AND operating logic is set and all of the voltage values have risen above the threshold
value, the tripping command is sent after the tripping timer has reached the set overtime
condition.
Information as to the thresholds setting range can be found in the FT and TD parts of the
technical guide.
3.6
Negative sequence overvoltage protection
Where an incoming feeder is supplying a switchboard which is feeding rotating plant (e.g.
induction motors), correct phasing and balance of the ac supply is essential. Incorrect phase
rotation will result in any connected motors rotating in the wrong direction. For directionally
sensitive applications, such as elevators and conveyor belts, it may be unacceptable to allow
this to happen
Any unbalanced condition occurring on the incoming supply will result in the presence of
negative phase sequence (nps) components of voltage. In the event of incorrect phase
rotation, the supply voltage would effectively consist of 100% negative phase sequence
voltage only
3.6.1
Setting guideline
The negative sequence overvoltage protection has two independent thresholds: V2> and
tV2>.
Any unbalanced condition occurring on the incoming supply will result in the presence of
negative phase sequence (nps) components of voltage. In the event of incorrect phase
rotation, the supply voltage would effectively consist of 100% negative phase sequence
typical.
The operation time of the element will be highly dependent on the application. A typical
setting would be in the region of 5s.
The relay will trip according to an inverse characteristic or a definite time characteristic for
the first stage and according to a definite time characteristic for the second stage.
The inverse characteristic is given by the following formula:
t = K / (M - 1)
Where:
K = Time Multiplier Setting
t = operating time in seconds
M = Applied input voltage / Relay setting voltage (Vs).
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
4.
OTHER PROTECTION FUNCTION INTEGRATED IN P127
4.1
Under/Over frequency (81 U/O)
4.1.1
Description
Page 39/96
Time delayed under and over frequency protection available on P127 provides the
fundamental form of frequency protection.
Six thresholds are available: Each one can be configured to detect an under or over
frequency within the range [fn – 4,9Hz, fn + 4,9Hz], where fn is the nominal frequency
selected (50Hz or 60Hz). A definite timer is assigned to each threshold.
When the frequency measured is crossing one of the 6 pre-defined thresholds, the relays
generates a start signal and after a user settable time delay, a trip signal.
NOTE:
Under / Over frequency protection is available when voltage inputs are
connected.
4.2
Rate of frequency change protection (dF/dt) (81R)
4.2.1
Description
The calculation of the rate of change of frequency is an average measurement of the
instantaneous values over a programmable number of cycles (1 to 200); refer to the
‘CONFIGURATION / General options" menu. The instantaneous values of rate of change of
frequency are measured every cycle (20ms at 50Hz). The rate of frequency change
elements are very important to detect any power loss under severe disturbances and
eventually perform load shedding of secondary load.
These elements offer the possibility to detect the tendency of the variation of frequency, and
thus re establish the correct load/generation without waiting for big frequency reduction.
These elements could be combined to the frequency elements using the AND logic
equations to provide a very useful mechanism allowing a more secure trip decision to be
achieved during transient system disturbances.
According ‘CONFIGURATION / General options’ setting, this function will be inhibited in the
following case:
−
if the voltage level for each phase is below the settable undervoltage blocking value
(see “Prot. Freq. Block U<” cell),
−
if the frequency is out of range: fmeasured > (fn+20Hz) or fmeasured < (fn–20Hz)
−
if dF/dt > ±20hz/s and “Inhib. dF/dt>20Hz/s” is set to “No”.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 40/96
4.2.2
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
dF/dt functionning
f i-2
f i-1
fi
f i+1
df /dti - 2 =
fi - 2 - fi - 3
ti - 2 - ti - 3
fii -- 12 - fii -- 32
df /dti - 1 =
ti - 1 - ti - 2
df /dti =
fi - fi - 1
ti - ti - 1
df /dti + 1 =
fi + 1 - fi
ti + 1 - ti
P0399ENa
The rates of change of frequency are calculated every cycle based upon zero crossing.
NOTE:
To be insensitive to the phase shift and vector jumps, we can reject all
measurements of dF/dt greater than 20Hz/s .
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 41/96
CONFIGURATION
General Options
dF/dt Cycles.nb = 3
1
2
3
dF/dt Cycles.nb
3
CONFIGURATION
General Options
dF/dt Validat.nb = 2
dF/dt Validat.nb
2
At the end of the three instantaneous dF/dt
measurement cycle, the first average value
is calculated.and compared to the dF/dt
threshold set in the 'Protection / [81R] Freq.
change of rate / dF/dt1' menu.
df/dt1 + df/dt 2 + df/dt3
dF / dtaverage1 =
3
CONFIGURATION
General Options
dF/dt Cycles.nb = 3
dF/dt Validat.nb = 2
df/dt2
df/dt3
1
2
3
dF/dt 1 =
dF/dt1 =
The second average value is calculated
using the next dF/dt measurement cycle.
This second average value is compared
to the dF/dt threshold set in the
'Protection/ [81R] Freq. change of rate/
dF/dt1' menu.
df/dt1 + df/dt 2 + df/dt3
dF / dtaverage2 =
3
df/dt1
PROTECTION
[81R] Freq. rate of change
0.5 Hz/s
dF/dtaverage2
dF/dtaverage1
df/dt1
df/dt2
df/dt3
1
2
3
Validation
P3974ENa
With “dF/dt Validation nb = 2”, the rate of change of frequency:
−
will be validated when dF/dtaverage1 and dfF/dtaverage2 exceed df/dt1 setting value
(protection menu).
−
will not be validated when only one of the average value exceeds df/dt1 setting value.
NOTE:
the rate of change of frequency is available when voltage inputs are
connected.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 42/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
4.3
3 phases directional Over / Under power (32)
4.3.1
Description
MiCOM P127 provides the three-phase power protection which monitors the active and
reactive power limits and detects (when selected):
−
active overpower value on thresholds P> and P>>,
−
reactive overpower value on thresholds Q> and Q>>,
−
active underpower value on thresholds P< and P<<,
−
reactive underpower value on thresholds Q< and Q<<.
A definite timer is assigned to each threshold. When the active and reactive power
measurements are inside the trip zone, the relays generates a start signal and after a user
settable time delay, a trip signal.
The directional angle between active (or reactive) over / under power and triggering power
can be adjusted between 0° and 359°.
P
Q
Triggering power
Triggering power
P>
and
P>>
Trip
P<
and
P<<
Q>
an
dQ
>>
Active power (P)
Trip
zon
Tri
p
e
Q<
an
dQ
<< T
rip
Directional
Angle
zon
2°
ne
Angle
zo
ne
0
270
270
90
90
P
Q
2°
180
180
Directional Active Over / Under protection
4.3.2
zo
e
0
2°
Reactive power (Q)
2°
Directional Reactive Over / Under protection
P3969ENa
Power Measurement displayed
For the P127, it is important to select the VTs configuration in the Configuration/ General
Options/ VT Connection submenu in according to the relay wiring for a corrected functionality
of the power protections (See 3.1)
3Vpn (Three phase-neutral connection)
2Vpn + Vr (Two phase-neutral plus an Open Delta connection)
2Vpp + Vr (Two phase-phase plus an Open Delta connection)
NOTE:
P> “100x 1W” if the secondary of the CT = 1A, and the setting of P>
= 100W
“P> “100x 5W” if the secondary of the CT = 5A, and the setting of P>
= 500W
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 43/96
Example1:
VT connection = 3Vpn
CT Ratio = 100A / 1A
VT Ratio = 2kV / 100V
I = 10A primary = 100mA secondary injected on the 3 phases,
V = 1155V primary = 57.7V secondary injected on the 3 phases
Phase Difference = 0 degrees
P= 57.7 x 0.1 cos (0) + 57.7x 0.1 cos (0) + 57.7 x 0.1 cos (0) = 17.3 W sec
or 17.3 x CT Ratio x VT Ratio x K (K= CT 1A or 5A) = 17.5 x 100 X 20 x 1 = 35000 W
Primary
4.3.2.1 Active power (P)
The calculation of the active power is:
For a 3 Vpn or a 2Vpn+Vr connection:
P = Ua * Ia * cos(Ua ∧ Ia) + Ub * Ib * cos(Ub ∧ Ib) + Uc * Ic * cos(Uc ∧ Ic)
Sn = 3.In ⋅ Un
For a 2Upp+Vr connection:
P = Uab * Ia * cos(Uab ∧ Ia) − Ubc * Ic * cos(Ubc ∧ Ic)
Sn = 3.In ⋅ Un
P" =
P
3.KI ⋅ KU ⋅ Un
P' = InTA ⋅ UnTV ⋅ P" =
InTA ⋅ UnTV
P
3.KI ⋅ KU ⋅ Un
where:
−
P
the active power expressed in ADC (Analog to Digital Conversion) points
where In and Un are respectively the nominal current and voltage to the secondary side
−
P”
the active power to the secondary side expressed in Pn
−
P’
the active power to the primary side expressed in Watt
Since these are measurements used only for protection purposes, they aren’t displayed on
HMI.
4.3.2.2 Reactive power (Q)
The calculation of the reactive power is:
For a 3 Vpn or a 2Vpn+Vr connection:
Q = Ua * Ia * sin(Ua ∧ Ia) + Ub * Ib * sin(Ub ∧ Ib) + Uc * Ic * sin(Uc ∧ Ic)
For a 2Upp+Vr connection:
Q = Uab * Ia * sin(Uab ∧ Ia) − Ubc * Ic * sin(Ubc ∧ Ic)
Q" =
Q
3.KI ⋅ KU ⋅ Un
Q ' = InTA ⋅ UnTV ⋅ Q" =
InTA ⋅ UnTV
Q
3.KI ⋅ KU ⋅ Uan
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 44/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
where:
−
Q
is the reactive power expressed in ADC (Analog to Digital Conversion) points
where In and Un are respectively the nominal earth current and voltage to the secondary
side
−
Q”
is the reactive earth power to the secondary side expressed in VAR
−
Q’
is the reactive earth power to the primary side expressed in VAR
Since these are measurements used only for protection purposes, they aren’t displayed on
HMI.
4.3.2.3 Phase shifts of the power
The calculation of the phase shift of the power phi is:
Q
phi = arctan( )
P
4.3.3
Overview
Using a MiCOM P127 relay as a stand alone power relay provides a wide setting range, the
setting range available is dependent on the VT range ordered. The table below outlines the
settings available for each of the VT input ranges.
Analogue Input
P127AA
CT Range (A)
VT Range (V)
0.1 – 40
57 – 130
1 – 10000xk W with k = 1 or 5 A
220 - 480
4 – 40000xk W with k = 1 or 5 A
57 – 130
1 – 10000xk W with k = 1 or 5 A
220 - 480
4 – 40000xk W with k = 1 or 5 A
57 – 130
1 – 10000xk W with k = 1 or 5 A
220 - 480
4 – 40000xk W with k = 1 or 5 A
P127AB
P127BA
0.01 – 8
P127BB
P127CA
P127CB
0.002 – 1
P
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 45/96
5.
DESCRIPTION AND SETTING GUIDE OF THE AUTORECLOSE
FUNCTION (P126 & P127)
5.1
Introduction
An analysis of faults on any overhead line network has shown that:
−
80 - 90% are transient in nature,
−
the remaining 10-20% of faults are either non-permanent (arcing fault) or permanent.
A transient fault is a self-clearing ‘non-damage’ fault. This type of fault can be isolated and
cleared by the immediate tripping of one or more circuit breakers, and does not recur when
the line is re-energised. The most common cause of transient faults are lightning, insulator
flashover clashing conductors and wind blown debris.
The immediate trip will not clear a non-permanent or permanent fault, and the use of the
recloser may be necessary to clear it. A small tree branch falling on the line could cause a
non-permanent fault. Permanent faults could be broken conductors, transformer faults, cable
faults or machine faults that must be located and repaired before the supply can be restored.
Most of the time, if the faulty line is immediately tripped, and the fault arc has sufficient time
to de-ionise, reclose of the circuit breakers will result in the line being successfully reenergised. Autoreclose schemes are used to automatically reclose a switching device once a
time delay has elapsed and starting after the CB has opened.
On HV and MV distribution networks, the autoreclose function is applied mainly to radial
feeders where system stability problems do not generally arise. Using the autoreclose
minimises time of interruption and reduces operating costs.
Automatic autorecloser allows a substation to operate unattended:the number of visits to
manually reclose a circuit breaker is substantially reduced. This feature constitutes therefore
an important advantage for substations supervised remotely.
On circuits using time graded protection, the automatic autorecloser allows the use of
instantaneous protection to give a high speed first trip. With fast tripping, the duration of the
power arc resulting from an overhead line fault is reduced to a minimum, thus lessening the
chance of damage and to develop the transient fault into a permanent fault.
Using short time delay protection prevents blowing of fuses and reduces circuit breaker
maintenance by eliminating pre-arc heating when clearing transient faults.
Current
The next figure shows an example of 4 autoreclose cycles (maximum numbers of allowed
cycles) to the final trip (in the following diagram, td1, td2, td3, td4 = dead time 1, 2, 3 and 4
timers, tr = Reclaim time, O = CB open and C = CB closed).
O C
O
C
C
O
O
C
O
final trip
I threshold
td1
In
tr
td2
tr
td3
tr
td4
tr
Time
Fault
P0031ENa
TYPICAL AUTORECLOSE CYCLES
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 46/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
When short time delay protection is used with autoreclose, the scheme is normally arranged
to block the instantaneous protection after the first trip. Therefore, if the fault persists after reclosing, time-graded protection will give discriminative tripping with fuses or other protection
devices, resulting in the isolation of the faulted section. However, for certain applications,
where the majority of the faults are likely to be transient, it is not uncommon to allow more
than one instantaneous trip before the instantaneous protection is blocked.
Some schemes allow a number of re-closings and time graded trips after the first
instantaneous trip, which may result in the burning out and clearance of non-permanent
faults. Such an approach may also be used to allow fuses to operate in teed feeders where
the fault current is low.
Any decision to apply the autoreclose function would be influenced by all data known on the
frequency of transient faults (for instance feeders which consist partly of overhead lines and
partly of underground cables). When a significant proportion of the faults are permanent, the
advantages of autoreclose are small, particularly since re-closing on to a faulty cable is likely
to aggravate the damage.
5.2
Description of the function
5.2.1
Autorecloser activation
The autoreclose function is activated using “AUTOMAT. CTRL/ PROTECTION G1” menu.
The same settings apply for the Menu PROTECTION G2.
The autoreclose function of the relay is available only if the following conditions are verified:
−
The auxiliary contact of the CB status 52a must be connected to the relay.
Refer to the “AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs” menu
−
The trip output relay RL1 must not be latched to the earth and/or phase protection
function.
Refer to the “AUTOMAT. CTRL/Latch functions” menu
NOTE:
If the auxiliary supply is lost during an autoreclose cycle, the
autoreclose function is totally disabled.
In addition to Autoreclose settings, the user will be able to fully link the autoreclose function
to the protection function using the menus “PROTECTION G1/Phase OC” and
“PROTECTION/E/Gnd”.
5.2.2
Logic Inputs
The autoreclose function has four inputs that can be assigned to the autoreclose logic.
These inputs can be opto-isolated inputs configured for that under the “AUTOMAT. CTRL”
menu. External contacts can then be wired to be used as an input and influence the
autorecloser scheme. These 4 inputs are:
−
one external CB fail,
−
two external starting orders,
−
one external blocking order.
The following table gives the “AUTOMAT.CTRL/Inputs” menu assigned to the autoreclose
logic input. The second column presents the menu disabling the function if not assigned in
the “PROTECTION G1/Autoreclose” menu (Setting = No).
“Inputs” menu
Enabled with:
External CB Fail
CB FLT
EXT CB FAIL
External starting orders
Aux 1
Aux 2
CYCLES tAux1 *
CYCLES tAux2 *
External blocking order
Block-79
Ext Block ?
* These two external orders can be independently disabled.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
5.2.2.1
Page 47/96
External CB fail
Most of circuit breakers provide one trip-close-trip cycle. A delay time is necessary to return
to the nominal state of the CB (for example, the spring that allows the circuit breaker to close
should be fully charged). The state of the CB can be checked using an input assigned to the
“CB FLT” function. If on completion of the “Ext CB Fail time” (tCFE), the “CB FLT” indicates
a failed state of the CB, a lockout occur and the CB remains open.
5.2.2.2
External starting orders
Two independent and programmable inputs (Aux 1 and Aux 2) can be used to initiate the
autorecloser function from an external device (such as an existing overcurrent relay). These
logic inputs may be used independently and also in parallel with the MiCOM P123
Overcurrent settings.
5.2.2.3
Internal and external blocking order
The autoreclose can be blocked by an internal or an external control. It can be used when a
protection is needed without requiring the use of the autorecloser function.
The external block is the “Block 79” input.
The internal block can be a final trip, a number of A/R rolling demand valid or an A/R conflict.
A typical example is on a transformer feeder, where the autoreclose may be initiated from
the feeder protection but need to be blocked from the transformer protection side.
5.2.3
Autoreclose Logic Outputs
The following output signals can be assigned to a LED (see “CONFIGURATION / Led”
menu) or to the output relays (see “AUTOMAT.CTRL/Output Relays” menu) to provide
information about the status of the autoreclose cycle.
−
Autoreclose in progress
−
Final Trip (internal or external activation).
The following table gives the “CONFIGURATION/Led” and the “AUTOMAT.CTRL/Output
Relays” menus used to assign the autoreclose output signal.
LED menu
Output relays menu
79 Run
79 Run
Autoreclose lock activated
by the internal process of
the autoreclose
79Int. Locked
79 int. Lock.
Autoreclose lock activated
by the input “block 79”
79Ext. Locked
79 ext. Lock.
Autoreclose in progress
Final Trip:
5.2.3.1
Autoreclose in progress
The “Autoreclose in progress” signal is present during the complete reclose cycles from
protection initiation to the end of the reclaim time or lockout.
5.2.3.2
Final trip
The "Final trip" signal indicates that a complete autoreclose cycle has been completed and
that the fault has been cleared.
The "Final trip" signal can be reset after a manual closing of the CB after the settable “inhibit
time (tI)”.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 48/96
5.2.4
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Autoreclose logic description
The autoreclose function provides the ability to automatically control the autorecloser (two,
three or four shot cycle, settable using “Phase Cycles” and “E/Gnd Cycles” menu). Dead
times for all the shots (reclose attempts) can be independently adjusted.
The number of shots is directly related to the type of faults likely to occur on the system and
the voltage level of the system (for instance medium voltage networks).
The Dead Time (tD1, tD2, tD3 and tD4) starts when the CB has tripped (when the 52a input
has disappeared). Dead Time is adjusted to start autoreclose when circuit breaker is closed.
NOTE:
If an electromagnetic relay is used (working on the principle of disc in
the electromagnetic field due to eddy current generated in the disc),
an additional dead time, depending of the tripping cause, is settable,
At the end of the relevant dead time, “CB FLT” input is sent (see § 5.2.2.1).
The reclaim time (tR) starts when the CB has closed. If the circuit breaker does not trip
again, the autoreclose function resets at the end of the reclaim time.
If the protection operates during the reclaim time, the relay either advances to the next shot
that is programmed in the autoreclose cycle, or it locks out (see § 5.2.6).
The total number of reclosures is displayed under the “MEASUREMENTS/Reclose Stats”
menu.
5.2.5
Autoreclose Inhibit Following Manual Close
The “Inhib Time tI” timer can be used to block the autoreclose being initiated after the CB is
manually closed onto a fault. The Autoreclose is blocked during the “Inhib Time tI“ following
manual CB Closure.
5.2.6
Recloser lockout
If the protection element operates during the reclaim time, following the final reclose attempt,
the relay will lockout and the autoreclose function is disabled until the lockout condition
resets.
The lockout condition can reset by a manual closing after the "Inhib Time tI".
The Autoreclose can also be locked out using a “CB FLT” input. This information can be
issued from the "not charged" or "Low gas pressure" indications of CB springs.
Note that Autoreclose can also be locked by:
5.2.7
−
The fact that the CB doesn’t open after tBf delay (CB Fail)
−
An operating time that is above programmed thresholds.
Setting group change lockout
The change of setting groups is only possible if there are no protection or automation
functions running (except the thermal overload function). During the autorecloser cycle, if the
relay receives an order to change setting groups, this order is kept in memory, and will only
be executed after the timer has elapsed.
5.2.8
Rolling demand
This specific counter avoids a frequent operation of a CB in case of frequent intermittent
fault. The numbers of shoot can be adjusted from 1 to 100 in the cell “Max cycles nb”,
settable in a time period from 10min to 24 hours.
The rolling demand is used when a definite number of successfully recloses are made on a
definite time.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
5.3
Setting Guidelines
5.3.1
Number Of Shots
Page 49/96
There is no perfect rule to define the number of shots for a particular application.
For medium voltage systems it is common to use two or three autoreclose shots, and, for
specific applications, four shots. Using four shots, final dead time can be set for a time long
enough to allow thunderstorms to stop before definitive final reclose. This scheme prevents
unnecessary lockout caused by consecutive transient faults.
Typically, the first trip, and sometimes the second, are caused by the instantaneous
protection. Since 80% of faults are transient, the following trips will be time delayed, and all
will have increasing dead times to clear non-permanent faults.
In order to determine the number of shots required; the first factor is the ability for the circuit
breaker to perform several trip-close operations in a short time and, the effect of these
operations on the maintenance period.
If a moderate percentage of non-permanent faults is present in a system, two or more shots
are justified. If fused ‘tees’ are used and the fault level is low, the timer of the fuses may not
discriminate with the main IDMT relay: several shots are usefull. This would not warm up the
fuse to a such extent that it would eventually blow before the main protection operated.
5.3.2
Dead Timer Setting
Load, circuit breaker, fault de-ionising time and protection reset are taken into consideration
when setting the dead timer.
5.3.3
Minimum drop-off time setting
If an electromagnetic relay is used (working on the principle of disc in the electromagnetic
field due to eddy current generated in the disc), an additional dead time (tI>, tI>>, tI>>>, tIe>,
tIe>> or tIe>>>) depending of the tripping cause is settable,
This function includes the choice to select an IDMT curve on the relay reset time, setting the
dropp-off time on phase and neutral autoreclose cycles.
This drop-off time blocks the next cycle if this one not elapsed.
A next cycle can be start if the dead time is elapsed and treset elapsed to.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 50/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Reset time with AR and electromechanical relay
- Today treset
Trip time
Trip time
Upstream relay
- Evolution treset proposition
Including and IDMT curve after the trip and
start the new cycle after the dead time and
IDMT reset finish.
Upstream relay
Trip
Downstream relay
Downstream relay
Trip
Trip 1st cycle
Trip time
Trip
Trip 1st cycle
Trip
Trip 2nd cycle
P0906ENa
NOTE:
5.3.3.1
this function is currently used with IDMT curve.
If dead time > Drop-off time, the relay will close the CB at the end of
dead time.
If dead time < Drop-off time, the relay will close the CB at the end of
dropp-off time.
Load
It is very difficult to optimize the dead time due to the great diversity of load on a system.
However, it is possible to study each type of load separately and thereby be able to define a
typical dead time.
The most common types of loads are synchronous or induction motors and lighting circuits.
Synchronous motors tolerate only extremely short interruptions of supply without loss of
synchronism. In practice, the dead time should be sufficient to allow the motor no-volt device
to operate. Typically, a minimum dead time of 0.2-0.3 seconds is recommended.
Induction motors, on the other hand, can withstand supply interruptions, up to a maximum of
0.5 seconds and re-accelerate successfully. In general dead times of 3-10 seconds are
normally satisfactory, but there may be special cases for which additional time is required to
allow the reset of manual controls and safety devices.
Loss of supply of lighting circuits, such as street lighting, can lead to important safety
problems (car circulation). Regarding domestic customers, the main consideration is linked
to the inconvenience caused.
The number of minutes lost per year to customers will be reduced on feeders using the
autorecloser and will also be affected by the dead time settings used.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
5.3.3.2
Page 51/96
Circuit Breaker
For high speed autoreclose, the minimum dead time of the power system depends on the
minimum time delay imposed by the circuit breaker during a trip and reclose operation.
Since a circuit breaker is a mechanical device, it has an inherent contact separation time.
This operating time for a modern circuit breaker is usually within the 50-100ms range, but
could be longer with older designs.
NOTE:
The closing pulse time delay (adjusted using ‘AUTOMAT. CTRL / CB
Supervision / tClose Pulse’ setting) should be higher than the time
delay necessary to close the CB (mechanical closing and CB Closing
loop). In the same way, the opening pulse time delay (‘AUTOMAT.
CTRL / CB Supervision / tOpen Pulse’ setting) should be higher than
the time delay necessary to open the CB. Otherwise, the autorecloser
can be locked.
Once the circuit breaker has reset, the breaker can start to close. The period of time
between the energisation of the closing mechanism and the making of the contacts is called
closing time. Because of the time constant of a solenoid closing mechanism and the inertia
of the plunger, a solenoid closing mechanism may take 0.3s. A spring operated breaker, on
the other hand, can close in less than 0.2 seconds.
Where high speed reclosing is required, for the majority of medium voltage applications, the
circuit breaker mechanism dictates itself the minimum dead time. However, the fault deionising time may also have to be considered.
High speed autoreclose may be required to maintain stability on a network that has two or
more power sources. For high speed autoreclose, the system disturbance time should be
minimised using fast protection, <50 ms, such as distance or feeder differential protection
and fast circuit breakers < 100 ms. Fast fault clearance can reduce the time for the fault arc
to de-ionise.
To ensure stability between two sources, a dead time of <300 ms is typically required.
Considering only the CB, this minimum time corresponds to the reset time of the mechanism
plus the CB closing time. Thus, a solenoid mechanism is not adapted for high speed
autoreclose due to the fact that the closing time is generally too long.
5.3.3.3
Fault De-ionising Time
For high speed autoreclose, the time to de-ionise faults may be the factor the most important
when considering the dead time. This is the time required for the ionised air to disperse
around the fault position so that the insulation level of the air is restored. This time may be
around the following value:
De-ionising time = (10.5 + ((system voltage in kV)/34.5)) / frequency
For 66 kV = 0.25 s (50Hz)
For 132 kV = 0.29 s (50 Hz)
5.3.3.4
Protection Reset
It is essential that the protection fully resets during the dead time, so that correct time
discrimination is maintained after reclose on to a fault. For high speed autoreclose,
instantaneous reset of protection is required.
Typical 11/33kV dead time settings in the UK are as follow:
1st dead time = 5 - 10 seconds
2nd dead time = 30 seconds
3rd dead time = 60 - 100 seconds
4th dead time (uncommon in the UK, however used in South Africa) = 60 - 100 seconds
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Page 52/96
5.3.4
Application Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Reclaim Timer Setting
The following factors influence the choice of the reclaim timer:
−
Supply continuity - Large reclaim times can result in unnecessary lockout for transient
faults.
−
Fault incidence/Past experience - Small reclaim times may be required where there is
a high incidence of lightning strikes to prevent unnecessary lockout for transient faults.
−
Charging time of the spring or resetting of electromagnetical induction disk relay - For
high speed autoreclose, the reclaim time may be set longer than the spring charging
time to ensure that there is sufficient energy in the circuit breaker to perform a tripclose-trip cycle. For delayed autoreclose, this setting is of no need as the dead time
can be extended by an extra CB healthy check window time if there is insufficient
energy in the CB. If there is insufficient energy after the check window time the relay
will lockout.
−
Switchgear Maintenance - Excessive operation resulting from short reclaim times can
mean shorter maintenance periods. A minimum reclaim time of 5s may be needed to
give sufficient time to the CB to recover after a trip and close before it can perform
another trip-close-trip cycle.
The reclaim time must be long enough to allow any time delayed protection leading to
autoreclose to operate. Failure to do so can cause the autoreclose scheme to reset too soon
and the reactivation of the instantaneous protection.
If that were the case, a permanent fault would look like some transient faults, caused by
continuous autorecloses. Applying a protection against excessive fault frequency lockout is
an additional precaution that can solve this problem.
It is possible to obtain short reclaim times to obtain less lockouts of the CB by blocking the
reclaim time from the protection start signals. If short reclaim times are to be used, then the
switchgear rating may dictate the minimum reclaim time.
Sensitive earth fault protection is used to detect high resistance earth faults. The time delay
of such protections is usually a long time delay, typically about 10-15s. If autoreclose is
generated by the SEF protection, this timer must be taken into account when deciding the
value of the reclaim time, if the reclaim time is not blocked by an SEF protection start signal.
Sensitive earth faults, caused by a broken overhead conductor in contact with dry ground or
a wood fence are rarely transient faults and may be dangerous to people.
It is therefore common practice to block the autoreclose using the sensitive earth fault
protection and lockout the circuit breaker.
Where motor-wound spring closed circuit breakers are used, the reclaim time must be at
least as long as the spring winding time for high speed autoreclose to ensure that the
breaker can perform a trip-close-trip cycle.
A typical 11/33kV reclaim time is 3-10 seconds, this prevents unnecessary lockout during
thunderstorms. However, times up to 60-180 seconds maybe used.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
5.3.5
Autoreclose setting guideline
5.3.5.1
General setting
Page 53/96
SETTING CONDITION FOR THE ARC FUNCTIONALITY
“PROTECTION Gx / [79] AUTORECLOSE”
“Autoreclose”
“Phase Cycles” or/and “E/GND Cycles”
“Cycles xxxx”
Yes
At least 1
If the cycle = 0 none autoreclose
available
1234
0111
Max number cycle:
52a
This input must be in accordance with
the CB position: HIGH with CB close,
LOW with CB opened.
max. 4 cycles
“AUTOMA. CTRL / INPUTS”
One of the digital inputs. The relevant
input must be configured as Active High
“AUTOMA. CTRL / OUTPUTS RELAYS”
“CB Close & SOTF”
One of the relays from 2 to 8
CB Close
This relay must be only assigned to this
function.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 54/96
5.3.5.2
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Trip and reclose (normal operation)
Autoreclose starts only if tripping order (RL1) has been performed (Trip & Start).
Red LED of trip will always come whenever autoreclose starts.
“PROTECTION Gx / [79] AUTORECLOSE”
“Autoreclose”
“Phase Cycles” or/and “E/GND Cycles”
Cycles tI>, tI>>, tI>>>, tIe>, tIe>>, tIe>>>,
tPe/IeCos>, tPe/IeCos>>
Yes
At least 1
1234
0111
If the cycle = 0 none autoreclose
available
Max number cycle:
max. 4 cycles
“AUTOMA. CTRL / TRIP COMMANDS”
Trip Commands
At least a trip
command.
Overcurrent and/or earth fault
overcurrent trip thresholds
(One of them is enough)
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
5.3.5.3
Page 55/96
Autoreclose only (external trip)
Since v11.B version, it is now possible to inhibit trip order (tick Trip & Inhib trip) in the
settings file to work like a standalone autorecloser (see the next figure).
In the following configuration:
−
tAux is removed from Trip commands,
−
No trip is performed from autoreclose function,
−
Trip LED will remain OFF.
“PROTECTION Gx / [79] AUTORECLOSE”
“Autoreclose”
“Phase Cycles” or/and “E/GND Cycles”
Yes
At least 1
“Cycles tAux1”
“Cycles tAux2”
If the cycle = 0 none autoreclose
available
For each cycle used, enable “trip and
start cycle” AND “Inhib trip on cycle”
To achieve “autoreclose only” setting, external start should be wired on a digital input. This
digital input should be assigned to tAux1 and/or tAux2.
“AUTOMA. CTRL / INPUTS”
Automat control inputs
Aux
Select on Automat control input Aux
Within Autorecloser menu, both “strip and start” and “inhib trip” should be selected for tAux1
and/or tAux2
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 56/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
To avoid any trip when tAux is ON, ensure that tAux is not selected in trip command menu.
“AUTOMA. CTRL / TRIP COMMANDS”
Trip Commands
5.3.6
Trip command
without tAux
Untick the corresponding tAux
Number Of Shots
There are no clear-cut rules for defining the number of shots for a particular application.
Generally medium voltage systems utilize only two or three shot autoreclose schemes.
However, in certain countries, for specific applications, four shot approaches are not
uncommon. Four shots have the advantage that the final dead time can be set sufficiently
long to allow any thunderstorms to pass before re-closing for the final time. This approach
will prevent unnecessary lockout for consecutive transient faults.
Typically, the first trip, and sometimes the second, will result from short time protection.
Since 80% of faults are transient, the subsequent trips will be time delayed, all with
increasing dead times to clear non-permanent faults.
In order to determine the required number of shots the following factors must be taken into
account:
An important consideration is the ability of the circuit breaker to perform several trip-close
operations in quick succession and the effect of these operations on the maintenance period.
If statistical information on a particular system shows a moderate percentage of nonpermanent faults, which could be burned out, two or more shots are justified. In addition to
this, if fused ‘tees’ are used and the fault level is low, the fusing time may not discriminate
with the main IDMT relay and it would then be useful to have several shots. This would warm
up the fuse to such an extent that it would eventually blow before the main protection
operated.
5.3.7
Dead Timer Setting
The following factors can influence the choice of dead timer setting. Due to the great
diversity of load, which may exist on a system it may prove very difficult to arrive at an
optimum dead time. However, it is possible to address each type of load individually and
thereby arrive at a typical dead time. The most common types of load are addressed below.
Synchronous motors are only capable of tolerating extremely short interruptions of supply
without loss of synchronism. In practice it is desirable to disconnect the motor from the
supply in the event of a fault. The dead time should be sufficient to allow the motor no-volt
device to operate. Typically, a minimum dead time of 0.2 - 0.3 seconds has been suggested
to allow this device to operate. Induction motors, on the other hand, can withstand supply
interruptions, up to a maximum of 0.5 seconds and then re-accelerate successfully. In
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 57/96
general dead times of 3 - 10 seconds are normally satisfactory, but there may be special
cases for which additional time is required to permit the resetting of manual controls and
safety devices.
Loss of supply to lighting circuits, such as street lighting may be important for safety reasons
as intervals of 10 seconds or more may be dangerous for traffic. The main considerations of
supply interruptions for domestic customers are those of inconvenience.
An important measurement criterion for many power utilities is the number of minutes lost
per year to customers, which will be reduced on feeders using autoreclose and will also be
affected by the dead time settings used.
For high-speed autoreclose the minimum dead time of the power system will depend on the
minimum time delays imposed by the circuit breaker during a tripping and re-closing
operation.
Since a circuit breaker is a mechanical device, it will have an inherent contact separation
time. The operating time for a modern circuit breaker is usually within the range of 50 - 100
ms, but could be longer with older designs.
After tripping, time must be allowed for the mechanism to reset before applying a closing
pulse. This resetting time will vary depending on the circuit breaker, but is typically 0.1
seconds.
Once the circuit breaker has reset, it can begin to close. The time interval between the
energizing of the closing mechanism and the making of the contacts is termed the closing
time. Owing to the time constant of a solenoid closing mechanism and the inertia of the
plunger, a solenoid closing mechanism may take 0.3 s. A spring-operated breaker, on the
other hand, can close in less than 0.2 seconds.
Where high-speed re-closing is required, which is true for the majority of medium voltage
applications, the circuit breaker mechanism itself dictates the minimum dead time. However,
the fault de-ionizing time may also have to be considered. High-speed autoreclose may be
required to maintain stability on a network with two or more power sources. For high-speed
autoreclose the system disturbance time should be minimized by using fast protection, <50
ms, such as distance or feeder differential protection and fast circuit breakers <100 ms. Fast
fault clearances can reduce the required fault arc de-ionizing time.
For stability between two sources a dead time of <300 ms may typically be required. When
only considering the CB the minimum system dead time is given by the mechanism reset
time plus the CB closing time. Thus, a solenoid mechanism will not be suitable for highspeed autoreclose as the closing time is generally too long.
For high-speed autoreclose the fault de-ionizing time may be the most important factor when
considering the dead time. This is the time required for ionized air to disperse around the
fault position so that the insulation level of the air is restored. This can be approximated from
the following formula:
⎛
⎝
De-ionizing time = ⎜10.5 +
Vsys ⎞
1
[s] (Vsys = System voltage in kV)
⎟×
34.5 ⎠ frequency
For 66 kV = 0.25 s (50Hz)
For 132 kV = 0.29 s (50 Hz)
It is essential that the protection fully resets during the dead time, so that correct time
discrimination will be maintained after re-closing on to a fault. For high-speed autoreclose
instantaneous reset of protection is required.
Typical 11/33kV dead time settings in the UK are as follows:
1st dead time = 5 - 10 seconds
2nd dead time = 30 seconds
3rd dead time = 60 - 100 seconds
4th dead time (uncommon in the UK, however used in South Africa) = 60 - 100 seconds
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Page 58/96
5.3.7.1
Application Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Reclaim Timer Setting
A number of factors influence the choice of the reclaim timer, such as:
5.3.8
−
Supply continuity - long reclaim times can result in unnecessary lockout for transient
faults.
−
Fault incidence and past experience - short reclaim times may be required where
there is a high incidence of lightning strikes to prevent unnecessary lockout for
transient faults.
−
Spring charging time - for high-speed autoreclose the reclaim time may be set longer
than the spring charging time to ensure there is sufficient energy in the circuit breaker
to perform a trip-close-trip cycle. For delayed autoreclose there is no need to set the
reclaim time longer than the spring charging time as the dead time can be extended
by an extra CB healthy check window time if there is insufficient energy in the CB. If
there is insufficient energy after the check window time has elapsed the relay will
lockout.
−
Switchgear maintenance - excessive operation resulting from short reclaim times can
mean shorter maintenance periods. A minimum reclaim time of >5 s may be needed
to allow the CB time to recover after a trip and close operation before it can perform
another trip-close-trip cycle. This time will depend on the duty (rating) of the CB.
−
The reclaim time must be long enough to allow any time-delayed protection initiating
autoreclose to operate. Failure to do so would result in premature resetting of the
autoreclose scheme and re-enabling of instantaneous protection.
−
If this condition arose, a permanent fault would effectively look like a number of
transient faults, resulting in continuous autoreclose operations unless additional
measures were taken to overcome this, such as excessive fault frequency lockout
protection.
−
A sensitive earth fault protection is usually applied to detect high resistance earth
faults.
Usually, a long trip delay time is set, typically 10 - 15 s. This longer time may be taken
into consideration, if autoreclose is started by an earth fault protection, and when
deciding on a reclaim time, if the reclaim time is not blocked by a SEF protection start
signal. Sensitive earth faults, for example, a broken overhead conductor in contact
with dry ground or a wood fence, is rarely transient and presents great danger to
persons and animals. It is therefore common practice to block autoreclose by
operation of sensitive earth fault protection and lockout the circuit breaker.
−
Where motor-wound spring closed circuit breakers are used, the reclaim time must be
at least as long as the spring winding time for high-speed autoreclose to ensure that
the breaker can perform a trip-close-trip cycle.
−
A typical 11/33kV reclaim time is 3 - 10 seconds; this prevents unnecessary lockout
during thunderstorms. However, reclaim times up to 60 - 180 seconds maybe used.
Fuse application
An application of the ARC is the coordination with a fuse. This application is typical in rural
areas where derived lines are protected by a fuse.
P3880xxa-1
We suppose to have the following settings for the protection and the ARC narrow to the
configuration matrix. All the others have to be compliance with the rules above.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 59/96
67 protection
I> ON
I>> ON
I> 8 In
I>> 10 In
tI> 5 sec.
tI>> 0 sec
AUTORECLOSE
(only the matrix)
ARC cycles
AR init tI>
4321
0110
ARC cycles
AR init tI>>
4321
0021
ARC cycles
AR init tI>>>
4321
0000
ARC cycles
AR init tAux1
4321
0000
Number of phase
cycles
1
The sequence is the following.
1.
Fault on the line protected by the fuse.
P3880xxa-2
2.
Istantaneous trip of the I>> and opening of the CB.
P3880xxa-3
3.
tD1 in progress.
4.
tD1 is expired.
5.
Closing of the CB and start of the tR.
Due to the setting of the ARC the I>> will start but won’t generate a trip. During the
delay trip time of the I> the fault will be cleared for the breaking of the fuse or for the
auto-extintion of the fault.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Page 60/96
Application Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Breaker of the fuse
P3880xxa-4
Auto-extinction of the fault
P3880xxa-5
The above one is an example to show a basic using of the “2” setting in the ARC function.
Application Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
6.
AUTOMATIC CONTROL FUNCTIONS
6.1
Trip Commands
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Page 61/96
This menu is used to assign the trip of the protection and the automatic control function to
the relay 1. See the P12y/EN FT (User Guide).
The relay 1 is usually used for the trip of the CB and the logic output is used to start all the
functionality relevant to the CB control.
6.2
Latch relays
Sometimes it occurs to memorise trips or alarms.
By this menu it is possible the latching of the relay from 1 to 8 the relevant relays to the 79
function must not be assigned latched.
6.3
Broken Conductor Detection (P126 & P127)
The majority of faults on a power system occur between one phase and ground or two
phases and ground. These are known as shunt faults and arise from lightning discharges
and other overvoltages, which initiate flashover. Alternatively, they may arise from other
causes such as birds on overhead lines or mechanical damage to cables etc.
Such faults induce an appreciable current increase and are easily detectable in most
applications.
Another type of unbalanced system condition is the series or open circuit fault. This fault can
arise from broken conductors, mal-operation of single-phase switchgear, or the operation of
fuses.
Series faults will not induce an increase in phase current on the system and hence are not
easily detectable by standard overcurrent protection elements available with common relays.
However, they will produce an unbalance and an important level of negative phase
sequence current, which can be detected.
It is possible to apply a negative phase sequence overcurrent relay to detect a series fault
condition as described. However, on a lightly loaded line, the negative sequence current
resulting from a series fault condition may be very close to, or less than, the full load steady
state unbalance arising from CT errors, load unbalance etc. A negative sequence protection
element therefore would not operate at low load levels.
The MiCOM P126 and P127 relays incorporate a protection element, which measures the
ratio of negative to positive phase sequence current (I2/I1). This protection element will be
affected to a lesser extent than the measurement of negative sequence current alone, since
the ratio is approximately constant with variations in load current. Hence, a more sensitive
setting may be achieved.
6.3.1
Setting Guidelines
In the case of a single point earthed power system, there will be little zero sequence current
flow and the ratio of I2/I1 that flows in the protected circuit will approach 100%. In the case of
a multiple earthed power system (assuming equal impedance in each sequence network),
the ratio I2/I1 will be 50%.
The setting for the broken conductor protection element is described in Technical Data and
the menu is described in User Guide.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Page 62/96
6.3.2
Application Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Example Setting
The following information was recorded by the relay during commissioning:
full load = 500A
I2 = 50A
therefore the quiescent ratio for I2/I1 is given by:
I2/I1 = 50/500 = 0.1
To allow for tolerances and load variations a setting of 200% of this value may be typical:
Therefore set RATIO I2/I1 = 20%
Set tBC = 60 s to allow adequate time for short circuit fault clearance by time delayed
protections.
6.4
Inrush Blocking (P127 only)
The inrush blocking function assumes stability protection during transformer energising
based on harmonic 2 presence.
In applications where the sensitivity of overcurrent thresholds need to be set below the
prospective peak inrush current, the inrush block function can be used to block the
overcurrent, earth fault and negative sequence overcurrent stages. During transformer
inrush conditions, the second harmonic component of the inrush current may be as high as
70%. In practice, the second harmonic level may not be the same for all phases during
inrush and therefore the relay will provide an Inrush Blocking signal for any phase above the
set threshold. In general, a setting of 15% to 20% for the Inrush harmonic 2 ratio can be
applied in most cases taking care that setting it too high, inrush blocking may not operate for
low levels of second harmonic current which may result in the O/C element tripping during
transformer energization. Similarly applying a too low a setting, inrush blocking may prevent
tripping during some internal transformer faults with significant second harmonic current.
6.4.1
Overview
Inrush Blocking function operates by measuring ratio of second to fundamental harmonic
current. It could be used as “blocking logic” of I >, I >>, I >>>, I0 >, I0 >>, I0 >>>, Ie_d>,
Ie_d>>, I2 >, I2 >> or I2 >>> in case the harmonic 2 ratio is higher than the settable
threshold. Indeed, inrush blocking functions will reset selected protection function starting.
The minimum duration of overcurrent threshold inhibition (tReset) can be also set. This value
depends on the transformer power transient inrush duration: between 0.1 second (for a
100kVA transformer) to 1.0 second (for a large unit). It is used to avoid any maloperation
during a fixed duration in case of too sensitive setting.
6.4.2
Operation
For each of the three phases currents (IA, IB, IC), the harmonic restraint function compares
the ratio of harmonic 2 to fundamental with the setting ratio (adjustable from Harmonic 2 /
Fundamental = 10 % up to 35 % step 1%).
Minimum fundamental current value required for operation of Inrush Blocking function. There
is 0.2In, and there is no upper limit to disable this feature. However, in transformer
protection, the high set overcurrent stage shall not be controlled by this Inrush Blocking
feature; this enables detection of all high current faults without inrush blocking.
Inrush Blocking feature will block selected protection stages, any time inrush conditions
occurs on the line (Ratio of 2nd Harmonics measured > Inrush H2 settings ratio), and will be
at least active during tReset.
Operating Inrush current is settable from 10% to 35% of fundamental current.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 63/96
tReset timer defines the minimum duration of overcurrent threshold inhibition (0-2s, settable).
This timer starts as soon as operating inrush current threshold picks up:
− If inrush condition duration is smaller than tReset setting value, selected overcurrent
function will remain inhibited during tReset.
− If inrush condition duration is longer than tReset setting value, selected overcurrent
function will be inhibited as long as inrush condition remains valid.
Under inrush condition, the following selectable protection stages will be blocked:
NOTE:
Inrush Blocking in P127 relay is not phase selective. On occurrence of
inrush condition, in any phase, selected protection stages in all 3
phases will be blocked.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 64/96
6.4.3
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Principle
Settable
blocking
Blocking logic 1
Blocking logic 2
LEVEL
LEVEL
hold
DELAY
hold
DELAY
hold
DELAY
LEVEL
Settable blocking IE
LEVEL
Settable blocking I2
LEVEL
Inrush
P0866ENA
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
6.5
Page 65/96
Cold Load Pick-up (P126 & P127)
The Cold Load Pick-up feature enables the selected settings of the MiCOM P126 and P127
relays to be changed to react to temporary overload conditions that may occur during cold
starts. This condition may occur by switching on large heating loads after a sufficient cooling
period, or loads that draw high initial starting currents.
When a feeder is energised, the current levels that flow for a period of time following
energising may differ greatly from the normal load levels. Consequently, overcurrent settings
that have been applied to give short circuit protection may not be suitable during this period.
The Cold Load Pick-up (CLP) logic raises the settings of selected stages for a set duration
tCL. This allows the protection settings to be set closer to the load profile. Cold load pick-up
cannot restart until the end of tCL duration. The CLP logic provides stability, without
compromising protection performance during starting.
The CLP can be started by digital logic Input 52a and/or internal threshold detection by (Not
I< & I>) and/or internal threshold detection by (Not I0< & I0>).
If the CB positions are not available, to detect the Cold Load Pick-up start, a new internal
threshold is created named autostart.
To detect the Cold Load Pick-up, the three phases current should be under 5% of In. When
the current grows up to In or more, with a time of less than 200 ms, an internal edge
detection is created.
CLP does not start
IB
In >
IA
IC
In >
Time more
than 200ms
Internel Virtual
threshold 5% In
IA
IB IC
One phase is
upper than 5% of
In at start.
Internel Virtual
threshold 5% In
T<200ms
T<200ms
CLP starts
In >
IA
IB IC
¨P3942ENa
- phase A AND phase B AND phase C < 5% In
- Phase A > In, in less than 200ms
Internel Virtual
threshold 5% In
P3942ENa
T<200ms
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 66/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
The following diagram shows the logic start of CLP
Setting
Cold load Pick-up
52A Actif Selectable
In the menu CLP
Ext. CB 52A
Position
Digital logic Input = 52A
&
C.L.P. not in progress
Setting
Cold load Pick-up
Auto-detection Actif
Selectable in the menu CLP
A edge detection I under 5%
to I more than In and
less than 200ms.
>1
&
C.L.P. not in progress
6.6
Start C.L.P.
P3941ENa
VTS
The voltage transformer supervision (VTS) feature is used to detect failure of the analog ac
voltage inputs to the relay. This may be caused by internal voltage transformer faults,
overloading, or faults on the interconnecting wiring to relays. This usually results in one or
more VT fuses blowing.
MiCOM P127 is able to detect a VT loss by using VTS automatism. As soon as VT loss is
detected, all voltage dependent functions will be blocked, an alarm can be raised and
directional overcurrent functions might be replaced by non-directional overcurrent functions.
6.6.1
VTS occurrence
VTS automation uses a fixed logic. A VT fault occurs if at least one of the two following
conditions is verified:
−
OR
−
negative sequence voltage is greather than 0,17*Vn (0,3*Vn for 3Vpn connexion) and
negative sequence current is smaller than 0,5*In
voltage is smaller than 0,1*Vn and current greather than 0,1*In.
The VT fault disappears as soon as one criteria is not valid anymore.
6.6.2
VTS alarm
A VTS alarm occurs when a VT fault occurs during more than tVTS.
VTS Alarm won’t occur if VTS conditions remain valid less than the timer tVTS (settable from
0 to 100s). If VTS condition remains longer than tVTS, this alarm will be latched until
HMI/communication reset.
The “VTS alarm” menu activates or deactivates the alarm message and LED (see diagram
§ 6.7).
6.6.3
VTS Blocks 51V
This function blocks the overcurrent controlled by voltage transformer (51V) protection (see
diagram § 6.7, “Automat Ctrl” / “VTS blocks 51V”).
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
6.6.4
Page 67/96
Directional protection modification
If a VT is faulty, the VTS alarm occurs and the directional overcurrent (67/67N) protections
do not operate. Only the non-directional overcurrent (50/51/50N/51N) protections are
available for I>, I>>, I>>>; Ie>, Ie>>, Ie>>>, Ie_d> and Ie_d>> thresholds.
The VTS menu gives the possibility to select the protection in case of non directional
overcurrent threshold. The “VTS Blocks Protection” function can be used to:
−
block voltage dependent functions
−
to change directional overcurrents (I>, I>>, I>>>; Ie>, Ie>>, Ie>>>, Ie_d> and Ie_d>>)
into non-directional functions. For instance, when “VTS Non dir I>” is selected, the non
directional overcurrent protection is available for I> threshold.
“VTS Blocks Protection” = No
The VTS does not block non directional current
“VTS Blocks Protection” = Yes
“VTS Non dir I>” = No
Non directional overcurrent protection
is blocked for I> threshold.
“VTS Non dir I>” = Yes
Non directional overcurrent protection
is available for I> threshold.
6.6.5
−
“VTS Blocks Protections?” submenu will unblock all the non directional overcurrent
protection, or give the possibility to select individually the non directional overcurrent
protection(s),
−
When “VTS Blocks protections?” = yes, the non directional overcurrent protections (I>,
I>>, I>>>; Ie>, Ie>>, Ie>>>, Ied> and Ie_d>> thresholds) can be blocked: for instance,
if “VTS Non dir I>>” = Yes, when a VT fault occurs, the non directional overcurrent
protection is available for I>> threshold.
Voltage/Power protection
If VTS occurs, all voltage and power protection will be blocked:
6.7
−
Undervoltage phase (27) protection.
−
Overvoltage earth (59N) protection if connection 3Vpn.
−
Overpower earth (32N) protection if connection 3Vpn.
−
Overpower (32) protection if connection 3Vpn.
Current Transformer Supervision (CTS)
The current transformer supervision feature is used to detect failure of one or more of the ac
phase current inputs to the relay. Failure of a phase CT or an open circuit of the
interconnecting wiring can result in incorrect operation of any current operated element.
Additionally, interruption in the ac current circuits risks dangerous CT secondary voltages
being generated.
6.7.1
The CT Supervision Feature
The CT supervision feature operates on detection of derived zero sequence current, in the
absence of corresponding derived zero sequence voltage that would normally accompany it.
The voltage transformer connection used must be able to refer zero sequence voltages from
the primary to the secondary side. Thus, this element should only be enabled where the VT
is of five limb construction, or comprises three single phase units, and has the primary star
point earthed.
Operation of the element will produce a time-delayed alarm visible on the LCD and event
record, with an instantaneous block for inhibition of protection elements. Protection elements
operating from derived quantities are always blocked on operation of the CT Supervision
element.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 68/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
The following table shows the relay menu for the CT Supervision element, including the
available setting ranges and factory defaults:
Menu text
Setting range
Default setting
Min
max
step size
Automat. Ctrl
CT Supervision
6.7.1.1
CT Supervision ?
No
Yes / No
Ie>
0.08 × In
0.08 × In
1 × In
0.01 × In
Ue<
5 / 20 V
0.5 / 2V
22 / 88V
0.1 / 0.5V
tCTS
200ms
0s
100s
10ms
Setting the CT Supervision Element
CTS
Ie>
&
Alarm
tCTS
Ue<
Calculation part
Logical part
P3975ENa
The residual voltage setting, Ue< and the residual current setting, Ie>, should be set to avoid
unwanted operation during healthy system conditions. For example Ue< should be set to
120% of the maximum steady state residual voltage. The Ie> will typically be set below
minimum load current. The time-delayed alarm, tCTS, is generally set to 5 seconds.
6.8
51V (voltage controlled overcurrent) features (P127 only)
Voltage restrained overcurrent protection is used to clear faults which current is lower than
the rated through current.
Indeed, fault currents lower than the rated value cannot be cleared by phase overcurrent
protection (ANSI codes: 50/51), which, by definition, clears faults which currents are much
higher than the rated current value.
The voltage restrained overcurrent function implemented in the MiCOM P127 is used to
inhibit tripping by the phase overcurrent protection function when the relevant conditions are
met.
To this effect, the 51V function uses negative-sequence overvoltage settable values (V2>
and V2>>), as well as the set threshold values for phase overcurrent (ANSI codes: 50/51)
- I>> and I>>> - and phase undervoltage (ANSI code: 27) - U< and U<< -.
When enabling the 51V function, the user selects whether it should inhibit the 2nd stage
and/or the 3rd stage of the phase overcurrent protection function:
−
−
I>> is inhibited when:
•
the voltage measured at the voltage inputs is higher than U<,
•
AND the negative sequence voltage is lower than V2>.
I>>> is inhibited when:
•
the voltage measured at the voltage inputs is higher than U<<,
•
AND the negative sequence voltage is lower than V2>>.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 69/96
The result of the 51V function is given by the following equations:
Function
(1)
Output relay
Equation
this signal is transmitted to the
output relay when 51V function is
not selected
this signal is transmitted to the
output relay when 51V function is
selected
51V>
I>> output
(U< or V2>) and I>>
t51V> (1)
tI>> output
(tU< or tV2>) and tI>>
51V>>
I>>>
(U<< or V2>>) and I>>>
t51V>> (1)
tI>>>
(tU<< or tV2>>) and tI>>>
Since software version 11. These functions are selected with “(U< or V2>) & I>>” and
“(U<< or V2>>) & I>>>” menus.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 70/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Automat. Ctrl
51V
51V> selection
menu “(U< or V2>)& I>>?”
(U< or V2>) & I>>
No
I>>
I>>
Yes
U<
³1
&
&
V2>
No
tI>>
tI>>
Yes
tU<
³1
&
&
tV2>
Automat. Ctrl
51V
51V>> selection
menu “(U<< or V2>>)& I>>>?”
(U<< or V2>>)&I>>>
No
I>>>
I>>>
Yes
U<<
³1
&
&
V2>>
No
tI>>>
tI>>>
Yes
tU<<
³1
&
&
tV2>>
Yes
VTS
Automat. Ctrl
No
No
VTS blocks 51V?
VT Supervision
VTS Alarm?
VTS
Yes
VTS Alarm
P3963ENa
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
6.9
Page 71/96
Auxiliary Timers (P125, P126 & P127)
Twelve auxiliary timers tAux1 to to tAuxC (tAux8 to tAuxC are P127 optional auxiliary timers)
are available associated to Aux1to tAuxC logic inputs (refer to AUTOMAT. CRTL/INPUTS
menu). When these inputs are energised, the associated timers start and, after the set time,
the output relays close (refer to AUTOMAT. CRTL/OUTPUTS menu). The time delays are
independently settable.
The tAux1 and tAux2 timers always provide an alarm when their set time is expired; the
tAux3 and tAuxC provide an alarm only when they are assigned to the trip relay in the
Automatic Ctrl Trip Command menu.
NOTE:
6.10
auxiliary timers are settable up to 200ms, except tAux 5, tAux6 and
tAux7, settable up to 20000s.
Selective Scheme Logic (P126 & P127)
The following figure describes the use of non-cascade protection schemes using the start
contacts from downstream relays to block operation of upstream relays.
In the case of Selective Overcurrent Logic (SOL), the start contacts are used to increase the
time delays of upstream relays, instead of blocking them. This provides an alternative
approach to achieving a non-cascade type of overcurrent scheme. It may be more familiar to
some utilities than the blocked overcurrent arrangement.
A
B
C
P0024ENa
TYPICAL SELECTIVE SCHEME LOGIC
The SOL function temporarily increases the time delay settings of the second and third
stages of phase overcurrent. This logic is initiated by energising the appropriate logic input
(Log Sel1 or Log Sel2) as selected in AUTOMAT. CRTL/INPUTS menu.
To allow time for a start contact to initiate a change of setting, the time settings of the second
and third stages should include a nominal delay. Guidelines for minimum
time settings are identical to those given for blocked overcurrent schemes.
The tSel1 and tSel2 timers are independently settable.
See the TD (Technical Data) for the setting values and FT (User Guide) for the selective
scheme logic menu.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 72/96
6.11
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Blocking logic function (Blocked directional/non directional overcurrent protection)
The directional non directional overcurrent and overcurrent protection are applicable for
radial feeder circuits where there is small or no back feed.
This application shows that the upstream IDMT relay being blocked by the start output from
a downstream relay that has detected the presence of a fault current, which is above its
threshold settings. Thus both the upstream and downstream relays can then have the same
current and the blocking feature will automatically provide time settings and grading. If the
CB failure protection function is active, the blocking order on the upstream relay will be
removed if the downstream circuit breaker fails to trip.
Thus for a fault downstream from relay C, the start output from relay C will block operation of
relay B, the start output of relay B will block operation of relay A. All the 3 relays could have
the same time and current threshold settings and the grading would be obtained by the
blocking signal received from a relay closer to the fault. This gives a constant, close time
grading, but there will be no back-up protection in the event of the pilots being short
circuited.
However, in practice it is recommended that the upstream relay should be set greater (plus
10%) than the downstream relay setting. This ensures that the downstream relay
successfully blocks the upstream relay when required to do so.
A
B
C
P0024ENa
BLOCKING LOGIC
The allocations of the "Blocking Logic1 and 2” functions are available in the menu
AUTOMAT. CTRL/Blocking Logic1 / Blocking Logic2; this logic is initiated by energizing
the appropriate logic input (Blk Log1 or Blk Log2) selecting in the AUTOMAT.
CRTL/INPUTS menu.
This functionality involves all the current and voltage protections available in the relays.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
6.12
Page 73/96
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring
An operator at a remote location requires a reliable indication of the state of the switchgear.
Without an indication that each circuit breaker is either open or closed, the operator has
insufficient information to decide on switching operations. The MiCOM P126 and P127 relays
incorporate a circuit breaker state monitoring function, giving an indication of the position of
the circuit breaker contacts.
This indication is available either on the relay front panel or via the communications network.
The circuit breaker state monitoring function is selectable in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs
and CONFIGURATION/Led menu.
Further, the MiCOM P126 and P127 relays are able to inform the operator that the CB has
not opened following a remote trip command.
6.13
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring (P126 & P127)
Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is necessary to ensure that the trip circuit and
mechanism operate correctly, and also that the breaking capability has not been
compromised due to previous fault interruptions. Generally, such maintenance is based on a
fixed time interval, or a fixed number of fault current interruptions. These methods of
monitoring circuit breaker condition give a rough guide only and can lead to excessive
maintenance.
The relays record various statistics related to each circuit breaker trip operation, allowing a
more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be determined. These CB
condition monitoring features are discussed in the following section.
6.14
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Features (P126 & P127)
For each circuit breaker trip operation the relay records statistics as shown in the following
table taken from the relay menu. The RECORDS/CB Monitoring menu cells shown are
counter values only.
These cells can only be read:
MENU TEXT
CB Monitoring
CB Opening Time
Displays the CB opening time
CB Closing Time
Displays the CB closing time
CB Operations
Displays the number of opening commands executed by the CB
Σ Amps(n) I1
Displays the summation of the Amps (or square Amps) interrupted by
the CB phase A
Σ Amps(n) I2
Displays the summation of the Amps (or square Amps) interrupted by
the CB phase B
Σ Amps(n) I3
Displays the summation of the Amps (or square Amps) interrupted by
the CB phase C
The above counters in the CB condition monitoring function may be reset to zero, for
example, following a maintenance inspection and overhaul.
The circuit breaker condition monitoring counters will be updated every time the CB opens,
from all the different way. In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external protection
device it is also possible to update the CB condition monitoring. This is achieved by
allocating one of the logic inputs or via the communications to accept a trigger from an
external device.
The options available for the CB condition monitoring function include the set-up of the
broken conductor protection element and those features, which can be set to raise an alarm,
or to lockout the CB.
All the settings are available in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Page 74/96
6.14.1
Setting Guidelines
6.14.1.1
Setting the Σ In Thresholds
Application Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Where overhead lines are prone to frequent faults and are protected by oil circuit breakers
(OCB), oil changes account for a large proportion of the life cycle cost for the switchgear.
Generally, oil changes are performed at a fixed interval of circuit breaker fault operations.
However, this may result in premature maintenance where fault currents tend to be low, and
hence oil degradation is slower than expected.
The Σ In counter monitors the cumulative severity of the duty placed on the interrupter
allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be made.
For OCBs, the dielectric withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of
Σ I2t. This is where ‘I’ is the fault current broken, and ‘t’ is the arcing time within the
interrupter tank (not the breaking time). As the arcing time cannot be determined accurately,
the relay would normally be set to monitor the sum of the broken current squared, by setting
n = 2.
For other types of circuit breaker, especially those operating on higher voltage systems,
practical evidence suggests that the value of n = 2 may be inappropriate. In such
applications n may be set to 1.
An alarm in this instance for example may be indicative of the need for gas/vacuum
interrupter HV pressure testing.
It is imperative that any maintenance programme must be fully compliant with the switchgear
manufacturer’s instructions.
6.14.1.2
Setting the Number of Operations Thresholds
Every operation of a circuit breaker results in some degree of wear for its components. Thus,
routine maintenance, such as oiling of mechanisms, may be based upon the number of
operations. Suitable setting of the maintenance threshold will allow an alarm to be raised,
indicating when preventative maintenance is due.
Should maintenance not be carried out, the relay can be set to lockout the autoreclose
function on reaching an operations threshold. This prevents further re-closing when the
circuit breaker has not been maintained to the standard demanded by the maintenance
instructions supplied by the switchgear manufacturer.
Certain circuit breakers, such as oil circuit breakers (OCB) can only perform a specific
number of fault interruptions before requiring maintenance attention. This is because each
fault interruption causes carbonising of the oil, degrading its dielectric properties.
6.14.1.3
Setting the Operating Time Thresholds
Slow CB operation is also indicative of the need for mechanism maintenance. Therefore, an
alarm is provided and is settable in the range of 100 ms to 5 s. This time is set in relation to
the specified breaking time of the circuit breaker.
6.15
Circuit Breaker Failure (P126 & P127)
Following the inception of a fault one or more main protection devices will operate and issue
a trip output to the circuit breaker(s) associated with the faulted circuit. Operation of the
circuit breaker is essential to isolate the fault, and prevent damage or further damage to the
power system.
For transmission and sub-transmission systems, slow fault clearance can also threaten
system stability. It is therefore common practice to install circuit breaker failure protection
[50BF], which monitors that the circuit breaker has opened within a reasonable time. If the
fault current has not been interrupted following a set time delay from circuit breaker trip
initiation, breaker failure protection (CBF) will operate.
CBF operation can be used to back-trip upstream circuit breakers to ensure that the fault is
isolated correctly. CBF can also operate to reset all start output contacts, by external logic,
ensuring that any blocks asserted on upstream protection are removed.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
6.15.1
Page 75/96
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Mechanism
The CB failure protection included in both MiCOM P126 & P127 relays is performed as
follows.
The tBF timer is initiated when a trip order is issued through the logic output RL1 or by an
assigned digital input (start tBFl).
The trip order can be emitted from a protection element or auxiliary function associated to
the logic output RL1, the logic digital input can be energised from an external device.
In case of command from external device the start of the tBF is active by the change of
status of the relevant digital input (edge), when the tBF is expired a CBF signal is issued.
The tBF is reset when the relevant I< BF is verified for each phase. ((Ia< && Ib< &&
Ic<)==TRUE).
In case of a trip by a RL1 the MiCOM P126 & P127 relays monitor the current signal of each
phase and they compare each phase current signal with the undercurrent I< BF threshold
settable its menu. If the undercurrent I<BF is FALSE ((Ia< && Ib< && Ic<)==FALSE) when
the tBF timer is expired a CBF signal is issued, if it is TRUE (((Ia< && Ib< && Ic<)==TRUE)
the tBF timer is reset. A TRUE condition of the I<BF resets the tBF always.
In the CB fail menu it is also possible to choose if to lock the instantaneous I> and Ie>
thresholds when a CBF signal is emitted. This one allows more flexibility in the fault
localisation and isolation.
CB Fail Enabled
Any Trip
1
External CBF
Initiate
S
R
tBF
CB Fail Alarm
Q
CBF Ia<
CBF Ib<
CBF Ic<
P0428ENa
6.15.2
Breaker Fail Settings
A typical timer setting used with a 2 ½ cycle circuit breaker is around 150 ms.
The phase undercurrent settings (I<) must be set less than load current, to ensure that I<
operation indicates that the circuit breaker pole is open. A typical setting for overhead line or
cable circuits is 20% In, with 5% In common for generator circuit breaker CBF.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 76/96
6.16
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Trip Circuit Supervision (P126 & P127)
The trip circuit extends beyond the relay enclosure and passes through more components,
such as fuses, links, relay contacts, auxiliary switch contacts and so on.
This complexity, coupled with the importance of the trip circuit, has directed attention to its
supervision.
The simplest arrangement for trip circuit supervision contains a healthy trip lamp in series
with a resistance placed in parallel with a trip output relay contacts of the protection device.
However, this solution has limitations as no alarm can be generated. Following paragraphs
describe typical application examples.
6.16.1
MiCOM P126 & P127 Trip Circuit Supervision Mechanism
The Trip Circuit Supervision function included in the MiCOM P126 and P127 relays is
described below:
WARNING 1:
SINCE HARDWARE 5 (NAMED ALSO PHASE II), THE VALUES USED IN
THE CALCULATION OF THE EXTERNAL RESISTOR NEEDED FOR THE
TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION HAVE CHANGED.
WARNING 2:
THE POLARISATION CURRENT OF THE LOGIC INPUT MUST BE
3.5mA / 19.2VDC DURING 2ms (MINIMUM). THE HOLDING CURRENT
AFTER THESE 2ms SHOULD BE 2.3mA (SEE P12y/EN TD CHAPTER
FOR SPECIFIC POLARISATION RANGES ACCORDING TO NOMINAL
RANGE).
A logic input is programmed to the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision/TC Supervision
function. The logic input is associated to the label Trip Circ within the AUTOMAT.
CTRL/Inputs menu. Then, this logic input is wired in the trip circuit according to one of the
typical application diagrams shown in the following example. The method of connecting the
logic input to provide TC supervision, is shown later.
When the function TC Supervision is set "Yes" within CB Supervision sub-menu, the relay
checks continuously on trip circuit continuity whatever the CB status – CB opened or CB
closed. The function TC Supervision is enabled when the trip logic output (RL1) is not
energised. The function TC Supervision is not enabled when the trip logic output (RL1) is
energised.
NOTE:
If RL1 is energised, the “Trip Circuit Super” alarm message is
displayed in order to inform that the TC Supervision is not enabled.
A 52 Fail (trip circuit failure) signal is generated if the logic input detects no voltage signal
during a time longer than the settable timer tSUP. See Chapter P12y/EN FT (User Guide)
and Chapter P12y/EN TD (Technical Data) for the settings.
As this function is disabled when the trip logic output (RL1) is energised, this function is
suitable for use with the enabled relay latching logic.
Logic input
Trip Circuit
tSUP
0
&
Tripping
Output 1(RL1)
energized
52 Fail
signal
P0367ENa
TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION PRINCIPLE DIAGRAM
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 77/96
Three examples of application are given below.
Example 1
In this example only the 52a auxiliary contact is available, the MiCOM P126 & P127 relays
monitor the trip coil whatever the CB status (CB open or CB closed).
However, this configuration is not recommended because the 52a contact and associated
circuit is not monitored.
6
+
2
-
Electrical panel
+
52a
Circuit breaker
-
P3966ENa
TRIP COIL MONITORING
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 78/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Example 2
In this example both 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available; the MiCOM P126 and
P127 relays monitor the complete trip circuit when the CB is closed and a part of the trip
circuit when the CB is open.
In this case it is necessary to insert a resistor R1 in series with 52b, if either the output (RL1)
trip is latched or it stays involuntarily closed, or a long time trip pulse is programmed (See §
6.16.2 for R1 calculation). Otherwise, a short circuit of DC trip supply would occur during
tripping sequence.
In this example, the protection is limited: the coil is only monitored when CB is closed.
2
+
6
-
Electrical panel
+
52b
52a
Circuit breaker
-
R1
P3967ENa
TRIP COIL AND AUXILIARY CONTACTS MONITORING
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 79/96
Example 3
In this example both 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available, the MiCOM P126 & P127
relays monitor the complete trip circuit whatever the CB status (CB open or CB closed).
In this case it is necessary to insert a R1, if either the output (RL1) trip is latched, or it stays
involuntarily closed, or a long time trip pulse is programmed (See § 6.16.2 for R1
calculation). Otherwise, a short circuit of DC trip supply would occur during tripping
sequence.
2
+
6
-
Electrical panel
+
-
52b
52a
Circuit breaker
R1
P3968ENa
TRIP COIL AND AUXILIARY CONTACTS MONITORING
WHATEVER THE POSITION OF THE CB
6.16.2
External Resistor R1 Calculation
The calculation of the R1 resistor value will take into account that a minimum current is
flowing through the logic input. This minimum current value is a function of the relay auxiliary
voltage range (Ua).
Remarks:
– The presence of auxiliary relays, such an anti-pumping system
for instance, in the trip circuit must be taken into account for the R1
resistance values specification.
– It is assumed the maximum variations of the auxiliary voltage
value are ±20%.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 80/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1 - Case of example no 2:
The R1 resistor maximum value (in Ohm) is defined by the following formula:
R1 <
0,8 × U a − U min
[Ohm]
I min
Where:
Ua =
Umin =
Imin =
Auxiliary voltage value (in this case a DC voltage; range is given on label under the
top hinged cover. See table below).
Internal minimum voltage value needed for the opto logic input to operate.
Minimum current value needed for the opto logic input to operate.
Relay auxiliary voltage range (Ua)
24-60 VDC (ordering code P12xx00Axxxxx)
48-250 VDC/AC (ordering code P12xx00Fxxxxx)
R1 < (0,8 x Ua – 19,2)/0.035
R1 < (0,8 x Ua – 19,2)/0.035
The R1 resistor withstand value (in Watt) is defined below:
PR1 > 2 ×
(1,2 × U a ) 2 [W]
R1
2 - Case of example no 3:
The R1 resistor maximum value (in Ohm) is defined by the following formula:
R1 <
0,8 × U a − U min
− R Coil [Ohm ]
I min
Where:
Ua =
Umin =
Imin =
Rcoil =
Auxiliary voltage value (in this case a DC voltage; range is given on label
the top hinged cover. See table below).
Internal minimum voltage value needed for the opto logic input to operate.
Minimum current value needed for the opto logic input to operate.
Trip coil resistance value.
under
Relay auxiliary voltage range (Ua)
24-60 VDC (ordering code P12xx00Axxxxx)
48-250 VDC/AC (ordering code P12xx00Fxxxxx)
R1 < (0,8 x Ua – 19,2)/0.035 - Rcoil
R1 < (0,8 x Ua – 19,2)/0.035 - Rcoil
The R1 resistor withstand value (in Watt) is defined below:
PR1 > 2 ×
(1,2 × U a ) 2 [W]
(R1 + R Coil )
If the trip contact is latched or temporarily by-passed, the continuous current through the
tripping coil is:
ICONTINUOUS =
(R1 + RCOIL)
1.2 × va
If the value is above admissible continuous current through the tripping coil, trip contact
latching must not be made and by-passing trip contact should never be made.
Application Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Page 81/96
6.17
Switch onto Fault Protection & Trip on Reclose (SOTF/TOR) (P126 & P127)
6.17.1
General
Under particular conditions, it can happen that when the feeder is supplied by the closing of
the CB a fast trip command may be required if a fault is present (Closing on to fault).
Some faults may be caused by conditions not removed from the feeder after a reclosing
cycle or a manual trip, or due to earthed clamps left on after maintenance works. In these
cases, it may be desirable to clear the fault condition in fast time, rather than waiting for the
trip time delay DMT or IDMT associated with the involved protection.
In case of manually closing of the CB it can happen to switch on to an existing fault. This is a
particularly critical situation, because the overcurrent protection would not clear the fault until
the set operate delay had elapsed. This is another typical case of closing on to fault. Hence it
is desirable to clear the fault as fast as possible.
The P126 and P127 relays provide the SOTF/TOR functionality.
The SOTF acronym means switch on to fault.
The TOR acronym means trip on recloser.
The available setting to enable/disable/set the SOTF/TOR (Switch On To Fault/ Trip On
Reclose) function is written in a submenu of the AUTOMATIC CTRL menu.
The setting regarding the I>> and I>>> is provided to initiate the SOTF function.
6.17.2
SOTF/TOR description
When the SOTF/TOR function is enable, it can be initiated by a local manual CB control
close command detected by the digital input labelled Man.Close, or by a TC (closing
command by remote via network: Modbus, IEC 60870) or by an automatic reclosing cycle.
When CB has been closed on some faults caused by lightning or something else, the fault
detection needs a time period. This is the reason why a 500ms fixed time window after
initiatialization of the SOTF/TOR function is included.
When this fixed timer is elapsed and the I>> or I>>> is detected, the settable timer t Sotf
starts.
The existence of this settable timer is justified because in some applications selectivity for
fault occurring in stage two or three is requested.
Another justification of the SOTF/TOR tripping time delay is for cases where serious
transient happen and the three poles of the CB do not close at the same time and for those
cases where the CB may not be closed instantaneously.
Furthermore, the t SOFT can also be considered a trip delay time that substitutes the trip
timer of the started threshold such to accelerate the tripping.
If a trip due to switch on to fault occurs during the reclaim time of the ARC, the trip will be
definitive and the ARC will move in the blocked status.
If the I>> and I>>> reset during the settable timer t Sotf the SOTF/TOR function resets.
The following signals can activate the SOTF/TOR function:
-
“Ctrl close” logical input,
-
manual closing ordered by HMI,
-
command generated by a digital input labelled “SOTF”,
-
front communication order,
-
rear communication order,
-
when existing, second rear communication order,
-
close ordered by autorecloser,
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 82/96
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
The SOTF/TOR functionality diagram is shown below.
I>>
Autorecloser
0
&
Autorecloser
0
AR selected
Rear Com order
I>>>
0
0
&
&
0
Rear Com selected
Front Com order
0
0
t SOTF
0.. 500 ms
valided by
setting
&
0
Front Com selected
0
OR
Ctrl Close input
0
Ctrl Close slected
0
Monostable
500 ms
&
0
SOTF (Manual
close) input
d
SOTF (Manual close)
input selected
HMI order
HMI order selected
0
&
0
OR
Trip
tI> valided by
setting
0
0
tI>> valided by
setting
&
0
0
tI>>> valided by
setting
Close origin
: Signalling of the circuit breaker closing request
SOTF setting
: Setting : Choice of the SOTF feature activation
SOTF setting
: Threshold type selected in SOTF setting
Trip setting
: Threshold type selected in Trip setting
P3939ENa
The trip by SOTF is settable in the AUTOMATIC CTRL/TRIP COMMAND submenu and in
the AUTOMATIC CTRL/Output relays submenu.
6.18
Local/Remote conditioning (P125, P126 & P127)
6.18.1
General
The goal of this feature is to be able to block commands sent remotely through
communication networks (like setting parameters, control command, etc.), to prevent any
accidents or maloperation during maintenance work performed on site.
A digital input labelled “LOCAL MODE” is assigned to this feature. In Local mode, only the
synchronising time signal is allowed.
Commands sent remotely (CTRL TRIP and CTRL CLOSE) as well as commands sent by the
autoreclose function (CB Close) can be set to activate their own dedicated output relay (and
not necessarily the same output relay as the protection trip output RL1).
6.18.2
Settings
In the “AUTOMATIC CTRL/Trip Commands ” menu, TC item uses the “CTRL TRIP” function
to open the CB.
In the “AUTOMATIC CTRL/Output relays” menu, the “CTRL TRIP” and “CTRL CLOSE”
functions are assigned to remotely open and close the CB.
The CB CLOSE relay can be used for the close command.
In order to keep the normal functionality, the customer will have to assign both information
TRIP by protection and Ctrl Trip on (RL1), and to assign both information CLOSE CTRL and
CB CLOSE on the same auxiliary relay.
An application of the subject mentioned above is presented below.
In the following schematic, the customer will have to assign the TRIP and CTRL TRIP to the
TRIP RELAY, the CB CLOSE and the CTRL CLOSE to the auxiliary relay number two, in
accordance with setting above.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 83/96
If the Local input is energised any remote command will be ignored if the Local input is deenergised all the remote control will be considered.
DC V+
Switch
Local
Remote
P125/P126/P127
Local trip
RL 1
Control trip
Local close
RL 2
Control close
RL 2
AR close
RL 1
Protection trip
Input labeled
Local
DC V-
6.19
P0689ENa
Logic equations (P126 & P127)
The MiCOM P126 and P127 relays integrate complete logic equations to allow customization
of the product based on customer application.
Up to 8 independent Boolean equations can be used. Each equation offers the possibility to
use AND, OR, AND NOT, OR NOT & NOT logical gates. Up to 16 parameters can be used
for each equation. Every result of equation can be time delayed and assigned to any output
relays, trip, trip latching and/or HMI LEDs.
Every equation has a rising temporisation from 0 s to 600 s with a step of 0.01 s.
Every equation has a falling temporisation from 0 s to 600 s with a step of 0.01 s.
Every equation temporised result is assignable to trip, trip latching, outputs and LEDs.
An example logic implementation using Equation A is shown below:
I<
tAUX 1(input1)
&
5 sec
1
tAUX 2(input2)
10 sec
Output
P0717ENa
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Page 84/96
7.
RECORDS (P125, P126 & P127)
7.1
Event Records
Application Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
The relay records and time tags up to 250 events and stores them in a non-volatile memory.
This enables the system operator to analyse the sequence of events that occurred within the
relay following a particular power system condition, switching sequence etc. When the
available memory space is exhausted, the new fault automatically overwrites the oldest fault.
The real time clock within the relay provides the time tag to each event, to a resolution of
1ms.
The event records are available for viewing either on the front panel, or via the front panel
EIA RS232 port or remotely, via the rear EIA RS485 port.
7.2
Fault Records
Each time any of the programmed thresholds are crossed a fault record is created and
stored in a memory. The fault record tags up to 25 faults and stores them in a non-volatile
memory. This enables the system operator to identify and analyse network failures. When
the available memory space is exhausted, the new fault automatically overwrites the oldest
fault.
Note that viewing of the actual fault record is carried out in the RECORD/Fault Record
menu, which is selectable from up to 25 stored records. These records consist of fault flags,
fault measurements etc. Also note that the time stamp given in the fault record itself will be
more accurate than the corresponding stamp given in the event record as the event is
logged some time after the actual fault record is generated.
The fault records are available for viewing either on the display, or via the front panel EIA
RS232 port or remotely, via the rear EIA RS485 port.
7.3
Instantaneous Recorder
Each time any of programmed threshold is crossed an instantaneous record is created and
displayed in the RECORDS/Instantaneous menu. The last five starting information with the
duration of the information are available. The number of the fault, hour, date, origin (voltage,
current and wattmetric protection thresholds), length (duration of the instantaneous), trip (a
trip is appeared, yes or no) are displayed in the RECORDS/Fault Record menu.
7.4
Disturbance Records
The integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory specifically set aside for
disturbance record storage. The disturbance records that may be stored are 3, 5, 7 or 9
seconds length each. Disturbance records continue to be recorded until the available
memory space is exhausted, at which time the oldest disturbance record(s) is (are)
overwritten to make space for the newest disturbance record(s).
The recorder stores actual samples, which are taken at a rate of 16 samples per cycle.
Each disturbance record consists of analogue data channels and digital data channels. Note
that the relevant VTs and CTs ratios for the analogue channels are also extracted to enable
scaling to primary quantities.
The total disturbance recording time is 5 records of 3 seconds, or 4 × 3s, or 3 × 5s, or 2 × 7s
or 1 × 9s. The disturbance record starts with the disturbance. If the pre-time time is set to
100ms, the record starts 100 ms before the disturbance.
For the settings of the parameters see FT (User Guide) and TD (Technical Data) chapters of
this TG.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
8.
Page 85/96
ROLLING AND PEAK VALUE DEMANDS (P126 & P127)
The MiCOM P126 and P127 relays are able to store the 3 phases rolling average and
maximum subperiod values. The description and principle of calculation are given bellow.
8.1
Rolling demand
The principle of the calculation of the rolling demand value for IA, IB and IC currents is
following:
−
Calculation of the average of the RMS values on a "Rolling Sub Period" period.
The setting of the width of the period "Rolling Sub Period" is in the "RECORDS/Rolling
Demand/Sub Period" menu.
Setting range: from 1 to 60 minutes.
−
Storage of these values in a sliding window
−
Calculation of the average of these average values (sliding window values) on the
number of "Num. of Sub Periods" periods
The setting of the number of Sub Period "Num of Sub Periods" in the "RECORDS/Rolling
Demand/Num of Sub Per" menu.
Setting range: from 1 to 24.
Display of the first result in the MEASUREMENTS menu only after the storage of "Num of
Sub Periods" periods.
The 3 phases Rolling average value are displayed:
−
Rolling Average IA RMS
−
Rolling Average IB RMS
−
Rolling Average IC RMS
The calculation is reset by either "hand Reset" (by key _ ) without use of password, or a
remote command.
NOTE:
In case of loss of power supply the rolling demand are not stored.
A modification of the settings (either "Rolling Sub Period" or "Num of Sub Periods"
parameter) reset the calculation.
Example:
Sub Period = 5 mn
Num of Sub Period = 2
At the end of the Sub Period 2:
Rolling average value = (average value 1 + average value 2)/2
At the end of the Sub Period 3:
New Rolling average value = (average value 2 + average value 3)/2
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 86/96
8.2
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Peak value demand
The principle of the calculation of the Peak value demand for IA, IB and IC currents is
following:
Every "Rolling Sub Period", a new average value is compared with the previous value
calculated at the previous "Rolling Sub Period". If this new value is greater than the
previous value already stored, then this new value is stored instead of the previous one.
In the opposite if this new value is lower than the previous value already stored, then the
previous value is kept stored.
In this way, a average peak vale will be refreshed each Sub Period; There is no dedicated
setting for this calculation. The setting of the Sub Period in the RECORDS menu is used.
The 3 phase Peak value demand are displayed in the MEASUREMENTS menu:
−
MAX SUBPERIOD IA RMS
−
MAX SUBPERIOD IB RMS
−
MAX SUBPERIOD IC RMS
The calculation is reset by either "hand Reset" (by key _ ) without use of password, or a
remote command.
NOTE:
In case of loss of power supply the Peak average values are stored.
A modification of the setting "Rolling Sub Period" parameter reset the calculation.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
9.
Page 87/96
SETTING GROUP SELECTION (P125, P126 & P127)
The MiCOM P125, P126 relays have two protection related setting groups named
PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2. Only one of two setting groups is active. The
MiCOM P127 relay have eight protection groups (PROTECTION G1 to PROTECTION G8).
Changes between the groups are executed via the front interface (CONFIGURATION /
GROUP SELECT / SETTING GROUP), a dedicated logic input (AUTOMAT CTRL / INPUT
X / CHANGESET) where X is the chosen logic input, or through the communication port
(refer to Mapping Data Base for more detailed information).
To avoid any undesirable tripping, the setting group change is only executed when none
protection function is running excepted than for thermal overload function.
If a setting group change is received during any protection or automation function, it is stored
and executed after the last timer has elapsed.
The active group is displayed in the OP PARAMETER menu.
The active group can also be assigned to an output relay: with a normally open contact.
9.1.1
−
a contact open will indicate Group 1
−
a contact closed will indicate Group 2
Setting group change by digital input
It is possible to configure the change of the setting group by a digital input, either on low
level or on high level. The choice can be done in the CONFIGURATION/Inputs menu.
Low level (idem for high level) depending of the application is selectable in the
CONFIGURATION/Group Select/Change Group/Input menu.
If the digital input assigned to the change of setting group operates on level (low or high), it is
not possible to change of setting group via either remote communication or front panel.
Switching between the groups can be done via:
9.1.2
•
the relay front panel interface (CONFIGURATION / GROUP SELECT / SETTING
GROUP),
•
a dedicated logic input (AUTOMAT. CTRL/INPUT X / CHANGE SET) where X is
the chosen logic input,
•
through the communications port.
Priority
The front panel is priority level maximum due the fact when the user takes the hand on front
panel and enters a password , it is not possible to change of setting group via remote
communication as long as the password is active (5mn).
Below are listed the priorities in the different ways to switch between setting groups.
ORIGIN OF THE ORDER
PRIORITY LEVEL
FRONT PANEL
MAXIMUM
LOGIC INPUT
MEDIUM
REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS
MINIMUM
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 88/96
10.
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
MEASUREMENTS
The measurement functions on MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays are described in
chapter User Guide of this Technical Guide.
Particular attention is to be given to the power and energy measurement.
10.1
Power and Energy Measurements (P127)
The MiCOM P127 relay provides the measurements function for active and reactive power
and for active and reactive energy.
The fundamental value is provided for the derived (calculated) measures.
The following table lists the shown voltage measurements, according to the VT connection
(‘CONFIGURATION / General options / VT Connection)
Configuration Displayed Configuration Displayed Configuration Displayed
3Vpn
on HMI
2Vpn+Vr
on HMI
2Vpp + Vr
on HMI
Ua
Direct
measurement
Yes
Direct
measurement
Yes
N.A
-------------
Ub
Direct
measurement
Yes
Direct
measurement
Yes
N.A
-------------
Uc
Direct
measurement
Yes
Derived
measurement
Yes
N.A
-------------
Uab
Derived
measurement
Yes
Derived
measurement
Yes
Direct
measurement
Yes
Ubc
Derived
measurement
Yes
Derived
measurement
Yes
Direct
measurement
Yes
Uac
Derived
measurement
Yes
Derived
measurement
Yes
Derived
measurement
Yes
UN
Derived
measurement
Yes
Direct
measurement
Yes
Direct
measurement
Yes
The value for power is calculated in accordance with the following listed table.
VTs connection
3Vpn
2Vpn+Vr
2Vpp+Vr
Active Reactive power calculation method
Sum of each power phase
P= PA+PB+PC
Q= QA+QB+QC
Sum of each power phase
P= PA+PB+PC
Q= QA+QB+QC
Aron insertion
The value for energy is calculated by multiplying the calculated power value by time.
The calculated energy value is stored in a non-volatile memory (E²PROM) every second, so
that in case of temporary power supply fault, the previous values calculated can be recalled.
The MiCOM P127 relay provides, on the display, the measurements of the power and of the
energy. Both refer to primary values and rely on the CT and VT ratio.
The maximum active and reactive power value displayed is 9999MW and 9999MVAr.
The maximum active and reactive energy value displayed is 4200GWh and 4200GVArh.
The sign of the active and reactive power/energy values is taken according to the diagram
below.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 89/96
They are in accordance with the wiring diagrams in the chapter P12y/EN CO in this
Technical Guide.
+
cos phi
+P
-Q
cos phi
V
-cos phi
-P
-Q
I
+P
+Q
-cos phi
-P
+Q
P0100ENa
10.2
Additional measurement CT (P127 optional configuration only)
In addition to existing protection CT (Ia, Ib, Ic, I0) and (Va, Vb, Vc), two measurements CT
are added (optional configuration).
The “Metering” menu is a dedicated menu. Phases currents and voltages are displayed
according to CTM1 and CTM2 phases configuration:
‘CONFIGURATION / General options’
“CTM1 phase ?”
“CTM2 phase ?”
“METERING” menu
= none
= none
The menu is not displayed.
= IA (or IB, or IC)
= none
This option indicates that CTm1 is physically
connected to phase A, and CTM2 not
connected. The menu displays the phase A
currents.
= IA (or IB, or IC)
= IB (or IC, or IA)
This option indicates that CTm1 is physically
connected to phase A, and CTm2 is
connected to phase B. The menu displays the
phase A and phase B measured values.
The third phase is computed using the
vectorial equation:
“ IA + IB + IC =0.
When CTm1 and CTm2 phases are connected, “Metering” menu displays frequency, 3phases currents, 3-phases voltage, power and energy measured values.
NOTE:
10.2.1
the following explanations are given for phase A. The same equations
are applicable to phase B or phase C using (IBm or ICm) and (VBm or
VCm).
Frequency
This menu displays network frequency.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 90/96
10.2.2
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Currents
The “Currents” menu displays the magnitude of the measured currents (true RMS value). It
takes into account the CTm connection (see the previous table) and CTm ratio
(‘CONFIGURATION / Transfo ratio’).
MiCOM P127 displays the magnitude of fundamental current, and the magnitude of the
currents up to the 10th harmonics.
10.2.2.1
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) and Total Demand Distorsion (TDD)
Current Harmonic Distortion is measured by phase in several different ways. The first
method is Total Harmonic Distortion (THD). The MiCOM P127 THD (THD IAm) equation is
given in the following equation (for phase A):
10
∑ IAmh²
THD IAm = 100% ×
NOTE:
h=2
I1
The denominator I1 is the magnitude of the fundamental current.
Alternatively, Current Harmonic Distortion can be measured as Total Demand Distortion
(TDD). Demand Distortion differs from traditional harmonic distortion in that the denominator
of the distortion equation is a fixed value “IL”. This fixed denominator value is defined as the
average peak demand, and is set using ‘CONFIGURATION / General options /
IAm TDD denom.’ cell:
10
∑ IAmh²
TDD IAm = 100% ×
h=2
IL
By creating a measurement that is based on a fixed value, TDD is a "better" measure of
distortion problems. Traditional THD is determined on the ratio of harmonics to the
fundamental. While this is acceptable for voltage measurements, where the fundamental
only varies slightly, it is ineffective for current measurements since the fundamental varies
over a wide range. Using traditional THD, 30% THD may mean a 1 Amp load with 30%
Distortion, or a 100 Amp load with 30% Distortion. By using TDD, these same two loads
would exhibit 0.3%
10.2.2.2
K Factor
K-Factor is a measure of the heating effects on transformers. The following equation is used,
for MiCOM P127, to determine phase A K-Factor, where "h" is the harmonic number and
"IAmh" is the magnitude of the hth harmonic.
10
∑ IAmh² × h²
K IAm = 100 ×
h =1
10
∑ IAmh²
h =1
K-Factor is measured on each of the three phases of amps, however there is no "Total" KFactor. K-Factor, like THD, does not indicate the actual load on a device, since all three of
these measurements are ratios. Given the same harmonic ratio, the calculated K-Factor for a
lightly loaded transformer will be the same as the calculated K-Factor for a heavily loaded
transformer, although the actual heating on the transformer will be significantly different.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
10.2.3
Page 91/96
Voltages
The following table lists the displayed voltage measurements, according to the VT
connection (‘CONFIGURATION / General options / VT Connection) and / or to the VT
protection (‘CONFIGURATION / General options / VT Protection).
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
“3Vpn”
Displayed “2Vpn+Vr” Displayed “2Vpp + Vr” Displayed
AND
AND
OR
on HMI
on HMI
on HMI
“Protect P-N”
“Protect P-N”
“Protect PP”
Va
Direct
measurement
Yes
Direct
measurement
Yes
N.A
-------------
Vb
Direct
measurement
Yes
Direct
measurement
Yes
N.A
-------------
Vc
Direct
measurement
Yes
Derived
(calculated)
measurement
Yes
N.A
-------------
Uab
N.A
-------------
N.A
-------------
Direct
measurement
Yes
Ubc
N.A
-------------
N.A
-------------
Direct
measurement
Yes
Uca
N.A
-------------
N.A
-------------
Derived
measurement
Yes
The “Voltages” menu displays the magnitude of the measured voltages (true RMS value). It
takes in account the CTm connection (see the previous table) and CTm ratio
(‘CONFIGURATION / Transfo ratio’).
MiCOM P127 displays the magnitude of fundamental voltage, and the magnitude of the
voltages up to the 10th harmonics.
10.2.3.1
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
Voltage Harmonic Distortion is measured by phase in several different ways. The MiCOM
P127 equation for phase A Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) is given in the following
equation:
10
∑ VAmh²
THD VAm = 100% ×
h=2
V1
Note the denominator V1 is the fundamental magnitude. For Individual Harmonic Distortion
there is no summation, only one component is used in the numerator.
10.2.4
Powers
The MiCOM P127 displays:
−
the measured positive & negative active power; see § 4.3,
−
the measured positive & negative reactive power; see § 4.3.
−
the measured total apparent power (product of the per-element Volts and Amps):
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 92/96
−
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
the three phase displacement power factor (cosine of the angle between the
fundamental voltage vector and the fundamental current vector): The Total
Displacement Power Factor measurement is calculated using the "Power Triangle,” or
the three-phase Fundamental WATTS divided by the three-phase Fundamental VAs.
The per-phase Fundamental VA measurement is calculated from the product of the
per-phase Fundamental Amp and Fundamental Volts values. The three-phase
Fundamental VA measurement is the sum of the per-phase Fundamental VA values
(Arithmetic VAs).
See § 10.2.6 to see the convention for the positive (+) or negative (–) sign.
10.2.5
Energies
Separate values are maintained for both positive and negative Watt-hours (export and import
powers) and positive and negative VAR-hours (Lagging and leading VARs. These energy
quantities are calculated every minute from the Total Watts and Total VARs.
See § 10.2.6 to see the convention for the positive (+) or negative (–) sign.
10.2.6
Plus and minus signes for power and energy calculation.
Plus or minus signs are defined as follows:
Reference direction
SOURCE
LOAD
Metering point
ACTIVE POWER: P is positive when the power is from the source to the load
REACTIVE POWER: Q is positive when the load is inductive.
Im (+)
Quadrant 1
Quadrant 2
V
Re (–)
Re (+)
I
Quadrant 3
Quadrant 4
Im (–)
P3976ENa
with:
Quadrant 1
Quadrant 2
Quadrant 3
Quadrant 4
Active (P)
+
–
–
+
Reactive (Q)
–
–
+
+
Export Wh (Ea+)
+
–
–
+
Import Wh(Ea–)
–
+
+
–
Lagging VARh (Er+)
–
–
+
+
Leading VARh (Er–)
+
+
–
–
Power
Energy
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
11.
LOGIC INPUTS AND LOGIC OUTPUTS
11.1
Logic Inputs
Page 93/96
In the logic input submenu can be set the digital inputs as active high or active low, can be
chosen the supply type DC or AC and it is possible to set the start/stop of the relevant
auxiliary timers assigned to the inputs by front or edge.
By the ordering code it is possible to select the relay with the digital inputs with EA approval
regulation.
See the technical data for further information.
The setting menu for this functionality is in the CONFIGURATION menu. For more details
see FT (User Guide).
In modern protective schemes it is often desirable to synchronize the relay’s real time clock
so that events from different relays can be placed in chronological order.
This can be done using the communication interface connected to the substation control
system or via an opto-input.
Any of the available opto-inputs on the P12x relay can be selected for synchronization.
Pulsing this input will result in the real time clock snapping to the nearest minute. The
recommended pulse duration is 20ms to be repeated no more than once per minute. An
example of the time synchronization function is shown.
Time of “Sync. Pulse”
Corrected Time
19:47:00.000 to 19:47:29.999
19:47:00.000
19:47:30.000 to 19:47:59.999
19:48:00.000
NOTE:
The above assumes a time format of hh:mm:ss
A single digital input can be used for several internal functions or assigned directly to any
output contact
11.2
Logic Outputs
A dedicated output relay is assigned to each logic output. It is possible to set the relays as
self reset or latching.
The two first output contacts (RL1 & RL2) can be used as failsafe relays to provide a “fail
safe alarm” in case of power supply loss or major hardware failure. Other available relays
can be inverted to reverse NO relays operating condition (output relays closing when logical
state of the signal changes from 1 to 0).
FAIL
SAFE RE.
87654321
00100010
This settings means:
−
RL1: Normally Open (NO)
−
RL2: Fail Safe relay
−
RL3, 4, 5, 7 & 8: NO
−
RL6: Inverted (NO but output relays closed when logical state of the signal is going
down)
The setting menu for the functionality of the logic outputs is available in the AUTOMAT.
CTRL menu.
It is possible to assign a specific function to each output relay except RL1.
For more details see the chapter User Guide.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Application Guide
Page 94/96
12.
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
MAINTENANCE MODE
This menu allows the user to verify the operation of the protection functions without sending
any external order (Tripping or signalling).
The selection of the maintenance mode is possible by logic input, control command (rear or
front port), or by front display. The end of maintenance mode is done by logic input, by
control command or on the front display time out ( 5minutes) and by turning off the power
supply.
Maintenance Mode
YES
When activating this menu (YES), the Alarm led will start flashing and an alarm message will
appear “MAINTENANCE MODE”. In this case, all output contacts are blocked, no operation
will take place on these contacts even if a protection threshold associated to one of these
output contacts is exceeded.
(If protection threshold is exceeded, all the associated leds will become ON, even the TRIP
LED, if the threshold is associated to the RL1).
RELAYS
CMD
8765W4321
000000000
This window allows the user to verify the external wiring to the relay output contacts, to do
this, it is sufficient to assign a 1 to any of the output contacts, this will close the contact and
the wiring continuity could be verified.
Application Guide
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
13.
Page 95/96
CT REQUIREMENTS
The CT requirements for the MiCOM P12y relays are given below.
The current transformer requirements are based on a maximum prospective fault current of
50 times the relay rated current (In) and the relay having an instantaneous setting of 25
times rated current (In). The current transformer requirements are designed to provide
operation of all protection elements.
Where the criteria for a specific application are in excess of those detailed above, or the
actual lead resistance exceeds the limiting value quoted, the CT requirements may need to
be increased according to the formulae in the following sections.
13.1
Nominal Rating Nominal
Output
Accuracy Class Accuracy Limit
Factor
Limiting lead
resistance
1A
2.5VA
10P
20
1.3 ohms
5A
7.5VA
10P
20
0.11 ohms
Definite time / IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection
Time-delayed Phase overcurrent elements:
VK
≥
Icp/2 * (RCT + RL + Rrp)
Time-delayed Earth Fault overcurrent elements:
VK
13.2
≥
Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
Instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection
CT requirements for instantaneous phase overcurrent elements:
VK
≥
Isp * (RCT + RL + Rrp)
CT requirements for instantaneous earth fault overcurrent elements:
VK
13.3
≥
Isn * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
Definite time / IDMT sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection
Time delay SEF protection:
VK
≥
Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
SEF Protection - as fed from a core-balance CT:
Core balance current transformers of metering class accuracy are required and should have
a limiting secondary voltage satisfying the formulae given below:
Time Delayed element:
VK
≥
Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
Instantaneous element:
VK
≥
Ifn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
Note that, in addition, it should be ensured that the phase error of the applied core balance
current transformer is less than 90 minutes at 10% of rated current and less than 150
minutes at 1% of rated current.
P12y/EN AP/Fa5
Page 96/96
Application Guide
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Abbreviations used in the previous formulae are explained below:
Where:
VK
Ifn
Ifp
Icn
=
=
=
=
Icp
=
Isn
Isp
RCT
RL
Rrp
Rrn
=
=
=
=
=
=
Required CT knee-point voltage (volts),
Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current (amps),
Maximum prospective secondary phase fault current (amps),
Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current or 31 times I>
setting (whichever is lower) (amps),
Maximum prospective secondary phase fault current or 31 times I>
setting (whichever is lower) (amps),
Stage 2 & 3 Earth Fault setting (amps),
Stage 2 and 3 setting (amps),
Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms)
Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms),
Impedance of relay phase current input at 30In (ohms),
Impedance of the relay neutral current input at 30In (ohms).
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
MODBUS &
IEC 60870-5-103 &
DNP 3.0
DATABASE
MiCOM P125-P126–P127 – V15
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 2
BLANK PAGE
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 1/130
MODBUS DATABASE
MiCOM P125-P127 – V15
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
Communications
Page 2/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
BLANK PAGE
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 3/130
CONTENT
1.
INTRODUCTION
5
1.1
Purpose of this document
5
1.2
Glossary
5
2.
MODBUS protocol
6
2.1
MODBUS connection technical characteristics
6
2.1.1
MODBUS connection parameters
6
2.1.2
Exchanges messages synchronisation
6
2.1.3
Message validity check
6
2.1.4
Address
6
2.2
MODBUS functions available in the protection device
7
2.3
Description of the ModBus protocol
7
2.3.1
Frame size received from the protection device (slave)
7
2.3.2
Format of frames sent from the relay
8
2.3.3
Messages validity check
8
3.
DATABASE ORGANISATION
10
3.1
Product information, remote signalling, measurements
11
3.1.1
Page 0H - Product information, remote signalling, measurements (part 1)
11
3.1.2
Page 23H – Measurements / P127 with CT of measurement (part 2)
15
3.2
General remote parameters
17
3.2.1
Page 1H - General remote parameters (part 1)
17
3.2.2
Page 6H - General remote parameters (part 2)
21
3.3
Protection groups parameters
25
3.3.1
Page 2H - Setting group 1 remote parameters
25
3.3.2
Page 25H - Setting group 1 remote parameters
31
3.3.3
Page 3H - Setting group 2 remote parameters
31
3.3.4
Page 24H: Setting group 1 remote parameters
31
3.3.5
Page 26H - Setting group 2 remote parameters
31
3.3.6
Page 28H - Setting group 3 remote parameters
31
3.3.7
Page 2AH - Setting group 4 remote parameters
32
3.3.8
Page 2CH - Setting group 5 remote parameters
32
3.3.9
Page 2EH - Setting group 6 remote parameters
32
3.3.10
Page 30H - Setting group 7 remote parameters
32
3.3.11
Page 32H - Setting group 8 remote parameters
32
3.4
Boolean equations
33
3.4.1
Page 5H - Boolean equations parameters
33
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 4/130
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
3.5
Remote controls, device status & time synchronisation
38
3.5.1
Page 4H - Remote controls
38
3.5.2
Page 7H - Device status
38
3.5.3
Page 8H - Time synchronisation
38
3.6
Disturbance records
39
3.6.1
Pages 9H to 21H - Disturbance record data
39
3.6.2
Page 22H - Disturbance record index frame
43
3.6.3
Pages 38H to 3CH - Disturbance record & channel selection
44
3.6.4
Page 3DH - Number of disturbance records available
46
3.7
Events records
47
3.7.1
Page 35H - Event record data
47
3.7.2
Page 36H - Oldest event data
52
3.8
Fault records
53
3.8.1
Page 37H - Fault record
53
3.8.2
Page 3EH - Oldest fault record
55
3.9
Error counters
56
3.9.1
Page 5AH - Error counters
56
4.
MAPPING FORMAT DESCRIPTION
57
4.1
Disturbance record additional information
83
4.1.1
MODBUS request definition used for disturbance record
83
4.1.2
Request to know the number of disturbance records
83
4.1.3
Service requests
83
4.1.4
Disturbance record upload request
83
4.1.5
Index frame upload request
83
4.1.6
Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event
84
4.1.7
Request to retrieve a dedicated event
84
4.1.8
Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records
84
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Purpose of this document
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 5/130
This document describes the characteristics of the different communication protocols of MiCOM
P127, P126 and P125 relays (named P12y in this document).
The available communication protocols on the relay are listed below:
1.2
−
MODBUS
−
IEC 60870-5-103
−
K-BUS/COURIER (not available)
−
DNP3
Glossary
Ie
: earth fault current measured
Ue
: residual voltage measured directly by the input terminals on rear panel
Pe
: earth fault power (Calculated)
IeCosPhi
: active component of the earth fault current
MWh+
: positive active energy
MWh-
: negative active energy
MVARh+
: positive re-active energy
MVARh-
: negative re-active energy
MVAh
: apparent energy
pf
: soft weight of a 16 bits word
PF
: heavy weight of a 16 bits word
Dec
: decimal representation value
Hex
: hexadecimal representation value
COURIER are not available yet (in grey colour)
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 6/130
2.
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MiCOM P12y relay can communicate by a RS 485 link. The terminals are placed on the rear panel
(terminals 31 and 32). See the GS document for further information on the wiring. The applied
ModBus protocol is compliance with the MODBUS RTU.
2.1
MODBUS connection technical characteristics
2.1.1
MODBUS connection parameters
The different parameters of the MODBUS connection are as follows:
−
Isolated two-point RS485 connection (2kV 50Hz),
−
MODBUS line protocol in RTU mode
Communication speed can be configured by an operator dialog in the front panel of the relay:
Baud rate (dec)
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
Transmission mode of the configured characters by operator dialog
Mode
1 start / 8 bits / 1 stop: total 10 bits
1 start / 8 bits / even parity / 1 stop: total 11 bits
1 start / 8 bits / odd parity / 1 stop: total 11 bits
1 start / 8 bits / 2 stop: total 11 bits
2.1.2
Exchanges messages synchronisation
Any character received after a silence on the line of more than or equal to a transmission time of 3
bytes is considered as a frame start.
2.1.3
Message validity check
The validation of a frame is performed with a 16-bit cyclical redundancy check (CRC).
The generator polynomial is:
1 + x² + x15 + x16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 binary = A001h
2.1.4
Address
In order to integrate a protection device into a control and monitoring system, the address must be
set from the local control panel. The address may be selected from the range of 1 to 255. The
address 0 is reserved for broadcast messages.
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 7/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.2
MODBUS functions available in the protection device
Protection device data may be read or modified by using function codes. Following are the
available function codes. Function codes to read from or write into parameter cells in the
protection device are described in the listed following table.
Function Nr.
2.3
Data Read
Data Write
Data Format & Type
1
X
N bits
2
X
N bits
3
X
N words
4
X
N words
5
X
1 bit
6
X
1 word
7
Fast
8 bits
8
X
Diagnostics counter
11
X
Event counter
15
X
N bits
16
X
N words
Description of the ModBus protocol
MODBUS is a master-slave protocol where every exchange involves a master device request for
data and a slave devices response with data.
2.3.1
Frame size received from the protection device (slave)
Frame transmitted from the master (query):
Slave number
Function code
1 byte
1 byte
0 to FFh
1 to 10h
Information
n bytes
CRC16
2 bytes
Slave address:
The slave address is in the range from 1 to 255. A transmitted frame with a slave address equal to
0 is a globally addressed to all installed equipment (broadcast frame)
Function code:
The function code returned from the slave in the exception response frame is the code in which the
most significant bit (bit 7) is forced to 1.
Error code:
Among the 8 exception codes of the MODBUS protocol, the protection device manages two:
−
Code 01: Function code unauthorised or unknown.
−
Code 03: A value from the data field is unauthorised (incorrect code).
−
Control of data being read.
−
Control of data being written.
−
Control of data address.
−
Length of request for data message.
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 8/130
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
CRC16:
The slave calculates the CRC16 value.
NOTE:
2.3.2
The slave device does not respond to globally broadcast frames sent out
from the master.
Format of frames sent from the relay
Frame sent (response)
Slave number
Function code
1 byte
1 byte
1 to FFh
1 to 10h
Data
n bytes
CRC16
2 bytes
Slave address:
The slave address is in the range from 1 to 255.
Function code:
Processed MODBUS function (1 to 16).
Data:
Contains reply data to master query.
CRC 16:
CRC16 value calculated by the slave.
2.3.3
Messages validity check
When MiCOM P12y relay (slave) receives a master query, it validates the frame:
−
If the CRC is incorrect, the frame is discarded as invalid. The slave does not reply to the
request for data. The master must retransmit its request for data. With the exception of a
broadcast message, this is the only case where the slave does not reply to a request for data
from the master.
−
If the CRC is correct but the slave can not process the request for data, it sends an exception
response to the master.
Warning frame sent (response)
Slave
number
1 byte
1 to FFh
Function code
1 byte
81h or 83h or 8Ah or 8Bh
Error code
1 byte
CRC16
2 bytes
pf ... PF
Slave number:
The address range of the slave device is between 1 and 255.
Function code:
The function code returned by the relay in the warning frame is the code in which the most
significant bit (bit 7) is forced to 1.
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 9/130
Warning code:
On the 8 warning codes of the MODBUS protocol, the relay manages two of them:
−
code 01: function code unauthorised or unknown.
−
code 03: a value in the data field is unauthorised ( incorrect data ).
- Control of pages being read
- Control of pages being written
- Control of addresses in pages
- Length of request messages
CRC16:
Value of the CRC16 calculated by the slave.
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 10/130
3.
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
DATABASE ORGANISATION
Application mapping are organised in pages. The characteristics are the following:
Page
Data type
Read
permission
Write
permission
Function Nr
0h
Product information, remote signalling,
measurements (part 1)
X
1h
General remote parameters (part 1)
X
X
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
15 and 16
2h (24h)
Setting group 1 remote parameters
X
X
3, 4, 6 and 16
3h (26h)
Setting group 2 remote parameters
X
X
3, 4, 6 and 16
4h
Remote controls
X
X
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
15 and 16
5h
Boolean equations parameters
X
X
3, 4, 6 and 16
6h
General remote parameters (part 2)
X
X
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
15 and 16
7h
Device status
Fast
8h
Time synchronisation
X
9h – 22h
Disturbance records
X
3 and 4
23h
Measurements (part 2)
X
3, 4 and 5
28h
Setting group 3 remote parameters
X
X
3, 4, 6 and 16
2Ah
Setting group 4 remote parameters
X
X
3, 4, 6 and 16
2Ch
Setting group 5 remote parameters
X
X
3, 4, 6 and 16
2Eh
Setting group 6 remote parameters
X
X
3, 4, 6 and 16
30h
Setting group 7 remote parameters
X
X
3, 4, 6 and 16
32h
Setting group 8 remote parameters
X
X
3, 4, 6 and 16
35h –
36h
Event records
X
3 and 4
37h
Fault records
X
3 and 4
38h –
3Dh
Disturbance selection
X
3 and 4
3Eh
Fault records
X
3 and 4
5Ah
Error counters
X
3 and 4
They are completely listed below.
3, 4 and 5
3, 4 and 5
X
3, 4 and 16
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 11/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.1
Product information, remote signalling, measurements
3.1.1
Page 0H - Product information, remote signalling, measurements (part 1)
Address
(hex)
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
000A
000B
000C
000D
000E
000F
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
001A-001F
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
002A
Group
Product
Information
Description
Relay description characters 1
and 2
Relay description characters 3
and 4
Relay description characters 5
and 6
Unit reference characters 1 and 2
Unit reference characters 3 and 4
Software version
Front & rear port available
communication protocols
Internal ratio phase current
Internal ratio earth current
Internal ratio rated voltage
Internal ratio voltage
Info General Start /General Trip
(only if
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol)
LED status
Digital inputs state, part 2
Password status
HW alarm status
Remote signals Digital inputs status
Digital inputs state, part 1
Trip relay: output status
Output relays operation
command
Information of the threshold
Protection 67
status I>
Information of the threshold
status I>>
Information of the threshold
status I>>>
Information of the threshold
Protection 67n
status Ie>
Information of the threshold
status Ie>>
Information of the threshold
status Ie>>>
Do not use (compatibility)
Information of the thermal
Protection 49
protection status
Information of the undercurrent
Protection 37
threshold status I<
Accessory
Information of the status of the
accessory functions 2/3
functions
Information of the status of the
accessory functions 1/3
Do not used (compatibility)
Non acknowledged alarms , part
Alarms 1
1
Numbers of available
Disturbance
disturbance records
Information on the starting origin
Trip relay
status
of the trip relay
Circuit Breaker CB Supervision status
Non acknowledged alarms,
Alarms 2
part 2,
Non acknowledged alarms,
Alarms 3
part 3,
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
32 - 127
1
F10
32 -127
1
F10
32 -127
1
32 - 127
32 - 127
100 – xxx
1
1
1
0-3
0 - 256
0 -1
0-1
1
•
•
•
P1
•
•
•
F10
20
•
•
•
F10
F10
F21
AL
ST
121
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F41
•
•
•
F1
F1
F1
F1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F95
•
•
•
F62
F20A
F24
F45
F12
F20
F22
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F17
•
•
F17
•
•
F17
•
•
F13
0-5
Def.
value
P125
P126
P127
Communications
0
F16
•
•
•
F16
•
•
•
F16
•
•
•
F37
•
•
F17
•
•
F38A
•
•
F38
•
•
F36
•
•
•
F31
•
•
•
F61
•
•
•
•
•
F43
F36A
•
•
•
F36B
•
•
•
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 12/130
Group
002B
Alarms 4
002C
Alarms 5
002D
Alarms 6
002E
Relays
002F
0030–0031
0032–0033
0034–0035
0036–0037
0038–0039
003A–003B
003C
003D
003E
003F–0040
0041–0042
0043–0044
0045–0046
0047–0048
0049–004A
004B–004C
004D
Accessory
functions
Remote
measurements
Alarms 7
004E
004F
0050
0051
0052
0053
0054
0055
0056
0057
0058
0059
005A
005B
005C
005D
005E
005F
0060
0061–0062
Recloser 79
Energy
measures
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Unit
Format
F36C
Def.
value
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F38B
•
•
F36D
F36E
F27
•
Phase A RMS current
1
10mA
F18
•
•
Phase B RMS current
Phase C RMS current
Earth RMS current
Inverse current I2 (fundamental)
Direct current I1 (fundamental)
Ratio I2 / I1
Thermal status (protected)
Frequency
Phase A RMS max current
Phase B RMS max current
Phase C RMS max current
Phase A RMS average current
Phase B RMS average current
Phase C RMS average current
Ie harmonic
Non acknowledged alarms, part
7,
Module V1
Module V2
Module IA
Module IB
Module IC
Module Ie
Angle between IA^IA
(reference)
Angle between IA^IB
Angle between IA^IC
Angle between IA^Ie
Angle between Ie^Ie
(reference)
Inverse current module I2
Direct current module I1
Nr. of total cycles
Nr. of cycles 1
Nr. of cycles 2
Nr. of cycles 3
Nr. of cycles 4
Nr. of definitive trips
Nr. of tripping orders
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10mA
10mA
10mA
10mA
10mA
%
%
10mHz
10mA
10mA
10mA
10mA
10mA
10mA
10mA
F18
F18
F18
F18
F18
F1
F1
F1
F18
F18
F18
F18
F18
F18
F18
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Positive active energy
Negative active energy
0065–0066
Positive reactive energy
0067–0068
Negative reactive energy
006B–006C
Step
Non acknowledged alarms,
part 4,
Non acknowledged alarms,
part 5,
Non acknowledged alarms,
part 6,
Output relays, latch configuration
and status
Information of the status of the
accessory functions 3/3
0063–0064
0069–006A
Values
range
Description
P125
P126
P127
Address
(hex)
Communications
Rolling demand max RMS IA
value
Rolling demand max RMS IB
value
0 - 999
0 - 999
4500–6500
F36F
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
•
•
•
0
Deg
F1
•
•
0-359
0-359
0-359
Deg
Deg
Deg
F1
F1
F1
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
Deg
F1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-999
from 1 to
4.200 x 109
from 1 to
4.200 x 109
from 1 to
4.200 x 109
from 1 to
4.200 x 109
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
•
1
kWh
F18A
•
1
kWh
F18A
•
1
kVARh
F18A
•
1
kVARh
F18A
•
1
10mA
F18
•
•
1
10mA
F18
•
•
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 13/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Address
(hex)
Group
Description
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
0074
Rolling demand max RMS IC
value
Non acknowledged alarms, part
8,
Information of the threshold
status U<
Information of the threshold
status U<<
Information of the threshold
status Pe/ IeCos>
Information of the threshold
status Pe/ IeCos>>
Angle between Ie^Ue
0-359
Deg
F1
0075
Angle between Ie^Ue
0-359
Deg
F1
006D–006E
006F
Alarms 8
0070
Protection 27
0071
0072
Protection 32n
0073
0076
Protection 59
0077
0078–0079
007A
Protection 59n
007B
Protection 67n
007C
Protection 46
007D
007E
007F
0080–0081
0082–0083
0084–0085
0086–0087
0088
0089
008A
008B
008C
008D
008E
008F
0090–0092
0092–0093
0094–0095
0096–0097
0098–0099
009A–009B
009C–009D
Boolean
equations
Voltage
measurement
Power
measures
•
•
•
•
•
F17
•
F17
•
F16
•
•
•
F16
•
•
•
•
•
•
F17
•
F17
•
F16
•
•
F16
•
•
F17
•
•
F17
•
•
F17
•
•
F48
•
•
Phase A RMS voltage
1
10mV
F18A
•
Phase B RMS voltage
Phase C RMS voltage
Earth RMS voltage
Module UAB
Module UBC
Module UCA
Module Ue
Angle between IA^UAB
Angle between IA^UBC
Angle between IA^UCA
Angle between IA^Ue
Max phase A RMS voltage
Max phase B RMS voltage
Max phase C RMS voltage
Average phase A RMS voltage
Average phase B RMS voltage
Average phase C RMS voltage
1
1
1
10mV
10mV
10mV
1
1
1
1
1
1
Deg
Deg
Deg
Deg
10mV
10mV
10mV
10mV
10mV
10mV
F18A
F18A
F18A
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F18
F18
F18
F18
F18
F18
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CAN
F18A
1
10Watt
F18
•
1
10VAR
F18
•
1
0.01
F2
•
1
10mA
F18A
•
•
1
10mA
F18A
•
•
1
10mA
F18A
•
•
0-359
0-359
0-359
0-359
Module Pe
00A0–00A1
3-Phase Re-active Power (Q)
00A2
3-Phase CosPHI
Rolling demand average RMS IA
value
Rolling demand average RMS IB
value
Rolling demand average RMS IC
value
00A7–00A8
F18
F36G
Boolean equation status
3-Phase Active Power (P)
00A5–00A6
10mA
Information of the threshold
status U>
Information of the threshold
status U>>
Reserved
Information of the threshold
status Ue>>>>
Information of the threshold
status Ie_d>
Information of the threshold
status I2>
Information of the threshold
status I2>>
Information of the threshold
status I2>>>
009E–009F
00A3–00A4
1
Def.
value
P125
P126
P127
Communications
6
-999.9 10
to 999.9 106
6
-999.9 10
to 999.9 106
-100 to 100
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 14/130
00A9–00AA
Group
Power
measures
00AB-00AC
00AD-00AE
00AF
00B0
00B1
00B2
00B3
00B4
00B5
00B6
00B7
00B8
00B9
00BA
00BB
00BC
Description
Energy
measures
Measurement
00BD
00BE
00BF
00C0
Measurements
00C1
00C2–00C3
00C4
Protection 67n
00C5
00C6
00C7
00C8
00C9
00CA–00DF
Measurements
00E0–00EF
HMI screen
CT Mease.
Protection 47
Values
range
Step
Unit
Module IeCos
3-Phase Apparent power (S)
IRIG-B Synchronisation
(Option)
Optional board
Inputs
Status
00F0–00FF
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Apparent energy
3Ph V A Hours
Module VA
Module VB
Module VC
Angle IA^VA
Angle IA^VB
Angle IA^VC
Inf. of the threshold status f1
Inf. of the threshold status f2
Inf. of the threshold status f3
Inf. of the threshold status f4
Inf. of the threshold status f5
Inf. of the threshold status f6
F out
Date-and-time synchronisation
origin
Functions available ( read only )
Digital inputs state, part 3
df/dt protection status
df/dt
Voltage of the reference channel
Not used
Information of the threshold
status Ie_d>>
Module Ie der
Angle IA^Ie der
CT Measurement presence
V2> status protection
V2>> status protection
Reserved
Copy of HMI screen
Reserved
Format
Def.
value
F18A
6
-999.9 10
to 999.9 106
from 1 to
4.200 x 109
0-359
0-359
0-359
0 to 7
0 to 7
0 to 7
0 to 7
0 to 7
0 to 7
0 to 3
0 to 4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0 to 63
-20 000 to 20
000
1
ASCII code
kVAh
Deg
Deg
Deg
1
0 to 3
0 to 1
10VA
1
1
1
1
Deg
•
•
•
F18
•
F18A
•
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F67
F67
F67
F67
F67
F67
F69
F79
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F80
F20B
F94
mHz/s
P125
P126
P127
Address
(hex)
Communications
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F2
•
F1
•
F16
•
F1
F1
F24
F16
F16
•
•
•
•
•
16 x
F10
0
0
0
•
•
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 15/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Address
(hex)
2300-2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
230A
230B
230C–2319
231A
Page 23H – Measurements / P127 with CT of measurement (part 2)
Group
IA measurement
231B
231C–231D
231E
231F
2320-2321
2322
2323
2324
2325
2326
2327
2328
2329
232A
232B
232C–2339
233A
IB measurement
233B
233C–233D
233E
233F
2340-2341
2342
2343
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
234A
234B
234C–2359
235A
IC measurement
235B
235C–235D
235E
235F
2360-2361
2362
2363
2364
2365
2366
2367
2368
VA or UAB
Description
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
A
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
F88
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
0.01%
360°
/65536
A
F1
F88
0.01%
A
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
F1
F88
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
0.01%
360°
/65536
A
F1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F1
•
F88
F1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fondamental
THD
Harmonic 2
Harmonic 3
Harmonic 4
Harmonic 5
Harmonic 6
Harmonic 7
Harmonic 8
Harmonic 9
Harmonic 10
Reserve
TDD
Angle Iam^Iam ( always 0 )
Float 32bits
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0-65534
1
0-65534
1
RMS
Reserved
K factor
Fondamental
THD
Harmonic 2
Harmonic 3
Harmonic 4
Harmonic 5
Harmonic 6
Harmonic 7
Harmonic 8
Harmonic 9
Harmonic 10
Reserve
TDD
Angle Ibm^Iam
Float 32bits
RMS
Reserved
K factor
Fondamental
THD
Harmonic 2
Harmonic 3
Harmonic 4
Harmonic 5
Harmonic 6
Harmonic 7
Harmonic 8
Harmonic 9
Harmonic 10
Reserve
TDD
Angle Icm^Iam
RMS
Reserved
K factor
Fondamental
THD
Harmonic 2
Harmonic 3
Harmonic 4
Harmonic 5
Harmonic 6
Harmonic 7
0-65534
Float 32bits
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
1
0-65534
1
0-65534
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Float 32bits
F1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
•
0-65534
Float 32bits
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
1
0.01%
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0-65534
1
0-65534
1
0.01%
360°
/65536
A
F1
•
F88
0.01%
V
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
F1
F88
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Float 32bits
0-65534
Float 32bits
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
F1
F88
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
Def.
value
P125
P126
P127
3.1.2
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 16/130
Group
2369
236A
236B
236C–2379
237A
Description
VB or UBC
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
F1
F1
F1
•
•
•
•
F1
•
Harmonic 8
Harmonic 9
Harmonic 10
Reserve
10000
10000
10000
1
1
1
Angle Va^Ia or Uab^Ic
0-65534
1
0-65534
1
Angle Va^Iam or Uab^Iam
237B
237C–237D
237E
237F
2380-2381
2382
2383
2384
2385
2386
2387
2388
2389
238A
238B
238C–2399
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
RMS
Reserved
K factor
Fondamental
THD
Harmonic 2
Harmonic 3
Harmonic 4
Harmonic 5
Harmonic 6
Harmonic 7
Harmonic 8
Harmonic 9
Harmonic 10
Reserve
Float 32bits
0-65534
Float 32bits
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
239A
Angle Vb^Ib or Ubc^Ia
0-65534
1
239B
Angle Vb^Iam or Ubc^Iam
0-65534
1
RMS
Reserved
K factor
Fondamental
Harmonic distortion percentage
Harmonic 2
Harmonic 3
Harmonic 4
Harmonic 5
Harmonic 6
Harmonic 7
Harmonic 8
Harmonic 9
Harmonic 10
Reserve
Float 32bits
239C–239D
239E
239F
23A0-23A1
23A2
23A3
23A4
23A5
23A6
23A7
23A8
23A9
23AA
23AB
23AC–23B9
VC or UCA
0-65534
Float 32bits
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
23BB
Angle Vc^Iam or Uca^Iam
0-65534
1
RMS
Reserved
K factor
Float 32bits
0-65534
Active Power
Reactive Power
Apparent power
Displacement power factor
Reserve
Positive active energy
Negative active energy
Positive reactive energy
Negative reactive energy
23C2-23C3
23C4-23C5
23C6
23C7
23C8-23C9
23CA-23CB
23CC-23CD
23CE-23CF
23D0-23D3
Energy time origin
23D4-23FF
Reserved
F88
0.01%
V
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
F1
F88
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
360°
/65536
360°
/65536
V
0.01%
V
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
F1
F88
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
Float 32bits
Float 32bits
–100 to 100
10000
Float 32 bits
Float 32 bits
Float 32 bits
Float 32 bits
Private
format date
1
23C0-23C1
•
Float 32bits
0-65534
Power &
Energie
F1
0.01%
Angle Vc^Ic or Uca^Ib
23BC–23BD
23BE
23BF
360°
/65536
360°
/65536
V
360°
/65536
360°
/65536
V
23BA
1
1
1
Def.
value
P125
P126
P127
Address
(hex)
Communications
F1
•
F1
•
F88
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F1
•
F1
•
F88
F1
•
•
•
W
F88
•
VAR
VA
0.01
0.01%
Wh
Wh
VAR h
VAR h
F88
F88
F2
F1
F88
F88
F88
F88
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F97
•
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 17/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.2
General remote parameters
3.2.1
Page 1H - General remote parameters (part 1)
Address
(hex)
0100
0101
0102
0103
0104
0105
0106–0108
0109
010A
Group
Remote setting
OP Parameters
General
Options
010B
010C
010D
010E
010F
0110
0111
0112–0113
CB monitoring
measurements
0114–0115
0116–0117
0118
0119
011A
011B
011C
011D
011E
011F
0120
0121
0122
0123
0124–0125
0126
0127
0128 –0129
012A
012B
012C
012D
Digital input
Ratios CT
Ratios VT
Primary phase
VT
Secondary
phase VT
Scheme VTs
connection
Primary earth VT
Secondary earth
VT
Description
Address of front port:
MODBUS
Language
Password, ASCII digits 1 and 2
Password, ASCII digits 3 and 4
Rated frequency
Phase and Earth labels
Free (not used)
Default display
User reference, ASCII digits 1
and 2
User reference, ASCII digits 3
and 4
Number of the default records to
be displayed
Inputs mode configuration (edge
or level), part 2,
Maintenance Mode
Digital inputs signal type: AC–
DC
CB operations number
CB operating time
Switched square Amps phase A
summation
Switched square Amps phase B
summation
Switched square Amps phase C
summation
Circuit breaker closing time
Digital input 1, part 2
Digital input 2, part 2
Digital input 3, part 2
Digital input 4, part 2
Digital input 5, part 2
Digital input 6, part 2
Digital input 7, part 2
Primary phase CT
Secondary phase CT
Primary earth CT
Secondary earth CT
57 - 130V operating range
220 - 480V operating range
57 - 130V operating range
220 - 480V operating range
VTs connection mode:
3Vpn, 2Vpp+Vr, 2Vpn+Vr
57 - 130V operating range
220 - 480V operating range
57 - 130V operating range
220 - 480V operating range
Maintenance mode relays
command
Obsolete
Number Instantaneous record to
be displayed
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
Def.
value
P125
P126
P127
Communications
1 - 255
0 – 14
32 – 127
32 – 127
50 – 60
0-1–2
1
F1
1
•
•
•
1
1
10
1
F63
F10
F10
F1
F85
AA
AA
50
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0–4
32 - 127
1
1
F26
F10
4
AL
•
•
•
•
•
32 - 127
1
F10
ST
•
•
•
1- 25
1
F31A
25
•
•
•
1
F54A
•
•
•
1
1
F24
F51
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
F1
•
•
10ms
An
F1
F18
•
•
•
•
An
F18
•
•
An
F18
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0-1
0-1
1
1 - 9999
1 or 5
1 - 9999
1 or 5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hz
10ms
A
A
A
A
F1
F15A
F15A
F15A
F15A
F15A
F15A
F15A
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
1
•
•
•
•
1
1
1
1
10 –100000
220 – 480
570 -1300
2200
0, 2, 4
1
1
1
1
10V
V
100mV
100mV
F18A
F18A
F1
F1
F7
100V
220V
100V
220V
0
10 -100000
220 – 480
570 -1300
2200
1
1
1
1
10V
V
100mV
100mV
F18A
F18A
F1
F1
F13
100V
220V
100V
220V
1- 5
1
F31B
5
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 18/130
012E
Group
Communication
012F
0130
0131
0132
0133
0134
0135
0136
0137
0138
0139
013A
013B
013C
013D
013E
013F
0140
0141
0142
0143
Configuration
group
LED
Digital inputs
configuration
0144
0145
0146
0147
0148
0149
014A
014B
014C
014D
014E
Digital input
014F
Protection 49
Output relays
Protection 37
Alarm
0150
0151
Circuit breaker
0152
0153
0154
0155
0156
0157
0158
0159
015A
015B
015C
015D
Output Relays
015E
015F
Protection 67
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Description
Communication speed (Baud):
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3
Date format
Communication speed (Baud)
Parity
Address of rear port:
DNP3 / IEC 60870-5-103
Stop bits
COM available info
Active group
Led 5, part 1
Led 6, part 1
Led 7, part 1
Led 8, part 1
Led 5, part 2
Led 6, part 2
Led 7, part 2
Led 8, part 2
Led 5, part 3
Led 6, part 3
Led 7, part 3
Led 8, part 3
Inputs mode configuration (edge
or level)
Inputs sense configuration (High
or Low)
Digital input 6, part 1
Digital input 7, part 1
Digital input 1, part 1
Digital input 2, part 1
Digital input 3, part 1
Digital input 4, part 1
Digital input 5, part 1
Output relays: Broken conductor
Output relays: Breaker failure
Output relays: tI<
Self reset start protection alarms
enable / disable
Output relays: Thermal overload
alarm(θ alarm)
Output relays: Thermal overload
tripping (θ trip)
Output relays: Switch on to fault,
circuit breaker tripping &
SOTF/TOR
Output relays: tAUX 1
Output relays: tAUX 2
Output relays: circuit breakers
alarms
Output relays: Trip circuit
supervision
Fail safe and inversion relays
Conf. Block relay on I> start
Conf. Block relay on Ie> start
Output relays: tIA>
Output relays: tIB>
Output relays: tIC>
RL1-RL8: configuration and latch
Output relays: Trip output relay
RL1 on RLx
Output relays: tI>
Output relays: tI>>
Values
range
0-1
0-5
0-1
0-7
0-2
1- 59999 / 1255
0-1
0 - 15
1-8
1-2
0-1
0-1
0-1
Step
Unit
Format
Def.
value
P125
P126
P127
Address
(hex)
Communications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F47
0
•
•
•
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
F15
F15
F15
F15
F15
F15
F15
F14
F14
F14
F24
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
F14
0
•
•
1
F14
0
•
•
1
F14A
0
•
•
1
1
1
F14
F14
F14
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
F14
0
•
•
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
F56
F24
F24
F14
F14
F14
F27
F14
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
1
F14
F14
0
0
•
•
•
•
1
F53
1
1
1
1
F52
F4
F5
F1
1
4
0
6
0
1
1
1
1
F29
F30
F55
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
F19
F19
F19
F19
F19A
F19A
F19A
F19A
F19B
F19B
F19B
F19B
F54
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 19/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Address
(hex)
0160
0161
0162
0163
0164
0165
0166
0167
0168
0169
016A
016B
Group
Protection 67n
Protection 67
Protection 67n
Recloser 79
016C
Tripping
016D
016E
016F
0170
Breaker Failure
Blocking Logic
0171
0172
0173
0174
0175
0176
0177
0178
0179
017A
017B
017C
017D
Broken
Conductor
Cold Load PU
Breaker failure
Selectivity
Disturbance
017E
017F
0180
0181
0182
0183
CB monitoring
0184
0185
0186
0187
0188
0189
018A
018B
018C
018D
018E
018F
0190
0191
0192
0193
0194
Blocking logic
Tripping
Description
Output relays: tI>>>
Output relays: tIe>
Output relays: tIe>>
Output relays: tIe>>>
Output relays: I>
Output relays: I>>
Output relays: I>>>
Output relays: Ie>
Output relays: Ie>>
Output relays: Ie>>>
Output relays: recloser running
Output relays: definitive tripping
& Recloser int. locked (conf.)
Conf. tripping on relay RL1,
part 1
Current Threshold
Blocking logic 1, part 1
Blocking logic 2, part 1
Brkn. Cond. operating mode
Brkn. Cond. trip delay time
Brkn. Cond. limit
Operating mode
Cold load start thresholds
Percentage of desensitization
Desensitising timer
Breaker Failure operating mode
Breaker failure delay time
Digital selectivity 1
Digital selectivity 2
tSel1
tSel2
Pre-trigger time
Do not use: not available for
compatibility reasons
Config. Disturbance start
CB open operating mode
CB open time thereshold
Operations number
CB opening operations number
threshold.
CB switched Amps sum
CB switched Amps sum
threshold
Amps or square Amps
Closing time threshold
Auxiliary timer 1
Auxiliary timer 2
Max & average (current +
voltage) time window selection
CB open pulse duration
CB close pulse duration
CB close operating mode
CB supervision operating mode
Trip circuit time
Blocking logic 1, part 2
Blocking logic 2, part 2
Conf. tripping on relay RL1,
part 2
Auxiliary timer 3
Auxiliary timer 4
Values
range
2 -100
0-1
0 - 14400
20 - 100
0-1
20 - 800
1 - 36000
0-1
0 - 1000
0 - 15000
0 - 15000
5 rec: 1 to 29
4 rec: 1 to 29
3 rec: 1 to 49
2 rec: 1 to 69
1 rec: 1 to 89
Unit
Step
Format
Def.
value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14D
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
F6
1
P125
P126
P127
Communications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
1
1
1
1/100 In
F1
F8
F8
F24
2
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
F1
F1
F24
F33
F1
F1
F24
F1
F40
F40
F1
F1
F1
1
100
0
0
100
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
F32
F24
F1
F24
F1
0
0
5
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
10E6 An
F24
F1
0
•
•
•
•
10ms
10ms
10ms
mn
F1
F1
F1
F1
F42
1
5
0
0
5
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F1
F1
F24
F24
F1
F8A
F8A
F6A
10
10
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F1
F1
0
0
•
•
•
•
0-1
0-1
5 - 100
0-1
0 - 50000
1
1
5
1
1
0-1
1
1-2
5 - 100
0 - 20000
0 - 20000
5 – 10 – 15 –
30 - 60
10 - 500
10 - 500
0-1
0-1
10 - 1000
1
5
1
1
VT
A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0 - 20000
0 - 20000
1
1
%
100ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
100ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
•
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 20/130
0195-019C
019D
019E
019F
01A0
01A1
01A2
01A3
01A4
01A5
01A6
01A7
01A8
01A9
01AA
01AB
01AC
01AD
01AE
01AF
01B0
01B1
01B2
01B3
01B4
01B5
01B6
01B7-01DE
01DF
01E0
01E1
01E2
01E3
01E4
01E5
01E6
01E7
01E8
01E9
01EA
01EB
01EC
01ED
01EE
01EF
01F0
01F1
01F2
01F3
01F4
01F5
01F6
Group
Protection 67n
Protection 32n
Protection 59
Protection 59N
Protection 67
Protection 27
Protection 46
Boolean
Equations
LED
01F7
01F8
01F9
01FA
01FB
51V function
V2> value
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Description
Do not use (Courier description)
Output relays: Ie> reverse
Output relays: Ie>> reverse
Output relays: Ie>>> reverse
Output relays: Pe/Iecos>
Output relays: tPe/Iecos>
Output relays: Pe/Iecos>>
Output relays: tPe/Iecos>>
Output relays: U>
Output relays: tU>
Output relays: U>>
Output relays: tU>>
Output relays: Ue>>>>
Output relays: tUe>>>>
Output relays: I> reverse
Output relays: I>> reverse
Output relays: I>>> reverse
Output relays: U<
Output relays: tU<
Output relays: U<<
Output relays: tU<<
Output relays: I2>
Output relays: tI2>
Output relays: I2>>
Output relays: tI2>>
Output relays: I2>>>
Output relays: tI2>>>
Obsolete (Ex AND Logic Equa)
Tripping equation A time
Reset equation A time
Output relays: tEqu. A
Tripping equation B time
Time reset equation B time
Output relays: tEqu. B
Tripping equation C time
Reset equation C time
Output relays: tEqu. C
Tripping equation D time
Reset equation D time
Output relays: tEqu. D
Output relays: tAUX 3 & tAUX 4
Output relays: Control Trip &
Control Close
Output relays: I<
Output relays: Group 2 active
Led 5, part 4
Led 6, part 4
Led 7, part 4
Led 8, part 4
Obsolete
Obsolete
Self-reset LEDs on fault
Temporal opening for Rolling
Subperiod
Number of Subperiods
considered
Switch onto Fault (SOTF)
SOTF time
51V configuration
57 – 130V operating range
220 – 480V operating range
Values
range
Step
Unit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Format
Def.
value
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
P125
P126
P127
Address
(hex)
Communications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0 - 60000
1
10ms
F1
0
•
•
0 - 60000
1
10ms
0 - 60000
0 - 60000
1
1
10ms
10ms
0 - 60000
0 - 60000
1
1
10ms
10ms
0 - 60000
0 - 60000
1
1
10ms
10ms
1
1
F1
F14
F1
F1
F14
F1
F1
F14
F1
F1
F14
F14B
F14C
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
1
1
1
1
F14
F14
F19C
F19C
F19C
F19C
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F24
F1
1
1
•
•
•
•
F1
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
100mV
F1
1
100
0
130
0
480
0
•
•
100mV
F58
F1
F59
F1
0-1
1 - 60
1
1
1 – 24
1
0 – 32771
0 – 500
0–3
30 -2000
1
1
1
1
200 -7200
5
mn
ms
•
•
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 21/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Address
(hex)
Description
Values
range
Step
Unit
Format
01FD
01FE
VTS function
VTS configuration
VTS conv. directional to non-dir.
0–7
0-FFFFh
1
1
01FF
U< blocking
frequency
protection
57 – 130V operating range
50 -1300
1
100mV
F1
130
0
480
0
0
FFF
h
50
220 – 480V operating range
200 - 4800
5
100mV
F1
200
3.2.2
V2>> value
0601
0602
0603
0604
0605
0606-060B
060C
060D
060E
060F
0610
0611
0612
0613
0614
0615
0616
0617
0618
0619
061A
061B
061C
061D
061E
061F
0620
0621
0622
0623
0624
0625
0626
0627
0628
0629
062A
062B
062C
062D
062E
Group
Configuration
Disturbance
Cold Load PU
LED
Output relays
Tripping
062F
0630
0631
30 -2000
1
100mV
F1
220 – 480V operating range
200 -7200
5
100mV
F1
F60
F65
•
•
•
•
•
•
Page 6H - General remote parameters (part 2)
Address
(hex)
0600
57 – 130V operating range
Def.
value
Automation
Description
Values
range
Step
Alarms inhibition part1
Phase rotation
Alarms inhibition part 2
Alarms inhibition part 3
Disturbances record number
Cold load start mode
Reserved
Led 5, part 5
Led 6, part 5
Led 7, part 5
Led 8, part 5
Output relays: P>
Output relays: tP>
Output relays: P>>
Output relays: tP>>
Output relays: f1
Output relays: tf1
Output relays: f2
Output relays: tf2
Output relays: f3
Output relays: tf3
Output relays: f4
Output relays: tf4
Output relays: f5
Output relays: tf5
Output relays: f6
Output relays: tf6
Output relays: F out
Output relays: Input 1
Output relays: Input 2
Output relays: Input 3
Output relays: Input 4
Output relays: Input 5
Output relays: Input 6
Output relays: Input 7
Output relays: VTS
Output relays: Input 8
Output relays: Input 9
Output relays: Input A
Output relays: Input B
Output relays: Input C
Conf. tripping on relay RL1,
part 4
Conf. tripping on relay RL1,
part 4
Inrush validation
Inrush blocking selection
Unit
Format
F64
Def.
value
P125
P126
P127
01FC
Group
P125
P126
P127
Communications
0-1
1
F66
1–5
0–3
1
1
F1
F87
1FF
C
0
FF
0
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
F19D
F19D
F19D
F19D
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F6C
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
F6D
0
•
•
1
F24
F83
0
0
0-1
F64A
F64B
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 22/130
0632
0633
0634
0635
0636
0637
0638-063F
0640
0641
0642
0643
0644
0645
0646
0647
0648
0649
064A
064B
064C-064D
064E-064F
0650-0641
0652
0653
0654
0655
0656
0657
0658
0659
065A
065B
065C
065D
065E
065F
0660
0661
0662
0663
Group
Tripping
Boolean Equations
LED
Communication
port 2 (Option)
0664
0665
0666
0667
IEC870-5-103
port 1
0668
0669
066A
066B
066C
066D
IEC870-5-103
IEC870-5-103 port
2
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Description
Inrush harmonic 2 ratio
tInrush_reset
Blocking logic 1, part 3
Blocking logic 2, part 3
Conf. tripping on relay RL1,
part 3
VTS delay time
Reserved
Tripping equation E time
Reset equation E time
Output relays: tEqu. E
Tripping equation F time
Time reset equation F time
Output relays: tEqu. F
Tripping equation G time
Reset equation G time
Output relays: tEqu. G
Tripping equation H time
Reset equation H time
Output relays: tEqu. H
Auxiliary timer 5
Auxiliary timer 6
Auxiliary timer 7
Reserved
Auxiliary timer 8 (Option)
Auxiliary timer 9 (Option)
Auxiliary timer A (Option)
Auxiliary timer B (Option)
Auxiliary timer C (Option)
Led 5, part 6
Led 6, part 6
Led 7, part 6
Led 8, part 6
Led 5, part 7
Led 6, part 7
Led 7, part 7
Led 8, part 7
Communication speed (Baud)
Parity
Stop bits
Address of rear port 2:
MODBUS
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3
IEC870-5-103 only: source
setting group for copy
IEC870-5-103 only: destination
setting group for copy
IEC870-5-103 only:
Spontaneous event enabling
IEC870-5-103:
Measurements enabling
IEC870-5-103 Measurements/
Commands Blocking
IEC870-5-103 GI selection port 1
IEC870-5-103 command &
setting write timeout
IEC870-5-103 only, port 2:
Spontaneous event enabling
IEC870-5-103, port 2:
Measurements enabling
IEC870-5-103, port 2:
Measurements/ Commands
Blocking
Values
range
100-350
0 - 200
Step
Unit
1
10
1
1
1
0.1%
10ms
0 10000
1
0 - 60000
0 - 60000
Format
Def.
value
P125
P126
P127
Address
(hex)
Communications
F1
F1
F8B
F8B
F6B
200
0
0
0
0
10ms
F1
20
1
1
10ms
10ms
0 - 60000
0 - 60000
1
1
10ms
10ms
0 - 60000
0 - 60000
1
1
10ms
10ms
0 - 60000
0 - 60000
1
1
10ms
10ms
0 – 2 000 000
0 – 2 000 000
0 – 2 000 000
1
1
1
10ms
10ms
10ms
F1
F1
F14
F1
F1
F14
F1
F1
F14
F1
F1
F14
F18A
F18A
F18A
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 - 20000
0 - 20000
0 - 20000
0 - 20000
0 - 20000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F19E
F19E
F19E
F19E
F19F
F19F
F19F
F19F
F4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
1
1
F5
F29
F1
0
0
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
F55
1
•
1-8
1
F55
2
•
0-3
1
F74
3
•
•
•
0-7
1
F75
3
•
•
•
0-3
1
F78
0
•
•
•
0-1
1 - 300
1
1
F93
F1
0
2
•
•
0-3
1
F74
3
•
0-7
1
F75
3
•
0-3
1
F78
0
•
0-7
0-2
0-1
1 - 255
1 – 254
1 - 59999
1-8
100 ms
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 23/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Address
(hex)
Group
066E
066F
0670
0671
0672
0673
0674
0675-0678
0679
067A
067B
067C
067D
067E-0681
0682
0683
0684
0685
0686
0687
0688
0689
068A
068B
068C
068D
068E
068F
0690
0691
0692
0693
0694
0695
0696
0697
0698
0699
069A
069B
069C
069D
069E
069F
06A0
06A1
06A2
06A3
06A4
06A5
06A6
06A7
06A8
06A9
06AA
06AB
06AC
06AD
Digital input
(Option)
IRIG-B Synchronisation (Option)
Output relays
Output relays
(Optional board)
Output relays
Digital inputs
Automation/SOTF
Connexion
LED
CTS supervision
Output relays
General Config
Description
IEC870-5-103, port 2: GI
selection
Reserved
Digital input 8, part 1
Values
range
0-1
Unit
Format
Def.
value
1
F93
0
1
F15
0
•
•
•
1
1
1
1
F15
F15
F15
F15
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
1
1
1
1
F15A
F15A
F15A
F15A
F15A
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
F76
0
•
•
•
1
F77
0
1
1
1
1
F14
F14
F14
F14
0
0
0
0
0 – 127
0-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0-1
20 - 100
10 - 90
8 - 100
1
1
1
1
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F15B
F15B
F15B
F15B
F15B
F15B
F15B
F15B
F15B
F15B
F15B
F15B
F82
F84
F19G
F19G
F19G
F19G
F24
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1B
0
0
0
0
0
0
20
50
8
5 - 220
20 - 880
0 – 10000
1
5
1
1
1
1
1
F1
F1
F1
F14
F1
F1
F24
50
200
20
0
5
4
0
Digital input 9, part 1
Digital input A, part 1
Digital input B, part 1
Digital input C, part 1
Reserved
Digital input 8, part 2
Digital input 9, part 2
Digital input A, part 2
Digital input B, part 2
Digital input C, part 2
Reserved
Date-and-time synchronisation
mode
IRIG-B mode (Signal type)
Reserve
Output relays: tAux 5
Output relays: tAux 6
Output relays: tAux 7
Output relays: tAux 8
Output relays: tAux 9
Output relays: tAux A
Output relays: tAux B
Output relays: tAux C
Output relays: Ie_d>
Output relays: tIe_d>
reverse
Output relays: [79] Ext.Lock.
Output relays: 51V
Digital input 1, part 3
Digital input 2, part 3
Digital input 3, part 3
Digital input 4, part 3
Digital input 5, part 3
Digital input 6, part 3
Digital input 7, part 3
Digital input 8, part 3
Digital input 9, part 3
Digital input A, part 3
Digital input B, part 3
Digital input C, part 3
SOTF source activation
Vt protection
Led 5, part 8
Led 6, part 8
Led 7, part 8
Led 8, part 8
CTS operating mode
I2 / I1 threshold (futur use)
Idiff threshold (futur use)
Ie threshold
Ve threshold
range A
range B
t CTS timer
Output relays: CTS
df/dt cycles number
df/dt validations number
>20 Hz/s df/dt block inhibition
Step
P125
P126
P127
Communications
1 – 200
1 – 12
0-1
%
%
1/100 In
0.1V
0.1V
0.01 s
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 24/130
Group
06AE
06AF
06B0
06B1
06B2
06B3
06B4
06B5
06B6
06B7
06B8
06B9
06BA
06BB
06BC
Blocking Logic
06BD
Group changing
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Description
Blocking logic 1, part 4
Blocking logic 2, part 4
Output relays: df/dt1
Output relays: df/dt2
Output relays: df/dt3
Output relays: df/dt4
Output relays: df/dt5
Output relays: df/dt6
Primary CTm
Secondary CTm
CTm1 connection
CTm2 connection
Quadrant power
Not used
Inputs mode configuration
(edge or level), part 3,
Group number for digital input
inactive
Group number for digital input
active
Target group
Output relays: P<
Output relays: tP<
Output relays: P<<
Output relays: tP<<
Output relays: Q>
Output relays: tQ>
Output relays: Q>>
Output relays: tQ>>
Output relays: Q<
Output relays: tQ<
Output relays: Q<<
Output relays: tQ<<
Output relays: Comm. order 1
Output relays: Comm. order 2
Output relays: Comm. order 3
Output relays: Comm. order 4
T comm. Order 1
T comm. Order 2
T comm. Order 3
T comm. Order 4
Iam Td demand
06D5
06D6
Output relays
Ratios CTm
CTm connection
Power
06BE
06BF
06C0
06C1
06C2
06C3
06C4
06C5
06C6
06C7
06C8
06C9
06CA
06CB
06CC
06CD
06CE
06CF
06D0
06D1
06D2
06D3
06D4
06D7
06D8
06D9
06DA
06DB
06DC
06DD
06DE-06FF
Output relays
Com order tempo
Td demand
Output relays
Values
range
Unit
Step
Def.
value
F8C
F8C
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F1
F1
F90
F90
F91
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
4
1
F54B
0
1-8
1
F55
1
•
1-8
1
F55
2
•
0-8
10 – 60000
10 – 60000
10 – 60000
10 – 60000
0 – 20000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
5
5
5
1
F55
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ibm Td demand
0 – 20000
1
F96
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
10
10
10
100
00
0
Icm Td demand
0 – 20000
1
F96
0
•
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
F14
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Output relays: Ie_d>>
Output relays: tIe_d>>
Output relays: V2>
Output relays:tV2>
Output relays: V2>>
Output relays:tV2>>
Output relays: tIe_R_d>>
Not used
1 - 9999
1 or 5
0-3
0-3
1–4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Format
P125
P126
P127
Address
(hex)
Communications
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A
A
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
1/100%
IN
1/100%
IN
1/100%
IN
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2
2
2
2
2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 25/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.3
Protection groups parameters
3.3.1
Page 2H - Setting group 1 remote parameters
Address
(hex)
0200
Group
Description
Values
range
Step
Unit
I> operating mode
0-1-2
1
10 - 2500
1
1/100 In
0 - 15000
25 - 1500
100 -10000
1
1
5
10ms
0.001
0.001
0206
0207
0208
0209
020A
020B
020C
020D
I> value
Trip time type I>
DMT Trip time I>
TMS: I> trip time multiplier
K: I>trip time multiplier for RI
type curve
Reset time type: DMT / IDMT
DMT reset time I>
RTMS: I> reset time multiplier
Torque (RCA) angle I^U>
Trip angle I^U>
Interlock I>
I>> operating mode
I>> value
0-1
0 - 10000
25 - 3200
0 - 359
10 -170
0-1
0–1-2
1
1
1
1
1
10ms
0.001
Degree
Deg
1
1
1/100 In
020E
020F
0210
0211
0212
Trip time I>>
Torque (RCA) angle I^U>>
Trip angle I^U>>
I>>> operating mode
I>>> value
0213
0214
0215
0216
0201
0202
0203
0204
0205
0217
Protection
50/51/67
Protection
50n/51n/67n
Ie> value
0218
0219
021A
021B
021C
021D
021E
021F
0220
0221
0222
0223
0224
0225
Ue> value
Ie>> value
50 - 4000
10 - 4000
0 - 15000
0 - 359
10 - 170
0-1-2-3
Format
Def.
value
F24A
0
•
•
F1
F3
F1
F1
F1
100
0
0
25
100
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F34
F1
F1
F1
F1
F24
F24A
F1
0
100
25
0
50
0
0
400
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F1
F1
F1
F24A
F1
0
0
50
0
400
0
10ms
Degree
Degree
Trip time I>>>
Torque (RCA) angle I^U>>>
Trip angle I^U>>>
Ie> operating mode
50 - 4000
10 - 4000
0 - 15000
0 - 359
10 - 170
0-1-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10ms
Degree
Degree
F1
F1
F1
F24A
0
0
50
0
0.002 - 1 Ien operating range
2 - 1000
1
F1
0.01 - 1 Ien operating range
10 -1000
5
100
0
10
0.1 - 25 Ien operating range
10- 2500
1
1/1000
Ien
1/1000
Ien
1/100
Ien
1/100 In
F1
F1
Trip time type Ie>
DMT Trip time Ie>
TMS: Ie> trip time multiplier
K: Ie> trip time multiplier for RI
type curve
Ie> reset time type DMT or IDMT
DMT Reset time Ie>
RTMS: Ie> reset time multiplier
57 - 130V operating range
220 - 480V operating range
0 - 15000
25 - 1500
100 -10000
1
1
5
10ms
0.001
0.001
F3
F1
F1
F1
0-1
0 - 10000
25 - 3200
10 - 2600
40 - 7200
1
1
1
1
5
10ms
0.001
1/10 V
1/10 V
F34
F1
F1
F1
F1
Torque (RCA) angle Ie^Ue>
Trip angle Ie^Ue>
Interlock Ie>
Ie>> operating mode
0.002-1 Ien operating range
0 - 359
10 - 170
0-1
0-1-2
2 - 1000
1
1
1
1
1
0.01 - 8 Ien operating range
10 - 8000
5
0.1 - 40 Ien operating range
50 - 4000
1
Trip time Ie>>
0 - 15000
1
Degree
Degree
1/1000
Ien
1/1000
Ien
1/100
Ien
10ms
P125
P126
P127
Also mapped at page 24H.
250
0
0
0
25
100
F1
100
25
10
720
0
0
50
0
0
100
0
800
0
100
F1
0
F1
F1
F24
F24A
F1
F1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 26/130
0226
0227
0228
0229
022A
022B
022C
022D
022E
022F
0230
0231
0232
0233
0234
0235
0236
0237
0238
0239
023A
Group
Ue>> value
Ie>>> value
Ue>>> value
Protection 49
Protection 37
Protection 46
023B
023C
023D
023E
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Description
Values
range
Step
10 - 2600
1
100mV
F1
220 - 480V operating range
40 - 9600
5
100mV
F1
Torque (RCA) angle Ie^Ue>>
Trip angle Ie^Ue>>
Ie>>> operating mode
0.002-1 Ien operating range
0 - 359
10 -170
0-1-2-3
2 - 1000
1
1
1
1
Degree
Degree
0.01 - 8 Ien operating range
10 - 8000
5
0.1 - 40 Ien operating range
50 - 4000
1
Trip time Ie>>>
57 - 130V operating range
0 -15000
10 - 2600
1
1
1/1000
Ien
1/1000
Ien
1/100
Ien
10ms
100mV
F1
F1
F24A
F1
220 - 480V operating range
40 - 9600
5
100mV
F1
Torque (RCA) angle (Ie^Ue)>>>
Trip angle (Ie^Ue)>>>
θ alarm operating mode
θ alarm value
Iθ> (nominal current thermal)
K
Thermal overload time constant
θ trip operating mode
θ trip value
I< operating mode
I< value
Trip time I<
I2> operating mode
I2> value
0 - 359
10 - 170
0-1
50 - 200
10 - 320
100 - 150
1 - 200
0-1
50 - 200
0-1
10 - 100
0 - 15000
0-1
10 -2500
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Degree
Degree
1/100 In
F1
F1
F24
F1
F1
F1
F1
F24
F1
F24
F1
F1
F24
F1
10ms
0.001
1/1000
F3
F1
F1
F1
0 -15000
25 - 1500
100-10000
1
1
5
023F
0240
0241
0242
0243
0-1
4 - 10000
25 -3200
0-1
50 -4000
1
1
1
1
1
0244
0245
0246
Trip time I2>>
I2>>> operating mode
I2>>> value
0 - 15000
0-1
50 - 4000
1
1
1
Trip time I2>>>
U< operating mode
57 - 130V operating range
220 - 480V operating range
Trip time U<
U<< operating mode
57 - 130V operating range
220 -. 480V
Trip time U<< operating range
Pe> trip angle
32n operating mode: Pe or
IeCos
Pe> operating mode
0.002-1 Ien / 57-130V
operating range
0.002-1 Ien / 220 - 480V
operating range
0 - 15000
0-1-2
20 -1300
100 - 4800
0 - 60000
0-1-2
20 -1300
100 - 4800
0 - 60000
0 - 359
0-1
1
1
1
5
1
1
1
5
1
1
1
0-1
20 - 2000
1
2
100 - 8000
10
Protection 27
U< value
024A
024B
024C
U<< value
024D
024E
024F
0250
0251
Protection 32n
Pe> value
Format
57 - 130V operating range
Trip time type I2>
DMT trip time I2>
TMS: I2> trip time multiplier
K: I2> trip time multiplier for RI
type curve
I2 reset time type: DMT or IDMT
DMT reset time I2>
RTMS: I2> reset time multiplier
I2>> operating mode
I2>> value
0247
0248
0249
Unit
%
1/100
1/100 In
Mn
%
1/100 In
10ms
10ms
0.001
1/100 In
10ms
1/100 In
10ms
100mV
100mV
10ms
100mV
100mV
10ms
10mW.
Ien
10mW.
Ien
F1
F1
F1
F1
F34
F1
F1
F24
F1
F1
F24
F1
F1
F24B
F1
F1
F1
F24B
F1
F1
F1
F1
F24C
F24
F1
F1
Def.
value
260
0
960
0
0
10
0
100
0
800
0
100
0
260
0
960
0
0
10
0
90
10
105
1
0
100
0
10
0
0
250
0
0
0
25
100
0
4
25
0
400
0
0
0
400
0
0
0
50
200
0
0
50
200
0
0
0
0
200
0
800
0
P125
P126
P127
Address
(hex)
Communications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 27/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Address
(hex)
Group
0252
0253
0254
0255
0256
0257
0258
0259
025A
025B
025C
025D
Pe>> value
IeCos> value
025E
025F
0260
0261
0262
0263
0264
0265
0266
0267
0268
0269
026A
026B
026C
IeCos>> value
Protection 59
U> value
U>> value
Description
Values
range
Format
Step
Unit
100 - 16000
10
400 - 64000
50
10 - 800
1
10mW.
Ien
10mW.
Ien
W.Ien
F1
40 - 3200
5
W.Ien
F1
0 - 15000
25 - 1500
100 -10000
1
1
5
10ms
0.001
0.001
0-1
1
0 - 10000
25 - 3200
0 -1
20 - 2000
1
1
1
2
100 - 8000
10
100 - 16000
10
400 - 64000
50
10 - 800
1
10mW.
Ien
10mW.
Ien
10mW.
Ien
10mW.
Ien
W.Ien
40 - 3200
5
W.Ien
F1
0 - 15000
0 –1
2 - 1000
1
1
1
10ms
F1
F24
F1
0.01 - 1 Ien operating range
10- 8000
5
0.1 - 25 Ien operating range
10 - 2500
1
0 -15000
25 - 1500
100 -10000
1
1
5
0.01 - 8 Ien / 57 - 130V
operating range
0.01 - 8 Ien / 220-480V
operating range
0.1 - 40 Ien / 57 - 130V
operating range
0.1 - 40 Ien / 220-480V
operating range
Trip time type Pe>
Trip time Pe>
TMS: Pe> trip time multiplier
K: Pe> trip time multiplier for RI
type curve
Reset time type Pe>: DMT or
IDMT
DMT reset time Pe>
RTMS reset time Pe>
Pe>> operating mode
0.002-1 Ien / 57-130V
operating range
0.002-1 Ien / 220 - 480V
operating range
0.01 - 8 Ien / 57 - 130V
operating range
0.01 - 8 Ien / 220-480V
operating range
0.1 - 40 Ien / 57 - 130V
operating range
0.1 - 40 Ien / 220-480V
operating range
Trip time Pe>>
IeCos> operating mode
0.002 - 1 Ien operating range
Trip time type IeCos>
DMT Trip time IeCos>
TMS: IeCos> trip time multiplier
K: IeCos> trip time multiplier for
RI type curve
Reset time type IeCos>: DMT or
IDMT
DMT Reset time IeCos>
RTMS reset time IeCos>
IeCos>> mode
0.002 - 1 Ien operating range
0-1
1
0 - 10000
25 - 3200
0–1
2 - 1000
1
1
1
1
0.01 - 1 Ien operating range
10 - 8000
5
0.1 - 25 Ien operating range
50 - 4000
1
Trip time IeCos>>
U> operating mode
57 – 130V operating range
0 - 15000
0-1-2
20 -2600
220 – 480V operating range
10ms
1/1000
1/1000
Ien
1/1000
Ien
1/100
Ien
10ms
0.001
0.001
10ms
0.001
F1
Def.
value
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F3
F1
F1
F1
320
0
0
0
25
100
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F34
0
•
•
•
F1
F1
F24
F1
4
25
0
200
0
800
0
160
00
640
00
800
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F3
F1
F1
F1
320
0
0
0
100
0
800
0
250
0
0
0
25
100
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F34
0
•
•
•
F1
F1
F24
F1
4
25
0
100
0
800
0
400
0
1
0
260
0
720
0
0
0
260
0
960
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
1
1
1
1/1000
Ien
1/1000
Ien
1/100
Ien
10ms
100mV
F1
F24B
F1
100 -9600
5
100mV
F1
Trip time U>
U>> operating mode
57 – 130V operating range
0 - 60000
0 –1-2
20 - 2600
1
1
1
10ms
100mV
F1
F24B
F1
220 – 480V operating range
100 - 9600
1
100mV
F1
F1
F1
160
00
640
00
800
P125
P126
P127
Communications
•
•
•
•
•
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 28/130
026D
026E
026F
Group
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Description
Values
range
Step
Unit
Trip time U>>
Ue>>>> operating mode
57 – 130V operating range
0 - 60000
0-1
10 - 2600
1
1
1
100mV
F1
F24
F1
220 – 480V operating range
50 - 9600
5
100mV
F1
Trip time Ue>>>>
Recloser info
CB position active
Supervision window
External blocking input
tAux1 cycle configuration
0 - 60000
0-1
0-1
1 -.60000
0-1
0 - 2222
1
1
1
1
1
1
10ms
F1
F24
F24
F18A
F24
F57
0277
tAux2 cycle configuration
0 - 2222
1
0278
0279
027A–027B
027C–027D
027E–027F
0280–0281
0282
0283
0284
0285
0286
0287
Dead time 1
Dead time 2
Dead time 3
Dead time 4
Reclaim time
Inhibit time
Recloser cycles for phase faults
Recloser cycles for earth faults
DMT Reset time Ie>>
DMT Reset time Ie>>>
DMT Reset time IeCos>>
DMT Reset time Pe>>
1 - 30000
1 - 30000
1 - 60000
1 - 60000
2 - 60000
2 - 60000
0-4
0-4
0 - 10000
0 - 10000
0 - 10000
0 - 10000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0270
0271
0272
0273–0274
0275
0276
0288
0289
028A
028B
028C
028D
028E
028F
0290
Protection 59n
Ue>>>> value
Recloser 79
Reset time 67N
Reset time 32N
Protection
50/51/67
Protection
50n/51n/67n
10ms
Format
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
Trip time type I>>
TMS: I>> trip time multiplier
K: I>> trip time multiplier for RI
type curve
Reset time type: DMT / IDMT
DMT reset time I>>
RTMS: I>> reset time multiplier
Trip time type Ie>>
F1
F1
F18A
F18A
F18A
F18A
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
260
0
960
0
0
0
0
1
1
111
1
111
1
500
500
500
500
500
500
4
4
4
4
4
4
F3
0
•
•
F57
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
10ms
Def.
value
P125
P126
P127
Address
(hex)
Communications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
25 - 1500
100 -10000
1
5
0.001
0.001
F1
F1
25
100
•
•
•
•
0-1
0 - 10000
25 - 3200
1
1
1
10ms
0.001
F34
F1
F1
F3
0
4
25
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
TMS: Ie>> trip time multiplier
K: Ie>> trip time multiplier for
type curve
Reset time type: DMT / IDMT
RTMS: Ie>> reset time multiplier
I> cycle configuration
25 - 1500
100 - 10000
1
5
0.001
0.001
F1
F1
25
100
•
•
•
•
•
•
0-1
25 - 3200
0 - 2222
1
1
1
0.001
F34
F1
F57
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0294
I>> cycle configuration
0 - 2222
1
F57
•
•
0295
I>>> cycle configuration
0 - 2222
1
F57
•
•
0296
Ie> cycle configuration
0 - 2222
1
F57
•
•
0297
Ie>> cycle configuration
0 - 2222
1
F57
•
•
0298
Ie>>> cycle configuration
0 - 2222
1
F57
•
•
0299
Pe/IeCos> cycle configuration
0 - 2222
1
F57
•
•
029A
Pe/IeCos>> cycle configurat.
0 - 2222
1
F57
•
•
Reserved
P> operating mode
57-130V operating range
0
25
111
1
111
1
111
1
111
1
111
1
111
1
111
1
111
1
0-1
1-10000
1
1
W.In
F24
F1
220V-480V operating range
4-40000
1
W.In
F1
0291
0292
0293
029B-029F
02A0
02A1
Recloser 79
Active Power
P> value
0
100
00
400
00
•
•
•
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 29/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Address
(hex)
02A2
02A3
02A4
02A5
02A6
02A7
02A8
02A9
02AA
02AB
02AC
02AD
02AE
02AF
02B0
02B1
02B2
02B3
02B4
02B5
02B6
02B7
02B8
02B9
02BA
02BB
02BC
02BD
02BE
02BF
02C0
02C1
02C2
02C3
02C4
02C5
02C6
Group
Description
Values
range
Step
W.In
1
W.In
F1
0-15000
0-359
0-1
1-10000
4-40000
0-15000
0-359
0-2
4510-5490
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10mS
Degree
10mHz
F1
F1
F24
F1
F1
F1
F1
F68
F1
60 Hz nominal frequency
5510-6490
1
10mHz
F1
Trip time tf1
f2 operating mode
50 Hz nominal frequency
0-60000
0-2
4510-5490
1
1
1
10ms
10mHz
F1
F68
F1
60 Hz nominal frequency
5510-6490
1
10mHz
F1
Trip time tf2
f3 operating mode
50 Hz nominal frequency
0-60000
0-2
4510-5490
1
1
1
10ms
10mHz
F1
F68
F1
60 Hz nominal frequency
5510-6490
1
10mHz
F1
0-60000
0-2
4510-5490
5510-6490
1
1
1
10ms
f4 value
Trip time tf3
f4 operating mode
50 Hz nominal frequency
F1
F68
F1
f5 value
Trip time tf4
f5 operating mode
50 Hz nominal frequency
0-60000
0-2
4510-5490
1
1
1
10mHz
F1
F68
F1
60 Hz nominal frequency
5510-6490
1
10mHz
F1
Trip time tf5
f6 operating mode
50 Hz nominal frequency
0-60000
0-2
4510-5490
1
1
1
10ms
10mHz
F1
F68
F1
60 Hz nominal frequency
5510-6490
1
10mHz
F1
Trip time tf6
Inhibition of I< on 52A
Inhibition of I< on U<
57 - 130V operating range
220 - 480V operating range
Q> operating mode
57-130V operating range
0-60000
0-1
0-1
20-1300
100-4800
0-1
1-10000
1
1
1
1
5
1
1
10ms
W x In
F1
F24
F24
F1
F1
F24
F1
220V-480V operating range
4-40000
1
W x In
F1
P>> value
P<< triggering
level
Frequency
f1 value
f2 value
f3 value
f6 value
Protection 37
U< value of
inhibition I<
Reactive Power
Q> triggering
level
0-15000
0-359
0-1
1-10000
4-40000
0-15000
0-359
0-1
1-10000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
220V-480V operating range
4-40000
Trip time tP>>
P>> directional angle
P<< operating mode
57-130V operating range
220V-480V operating range
Trip time tP<<
P<< directional angle
f1 operating mode
50 Hz nominal frequency
10ms
Degree
Format
F1
F1
F24
F1
F1
F1
F1
F24
F1
P< triggering
level
Trip time tP>
P> directional angle
P< operating mode
57-130V operating range
220V-480V operating range
Trip time tP<
P< directional angle
P>> operating mode
57-130V operating range
Unit
W x In
W x In
10ms
Degree
W x In
W x In
10ms
Degree
10mHz
10ms
100mV
100mV
Def.
value
0
0
0
1
5
0
0
0
100
00
400
00
0
0
0
1
5
0
0
0
500
0
600
0
0
0
500
0
600
0
0
0
500
0
600
0
0
0
500
0
ou
600
0
0
0
500
0
600
0
0
0
500
0
600
0
0
0
0
50
200
0
100
00
400
00
P125
P126
P127
Communications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 30/130
02C7
02C8
02C9
02CA
02CB
02CC
02CD
02CE
02CF
02D0
02D1
02D2
02D3
02D4
02D5
02D6
02D7
02D8-02D9
02DA-02DB
02DC-02DD
02DE-02DF
02E0-02E1
02E2-02E3
02E4
02E5
Group
Q< triggering
level
Q>> triggering
level
Q<< triggering
level
Recloser 79
[50N/51N] Ie_d>
02E6
02E7
02E8
02E9
02EA
02EB
02EC
02ED
02EE
02EF
02F0
02F1
02F2
02F3
02F4
02F5
02F6
02F7
02F8
02F9
02FA
02FB
02FC
02FD
02FE – 02FF
Ue>>>> value
for Ie_d>
Protection 27
[81R] FREQ.
CHANGE OF
RATE
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Description
Values
range
Step
Trip time tQ>
Q> directional angle
Q< operating mode
57-130V operating range
220V-480V operating range
Trip time tQ<
Q< directional angle
Q>> operating mode
57-130V operating range
0-15000
0-359
0-1
1-10000
4-40000
0-15000
0-359
0-1
1-10000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
220V-480V operating range
4-40000
Trip time tQ>>
Q>> directional angle
Q<< operating mode
57-130V operating range
220V-480V operating range
Trip time tQ<<
Q<< directional angle
Trips nb / time block ?
Openings number
Time period
Dead Time tI>
Dead Time tI>>
Dead Time tI>>>
Dead Time tIE>
Dead Time tIE>>
Dead Time tIE>>>
Ie_d> operating mode
Ie_d> Threshold
Unit
Def.
value
W x In
F1
F1
F24
F1
F1
F1
F1
F24
F1
1
W x In
F1
0-15000
0-359
0-1
1-10000
4-40000
0-15000
0-359
0-1
2-100
10 - 1440
5 - 60000
5 - 60000
5 - 60000
5 - 60000
5 - 60000
5 - 60000
0-1-2
10 to 4000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10mS
Degree
F1
F1
F24
F1
F1
F1
F1
F24
F1
F1
F18A
F18A
F18A
F18A
F18A
F18A
F24A
F1
0
0
0
1
5
0
0
0
100
00
400
00
0
0
0
1
5
0
0
0
10
60
5
5
5
5
5
5
0
100
0 to 15000
25 to 1500
100 to 10000
1
1
5
F3
F1
F1
F1
0
0
25
100
•
•
•
•
0–1
1
F34
0
•
0 to 10000
25 - 3200
1
1
1/100 s
0.001
F1
F1
0
25
•
•
10 - 2600
1
1/10 V
F1
•
220 - 480V operating range
40 - 7200
5
1/10 V
F1
Torque (RCA) angle Ie_d>^Ue
Trip angle Ie_d>^Ue
Not used
U< and U<< Inhibition by 52a
df/dt1 activation
0 - 359
10 - 170
1
1
Degree
Degree
F1
F1
100
0
400
0
0
10
•
•
0–3
0-1
1
1
F86
F24
0
0
•
•
-100 - +100
0-1
-100 - +100
0-1
-100 - +100
0-1
-100 - +100
0-1
-100 - +100
0-1
-100 - +100
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
F2
F24
F2
F24
F2
F24
F2
F24
F2
F24
F2
+10
0
+10
0
+10
0
+10
0
+10
0
+10
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ie_d> Trip time type
DMT Trip time tIe_d>
TMS: Ie_d> trip time multiplier
K: Ie_d> trip time multiplier for RI
curve
Ie_d> reset time type DMT or
IDMT
DMT Reset time Ie_d>
RTMS: Ie_d> reset time
multiplier
57 - 130V operating range
df/dt1 threshold
df/dt2 activation
df/dt2 threshold
df/dt3 activation
df/dt3 threshold
df/dt4 activation
df/dt4 threshold
df/dt5 activation
df/dt5 threshold
df/dt6 activation
df/dt6 threshold
Unused
10ms
Degree
Format
P125
P126
P127
Address
(hex)
Communications
W x In
W x In
10ms
Degree
W x In
W x In
10ms
Degree
minutes
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
1/100
IEn
1/100 s
1/1000
1/1000
0.1Hz/s
0.1Hz/s
0.1Hz/s
0.1Hz/s
0.1Hz/s
0.1Hz/s
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 31/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Address
(hex)
2500
Page 25H - Setting group 1 remote parameters
Group
Description
Values
range
Step
Unit
Ie_d>> operating mode
0-1-2
1
Ie_d>> Threshold
10 to 4000
1
1/100
IEn
0 to 15000
25 to 1500
100 to 10000
1
1
5
1/100 s
1/1000
1/1000
0–1
1
0 to 10000
25 - 3200
1
1
10 - 2600
220 - 480V operating range
2512
2513-257E
257F
Torque (RCA) angle Ie_d>>^Ue
Trip angle Ie_d>>^Ue
Not used
V2> operating mode
V2> Threshold (57-130V)
V2> Threshold (220-480V)
DMT Trip time V2>
V2>> operating mode
V2>> Threshold (57-130V)
V2>> Threshold (220-480V)
DMT Trip time V2>>
Not used
Last available substained setting
3.3.3
Page 3H - Setting group 2 remote parameters
[50N/51N]
Ie_d>>
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
Ue value for
Ie_d>>
250A
250B
250C
250D
250E
[47] V2>
250F
2510
2511
[47] V2>>
Ie_d>> Trip time type
DMT Trip time tIe_d>>
TMS: Ie_d>> trip time multiplier
K: Ie_d>> trip time multiplier for
RI curve
Ie_d>> reset time type DMT or
IDMT
DMT Reset time Ie_d>>
RTMS: Ie_d>> reset time
multiplier
57 - 130V operating range
Format
Def.
value
P125
P126
P127
3.3.2
F24A
0
•
F1
100
•
F3
F1
F1
F1
0
0
25
100
•
•
•
•
F34
0
•
1/100 s
0.001
F1
F1
0
25
•
•
1
1/10 V
F1
•
40 - 7200
5
1/10 V
F1
0 - 359
10 - 170
1
1
Degree
Degree
F1
F1
100
0
400
0
0
10
0-1
1-130V
4-480V
0 to 10000
0-1
1-130V
4-480V
0 to 10000
1
10
40
1
1
10
40
1
F24
F1
F1
F1
F24
F1
F1
F1
0
150
600
500
0
150
600
500
1/10V
1/10V
1/100s
1/10V
1/10V
1/100s
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The addresses 03XX (page 03) are equivalent to addresses 26XX (page 26).
Same structure as group1 (page 2H): replace addresses 02XX by 03XX.
3.3.4
Page 24H: Setting group 1 remote parameters
Page 24XX: Same structure with addresses beginning by 24XX (page 24) instead of 02XX.
Page 25H: Continuation of "Setting group 1 remote parameters" (refer to the previous table).
3.3.5
Page 26H - Setting group 2 remote parameters
Page 26XX: Same structure as group 1 (page 02H), with addresses beginning by 26XX instead of
02XX.
Page 27H: Continuation of "Setting group 2 remote parameters"
Page 27XX: Same structure as group 1 (page 25H). Replace addresses 25XX by 27XX.
3.3.6
Page 28H - Setting group 3 remote parameters
Page 28H: Same structure as group 1 (page 02H). Replace addresses 02XX by 28XX.
Page 29H: continuation of "Setting group 3 remote parameters"
Page 29XX: Same structure as group 1 (page 25H). Replace addresses 25XX by 29XX.
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 32/130
3.3.7
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Page 2AH - Setting group 4 remote parameters
Page 2AH: Same structure as group 1 (page 02H). Replace addresses 02XX by 2AXX.
Page 2BH: continuation of "Setting group 4 remote parameters"
Page 2BXX: Same structure as group 1 (page 25H). Replace addresses 25XX by 2BXX.
3.3.8
Page 2CH - Setting group 5 remote parameters
Page 2CH: Same structure as group 1 (page 02H). Replace addresses 02XX by 2CXX.
Page 2DH: continuation of "Setting group 5 remote parameters"
Page 2DXX: Same structure as group 1 (page 25H). Replace addresses 25XX by 2DXX.
3.3.9
Page 2EH - Setting group 6 remote parameters
Page 2EXX: Same structure as group 1 (page 02H). Replace addresses 02XX by 2EXX.
Page 2FH: Setting group 6 remote parameters continued
Page 2FXX: Same structure as group 1 (page 25H). Replace addresses 25XX by 2FXX.
3.3.10
Page 30H - Setting group 7 remote parameters
Page 30H: Same structure as group 1 (page 02H). Replace addresses 02XX by 30XX.
Page 31H: Setting group 7 remote parameters continued
Page 31XX: Same structure as group 1 (page 25H). Replace addresses 25XX by 31XX.
3.3.11
Page 32H - Setting group 8 remote parameters
Page 32H: Same structure as group 1(page 02H). Replace addresses 02XX by 32XX.
Page 33H: Setting group 8 remote parameters continued
Page 33XX: Same structure as group 1 (page 25H). Replace addresses 25XX by 33XX.
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 33/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.4
Boolean equations
3.4.1
Page 5H - Boolean equations parameters
Address
(hex)
0500
0501
0502
0503
0504
0505
0506
0507
0508
0509
050A
050B
050C
050D
050E
050F
0510
0511
0512
0513
0514
0515
0516
0517
0518
0519
051A
051B
051C
051D
051E
051F
0520
0521
0522
0523
0524
0525
0526
0527
0528
0529
052A
052B
052C
052D
052E
052F
0530
0531
0532
0533
0534
0535
0536
0537
0538
0539
053A
Group
Bool Equations
Description
Equation A.00 operator
Equation A.00 operand
Equation A.01 operator
Equation A.01 operand
Equation A.02 operator
Equation A.02 operand
Equation A.03 operator
Equation A.03 operand
Equation A.04 operator
Equation A.04 operand
Equation A.05 operator
Equation A.05 operand
Equation A.06 operator
Equation A.06 operand
Equation A.07 operator
Equation A.07 operand
Equation A.08 operator
Equation A.08 operand
Equation A.09 operator
Equation A.09 operand
Equation A.10 operator
Equation A.10 operand
Equation A.11 operator
Equation A.11 operand
Equation A.12 operator
Equation A.12 operand
Equation A.13 operator
Equation A.13 operand
Equation A.14 operator
Equation A.14 operand
Equation A.15 operator
Equation A.15 operand
Equation B.00 operator
Equation B.00 operand
Equation B.01 operator
Equation B.01 operand
Equation B.02 operator
Equation B.02 operand
Equation B.03 operator
Equation B.03 operand
Equation B.04 operator
Equation B.04 operand
Equation B.05 operator
Equation B.05 operand
Equation B.06 operator
Equation B.06 operand
Equation B.07 operator
Equation B.07 operand
Equation B.08 operator
Equation B.08 operand
Equation B.09 operator
Equation B.09 operand
Equation B.10 operator
Equation B.10 operand
Equation B.11 operator
Equation B.11 operand
Equation B.12 operator
Equation B.12 operand
Equation B.13 operator
Values
range
0-1
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-1
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Unit
For- Def.
mat Value
F70
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F70
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 34/130
Address
(hex)
053B
053C
053D
053E
053F
0540
0541
0542
0543
0544
0545
0546
0547
0548
0549
054A
054B
054C
054D
054E
054F
0550
0551
0552
0553
0554
0555
0556
0557
0558
0559
055A
055B
055C
055D
055E
055F
0560
0561
0562
0563
0564
0565
0566
0567
0568
0569
056A
056B
056C
056D
056E
056F
0570
0571
0572
0573
0574
0575
0576
0577
0578
0579
Group
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Description
Equation B.13 operand
Equation B.14 operator
Equation B.14 operand
Equation B.15 operator
Equation B.15 operand
Equation C.00 operator
Equation C.00 operand
Equation C.01 operator
Equation C.01 operand
Equation C.02 operator
Equation C.02 operand
Equation C.03 operator
Equation C.03 operand
Equation C.04 operator
Equation C.04 operand
Equation C.05 operator
Equation C.05 operand
Equation C.06 operator
Equation C.06 operand
Equation C.07 operator
Equation C.07 operand
Equation C.08 operator
Equation C.08 operand
Equation C.09 operator
Equation C.09 operand
Equation C.10 operator
Equation C.10 operand
Equation C.11 operator
Equation C.11 operand
Equation C.12 operator
Equation C.12 operand
Equation C.13 operator
Equation C.13 operand
Equation C.14 operator
Equation C.14 operand
Equation C.15 operator
Equation C.15 operand
Equation D.00 operator
Equation D.00 operand
Equation D.01 operator
Equation D.01 operand
Equation D.02 operator
Equation D.02 operand
Equation D.03 operator
Equation D.03 operand
Equation D.04 operator
Equation D.04 operand
Equation D.05 operator
Equation D.05 operand
Equation D.06 operator
Equation D.06 operand
Equation D.07 operator
Equation D.07 operand
Equation D.08 operator
Equation D.08 operand
Equation D.09 operator
Equation D.09 operand
Equation D.10 operator
Equation D.10 operand
Equation D.11 operator
Equation D.11 operand
Equation D.12 operator
Equation D.12 operand
Values
range
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-1
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-1
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Unit
For- Def.
mat Value
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F70
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F70
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 35/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Address
(hex)
057A
057B
057C
057D
057E
057F
0580
0581
0582
0583
0584
0585
0586
0587
0588
0589
058A
058B
058C
058D
058E
058F
0590
0591
0592
0593
0594
0595
0596
0597
0598
0599
059A
059B
059C
059D
059E
059F
05A0
05A1
05A2
05A3
05A4
05A5
05A6
05A7
05A8
05A9
05AA
05AB
05AC
05AD
05AE
05AF
05B0
05B1
05B2
05B3
05B4
05B5
05B6
05B7
05B8
Group
Description
Equation D.13 operator
Equation D.13 operand
Equation D.14 operator
Equation D.14 operand
Equation D.15 operator
Equation D.15 operand
Equation E.00 operator
Equation E.00 operand
Equation E.01 operator
Equation E.01 operand
Equation E.02 operator
Equation E.02 operand
Equation E.03 operator
Equation E.03 operand
Equation E.04 operator
Equation E.04 operand
Equation E.05 operator
Equation E.05 operand
Equation E.06 operator
Equation E.06 operand
Equation E.07 operator
Equation E.07 operand
Equation E.08 operator
Equation E.08 operand
Equation E.09 operator
Equation E.09 operand
Equation E.10 operator
Equation E.10 operand
Equation E.11 operator
Equation E.11 operand
Equation E.12 operator
Equation E.12 operand
Equation E.13 operator
Equation E.13 operand
Equation E.14 operator
Equation E.14 operand
Equation E.15 operator
Equation E.15 operand
Equation F.00 operator
Equation F.00 operand
Equation F.01 operator
Equation F.01 operand
Equation F.02 operator
Equation F.02 operand
Equation F.03 operator
Equation F.03 operand
Equation F.04 operator
Equation F.04 operand
Equation F.05 operator
Equation F.05 operand
Equation F.06 operator
Equation F.06 operand
Equation F.07 operator
Equation F.07 operand
Equation F.08 operator
Equation F.08 operand
Equation F.09 operator
Equation F.09 operand
Equation F.10 operator
Equation F.10 operand
Equation F.11 operator
Equation F.11 operand
Equation F.12 operator
Values
range
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-1
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-1
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Unit
For- Def.
mat Value
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F70
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F70
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 36/130
Address
(hex)
05B9
05BA
05BB
05BC
05BD
05BE
05BF
05C0
05C1
05C2
05C3
05C4
05C5
05C6
05C7
05C8
050C9
05CA
05CB
05CC
05CD
05CE
05CF
05D0
05D1
05D2
05D3
05D4
05D5
05D6
05D7
05D8
05D9
05DA
05DB
05DC
05DD
05DE
05DF
05E0
05E1
05E2
05E3
05E4
05E5
05E6
05E7
05E8
05E9
05EA
05EB
05EC
05ED
05EE
05EF
05F0
05F1
05F2
05F3
05F4
05F5
05F6
05F7
Group
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Description
Equation F.12 operand
Equation F.13 operator
Equation F.13 operand
Equation F.14 operator
Equation F.14 operand
Equation F.15 operator
Equation F.15 operand
Equation G.00 operator
Equation G.00 operand
Equation G.01 operator
Equation G.01 operand
Equation G.02 operator
Equation G.02 operand
Equation G.03 operator
Equation G.03 operand
Equation G.04 operator
Equation G.04 operand
Equation G.05 operator
Equation G.05 operand
Equation G.06 operator
Equation G.06 operand
Equation G.07 operator
Equation G.07 operand
Equation G.08 operator
Equation G.08 operand
Equation G.09 operator
Equation G.09 operand
Equation G.10 operator
Equation G.10 operand
Equation G.11 operator
Equation G.11 operand
Equation G.12 operator
Equation G.12 operand
Equation G.13 operator
Equation G.13 operand
Equation G.14 operator
Equation G.14 operand
Equation G.15 operator
Equation G.15 operand
Equation H.00 operator
Equation H.00 operand
Equation H.01 operator
Equation H.01 operand
Equation H.02 operator
Equation H.02 operand
Equation H.03 operator
Equation H.03 operand
Equation H.04 operator
Equation H.04 operand
Equation H.05 operator
Equation H.05 operand
Equation H.06 operator
Equation H.06 operand
Equation H.07 operator
Equation H.07 operand
Equation H.08 operator
Equation H.08 operand
Equation H.09 operator
Equation H.09 operand
Equation H.10 operator
Equation H.10 operand
Equation H.11 operator
Equation H.11 operand
Values
range
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-1
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-1
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Unit
For- Def.
mat Value
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F70
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F70
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 37/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Address
(hex)
05F8
05F9
05FA
05FB
05FC
05FD
05FE
05FF
Group
Description
Equation H.12 operator
Equation H.12 operand
Equation H.13 operator
Equation H.13 operand
Equation H.14 operator
Equation H.14 operand
Equation H.15 operator
Equation H.15 operand
Values
range
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
0-3
0 - 111
Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Unit
For- Def.
mat Value
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
F71
F72
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 38/130
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
3.5
Remote controls, device status & time synchronisation
3.5.1
Page 4H - Remote controls
Address
(hex)
0400
0401
0402
Group
Remote control
0403
0404
0405
3.5.2
Values
range
Remote control word 1
Calibration mode
Remote control word 2 (single
output command)
Remote control word 3
Remote control word 4
Keyboard remote control
Step
Unit
For- Def.
mat Value
0 -.65535
1
F9
0 --511
1
F39
0
0
0
0 – 65535
0 – 65535
Binary
1
1
1
F9A
F9B
F81
0
0
0
Page 7H - Device status
Address
(hex)
Group
0700
3.5.3
Description
Description
Values
range
Relays status
Step
1
Unit
-
For- Def.
mat Value
F23
0
Page 8H - Time synchronisation
Time synchronisation: access only in writing or reading 4 words (function 16 or 3).
The
time
synchronisation
format
is
based
on
8
bytes
(4
words).
Format (F52) is depending on address 012Fh.
Timer
With private date format:
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Milliseconds
With IEC 60870-5-103 format:
Year
Month
Day of the week
Day of the month
Season
Hour
Date validity
Minute
Milliseconds
Address
(hex)
0800
0801
0802
0803
Nb
bytes
2
1 (Hi)
1 (Lo)
1 (Hi)
1 (Lo)
2
Mask
(hex)
FFFF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FFFF
0800
1 (Hi)
1 (Lo)
7F
0801
1 (Hi)
1 (Lo)
1 (Lo)
1 (Hi)
1 (Hi)
1 (Lo)
1 (Lo)
2
0F
E0
1F
80
1F
80
3F
FFFF
0802
0803
Values range
1994-2093
1 -12
1 - 31
0 - 23
0 - 59
0 - 59999
94-99 (1994-1999)
0-93 (2000-2093)
1 - 12
1 – 7 (Monday – Sunday)
1 - 31
0 - 1 (summer – winter)
0 - 23
0 - 1 (valid – invalid)
0 - 59
0 - 59999
Unit
Years
Months
Days
Hours
Minutes
ms
Years
Months
Days
Days
Hours
Minutes
ms
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 39/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.6
Disturbance records
Pages 38h to 3Ch: mapping pages used to send a service request to select the record number to
be uploaded before uploading any disturbance record.
The answer following this request contain the following information:
1. Numbers of samples (pre and post time)
2. Phase CT ratio
3. Earth CT ratio
4. Internal phase and earth current ratios
5. Phase VT ratio
6. Earth VT ratio
7. Internal phase and earth voltage ratios
8. Number of the last disturbance mapping page
9. Number of samples in this last disturbance mapping page
Pages 9h to 21h: contain the disturbance data (25 pages)
A disturbance mapping page contains 250 words:
0900 to 09FAh:
250 disturbance data words
0A00 to 0AFAh:
250 disturbance data words
0B00 to 0BFAh:
…
2100 to 21FAh:
250 disturbance data words
250 disturbance data words
The disturbance data pages contain the sample of a single channel from a record.
Page 22h: contains the index of the disturbance
Page 38h to 3Ch: selection of the disturbance record and channel
Page 3Dh: a dedicated request allows to know the number of disturbance records stored.
3.6.1
Pages 9H to 21H - Disturbance record data
Disturbance record data (25 pages).
Writing access in words (function 03)
Each disturbance mapping page contains 250 words.
Addresses (hex)
Contents
0900h to 09FAh
250 disturbance data words
0A00h to 0AFAh
250 disturbance data words
0B00h to 0BFAh
250 disturbance data words
0C00h to 0CFAh
250 disturbance data words
0D00h to 0DFAh
250 disturbance data words
0E00h to 0DFAh
250 disturbance data words
0F00h to 0FFAh
250 disturbance data words
1000h to 10FAh
250 disturbance data words
1100h to 11FAh
250 disturbance data words
1200h to 12FAh
250 disturbance data words
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 40/130
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Addresses (hex)
Contents
1300h to 13FAh
250 disturbance data words
1400h to 14FAh
250 disturbance data words
1500h to 15FAh
250 disturbance data words
1600h to 16FAh
250 disturbance data words
1700h to 17FAh
250 disturbance data words
1800h to 18FAh
250 disturbance data words
1900h to 19FAh
250 disturbance data words
1A00h to 1AFAh
250 disturbance data words
1B00h to 1BFAh
250 disturbance data words
1C00h to 1CFAh
250 disturbance data words
1D00h to 1DFAh
250 disturbance data words
1E00h to 1EFAh
250 disturbance data words
1F00h to 1FFAh
250 disturbance data words
2000h to 20FAh
250 disturbance data words
2100h to 21FAh
250 disturbance data words
NOTE:
3.6.1.1
Communications
The disturbance data pages contain the values of one channel from one
given disturbance record.
Meaning of each channel value
See pages 38H to 3CH
−
IA, IB, IC, Ie channels.
The values are signed 16 bits words equivalent to the ADC value.
Phase current values calculation formula
Line phase current value (primary value) = value x phase primary CT ratio x √2 / 800
Earth current values calculation formula
The formula depends of nominal earth current:
0.1 to 40 Ien range
Line earth current value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio x √2 / 800
0.01 to 8 Ien range
Line earth current value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio x √2 / 3277
0.002 to 1 Ien range
Line earth current value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio x √2 / 32700
−
UA, UB, UC/Ue channels.
The values are signed 16 bits words equivalent to the ADC value.
Phase voltage values calculation formula
The formula depends of nominal phase voltage:
57 to 130 V range
Line phase voltage value (primary value) = value x (phase primary VT ratio / phase secondary VT
ratio) x √2 / 126
220 to 480 V range
Line phase voltage value (primary value) = value x √2 / 34
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 41/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Earth voltage values calculation formula
The formula depends of nominal earth voltage:
57 to 130 V range
Line earth voltage value (primary value) = value x (earth primary VT ratio / earth secondary VT
ratio) x √2 / 126
220 to 480 V range
Line earth voltage value (primary value) = value x √2 / 34
−
Frequency channel:
Time between two samples in microseconds
−
Logical channels:
Logical channel 1 (if MODBUS or DNP3 on rear ports)
Logic channel
Contents
Bit 0
Trip relay (RL1)
Bit 1
Output relay 2 (RL2)
Bit 2
Output relay 3 (RL3)
Bit 3
Output relay 4 (RL4)
Bit 4
Watch-Dog relay (RL0)
Bit 5
Output relay 5 (RL5)
Bit 6
Output relay 6 (RL6)
Bit 7
Output relay 7 (RL7)
Bit 8
Output relay 8 (RL8)
Bit 9
Logical input 1 (EL1)
Bit 10
Logical input 2 (EL2)
Bit 11
Logical input 3 (EL3)
Bit 12
Logical input 4 (EL4)
Bit 13
Logical input 5 (EL5)
Bit 14
Logical input 6 (EL6)
Bit 15
Logical input 7 (EL7)
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 42/130
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Logical channel 2 (if MODBUS or DNP3 on rear ports)
Logic channel
Contents
Bit 0
Logical input 8 (EL8)
Bit 1
Logical input 9 (EL9)
Bit 2
Logical input 10 (EL10)
Bit 3
Logical input 11 (EL11)
Bit 4
Logical input 12 (EL12)
Bit 5
Reserved (EL13)
Bit 6
Reserved (EL14)
Bit 7
Reserved (EL15)
Bit 8
Reserved (EL16)
Bit 9
Reserved
Bit 10
Reserved
Bit 11
Reserved
Bit 12
Reserved
Bit 13
Reserved
Bit 14
Reserved
Bit 15
Reserved
Logical channel 1 (if IEC870-5-103 on rear ports)
Logic channel
Contents
Bit 0
General Start
Bit 1
CB Failure
Bit 2
General Trip
Bit 3
trip tI>
Bit 4
trip tI>> or trip tI>>>
Bit 5
trip tIe>
Bit 6
trip tIe>> or trip tIe>>> or trip
tIe_d> or trip tIe_d>>
Bit 7
trip tPw>
Bit 8
trip tPw>>
Bit 9
Logical input 1 (EL1)
Bit 10
Logical input 2 (EL2)
Bit 11
Logical input 3 (EL3)
Bit 12
Logical input 4 (EL4)
Bit 13
Logical input 5 (EL5)
Bit 14
Logical input 6 (EL6)
Bit 15
Logical input 7 (EL7)
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 43/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Logical channel 2 (if IEC870-5-103 on rear ports)
Logic channel
3.6.2
Contents
Bit 0
Logical input 8 (EL8)
Bit 1
Logical input 9 (EL9)
Bit 2
Logical input 10 (EL10)
Bit 3
Logical input 11 (EL11)
Bit 4
Logical input 12 (EL12)
Bit 5
Reserved (EL13)
Bit 6
Reserved (EL14)
Bit 7
Trip relay (RL1)
Bit 8
Output relay 2 (RL2)
Bit 9
Output relay 3 (RL3)
Bit 10
Output relay 4 (RL4)
Bit 11
Watch-Dog relay (RL0)
Bit 12
Output relay 5 (RL5)
Bit 13
Output relay 6 (RL6)
Bit 14
Output relay 7 (RL7)
Bit 15
Output relay 8 (RL8)
Page 22H - Disturbance record index frame
Disturbance record index frame
Reading access in word (function 03)
Addresses (hex)
2200h
Contents
Disturbance data index frame
Disturbance record index frame
Word Nr.
Contents
1
Disturbance record number
2
Disturbance record finish date (second)
3
Disturbance record finish date (second)
4
Disturbance record finish date (millisecond)
5
Disturbance record finish date (millisecond)
6
Disturbance record starting condition:
1 Æ tripping command (RL1)
2 Æ instantaneous
3 Æ remote command
4 Æ logical input
7
Frequency at the post-time beginning
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 44/130
3.6.3
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Pages 38H to 3CH - Disturbance record & channel selection
Selection of the disturbance record and channel (19 words are uploaded for each address reading)
Access in word reading (function 03)
Address (hex)
3800h
3801h
3802h
3803h
3804h
3805h
3806h
3807h
3808h
3809h
3900h
3901h
3902h
3903h
3904h
3905h
3906h
3907h
3908h
3909h
3A00h
3A01h
3A02h
3A03h
3A04h
3A05h
3A06h
3A07h
3A08h
3A09h
3B00h
3B01h
3B02h
3B03h
3B04h
3B05h
3B06h
3B07h
3B08h
3B09h
3C00h
3C01h
3C02h
3C03h
3C04h
3C05h
3C06h
3C07h
3C08h
3C09h
Disturbance record number
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Channel
IA
IB
IC
Ie
UA
UB
UC / Ue
Frequency
Logical infos 1
Logical infos 2
IA
IB
IC
Ie
UA
UB
UC / Ue
Frequency
Logical infos 1
Logical infos 2
IA
IB
IC
Ie
UA
UB
UC / Ue
Frequency
Logical infos 1
Logical infos 2
IA
IB
IC
Ie
UA
UB
UC / Ue
Frequency
Logical infos 1
Logical infos 2
IA
IB
IC
Ie
UA
UB
UC / Ue
Frequency
Logical infos 1
Logical infos 2
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 45/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Word Nr.
n° 1
n° 2
n° 3
n° 4
n° 5
n° 6
n° 7
n° 8
n° 9
n° 10
n° 11
n° 12
n° 13
n° 14
n° 15
n° 16
n° 17
n° 18
n° 19
Contents
Number of samples included in the mapping
Sample number in pre-time
Sample number in post-time
Phase primary CT
Phase secondary CT
Earth primary CT
Earth secondary CT
Phase Internal CT ratio
Earth Internal CT ratio
Phase primary VT – byte low
Phase primary VT – byte high
Phase secondary VT
Earth primary VT – byte low
Earth primary VT – byte high
Earth secondary VT
Internal VT ratio – numerator: 100
Internal VT ratio – denominator: 12600 or 3400
Last mapping page
Last mapping page words number
Calculation formula for phase current values
Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. adress 3800h, 3801h or
3802h) * phase primary CT * (1 / internal phase ratio) * √2
Calculation formula for earth current values
Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. adress 3803h) * earth primary
CT ratio * (1 / internal earth ratio) * √2
Phase voltage values calculation formula
Line phase voltage value (primary value) = 100 * phase sampled value (e.g. address 3804h or
3805h or 3806h if Uc) * (phase primary VT / phase secondary VT) * (100 / internal VT
denominator) * √2
phase primary VT is expressed in 10 V:
phase primary VT = 4 means 40 V.
phase secondary VT is expressed in 0.1 V:
phase secondary VT = 4 means 0.4 V.
phase internal VT denominator = 12 600 in A range, and 3 400 in B range.
Earth voltage values calculation formula
Line earth voltage value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. address 3806h if Ue) * earth
primary VT ratio / earth internal VT ratio * √2
Earth voltage value (primary value) = 100 * earth sampled value (e.g. address 3806h) * (earth
primary VT / earth secondary VT) * (100 / internal VT denominator) * √2
earth primary VT is expressed in 10 V:
earth primary VT = 4 means 40 V.
earth secondary VT is expressed in 0.1 V:
earth secondary VT = 4 means 0.4 V.
earth internal VT denominator = 12 600 in A range, and 3 400 in B range.
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 46/130
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Page 3DH - Number of disturbance records available
3.6.4
Number of disturbance records available
Access in word reading (function 03)
Address (hex)
3D00h
Contains
Number of disturbance records available
Words description:
Word Nr.
1
2
3 to 6
7
8
9
10 to 13
14
15
16
17 to 20
IEC FORMAT: 17 to 20
21
22
23
24 to 27
28
29
30
31 to 36
35
36
Contents
Number of disturbance records available
Oldest disturbance record number (n)
Date is depending on address 012Fh format F52:
– With private date format: see format F97
– With IEC 60870-5-103 format: see format of time
synchronisation address 0800h
Disturbance record starting origin
1= trip relay (RL1)
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logical input
Acknowledge
Disturbance record previous number (n+1)
Date is depending on address 012Fh format F52:
– With private date format: see format F97
– With IEC 60870-5-103 format: see format of time
synchronisation address 0800h
Disturbance record starting origin
1= trip relay (RL1)
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logical input
Acknowledge
Disturbance record previous number (n+2)
Date is depending on address 012Fh format F52:
– With private date format: see format F97
– With IEC 60870-5-103 format: see format of time
synchronisation address 0800h
Previous disturbance record date (see format of time
synchronisation, address 0800h)
Disturbance record starting origin
1= trip relay (RL1)
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logical input
Acknowledge
Disturbance record previous number (n+3)
Date is depending on address 012Fh format F52:
– With private date format: see format F97
– With IEC 60870-5-103 format: see format of time
synchronisation address 0800h
Disturbance record starting origin
1= trip relay (RL1)
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logical input
Acknowledge
Disturbance record previous number (n+4)
Date is depending on address 012Fh format F52:
– With private date format: see format F97
– With IEC 60870-5-103 format: see format of time
synchronisation address 0800h
Disturbance record starting origin
1= trip relay (RL1)
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logical input
Acknowledge
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 47/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.7
Events records
To upload the events records two requests are allowed:
Page 35h: request to upload an event record without acknowledges of this event.
Used addresses:
3500h:
…
54Ah:
EVENT 1
EVENT 75
Page 36h: request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored event record.
Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or manual
acknowledgement
The mode depends of the state of bit 12 of remote control word (address 400 h).
If this bit is set, then the acknowledgement is manual else the acknowledgement is automatic.
In automatic mode, the reading of the event acknowledges the event.
In manual mode, it is necessary to write a specific command to acknowledge the oldest event
(set the bit 13 of control word addressed to 400 h)
3.7.1
Page 35H - Event record data
Event record data (9 words).
Reading access in word (function 03)
Addresses 3500h to 35F9h.
Word Nr.
Contents
1
Event meaning (see table below)
2
MODBUS address
3
MODBUS associated value
4
Reserved
5 to 8
Date is depending on address 012Fh format F52:
– With private date format: see format F97
– With IEC 60870-5-103 format: see format of time
synchronisation address 0800h
9
Acknowledgement:
0 = event non acknowledged
1 = event acknowledged
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 48/130
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Word n. 1 event meaning and relative codes
Code
(Dec)
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Event meaning
Control close (Remote, input, HMI)
Control trip (Remote, input, HMI)
Disturbance recording start
Trip output unlatch
Settings change
Remote thermal reset
Maintenance Mode
Control relay in maintenance mode
U<
U<<
Pe/Iecos>
Pe/Iecos>>
I<
I2>
I2>>
I2>>>
θ alarm (Thermal overload)
U>
U>>
Ue>>>>
I>
I>>
I>>>
Ie>
Ie>>
Ie>>>
U< trip
U<< trip
Pe/Iecos> trip
Pe/Iecos>> trip
I< trip
I2> trip
I2>> trip
I2>>> trip
θ trip (Thermal overload)
U> trip
U>> trip
Ue>>>> trip
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
I> trip
I>> trip
I>>> trip
Ie> trip
Ie>> trip
Ie>>> trip
Trip SOTF
X1 trip: t AUX3
X1 trip: t AUX4
Equ. Log. A trip
Equ. Log. B trip
Equ. Log. C trip
Equ. Log. D trip
Broken conductor
t AUX1 trip
t AUX2 trip
CB Flt or SF6 low (by logical input)
Working time
Format
MODBUS
address (Hex)
F9
F9
F73
F9
Address
F9
F9↑↓
F39↑↓
F17↑↓
F17↑↓
F16↑↓
F16↑↓
F17↑↓
F17↑↓
F17↑↓
F17↑↓
F37↑↓
F17↑↓
F17↑↓
F16↑↓
F17↑↓
F17↑↓
F17↑↓
F16↑↓
F16↑↓
F16↑↓
F17↑↓
F17↑↓
F16↑↓
F16↑↓
F17↑↓
F17↑↓
F17↑↓
F17↑↓
F37↑↓
F17↑↓
F17↑↓
F16↑↓
013
013
F17↑↓
F17↑↓
F17↑↓
F16↑↓
F16↑↓
F16↑↓
F38↑↓
F13
F13
F48↑↓
F48↑↓
F48↑↓
F48↑↓
F38↑↓
F38↑↓
F38↑↓
F20↑↓
F43↑↓
14
15
16
17
18
19
23
13
13
7F
7F
7F
7F
23
23
23
11
28
Alarm
013
0402
013
70
71
72
73
21
7C
7D
7E
020
76
77
7A
14
15
16
17
18
19
70
71
72
73
21
7C
7D
7E
20
76
77
7A
Auto
Inhib & Self
Inhib & Self
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Inhib
Inhib
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Inhib
Inhib
Inhib
Inhib
Yes
Inhib
Inhib
Auto
Yes
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 49/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Code
(Dec)
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
Event meaning
Operation numbers
Sum of switched square amps
Trip circuit supervision
Closing time
Reclose successful
Recloser final trip
Recloser settings error
Circuit Breaker Failure
Selective scheme logic 1 (by logical input)
Selective scheme logic 2 (by logical input)
Blocking logic 1 (by logical input)
Blocking logic 2 (by logical input)
Setting group change
O/O (by logical input)
F/O (by logical input)
All alarms acknowledgement (by logical
input)
Cold load pick up
Input logic state change
X1 trip: θ trip
X1 trip: t I>
X1 trip: t I>>
X1 trip: t I>>>
X1 trip: t Ie>
X1 trip: t Ie>>
X1 trip: t Ie>>>
X1 trip: t Pe/Iecos>
X1 trip: t Pe/Iecos>>
X1 trip: t U<
X1 trip: t U<<
X1 trip: t I<
X1 trip: t U>
X1 trip: t U>>
X1 trip: t I2>
X1 trip: t I2>>
X1 trip: t I2>>>
X1 trip: t Ue>>>>
X1 trip: Broken Conductor
X1 trip: Equ. Log. A
X1 trip: Equ. Log. B
X1 trip: Equ. Log. C
X1 trip: Equ. Log. D
X1 trip: t AUX1
X1 trip: t AUX2
Output relays command
Front panel single alarm acknowledge
All alarms front panel acknowledgement
Single alarm remote acknowledgement
All alarms remote acknowledgement
Major material alarm
Minor material alarm
Operating Latched Relays status
General “Start” protection (IEC 60870-5-103
protocol)
Recloser in “Service” (IEC 60870-5-103 only)
52a by recloser (IEC 60870-5-103 protocol)
Local parameter setting (password active) (IEC 60870-5-103 protocol)
Start timer Breaker failure (by logical input)
t AUX3 trip
t AUX4 trip
Manual Close (by logical input)
Format
MODBUS
address (Hex)
F43↑↓
F43↑↓
F43↑↓
F43↑↓
F43↑↓
F43↑↓
F43↑↓
F38↑↓
F20↑↓
F20↑↓
F20↑↓
F20↑↓
F55
F20↑↓
F20↑↓
F20↑↓
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
23
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
F20↑↓
F12↑↓
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F39↑↓
11
10
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
402
F45↑↓
F45↑↓
F27↑↓
F95↑↓
0F
0F
2E
0B
F43↑↓
Cycle
↑↓
28
F20A↑↓
F38↑↓
F38↑↓
F20A↑↓
0D
23
23
0D
Alarm
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto
Auto
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto
Inhib
Inhib
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 50/130
Code
(Dec)
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
Event meaning
X1 trip: SOTF
Local Mode (by logical input)
I>> Blocked
I>>> Blocked
VTS
V2>
V2>>
Recloser int locked
Recloser in progress
Synchronization
Inrush blocking
P>
P>>
P> trip
P>> trip
X1 trip: t P>
X1 trip: t P>>
f1
f2
f3
f4
f5
f6
tf1
tf2
tf3
tf4
tf5
tf6
F out
X1 trip: tf1 Trip
X1 trip: tf2 Trip
X1 trip: tf3 Trip
X1 trip: tf4 Trip
X1 trip: tf5 Trip
X1 trip: tf6 Trip
Equ. Log. E trip
Equ. Log. F trip
Equ. Log. G trip
Equ. Log. H trip
X1 trip: Equ. Log. E
X1 trip: Equ. Log. F
X1 trip: Equ. Log. G
X1 trip: Equ. Log. H
Comm. IEC-103: Signals&Measurements
blocking
Comm. IEC-103: Commands blocking
t AUX5 trip
t AUX6 trip
t AUX7 trip
t AUX8 trip
t AUX9 trip
t AUX A trip
t AUX B trip
t AUX C trip
X1 trip: t AUX5
X1 trip: t AUX6
X1 trip: t AUX7
X1 trip: t AUX8
X1 trip: t AUX9
X1 trip: t AUXA
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Format
MODBUS
address (Hex)
F38↑↓
F20A↑↓
F38A↑↓
F38A↑↓
F38A↑↓
F38A↑↓
F38A↑↓
F43↑↓
F43↑↓
F23
F38A↑↓
F38A↑↓
F38A↑↓
F38A↑↓
F38A↑↓
F13
F13
F67↑↓
F67↑↓
F67↑↓
F67↑↓
F67↑↓
F67↑↓
F67↑↓
F67↑↓
F67↑↓
F67↑↓
F67↑↓
F67↑↓
F69↑↓
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F48↑↓
F48↑↓
F48↑↓
F48↑↓
F13
F13
F13
F13
F78
23
0D
22
22
22
22
22
28
28
F78
F38B↑↓
F38B↑↓
F38B↑↓
F38B↑↓
F38B↑↓
F38B↑↓
F38B↑↓
F38B↑↓
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
0668
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
13
13
13
13
13
13
22
22
22
22
22
13
13
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
13
13
13
13
13
13
7F
7F
7F
7F
13
13
13
13
0668
Alarm
Auto
Auto
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes
Yes
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto
Inhib
Inhib
Inhib
Inhib
Inhib
Inhib
Inhib
Inhib
Inhib
Inhib
Inhib
Inhib
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 51/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Code
(Dec)
Event meaning
Format
MODBUS
address (Hex)
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
X1 trip: t AUXB
X1 trip: t AUXC
Start Earth (for IEC-103)
Ie_d>
Ie_d> trip
X1 trip: t Ie_d
Reset LEDs (by logical input)
CTS
df/dt1
df/dt2
df/dt3
df/dt4
df/dt5
df/dt6
X1 trip: df/dt1 Trip
X1 trip: df/dt2 Trip
X1 trip: df/dt3 Trip
X1 trip: df/dt4 Trip
X1 trip: df/dt5 Trip
X1 trip: df/dt6 Trip
Recloser ext locked
P<
P<<
P< trip
P<< trip
X1 trip: t P<
X1 trip: t P<<
Q>
Q>>
Q> trip
Q>> trip
X1 trip: t Q>
X1 trip: t Q>>
Q<
Q<<
Q< trip
Q<< trip
X1 trip: t Q<
X1 trip: t Q<<
Comm order 1
Comm order 2
Comm order 3
Comm order 4
“General Trip” (IEC 60870-5-103 protocol)
Trip Phase A (IEC 60870-5-103 protocol)
F13
F13
13
13
F16↑↓
F16↑↓
F13
F20B↑↓
F38A↑↓
F94↑↓
F94↑↓
F94↑↓
F94↑↓
F94↑↓
F94↑↓
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F13
F43↑↓
F38A↑↓
F38A↑↓
F38A↑↓
F38A↑↓
F13
F13
F38B↑↓
F38B↑↓
F38B↑↓
F38B↑↓
F13
F13
F38B↑↓
F38B↑↓
F38B↑↓
F38B↑↓
F13
F13
F9A
F9A
F9A
F9A
F95↑↓
F17↑↓
224
Trip Phase B (IEC 60870-5-103 protocol)
F17↑↓
225
Trip Phase C (IEC 60870-5-103 protocol)
F17↑↓
226
227
General reset command
Hardware alarm with main power supply
228
Hardware alarm with -3.3v power supply
229
Hardware alarm with 5.0v power supply
230
Hardware alarm with 3.3v power supply
231
Hardware alarm with 12v power supply
F9A
F2 unit
millivolt
F2 unit
millivolt
F2 unit
millivolt
F2 unit
millivolt
F2 unit
millivolt
1A
1A
13
BE
24
BF
BF
BF
BF
BF
BF
13
13
13
13
13
13
28
22
22
22
22
13
13
2F
2F
2F
2F
13
13
2F
2F
2F
2F
13
13
0403
0403
0403
0403
0B
14/15/16 or
76/77 or 70/71
14/15/16 or
76/77 or 70/71
14/15/16 or
76/77 or 70/71
0403
0x000F
Alarm
Yes & Self
Yes
Auto
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes
Yes
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes
Yes
Yes & Self
Yes & Self
Yes
Yes
No
0x00C2
No
0x00C2
No
0x00C2
No
0x00C2
No
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 52/130
Code
(Dec)
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Event meaning
232
Hardware alarm with 1.3v power supply
233
Hardware alarm with 0 v power supply
234
Hardware alarm with transformer 1 (offset
excess)
Hardware alarm with transformer 2 (offset
excess)
Hardware alarm with transformer 3 (offset
excess)
Hardware alarm with transformer 4 (offset
excess)
Hardware alarm with transformer 5 (offset
excess)
Hardware alarm with transformer 6 (offset
excess)
Hardware alarm with transformer 7 (offset
excess)
Hardware alarm with transformer 8 (offset
excess)
Hardware alarm with transformer 9 (offset
excess)
Ie_d>>
Ie_d>> trip
X1 trip: t Ie_d>>
V2>
V2> trip
X1 V2>
V2>>
V2>> trip
X1 V2>>
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
3.7.2
Format
F2 unit
millivolt
F2 unit
millivolt
F2 unit CAN
MODBUS
address (Hex)
0x00C2
No
0x00C2
No
0x00C3
No
F2 unit CAN
0x00C3
No
F2 unit CAN
0x00C3
No
F2 unit CAN
0x00C3
No
F2 unit CAN
0x00C3
No
F2 unit CAN
0x00C3
No
F2 unit CAN
0x00C3
No
F2 unit CAN
0x00C3
No
F2 unit CAN
0x00C3
No
F16↑↓
F16↑↓
F13
F16↑↓
F16↑↓
F13
F16↑↓
F16↑↓
F13
C4
C4
13
C8
C8
13
C9
C9
13
Yes & Self
Yes
Yes & Self
Yes
Yes & Self
Yes
NOTE:
The double arrow ↑↓ means the event is generated on event occurrence (↑)
and on event disappearance (↓).
On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to
« 1 ».
On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated format is
set to « 0 ».
ALARM:
a front alarm associated with the event appears. Details
Yes = alarm must be acknowledged manually (front panel or
communication)
Self = Self reset start protection alarms if trip occurs (setting address 014Eh)
Inhib = the alarm can be inhibited by setting (address 0600h and 0602h)
Auto = alarm is automatically acknowledged when the event disappears
Page 36H - Oldest event data
Oldest event data.
Reading access in word (function 03)
Address (hex)
3600h
Alarm
Contents
Oldest event data
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 53/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.8
Fault records
Page 37h: Page dedicated to upload fault record
Used addresses:
3700h:
FAULT 1
3701h:
…
3718h:
FAULT 2
FAULT 25
Page 3Eh: Request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored fault record.
Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or manual
acknowledgement
The mode depends of the state of bit 12 of remote control word (address 400 h).
If this bit is set, then the acknowledgement is manual else the acknowledgement is automatic.
In automatic mode, the reading of the fault acknowledges automatically the event.
In manual mode, it is necessary to write a specific command to acknowledge the oldest fault.
(set the bit 14 of control word addressed to 400 h)
3.8.1
Page 37H - Fault record
Fault record value data
Reading access in word (function 03)
Address (hex)
3700h
3701h
3702h
3718h
Contents
Fault value record n°1
Fault value record n°2
Fault value record n°3
Fault value record n°25
Each record is made up of 24 words:
Word Nr.
1
2 to 5
6
7
8
9
10 & 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Contents
Fault number
Event date is depending on address 012Fh format F52:
– With private date format: see format F97
– With IEC 60870-5-103 format: see format of time
synchronisation address 0800h
Fault date (season)
=
0 winter
=
1 summer
=
2 undefined
Active setting group during the fault (F55)
Phase origin ( F90 )
Fault recording starting origin (see format F61)
Fault value (10: LS word; 11: MS word) (1)
Phase A current value (nominal value)
Phase B current value (nominal value)
Phase C current value (nominal value)
Earth current value (nominal value)
Phase A voltage value (nominal value)
Phase B voltage value (nominal value)
Phase C voltage value (nominal value)
Earth voltage value (nominal value)
Angle between phase A current and phase B-C voltage values
Angle between phase B current and phase C-A voltage values
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 54/130
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Word Nr.
22
23
24
Contents
Angle between phase C current and phase A-B voltage values
Angle between earth current and earth voltage values
Acknowledgement:
0 = fault not acknowledged
1 = fault acknowledged
(1) Fault value is a CAN value; it has to be processed according to the below formulas to find
corresponding primary value.
Phase current values calculation formula
Line phase current value (primary value) = value x phase primary CT ratio / 800
Earth current values calculation formula
The formula depends of nominal earth current:
0.1 to 40 Ien range
Line earth current value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio / 800
0.01 to 8 Ien range
Line earth current value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio / 3277
0.002 to 1 Ien range
Line earth current value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio / 32700
Phase voltage values calculation formula
The formula depends of nominal phase voltage:
57 to 130 V range
Line phase voltage value (primary value) = value x (phase primary VT ratio / phase
secondary VT ratio) / 63
220 to 480 V range
Line phase voltage value (primary value) = value / 17
Earth voltage values calculation formula
The formula depends of nominal earth voltage:
57 to 130 V range
Line earth voltage value (primary value) = value x (earth primary VT ratio / earth secondary
VT ratio) / 63
220 to 480 V range
Line earth voltage value (primary value) = value / 17
Phase power values calculation formula
The formula depends of nominal phase voltage:
57 to 130 V range
Line phase power value (primary value) = value x (phase primary CT ratio x (phase primary
VT ratio / phase secondary VT ratio)) / (800 x 63)
220 to 480 V range
Line phase power value (primary value) = value x phase primary CT ratio / (800 x 17)
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 55/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Earth power values calculation formula
The formula depends of nominal earth current and voltage:
0.1 to 40 Ien range and 57 to 130 V range
Line earth power value (primary value) = value x (earth primary CT ratio x (phase primary VT
ratio / phase secondary VT ratio)) / (800 x 63)
0.1 to 40 Ien rangee and 220 to 480 V range
Line earth power value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio / (800 x 17)
0.01 to 8 Ien range and 57 to 130 V range
Line earth power value (primary value) = value x (earth primary CT ratio x (phase primary VT
ratio / phase secondary VT ratio)) / (3277 x 63)
0.01 to 8 Ien rangee and 220 to 480 V range
Line earth power value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio / (3277 x 17)
0.002 to 1 Ien range and 57 to 130 V range
Line earth power value (primary value) = value x (earth primary CT ratio x (phase primary VT
ratio / phase secondary VT ratio)) / (32700 x 63)
0.002 to 1 Ien rangee and 220 to 480 V range
Line earth power value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio / (32700 x 17)
Frequency values calculation formula
Frequency value = 1000000 / value
df/dt values calculation formula
df/dt value = value / 1000
3.8.2
Page 3EH - Oldest fault record
Oldest fault record value data.
Access in word reading (function 03).
Address (hex)
3E00h
Contents
Oldest fault record
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 56/130
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
3.9
Error counters
3.9.1
Page 5AH - Error counters
Error counters.
Access in word reading (function 03).
Address (hex)
5A00h
Contents
Error counters
Words description:
Word Nr.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Contents
Number of errors in page 1
Last error address of page 1
Number of errors in page 2
Last error address of page 2
Number of errors in page 3
Last error address of page 3
Number of errors in calibration page
Last error address of calibration page
Number of data checksum errors
Number of calibration checksum errors
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 57/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
4.
MAPPING FORMAT DESCRIPTION
Values are decimal except when differently specified.
CODE
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F6A
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: numerical data 0 to 65535
Signed integer: numerical data -32768 to 32767
Unsigned integer: trip / reset curves type (hex values)
000 : DMT
010 : IEC STI
011 : IEC SI
012 : IEC VI
013 : IEC EI
014 : IEC LTI
115: C02
116: IEEE MI
117: CO8
118: IEEE VI
119: IEEE EI
01A: RECT
020 : RI
Unsigned integer: UART Baud rate
0: 300
1: 600
2: 1200
3: 2400
4: 4800
5: 9600
6: 19200
7: 38400
Unsigned integer: Modbus and DNP3 parity bit
0: none
1: even
2: odd
Unsigned integer: conf. tripping on relay RL1, part 1
Bit 0: tI>
Bit 1: tI>>
Bit 2: tI>>>
Bit 3: tIe>
Bit 4: tIe>>
Bit 5: tIe>>>
Bit 6: tI<
Bit 7: θ trip
Bit 8: broken conductor trip
Bit 9: AUX 1 trip
Bit 10: AUX 2 trip
Bit 11: tI2>
Bit 12: tPe/Iecos>
Bit 13: tPe/Iecos>>
Bit 14: tUe>>>>
Bit 15: Control trip
Unsigned integer: conf. tripping on relay RL1, part 2
Bit 0: tU>
Bit 1: tU>>
Bit 2: tU<
Bit 3: tU<<
Bit 4: t Boolean equation A
Bit 5: t Boolean equation B
Bit 6: t Boolean equation C
Bit 7: t Boolean equation D
Bit 8: tI2>>
Bit 9: tI2>>>
Bit 10: tP>
Bit 11: tP>>
Bit 12: Reserved
Bit 13: AUX 3 trip
Bit 14: AUX 4 trip
Bit 15: SOTF/TOR
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 58/130
CODE
F6B
F6C
F6D
F7
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: conf. tripping on relay RL1, part 3
Bit 0: t Boolean equation E
Bit 1: t Boolean equation F
Bit 2: t Boolean equation G
Bit 3: t Boolean equation H
Bit 4: tF1
Bit 5: tF2
Bit 6: tF3
Bit 7: tF4
Bit 8: tF5
Bit 9: tF6
Bit 10: t Aux 5 ( P126-7 )
Bit 11: t Aux 6 ( P126-7 )
Bit 12: t Aux 7 ( P126-7 )
Bit 13: tIe_d>
Bit 14: tP<
Bit 15: tP<<
Unsigned integer: conf. tripping on relay RL1, part 4 ( P127 with logical inputs 8-12 )
Bit 0: t Aux 8
Bit 1: t Aux 9
Bit 2: t Aux A
Bit 3: t Aux B
Bit 4: t Aux C
Bit 5: df/dt1
Bit 6: df/dt2
Bit 7: df/dt3
Bit 8: df/dt4
Bit 9: df/dt5
Bit 10: df/dt6
Bit 11: tQ>
Bit 12: tQ>>
Bit 13: tQ<
Bit 14: tQ<<
Bit 15: Not used
Unsigned integer: conf. tripping on relay RL1, part 5
Bit 0: tV2>
Bit 1: tV2>>
Bit 2: not significant
Bit 3: not significant
Bit 4: not significant
Bit 5: not significant
Bit 6: not significant
Bit 7: not significant
Bit 8: not significant
Bit 9: not significant
Bit 10: not significant
Bit 11: not significant
Bit 12: not significant
Bit 13: not significant
Bit 14: not significant
Bit 15: not significant
Unsigned integer: U connection mode
0: 3Vpn
2: 2Vpp + Vr
4: 2Vpn + Vr
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 59/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
CODE
F8
F8A
F8B
F8C
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: blocking logic configuration, part 1
Bit 0: tI>+ tI>REV
Bit 1: tI>> + tI>>REV
Bit 2: tI>>> + tI>>>REV
Bit 3: tIe> + tIe>REV
Bit 4: tIe>> + tIe>>REV
Bit 5: tIe>>> + tIe>>>REV
Bit 6: tI<
Bit 7: θ trip
Bit 8: broken conductor trip
Bit 9: aux1 trip
Bit 10: aux2 trip
Bit 11: tI2>
Bit 12: tPe/Iecos>
Bit 13: tPe/Iecos>>
Bit 14: tUe>>>>
Bit 15: tIe_d> + tIe_d>REV
Unsigned integer: blocking logic configuration, part 2
Bit 0: tU>
Bit 1: tU>>
Bit 2: tU<
Bit 3: tU<<
Bit 4: aux3 trip
Bit 5: aux4 trip
Bit 6: t P<
Bit 7: t P<<
Bit 8: tI2>>
Bit 9: tI2>>>
Bit 10: tP >
Bit 11: tP >>
Bit 12: t Q>
Bit 13: t Q>>
Bit 14: t Q<
Bit 15: t Q<<
Unsigned integer: blocking logic configuration, part 3
Bit 0: tF1
Bit 1: tF2
Bit 2: tF3
Bit 3: tF4
Bit 4: tF5
Bit 5: tF6
Bit 6: Reserve
Bit 7: tIe_d> + tIe_d>REV
Bit 8: tAux 5
Bit 9: tAux 6
Bit 10: tAux 7
Bit 11: tAux 8
Bit 12: tAux 9
Bit 13: tAux A
Bit 14: tAux B
Bit 15: tAux C
Unsigned integer: blocking logic configuration, part 4
Bit 0: df/dt1
Bit 1: df/dt2
Bit 2: df/dt3
Bit 3: df/dt4
Bit 4: df/dt5
Bit 5: df/dt6
Bit 6: tV2>
Bit 7: tV2>>
Bit 8: reserve
Bit 9: reserve
Bit 10: reserve
Bit 11: reserve
Bit 12: reserve
Bit 13: reserve
Bit 14: reserve
Bit 15: reserve
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 60/130
CODE
F9
F9A
F9B
F10
F11
F12
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: remote control 1
Bit 0: relays de-latching
Bit 1: 1st alarm acknowledge
Bit 2: all alarms acknowledge
Bit 3: remote and HMI tripping (CONTROL trip)
Bit 4: remote and HMI closing (CONTROL close)
Bit 5: settings group change
Bit 6: thermal state reset
Bit 7: max & average values reset
Bit 8: disturbance record remote and HMI start
Bit 9: maintenance mode
Bit 10: recloser counter reset
Bit 11: recloser reset
Bit 12: manual acknowledge mode
Bit 13: oldest event acknowledge
Bit 14: oldest fault acknowledge
Bit 15: Reset of stats reset alarm.
Previously F50 format
Unsigned integer: remote control word number 3
Bit 0: flag sync. harmonic earth current
Bit 1: LEDs reset
Bit 2: energy reset
Bit 3: oldest disturbance acknowledge
Bit 4: rolling average values reset
Bit 5: rolling max sub-period values reset
Bit 6: Communication Order 1
Bit 7: Communication Order 2
Bit 8: Communication Order 3
Bit 9: Communication Order 4
Bit 10: Not used
Bit 11: Not used
Bit 12: SA²n counter reset
Bit 13: Trips counter reset
Bit 14: General reset command
Bit 15: Not used
Bit 0: Settings group 1 selection
Bit 1: Settings group 2 selection
Bit 2: Settings group 3 selection
Bit 3: Settings group 4 selection
Bit 4: Settings group 5 selection
Bit 5: Settings group 6 selection
Bit 6: Settings group 7 selection
Bit 7: Settings group 8 selection
Unsigned integer: 2 ASCII characters
32 -127 = ASCII character1
32 - 127 = ASCII character 2
Obsolete
Unsigned integer: logical input status
Bit 0: logical input number 1
Bit 1: logical input number 2
Bit 2: logical input number 3
Bit 3 logical input number 4
Bit 4 logical input number 5
Bit 5 logical input number 6
Bit 6 logical input number 7
Bit 7: logical input number 8 (optional board)
Bit 8: logical input number 9 (optional board)
Bit 9: logical input number 10 (optional board)
Bit 10: logical input number 11 (optional board)
Bit 11: logical input number 12 (optional board)
Bits 12 to 15: Reserved
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 61/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
CODE
F13
F14
F14A
F14B
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: logical outputs status
Bit 0: logical output number RL1 (X1 tripping)
Bit 1: logical output number RL2
Bit 2: logical output number RL3
Bit 3: logical output number RL4
Bit 4: logical output number RL0 (Watch-Dog)
Bit 5: logical output number RL5
Bit 6: logical output number RL6
Bit 7: logical output number RL7
Bit 8: logical output number RL8
Bits 9 to 15: Reserved
Unsigned integer: Rl2 - RL8 output configuration
Bit 0: logical output number RL2 selection
Bit 1: logical output number RL3 selection
Bit 2: logical output number RL4 selection
Bit 3: logical output number RL5 selection
Bit 4: logical output number RL6 selection
Bit 5: logical output number RL7 selection
Bit 6: logical output number RL8 selection
Bits 7 to 15: Reserved
Unsigned integer: Rl2 - RL8 output configuration for CB & SOTF
Bit 0: logical output number RL2 selection (Recloser)
Bit 1: logical output number RL3 selection (Recloser)
Bit 2: logical output number RL4 selection (Recloser)
Bit 3: logical output number RL5 selection (Recloser)
Bit 4: logical output number RL6 selection (Recloser)
Bit 5: logical output number RL7 selection (Recloser)
Bit 6: logical output number RL8 selection (Recloser)
Bit 7: Reserved
Bit 8: logical output number RL2 selection (SOTF)
Bit 9: logical output number RL3 selection (SOTF)
Bit 10: logical output number RL4 selection (SOTF)
Bit 11: logical output number RL5 selection (SOTF)
Bit 12: logical output number RL6 selection (SOTF)
Bit 13: logical output number RL7 selection (SOTF)
Bit 14: logical output number RL8 selection (SOTF)
Bit 15: Reserved
Unsigned integer: Rl2 - RL8 output configuration for tAux3 & tAux4
Bit 0: logical output number RL2 selection (tAux3)
Bit 1: logical output number RL3 selection (tAux3)
Bit 2: logical output number RL4 selection (tAux3)
Bit 3: logical output number RL5 selection (tAux3)
Bit 4: logical output number RL6 selection (tAux3)
Bit 5: logical output number RL7 selection (tAux3)
Bit 6: logical output number RL8 selection (tAux3)
Bit 7: Reserved
Bit 8: logical output number RL2 selection (tAux4)
Bit 9: logical output number RL3 selection (tAux4)
Bit 10: logical output number RL4 selection (tAux4)
Bit 11: logical output number RL5 selection (tAux4)
Bit 12: logical output number RL6 selection (tAux4)
Bit 13: logical output number RL7 selection (tAux4)
Bit 14: logical output number RL8 selection (tAux4)
Bit 15: Reserved
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 62/130
CODE
F14C
F14D
F15
F15A
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: Rl2 - RL8 output configuration for Control Trip & Close
Bit 0: logical output number RL2 selection (Control Trip)
Bit 1: logical output number RL3 selection (Control Trip)
Bit 2: logical output number RL4 selection (Control Trip)
Bit 3: logical output number RL5 selection (Control Trip)
Bit 4: logical output number RL6 selection (Control Trip)
Bit 5: logical output number RL7 selection (Control Trip)
Bit 6: logical output number RL8 selection (Control Trip)
Bit 7: Reserved
Bit 8: logical output number RL2 selection (Control Close)
Bit 9: logical output number RL3 selection (Control Close)
Bit 10: logical output number RL4 selection (Control Close)
Bit 11: logical output number RL5 selection (Control Close)
Bit 12: logical output number RL6 selection (Control Close)
Bit 13: logical output number RL7 selection (Control Close)
Bit 14: logical output number RL8 selection (Control Close)
Bit 15: Reserved
Unsigned integer: RL2 - RL8 output configuration for recloser trip final & locked
Bit 0: logical output number RL2 selection (recloser trip final)
Bit 1: logical output number RL3 selection (recloser trip final)
Bit 2: logical output number RL4 selection (recloser trip final)
Bit 3: logical output number RL5 selection (recloser trip final)
Bit 4: logical output number RL6 selection (recloser trip final)
Bit 5: logical output number RL7 selection (recloser trip final)
Bit 6: logical output number RL8 selection (recloser trip final)
Bit 7: Reserved
Bit 8: logical output number RL2 selection (recloser internaly locked)
Bit 9: logical output number RL3 selection (recloser internaly locked)
Bit 10: logical output number RL4 selection (recloser internaly locked)
Bit 11: logical output number RL5 selection (recloser internaly locked)
Bit 12: logical output number RL6 selection (recloser internaly locked)
Bit 13: logical output number RL7 selection (recloser internaly locked)
Bit 14: logical output number RL8 selection (recloser internaly locked)
Bit 15: Reserved
Unsigned integer: digital inputs configuration, part 1
Bit 0: auxuliary relays de-latching command
Bit 1: O/O (52A)
Bit 2: F/O (52B)
Bit 3: CB Flt
Bit 4: aux 1
Bit 5: aux 2
Bit 6: blocking logic 1
Bit 7: blocking logic 2
Bit 8: disturbance start
Bit 9: cold load start
Bit 10: digital selection 1
Bit 11: digital selection 2
Bit 12: settings group change (configuration must be equal to INPUT)
Bit 13: recloser latched
Bit 14: reset thermal status
Bit 15: control tripping circuit
Unsigned integer: digital inputs configuration, part 2
Bit 0: start Breaker Failure timer
Bit 1: maintenance mode
Bit 2: aux 3
Bit 3: aux 4
Bit 4: Reserved
Bit 5: SOTF (ex Manual close)
Bit 6: Local mode
Bit 7: Synchronization.
Bit 8: aux 5
Bit 9: aux 6
Bit A: aux 7
Bit B: aux 8
Bit C: aux 9
Bit D: aux A
Bit E: aux B
Bit F: aux C
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 63/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
CODE
F15B
F16
F17
F18
F18A
F19
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: digital inputs configuration, part 3
Bit 0: Ctrl Trip
Bit 1: Ctrl Close
Bit 2: Led reset
Bit 3: Reserve 33
Bit 4: Reserve 34
Bit 5: Reserve 35
Bit 6: Reserve 36
Bit 7: Reserve 37
Bit 8: Reserve 38
Bit 9: Reserve 39
Bit A: Reserve 3A
Bit B: Reserve 3B
Bit C: Reserve 3C
Bit D: Reserve 3D
Bit E: Reserve 3E
Bit F: Reserve 3F
Unsigned integer: earth threshold (current, voltage & power) information status
Bit 0: info limit exceeding
Bits 1 to 3: Reserved
Bit 4: Ie> Interlock activated
Bit 5: info start
Bit 6: info tripping
Bit 7: info tripping reverse mode
Bits 8 to 15: Reserved
Unsigned integer: phase threshold (current, voltage & power) information status
Bit 0: info limit exceeding
Bit 1: phase A (or AB) trip
Bit 2: phase B (or BC) trip
Bit 3: phase C (or CA) trip
Bit 4: I> Interlock activated
Bit 5: info start
Bit 6: info tripping
Bit 7: info tripping reverse mode
Bits 8 to 15: Reserved
Signed long integer: numeric data: -2E31 to (2E31 – 1)
Unsigned long integer: numeric data: 0 to (2E32 -1)
Unsigned integer: leds configuration mask, part 1
Bit 0: I>
Bit 1: tI>
Bit 2: I>>
Bit 3: tI>>
Bit 4: I>>>
Bit 5: tI>>>
Bit 6: Ie>
Bit 7: tIe>
Bit 8: Ie>>
Bit 9: tIe>>
Bit 10: Ie>>>
Bit 11: tIe>>>
Bit 12: θ trip
Bit 13: tI2>
Bit 14: broken conductor trip
Bit 15: breaker failure trip
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 64/130
CODE
F19A
F19B
F19C
F19D
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: leds configuration mask, part 2
Bit 0: digital input 1
Bit 1: digital input 2
Bit 2: digital input 3
Bit 3: digital input 4
Bit 4: digital input 5
Bit 5: recloser running
Bit 6: [79] Internally locked
Bit 7: tAux1
Bit 8: tAux2
Bit 9: Pe/Iecos>
Bit 10: tPe/Iecos>
Bit 11: Pe/Iecos>>
Bit 12: tPe/Iecos>>
Bit 13: Ue>>>>
Bit 14: tUe>>>>
Bit 15: SOTF
Unsigned integer: leds configuration mask, part 3
Bit 0: U>
Bit 1: tU>
Bit 2: U>>
Bit 3: tU>>
Bit 4: U<
Bit 5: tU<
Bit 6: U<<
Bit 7: tU<<
Bit 8: tI2>>
Bit 9: tI<
Bit 10: tI> phase A
Bit 11: tI> phase B
Bit 12: tI> phase C
Bit 13: digital input 6
Bit 14: digital input 7
Bit 15: tI2>>>
Unsigned integer: leds configuration mask, part 4
Bit 0: I2>
Bit 1: I2>>
Bit 2: I2>>>
Bit 3: I<
Bit 4: tAux3
Bit 5: tAux4
Bit 6: P >
Bit 7: tP >
Bit 8: P >>
Bit 9: tP >>
Bit 10: VTS
Bit 11: 51V
Bit 12: P<
Bit 13: tP<
Bit 14: P<<
Bit 15: tP<<
Unsigned integer: leds configuration mask, part 5
Bit 0: f1
Bit 1: tf1
Bit 2: f2
Bit 3: tf2
Bit 4: f3
Bit 5: tf3
Bit 6: f4
Bit 7: tf4
Bit 8: f5
Bit 9: tf5
Bit 10: f6
Bit 11: tf6
Bit 12: out of frequency
Bit 13: Q >
Bit 14: tQ >
Bit 15: Q >>
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 65/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
CODE
F19E
F19F
F19G
F20
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: leds configuration mask, part 6
Bit 0: Equ. A
Bit 1: Equ. B
Bit 2: Equ. C
Bit 3: Equ. D
Bit 4: Equ. E
Bit 5: Equ. F
Bit 6: Equ. G
Bit 7: Equ. H
Bit 8: tAux 5 (P126-P127).
Bit 9: tAux 6 (P126-P127).
Bit 10: tAux 7 (P126-P127).
Bit 11: tQ>>
Bit 12: Q<
Bit 13: tQ<
Bit 14: Q<<
Bit 15: tQ<<
Unsigned integer: leds configuration mask, part 7
(only with p127 optional board)
Bit 0: t Aux 8
Bit 1: t Aux 9
Bit 2: t Aux A
Bit 3: t Aux B
Bit 4: t Aux C
Bit 5: reserve
Bit 6: reserve
Bit 7: reserve
Bit 8: digital input 8
Bit 9: digital input 9
Bit 10: digital input A
Bit 11: digital input B
Bit 12: digital input C
Bit 13: reserve
Bit 14: reserve
Bit 15: reserve
Unsigned integer: leds configuration mask, part 8
Bit 0: df/dt1
Bit 1: df/dt2
Bit 2: df/dt3
Bit 3: df/dt4
Bit 4: df/dt5
Bit 5: df/dt6
Bit 6: Ie_d>
Bit 7: tIe_d>
Bit 8: CTS
Bit 9: [79] Ext locked
Bit 10: Ie_d>>
Bit 11: tIe_d>>
Bit 12: V2>
Bit 13: tV2>
Bit 14: V2>>
Bit 15: tV2>>
Unsigned integer: logical inputs state, part 1
Bit 0: logic selection 1
Bit 1: logic selection 2
Bit 2: relays de-latching
Bit 3: CB position (52a)
Bit 4: CB position (52b)
Bit 5: external CB failure
Bit 6: aux 1
Bit 7: aux 2
Bit 8: blocking logic 1
Bit 9: blocking logic 2
Bit 10: disturbance recording start
Bit 11: cold load start
Bit 12: settings group change
Bit 13: recloser locked
Bit 14: thermal status reset
Bit 15: trip circuit supervision
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 66/130
CODE
F20A
F20B
F21
F22
F23
F24
F24A
F24B
F24C
F25
F26
F27
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: logical inputs state, part 2
Bit 0: start Breaker Failure timer
Bit 1: maintenance mode
Bit 2: aux 3
Bit 3: aux 4
Bit 4: Reserved
Bit 5: Manual close
Bit 6: Local mode
Bits 7:Synchro
Bit 8: aux 5
Bit 9: aux 6
Bit 10: aux 7
Bit 11: aux 8
Bit 12: aux 9
Bit 13: aux A
Bit 14: aux B
Bit 15: aux C
Unsigned integer: logical inputs status, part 3
Bit 0: Ctrl Trip
Bit 1: Ctrl Close
Bit 2: LEDs Reset
Bit 3 to bit 15: Not used
Unsigned integer: software version (Dec value) : 100 – 999 (XY)
X digit = Version number 10 – 99
Y digit = Revision number 0 (A) – 9 (J)
Unsigned integer: internal logic data
Bit 0: RL1 trip relay status
Bits 1 to 15: Reserved
Unsigned integer: machine status
Bit 0: major material alarm
Bit 1: minor material alarm
Bit 2: presence of a non-acknowledged event
Bit 3: synchronisation state
bit 4: presence of a non-acknowledged disturbance recording
Bit 5: presence of a non-acknowledged fault record
Bits 6 to 15: Reserved
Unsigned integer: generic info operating mode
0: out of service / not active
1: in service / active
Unsigned integer: 50/51/67 and 50N/51N/67N operating mode
0: NO
1: YES
2: DIR
3: PEAK
Unsigned integer: threshold operating mode
0: NO
1: AND
2: OR
Unsigned integer: 32N protection operating mode
0: Pe type mode seuil
1: IeCos type mode seuil
Unsigned integer: 2 ASCII characters
Unsigned integer: default display configuration
0: IA measurement display (True RMS)
1: IB measurement display (True RMS)
2: IC measurement display (True RMS)
3: IN measurement display (True RMS)
4: IA, IB, IC, and IN measurement display (True RMS)
Unsigned integer: RL1 - RL8 output relays latch configuration and status
Bit 0: relay number 1 (RL1)
Bit 1: relay number 2 (RL2)
Bit 2: relay number 3 (RL3)
Bit 3: relay number 4 (RL4)
Bit 4: relay number 5 (RL5)
Bit 5: relay number 6 (RL6)
Bit 6: relay number 7 (RL7)
Bit 7: relay number 8 (RL8)
Bits 8 to15: Reserved
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 67/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
CODE
F28
F29
F30
F31
F31A
F31B
F32
F33
F34
F35
F36
DESCRIPTION
Reserved
Unsigned integer: Modbus and DNP3 stop bits number
0: one stop bit
1: two stop bits
Unsigned integer: communication status (IEC 60870-5-103 protocol)
Bit 0: communication RS485 port 1 available if = 1
Bit 1: obsolete (previously IEC 60870-5-103 protocol private option)
Bit 2: communication RS232 available if = 1
Bit 3: communication RS485 port 2 available if = 1
Unsigned integer: numbers of available disturbance records
0: no records available
1: one events record available
2: two events records available
3: three events records available
4: four events records available
5: five events records available
Unsigned integer: numbers of default records to display
1: First record (the oldest)
…
25: Twenty fifth record (more recently)
Unsigned integer: numbers of intantaneous records to display
1: First record (the oldest)
…
5: Fifth record (more recently)
Unsigned integer: disturbance recording configuration
0: disturbance recording start condition on protection START
1: disturbance recording start condition on protection TRIPPING
Unsigned integer: Cold load start thresholds
Bit 0: tI>
Bit 1: tI>>
Bit 2: tI>>>
Bit 3: tIe>
Bit 4: tIe>>
Bit 5: tIe>>>
Bit 6: θ trip
Bit 7: tI2>
Bit 8: tI2>>
Bit 9: tI2>>>
Bit 10: tIe_d>
Bit 11: tIe_d>>
Bit 12: Not used
Bit 13: Not used
Bit 14: Not used
Bit 15: Not used
Unsigned integer: threshold reset timer type
0: DMT
1: IDMT
Unsigned integer: disturbance recording status
0: no disturbance recording uploaded
1: disturbance recording upload running
Unsigned integer: non acknowledged memorised alarms flags, part 1
Bit 0: Ie>
Bit 1: tIe>
Bit 2: Ie>>
Bit 3: tIe>>
Bit 4: Ie>>>
Bit 5: tIe>>>
Bit 6: tIe>REV
Bit 7: tIe>> REV
Bit 8: tIe>>>REV
Bit 9: thermal alarm (θ alarm)
Bit 10: thermal trip (θ trip)
Bit 11: broken conductor trip
Bit 12: breaker failure trip
Bit 13: Ie_d>
Bit 14: AUX1 trip
Bit 15: AUX2 trip
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 68/130
CODE
F36A
F36B
F36C
F36D
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: non acknowledged memorised alarms flags, part 2
Bit 0: CB operating time overreach
Bit 1: CB operation number overreach
Bit 2: square Amps sum overreach
Bit 3: trip circuit supervision
Bit 4: CB closing time overreach
Bit 5: t Boolean Equation A
Bit 6: t Boolean Equation B
Bit 7: t Boolean Equation C
Bit 8: t Boolean Equation D
Bit 9: Pe/Iecos>
Bit 10: tPe/Iecos>
Bit 11: Pe/Iecos>>
Bit 12: tPe/Iecos>>
Bit 13: I2>
Bit 14: tI2>
Bit 15: SOTF
Unsigned integer: non acknowledged memorised alarms flags part 3
Bit 0: U<
Bit 1: tU<
Bit 2: U<<
Bit 3: tU<<
Bit 4: U>
Bit 5: tU>
Bit 6: U>>
Bit 7: tU>>
Bit 8: Ue>>>>
Bit 9: tUe>>>>
Bit 10: recloser internally locked
Bit 11: recloser successful
Bit 12: I2>>
Bit 13: tI2>>
Bit 14: I2>>>
Bit 15: tI2>>>
Unsigned integer: non acknowledged memorised alarms flags, part 4
Bit 0: AUX3 trip
Bit 1: AUX4 trip
Bit 2: I> (old format before release V6: address 001Ah bit 5)
Bit 3: tI>
(old format before release V6: address 001Dh bit 6)
Bit 4: I>>
(old format before release V6: address 001Bh bit 5)
Bit 5: tI>>
(old format before release V6: address 001Eh bit 6)
Bit 6: I>>>
(old format before release V6: address 001Ch bit 5)
Bit 7: tI>>>
(old format before release V6: address 001Fh bit 6)
Bit 8: I<
(old format before release V6: address 0024h bit 5)
Bit 9: tI<
(old format before release V6: address 0024h bit 6)
Bit 10: VTS
Bit 11: P>
Bit 12: tP>
Bit 13: P>>
Bit 14: tP>>
Bit 15: tIe_d>
Unsigned integer: non acknowledged memorised alarms flags, part 5
Bit 0: f1
Bit 1: tf1
Bit 2: f2
Bit 3: tf2
Bit 4: f3
Bit 5: tf3
Bit 6: f4
Bit 7: tf4
Bit 8: f5
Bit 9: tf5
Bit 10: f6
Bit 11: tf6
Bit 12: t Boolean Equation E
Bit 13: t Boolean Equation F
Bit 14: t Boolean Equation G
Bit 15: t Boolean Equation H
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 69/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
CODE
F36E
F36F
F36G
F37
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: non acknowledged memorised alarms flags, part 6
Bit 0: AUX5 trip
Bit 1: AUX6 trip
Bit 2: AUX7 trip
Bit 3: AUX8 trip
Bit 4: AUX9 trip
Bit 5: AUXA trip
Bit 6: AUXB trip
Bit 7: AUXC trip
Bit 8: P<
Bit 9: tP<
Bit 10: P<<
Bit 11: tP<<
Bit 12: Q>
Bit 13: tQ>
Bit 14: Q>>
Bit 15: tQ>>
Unsigned integer: non acknowledged memorised alarms flags, part 7
Bit 0: Q<
Bit 1: tQ<
Bit 2: Q<<
Bit 3: tQ<<
Bit 4: dfdt1
Bit 5: dfdt2
Bit 6: dfdt3
Bit 7: dfdt4
Bit 8: dfdt5
Bit 9: dfdt6
Bit 10: Recloser externally locked
Bit 11: Ctrl Trip
Bit 12: CTS
Bit 13: Ie_d>>
Bit 14: tIe_d>>
Bit 15: Not used
Unsigned integer: non acknowledged memorised alarms flags, part 8
Bit 0: V2>
Bit 1: t V2>
Bit 2: V2>>
Bit 3: t V2>>
Bit 4: not used
Bit 5: not used
Bit 6: not used
Bit 7: not used
Bit 8: not used
Bit 9: not used
Bit 10: not used
Bit 11: not used
Bit 12: not used
Bit 13: not used
Bit 14: not used
Bit 15: not used
Unsigned integer: thermal overload information
Bit 0: thermal overload alarm
Bit 1: thermal overload trip
Bits 2 to 15: Reserved
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 70/130
CODE
F38
F38A
F38B
F39
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: accessory functions, part 1
Bit 0: SOTF running
Bit 1: CB failure
Bit 2: pole A opening
Bit 3: pole B opening
Bit 4: pole C opening
Bit 5: broken conductor
Bit 6: Aux 1 trip
Bit 7: Aux 2 trip
Bit 8: broken conductor time delay
Bit 9: CB failure time delay
Bit 10: cold load pick up temporization started
Bit 11: CB alarms or bits 0, 1, 4 of F43
Bit 12: Aux 3 trip
Bit 13: Aux 4 trip
Bit 14: Start SOTF
Bit 15: Trip SOTF
Unsigned integer: accessory functions, part 2
Bit 0: I>> Blocked
Bit 1: I>>> Blocked
Bit 2: VTS
Bit 3: V2>
Bit 4: V2>>
Bit 5: P>
Bit 6: tP>
Bit 7: P>>
Bit 8: tP>>
Bit 9: Inrush blocking
Bit 10: CTS
Bit 11: P<
Bit 12: tP<
Bit 13: P<<
Bit 14: tP<<
Bit 15: CTS time delay
Unsigned integer: accessory functions, part 3
Bit 0: Aux 5 trip
Bit 1: Aux 6 trip
Bit 2: Aux 7 trip
Bit 3: Aux 8 trip
Bit 4: Aux 9 trip
Bit 5: Aux A trip
Bit 6: Aux B trip
Bit 7: Aux C trip
Bit 8: Q>
Bit 9: tQ>
Bit 10: Q>>
Bit 11 tQ>>
Bit 12: Q<
Bit 13: tQ<
Bit 14: Q<<
Bit 15: tQ<<
Unsigned integer: output relay remote word in maintenance mode
Bit 0: RL1 (trip)
Bit 1: RL2
Bit 2: RL3
Bit 3: RL4
Bit 4: WD i.e. RL0 (watch-dog)
Bit 5: RL5
Bit 6: RL6
Bit 7: RL7
Bit 8: RL8
Bits 9 to15: Reserved
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 71/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
CODE
F40
F41
F42
F43
F44
F45
F46
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: selective scheme logic configuration
Bit 0: tI>>
Bit 1: tI>>>
Bit 2: tIe>>
Bit 3: tIe>>>
Bit 4: tIe_d>
Bit 5: tIe_d>>
Bit 6: not used
Bit 7: not used
Bit 8: not used
Bit 9: not used
Bit 10: not used
Bit 11: not used
Bit 12: not used
Bit 13: not used
Bit 14: not used
Bit 15: not used
Unsigned integer: remote communication configuration
0: front and rear MODBUS
1: front MODBUS rear IEC 60870-5-103
2: front MODBUS rear COURIER
3: front MODBUS rear DNP3
Unsigned integer: max & average current + voltage time window selection (dec values)
5: 5 min
10: 10 min
15: 15 min
30: 30 min
60: 60 min
Unsigned integer
Bit 0: CB operating time overreach
Bit 1: CB operation number overreach
Bit 2: square Amps sum overreach
Bit 3: trip circuit supervision
Bit 4: CB closing time overreach
Bit 5: recloser internaly locked
Bit 6: recloser successful
Bit 7: recloser in progress
Bit 8: closing command issued from recloser cycle
Bit 9: recloser configuration error
Bit 10: recloser in service (IEC 60870-5-103 protocol)
Bits 11: recloser final trip
Bit 12: "CB operations number / time" overreach
Bit 13: Recloser external locked
Bit 14: Recloser reinitialized
Bit 15: Not used
Reserved
Unsigned integer: HW alarm relay status
Bit 0: Watch-Dog operating
Bit 1: communication failure
Bit 2: data failure
Bit 3: analogue failure
Bit 4: datation failure
Bit 5: calibration failure
Bit 6: record data failure
Bit 7: Reserved
Bit 8: Reserved
Bit 9: factory alarm (default factory configuration reloaded)
Bit 10: main power supply
Bit 11: auxilliary power supplies
Bit 12: transformers offset failure
Bits 13 to 15: Reserved
Unsigned integer: Ie harmonic content extraction
Bit 0: calculation active
Bits 1 to 15: Reserved
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 72/130
CODE
F47
F48
F49
F50
F51
F52
F53
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: digital inputs operating mode
Bit x =
0 Æ active when de-energized
1 Æ active when energized;
Bit 0: input 1
Bit 1: input 2
Bit 2: input 3
Bit 3: input 4
Bit 4: input 5
Bit 5: input 6
Bit 6: input 7
Bit 7: input 8 (optional board)
Bit 8: input 9 (optional board)
Bit 9: input A (optional board)
Bit 10: input B (optional board)
Bit 11: input C (optional board)
Bits 12 to 15: Reserved
Unsigned integer: Boolean Equation Status
Bit 0: Reserved
Bit 1: t Boolean Equation A
Bit 2: t Boolean Equation B
Bit 3: t Boolean Equation C
Bit 4: t Boolean Equation D
Bit 5: Temporisation A, B,- or H active
Bit 6: t Boolean Equation E
Bit 7: t Boolean Equation F
Bit 8: t Boolean Equation G
Bit 9: t Boolean Equation H
Bit 10: One or more instantaneous equation activated
Bits 11 to 15: Reserved
Unsigned integer: calibration status flag
0: calibration KO
1: calibration OK
Has been replaced by F9A ( F50 is kept for compatibility reasons
Unsigned integer: digital inputs signal type
0: DC
1: AC
Unsigned integer: date and time format
0: internal format (see « page 8H» description)
1: IEC
Unsigned integer: IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 communication speed (Baud)
INTERNAL USE ONLY
IEC 60870-5-103:
0: 9600
1: 19200
DNP3.0:
0: 1200
1: 2400
2: 4800
3: 9600
4: 19200
5: 38400
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 73/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
CODE
F54
F54A
F54B
F55
F56
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: Digital inputs configuration mode, part 1:
Bit x = 0 Æ level / 1Æ edge
Bit 0: logic selection 1; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 1: logic selection 2; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 2: relays de-latching; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 3: CB position (52a) ; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 4: CB position (52b) ; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 5: external CB failure; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 6: tAux 1; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 7: tAux 2; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 8: blocking logic 1; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 9: blocking logic 2; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 10: disturbance recording start; operating only on edge; not configurable (1)
Bit 11: cold load start; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 12: settings group change ; Attention: 0 Æ Input / 1Æ Menu
Bit 13: recloser locked; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 14: thermal status reset; operating only on edge; not configurable (1)
Bit 15: trip circuit supervision; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Unsigned integer: Digital inputs configuration mode, part2:
Bit x = 0 Æ level / 1Æ edge
Bit 0: start Breaker Failure timer; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 1: maintenance mode; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 2: tAux 3; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 3: tAux 4; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 4: Reserved
Bit 5: Manual close; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 6: Local mode; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 7: Synchronisation; operating only on level; not configurable (0)
Bit 8: tAux 5
Bit 9: tAux 6
Bit 10: tAux 7
Bit 11: tAux 8
Bit 12: tAux 9
Bit 13: tAux A
Bit 14: tAux B
Bit 15: tAux C
Unsigned integer: Digital inputs configuration mode, part3:
Bit x = 0 Æ level / 1Æ edge
Bit 0: Control trip(1)
Bit 1: Control close(1)
Bit 2: Leds reset(0)
Bits 3 to 15: Not used
Unsigned integer: active group
Group change format ( unsigned integer )
0:
toggle from group 1 to group 2
1
group 1
2
group 2
3
group 3
4
group 4
5
group 5
6
group 6
7
group 7
8
group 8
Unsigned integer: Fail safe and inversion relays
bit x = 0: relay normally de-energized.
bit x = 1: relay normally energized.
bit 0: Fail safe logical output number RL1 (tripping)
bit 1: Fail safe logical output number RL2
bit 2: Inversion logical output number RL3
bit 3: Inversion logical output number RL4
bit 4: Inversion logical output number RL5
bit 5: Inversion logical output number RL6
bit 6: Inversion logical output number RL7
bit 7: Inversion logical output number RL8
bits 8 à 15: Reserved
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 74/130
CODE
F57
F58
F59
F60
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: recloser cycles configuration
Bit 0: Cycle 1 configuration (trip and initialize the reclosure)
Bit 1: Cycle 1 configuration (block the tripping on cycle)
Bit 2, Bit 3: Reserved
Bit 4: Cycle 2 configuration (trip and initialize the reclosure)
Bit 5: Cycle 2 configuration (block the tripping on cycle)
Bit 6, Bit 7: Reserved
Bit 8: Cycle 3 configuration (trip and initialize the reclosure)
Bit 9: Cycle 3 configuration (block the tripping on cycle)
Bit 10, Bit 11: Reserved
Bit 12: Cycle 4 configuration (trip and initialize the reclosure)
Bit 13: Cycle 4 configuration (block the tripping on cycle)
Bit 14, Bit 15: Reserved
Unsigned integer: Switch onto fault configuration
Bit 0: Start I>>
Bit 1: Start I>>>
Bits 2 to 14: Reserved
Bit 15: SOTF on/off
Unsigned integer: 51V configuration
Bit 0: (U< OR V2>) & I>> ? yes/no
Bit 1: (U<< OR V2>>) & I>>> ? yes/no
Bits 3 to 15: Reserved
Unsigned integer: VTS configuration
Bit 0: VTS Alarm ? yes/no
Bit 1: VTS Blocks 51V ? yes/no
Bit 2: VTS Blocks protections which use VT ? yes/no
Bits 3 to 15: Reserved
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 75/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
CODE
F61
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: Information on the starting origin of the RL1 trip relay
01 - Remote X1 trip
02 - θ trip (Thermal overload)
03 - I> trip
04 - I>> trip
05 - I>>> trip
06 - Ie> trip
07 - Ie>> trip
08 - Ie>>> trip
09 - I< trip
10 - Broken conductor trip
11 - U< trip
12 - U<< trip
13 - Pe/Iecos> trip
14 - Pe/Iecos>> trip
15 - I2> trip
16 - I2>> trip
17 - I2>>> trip
18 - U> trip
19 - U>> trip
20 - Ue>>>> trip
21 - Aux 1 trip
22 - Aux 2 trip
23 - AND Logic equate A trip
24 - AND Logic equate B trip
25 - AND Logic equate C trip
26 - AND Logic equate D trip
27 - Aux 3 trip
28 - Aux 4 trip
29 - SOTF
30 - P >
31 - P >>
32 - f1
33 - f2
34 – f3
35 – f4
36 – f5
37 – f6
38 - AND Logic equate E trip
39 - AND Logic equate F trip
40 - AND Logic equate G trip
41 - AND Logic equate H trip
42 - t Aux 5 ( P126-7 )
43 - t Aux 6 ( P126-7 )
44 - t Aux 7 ( P126-7 )
45 - t Aux 8 ( P127 with logical inputs 8-12 )
46 - t Aux 9 ( P127 with logical inputs 8-12 )
47 - t Aux A ( P127 with logical inputs 8-12 )
48 - t Aux B ( P127 with logical inputs 8-12 )
49 - t Aux C ( P127 with logical inputs 8-12 )
50 - Ie_d> trip
51 - P <
52 - P <<
53 - Q >
54 - Q >>
55 - Q <
56 - Q <<
57 – df/dt1
58 – df/dt2
59 – df/dt3
60 – df/dt4
61 – df/dt5
62 – df/dt6
63 – Ie_d>> trip
64 – V2> trip
65 – V2>> trip
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 76/130
CODE
F62
F63
F64
F64A
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: LED status (bit = 0 if LED inactive)
Bit 0 – Trip LED
Bit 1 – Alarm LED
Bit 2 – Warning LED
Bit 3 – Healthy LED (always active)
Bit 4 – LED 5
Bit 5 – LED 6
Bit 6 – LED 7
Bit 7 – LED 8
Unsigned integer: Language
00 – French
01 – English
02 - Spanish
03 - German
04 – Italian
05 - Russian
06 - Polish
07 - Portuguese
08 - Dutch
09 - American
10 - Czech
11 - Hungarian
12 - Greek
13 - Chinese
14 - Turkish
Other – Language by default (product code)
Unsigned integer: Alarms inhibition part 1
Bit 0: Alarm tAux 1 inhibited
Bit 1: Alarm tAux 2 inhibited
Bit 2: Alarm tAux 3 inhibited
Bit 3: Alarm tAux 4 inhibited
Bit 4: Alarm tAux 5 inhibited
Bit 5: Alarm tAux 6 inhibited
Bit 6: Alarm tAux 7 inhibited
Bit 7: Alarm tAux 8 inhibited
Bit 8: Alarm tAux 9 inhibited
Bit 9: Alarm tAux A inhibited
Bit 10: Alarm tAux B inhibited
Bit 11: Alarm tAux C inhibited
Bit 12: Alarm Control Trip inhibited
Bit 13: Alarm [79] ext. lock. inhibited
Bit 14: Alarm I< inhibited
Bit 15: Not used
Unsigned integer: Alarms inhibition part 2
Bit 0: Alarm Boolean equation A inhibited
Bit 1: Alarm Boolean equation B inhibited
Bit 2: Alarm Boolean equation C inhibited
Bit 3: Alarm Boolean equation D inhibited
Bit 4: Alarm Boolean equation E inhibited
Bit 5: Alarm Boolean equation F inhibited
Bit 6: Alarm Boolean equation G inhibited
Bit 7: Alarm Boolean equation H inhibited
Bit 8: Alarm U< inhibited
Bit 9: Alarm U<< inhibited
Bit 10: Alarm U<<< inhibited (not used)
Bit 11: Alarm P< inhibited
Bit 12: Alarm P<< inhibited
Bit 13: Alarm Q< inhibited
Bit 14: Alarm Q<< inhibited
Bit 15: Not used
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 77/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
CODE
F64B
F65
F66
F67
F68
F69
F70
F71
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: Alarms inhibition part 3
Bit 0: F1 alarm inhibited
Bit 1: F2 alarm inhibited
Bit 2: F3 alarm inhibited
Bit 3: F4 alarm inhibited
Bit 4: F5 alarm inhibited
Bit 5: F6 alarm inhibited
Bit 6: F out inhibited
Bit 7: tU> inhibited
Bit 8: tU>> inhibited
Bit 9: tV2> inhibited
Bit 10: tV2>> inhibited
Bits 11 to 15: Not used
Unsigned integer: VTS conv. directional to non-dir
Bit 0: VTS I> non-Dir ? yes/no
Bit 1: VTS I>> non-Dir ? yes/no
Bit 2: VTS I>>> non-Dir ? yes/no
Bit 3: VTS Ie> non-Dir ? yes/no
Bit 4: VTS Ie>> non-Dir ? yes/no
Bit 5: VTS Ie>>> non-Dir ? yes/no
Bit 6: VTS Ie_d> non-Dir ? yes/no
Bit 7: VTS Ie_d>> non-Dir ? yes/no
Bits 8 to 15: Reserved
Unsigned integer: phase rotation
Value 0: Normal , A_B_C
Value 1: Reverse , A_C_B
Unsigned integer: frequency protection
Bit 0: information first crossing threshold
Bit 1: information of starting (second crossing)
Bit 2: information of tripping
Bit 3 to 15: Reserved
Unsigned integer: frequency operating mode
0: No
1: Protection under frequency 81<
2: Protection over frequency 81>
Unsigned integer: frequency measurement status
Bit 0: F out
Bit 1: F out because of U min
Unsigned integer: 1st Operator for Boolean equations
0: Nothing
1: NOT
Unsigned integer: Other than 1st Operator for Boolean equations
0: OR
1: OR NOT
2: AND
3: AND NOT
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 78/130
CODE
F72
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: Operand for Boolean equations
0: NULL
1: I>
2: tI>
3: I>>
4: tI>>
5: I>>>
6: tI>>>
7: Ie>
8: tIe>
9: Ie>>
10: tIe>>
11: Ie>>>
12: tIe>>>
13: Pe/IeCos>
14: tPe/IeCos >
15: Pe/IeCos >>
16: tPe/IeCos >>
17: I2>
18: tI2>
19: I2>>
20: tI2>>
21: I2>>>
22: tI2>>>
23: Thermal alarm (Ith>)
24: Thermal tripping (Ith>>)
25: I<
26: tI<
… See next page
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 79/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
CODE
F72
(following)
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: Operand for Boolean equations
27: U>
28: tU>
29: U>>
30: tU>>
31: U<
32: tU<
33: U<<
34: tU<<
35: Ue>>>>
36: tUe>>>>
37: Broken conductor
38: Tripping 79
39: tAux1
40: tAux2
41: tAux3
42: tAux4
43: P>
44: tP>
45: P>>
46: tP>>
47: F1
48: tF1
49: F2
50: tF2
51: F3
52: tF3
53: F4
54: tF4
55: F5
56: tF5
57: F6
58: tF6
59: VTS
60: tAux 5 ( P126-P127 )
61: tAux 6 ( P126-P127 )
62: tAux 7 ( P126-P127 )
63: tAux 8 (P127 with logical inputs 8-12)
64: tAux 9 (P127 with logical inputs 8-12)
65: tAux A (P127 with logical inputs 8-12)
66: tAux B (P127 with logical inputs 8-12)
67: tAux C (P127 with logical inputs 8-12)
68: Input 1
69: Input 2
70: Input 3
71: Input 4
72: Input 5( P126-P127 )
73: Input 6( P126-P127 )
74: Input 7( P126-P127 )
75: Input 8 (P127 with Inputs 8-12)
76: Input 9 (P127 with Inputs 8-12)
77: Input A (P127 with Inputs 8-12)
78: Input B (P127 with Inputs 8-12)
79: Input C (P127 with Inputs 8-12)
80: Ie_d>
81: tIe_d>
82: [79] int. lock
83: [79] ext. lock
84: tEquation A
85: tEquation B
86: tEquation C
87: tEquation D
88: tEquation E
89: tEquation F
90: tEquation G
91: tEquation H
92: CB Fail
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 80/130
CODE
F72
(following)
F73
F74
F75
F76
F77
F78
F79
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: Operand for Boolean equations
93: CTS
94: df/dt1
95: df/dt2
96: df/dt3
97: df/dt4
98: df/dt5
99: df/dt6
100: P<
101: tP<
102: P<<
103: tP<<
104: Q>
105: tQ>
106: Q>>
107: tQ>>
108: Q<
109: tQ<
110: Q<<
111: tQ<<
112: Ie_d>>
113: t Ie_d>>
114: V2>
115: t V2>
116: V2>>
117: t V2>>
118: Communication order 1
119: Communication order 2
120: Communication order 3
121: Communication order 4
Unsigned integer: Source of the disturbance recording start
0: None
1: On trip protection
2: On instantaneous protection
3: On communication order
4: On logical input order
5: No disturbance
6: On HMI order
Unsigned integer: Spontaneous event enabling for IEC870-5-103 communication
Bit 0: IEC only
Bit 1: Private
Unsigned integer: Measurements transmission enabling for IEC870-5-103 communication ( 0 =
transmission disabled , 1 = transmission enabled )
Bit 0: ASDU3.4 only
Bit 1: ASDU 9 only
Bit 2: Others
Unsigned integer: Date-and-time synchronisation mode.
0: Automatic: with following priority, in decreasing order:
1/ IRIG-B if configured (Option)
2/ Logical input
3/ Communication rear port 1
4/ Communication rear port 2 (if option configured)
1: IRIG-B only (manual mode), if configured
2: Logical input only (manual mode),
3: Communication rear port 1 only (manual mode).
4: Communication rear port 2 only (manual mode), if option configured.
Unsigned integer: IRIG-B mode (Signal type)
0: Logical.
1: Modulated.
Unsigned integer: IEC870-5-103 communication blocking ( 0 = enabled ; 1 = blocked )
Bit 0: Signals and measurements
Bit 1: Commands
Unsigned integer: Date-and-time synchronisation origin:
0: None
1: IRIG-B, if configured
2: Logical input, if configured
3: Communication rear port 1
4: Communication rear port 2, if option configured.
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 81/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
CODE
F80
F81
F82
F83
F84
F85
F86
F87
F88
F89
DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: Optional board
bit 0: logical input 8 to 12 present
bit 1: IRIG-B + RS485_2 ( second rs485 rear port ) presents
Unsigned integer: Keyboard remote control word.
Only one bit simultaneously. The bit active simulate a pressure on the key.
bit 0: CLEAR key
bit 1: ALARM key
bit 2: UP key
bit 3: RIGHT key
bit 4: ENTER key
bit 5: DOWN key
bit 6: LEFT key
bit 7:
bit 8:
bit 9:
bit 10:
bit 11:
bit 12:
bit 13:
bit 14:
bit 15: Dialog re-init (factory test reserved)
SOTF parameters: Closing orders types for SOTF starting
Bit 0: Front port communication order
Bit 1: Rear port communication order
Bit 2: "Ctrl Close" logical input
Bit 3: "SOTF" logical input
Bit 4: Reclosing ordered by Autorecloser
Bit 5: Reclosing ordered by HMI
BIT 6: Rear port 2 (optional) communication order (P127 only)
Unsigned integer: Inrush blocking configuration
bit 0: I>
bit 1: I>>
bit 2: I>>>
bit 3: Ie>
bit 4: Ie>>
bit 5: Ie>>>
bit 6: reserved
bit 7: reserved
bit 8: reserved
bit 9: reserved
bit 10: reserved
bit 11: I2>
bit 12: I2>>
bit 13: I2>>>
bit 14: Ie_d>
bit 15: Ie_d>>
VT protection
0: V P-P
1: V P-N
Phases and Earth labels
0: L1, L2, L3, N
1: A, B, C, o
2: R, S, T, E
U< and U<< inhibition by 52a
Bit 0: U< inhibited
Bit 1: U<< inhibited
Unsigned integer: Cold load start starting mode
Bit 0: Detection with CLPU input
Bit 1: Automatic detection
IEEE 32 bits floating-point format
Default availlable range from + 3.2 E+38 to - 3.2 E+38
IEEE 64 bits floating-point format
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 82/130
CODE
F90
F91
F92
F93
F94
F95
F96
F97
F98
F99
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
DESCRIPTION
Phase designation
0 = none
1
= phase A
2
= phase B
3
= phase C
4
= phases A-B
5
= phases B-C
6
= phases C-A
7
= phases A-B-C
8 = earth
Measurement mode
1
Quadrant 1
2
Quadrant 2
3
Quadrant 3
4
Quadrant 4
P: direct Q: inverted
P: inverted
Q: direct
P: inverted
Q: inverted
P: direct Q: direct
CTS Activation and CTS Mode (Futur use)
0: CTS inhibited
1: I2/I1
2: Null current
3: I Diff
4: I Earth
IEC870-5-103 communication: GI selection
0: Basic GI
1: Advanced GI
Unsigned integer: df/dt protection flags
Bit 0: df/dt1
Bit 1: df/dt2
Bit 2: df/dt3
Bit 3: df/dt4
Bit 4: df/dt5
Bit 5: df/dt6
IEC870-5-103 communication: Info General Start / General Trip
Bit 0: General Start
Bit 1: General Trip
F1 value except if less than 100 ( 1.00% )
In that case Td demand is equal to Iam Td demand ( modbus address 06D4 )
Private format date (4 words):
Words 1 & 2 = seconds since 01/01/1994
Words 3 & 4 = milliseconds
Auxiliary power self-test status
Bit 0: -3V3 out of range
Bit 1: 5V0 out of range
Bit 2: 3V3 out of range
Bit 3: 12V out of range
Bit 4: 1V3 out of range
Bit 5: 0V out of range
Transformer self-test status
bit 0: transformer 1 fault
bit 1: transformer 2 fault
bit 2: transformer 3 fault
bit 3: transformer 4 fault
bit 4: transformer 5 fault
bit 5: transformer 6 fault
bit 6: transformer 7 fault
bit 7: transformer 8 fault
bit 8: transformer 9 fault
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 83/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
4.1
Disturbance record additional information
4.1.1
MODBUS request definition used for disturbance record
To upload a disturbance record, the following requests must be done in the exact given order:
4.1.2
1.
(optional):
Send a request to know the number of disturbance records available.
2.
(compulsory):
Send a request with the record number and the channel number.
3.
(compulsory): Send one or several requests to upload the disturbance record data. It
depends of the number of samples.
4.
(compulsory):
Send a request to upload the index frame.
Request to know the number of disturbance records
Slave number
Xx
Function code
03h
Word address
3Dh
00
Word number
00
24h
CRC
xx
xx
This request may generate an error message with the error code:
EVT_NOK(OF):
NOTE:
4.1.3
No record available
If there are less than 5 records available, the answer will contain zero in
non-used words.
Service requests
This request must be sent before uploading the disturbance record channel samples. It
allows knowing the record number and the channel number to upload.
It allows also knowing the number of samples in the channel.
Slave number
xx
Function code
03h
Word address
Word number
Refer to mapping 00
13h
CRC
xx
xx
This request may generate an error message with two different error codes:
4.1.4
CODE_DEF_RAM(02):
failure
CODE_EVT_NOK(03):
no disturbance record available
Disturbance record upload request
Slave number
xx
Function code
03h
Word address
Word number
Refer to mapping 01 to 7Dh
CRC
xx
xx
This request may geberate an error message with two different error codes:
4.1.5
CODE_DEP_DATA(04):
the required disturbance data number is greater than
memorised number.
CODE_SERV_NOK(05):
the service request for disturbance record and
number has not been sent.
channel
Index frame upload request
Slave number
xx
Function code
03h
Word address
22h
00
Word number
00
07h
CRC
xx
xx
This request may generate an error message with an error code:
CODE_SERV_NOK(05):
the service request for disturbance record and
number has not been sent.
channel
the
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 84/130
4.1.6
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event
Two ways can be followed to retrieve an event record:
−
Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledged event.
−
Send a request to retrieve a dedicated event.
Slave number
xx
Function code
03h
Word address
36h
00
Word number
00
09h
CRC
xx............xx
This event request may generate an error message with the error code:
EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5):
NOTE:
An event is being written into the saved RAM.
On event retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the event record
acknowledgement:
− Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval:
− Bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h)
shall be set to 0. On event retrieval, this event record is
acknowledged.
− Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval:
− Bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h)
shall be set to 1. On event retrieval, this event record is not
acknowledged.
− To acknowledge this event, another remote order shall be sent to the
relay. Bit 13 of this frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall
be set to 1.
4.1.7
Request to retrieve a dedicated event
Slave number
Xx
Function code
03h
Word address
Refer to mapping
Word number
00
09h
CRC
xx............xx
This event request may generate an error message with the error code:
EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5):
NOTE:
4.1.8
An event is being written into the saved RAM.
This event retrieval does not acknowledge this event.
Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records
Two ways can be followed to retrieve a fault record:
−
Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record.
−
Send a request to retrieve a dedicated fault record.
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
MODBUS DATABASE
Page 85/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
4.1.8.1
Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record
Slave number
Xx
Function code
03h
NOTE:
Word address
3Eh
00
Word number
00
18h
CRC
xx............xx
On fault retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the fault record
acknowledgement:
a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval.
Bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h)
shall be set to 0. On fault retrieval, this fault record is acknowledged.
b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval:
Bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h)
shall be set to 1. On fault retrieval, this fault record is not acknowledged.
To acknowledge this fault, another remote order shall be sent to the
relay. Bit 14 of this frame (format F9 – mapping address 0400h) shall be
set to 1.
4.1.8.2
Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record
Slave number
Xx
Function code
03h
NOTE:
Word address
Refer to mapping
Word number
00
18h
CRC
xx............xx
This fault value retrieval does not acknowledge this fault record.
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 87/130
IEC 60870-5-103
DATABASE
MiCOM P125-P126-P127 – V15
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 88/130
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
BLANK PAGE
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 89/130
CONTENTS
1.
IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
91
1.1
General information
91
1.2
Spontaneous messages
91
1.2.1
Time Tagged Message
91
1.3
System state
97
1.4
Processed commands
102
1.4.1
System commands
102
1.4.2
General commands
102
1.4.3
Private commands – Setting management
103
1.5
Relay reinitialisation
105
1.6
Cyclic Messages
105
1.7
Disturbance record extraction
107
1.8
Fault data record extraction
109
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 90/130
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
BLANK PAGE
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 91/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.
IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
1.1
General information
Messages representation is expressed with the associated:
1.2
−
INFORMATION NUMBER:
INF
−
ASDU TYPE:
TYP
−
CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION:
COT
−
FUNCTION NUMBER:
FUN .
Spontaneous messages
These messages include a sub-assembly of the events, which are generated on the relay.
The messages considered are concerning highest priority events.
An event is always generated on the rising edge of the information; some can be generated also on
falling edge.
In the list below, events generated only on rising edge will be tagged with a ‘*’.
1.2.1
Time Tagged Message
Two types of ASDU can be generated for events:
−
ASDU 1: time-tagged message
−
ASDU 2: time-tagged message with relative time
In the following list of processed events, FUNCTION NUMBERS (FUN) 160 and 161 are used for
Public range, respectively for current and voltage protections data, and FUNCTION NUMBERS
(FUN) 168 and 169 are used for Private range, respectively for current and voltage protections
data.
Status indications (monitor direction):
P127 + P126 + P125
−
LEDS reset:
FUN<160>;INF <19>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,*
−
First alarm acknowledge:
FUN<168>;INF <53>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,*
−
All alarms acknowledge:
FUN<168>;INF <52>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,*
−
Signals&measurements blocking active:
FUN<160>;INF <20>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Commands blocking active:
FUN<168>;INF <151>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Local parameter Setting active:
FUN<160>;INF <22>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Maintenance mode active:
FUN<168>;INF <7>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Setting group number 1 active:
FUN<160>;INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Setting group number 2 active:
FUN<160>;INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Auxiliary input 1:
FUN<160>;INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Auxiliary input 2:
FUN<160>;INF <28>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Auxiliary input 3:
FUN<160>;INF <29>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Auxiliary input 4:
FUN<160>;INF <30>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 92/130
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
−
Logical input 1:
FUN<168>;INF <160>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical input 2:
FUN<168>;INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical input 3:
FUN<168>;INF <162>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical input 4:
FUN<168>;INF <163>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical output 1:
FUN<168>;INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical output 2:
FUN<168>;INF <177>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical output 3:
FUN<168>;INF <178>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical output 4:
FUN<168>;INF <179>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Watch Dog:
FUN<168>;INF <180>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical output 5:
FUN<168>;INF <181>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical output 6:
FUN<168>;INF <182>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Time synchronisation:
FUN<168>;INF <226>; TYP <1>; COT<1> *
−
Logical selectivity 1:
FUN<168>;INF <28>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical selectivity 2:
FUN<168>;INF <29>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical blocking 1:
FUN<168>;INF <30>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical blocking 2:
FUN<168>;INF <31>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Latch relays:
FUN<168>;INF <230>; TYP <1>; COT<1> *
−
Unlock relays:
FUN<168>;INF<231>; TYP<1>; COT<1> *
−
General Reset:
FUN<168>;INF<232>; TYP<1>; COT<1> *
P127 + P126
−
Autorecloser active:
FUN<160>;INF <16>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Auxiliary input 5:
FUN<168>;INF <96>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Auxiliary input 6:
FUN<168>;INF <97>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Auxiliary input 7:
FUN<168>;INF <98>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical input 5:
FUN<168>;INF <164>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical input 6:
FUN<168>;INF <165>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical input 7:
FUN<168>;INF <166>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical output 7:
FUN<168>;INF <183>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical output 8:
FUN<168>;INF <184>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Reset thermal state:
FUN<168>;INF<6>; TYP<1>; COT<1> *
P127 only (optional board)
−
Auxiliary input 8:
FUN<168>;INF <99>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Auxiliary input 9:
FUN<168>;INF <100>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Auxiliary input 10:
FUN<168>;INF <101>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Auxiliary input 11:
FUN<168>;INF <102>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Auxiliary input 12:
FUN<168>;INF <103>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical input 8:
FUN<168>;INF <167>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 93/130
−
Logical input 9:
FUN<168>;INF <168>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical input A:
FUN<168>;INF <169>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical input B:
FUN<168>;INF <170>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logical input C:
FUN<168>;INF <171>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
P127 only
−
Setting group number 3 active:
FUN<160>;INF <25>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Setting group number 4 active:
FUN<160>;INF <26>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Setting group number 5 active:
FUN<168>;INF<41>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Setting group number 6 active:
FUN<168>;INF<42>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Setting group number 7 active:
FUN<168>;INF<43>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Setting group number 8 active:
FUN<168>;INF<44>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Setting group copy successful:
FUN<168>;INF<240>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,*
Supervision Indications (monitor direction):
P127 + P126
−
Trip Circuit Supervision:
FUN<160>;INF <36>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Group warning (Minor hardware alarm):
FUN<160>;INF <46>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Group alarm (Major hardware alarm):
FUN<160>;INF <47>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
Start Indications (monitor direction):
P127 + P126 + P125
−
Start IN>:
FUN<168>;INF <12>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start IN>>:
FUN<168>;INF <13>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start IN>>>:
FUN<168>;INF <14>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start / pick-up N:
FUN<160>;INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start UN>>>>:
FUN<169>;INF <14>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start PN>:
FUN<169>;INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start PN>>:
FUN<169>;INF <85>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
P127 + P126
−
Start I>:
FUN<168>;INF <9>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start I>>:
FUN<168>;INF <10>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start I>>>:
FUN<168>;INF <11>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start I<:
FUN<168>;INF <73>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start I2>:
FUN<168>;INF <57>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start I2>>:
FUN<168>;INF <74>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start I2>>>:
FUN<168>;INF <76>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
General Start / pick-up:
FUN<160>;INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start Therm:
FUN<168>;INF <15>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start Broken conductor:
FUN<168>;INF <38>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 94/130
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
−
CB Operating time:
FUN<168>;INF <59>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
CB Operation number:
FUN<168>;INF <60>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
SA2n:
FUN<168>;INF <61>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
CB Closing time:
FUN<168>;INF <63>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
CB Fail extern.(“SF6 low”):
FUN<168>;INF <224>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Cold load Start:
FUN<168>;INF <37>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start tBF:
FUN<168>;INF <70>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
P127 only
−
Start IN>>>>:
FUN<168>;INF <24>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start U<:
FUN<169>;INF <73>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start U<<:
FUN<169>;INF <100>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start U>:
FUN<169>;INF <9>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start U>>:
FUN<169>;INF <10>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
51V: I>> blocked:
FUN<169>;INF <134>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
51V: I>>> blocked:
FUN<169>;INF <135>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start VTS:
FUN<169>;INF <136>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start V2>:
FUN<169>;INF <137>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start V2>>:
FUN<169>;INF <138>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start CTS:
FUN<160>;INF <32>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start P>:
FUN<169>;INF <150>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start P>>:
FUN<169>;INF <151>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start P<:
FUN<169>;INF <154>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start P<<:
FUN<169>;INF <155>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start Q>:
FUN<169>;INF <158>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start Q>>:
FUN<169>;INF <159>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start Q<:
FUN<169>;INF <162>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start Q<<:
FUN<169>;INF <163>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Blocking Inrush:
FUN<168>;INF <225>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,↑↓
−
Start F1:
FUN<169>;INF <112>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start F2:
FUN<169>;INF <114>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start F3:
FUN<169>;INF <116>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start F4:
FUN<169>;INF <118>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start F5:
FUN<169>;INF <120>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Start F6:
FUN<169>;INF <122>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Non measured Freq.:
FUN<169>;INF <124>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 95/130
Fault Indications (monitor direction):
P127 + P126 + P125
−
Start / pick-up N:
FUN<160>;INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
General Trip:
FUN<160>;INF <68>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip IN>:
FUN<160>;INF <92>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip IN>>:
FUN<160>;INF <93>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip IN>>>:
FUN<168>;INF <22>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip UN>>>>:
FUN<169>;INF <22>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip PN>:
FUN<169>;INF <86>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip PN>>:
FUN<169>;INF <87>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Local Mode (input):
FUN<168>;INF <40>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
P127 + P126
−
Trip L1:
FUN<160>;INF <69>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip L2:
FUN<160>;INF <70>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip L3:
FUN<160>;INF <71>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip I>:
FUN<160>;INF <90>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip I>>:
FUN<160>;INF <92>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip I>>>:
FUN<168>;INF <19>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip I<:
FUN<168>;INF <23>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip I2>:
FUN<168>;INF <58>; TYP <2>;COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip I2>>:
FUN<168>;INF <75>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip I2>>>:
FUN<168>;INF <77>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip Therm:
FUN<168>;INF <16>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Breaker failure trip:
FUN<160>;INF <85>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Broken conductor trip:
FUN<168>;INF <39>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Manual Close (SOTF, input):
FUN<168>;INF <238>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
SOTF trip:
FUN<168>;INF <239>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logic Equation A trip:
FUN<168>;INF <144>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logic Equation B trip:
FUN<168>;INF <145>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logic Equation C trip:
FUN<168>;INF <146>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logic Equation D trip:
FUN<168>;INF <147>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logic Equation E trip:
FUN<168>;INF <196>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logic Equation F trip:
FUN<168>;INF <197>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logic Equation G trip:
FUN<168>;INF <198>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Logic Equation H trip:
FUN<168>;INF <199>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 96/130
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
P127 only
−
Trip IN>>>>:
FUN<168>;INF <25>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip U<:
FUN<169>;INF <23>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip U<<:
FUN<169>;INF <101>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip U>:
FUN<169>;INF <90>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip U>>:
FUN<169>;INF <91>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip P>:
FUN<169>;INF <152>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip P>>:
FUN<169>;INF <153>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip P<:
FUN<169>;INF <156>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip P<<:
FUN<169>;INF <157>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip Q>:
FUN<169>;INF <160>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip Q>>:
FUN<169>;INF <161>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip Q<:
FUN<169>;INF <164>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip Q<<:
FUN<169>;INF <165>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip F1:
FUN<169>;INF <113>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip F2:
FUN<169>;INF <115>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip F3:
FUN<169>;INF <117>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip F4:
FUN<169>;INF <119>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip F5:
FUN<169>;INF <121>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip F6:
FUN<169>;INF <123>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip dFdT1:
FUN<169>;INF <128>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip dFdT2:
FUN<169>;INF <129>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip dFdT3:
FUN<169>;INF <130>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip dFdT4:
FUN<169>;INF <131>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip dFdT5:
FUN<169>;INF <132>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Trip dFdT6:
FUN<169>;INF <133>; TYP <2>; COT<1> ↑↓
Auto-recloser Indications (monitor direction):
P127 + P126
−
Circuit Breaker ‘ON’ by short-time autorecloser:
FUN<160>;INF <128>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Circuit Breaker ‘ON’ by long-time autorecloser:
FUN<160>;INF <129>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Autorecloser internally locked:
FUN<160>;INF <130>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Autorecloser externally locked:
FUN<168>;INF <68>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Autorecloser successful:
FUN<168>;INF <64>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
CB in O/O (« closed ») position:
FUN<168>;INF <33>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
CB in F/O (« open ») position:
FUN<168>;INF <34>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 97/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.3
−
Trip TC:
FUN<168>;INF <1>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
−
Close TC:
FUN<168>;INF <2>; TYP <1>; COT<1> ↑↓
System state
It is given in the answer to the General Interrogation (GI).
Relay state information is Class 1 data, they are systematically sent to the master station, during a
General Interrogation.
The list of processed data, following a General Interrogation, is given below; it is a sub-assembly of
the spontaneous messages list, so like spontaneous messages, these data are generated on rising
and falling edge.
The following indications are sent to the master station if the option “Basic” or “Advanced
GI” is chosen in the ‘COMMUNICATION / GI Select’ menu.
Status indications (monitor direction):
P127 + P126 + P125
−
Local parameter Setting active:
FUN<160>;INF <22>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Signals&measurements blocking active:
FUN<160>;INF <20>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Commands blocking active:
FUN<168>;INF <151>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Maintenance mode active:
FUN<168>;INF <7>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Setting group number 1 active:
FUN<160>;INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Setting group number 2 active:
FUN<160>;INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Auxiliary input 1:
FUN<160>;INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Auxiliary input 2:
FUN<160>;INF <28>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Auxiliary input 3:
FUN<160>;INF <29>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Auxiliary input 4:
FUN<160>;INF <30>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Auxiliary input 5:
FUN<168>;INF <96>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Auxiliary input 6:
FUN<168>;INF <97>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Auxiliary input 7:
FUN<168>;INF <98>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical input 1:
FUN<168>;INF <160>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical input 2:
FUN<168>;INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical input 3:
FUN<168>;INF <162>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical input 4:
FUN<168>;INF <163>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical input 5:
FUN<168>;INF <164>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical output 1:
FUN<168>;INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical output 2:
FUN<168>;INF <177>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical output 3:
FUN<168>;INF <178>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical output 4:
FUN<168>;INF <179>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Watch Dog output:
FUN<168>;INF <180>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical output 5:
FUN<168>;INF <181>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical output 6:
FUN<168>;INF <182>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 98/130
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
P127 + P126
−
Autorecloser active:
FUN<160>;INF <16>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Auxiliary input 5:
FUN<168>;INF <96>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Auxiliary input 6:
FUN<168>;INF <97>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Auxiliary input 7:
FUN<168>;INF <98>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical input 6:
FUN<168>;INF <165>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical input 7:
FUN<168>;INF <166>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical output 7:
FUN<168>;INF <183>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical output 8:
FUN<168>;INF <184>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
P127 only (optional board)
−
Auxiliary input 8:
FUN<168>;INF <99>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Auxiliary input 9:
FUN<168>;INF <100>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Auxiliary input 10:
FUN<168>;INF <101>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Auxiliary input 11:
FUN<168>;INF <102>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Auxiliary input 12:
FUN<168>;INF <103>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical input 8:
FUN<168>;INF <167>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical input 9:
FUN<168>;INF <168>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical input A:
FUN<168>;INF <169>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical input B:
FUN<168>;INF <170>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Logical input C:
FUN<168>;INF <171>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
P127 only
−
Setting group number 3 active:
FUN<160>;INF <25>; TYP <1>; COT<9> ↑↓
−
Setting group number 4 active:
FUN<160>;INF <26>; TYP <1>; COT<9> ↑↓
−
Setting group number 5 active:
FUN<168>;INF<41>; TYP <1>; COT<9> ↑↓
−
Setting group number 6 active:
FUN<168>;INF<42>; TYP <1>; COT<9> ↑↓
−
Setting group number 7 active:
FUN<168>;INF<43>; TYP <1>; COT<9> ↑↓
−
Setting group number 8 active:
FUN<168>;INF<44>; TYP <1>; COT<9> ↑↓
Supervision Indications (monitor direction):
P127 + P126
−
Trip Circuit Supervision:
FUN<160>;INF <36>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Group warning (Minor hardware alarm):
FUN<160>;INF <46>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Group alarm (Major hardware alarm):
FUN<160>;INF <47>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
Start Indications (monitor direction):
P127 + P126 + P125
−
Start / pick-up N:
FUN<160>;INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
General Start / pick-up:
FUN<160>;INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start IN>:
FUN<168>;INF <12>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 99/130
−
Start IN>>:
FUN<168>;INF <13>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start IN>>>:
FUN<168>;INF <14>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start UN>>>>:
FUN<169>;INF <14>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start PN>:
FUN<169>;INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start PN>>:
FUN<169>;INF <85>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
P127 + P126
−
Start I>:
FUN<168>;INF <9>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start I>>:
FUN<168>;INF <10>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start I>>>:
FUN<168>;INF <11>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start I<:
FUN<168>;INF <73>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start I2>:
FUN<168>;INF <57>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start I2>>:
FUN<168>;INF <74>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start I2>>>:
FUN<168>;INF <76>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start Therm:
FUN<168>;INF <15>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
P127 only
−
Start IN>>>>:
FUN<168>;INF <24>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start U>:
FUN<169>;INF <9>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start U>>:
FUN<169>;INF <10>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start U<:
FUN<169>;INF <73>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start U<<:
FUN<169>;INF <100>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start CTS:
FUN<160>;INF <32>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
51V: I>> blocked:
FUN<169>;INF <134>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
51V: I>>> blocked:
FUN<169>;INF <135>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start VTS:
FUN<169>;INF <136>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start V2>:
FUN<169>;INF <137>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start V2>>:
FUN<169>;INF <138>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Blocking Inrush:
FUN<168>;INF <225>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start F1:
FUN<169>;INF <112>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start F2:
FUN<169>;INF <114>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start F3:
FUN<169>;INF <116>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start F4:
FUN<169>;INF <118>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start F5:
FUN<169>;INF <120>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start F6:
FUN<169>;INF <122>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Non measured Freq.:
FUN<169>;INF <124>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start P>:
FUN<169>;INF <150>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start P>>:
FUN<169>;INF <151>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start P<:
FUN<169>;INF <154>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 100/130
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
−
Start P<<:
FUN<169>;INF <155>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start Q>:
FUN<169>;INF <158>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start Q>>:
FUN<169>;INF <159>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start Q<:
FUN<169>;INF <162>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Start Q<<:
FUN<169>;INF <163>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
Auto-recloser Indications (monitor direction):
P127 + P126
−
Autorecloser internally locked:
FUN<160>;INF <130>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
Autorecloser externally locked:
FUN<168>;INF <68>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
CB in O/O (« closed ») position:
FUN<168>;INF <33>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
−
CB in F/O (« open ») position:
FUN<168>;INF <34>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
Fault Indications (monitor direction):
The following indications are sent to the master station only if the option “Advanced GI” is
chosen in the ‘COMMUNICATION / GI Select’ menu.
−
General Trip:
FUN<160>;INF <68>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip IN>:
FUN<160>;INF <92>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip IN>>:
FUN<160>;INF <93>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip IN>>>:
FUN<168>;INF <22>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip UN>>>>:
FUN<169>;INF <22>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip PN>:
FUN<169>;INF <86>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip PN>>:
FUN<169>;INF <87>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip L1:
FUN<160>;INF <69>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip L2:
FUN<160>;INF <70>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip L3:
FUN<160>;INF <71>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip I>:
FUN<160>;INF <90>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip I>>:
FUN<160>;INF <91>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip I>>>:
FUN<168>;INF <19>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip I<:
FUN<168>;INF <23>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip I2>:
FUN<168>;INF <58>; TYP <2>;COT<9>
−
Trip I2>>:
FUN<168>;INF <75>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip I2>>>:
FUN<168>;INF <77>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip Therm:
FUN<168>;INF <16>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Breaker failure trip:
FUN<160>;INF <85>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Broken conductor:
FUN<168>;INF <39>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Local Mode (input):
FUN<168>;INF <40>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Manual Close (SOTF, input):
FUN<168>;INF <238>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
SOTF trip:
FUN<168>;INF <239>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 101/130
−
Cold load Start:
FUN<168>;INF <37>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Logic Equation A trip:
FUN<168>;INF <144>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Logic Equation B trip:
FUN<168>;INF <145>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Logic Equation C trip:
FUN<168>;INF <146>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Logic Equation D trip:
FUN<168>;INF <147>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Logic Equation E trip:
FUN<168>;INF <196>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Logic Equation F trip:
FUN<168>;INF <197>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Logic Equation G trip:
FUN<168>;INF <198>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Logic Equation H trip:
FUN<168>;INF <199>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip IN>>>>:
FUN<168>;INF <25>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip U<:
FUN<169>;INF <23>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip U<<:
FUN<169>;INF <101>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip U>:
FUN<169>;INF <90>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip U>>:
FUN<169>;INF <91>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip P>:
FUN<169>;INF <152>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip P>>:
FUN<169>;INF <153>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip P<:
FUN<169>;INF <156>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip P<<:
FUN<169>;INF <157>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip Q>:
FUN<169>;INF <160>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip Q>>:
FUN<169>;INF <161>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip Q<:
FUN<169>;INF <164>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip Q<<:
FUN<169>;INF <165>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip F1:
FUN<169>;INF <113>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip F2:
FUN<169>;INF <115>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip F3:
FUN<169>;INF <117>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip F4:
FUN<169>;INF <119>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip F5:
FUN<169>;INF <121>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip F6:
FUN<169>;INF <123>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip dFdT1:
FUN<169>;INF <128>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip dFdT2:
FUN<169>;INF <129>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip dFdT3:
FUN<169>;INF <130>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip dFdT4:
FUN<169>;INF <131>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip dFdT5:
FUN<169>;INF <132>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
−
Trip dFdT6:
FUN<169>;INF <133>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 102/130
1.4
Processed commands
1.4.1
System commands
−
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Synchronisation Command: ASDU 6
FUN<255>;INF <0>; TYP <6>; COT<8>
This command can be sent to a specific relay, or global.
The time sent by master is the time of the first bit of the frame. The relay synchronises with this
time, corrected by the frame transmission delay. After updating its time, the relay sends back
acknowledgement info to the master, by giving its new current time. This acknowledgement
message will be an event of ASDU 6 type.
−
General Interrogation Initialisation command: ASDU 7
FUN<255>;INF <0>; TYP <7>; COT<9>
This command starts the relay interrogation.
The relay then sends a list of data containing the relay state (see the list described above).
The GI command contains a scan number which will be included in the answers of the GI cycle
generated by the GI command.
If a data has just changed before extracted by the GI, the new state is sent to the master station.
When an event is generated during the GI cycle, the event is sent in priority, and the GI cycle is
temporarily interrupted. The end of a GI consists in sending an ASDU 8 to the master station.
If, during a General Interrogation cycle, another GI Initialisation command is received, the previous
answer is stopped, and the new GI cycle is started.
1.4.2
General commands
Control direction: ASDU 20
P127 + P126 + P125
−
LEDS Reset: this command acknowledges all alarms on Front Panel:
FUN<160>;INF<19>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
−
Setting group number 1:
FUN<160>;INF<23>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
−
Setting group number 2:
FUN<160>;INF<24>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
−
Trip TC:
FUN<168>;INF<1>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
−
Close TC:
FUN<168>;INF<2>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
−
Unlock relays:
FUN<168>;INF<231>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
−
General Reset:
FUN<168>;INF<232>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
−
First alarm acknowledge:
FUN<168>;INF <53>; TYP <20>; COT<20>
−
All alarms acknowledge:
FUN<168>;INF <52>; TYP <20>; COT<20>
P127 + P126
−
Auto-recloser On / Off:
FUN<160>;INF<16>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
−
tCOMM1 order:
FUN<168>;INF<234>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
−
tCOMM2 order:
FUN<168>;INF<235>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
−
tCOMM3 order:
FUN<168>;INF<227>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
−
tCOMM4 order:
FUN<168>;INF<228>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 103/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
−
Setting group number 3:
FUN<160>;INF<25>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
−
Setting group number 4:
FUN<160>;INF<26>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
−
Setting group number 5:
FUN<168>;INF<41>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
−
Setting group number 6:
FUN<168>;INF<42>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
−
Setting group number 7:
FUN<168>;INF<43>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
−
Setting group number 8:
FUN<168>;INF<44>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
−
Setting group copy:
FUN<168>;INF<240>; TYP<20>; COT<20>
This command must be used in association with data mapped at address 664h (source setting
group) and 665h (destination setting group).
After executing one of these commands, the relay sends an acknowledgement message, which
contains the result of command execution.
If a state change is the consequence of the command, it must be sent in a ASDU 1 with COT 12
(remote operation).
If the relay receives another command message from the master station before sending the
acknowledgement message, it will be discarded.
Commands which are not processed by the relay are rejected with a negative acknowledgement
message.
1.4.3
Private commands – Setting management
1.4.3.1
ASDUs for setting read
ASDU 140 (8Ch) 16 or 32 bits value read:
FUN field contains the offset of the measure or of the parameter defined from the beginning of the
page, and INF field contains the page number.
ASDUs of answer to setting read:
−
ASDU 17 (11h): 16 bits analog protection parameter:
FUN and INF: same definition than ASDU 140, parameter is transmitted first low-byte, then high
byte, then a 4 byte time tag is transmitted.
This ASDU is used for all parameter pages: 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 36 (group 1), 38 (group 2), 40 (group 3),
42 (group 4), 44 (group 5), 46 (group 6), 48 (group 7) and 50 (group 8).
−
ASDU 49 (31h): 16 bits analog protection signal:
FUN and INF: same definition than ASDU 140, parameter is transmitted in MW field, first low-byte,
then high byte, then a 4 byte time tag is transmitted.
This ASDU is used for signals and measurements pages: 0 and 35.
−
ASDU 169 (A9h): 32 bits analog protection parameter:
FUN and INF: same definition than ASDU 140, parameter is transmitted first low-word (low-byte,
then high byte), then high word, then a QDS quality descriptor, then a 4 byte time tag is
transmitted.
This ASDU is used for all parameter pages: 1, 2, 3, 6, 36 (group 1), 38 (group 2), 40 (group 3), 42
(group 4), 44 (group 5), 46 (group 6), 48 (group 7) and 50 (group 8).
−
ASDU 4: 32 bits floating-point analog protection parameter:
FUN and INF: same definition than ASDU 140, floating-point parameter is transmitted first lowword (low-byte, then high byte), then high word, then relative date field forced to 0, then FAN field
forced to 0, then a 4 byte time tag is transmitted.
This ASDU is used for signals and measurements pages: 0 and 35.
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 104/130
1.4.3.2
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
ASDUs for setting write:
ASDU 144 (90h) 16 bits analog protection value write:
FUN and INF: same definition than ASDU 140, parameter is transmitted first low-byte, then high
byte.
ASDU of answer to ASDU 144 setting write:
−
ASDU 17 (11h): 16 bits analog protection parameter:
FUN and INF: same definition than ASDU 140, parameter is transmitted first low-byte, then high
byte, then a 4 byte time tag is transmitted.
ASDU 201 (C9h) 32 bits analog protection value write:
FUN and INF: same definition than ASDU 140, parameter is transmitted first low-word (low-byte,
then high byte), then high word.
ASDU of answer to ASDU 201 setting write:
−
ASDU 169 (A9h): 32 bits analog protection parameter:
FUN and INF: same definition than ASDU 140, parameter is transmitted first low-word (low-byte,
then high byte), then high word, then a QDS quality descriptor, then a 4 byte time tag is
transmitted.
1.4.3.3
Error messages
All errors detected in settings management are returned to the master in a special message called
“Rejection telegram”, which is a special ASDU 49 with FUN = 7Fh and INF = FFh, and the error
code (rejection cause”) contained in the MW value.
List of rejection causes used for P127:
CAUSE OF
REJECTION
MEANING
80H 01H
Message received with command or indication lock active
80H 06H
Unknown command; Structure type (DT field) invalid
80H 07H
Unknown parameter address
80H 0AH
Wrong value in receive message
80H 0BH
Hardware or software option does not exist
80H 15H
Date, time invalid (>30 days, >24 hours etc.)
80H 30H
Wrong Data TYPE in message
80H 33H
Wrong INF field in Message
80H 64H
Invalid command: function group is not configured
80H 72H
Control function cannot be assigned
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 105/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.5
Relay reinitialisation
In case of relay re initialization, the relay send to the master station:
Availability
A
message
start/restart
indicating
relay
(FUN<160>;INF <5>; TYP <5> COT <5>)
or a message indicating Reset CU
(FUN<160>;INF <5>; TYP <3> COT <4>)
or a message indicating Reset
FCB
(FUN<160>;INF <5>; TYP <2> COT <3>)
Each identification message of the relay (ASDU 5) contains the manufacturer name in 8 ASCII
characters (“AREVA”) and 2 free bytes containing: « 127 » or « 126 », or « 125 » in decimal format,
then 2 free bytes containing the software version number in decimal (for ex.: 112 corresponds to
“11.C”).
1.6
Cyclic Messages
Only measurands can be stored in these messages.
Measurands values are stored in lower levels of communication, before polling by master station.
In ASDU 9
FUN<160>;INF <148>; TYP <9>; COT<2>
The following values are stored (with a rate such as: 2,4 * nominal value = 4096):
P127 + P126
−
RMS Ia,
−
RMS Ib,
−
RMS Ic,
P127 only
−
RMS Ua,
−
RMS Ub,
−
RMS Uc,
−
P,
−
Q,
−
Frequency (If frequency is out of bounds, the value is set to « unvalid ».
−
In ASDU 3, (ASDU3.4)
FUN<160>;INF <147>; TYP <3>; COT<2>
the following values are stored (with a rate such as: 2,4 * nominal value = 4096):
−
RMS IN,
−
RMS Un.
In first ASDU 77, which is a private ASDU,
FUN<168>;INF <209>; TYP <77>; COT<2>
The following values are stored (in IEEE 32 bits floating-point format):
−
First value: invalid
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 106/130
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
P127 + P126
−
I1 (module, unit: V)
−
I2 (module, unit: V)
−
Thermal state (in %).
P127 + P126 + P125
−
Harmonic power Pe (unit: W).
−
Harmonic power IeCos (unit: A).
−
Angle Ie ^ Ue (unit: degree).
P127 + P126
−
Angle Ia ^ Ib (unit: degree).
−
Angle Ia ^ Ic (unit: degree).
−
Angle Ia ^ Ue (unit: degree).
P127 only
−
Angle Ia ^ Va (unit: degree), or Ia ^Uab if cabling mode is 2Vpp + Vr .
−
Angle Ia ^ Vb (unit: degree), or Ia ^Ubc if cabling mode is 2Vpp + Vr .
−
Angle Ia ^ Vc (unit: degree), or Ia ^Uca if cabling mode is 2Vpp + Vr .
−
Apparent power (unit: KVA).
−
Apparent energy (unit: KVAh).
These values are not rated.
In second ASDU 77 (private option active)
FUN<248>;INF <25>; TYP <77>; COT<2>
The following 4 energy values are stored (in IEEE 32 bits floating-point format):
P127 only
−
Positive active energy (unit: KWh).
−
Negative active energy (unit: KWh).
−
Positive reactive energy (unit: KVARh).
−
Negative reactive energy (unit: KVARh).
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.7
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 107/130
Disturbance record extraction
−
The disturbance extraction procedure with IEC870-5-103 in MICOM Px2x relays is in
conformance with IEC870-5-103 standard definition.
The maximum disturbance record number stored in a P12y is 5.
−
The disturbance record mapping is the following:
P127 only
−
Number of analog channels transmitted: 8, which are:
0
Channel 1: Ia current (Phase L1).
1
Channel 2: Ib current (Phase L2).
2
Channel 3: Ic current (Phase L3).
3
Channel 4: IN current (Earth).
4
Channel 5: Ua voltage.
5
Channel 6: Ub voltage.
6
Channel 7: Uc/U0 voltage.
7
Channel 8: Frequency.
Identifiers of tags (30) transmitted in ASDU 29 (logical information) for P127:
0
Tag number 1: General start:
FUN <160> INF <84>
1
Tag number 2: General Trip:
FUN <160> INF <68>
2
Tag number 3: CB Failure:
FUN <160> INF <85>
3
Tag number 4: tI>:
FUN <160> INF <90>
4
Tag number 5: tI>>:
FUN <160> INF <92>
5
Tag number 6: tIN> (Earth):
FUN <160> INF <92>
6
Tag number 7: tIN>> (Earth):
FUN <160> INF <93>
7
Tag number 8: PN>:
FUN <168> INF <86>
8
Tag number 9: PN>>:
FUN <168> INF <87>
9
Tag number 10: Log input 1:
FUN <168> INF <160>
10 Tag number 11: Log input 2:
FUN <168> INF <161>
11 Tag number 12: Log input 3:
FUN <168> INF <162>
12 Tag number 13: Log input 4:
FUN <168> INF <163>
13 Tag number 14: Log input 5:
FUN <168> INF <164>
14 Tag number 15: Log input 6:
FUN <168> INF <165>
15 Tag number 16: Log input 7:
FUN <168> INF <166>
16 Tag number 17: Log input 8:
FUN <168> INF <167>
17 Tag number 18: Log input 9:
FUN <168> INF <168>
18 Tag number 19: Log input 10:
FUN <168> INF <169>
19 Tag number 20: Log input 11:
FUN <168> INF <170>
20 Tag number 21: Log input 12:
FUN <168> INF <171>
21 Tag number 22: Log output 1:
FUN <168> INF <176>
22 Tag number 23: Log output 2:
FUN <168> INF <177>
23 Tag number 24: Log output 3:
FUN <168> INF <178>
24 Tag number 25: Log output 4:
FUN <168> INF <179>
25 Tag number 26: Log output 5 (Watch-dog):
FUN <168> INF <180>
26 Tag number 27: Log output 6:
FUN <168> INF <181>
27 Tag number 28: Log output 7:
FUN <168> INF <182>
28 Tag number 29: Log output 8:
FUN <168> INF <183>
29 Tag number 30: Log output 9:
FUN <168> INF <184>
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 108/130
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
P126 only
Number of analog channels transmitted: 6, which are:
0
Channel 1: Ia current (Phase L1).
1
Channel 2: Ib current (Phase L2).
2
Channel 3: Ic current (Phase L3).
3
Channel 4: IN current (Earth).
4
Channel 5: Uc/U0 voltage.
5
Channel 6: Frequency.
Identifiers of tags (25) transmitted in ASDU 29 (logical informations) for P126:
0
Tag number 1: General start:
FUN <160> INF <84>
1
Tag number 2: General Trip:
FUN <160> INF <68>
2
Tag number 3: CB Failure:
FUN <160> INF <85>
3
Tag number 4: tI>:
FUN <160> INF <90>
4
Tag number 5: tI>>:
FUN <160> INF <92>
5
Tag number 6: tIN> (Earth):
FUN <160> INF <92>
6
Tag number 7: tIN>> (Earth):
FUN <160> INF <93>
7
Tag number 8: PN>:
FUN <168> INF <86>
8
Tag number 9: PN>>:
FUN <168> INF <87>
9
Tag number 10: Log input 1:
FUN <168> INF <160>
10 Tag number 11: Log input 2:
FUN <168> INF <161>
11 Tag number 12: Log input 3:
FUN <168> INF <162>
12 Tag number 13: Log input 4:
FUN <168> INF <163>
13 Tag number 14: Log input 5:
FUN <168> INF <164>
14 Tag number 15: Log input 6:
FUN <168> INF <165>
15 Tag number 16: Log input 7:
FUN <168> INF <166>
16 Tag number 17: Log output 1:
FUN <168> INF <176>
17 Tag number 18: Log output 2:
FUN <168> INF <177>
18 Tag number 19: Log output 3:
FUN <168> INF <178>
19 Tag number 20: Log output 4:
FUN <168> INF <179>
20 Tag number 21: Log output 5 (Watch-dog):
FUN <168> INF <180>
21 Tag number 22: Log output 6:
FUN <168> INF <181>
22 Tag number 23: Log output 7:
FUN <168> INF <182>
23 Tag number 24: Log output 8:
FUN <168> INF <183>
24 Tag number 25: Log output 9:
FUN <168> INF <184>
P125 only
Number of analog channels transmitted: 3, which are:
0
Channel 1: IN current (Earth).
1
Channel 2: U0 voltage.
2
Channel 3: Frequency.
Identifiers of tags (17) transmitted in ASDU 29 (logical informations) for P125:
0
Tag number 1: General start:
FUN <160> INF <84>
1
Tag number 2: General Trip:
FUN <160> INF <68>
2
Tag number 3: tIN> (Earth):
FUN <160> INF <92>
3
Tag number 4: tIN>> (Earth):
FUN <160> INF <93>
4
Tag number 5: PN>:
FUN <168> INF <86>
5
Tag number 6: PN>>:
FUN <168> INF <87>
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.8
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 109/130
6
Tag number 7: Log input 1:
FUN <168> INF <160>
7
Tag number 8: Log input 2:
FUN <168> INF <161>
8
Tag number 9: Log input 3:
FUN <168> INF <162>
9
Tag number 10: Log input 4:
FUN <168> INF <163>
10 Tag number 11: Log output 1:
FUN <168> INF <176>
11 Tag number 12: Log output 2:
FUN <168> INF <177>
12 Tag number 13: Log output 3:
FUN <168> INF <178>
13 Tag number 14: Log output 4:
FUN <168> INF <179>
14 Tag number 15: Log output 5 (Watch-dog):
FUN <168> INF <180>
15 Tag number 16: Log output 6:
FUN <168> INF <181>
16 Tag number 17: Log output 7:
FUN <168> INF <182>
Fault data record extraction
The fault data are extracted with IEC870-5-103 in MICOM Px2x relays in conformance with AREVA
IEC870-5-103 private definitions described in document: MiCOMACAPart4_IEC60870-5-103_G.
These data are uploaded through ASDU 4 messages, containing the following values in IEEE 32
bits floating-point format, at the end of disturbance record upload, before the acknowledgement of
the record:
- fault number:
FUN <243> INF <1>
- active group (F55, 1 to 8):
FUN <243> INF <2>
- phase origin (F90):
FUN <243> INF <3>
- fault code (F61):
FUN <243> INF <4>
- measure unit (Format below):
FUN <243> INF <5>
- fault magnitude:
FUN <243> INF <6>
- fault Ia magnitude (unit= A):
FUN <243> INF <7>
- fault Ib magnitude (unit= A):
FUN <243> INF <8>
- fault Ic magnitude (unit= A):
FUN <243> INF <9>
- fault Ie magnitude (unit= A):
FUN <243> INF <10>
- fault Va magnitude (unit= V):
FUN <243> INF <11>
- fault Vb magnitude (unit= V):
FUN <243> INF <12>
- fault Vc magnitude (unit= V):
FUN <243> INF <13>
- fault Ue magnitude (unit= V):
FUN <243> INF <14>
- fault Ia ^ Ubc angle (unit= degree, 0 to 360):
FUN <243> INF <15>
- fault Ib ^ Uca angle (unit= degree, 0 to 360):
FUN <243> INF <16>
- fault Ic ^ Uab angle (unit= degree, 0 to 360):
FUN <243> INF <17>
- fault Ie ^ Ue angle (unit= degree, 0 to 360):
FUN <243> INF <18>
Measure unit format:
0 = No
1=V
2=A
3 = W (Active or reactive power).
4 = W for Pe power.
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE
Page 110/130
Communications
MiCOM P125-P126-P127
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP 3.0 DATABASE
Page 111/130
DNP 3.0 DATABASE
MICOM P125-P126-P127 – V15
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 112/130
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
BLANK PAGE
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP 3.0 DATABASE
Page 113/130
CONTENTS
1.
DNP-3 PROTOCOL
115
1.1
Purpose of this document
115
1.2
DNP V3.00 Device Profile
115
1.3
Implementation Table
118
1.4
Point List
120
1.4.1
Binary Input Points
120
1.4.2
Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks
125
1.4.3
Counters
127
1.4.4
Analog Inputs
128
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 114/130
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
BLANK PAGE
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 115/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.
DNP-3 PROTOCOL
1.1
Purpose of this document
The purpose of this document is to describe the specific implementation of the Distributed
Network Protocol (DNP) 3.0 within P12y MiCOM relays.
P12y uses the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library Version 2.18.
This document, in conjunction with the DNP 3.0 Basic 4 Document Set, and the DNP Subset
Definitions Document, provides complete information on how to communicate with P12y via
the DNP 3.0 protocol.
This implementation of DNP 3.0 is fully compliant with DNP 3.0 Subset Definition Level 2,
contains many Subset Level 3 features, and contains some functionality even beyond Subset
Level 3.
1.2
DNP V3.00 Device Profile
The following table provides a “Device Profile Document” in the standard format defined in the
DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. While it is referred to in the DNP 3.0 Subset
Definitions as a “Document,” it is only a component of a total interoperability guide. This table,
in combination with the following should provide a complete interoperability/configuration
guide for P12y:
the Implementation Table provided in paragraph 4.3 (beginning on page 118),
and the Point List Tables provided in Section 4.4 (beginning on page 120).
DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
(Also see the Implementation Table in Section 1.3, beginning on page 117).
Vendor Name: Schneider Electric
Device Name: SERIAL 20 Platform using the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave
Source Code Library, Version 2.18.
Highest DNP Level Supported:
For Requests: Level 2
For Responses: Level 2
Device Function:
7
Master
…
Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels
Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table):
For static (non-change-event) object requests, request qualifier codes 00 and 01 (startstop), 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index) are supported in addition to
request qualifier code 06 (no range – or all points).
Static object requests received with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with
qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests received with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be
responded with qualifiers 17 or 28.
For change-event object requests, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
16-bit and 32-bit Analog Change Events with Time may be requested.
The read function code for Object 50 (Time and Date), variation 1, is supported.
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets):
Transmitted:
292
Received
292
Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted:
2048
Received:
2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries:
7 None
… Fixed at 2
7 Configurable
Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
…
7
None
Configurable
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 116/130
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
(Also see the Implementation Table in Section 1.3, beginning on page 117).
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
… Never
… Always
… Sometimes
… Configurable
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
… Never
… Always
… When reporting Event Data
… When sending multi-fragment responses
… Sometimes
… Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm:
… None
Complete Appl. Fragment: … None
… Fixed at 100 m … Variable
… Fixed at ____
… Variable
… Configurable.
… Configurable
Application Confirm:
… Fixed at 1s
… Variable
… Configurable
Complete Appl. Response: … None
… Fixed at ____
… Variable
… Configurable
Others:
Binary input change scanning period:
Analog input change scanning period:
5ms
1s
… None
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
WRITE Binary Outputs
SELECT/OPERATE
DIRECT OPERATE
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK
…
…
…
…
Never
Never
Never
Never
…
…
…
…
Always
Always
Always
Always
…
…
…
…
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
…
…
…
…
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Count > 1
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
…
…
…
…
…
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
…
…
…
…
…
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
…
…
…
…
…
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
…
…
…
…
…
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Queue
Clear Queue
… Never … Always
… Never … Always
Reports Binary Input Change Events when
no specific variation requested:
…
…
…
…
Never
Only time-tagged for P126 and P127
Only non-time-tagged for P125
Configurable
Sends Unsolicited Responses:
…
…
…
…
…
…
Never
Configurable
Only certain objects
Sometimes (attach explanation)
ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
Function codes supported
… Sometimes
… Sometimes
… Configurable
… Configurable
Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events
when no specific variation requested:
…
…
…
…
Never for P121
Binary Input Change With Time for
P126 and P127
Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
…
…
…
Never
When Device Restarts
When Status Flags Change
No other options are permitted.
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 117/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
(Also see the Implementation Table in Section 1.3, beginning on page 117).
Default Counter Object/Variation:
…
…
…
…
…
No Counters Reported
Configurable
Default Object:
20
Default Variation:
5
Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
…
…
Yes
No
Counters Roll Over at:
…
…
…
…
…
…
No Counters Reported
Configurable (attach explanation)
16 Bits
32 Bits
Other Value: _____
Point-by-point list attached
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 118/130
1.3
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Implementation Table
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the
P12y in both request messages and in response messages.
For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will
be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will
be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are
always responded.
In the table below the text shaded as indicates
Subset Level 3 functionality
(beyond Subset Level 2), and text shaded as
Subset Level 3
beyond Subset
Level 3
indicates
functionality
beyond Subset Level 3.
OBJECT
Object
Number
1
Variation
Number
0
Description
Function Codes
(dec)
REQUEST
(Library will
parse)
Qualifier
Codes (hex)
Binary Input (Variation 0 is used
to request default variation)
1
(read)
1
Binary Input
1
(read)
1
2
Binary Input with Status
1
(read)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index
2
0
1
(read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
2
1(default –
see note 1 for
P120 - P121)
Binary Input Change (Variation 0
is used to request default
variation)
Binary Input Change without Time
1
(read)
2
Binary Input Change with Time
1
0
2
Binary Output Status (Variation 0
is used to request default
variation)
Binary Output Status
12
1
Control Relay Output Block
20
0
Binary Counter (Variation 0 is
used to request default variation)
20
1
32-Bit Binary Counter
20
2
16-Bit Binary Counter
20
5
32-Bit Binary Counter without
Flag
20
6
16-Bit Binary Counter without
Flag
21
0
Frozen Counter (Variation 0 is
used to request default variation)
3
(select)
4
(operate)
5
(direct op)
6 (dir. op, noack)
1
(read)
7
(freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
1
(read)
7
(freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
1
(read)
7
(freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
1
(read)
7
(freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
1
(read)
7
(freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
1
(read)
21
1
32-Bit Frozen Counter
1
2
10
10
(default –
see note 1)
(default –
see note 1)
(default –
see note 1)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
RESPONSE
(Library will
respond with)
Function
Qualifier
Codes (dec)
Codes (hex)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index –
see note 2)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index –
see note 2)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129
(response)
17, 28
(index)
(read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129
(response)
17, 28
(index)
1
(read)
1
(read)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
00, 01
(start-stop)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index –
see note 2)
129
(response)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index –
see note 2)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index –
see note 2)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index –
see note 2)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index –
see note 2)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index –
see note 2)
22
1
(read)
echo of request
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 119/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
OBJECT
Object
Number
21
Variation
Number
2
21
Description
Function Codes
(dec)
16-Bit Frozen Counter
1
(read)
9
32-Bit Frozen Counter without
Flag
1
(read)
21
10
16-Bit Frozen Counter without
Flag
1
(read)
30
0
Analog Input (Variation 0 is used
to request default variation)
1
(read)
1
32-Bit Analog Input
1
(read)
30
2
16-Bit Analog Input
30
3
32-Bit Analog Input without Flag
1
(read)
30
4
16-Bit Analog Input without Flag
1
(read)
32
0
Analog Change Event (Variation
0 is used to request default
variation)
32-Bit Analog Change Event
without Time
1
(read)
1
30
32
32
(default –
see note 1
1
(default –
see note 1)
RESPONSE
(Library will
respond with)
Function
Qualifier
Codes (dec)
Codes (hex)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index –
see note 2)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index –
see note 2)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index –
see note 2)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index –
see note 2)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index –
see note 2)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index –
see note 2)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index –
see note 2)
(read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129
(response)
17, 28
(index)
1
(read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129
(response)
17, 28
(index)
1
(read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129
(response)
17, 28
(index)
1
(read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
129
(response)
17, 28
(index)
1
(read)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index –
see note 2)
1
2
(read)
(write)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
00, 01
(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07
(limited qty
= 1)
08
(limited qty)
17, 28
(index)
129
(response)
00, 01
17, 28
(start-stop)
(index –
see note 2)
129
(response)
07
(limited qty)
(qty = 1)
1
(read)
32
3
32
4
50
0
16-Bit Analog Change Event
without Time
32-Bit Analog Change Event with
Time
16-Bit Analog Change Event with
Time
Time and Date
1
Time and Date
52
2
Time Delay Fine
60
0
Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data
1
(read)
06 (no range, or all)
60
1
Class 0 Data
1
(read)
06 (no range, or all)
129
17,28
60
2
Class 1 Data
1
(read)
129
17,28
60
3
Class 2 Data
1
(read)
129
17,28
60
4
Class 3 Data
1
(read)
129
17,28
80
1
Internal Indications
2
(write)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
00
(start-stop)
(index must =7)
50
2
REQUEST
(Library will
parse)
Qualifier
Codes (hex)
(default –
see note 1)
No Object (function code only) –See
Note 3
No Object (function code only)
No Object (function code only)
13 (cold restart)
14 (warm restart)
23 (delay meas.)
Note 1:
A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is
requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.
Note 2:
For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only
responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively.
Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or
08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For change-event
objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3:
For P12y, a cold restart is implemented as a warm restart – the
executable is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 120/130
1.4
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Point Listt
The tables in the following sections identify all the individual data points provided by this
implementation of DNP 3.0. uses the database protection.
1.4.1
Binary Input Points
Every Binary Input Status points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in
one of classes 1, 2 or 3.
Binary Input Points
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number:
2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
P125
Point
Index
P126
Point
Index
P127
Point
Index
0
0
0
1
1
2
2
3
1 (Binary Input without status)
1 for P125 and
2 (Binary Input Change with
Time) for P126 and P127
init
val.
Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or
none)
Output relay 1 (trip)
0
1
1
Output relay 2
0
2
2
Output relay 3
0
2
3
3
Output relay 4
0
2
4
4
4
Output relay 0 ( watch dog)
0
2
5
5
5
Output relay 5
0
2
6
6
6
Output relay 6
0
2
7
7
Output relay 7
0
2
8
8
Output relay 8
0
2
7
9
9
Opto isolator 1
0
2
8
10
10
Opto isolator 2
0
2
9
11
11
Opto isolator 3
0
2
10
12
12
Opto isolator 4
0
2
13
13
Opto isolator 5
0
2
14
14
Opto isolator 6
0
2
15
15
Opto isolator 7
0
2
16
16
Phase overcurrent stage 1 start
0
1
17
17
Phase overcurrent stage 1 trip
0
1
18
18
Phase overcurrent stage 2 start
0
1
19
19
Phase overcurrent stage 2 trip
0
1
20
20
Phase overcurrent stage 3 start
0
1
21
21
Phase overcurrent stage 3 trip
0
1
11
22
22
Earth overcurrent stage 1 start
0
1
12
23
23
Earth overcurrent stage 1 trip
0
1
13
24
24
Earth overcurrent stage 2 start
0
1
14
25
25
Earth overcurrent stage 2 trip
0
1
15
26
26
Earth overcurrent stage 3 start
0
1
16
27
27
Earth overcurrent stage 3 trip
0
1
28
28
I min Start
0
1
29
29
tImin trip
0
1
30
30
I2> start
0
1
31
31
tI2> trip
0
1
32
32
I2>> start
0
1
33
33
tI2>> trip
0
1
34
34
I2>>> start
0
1
35
35
tI2>>> trip
0
1
36
U< start
0
1
37
tU< trip
0
1
38
U<< start
0
1
Name/Description
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 121/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Binary Input Points
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number:
2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
P125
Point
Index
17
P126
Point
Index
36
P127
Point
Index
Name/Description
1 (Binary Input without status)
1 for P125 and
2 (Binary Input Change with
Time) for P126 and P127
init
val.
Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or
none)
39
tU<< trip
0
1
40
U> start
0
1
41
tU> trip
0
1
42
U>> start
0
1
43
tU>> trip
0
1
44
UN>>>> start
0
1
18
37
45
tUN>>>> trip
0
1
19
38
46
PN> start
0
1
20
39
47
PN> trip
0
1
21
40
48
PN>> start
0
1
22
41
49
PN>> trip
0
1
42
50
Thermal start
0
1
43
51
Thermal trip
0
1
23
44
52
Taux1
0
1
24
45
53
Taux2
0
1
25
46
54
Taux3
0
1
26
47
55
Taux4
0
1
48
56
Logical Equation A trip
0
1
49
57
Logical Equation B trip
0
1
50
58
Logical Equation C trip
0
1
51
59
Logical Equation D trip
0
1
52
60
Broken conductor
0
1
27
53
61
cb failure
0
1
54
62
Number of cb operation
0
1
55
63
Cb operation time alarm
0
1
56
64
sa2n
0
1
57
65
trip circuit alarm
0
1
58
66
cb close time alarm
0
1
59
67
Internally locked autoreclosure
0
1
60
68
Successful autoreclosure
0
1
61
69
In Progress autoreclosure
0
1
62
70
Final trip (autorecloser)
0
1
63
71
0
3
64
72
Fault Configuration of
autoreclosure
logic Selectivity 1
0
1
65
73
logic Selectivity 2
0
1
66
74
Blocking logic 1
0
1
67
75
Blocking logic 2
0
1
68
76
52a
0
1
69
77
52b
0
1
70
78
Lack of SF6
0
1
71
79
Cold load Pick up
0
1
72
80
Start tBF
0
1
73
81
Trip SOTF
0
1
74
82
Manual Close
0
1
1
75
83
Local Mode
0
84
I>> blocked (VCTRLI)
0
1
85
I>>> blocked (VCTRLI)
0
1
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 122/130
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Binary Input Points
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number:
2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
P125
Point
Index
P126
Point
Index
P127
Point
Index
1 (Binary Input without status)
1 for P125 and
2 (Binary Input Change with
Time) for P126 and P127
Name/Description
init
val.
Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or
none)
86
VTS
0
1
87
Start V2>
0
1
88
Start V2>>
0
1
28
76
89
De latching by a logical input
0
1
29
77
90
0
1
0
1
30
78
92
De latching of the Tripping output relay by
remote order
Closing order by remote order
31
79
92
Tripping order by remote order
0
1
80
93
0
1
32
81
94
Thermal Resetting by
communication
Shifting to maintenance mode (remote order)
0
1
33
82
95
Major material Alarms
0
1
34
83
96
Minor material Alarms
0
1
84
97
Phase overcurrent stage 1 trip alarm (latched)
0
3
85
98
Phase overcurrent stage 2 trip alarm (latched)
0
3
86
99
Phase overcurrent stage 3 trip alarm (latched)
0
3
35
87
100
Earth overcurrent stage 1 trip alarm (latched)
0
3
36
88
101
Earth overcurrent stage 2 trip alarm (latched)
0
3
37
89
102
Earth overcurrent stage 3 trip alarm (latched)
0
3
90
103
tI< alarm (latched)
0
3
92
104
tI2> alarm (latched)
0
3
92
105
tI2>> alarm (latched)
0
3
93
106
tI2>>> alarm (latched)
0
3
107
tU< alarm (latched)
0
3
108
tU<< alarm (latched)
0
3
109
tU> alarm (latched)
0
3
110
tU>> alarm (latched)
0
3
38
94
111
tUN>>>> alarm (latched)
0
3
39
95
112
PN> alarm (latched)
0
3
40
96
113
PN>> alarm (latched)
0
3
97
114
Thermal start alarm (latched)
0
3
98
115
Thermal trip alarm (latched)
0
3
41
99
116
Taux1 alarm (latched)
0
3
42
100
117
Taux2 alarm (latched)
0
3
43
101
118
Taux3 alarm (if latched by Trip)
0
3
44
102
119
Taux4 alarm (if latched by Trip)
0
3
103
120
Logical Equation A alarm (latched)
0
3
45
104
121
Logical Equation B alarm (latched)
0
3
105
122
Logical Equation C alarm (latched)
0
3
106
123
Logical Equation D alarm (latched)
0
3
107
124
Broken conductor alarm (latched)
0
3
108
125
cb failure alarm (latched)
0
3
109
126
trip circuit alarm(latched)
0
3
110
127
Latching of Relay
0
2
111
128
Logical Equation E trip
0
1
112
129
Logical Equation F trip
0
1
113
130
Logical Equation G trip
0
1
114
131
Logical Equation H trip
0
1
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 123/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Binary Input Points
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number:
2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
P125
Point
Index
P126
Point
Index
P127
Point
Index
1 (Binary Input without status)
1 for P125 and
2 (Binary Input Change with
Time) for P126 and P127
Name/Description
init
val.
Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or
none)
1
132
Start P>
0
133
Start P>>
0
1
134
Trip P>
0
1
135
Trip P>>
0
1
136
Blocking Inrush
0
1
137
Start F1
0
1
138
Start F2
0
1
139
Start F3
0
1
140
Start F4
0
1
141
Start F5
0
1
142
Start F6
0
1
143
Trip F1
0
1
144
Trip F2
0
1
145
Trip F3
0
1
146
Trip F4
0
1
147
Trip F5
0
1
148
Trip F6
0
1
149
Non measured Frequency
0
1
115
150
Logical Equation E alarm (latched)
0
3
116
151
Logical Equation F alarm (latched)
0
3
117
152
Logical Equation G alarm (latched)
0
3
118
153
Logical Equation H alarm (latched)
0
3
154
Trip P> alarm (latched)
0
3
155
Trip P>> alarm (latched)
0
3
156
Trip F1 alarm (latched)
0
3
157
Trip F2 alarm (latched)
0
3
158
Trip F3 alarm (latched)
0
3
159
Trip F4 alarm (latched)
0
3
160
Trip F5 alarm (latched)
0
3
161
Trip F6 alarm (latched)
0
3
162
Opto isolator 8 (optional board)
0
2
163
Opto isolator 9 (optional board)
0
2
164
Opto isolator 10 (optional board)
0
2
165
Opto isolator 11 (optional board)
0
2
166
Opto isolator 12 (optional board)
0
2
119
167
Taux5
0
1
120
168
Taux6
0
1
121
169
Taux7
0
1
170
Taux8
0
1
171
Taux9
0
1
172
Taux10
0
1
173
Taux11
0
1
174
Taux12
0
1
122
175
Taux5 alarm (if latched by Trip)
0
3
123
176
Taux6 alarm (if latched by Trip)
0
3
124
177
Taux7 alarm (if latched by Trip)
0
3
178
Taux8 alarm (if latched by Trip) (optional board)
0
3
179
Taux9 alarm (if latched by Trip) (optional board)
0
3
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 124/130
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Binary Input Points
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number:
2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
P125
Point
Index
P126
Point
Index
P127
Point
Index
180
Name/Description
init
val.
Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or
none)
0
3
0
3
0
3
0
1
183
Taux10 alarm (if latched by Trip) (optional
board)
Taux11 alarm (if latched by Trip) (optional
board)
Taux12 alarm (if latched by Trip) (optional
board)
Earth overcurrent stage 4 start (IN>>>>)I
184
Earth overcurrent stage 4 trip (tIN>>>>)
0
1
185
Earth overcurrent stage 4 trip alarm (latched)
0
3
181
182
125
1 (Binary Input without status)
1 for P125 and
2 (Binary Input Change with
Time) for P126 and P127
186
Externally locked autoreclosure
0
1
187
Start P<
0
1
188
Start P<<
0
1
189
Start Q>
0
1
190
Start Q>>
0
1
191
Start Q<
0
1
192
Start Q<<
0
1
193
Trip P<
0
1
194
Trip P<<
0
1
195
Trip Q>
0
1
196
Trip Q>>
0
1
197
Trip Q<
0
1
198
Trip Q<<
0
1
199
Trip P< alarm (latched)
0
3
200
Trip P<< alarm (latched)
0
3
201
Trip Q> alarm (latched)
0
3
202
Trip Q>> alarm (latched)
0
3
203
Trip Q< alarm (latched)
0
3
204
Trip Q<< alarm (latched)
0
3
205
Trip dFdT1
0
1
206
Trip dFdT2
0
1
207
Trip dFdT3
0
1
208
Trip dFdT4
0
1
209
Trip dFdT5
0
1
210
Trip dFdT6
0
1
211
Trip dFdT1 alarm (latched)
0
3
212
Trip dFdT2 alarm (latched)
0
3
213
Trip dFdT3 alarm (latched)
0
3
214
Trip dFdT4 alarm (latched)
0
3
215
Trip dFdT5 alarm (latched)
0
3
216
Trip dFdT6 alarm (latched)
0
3
217
CTS
0
1
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 125/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.4.2
Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks
The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the Control
Relay Output Blocks (Object 12). Binary Output Status points are not included in class 0 polls.
Binary Output Status Points
Object Number:
10
Request Function Codes supported:
1 (read)
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
Control Relay Output Blocks
Object Number:
12
Request Function Codes supported:
3 (select), 4 (operate),
5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)
P125
Point
Index
P126
Point
Index
P127
Point
Index
Name/Description
Initial Status
Value
Supported Control Relay
Output Block Fields
0
0
0
De Latch of relays
0
1
1
1
Acknowledgement of the 1
alarm
st
0
2
2
2
Acknowledgement of all the
alarms
0
3
3
3
Remote control Tripping
0
4
4
4
Remote control Closing
0
5
5
5
Change of Active Group
0
6
6
Thermal State Resetting
0
7
7
Average and Max rms values
resetting
0
8
8
Counters initialization of the
autoreclosure
0
9
9
Initialization of rolling demand
(average)
0
10
10
Initialization of Maximum
0
11
11
Reinitialization of I0 harmonic
calculation
0
12
Reinitialization of Energy
counters
0
12
13
Re initialization of autoreclosure
0
13
14
CB operation number reset
0
14
15
SA2n reset
0
15
16
Com1 order
0
16
17
Com2 order
0
17
18
Com3 order
0
18
19
Com4 order
0
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
6
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 126/130
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Binary Output Status Points
Object Number:
10
Request Function Codes supported:
1 (read)
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
Control Relay Output Blocks
Object Number:
12
Request Function Codes supported:
3 (select), 4 (operate),
5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)
P125
Point
Index
P126
Point
Index
P127
Point
Index
Name/Description
Initial Status
Value
Supported Control Relay
Output Block Fields
19
20
General reset
0
21
Group 1 select
0
22
Group 2 select
0
23
Group 3 select
0
24
Group 4 select
0
25
Group 5 select
0
26
Group 6 select
0
27
Group 7 select
0
28
Group 8 select
0
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Unpaired Pulse On,
Paired Trip/Pulse On,
Paired Close/Pulse On
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.4.3
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 127/130
Counters
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21).
When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in
the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
Binary Counters and Frozen Counters are not included in class 0 polls.
P125 do not support binary Counters and Frozen Counters.
Binary Counters
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20
Change Event Object Number:
not supported
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze and clear), 10 (freeze and clear, noack)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
5 (32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported
Frozen Counters
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21
Change Event Object Number:
not supported
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested:
9 (32-Bit Frozen Binary without Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported
P126
Point
Index
0
P127
Point
Index
0
Max RMS current phase A (A/100)
1
1
Max RMS current phase B (A/100)
D1
2
2
Max RMS current phase C (A/100)
D1
3
3
Average RMS current phase A (A/100)
D1
4
4
Average RMS current phase B (A/100)
D1
5
5
Average RMS current phase C (A/100)
D1
6
6
CB operation number
D2
7
7
sa2n ia
D3
8
8
sa2n ib
D3
9
9
sa2n ic
D3
10
10
Total number of autoreclosure cycle
D2
11
11
Number of cycles 1
D2
12
12
Number of cycles 2
D2
13
13
Number of cycles 3
D2
14
14
Number of cycles 4
D2
15
15
Definitive Tripping number
D2
16
16
Number of closing order
D2
17
17
Rolling demand(average) RMS phase A (A/100)
D1
18
18
Rolling demand(average) RMS phase B (A/100)
D1
19
19
Rolling demand(average) RMS phase C (A/100)
D1
20
20
Maximum RMS phase A (after a new initialization) (A/100)
D1
21
21
Maximum RMS phase B (after a new initialization) (A/100)
D1
22
22
Maximum RMS phase C (after a new initialization) (A/100)
D1
23
Positive active energy (kWh/100)
D1
24
Negative active energy (kWh/100)
D1
25
Positive reactive energy (kVARh/100)
D1
26
Negative reactive energy (kVARh/100)
D1
27
Max RMS voltage phase A (V/100)
D1
28
Max RMS voltage phase B (V/100)
D1
29
Max RMS voltage phase C (V/100)
D1
30
Average RMS voltage phase A (V/100)
D1
31
Average RMS voltage phase B (V/100)
D1
32
Average RMS voltage phase C (V/100)
D1
33
Apparent energy (kVAh/100)
D1
Name/Description
Data type
D1
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 128/130
1.4.4
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Analog Inputs
The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit
variations of Analog Inputs, Analog Output Control Blocks, and Analog Output Statuses are
transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog input points that are not valid
as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767. For each point, the
“Scaling and Units” column indicates the value of a transmitted 32767. This also implies the
value of a transmitted –32767. The entry in the column does not imply a valid value for the
point.
Always indicating the representation of 32767 in the tables below is a consistent method for
representing scale, applicable to all scaling possibilities.
The “Default Deadband,” and the “Default Change Event Assigned Class” columns are used
to represent the absolute amount by which the point must change before an analog change
event will be generated, and once generated in which class poll (1, 2, 3) will the change event
be reported. Only the default values for these columns are documented here because the
values may change in operation due to either local (user-interface) or remote (through DNP)
control.
Every Analog Inputs points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in one of
classes 1, 2 or 3.
Analog Inputs
Static (Steady-State) Object Number:
30
Change Event Object Number:
32
Request Function Codes supported:
1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o
Time)
Change Event Scan Rate:
The scan rate for analog input change events is fixed at 1s
P125
Point
Index
P126
Point
Index
P127
Point
Index
0
0
0
Active Group
1
Scaling and Units
(representation of
32767 – see
above)
32767
1à2
1
Initial Change
Event Class
(1, 2, 3 or
none)
1
1
1
Magnitude IA
0
40 In
0 to 40 In
0.02 In
3
2
2
Magnitude IB
0
40 In
0 to 40 In
0.02 In
3
3
3
Magnitude IC
0
40 In
0 to 40 In
0.02 In
3
4
4
Magnitude IN
0
40 IEn if Low sensitivity
8 IEn if medium
sen-sitivity
1 IEn if high sensitivity
0 to 40 IEn
3
5
5
rms IA
0A
327.67A
6
6
rms IB
0A
327.67A
7
7
rms IC
0A
327.67A
8
8
rms IN
0A
327.67A
9
rms VA
0V
327.67V
10
rms VB
0V
327.67V
11
rms VC
0V
327.67V
0 to
40000000
A/100
0 to
40000000
A/100
0 to
40000000
A/100
0 to
40000000
A/100
0 to
500000000
V/100
0 to
500000000
V/100
0 to
500000000
V/100
0.02 IEn if
Low
sensitivity
0.004 IEn if
Medium
sensitivity
0.0008 IEn if
high
sensitivity
1
2
Name/Description
Initial
Value
Valid Range
Change
Event Deadband
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
2%
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Communications
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 129/130
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Analog Inputs
Static (Steady-State) Object Number:
30
Change Event Object Number:
32
Request Function Codes supported:
1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o
Time)
Change Event Scan Rate:
The scan rate for analog input change events is fixed at 1s
P125
Point
Index
P126
Point
Index
P127
Point
Index
3
9
12
rms VN
13
Magnitude VA
0
14
Magnitude VB
0
15
Magnitude VC
0
16
Magnitude VN
0
Name/Description
Initial
Value
0V
Scaling and Units
(representation of
32767 – see
above)
327.67V
4
10
11
17
Thermal State
0%
260V G1*
960V G2*
260V G1*
960V G2*
260V G1*
960V G2*
260V G1*
960V G2*
32767%
5
12
18
Frequency
0
327,67 Hz
13
19
Magnitude I2
0
14
20
Magnitude I1
0
21
Magnitude V2
0
22
Magnitude V1
0
23
RMS active 3-phase
power
24
Valid Range
0 to
500000000
V/100
0 to 260V
0 to 960V
0 to 260V
0 to 960V
0 to 260V
0 to 960V
0 to 260V
0 to 960V
0 to 65535
Change
Event Deadband
2%
0.5V
2V
0.5V
2V
0.5V
2V
0.5V
2V
10
Initial Change
Event Class
(1, 2, 3 or
none)
3
3
3
3
3
3
1Hz
3
40 In
45Hz to
65 Hz and
99.99Hz ==
ERROR
0 to 40 In
0.1 In
3
40 In
0 to 40 In
0.1 In
3
0.5V
2V
0.5V
2V
3
0
260V G1*
960V G2*
260V G1*
960V G2*
327.67kW
RMS reactive 3phase power
0
327.67kVAr
6
15
25
Harmonic power Pe
0
327.67 W
7
16
26
Harmonic power
IeCos
0
327.67 A
8
17
27
Angle Ie ^ Ue
0
32767
0 to 260V
0 to 960V
0 to 260V
0 to 960V
-9.999 E8 to
9.999 E8
kW/100
-9.999 E8 to
9.999 E8
kVAr/100
-9.999 E8 to
9.999 E8
W/100
-9.999 E8 to
9.999 E8
A/100
0 to 360 °
28
3-phase CosPhi
0
18
29
Tripping Time
0
327.67s
-100 to 100
(1/100)
0 to 10.00s
2
10 ms
3
19
30
Closing Time
0
327.67s
0 to 10.00s
10 ms
3
20
31
Fault number
0
32767
0 to 65535
1
2
21
32
group
0
32767
1 to 2
2
22
33
Fault phase
0
32767
0 to 8 (F1)
23
34
Fault origin
0
32767
24
35
Fault magnitude
0
40 In
0 to
29
(F2)
0 to 40 In
each new
fault
each new
fault
each new
fault
2
25
36
Fault magnitude IA
0
40 In
0 to 40 In
26
37
Fault magnitude IB
0
40 In
0 to 40 In
27
38
Fault magnitude IC
0
40 In
0 to 40 In
28
39
Fault magnitude IN
0
40 IEn
0 to 40 IEn
40
Fault magnitude VA
0
41
Fault magnitude VB
0
260V G1*
960V G2*
260V G1*
960V G2*
0 to 260V
0 to 960V
0 to 260V
0 to 960V
each new
fault
each new
fault
each new
fault
each new
fault
each new
fault
each new
fault
each new
fault
2%
2%
2%
2%
1°
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
P12y/EN CT/Fa5
DNP3.0 DATABASE
Page 130/130
Communications
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Analog Inputs
Static (Steady-State) Object Number:
30
Change Event Object Number:
32
Request Function Codes supported:
1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o
Time)
Change Event Scan Rate:
The scan rate for analog input change events is fixed at 1s
P125
Point
Index
42
Fault magnitude VC
0
43
Fault magnitude Ue
0
44
Fault angle IA ^ UBC
0
Scaling and Units
(representation of
32767 – see
above)
260V G1*
960V G2*
260V G1*
960V G2*
32767
45
Fault angle IB ^ UCA
0
32767
0 to 360 °
46
Fault angle IC ^ UAB
0
32767
0 to 360 °
47
Fault angle Ie ^ Ue
0
32767
0 to 360 °
48
RMS apparent power
0
327.67kVA
31
49
Angle Ia ^ Ib
0
32767
-9.999 E8 to
9.999 E8
kVA/100
0 to 360 °
1°
3
32
50
Angle Ia ^ Ic
0
32767
0 to 360 °
1°
3
51
Angle Ia ^ Va
Or Angle Ia ^ Uab
Angle Ia ^ Vb
Or Angle Ia ^ Ubc
Angle Ia ^ Vc
Or Angle Ia ^ Uca
Angle Ia ^ Ue
0
32767
0 to 360 °
1°
3
0
32767
0 to 360 °
1°
3
0
32767
0 to 360 °
1°
3
0
32767
0 to 360 °
1°
3
P126
Point
Index
P127
Point
Index
29
30
52
53
33
54
Name/Description
Initial
Value
Valid Range
0 to 260V
0 to 960V
0 to 260V
0 to 960V
0 to 360 °
Change
Event Deadband
each new
fault
each new
fault
each new
fault
each new
fault
each new
fault
each new
fault
2%
Initial Change
Event Class
(1, 2, 3 or
none)
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
Format:
F1:
0: None, 1: Phase A, 2: Phase B, 4: Phase C, 3: Phase AB, 5: Phase AC, 6: Phase BC, 7:
Phase A B C, 8: Earth.
F2:
0: Null, 1: Remote trip, 2: thermal overload, 3: tI>, 4: tI>>, 5: tI>>>, 6: tIN>, 7: tIN>>, 8: tIN>>>,
9: tI<, 10: broken conductor, 11: tU<, 12: tU<<, 13: Pe/Iecos>, 14: Pe/Iecos>>, 15: tI2>, 16:
tI2>>, 17: tI2>>>, 18: tU>, 19: tU>>, 20: tUN>>>>, 21: tAux1, 22: tAux2, 23: tEqu.A, 24:
tEqu.B, 25: tEqu.C, 26: tEqu.D, 27:tAux3, 28: tAux4, 29: SOTF, 30: tP>, 31: tP>>, 32: tF1, 33:
tF2, 34: tF3, 35: tF4, 36: tF5, 37: tF6, 38: tEqu.E, 39: tEqu.F, 40: tEqu.G, 41: tEqu.H.
G1*: Voltage range 57 - 130 V.
G2*: Voltage range 220 – 480 V.
Commissioning and Maintenance
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
COMMISSIONING AND
MAINTENANCE GUIDE
Commissioning and Maintenance
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
Page 1/22
CONTENT
1.
REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING
3
2.
COMMISSIONING TEST ENVIRONMENT
4
2.1
Important notes
4
2.1.1
Injection test sets
4
2.1.2
Additional commissioning test equipment:
4
2.1.3
Communication
4
2.2
Commissioning test sheets
5
3.
PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS
6
3.1
Allocation of terminals
6
3.2
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
6
3.3
Visual inspection
6
3.4
Earthing
6
3.5
Current transformers (CT's)
6
3.6
Use of a Core Balance CT for earth faults
7
3.6.1
Cable shields and core CT
7
3.6.2
Core CT polarity
7
3.7
Auxiliary supply
8
3.8
Logic inputs
8
3.9
Logic outputs
9
3.10
RS 485 rear communication
9
4.
SETTING CHECK
10
4.1
Settings
10
4.2
Measurements
10
4.2.1
MiCOM P125
10
4.2.2
MiCOM P126
11
4.2.3
MiCOM P127
11
4.3
Thresholds validation
12
4.3.1
MiCOM settings
12
4.3.2
Earth current and neutral voltage test
15
4.4
Final checks
19
5.
MAINTENANCE
20
5.1
Equipment failure
20
5.1.1
Minor fault
20
5.1.2
Major fault
20
5.1.3
Hardware and software faults
20
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
Page 2/22
Commissioning and Maintenance
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
5.2
Method of repair
21
5.2.1
Replacing the active part
21
5.2.2
Replacing the complete relay
21
5.3
Problem solving
21
5.3.1
Password lost or not accepted
21
5.3.2
Communication
22
Commissioning and Maintenance
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.
Page 3/22
REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING
The MiCOM P125 P126 and P127 relays are fully numerical in their design, implementing all
protection and non-protection functions in software. The MiCOM relays employ a high
degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will provide an alarm. As a
result of this, the commissioning test does not need to be as extensive as with non-numerical
relays (static or electromechanical).
To commission MiCOM relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning
correctly and the application-specific software setting have been applied to the MiCOM relay.
It is considered unnecessary to tests every function of the relay if the settings have been
verified by one of the following method:
•
Extracting the settings applied to the relay using the appropriate setting software
(preferred method)
•
Via the front panel user interface.
REMINDER:
It is not possible to download a new setting software as long as
the programming mode is active.
To confirm that the product is operating correctly once the application-specific settings have
been applied, a test should be performed on a single protection element.
Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for determining
the application-specific settings to be applied to the MiCOM relays and for testing of any
scheme logic applied by external wiring.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided
P12y/EN RS of this Technical Guide for completion as required.
at
the
chapter
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE
USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
GUIDE SFTY/4LM/G11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND
TECHNICAL DATA SECTIONS OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND
ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
Commissioning and Maintenance
Page 4/22
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.
COMMISSIONING TEST ENVIRONMENT
2.1
Important notes
All the commissioning tests of the MiCOM P125, P126, and P127 relays are carried out by
injecting currents and voltages to the secondary of the earth and/or phases CTs and VTs
using appropriate injection test sets provided for this purpose.
2.1.1
Injection test sets
The test of directional protection within P125, P126 and P127 requires at least a phase
current, phase to phase and residual voltage injection.
The test equipment must provide tools to change the phase between voltage and current.
For reasons of convenience (weight, spatial requirement, transportation), a single-phased
current injection and single voltage test set is more suitable for commissioning and is able to
perform all commissioning tests regarding overcurrent directional/non directional protection
of MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays.
Thus, the following descriptions indicate how to conduct the commissioning tests with a
single-phase injection test set.
However, for certain commissioning tests, the three-phase wiring diagrams are easier to
understand and in this case the description is also given in three-phase format.
Single-phase injection test set:
−
1 current (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms).
−
1 voltage (30 to 130V), timer (precision 1 ms)
Three-phase injection test set:
−
3 currents (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms).
−
3 voltage (30 to 130V), timer (precision 1 ms)
Possibility to lag the current respect to voltage injection.
2.1.2
Additional commissioning test equipment:
−
1 multimeter (precision 1%),
−
1 connecting terminal to measure the currents exceeding 10 A (precision 2%),
Test plugs and wires to carry out injections to the CT's secondary (dimension according to
the currents injected).
2.1.3
Communication
Using the RS 485 communication on the rear connector of the MiCOM P125, P126 & P127
relays or using the RS232 front port can make all commissioning test records.
All above in according
IEC 60870-5-103,).
to
each
RS
485
communication
protocol
(MODBUS,
Commissioning and Maintenance
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.2
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
Page 5/22
Commissioning test sheets
Commissioning test sheets are available in the chapter P12y/EN RS of this Technical Guide.
The presentation of the Commissioning test sheets follows the description of the tests of this
chapter.
The contents of these Commissioning test sheets enable you to log:
−
The name of the relay, station and circuit
−
The characteristics of the MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays
−
The various settings
−
The results of the protection and automation checks
−
The result of the test records after commissioning.
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
Commissioning and Maintenance
Page 6/22
3.
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE
USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
GUIDE SFTY/4LM/G11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND
TECHNICAL DATA SECTIONS OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND
ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
3.1
Allocation of terminals
It is necessary to consult the appropriate wiring diagram provided in the chapter
P12y/EN CO of this Technical Guide whilst observing the various polarities and ground/earth
connection.
3.2
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Before any handling of the module (active part of the relay), please refer to the
recommendations in Safety Section of this Technical Guide.
3.3
Visual inspection
Carefully examine the relay to see if there has been any possible deterioration following
installation.
Check if the external wiring corresponds to the appropriate relay diagram or the assembly
diagram. The reference number of the relay diagram is indicated on a label situated under
the upper flap of the front panel.
When the relay is outside from its case, use a continuity tester to test that the current shortcircuits (phases and earth CT's) between the terminals indicated on the wiring diagram are
closed.
3.4
Earthing
Check if the earth connection of the case situated above the rear terminal block is used to
connect the relay to a local earth bar. With several relays present, make sure that the copper
earth bar is properly installed for solidly connecting the earthing terminals of each case.
3.5
Current transformers (CT's)
DANGER:
NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT
TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE
LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.
Commissioning and Maintenance
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.6
Page 7/22
Use of a Core Balance CT for earth faults
If a core balance CT is used to detect earth faults, prior to any test, the user must check the
following points:
3.6.1
−
MV or HV cable screens and core CT,
−
No current flow through the MV or HV cables,
−
Orientation of the core CT (P1-S1, P2-S2)
Cable shields and core CT
When mounting a core balance CT around electric cables, check the connection to the earth
of the cable shields. It is vital that the earth cable of the shield moves in the opposite
direction through the core CT. This cancels the currents carried by the cable shields through
the core CT.
Electrical cables directed
to the busbar
Screen shields
P1
S1
P2
S2
Other ends
of electrical cables
P0041ENa
SCREEN SHIELDS AND CT CORE
3.6.2
Core CT polarity
It is necessary to check the polarity of the core CT by following the figure below:
Momentarily connect the battery + to P1 and – to P2. The centre zero ammeter connected
with + to S1 and – to S2 will deflect in the positive direction if the wiring is correct.
The phase CT may be tested using the same method.
P1
S1
P2
S2
+ mA
_
+
_
P0043ENa
CORE CT ORIENTATION TEST
NOTE:
De-magnetise the CT after polarity test. Inject an ac current starting
from zero and increase to slowly exceed the CT nominal value and
then decrease slowly to zero.
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
Commissioning and Maintenance
Page 8/22
3.7
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Auxiliary supply
Check the value of the auxiliary supply voltage (terminals 33 and 34). The value measured
shall be between 0.8 and 1.2 times the nominal auxiliary supply voltage indicated on the
MiCOM P125, P126 and P127.
You can read the Uaux range of the relay under the flap on the top of front relay.
3.8
Uaux range (Volts)
Uaux nominal zone (Volts)
Maximum peak value
(Volts)
24 - 60 Vdc
19 - 72 Vdc
80
48 - 250 Vdc/48 - 250 Vac
38 - 300 Vdc/38 - 275 Vac
336
Logic inputs
This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs are functioning correctly. The P125 has 4
(+5 optional) opto-isolated inputs while P126 and P127 have 7 logic opto-isolated inputs.
The opto inputs should be energised a time. The status of the input can be viewed using
menu OP. PARAMETERS/Input Status, a 1 indicating an energised input and a 0 indicating
a de-energised input. When each logic input is energised one of the characters on the
bottom line of the menu display will change to the value show in the following table to
indicate the new state of the inputs.
(1)
Input
MiCOM P12x models
OP. PARAMETERS/Inputs
Satuts. cell value
Opto input 1
22-24 Terminals
P125, P126, P127
7654321
0000001
Opto input 2
26-28 Terminals
P125, P126, P127
7654321
0000010
Opto input 3
17-19 Terminals
P125, P126, P127
7654321
0000100
Opto input 4
21-23 Terminals
P125, P126, P127
7654321
0001000
Opto input 5
25-27 Terminals
P126, P127
7654321
0010000
Opto input 6
58-60 Terminals
P126, P127
7654321
0100000
Opto input 7
57-59 Terminals
P126, P127
7654321
1000000
Opto input 8
61-62 terminals
P127 (1)
CBA98
00001
Opto input 9
64-62 terminals
P127 (1)
CBA98
00010
Opto input 10
63-62 terminals
P127 (1)
CBA98
00100
Opto input 11
66-62 terminals
P127 (1)
CBA98
01000
Opto input 12
65-62 terminals
P127 (1)
CBA98
10000
Available only for P127 “5 opto-inputs” option (product codes P127xx1 or P127xx3).
“Input COM – terminal” 62 is the common terminal for inputs 8 to 12.
Commissioning and Maintenance
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.9
Page 9/22
Logic outputs
This test checks that all output relays are functioning correctly. The P126 and P127 relays
have 8 outputs, P125 relay has 6 outputs.
The watch dog relay is always on. In case of relay failure the watch dog relay moves to the
off and the terminals 35-36 are opened.
The status of the outputs can be viewed using menu OP. PARAMETERS/ Relay Status, an
indicating 1 means relay supplied and a 0 indicating means relay non-supplied. When each
output relay is closed one of the characters on the bottom line of the menu display will
change to the value show in the following table to indicate the new state of the output relays.
Each output contact may have its own and independent power supply (refer to wiring
schemes).
MiCOM P125 range
OP. PARAMETERS/Relay
Status. cell value
WD Relay Terminals 35-37
P125, P126 and P127
Normal close
RL 1 Change over type.
Terminals:
2 Common -4 NC-6 NO
P125, P126 and P127
00000001
RL 2 Change over type.
Terminals:
8 Common -10 NC-12 NO
P125, P126 and P127
00000010
RL 3 Terminals 14-16
P125, P126 and P127
00000100
RL 4 Terminals 18-20
P125, P126 and P127
00001000
RL 5 Terminals 1-3
P125, P126 and P127
00010000
RL 6 Terminals 7-8
P125, P126 and P127
00100000
RL 7 Terminals 9-11
P126 and P127
01000000
RL 8 Terminals 13-15
P126 and P127
10000000
OUTPUT RELAYS
3.10
RS 485 rear communication
This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location
and will vary depending on the communication protocol being adopted (refer to label under
the upper flap).
It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay
to the remote location, just the relay's rear communication port and any protocol converter
necessary.
Connect a laptop PC to the RS485 rear port (first or second port when present) and check
the communication with the appropriate command.
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
Commissioning and Maintenance
Page 10/22
4.
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
SETTING CHECK
The setting checks must ensure that all relay settings have been correctly applied to the
relay for the specific application.
Transfer the setting file to the relay using a laptop PC running the appropriate software via
the RS232 front port or the RS485 rear port.
This is the preferred setting transfer method, because it is faster and there are fewer margins
for errors.
If the setting software is not used, the relay settings must be checked manually via the relay
front panel interface.
The commissioning checks are as follows:
4.1
1.
Settings verify and delivery to customer
2.
Validation of the measurements
3.
Validation of the thresholds and associated timers.
Settings
Log the settings on the commissioning test sheets.
4.2
Measurements
The MiCOM P125 P126 P127 relays measure phase and earth currents, phase (phase to
phase) voltage, zero sequence voltage as a True RMS value up to the 10th harmonics. The
value(s) indicated take account of the phase and/or earth CT ratio and VT ratio.
WARNING:
4.2.1
MiCOM P125 P126 P127 RELAYS HAVE 1 AND 5 A CURRENT INPUTS,
AND 57 –130V OR 220 – 480V VOLTAGE INPUT.
CHECK THAT THE INJECTED CURRENT AND VOLTAGE ARE
COMPATIBLE WITH THE SELECTED RANGE.
MiCOM P125
•
Note the CT and neutral VT ratio.
•
Energise the MiCOM P125 relay.
•
Apply current to input terminals 55-56 (Ien= 1A) or 47-48 (Ien= 5A) and verify the IN
value shown on the LCD taking in account the relevant nominal current.
•
Apply earth voltage to 39-40 terminals and verify in measurements menu the UN value
shown on LCD.
•
Log the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Applied value and relay value
displayed).
Commissioning and Maintenance
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
4.2.2
4.2.3
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
Page 11/22
MiCOM P126
•
Note the select phase and earth CTs ratio and neutral VT ratio.
•
Energise the MiCOM P126 relay.
•
Apply current to input terminals 49-50 (In=1A) or 41-42 (In=5A) and verify the IA value
shown on the LCD.
•
Apply current to input terminals 51-52 (In=1A) or 43-44 (In=5A) and verify the IB value
shown on the LCD.
•
Apply current to input terminals 53-54 (In=1A) or 45-46 (In=5A) and verify the IC value
shown on the LCD.
•
Apply current to input terminals 55-56 (Ien= 1A) or 47-48 (Ien= 5A) and verify the IN
values on the LCD in relay measurement menu.
•
Apply earth voltage to 73-74 terminals and verify the UN values on the LCD in relay
measurement menu.
•
Log the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Applied values and relay values
displayed).
MiCOM P127
•
Configure the relay in CONFIGURATION-General Options item menu as: 2Vph-ph+Vr
VT connection mode. (See User Guide, chapter P12y/EN FT, of this Technical Guide)
•
Note the select phase and earth CTs ratio, phase voltage VTs ratio and neutral
voltage VTs ratio.
•
Energise the MiCOM P127 relay.
•
Apply current to input terminals 49-50 (In=1A) or 41-42 (In=5A) and verify the IA value
shown on the LCD.
•
Apply current to input terminals 51-52 (In=1A) or 43-44 (In=5A) and verify the IB value
shown on the LCD.
•
Apply current to input terminals 53-54 (In=1A) or 45-46 (In=5A) and verify the IC value
shown on the LCD.
•
Apply current to input terminals 55-56 (Ien= 1A) or 47-48 (Ien= 5A) and verify the IN
values on the LCD in relay measurement menu.
•
Apply voltage to inputs terminals 69-70 and 71-72 and verify the UAB and UBC values
in relay measurement menu on the LCD.
•
Apply current to input terminals 55-56 (Ien= 1A) or 47-48 (Ien= 5A) and verify the IN
value in relay measurement menu on the LCD.
•
Apply voltage to inputs terminals 73-74 and verify the UN value in relay measurement
menu on the LCD.
Log the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Applied values and relay values
displayed).
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
Commissioning and Maintenance
Page 12/22
4.3
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Thresholds validation
This test type demonstrates that the relay is operating correctly at the application specific
settings.
4.3.1
MiCOM settings
Set the following thresholds for the relay.
Applying the voltage and current to terminals as in wiring diagrams in chapter P12y/EN CO
of this Technical Guide.
The applied current and voltage must be great than setting value.
4.3.1.1
MiCOM P125 Settings
Configuration Menu
Transfo. Ratio
E/Gnd CT primary
1A
E/Gnd CT Sec
1A
E/Gnd VT primary
0.100 kV
E/Gnd VT Sec
100.0 V
Protection Menu
Ie>
Yes
Ie>
1 Ien
tIe>
DT or IDMT or RI
tIe> (if DT)
10 s
Curve (if IDMT)
IEC VI or IEEE VI
TMS value (if IDMT)
1
K value (if RI)
1
Ue>>>>
10 V
tUe>>>>
10 s
Automation Menu
TRIP tIe>
YES
TRIP tUe>>>>
YES
Commissioning and Maintenance
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
4.3.1.2
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
Page 13/22
MiCOM P126 Settings
Configuration menu
Transfo. Ratio
Line CT primary
1A
Line CT Sec
1A
E/Gnd CT primary
1A
E/Gnd CT Sec
1A
E/Gnd VT primary
0.100 kV
E/Gnd VT Sec
100.0 V
Protection Menu G1
I>
Yes
I>
1 In
tI>
DT or IDMT or RI
tI>
(if DT) 10 s
Curve (if IDMT)
IEC VI or IEEE VI
TMS value (if IDMT)
1
K value (if RI)
1
Ie>
Yes
Ie>
1 In
tIe>
DT or IDMT or RI
tIe> (if DT)
20 s
Curve (if IDMT)
IEC VI or IEEE VI
TMS value (if IDMT)1
K value (if RI)1
Ue>>>>
10V
tUe>>>>
10 s
Automation Menu
TRIP tI>
YES
TRIP tIe>
YES
TRIP tUe>>>>
YES
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
Commissioning and Maintenance
Page 14/22
4.3.1.3
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
MiCOM P127 settings
CONFIGURATION
General Options
2Vpp+Vr
Transfo. Ratio
Line CT primary
1A
Line CT Sec
1A
E/Gnd CT primary
1A
E/Gnd CT Sec
1A
Line VT primary
0.100 kV
Line VT Sec
100.0 V
E/Gnd VT primary
0.100 kV
E/Gnd VT Sec
100.0 V
Protection Menu G1
I>
Yes
I>
1 In
tI>
DT or IDMT or RI
tI> (if DT)
10 s
Curve (if IDMT)
IEC VI or IEEE VI
TMS value (if IDMT)
1
K value (if RI)
1
U>
Yes
U>
20V
tU>
10 s
Ie>
Yes
Ie>
1 In
tIe>
DT or IDMT or RI
tIe> (if DT)
20 s
Curve (if IDMT)
IEC VI or IEEE VI
TMS value (if IDMT)1
K value (if RI)=1
Ue>>>>
10 V
tUe>>>>
10 s
Automation Menu
TRIP tI>
YES
TRIP tU>
YES
TRIP tIe>
YES
TRIP Ue>>>>
YES
Commissioning and Maintenance
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
4.3.2
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
Page 15/22
Earth current and neutral voltage test
This test can be executed on the P125, P126 and P127 relay and the operating sequence is
the same for all three relays.
After the setting is completed connect the relay using the wiring diagram in chapter
P12y/EN CO.
4.3.2.1
Earth fault overcurrent and residual over voltage test.
Delay type: Definite time
Used thresholds for this test:
•
Ie>, tIe>, Ue >>>>, tUe>>>>.
•
Supply the relay, inject current and voltage with magnitude greater then Ie> and
Ue>>>> setting value.
•
If the time delay tIe> is short, gradually increases injection current up to the value of
the Ie> threshold.
•
If the time delay tIe> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no
tripping. Then inject 1,1 x Ie threshold and check the trip.
•
Gradually decreases the injected current and record the value of the drop out Ie>
threshold.
•
The same procedure above for Ue>>>>.
•
Checks:
•
Alarm message on the LCD display.
•
Alarm LED flashes.
•
Trip LED on
•
Ie>, Ue>>>> threshold LED on (if programmed).
•
Trip output closes.
•
Ie>, Ue>>>> threshold output closes (if programmed).
Delay type: Inverse time (IDMT)
Used thresholds for this test:
•
Ie>, tIe>
•
Supply the relay inject a current equal to 2 x Ie> threshold into one of the earth current
inputs. Repeat the operation for various current values (n x Ie threshold with n ranging
from 4 to 10, for example). Check that the values measured correspond to those
indicated in the table below (for TMS=1).
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
Commissioning and Maintenance
Page 16/22
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
IEC curves
Type of curve
Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1
IEC
2 x I threshold
10 x I threshold
Nominal
Min - Max
Nominal
Min - Max
STI
1.78
1.62 - 1.98
0.5
0.45 - 0.55
SI
10.1
9.1 - 11.1
3
2.7 - 3.3
VI
13.5
12.2 - 14.9
1.5
1.35 - 1.65
EI
26.7
24 - 29.5
0.8
0.72 - 0.88
LTI
120
108 - 132
13.3
12 - 14.6
IEEE/ANSI curves
Type of curve
Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1
IEEE/ANSI
2 x I threshold
10 x I threshold
Nominal
Min - Max
Nominal
Min - Max
STI
0.25
0.22 - 0.28
0.08
0.07- 0.09
MI
3.8
3.4 - 4.2
1.2
1.08 - 1.32
I
2.2
1.9 - 2.4
0.3
0.27 - 0.33
VI
7.2
6.5 - 8
0.7
0.63 - 0.77
EI
9.5
8.5 - 10.5
0.4
0.36 - 0.44
Checks:
4.3.2.2
•
Ie> Alarm message on the LCD display.
•
Alarm LED flashes.
•
Trip LED on
•
Ie> threshold LED on (if programmed).
•
Trip output closes.
•
Ie> threshold output closes (if programmed).
Phase overcurrent I> threshold test (P126 & P127)
Phase overcurrent threshold check:
•
If the time delay tI> is short, gradually increase the injection current up to the value of
the I> threshold.
•
If the time delay tI> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no tripping.
Then inject 1,1 x I threshold and check the trip.
•
Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out off (I>
threshold).
Commissioning and Maintenance
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 17/22
Checks:
•
Alarm message on the LCD display.
•
Alarm LED flashes.
•
Trip LED on
•
I> threshold LED on (if programmed).
•
Trip output closes.
•
I> threshold output closes (if programmed).
Delay type: Definite time tI>
•
Apply a current into one of the phases and measure the time delay tI> by pre-setting
the current above the I> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold).
•
Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI> by pre-setting
the current above the I> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
Checks:
•
Alarm message on the LCD display for I> after that the setting trip delay time is
expired.
•
Alarm LED flashes > after that the setting trip delay time is expired.
•
Trip LED on after that the setting trip delay time is expired.
•
I> threshold LED on (if programmed) > after that the setting trip delay time is expired.
•
Trip output closes > after that the setting trip delay time is expired..
•
I> threshold output closes (if programmed) > after that the setting trip delay time is
expired.
Delay type: Inverse time (IDMT)
Used threshold for this test:
•
I>, tI>
•
Supply the relay, inject a current equal to 2 x I> threshold into one of the earth current
inputs. Repeat the operation for various current values (n x Ie threshold with n ranging
from 4 to 10, for example). Check that the values measured correspond to those
indicated in the table below (for TMS=1).
IEC curves
Type of curve
Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1
IEC
2 x I threshold
10 x I threshold
Nominal
Min - Max
Nominal
Min - Max
STI
1.78
1.62 - 1.98
0.5
0.45 - 0.55
SI
10.1
9.1 - 11.1
3
2.7 - 3.3
VI
13.5
12.2 - 14.9
1.5
1.35 - 1.65
EI
26.7
24 - 29.5
0.8
0.72 - 0.88
LTI
120
108 - 132
13.3
12 - 14.6
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
Commissioning and Maintenance
Page 18/22
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
IEEE/ANSI curves
Type of curve
Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1
IEEE/ANSI
2 x I threshold
10 x I threshold
Nominal
Min - Max
Nominal
Min - Max
STI
0.25
0.22 - 0.28
0.08
0.07- 0.09
MI
3.8
3.4 - 4.2
1.2
1.08 - 1.32
I
2.2
1.9 - 2.4
0.3
0.27 - 0.33
VI
7.2
6.5 - 8
0.7
0.63 - 0.77
EI
9.5
8.5 - 10.5
0.4
0.36 - 0.44
RI electromechanical curve
Type of curve
Tripping time (in seconds) for K =1
Electromechanical
2 x I threshold
RI
10 x I threshold
Nominal
Min - Max
Nominal
Min - Max
4.5
4-5
3.2
2.8 - 3.6
For other injected current values, compare the values found with the theoretical values
calculated according to the formula of the curves.
NOTE:
Equations of IEC, IEEE/ANSI and RI curves are given in chapter
P12y/EN TD of this Technical Guide.
Checks:
4.3.2.3
•
I> Alarm message on the LCD display.
•
Alarm LED flashes.
•
Trip LED on
•
I> threshold LED on (if programmed).
•
Trip output closes.
•
I> threshold output closes (if programmed).
Phase to phase (phase to neutral) over-voltage U> threshold (P127)
Phase overcurrent threshold check:
•
If tU> time delay is short, gradually raise the injection voltage up to the value of U>
threshold.
•
If U> time delay is long, inject 0.95 x U> threshold setting and check there is no trip.
Then inject 1.1 x U> threshold setting and check the trip output is close.
•
Gradually lower the injected current and note the value of the drop out U> threshold.
Commissioning and Maintenance
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 19/22
Checks:
4.4
•
Alarm message on the LCD display for U> after that the setting trip delay time is
expired.
•
Alarm LED flashes after that the setting trip delay time is expired.
•
Trip LED on, after that the setting trip delay time is expired.
•
U> threshold LED on (if programmed) > after that the setting trip delay time is expired.
•
Trip output closes U> after that the setting trip delay time is expired..
•
U> threshold output closes (if programmed) after that the setting trip delay time is
expired.
Final checks
1.
Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc… If it is necessary to disconnect any
of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring verification tests, it
should be ensured that all connections are replace in accordance with the relevant
external connection or scheme diagram.
2.
If a MMLG test block is installed, remove the MMLB01 test plug and replace the
MMLG cover so that the protection is put into service.
3.
For MiCOM P126 and P127 models, ensure that all event, fault and disturbance
records, alarm and LEDs have been reset before leaving the relay.
4.
If the relays are in a new installation or the circuit breaker has been just maintained,
the circuit breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. These counters
(only P126 & P127) have to be reset using relevant command in RECORD/CB
Monitoring menu (refer to User Guide).
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
Commissioning and Maintenance
Page 20/22
5.
MAINTENANCE
5.1
Equipment failure
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays are full digital and permanent self-diagnosing. Any
failure of software or hardware elements is instantly detected. As soon as an internal fault is
detected, depending on its type (minor or major), an alarm message is displayed as a priority
on the front panel LCD before the fault LED is illuminated (fixed or flashing) and the
watchdog relay is closed (if the fault is a major one).
The watchdog facility provides two output relay contacts, one normally open and one
normally closed that are driven by the processor board. These are provided to give an
indication that the relay is in a healthy state.
An equipment failure (major or minor) cannot be acknowledged on the front panel (using the
dedicated tactile button keypad). Only the disappearance of the cause will acknowledge the
fault and hence reset the fault LED.
5.1.1
Minor fault
Regarded by the MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays as a minor fault is a communication
failure. If the communication is in fault, MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 protection and
automation modules are not affected.
Message:
"COMM.ERROR":
Communication fault
Cause:
Hardware or software failure of the communication module
Action:
Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair.
Alternative:
If communication is not used, disable communication in the COMMUNICATION menu
(Communication ? = No).
5.1.2
Major fault
Major fault for MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays are all software and hardware failures
except the communication faults. As soon as this type of failure is detected, the watchdog
(WD) is closed and all operations are stopped (protection, automation, communication).
5.1.3
Hardware and software faults
Messages:
"DEFAULT SETTING": Indication that the relay is running with default setting
"SETTING ERROR": Failure in the setting
" CALIBRATION ERROR.": Calibration zone failure
"CT ERROR": Analogue channel failure
Cause:
Hardware or software failure
Action:
Restart the protection software.
If the software fault still remain after restart, withdraw the active part and return the module
to the factory for repair.
Commissioning and Maintenance
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
5.2
Method of repair
5.2.1
Replacing the active part
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
Page 21/22
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE
USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
GUIDE SFTY/4LM/G11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND
TECHNICAL DATA SECTIONS OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND
ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
The case and the rear terminals blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the
MiCOM P12x relay should replacement or repair become necessary without disconnect the
scheme wiring.
NOTE:
The MiCOM relays have integral current transformer shorting switches
which will close when the active part is removed from the case.
Remove the upper and lower flap without exerting excessive force. Remove the external
screws. Under the upper flap, turn the extractor with a 3 mm screwdriver and extract the
active part of the relay by pulling from the upper and lower notches on the front panel of the
MiCOM relay.
The reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instruction in reverse,
ensuring that no modification has been done on the scheme wiring.
5.2.2
Replacing the complete relay
To remove the complete relay (active part and case) the entire wiring must be removed from
the rear connector.
Before working at the rear of the relay, isolate all current supplies to the MiCOM relay and
ensure that the relay is no more powered.
DANGER:
NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT
TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE
LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.
Remove all wiring (communication, logic inputs, outputs, auxiliary voltage, current inputs).
Disconnect the relay earth connection from the rear of the relay.
Remove the screws used to fasten the relay to the panel, rack, etc… .These are the screws
with the larger diameter heads that are accessible when the upper and lower flaps are open.
Withdraw the relay from the panel, rack, etc… carefully because it will be heavy due to the
internal transformers.
To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instructions in reverse,
ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and case earth,
communication are replaced.
Once reinstallation is complete the relay should be recommissioned using the instruction in
sections 1 to 4 inclusive of this chapter.
5.3
Problem solving
5.3.1
Password lost or not accepted
Problem:
Password lost or not accepted
Cause:
MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays are supplied with the password set to AAAA.
This password can be changed by the user (refer OP PARAMETERS menu).
P12y/EN CM/Fa5
Commissioning and Maintenance
Page 22/22
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Action:
There is an additional unique recovery password associated to the relay which can be
supplied by the factory or service agent, if given details of its serial number (under the upper
flap of the front panel). With this serial number, contact your Schneider Electric local dealer
or Schneider Electric Customer Care Center.
5.3.2
Communication
5.3.2.1
Values measured locally and remotely
Problem:
The measurements noted remotely and locally (via RS485 communication) differ.
Cause:
The values accessible on the front face via the Measurement menu are refreshed every
second. Those fed back via the communication and accessible by the Schneider Electric
Setting software generally have skeletal refreshing frequencies. If the refreshing frequency of
the supervision software differs from that of MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays (1s), there
may be a difference between indicated values.
Action:
Adjust the frequency for refreshing the measurements of the supervision software or of the
setting software to 1 second.
5.3.2.2
MiCOM relay no longer responds
Problem:
No response from MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays when asked by the supervision
software without any communication fault message.
Cause:
Mainly, this type of problem is linked to an error in the MiCOM P125, P126 and P127
communication parameters.
Action:
Check MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 communication parameters (data rate, parity, etc.) are
in accordance with the supervision settings.
Check MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 network address.
Check that this address is not used by another device connected on the same LAN.
Check that the other devices on the same LAN answer to supervision requests.
5.3.2.3
A remote command is not taken in account
Problem:
The communication between the relay and the PC is correct, but the relay does not accept
any remote command or file downloading.
Cause:
Generally this is due to the fact that the relay is in programming situation. This means that
the password is active.
Action:
Check that the password is not active in the relay since the last 5 minutes.
Connections and Wiring Diagrams
P12y/EN CO/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
CONNECTIONS AND
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connections and Wiring Diagrams
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN CO/Fa5
Page 1/12
CONTENT
1.
P125 REAR DESCRIPTION
3
1.1
P125 wiring diagram
4
2.
P126 REAR DESCRIPTION
5
2.1
P126 wiring diagram
6
3.
P127 REAR DESCRIPTION
7
3.1
P127 wiring diagram
8
4.
P126 & P127 CURRENT INSERTION SCHEMES
10
4.1
P126 & P127 Holmgreen CT’s insertion
10
4.2
P126 & P127 Two phases CT’s insertion
11
P12y/EN CO/Fa5
Connections and Wiring Diagrams
Page 2/12
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
BLANK PAGE
Connections and Wiring Diagrams
P12y/EN CO/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.
Page 3/12
P125 REAR DESCRIPTION
Case earth
1
2
29
30
3
4
31
32
5
6
33
34
7
8
35
36
9
10
37
38
11
12
39
40
13
14
41
42
15
16
43
44
17
18
45
46
19
20
47
48
21
22
49
50
23
24
51
52
25
26
53
54
27
28
55
56
Module terminal blocks
viewed from rear
(with integral case earth link)
P0071ENb
Output 5
1
2
Common output
1
Case earth
connection
29
30
Terminal
RS485
Common
output 5
3
4
Output 1 (NC)
RS485 -
31
32
RS485 +
Output 6
5
6
Output1 (NO)
Vaux +
33
34
Vaux –
Common
output 6
7
8
Common output
2
Relay faulty
35
36
Common
"Watchdog"
9
10
Output 2 (NC)
Relay healthy
37
38
11
12
Output 2 (NO)
Residual volt.
Input -
39
40
13
14
Output 3
41
42
15
16
Common output
3
43
44
Input3 +
17
18
Output 4
45
46
Input3 –
19
20
Common output
4
47
48
Input4 +
21
22
Input1 +
49
50
Input4 –
23
24
Input1 –
51
52
25
26
Input2 +
53
54
27
28
Input2 –
55
56
Current input
(5A)
Current input
(1A)
Residual volt.
Input +
Current input
(5A)
Current input
(1A)
P12y/EN CO/Fa5
Connections and Wiring Diagrams
Page 4/12
1.1
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P125 wiring diagram
Scheme shows output relays off
A
C
35
B
~/ + 33
WD
Auxiliary Voltage
~/ _ 34
37
36
4
RL1
6
2
10
55
RL2
12
8
14
Phase rotation
Trip direction
A B C
P1
S1
1A
56
32N
50N
67N
59N
51N
RL3
16
18
20
3
1
7
5
47
5A
48
RL4
RL5
RL6
A
MiCOM
P125
da
B
Programmable tripping output
Programmable output
Programmable output
Programmable output
Programmable output
Programmable output
22
24
26
28
17
19
21
40
C
Watch Dog
Programmable input L1
Programmable input L2
Programmable input L3
Programmable input L4
23
N
dn
39
Case earth connection
29
*
Communication cable shield
30 Terminal RS485
_
31
+
32
RS485
Communication Port
*terminating resistor for the last
relay to be connected between 30-32
P0074ENc
Connections and Wiring Diagrams
P12y/EN CO/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.
Page 5/12
P126 REAR DESCRIPTION
Case earth
57
58
1
2
29
30
59
60
3
4
31
32
61
62
5
6
33
34
63
64
7
8
35
36
65
66
9
10
37
38
67
68
11
12
39
40
69
70
13
14
41
42
71
72
15
16
43
44
73
74
17
18
45
46
75
76
19
20
47
48
77
78
21
22
49
50
79
80
23
24
51
52
81
82
25
26
53
54
83
84
27
28
55
56
Module terminal blocks
viewed from rear
(with integral case earth link)
P0072ENb
Input 7 +
57 58 Input 6 +
Output 5
1
2
Common
output 1
Case earth
connection
29 30 Terminal
RS485
Input 7 –
59 60 Input 6 –
Common
output 5
3
4
Output 1
(NC)
RS485 -
31 32 RS485+
61 62
Output 6
5
6
Output1
(NO)
Vaux +
33 34 Vaux –
63 64
Common
output 6
7
8
Common
output 2
Relay failed 35 36 Common
"Watchdog"
65 66
Common
output 7
9
10 Output 2
(NC)
67 68
Output 7
11 12 Output 2
(NO)
39 40
Voltage
input VA
69 70 Voltage
input VA
Common
output 8
13 14 Output 3
41 42 Current input
Current
input IA (5A)
IA (5A)
Voltage
input VB
71 72 Voltage
input VB
Output 8
15 16 Common
output 3
43 44 Current input
Current
input IB (5A)
IB (5A)
Voltage
input VC/Vr
73 74 Voltage
input VC/Vr
Input 3 +
17 18 Output 4
45 46 Current input
Current
input IC(5A)
IC(5A)
75 76
Input 3 –
19 20 Common
output 4
47 48 Current input
Current
input Ie (5A)
Ie(5A)
77 78
Input 4 +
21 22 Input 1 +
49 50 Current input
Current
input IA (1A)
IA (1A)
79 80
Input 4 –
23 24 Input 1 –
51 52 Current input
Current
input IB (1A)
IB (1A)
81 82
Input 5 +
25 26 Input 2 +
53 54 Current input
Current
input IC(1A)
IC(1A)
83 84
Input 5 –
27 28 Input 2 –
55 56 Current input
Current
input Ie (1A)
Ie(1A)
Relay
healthy
37 38
P12y/EN CO/Fa5
Connections and Wiring Diagrams
Page 6/12
2.1
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P126 wiring diagram
Scheme represents relays off
A
C
B
Phase rotation
35
A B C
~/ + 33
Auxiliary Voltage
~/ _ 34
WD
37
36
4
49
RL1
6
2
10
RL2
12
8
14
P1
S1
1A
50
50
51
32N
67N
50N
51N
51
P1
S1
1A
RL3
16
52
53
P1
S1
37
59N
79
50BF
TCS
BC
55
S1
20
49
3
RL5
54
Trip direction
46
1A
P1
18
RL4
1A
56
41
1
7
RL6
5
9
RL7
11
13
RL8
15
5A
22
42
24
43
Programmable inputL1
26
5A
28
17
44
45
5A
46
47
5A
48
Ad
a
19
21
MiCOM
P126
23
25
27
58
60
57
Programmable inputL2
Programmable inputL3
Programmable inputL4
Programmable inputL5
Programmable inputL6
Programmable inputL7
59
B
29
30
C
N
Case earth connection
Communication cable shield
73
dn
74
_
31
+
32
Terminal RS485
RS485
Communication
P0075ENb
Connections and Wiring Diagrams
P12y/EN CO/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.
Page 7/12
P127 REAR DESCRIPTION
Case earth
Module terminal blocks
viewed from rear
(with integral case earth link)
P0072ENc
Input 7 +
57 58 Input 6 +
Output 5
1
2
Common
output 1
Case earth
connection
29 30 Terminal
RS485
Input 7 –
59 60 Input 6 –
Common
output 5
3
4
Output 1
(NC)
RS485 -
31 32 RS485+
Input 8
(1)
+ terminal
61 62 Input COM(1)
Output 6
5
6
Output1
(NO)
Vaux +
33 34 Vaux –
Input A
(1)
+ terminal
63 64 Input 9
(1)
Common
output 6
7
8
Common
output 2
Relay failed 35 36 Common
"Watchdog"
Input C
(1)
+ terminal
65 66 Input B
(1)
Common
output 7
9
10 Output 2
(NC)
Output 7
11 12 Output 2
(NO)
39 40
(3)
– terminal
+ terminal
+ terminal
(3)
37 38
Current I1
meas. 1A/5A
67
Voltage
input VA
69 70 Voltage
input VA
Common
output 8
13 14 Output 3
41 42 Current input
Current
input IA (5A)
IA (5A)
Voltage
input VB
71 72 Voltage
input VB
Output 8
15 16 Common
output 3
43 44 Current input
Current
input IB (5A)
IB (5A)
Voltage
input VC/Vr
73 74 Voltage
input VC/Vr
Input 3 +
17 18 Output 4
45 46 Current input
Current
input IC(5A)
IC(5A)
Input 3 –
19 20 Common
output 4
47 48 Current input
Current
input Ie (5A)
Ie(5A)
(3)
68 Current I1
meas. 1A/5A
Relay
healthy
(3)
Current I2
meas. 1A/5A
75
Case earth
(2
connection
term.
77 78 RS485-2
(2)
Input 4 +
21 22 Input 1 +
49 50 Current input
Current
input IA (1A)
IA (1A)
RS485-2
(2)
– terminal
79 80 RS485-2
Input 4 –
23 24 Input 1 –
51 52 Current input
Current
input IB (1A)
IB (1A)
IRIG-B mod
(2)
– terminal
81 82 IRIG-B mod
(2)
Input 5 +
25 26 Input 2 +
53 54 Current input
Current
input IC(1A)
IC(1A)
IRIG-B dem
(2)
– terminal
83 84 IRIG-B dem
(2)
Input 5 –
27 28 Input 2 –
55 56 Current input
Current
input Ie (1A)
Ie(1A)
(1)
76 Current I2
meas. 1A/5A
Z
+ terminal
(2)
+ terminal
– terminal
Available only for P127 “5 opto-inputs” option (product codes P127xx1 or P127xx3).
“Input COM – terminal” is the common terminal for inputs 8 to 12.
(2)
Available only for P127 “IRIG-B and 2nd rear port option” option (product codes P127xx2
or P127xx3).
The “81” and “82” terminals are used to connect the optional BNC adaptor. This one must
be plugged according to the “+” and “GND” positions marked on the adaptor.
(3)
With I1 = IA or IB or IC and I2 = IA or IB or IC. Available only for P127 with additional
measurement CT option (product codes P127xx4, P127xx5, P127xx6 or P127xx7).
P12y/EN CO/Fa5
Connections and Wiring Diagrams
Page 8/12
3.1
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P127 wiring diagram
Scheme represents relays off
Protection CT
Measurement CT
Watchdog (4)
Output 1
Example with phases A
and B connected
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
50
51
67
32N
50N
51N
67N
37
46
49
79
46BC
50BF
Input 12
TC S
59
59N
27
81
81R
32
VTS
51V
86
Terminals "30/32" and "78/80" to
be connected at the end of
RS485 bus.
BNC adaptor board
IRIG B
Modulated
CTS
= optional
IRIG B
Unmodulated
P0076ENf
Connections and Wiring Diagrams
P12y/EN CO/Fa5
B
C
C
A
A
C
B
Measurement CT connection
(optional)
A
Page 9/12
B
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P3947ENb
P12y/EN CO/Fa5
Connections and Wiring Diagrams
Page 10/12
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
4.
P126 & P127 CURRENT INSERTION SCHEMES
4.1
P126 & P127 Holmgreen CT’s insertion
Auxiliary
voltage
Three phases CTs (IA, IB, IC) + residual current
by Holmgreen insertion
Phase rotation
MiCOM
P126/P127
P0101ENa
Connections and Wiring Diagrams
P12y/EN CO/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P126 & P127 Two phases CT’s insertion
Two phases CTs (IA, IC) + residual current insertion
Auxiliary
voltage
4.2
Page 11/12
Phase rotation
MiCOM
P126/P127
P0102ENa
P12y/EN CO/Fa5
Connections and Wiring Diagrams
Page 12/12
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
BLANK PAGE
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
COMMISSIONING TEST
AND RECORD SHEET
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Page 1/70
CONTENT
1.
COMMISSIONING TEST
5
1.1
Relay identification
5
1.2
Commissioning test record
5
1.3
Auxiliary supply control
5
1.4
Measurements and analogue inputs control
6
1.5
Phase overcurrent protection test
1.6
Phase under current protection test
7
1.7
Earth over current protection test
7
1.8
Directional earth fault overcurrent
8
1.9
Earth Fault Wattmetric protection test
9
1.10
Over/Under Phase voltage protection test
9
1.11
Residual voltage protection test
10
1.12
Autoreclose basic test
10
1.12.1
ARC test procedure with tI>
12
1.12.2
ARC test procedure with tIe>
12
2.
COMMISSIONING RECORD SHEET
13
2.1
OP PARAMETERS Menu
13
2.2
CONFIGURATION menu
13
2.2.1
General options
13
2.2.2
Transfo. Ratio
14
2.2.3
LEDs 5 to 8 configuration
14
2.2.4
Inputs configuration
18
2.2.5
Output relays configuration
18
2.2.6
Group select configuration
18
2.2.7
Alarms configuration
18
2.3
COMMUNICATION menu
21
2.3.1
HMI communication
21
2.3.2
COMM1 communication
21
2.3.3
COMM2 communication
21
2.4
PROTECTION Menu
22
2.4.1
Phase overcurrent [(67/)50/51]
22
2.4.2
[67N] E/GND
24
2.4.3
[32] Directional power
28
2.4.4
[32N] Earth wattmetric
29
2.4.5
[46] Neg Seq OC
30
2.4.6
[49] Thermal OL
31
2.4.7
[37] UNDERCURRENT I<
31
2.4.8
[59] Phase Over Voltage
31
2.4.9
[27] Phase Under Voltage
32
6
1
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 2/70
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.4.10
[59N] Residual overvoltage
32
2.4.11
[47] Negative overvoltage (P127)
32
2.4.12
[79] Autoreclose
33
2.4.13
Frequency [81] menu
34
2.4.14
Freq. rate of change [81R] menu
34
2.5
AUTOMAT. CTRL menu
35
2.5.1
Trip Commands
35
2.5.2
Latch relays
37
2.5.3
Blocking logic 1 function allocation
37
2.5.4
Blocking logic 2 function allocation
38
2.5.5
Inrush Blocking Logic function allocation
40
2.5.6
Logic Select 1 function allocation
41
2.5.7
Logic Select 2 function allocation
41
2.5.8
OUTPUT RELAYS allocation
42
2.5.9
LOGIC INPUT allocation
47
2.5.10
BROKEN CONDUCTOR allocation
48
2.5.11
COLD LOAD PU allocation
49
2.5.12
51V allocation
49
2.5.13
VTS allocation
50
2.5.14
CTS allocation
50
2.5.15
CB FAIL allocation
51
2.5.16
CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION allocation
51
2.5.17
SOTF
52
2.5.18
LOGIC EQUATIONS
52
2.5.19
Comm. Order delay
56
2.6
RECORDING MENU
57
2.6.1
CB MONITORING Record
57
2.6.2
FAULT RECORD Record
57
2.6.3
INSTANTANEOUS Record
58
2.6.4
DISTURB RECORD record
58
2.6.5
TIME PEAK VALUE
58
2.6.6
ROLLING DEMAND
58
3.
P126 & P127 FURTHER TESTS
59
3.1
Introduction
59
3.2
Test equipment
59
3.3
Type used relay
59
3.4
Test configuration
59
3.5
Connections to test equipment
59
3.6
Test Overcurrent Protection
59
3.7
Non-directional overcurrent protection
60
3.7.1
Overcurrent sensitivity tests
60
3.7.2
Overcurrent characteristic tests
60
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Page 3/70
3.7.3
Non-directional earth fault overcurrent protection
61
3.7.4
Neutral characteristic tests
61
3.7.5
Directional earth fault overcurrent protection
62
3.7.6
Reset time test
63
3.7.7
Directional earth fault operating boundary
63
3.7.8
Neutral characteristic tests
64
3.7.9
Directionaloperating boundary – PHASE overcurrent (only P127)
64
3.7.10
Earth directional wattmetric test
65
3.7.11
Negative sequence overcurrent
66
3.7.12
Thermal overload
66
3.8
Voltage Protection (only P127)
66
3.8.1
Under voltage
66
3.8.2
Phase to neutral under voltage element
67
3.8.3
Over voltage
67
3.8.4
Phase to neutral over voltage element
67
3.8.5
Residual over voltage
67
3.9
Automatic control functions
68
3.9.1
Trip circuit supervision
68
3.9.2
Circuit breaker failure
68
3.9.3
Cold load pick-up
69
3.9.4
Broken Conductor
69
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 4/70
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
BLANK PAGE
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.
Page 5/70
COMMISSIONING TEST
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE
USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
GUIDE SFTY/4LM/G11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND
TECHNICAL DATA SECTION OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND ALSO
THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
1.1
Relay identification
Commissioning date :
Engineer :
Substation :
Circuit :
Network nominal frequency:
MiCOM relay model:
P125
P126
P127
Serial number:
Rated current In :
Rated current Ien :
Rated Voltage primary :
Rated Voltage secondary:
Auxiliary voltage Uaux :
Communication protocol :
Language :
1.2
Commissioning test record
(Put a cross after each checked stage)
Serial number check ?
All current transformer shorting switches closed ?
Wiring checked against diagram (if available)?
Case earth installed ?
Test block connections checked (if installed) ?
Insulation tested ?
1.3
Auxiliary supply control
Auxiliary voltage to relay
Auxiliary voltage value
_________Vdc/Vac
Watchdog contacts
With auxiliary supply off
Terminals 35 and 36
With auxiliary supply on
Terminals 36 and 37
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 6/70
1.4
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Measurements and analogue inputs control
•
Set the voltage wiring mode in CONFIGURATION/General options menu as 2Vpn+Vr
•
Set in the configuration menu in the submenu Transfo Ratio as shown below.
Line CT Line CT E/Gnd CT E/Gnd CT Line VT Line VT E/Gnd VT E/Gnd VT
primary secondary primary Secondary Primary secondary Primary Secondary
1
1
1
1
Phase Applied Current
100V
0.10 kV
Phase A:
A
IA:
A
Phase B:
A
IB:
A
Phase C:
A
IC:
A
Earth current:
Measured value
A IN:
Phase Voltage Applied
A
Measured value
Phase A:
A
UA:
A
Phase B:
A
UB:
A
Residual Voltage Applied
Residual Voltage:
NOTE:
100V
Measured value
Earth Current Applied
1.5
0.10 kV
Measured value
V
UN:
V
The measured values are displayed in the Measurement submenu of
the involved relay.
Phase overcurrent protection test
Type and setting threshold
in In
I>:
Value
applied in
In
A
Type and setting threshold
in In
I>:
Value
applied in
In
A
Type and setting threshold
in In
I>>:
0.2 x I>
2 x I>
Value
applied in
In
A
0.5x I>>
Delay Time Trip value in
Setting
In
Drop value in
In
1s
Delay Time Measured
Setting
Trip Delay
time
Drop value in
In
1s
Delay Time Trip value in
Setting
In
1s
Drop value in
In
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 7/70
Type and setting threshold
in In
I>>:
Value
applied in
In
A
2.5x I>>
Type and setting threshold
in In
I>>>:
1.6
A
1s
0.5xI>>>
1s
s
Value applied Delay Time Measured Trip Drop value in
in In
Setting
Delay time
In
A
2.5xI>>>
1s
s
Phase under current protection test
Type and setting threshold
in In
I<:
Value applied Delay Time Trip value in In Drop value in
in In
Setting
In
A
0.2 x I<
Type and setting threshold
in In
I<:
1.7
Drop value in
In
Value applied Delay Time Trip value in In Drop value in
in In
Setting
In
Type and setting threshold
in In
I>>>:
Delay Time Measured
Setting
Trip Delay
time
1s
s
s
Value applied Delay Time Measured Trip Drop value in
in In
Setting
Delay time
In
A
0.2 x I<
1s
s
Earth over current protection test
Type and setting threshold
in Ien
Value
Delay Time Trip value in
applied in Ien Setting
In
Ie>:
0.2 x Ie>
Type and setting threshold
in Ien
Value
Delay Time Measured
applied in Ien Setting
Trip Delay
time
Ie>:
2 x Ie>
Type and setting threshold
in Ien
Value
Delay Time Trip value in
applied in Ien Setting
In
Ie>>:
0.2x Ie>>
Type and setting threshold
in Ien
Value
Delay Time Measured
applied in Ien Setting
Trip Delay
time
Ie>>:
2 x Ie>>
Drop value in
In
1s
Drop value in
In
1s
Drop value in
In
1s
1s
Drop value in
In
s
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 8/70
1.8
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Type and setting threshold
in Ien
Value
Delay Time Trip value in
applied in Ien Setting
In
Ie>>>:
0.5 x Ie>>>
Type and setting threshold
in Ien
Value
Delay Time Measured
applied in Ien Setting
Trip Delay
time
Ie>>>:
2 x Ie>>>
Drop value in
In
1s
Drop value in
Ien, Ue, R
1s
Directional earth fault overcurrent
The setting range depends on the sensitivity of the relay type.
However the setting value is expressed in Ien and this one bypasses the problem.
The test is proposed for the first stage, but using the same values can be executed for the
others stages two stages.
Below it is listed the guide table.
Type and setting current stage
Value
Delay Time Measured
in Ien, Ue> in Volt, in degrees for applied in In, Setting
Trip Delay
the torque angle and the trip zone in Volt and
time
the angles in
degrees
Ie>:
0.5 x Ie>
Ue>:10V
2 x 10V
Torque angle : 0°
0°
Trip Zone : +/- 90°
+/-85°
Type and setting current stage
in Ien, the Ue> in Volt and in
degrees the torque angle and the
trip zone
Value
applied in In,
Measured
Delay Time
in Volt and
Trip Delay
Setting
the angles in
time
degrees
Ie>:
2 x Ie>
Ue>:10V
80V
Torque angle : 0°
0°
Trip Zone : +/- 90°
+/-85°
Drop value for
Ien, Ue,
Torque angle,
and trip zone
1s
1s
Drop value for
Ien, Ue,
Torque angle,
and trip zone
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
1.9
Page 9/70
Earth Fault Wattmetric protection test
The earth fault wattmetric protection can be tested but as above needs of the residual
voltage injection the wattmetric power is calculated as Ie x Ue x cos (Ie^Ue+ϕc)
The calculation is referred to the secondary values.
The same test can be repeated for the second stage.
Type and setting Pe stage are in
watt referred to the secondary.
The setting value depends on the
set nominal Ien current (1A).
Pe>: 20W
Value
Delay Time Measured
applied in In, Setting
Trip Delay
in Volt and
time
the angles in
degrees
Drop value for
Ien, Ue,
Torque angle,
and trip zone
0.5 x
Ien=0.5A
Ue=45V
Ue^Ie =0°
tPe>=1s
ϕc = 0°
Note: Change the angle between Ue^Ie and verify the trip and drop off of the Pe stage and
the value of the Pe in the measurement menu.
1.10
Over/Under Phase voltage protection test
Type and setting threshold
in Volt
Value applied
in Volt
Delay
Time
Setting
U>:
2xU>
1s
Type and setting threshold
in Volt
Value applied
in Volt
Delay
Time
Setting
U>:
2xU>
1s
Type and setting threshold
in Volt
Value applied
in Volt
Delay
Time
Setting
U<:
0.2 x U <
1s
Type and setting threshold
in Volt
Value applied
in Volt
Delay
Time
Setting
U<<:
0.2 x U <<
1s
Trip value in
Volt
Drop value in
Volt
Measured
Trip Delay
time
Drop value in
Volt
Trip value in
Volt
Drop value in
Volt
Measured
Trip Delay
time
Drop value in
Volt
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 10/70
1.11
1.12
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Residual voltage protection test
Type and setting threshold
in Volt
Value applied
in Volt
Delay Time Trip value in Drop value in
Setting
Volt
Volt
Ue>>>>:
2 x Ue>>>>
1s
Type and setting threshold
in Volt
Value applied
in Volt
Measured
Delay Time
Trip Delay
Setting
time
Ue>>>>:
2 x Ue>>>>
1s
Drop value in
Volt
Autoreclose basic test
From the 6A firmware version the ARC function follows the other ones of the Px20 range.
The testing of this functionality requires a bit attention and some more setting.
Below the setting table and the test procedure is listed.
MENU TEXT
SET FOR THE TEST
PROTECTION G1
[67] Phase OC
I>
Yes
I>
1 In
Delay type
DMT
tI>
1 sec
I>>
Yes
I>>
2 In
Delay
DMT
tI>>
1 sec
I>>>
No
[67N] E/GND
Ie>
Yes
Ie>
1 In
Delay type
DMT
tIe>
1 sec
tReset
0,04s
Ie>> and Ie>>>
No
AUTORECLOSE
Autoreclose?
YES
Ext CB Fail?
NO
Ext Block?
NO
tD1
5 sec
tD2
5 sec
tD3
5 sec
tD4
5 sec
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Page 11/70
MENU TEXT
SET FOR THE TEST
Reclaim Time tR
10 sec
Inhibit Time tI
0.2 sec
Phase Cycles
4
E/Gnd Cycles
4
Cycles
tI>
4321
1111
Cycles
tI>>
4321
0000
Cycles
tI>>>
4321
0000
Cycles
tIe>
4321
2222
Cycles
tIe>>
4321
0000
Cycles
tIe>>>
4321
0000
Cycles
tPe/Iecos>,
4321
0000
Cycles
tPe/Iecos>>
4321
0000
Cycles
tAux1
4321
0000
Cycles
tAux2
4321
0000
In the below table are listed the setting to have a corrected functionality of the 79 function.
The output relay, the digital input and the led assigne are free.
The indicating setting are those used for internal test.
In the output relay none other functionality can be assigned to the relay CB Close.
AUTOMATIC CTRL MENU
SET FOR THE TEST
Output relay
CB Close
relay 2
TRIP 79
relay 8
79 Run
relay 7
Inputs menu
52a
input 1
Trip Command
tI>
Yes
tIe>
Yes
All the other ones
No
Configuration menu
LED
Led 5
I>
Ie>
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 12/70
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
AUTOMATIC CTRL MENU
SET FOR THE TEST
Led 6
tI>
tIe>
Led 7
Recl. Blocked
Led 8
Recl Run
NOTE :
1.12.1
1.12.2
To execute the ARC test you have to connect an external relay for the
monitoring the CB status (52a OFF when the CB is open, ON when
CB is closed). Further the flowing of the current to the relay must be
interrupted when the 52a is OFF; CB is open.
ARC test procedure with tI>
−
Close the CB and inject current the led 7 lights for 0.2 s.
−
After 1 sec the CB open tD1 start the led 8 lights
−
After 5 seconf the CB closes and start tR
−
After 1 sec. The CB open and td 2 start
−
…………………………………….
−
When we are to the td 4 when the CB close and after 1 sec the tI> trip the 79 trip and
Recl Blocked will be actived. 4 shots was done.
ARC test procedure with tIe>
−
Close the CB and inject the Ie current, the led 7 lights for 0.2 s.
−
After 1 sec the CB does not open and tDx does not start none led will be light
This result is corrected because to the Ie was imposed the setting “2”.
Commissioning Engineer :
Date :
Remarks
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 13/70
2.
COMMISSIONING RECORD SHEET
2.1
OP PARAMETERS Menu
Password :
Reference :
Software version :
Frequency :
2.2
CONFIGURATION menu
2.2.1
General options
50 Hz
60 Hz
VT connection
3Vpn
2Vpp + Vr
2Vpn + Vr
VT connection
Not available
Modulated
Unmodulated
VT Protection
Protect P-N
Protect P-P
Phase rotation
A-B-C
A-C-B
CTm1 phase ? (P127)
None
IA
IB
IC
CTm2 phase ? (P127)
None
IA
IB
IC
CTm3 phase ? (P127)
None
IA
IB
IC
Default Displays
(P126/P127)
RMS IA
RMS IB
Earth Text (P125)
N
o
E
Phases/Eath Text
(P126 / P127)
L1 L2 L3 N
ABCo
RSTE
RMS IN
RMS IC
RMS IA IB IC IN
Iam Tdd denom (P127)
A
Ibm Tdd denom (P127)
A
Icm Tdd denom (P127)
A
Prot. Freq. Block
V
dF/dt Cycles.nb. (P127)
dF/dt Validat.nb= (P127)
Inh.Block dF/dt >20 Hz/s
(P127)
Yes
Time Synchro.
Not available (Cortec code P127--2 or P127--3---- only)
IRIG-B
COMM1
IRIG-B
Modulated
No
COMM2
Automatic
Demodulated
Not applicable
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 14/70
2.2.2
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Transfo. Ratio
P126
P127
Line CT Primary
•
•
Line CT Secondary
•
•
E/Gnd CT Primary
•
•
•
E/Gnd CT Secondary
•
•
•
A
1A
5ª
A
1A
5A
Line VT primary
•
V
Line VT sec
•
V
E/Gnd VT primary
•
•
•
V
Not visible
E/Gnd VT secondary
•
•
•
V
Not visible
Line CTm primary
•
A
Not visible
Line CTm sec
•
A
Not visible
LEDs 5 to 8 configuration
P126
P127
• = available with this model.
O = Optional
I>
•
•
tI>
•
•
I>>
•
•
tI>>
•
•
I>>>
•
•
tI>>>
•
•
tIA>
•
•
tIB>
•
•
tIC>
•
•
Functions
P125
2.2.3
P125
• = available with this
model.
O = Optional
Ie>
•
•
•
tIe>
•
•
•
Ie>>
•
•
•
tIe>>
•
•
•
Ie>>>
•
•
•
tIe>>>
•
•
•
Ie_d>
•
tIe_d>
•
Ie_d>>
•
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
P127
P126
Functions
Page 15/70
P125
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
tIe_d>>
•
P>
•
tP>
•
P>>
•
tP>>
•
P<
•
tP<
•
P<<
•
tP<
•
Q>
•
tQ>
•
Q>>
•
tQ>>
•
Q<
•
tQ<
•
Q<<
•
tQ<
•
Pe/IeCos>
•
•
•
tPe/IeCos>
•
•
•
Pe/IeCos>>
•
•
•
tPe/IeCos>>
•
•
•
I2>
•
•
tI2>
•
•
I2>>
•
•
tI2>>
•
•
I2>>>
•
•
tI2>>>
•
•
Therm. Trip
•
•
I<
•
•
tI<
•
•
U>
•
tU>
•
U>>
•
tU>>
•
U<
•
tU<
•
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P127
Functions
P126
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P125
Page 16/70
U<<
•
tU<<
•
Ue>>>>
•
•
•
tUe>>>>
•
•
•
V2>
•
V2>
•
V2>>
•
V2>>
•
F1
•
tF1
•
F2
•
tF2
•
F3
•
tF3
•
F4
•
tF4
•
F5
•
tF5
•
F6
•
tF6
•
F Out
•
dF/dt1
•
dF/dt2
•
dF/dt3
•
dF/dt4
•
dF/dt5
•
dF/dt6
•
F. out
•
Brkn. Cond
•
•
CB Fail
•
•
VTS
•
CTS
•
Input 1
•
•
•
Input 2
•
•
•
Input 3
•
•
•
Input 4
•
•
•
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
P126
P127
Page 17/70
Input 5
•
•
Input 6
•
•
Functions
P125
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Input 7
•
Input 8
O
Input 9
O
Input A
O
Input B
O
Input C
O
79 Run
•
•
79i Blocked
•
•
79e. Blocked
•
•
tAux1
•
•
•
tAux2
•
•
•
tAux3
•
•
tAux4
•
•
tAux5
•
tAux6
•
tAux7
•
tAux8
O
tAux9
O
tAuxA
O
tAuxB
O
tAuxC
O
tSOTF
•
•
tEQU. A
•
•
•
tEQU. B
•
•
•
tEQU. C
•
•
•
tEQU. D
•
•
•
tEQU. E
•
•
•
tEQU. F
•
•
•
tEQU. G
•
•
•
tEQU. H
•
•
•
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 18/70
2.2.4
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Inputs configuration
= ↓,
=↑
3
Inputs (P125 only)
7
Inputs (P126 and P127)
Inputs (P127 with 12
inputs configuration)
1
6
5
4
3
2
C
B
A
9
8
DC
Voltage input DC
2.2.5
2
AC
Output relays configuration
P125 →
←
8
Fail Safe Relay
←
7
P126 & P127
6
5
4
YES
Maintenance Mode
Relays
CMD
P122 and P123 only
8
←
7
6
3
2
1
P125 →
P126 & P127
5
W
4
3
Group select configuration
Change group
Input
Menu
Setting group
(P125/P126)
1
2
Inst. Self Reset
YES
NO
Reset Led on fault
YES
NO
Setting Group (P127)
Target group (P127)
Group if low level (P127)
Group if high level
(P127)
2.2.7
→
NO
←
2.2.6
1
Alarms configuration
→
2
1
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Inhibited alarms
Ctrl_Trip ?
tI< ?
tU< ?
tU<< ?
tU> ?
tU>> ?
tV2> ?
tV2>> ?
tP< ?
tP<< ?
tQ< ?
tQ<< ?
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F.out
[79] ext. blk ?
tAux 1
tAux 2
tAux 3
tAux 4
tAux 5
tAux 6
tAux 7
tAux 8 (option)
tAux 9 (option)
tAux A (option)
tAux B (option)
tAux C (option)
Equ A
Equ B
Equ C
Equ D
Page 19/70
P125
P126
P127
YES
YES
YES
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 20/70
Inhibited alarms
Equ E
Equ F
Equ G
Equ H
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P125
P126
P127
YES
YES
YES
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.3
COMMUNICATION menu
2.3.1
HMI communication
HMI ?
Page 21/70
YES
NO
Private
IEC
YES
NO
Relay address
HMI ?
2.3.2
COMM1 communication
COMM1 ?
Baud rate
Parity
Even
Stop bits
0
Odd
None
1
Relay address
Spont. event & GI A11
None
Private only
IEC only
All
GI select.
Basic
Advanced
Measur. upload ASDU
3.4
YES
NO
Measur. upload ASDU 9
YES
NO
Measur. upload Other
YES
NO
Events + Measur.
Blocking
YES
NO
Command Blocking
YES
NO
s
Command timeout
2.3.3
COMM2 communication
COMM1 ?
YES
NO
Baud rate
Parity
Even
Stop bits
0
Odd
None
1
Relay address
Spont. event & GI A11
None
IEC only
Private only
All
GI select.
Basic
Advanced
Measur. upload ASDU
3.4
YES
NO
Measur. upload ASDU 9
YES
NO
Measur. upload Other
YES
NO
Events + Measur.
Blocking
YES
NO
Command Blocking
YES
NO
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 22/70
2.4
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
PROTECTION Menu
For several groups with different settings, copy this section.
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G8
Group copied from
Group copied to
2.4.1
Phase overcurrent [(67/)50/51]
2.4.1.1
[(67/)50/51] I>
I> ?
Yes
DIR (P127)
No:
Next menu: I>> ?
In
I>
I> Torque
°
Not displayed
I> Trip Zone
°
Not displayed
Delay Type
DMT
RI
IEC-STI
IEC SI
IEC VI
IEC-EI
IEC-LTI
CO2
IEEE-MI
CO8
IEEE-VI
IEEE-EI
RECT
2.4.1.1.1 [(67/)50/51] I> = DMT
s
tI>
2.4.1.1.2 [(67/)50/51] I> = RI
K
s
t Reset
I> >> >>> Interlock
Yes
No
2.4.1.1.3 [(67/)50/51] I> = IEC, RECT, CO or IEEE
TMS
Reset Delay Type
DMT
IDMT
Rtms
tReset
I> >> >>> Interlock
Not displayed
Not displayed
s
Yes
Not displayed
No
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.4.1.2
Page 23/70
[(67/)50/51] I>>
I>> ?
Yes
DIR (P127)
No:
Next menu: I>>> ?
In
I>>
I>> Torque
°
Not displayed
I>> Trip Zone
°
Not displayed
Delay Type
DMT
RI
IEC-STI
IEC SI
IEC VI
IEC-EI
IEC-LTI
CO2
IEEE-MI
CO8
IEEE-VI
IEEE-EI
RECT
2.4.1.2.1 [(67/)50/51] I>> = DMT
s
tI>
2.4.1.2.2 [(67/)50/51] I>> = RI
K
s
t Reset
2.4.1.2.3 [(67/)50/51] I>> = IEC, RECT, CO or IEEE
TMS
Reset Delay Type
DMT
IDMT
Not displayed
Rtms
Not displayed
s
tReset
2.4.1.3
Not displayed
[(67/)50/51] I>>>
I>>>?
YES
DIR (P127)
PEAK
NO (last menu)
I>>> Torque
°
Not displayed
I>>> Trip Zone
°
Not displayed
I>>>
In
tI>>>
s
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 24/70
2.4.2
[67N] E/GND
2.4.2.1
[67N] Ie>
Ie> ?
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Yes
DIR
NO:
Next menu: Ie>> ?
Ien
Ie>
Ue>
V
Not displayed
Ie> Torque
°
Not displayed
Ie> Trip Zone
°
Not displayed
Delay Type
DMT
RI
IEC-STI
IEC SI
IEC VI
IEC-EI
IEC-LTI
CO2
IEEE-MI
CO8
IEEE-VI
IEEE-EI
RECT
2.4.2.1.1 [67N] Ie> = DMT
tIe>
s
tReset
s
2.4.2.1.2 [67N] Ie> = RI
K
s
t Reset
Ie> >> >>> Interlock
Yes
No
2.4.2.1.3 [67N] Ie> = IEC, RECT, CO or IEEE
TMS
Reset Delay Type
DMT
IDMT
Rtms
tReset
Ie> >> >>> Interlock
Not displayed
Not displayed
s
Yes
Not displayed
No
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.4.2.2
Page 25/70
[67N] Ie>>
Ie>> ?
Yes
DIR
No:
Next menu: Ie>>>?
Ien
Ie>>
Ue >>
V
Not displayed
Ie>> Torque
°
Not displayed
Ie>> Trip Zone
°
Not displayed
Delay Type
DMT
RI
IEC-STI
IEC SI
IEC VI
IEC-EI
IEC-LTI
CO2
IEEE-MI
CO8
IEEE-VI
IEEE-EI
RECT
2.4.2.2.1 [67N] Ie>> = DMT
2.4.2.2.2
tIe>
s
tReset
s
[67N] Ie>> = RI
K
s
t Reset
2.4.2.2.3 [67N] Ie>> = IEC, RECT, CO or IEEE
TMS
Reset Delay Type
DMT
IDMT
Not displayed
Rtms
Not displayed
s
tReset
2.4.2.3
Not displayed
[67N] Ie>>>
Ie>>>?
YES
PEAK
DIR
NO (last menu)
In
Ie>>>
Ue>>>
V
Not displayed
Ie>>> Torque
°
Not displayed
Ie>>> Trip Zone
°
Not displayed
tIe>>>
s
tReset
s
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 26/70
2.4.2.4
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
[67N] Ie_d>
Ie_d>?
Yes
DIR
No:
Next menu: e_d>>
Ien
Ie_d>
Ue (Ie_d>)
V
Not displayed
Ie_d> Torque
°
Not displayed
Ie_d> Trip Zone
°
Not displayed
Delay Type
DMT
RI
IEC-STI
IEC SI
IEC VI
IEC-EI
IEC-LTI
CO2
IEEE-MI
CO8
IEEE-VI
IEEE-EI
RECT
2.4.2.4.1 [67N] Ie_d> = DMT
2.4.2.4.2
tIe>
s
tReset
s
[67N] Ie_d>= RI
K
s
t Reset
2.4.2.4.3 [67N] Ie_d> = IEC, RECT, CO or IEEE
TMS
Reset Delay Type
DMT
IDMT
Rtms
tReset
Not displayed
Not displayed
s
Not displayed
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.4.2.5
Page 27/70
[67N] Ie_d>>
Ie_d>>?
Yes
DIR
No:
(last menu)
Ien
Ie_d>>
Ue (Ie_d>>)
V
Not displayed
Ie_d>> Torque
°
Not displayed
Ie_d>> Trip Zone
°
Not displayed
Delay Type
DMT
RI
IEC-STI
IEC SI
IEC VI
IEC-EI
IEC-LTI
CO2
IEEE-MI
CO8
IEEE-VI
IEEE-EI
RECT
2.4.2.5.1 [67N] Ie_d>> = DMT
2.4.2.5.2
tIe>>
s
tReset
s
[67N] Ie_d>>= RI
K
s
t Reset
2.4.2.5.3 [67N] Ie_d>> = IEC, RECT, CO or IEEE
TMS
Reset Delay Type
DMT
IDMT
Rtms
tReset
Not displayed
Not displayed
s
Not displayed
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 28/70
2.4.3
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
[32] Directional power
Relay:
P125 (not available)
Relay:
P126 (not available)
P>?
YES
NO: next menu P>> ?
x
P>
W
Not displayed
Directional Angle
°
Not displayed
tP>
s
Not displayed
P>?
YES
NO: last menu
x
P>
W
Not displayed
Directional Angle
°
Not displayed
tP>
s
Not displayed
Q>?
YES
NO: next menu P>> ?
x
Q>
W
Not displayed
Directional Angle
°
Not displayed
tQ>
s
Not displayed
Q>?
YES
NO: last menu
x
Q>
W
Not displayed
Directional Angle
°
Not displayed
tQ>
s
Not displayed
P<?
YES
NO: next menu P<< ?
x
P<
W
Not displayed
Directional Angle
°
Not displayed
tP<
s
Not displayed
P<?
P<
YES
NO: last menu
x
W
Not displayed
Directional Angle
°
Not displayed
tP<
s
Not displayed
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Q<?
Page 29/70
YES
x
Q<
W
Not displayed
Directional Angle
°
Not displayed
tQ<
s
Not displayed
Q<?
YES
NO: last menu
x
Q<
2.4.4
NO: next menu P<< ?
W
Not displayed
Directional Angle
°
Not displayed
tQ<
s
Not displayed
[32N] Earth wattmetric
Relay:
P125 (not available)
[32N] mode
Pe
Pe>? or
IeCos> ?
YES
Ie Cos
NO:
Next menu P>>??/IeCos>>??
Pe> or IeCos>
Not displayed
Delay Type
DMT
RI
IEC-STI
IEC SI
IEC VI
IEC-EI
IEC-LTI
CO2
IEEE-MI
CO8
IEEE-VI
IEEE-EI
RECT
s
tPe> or tIeCos>
Not displayed
K
Not displayed
TMS
Not displayed
Reset delay type
DMT
IDMT
Rtms
Not displayed
s
tReset
Pe>>? or
IeCos>> ?
Not displayed
YES
Not displayed
NO: Last menu
tPe>> or
tIeCos>>
s
Not displayed
tReset
s
Not displayed
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 30/70
2.4.5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
[46] Neg Seq OC
Relay:
P125 (not available)
[32N] mode
Pe
Ie Cos
I2> ?
YES
NO: Next menu I2>>?
In
I2>
Delay Type
Not displayed
DMT
RI
IEC-STI
IEC SI
IEC VI
IEC-EI
IEC-LTI
CO2
IEEE-MI
CO8
IEEE-VI
IEEE-EI
RECT
s
tI2>
Not displayed
K
Not displayed
TMS
Not displayed
Reset delay type
DMT
IDMT
Rtms
Not displayed
s
tReset
I2>> ?
Not displayed
Not displayed
NO:
Next menu I2>>>?
YES
I2>>
In
Not displayed
tI2>>
S
Not displayed
I2>>> ?
YES
NO: Last menu
I2>>>
In
Not displayed
tI2>>>
s
Not displayed
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.4.6
Page 31/70
[49] Thermal OL
Relay:
Therm OL ?
P125 (not available)
YES
NO: Last menu
Iθ >
In
Te
mn
K
θ Trip
θ Alarm ?
YES
NO: Last menu
%
θ Alarm
2.4.7
[37] UNDERCURRENT I<
Relay:
P125 (not available)
I< ?
YES
NO
I<
In
tI<
s
Inhibition I< on 52A
YES
NO
Inhibition I< on U< (P127)
YES
NO
V
Inhibition I< on U< (P127)
2.4.8
[59] Phase Over Voltage
Relay:
P125 (not available)
Relay:
P126 (not available)
U> ?
AND
OR
No:
Next menu: U>>?
U>
V
Not displayed
tU>
s
Not displayed
U>> ?
AND
OR
No:
Last menu
U>>
V
Not displayed
tU>>
s
Not displayed
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 32/70
2.4.9
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
[27] Phase Under Voltage
Relay:
P125 (not available)
Relay:
P126 (not available)
U< ?
No:
Next menu: U>>?
V
Not displayed
tU<
s
Not displayed
U<< ?
AND
OR
AND
OR
Not displayed
No:
Last menu
U<<
V
Not displayed
tU<<
s
Not displayed
52a Inhib. U<< ?
AND
OR
Not displayed
[59N] Residual overvoltage
Ue>>>> ?
2.4.11
OR
U<
52a Inhib. U< ?
2.4.10
AND
YES
NO: Last menu
Ue>>>>
V
Not displayed
t Ue>>>>
s
Not displayed
[47] Negative overvoltage (P127)
V2> ?
YES
NO: Last menu
V2>
V
Not displayed
tV2>
s
Not displayed
V2>> ?
YES
NO: Last menu
V2>>
V
Not displayed
tV2>>
s
Not displayed
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.4.12
Page 33/70
[79] Autoreclose
Relay:
P125 (not available)
[79] Autoreclose ?
YES
NO
Last menu
Ext CB Fail ?
YES
NO
Next menu: Ext Block?
ms
Ext CB Fail Time
Ext Block ?
YES
NO
Rolling demand ?
YES
NO
Max cycle nb
mn
Time period
Dead Time tD1
s
Dead Time tD2
s
Dead Time tD3
s
Dead Time tD4
s
Dead Time tI>
s
Dead Time tI>>
s
Dead Time tI>>>
s
Dead Time tIe>
s
Dead Time tIe>>
s
Dead Time tIe>>>
s
Reclaim time tR
s
Inhib Time tI
s
Phase Cycles
1
2
3
4
E/Gnd Cycles
1
2
3
4
Cycles
4
tI>
tI>>
tI>>>
tIe>
tIe>>
tIe>>>
tPe/IeCos>
tPe/IeCos>>
tAux 1
tAux 2
3
2
1
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 34/70
2.4.13
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Frequency [81] menu
Relay:
P125 (not available)
Relay:
P126 (not available)
Fx
Fx =
tFx
Hz *
ms *
[81] F1
_______
_______
[81] F2
_______
_______
[81] F3
_______
_______
[81] F4
_______
_______
[81] F5
_______
_______
[81] F6
_______
_______
No
2.4.14
81>
81<
Freq. rate of change [81R] menu
Relay:
P125 (not available)
Relay:
P126 (not available)
dF/dtx ?
dF/dtx =
Yes
Hz/s*
[81R] dF/dt1
_______
[81R] dF/dt2
_______
[81R] dF/dt3
_______
[81R] dF/dt4
_______
[81R] dF/dt5
_______
[81R] dF/dt6
_______
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.5
AUTOMAT. CTRL menu
2.5.1
Trip Commands
Function
Trip tI>
Trip tI>>
Trip tI>>>
Trip tIe>
Trip tIe>>
Trip tIe>>>
Trip tIe_d>
Trip tIe_d>>
Trip tP>
Trip tP>>
Trip tP<
Trip tP<<
Trip tQ>
Trip tQ>>
Trip tQ<
Trip tQ<<
Trip tPe/IeCos>
Trip tPe/IeCos>>
Trip tI2>
Trip tI2>>
Trip tI2>>>
Trip Thermal θ
Trip tU>
Trip tU>>
Trip tU<
Trip tU<<
Trip tUe>>>>
Trip tV2>
Trip tV2>>
Trip tF1
Trip tF2
Page 35/70
P125
P126
P127
Yes
Yes
Yes
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 36/70
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Function
Trip tF3
Trip tF4
Trip tF5
Trip tF6
Trip dF/dt1
Trip dF/dt2
Trip dF/dt3
Trip dF/dt4
Trip dF/dt5
Trip dF/dt6
Trip Brkn. Cond
Trip tAux 1
Trip tAux 2
Trip tAux 3
Trip tAux 4
Trip tAux 5
Trip tAux 6
Trip tAux 7
Trip tAux 8 (option)
Trip tAux 9 (option)
Trip tAux A (option)
Trip tAux B (option)
Trip tAux C (option)
Trip SOTF
Ctrl Trip
Trip tEQU A
Trip tEQU B
Trip tEQU C
Trip tEQU D
Trip tEQU E
Trip tEQU F
Trip tEQU G
Trip tEQU H
P125
P126
P127
Yes
Yes
Yes
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.5.2
Page 37/70
Latch relays
P125 →
←
8
Latch relays
2.5.3
←
7
P126 & P127
6
5
4
Blocking logic 1 function allocation
Function
tI>
tI>>
tI>>>
tIe>
tIe>>
tIe>>>
tIe_d>
tIe_d>>
tP>
tP>>
tP<
tP<<
tQ>
tQ>>
tQ<
tQ<<
tPe/IeCos>
tPe/IeCos>>
tI2>
tI2>>
tI2>>>
tThermal θ
tI<
tU>
tU>>
tU<
tU<<
tUe>>>>
P125
P126
P127
Yes
Yes
Yes
3
→
2
1
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 38/70
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Function
P125
P126
P127
Yes
Yes
Yes
P125
P126
P127
Yes
Yes
Yes
tV2>
tV2>>
tF1
tF2
tF3
tF4
tF5
tF6
tBrk. Cond
tAux1
tAux2
tAux3
tAux4
tAux5
tAux6
tAux7
tAux8 (option)
tAux9 (option)
tAuxA (option)
tAuxB (option)
tAuxC (option)
2.5.4
Blocking logic 2 function allocation
Function
tI>
tI>>
tI>>>
tIe>
tIe>>
tIe>>>
tIe_d>
tIe_d>>
tP>
tP>>
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Function
tP<
tP<<
tQ>
tQ>>
tQ<
tQ<<
tPe/IeCos>
tPe/IeCos>>
tI2>
tI2>>
tI2>>>
tThermal θ
tI<
tU>
tU>>
tU<
tU<<
tUe>>>>
tV2>
tV2>>
tF1
tF2
tF3
tF4
tF5
tF6
dF/dt1
dF/dt2
dF/dt3
dF/dt4
dF/dt5
dF/dt6
tBrk. Cond
tAux1
tAux2
Page 39/70
P125
P126
P127
Yes
Yes
Yes
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 40/70
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Function
P125
P126
P127
Yes
Yes
Yes
tAux3
tAux4
tAux5
tAux6
tAux7
tAux8 (option)
tAux9 (option)
tAuxA (option)
tAuxB (option)
tAuxC (option)
2.5.5
Inrush Blocking Logic function allocation
Relay:
P125 (not available)
P126 (not available)
Blocking Inrush
YES
NO
Inr. harmonic 2 ratio =
%
T Inrush reset
ms
Function
I>
I>>
I>>>
Ie>
Ie>>
Ie>>>
Ie_d>
Ie_d>>
I2>
I2>>
I2>>>
P127
Yes
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.5.6
Page 41/70
Logic Select 1 function allocation
Relay:
P125 (not available)
Sel1 tI>>
YES
NO
Sel1 tI>>>
YES
NO
Sel1 tIe>>
YES
NO
Sel1 tIe>>>
YES
NO
Sel1 tIe_d> (P127)
YES
NO
Sel1 tIe_d>> (P127)
YES
NO
ms
t Sel1
2.5.7
Logic Select 2 function allocation
Relay:
P125 (not available)
Sel1 tI>>
YES
NO
Sel1 tI>>>
YES
NO
Sel1 tIe>>
YES
NO
Sel1 tIe>>>
YES
NO
Sel1 tIe_d>
YES
NO
Sel1 tIe_d>> (P127)
YES
NO
t Sel2
ms
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 42/70
OUTPUT RELAYS allocation
← P125 →
• = available
O = Option (P127)
P126
P127
← P126 / P127 →
Trip
•
•
I>
•
•
tI>
•
•
I_R>
•
•
I>>
•
•
tI>>
•
•
I_R>>
•
•
I>>>
•
•
tI>>>
•
•
I_R>>>
•
•
tIA>
•
•
tIB>
•
•
tIC>
•
•
Function
P125
2.5.8
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Ie>
•
•
•
tIe>
•
•
•
Ie_R>
•
•
•
Ie>>
•
•
•
tIe>>
•
•
•
Ie_R>>
•
•
•
Ie>>>
•
•
•
tIe>>>
•
•
•
Ie_d>
•
tIe_d>
•
Ie_dR>
•
•
•
Ie_d>>
•
tIe_d>>
•
Ie_dR>>
•
•
•
P>
•
tP>
•
P>>
•
tP>>
•
RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL6 RL7 RL8
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 43/70
← P125 →
• = available
O = Option (P127)
P127
P126
P125
Function
← P126 / P127 →
P<
•
tP<
•
P<<
•
tP<<
•
Q>
•
tQ>
•
Q>>
•
tQ>>
•
Q<
•
tQ<
•
Q<<
•
tQ<<
•
Pe/IeCos>
•
•
•
tPe/IeCos>
•
•
•
Pe/IeCos>>
•
•
•
tPe/IeCos>>
•
•
•
I2>
•
•
tI2>
•
•
I2>>
•
•
tI2>>
•
•
I2>>>
•
•
tI2>>>
•
•
ThermAlarm
•
•
ThermTrip
•
•
I<
•
•
tI<
•
•
U>
•
tU>
•
U>>
•
tU>>
•
U<
•
tU<
•
RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL6 RL7 RL8
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 44/70
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
← P125 →
• = available
O = Option (P127)
P127
P126
P125
Function
← P126 / P127 →
U<<
•
tU<<
•
Ue>>>>
•
•
•
tUe>>>>:
•
•
•
V2>
•
tV2>
•
V2>>
•
tV2>>
•
F1
•
tF1
•
F2
•
tF2
•
F3
•
tF3
•
F4
•
tF4
•
F5
•
tF5
•
F6
•
tF6
•
F.OUT
•
dF/dt1
•
dF/dt2
•
dF/dt3
•
dF/dt4
•
dF/dt5
•
dF/dt6
•
BrknCond
•
•
CBAlarm
•
•
52 Fail
•
•
CBFail
•
•
CB Close
•
•
RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL6 RL7 RL8
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Page 45/70
← P125 →
• = available
O = Option (P127)
P125
P126
P127
← P126 / P127 →
tAux1
•
•
•
tAux2
•
•
•
tAux3
•
•
•
tAux4
•
•
•
Function
tAux5
•
tAux6
•
tAux7
•
tAux8
O
tAux9
O
tAuxA
O
tAuxB
O
tAuxC
O
79 Run
•
•
79 Trip
•
•
79 int. Lock
•
•
79 ext. Lock
•
•
SOTF
•
•
CONTROLTRIP
•
•
•
CONTROLCLOSE
•
•
•
ActiveGroup
•
•
•
Input1 :
•
•
•
Input2
•
•
•
Input3 :
•
•
•
Input4
•
•
•
Input5
•
•
Input6
•
•
Input7
•
•
Input8
O
Input8
O
InputA
O
InputB
O
InputC
O
RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL6 RL7 RL8
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 46/70
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
← P125 →
• = available
O = Option (P127)
P127
P126
P125
Function
← P126 / P127 →
VTS
•
CTS
•
t EQU.A
•
•
t EQU.B
•
•
t EQU.C
•
•
t EQU.D
•
•
t EQU.E
•
•
t EQU.F
•
•
t EQU.G
•
•
T EQU.H
•
•
Order Comm1
•
Order Comm2
•
Order Comm3
•
Order Comm4
•
RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL6 RL7 RL8
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.5.9
LOGIC INPUT allocation
2.5.9.1
Inputs
Page 47/70
← P125 →
• = available
O = Option.
P125
P126
P127
← P126 / P127 →
None
•
•
•
Unlatch
•
•
•
Blk Log 1
•
•
•
Blk Log 2
•
•
52 a
•
•
52 b
•
•
CB FLT
•
•
Function
Aux 1
•
•
•
Aux 2
•
•
•
Aux 3
•
•
•
Aux 4
•
•
•
Aux 5
•
Aux 6
•
Aux 7
•
Aux 8
O
Aux 9
O
Aux A
O
Aux B
O
Aux C
O
Strt Dist
•
•
Cold L PU
•
•
Log Sel 1
•
•
Log Sel 2
•
•
Change Set
•
•
Block_79
•
•
θ Reset
•
•
Trip Circ
•
•
Start t BF
•
•
•
•
•
•
Maint. M
•
SOTF
Local
•
•
•
Synchro.
•
•
•
← option P127 →
Inputs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 48/70
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
← P125 →
• = available
O = Option.
P125
P126
P127
Led Reset or
Reset Led
•
•
•
Ctrl Trip
•
•
•
Ctr Close
•
•
•
Function
2.5.9.2
2.5.10
← P126 / P127 →
← option P127 →
Inputs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
tAux
Aux 1 : Time tAux 1
s
Aux 2 : Time tAux 2
s
Aux 3 : Time tAux 3
s
Aux 4 : Time tAux 4
s
Aux 5 : Time tAux 5 (P126 & P127)
s
Aux 6 : Time tAux 5 (P126 & P127)
s
Aux 7 : Time tAux 5 (P126 & P127)
s
Aux 8 : Time tAux 5 (P127 option)
s
Aux 9 : Time tAux 5 (P127 option)
s
Aux A : Time tAux 5 (P127 option)
s
Aux B : Time tAux 5 (P127 option)
s
Aux C : Time tAux 5 (P127 option)
s
BROKEN CONDUCTOR allocation
Relay:
P125 (not available)
Brkn Cond ?
Broken Conductor time tBC
Ratio I2/I1
YES
NO
s
%
B
C
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.5.11
Page 49/70
COLD LOAD PU allocation
Relay:
P125 (not available)
Cold Load PU ?
YES
NO
Input ?
YES
NO
Auto ?
YES
NO
tI> ?
YES
NO
tI>> ?
YES
NO
tI>>> ?
YES
NO
tIe> ?
YES
NO
tIe>> ?
YES
NO
tIe>>> ?
YES
NO
tIe_d> ?
YES
NO
tIe_d>> ?
YES
NO
t2> ?
YES
NO
t2>> ?
YES
NO
T Therm ?
YES
NO
%
Cold load PU Level
s
Cold load PU tCL
2.5.12
51V allocation
Relay:
P125 (not available)
P126 (not available)
(U< OR V2>) & I>>?
V
V2>?
(U< OR V2>) & I>>?
V2>?
NO: next menu:
(U<< OR V2>>) & I>>>?
YES
YES
not displayed
NO (last menu)
V
not displayed
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 50/70
2.5.13
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
VTS allocation
Relay:
P125 (not available)
P126 (not available)
VTS?
YES
NO (last menu)
VTS Alarm?
YES
NO
VTS Blocks 51V ?
YES
NO
VTS Blocks Protections?
YES
NO
VTS Non dir I>
YES
NO
VTS Non dir I>>
YES
NO
VTS Non dir I>>>
YES
NO
VTS Non dir Ie>>
YES
NO
VTS Non dir Ie>>>
YES
NO
VTS Non dir Ie_d>
YES
NO
VTS Non dir Ie_d>>
YES
NO
s
tVTS
2.5.14
CTS allocation
Relay:
P125 (not available)
P126 (not available)
P127 (option not available)
CT Supervision?
YES
NO (last menu)
Ie>
In
Ue<
V
tCTS
s
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.5.15
CB FAIL allocation
Relay:
CB Fail ?
2.5.16
Page 51/70
P125 (not available)
YES
NO (last menu)
I< BF
In
not displayed
CB Fail Time tBF
In
not displayed
Block I> ?
Yes
No
not displayed
Block Ie> ?
Yes
No
not displayed
CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION allocation
Relay:
TC Supervision?
P125 (not available)
YES
s
T trip circuit t SUP
CB Open S'vision
YES
YES
NO
ms
CB Close Time
CB Open Alarm?
NO
ms
CB Open Time
CB Close S'vision
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
CB Open NB
Σ Amps(n)?
Σ Amps(n)
n
t Open Pulse
ms
t Close Pulse
ms
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 52/70
2.5.17
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
SOTF
Relay:
P125 (not available)
SOTF?
YES
NO
ms
t SOTF
2.5.18
I>> ?
YES
NO
I>>> ?
YES
NO
Ctrl close input
YES
NO
SOTF input
YES
NO
HMI closing order
YES
NO
[79] closing
YES
NO
Front comm. order
YES
NO
Rear comm. order
YES
NO
Rear2 comm. order
YES
NO
LOGIC EQUATIONS
Equ. A
Boolean
/
A.00
=
A.01
OR
A.02
A.03
A.04
A.05
A.06
A.07
A.08
A.09
A.10
A.11
A.12
A.13
A.14
A.15
/
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
Logic
= NOT
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
/
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
T Operate
ms
T Reset
ms
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Equ B
Boolean
/
B.00
=
B.01
OR
B.02
B.03
B.04
B.05
B.06
B.07
B.08
B.09
B.10
B.11
B.12
B.13
B.14
B.15
Page 53/70
/
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
Logic
= NOT
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
/
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
T Operate
ms
T Reset
ms
Equ. C
Boolean
/
C.00
=
C.01
OR
C.02
C.03
C.04
C.05
C.06
C.07
C.08
C.09
C.10
C.11
C.12
C.13
C.14
C.15
/
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
Logic
= NOT
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
/
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
T Operate
ms
T Reset
ms
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 54/70
Equ. D
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Boolean
/
D.00
=
D.01
OR
D.02
D.03
D.04
D.05
D.06
D.07
D.08
D.09
D.10
D.11
D.12
D.13
D.14
D.15
/
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
Logic
= NOT
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
/
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
T Operate
ms
T Reset
ms
Equ. E
Boolean
/
E.00
=
E.01
OR
E.02
E.03
E.04
E.05
E.06
E.07
E.08
E.09
E.10
E.11
E.12
E.13
E.14
E.15
/
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
Logic
= NOT
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
/
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
T Operate
ms
T Reset
ms
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Equ. F
Boolean
/
F.00
=
F.01
OR
F.02
F.03
F.04
F.05
F.06
F.07
F.08
F.09
F.10
F.11
F.12
F.13
F.14
F.15
Page 55/70
/
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
Logic
= NOT
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
/
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
T Operate
ms
T Reset
ms
Equ. G
Boolean
/
G.00
=
G.01
OR
G.02
G.03
G.04
G.05
G.06
G.07
G.08
G.09
G.10
G.11
G.12
G.13
G.14
G.15
/
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
Logic
= NOT
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
/
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
T Operate
ms
T Reset
ms
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 56/70
Equ. H
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Boolean
=
H.01
OR
H.02
H.03
H.04
H.05
H.06
H.07
H.08
H.09
H.10
H.11
H.12
H.13
H.14
H.15
2.5.19
/
H.00
/
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
OR /
Logic
= NOT
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
= OR NOT /
/
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND /
AND
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
= AND NOT
T Operate
ms
T Reset
ms
Comm. Order delay
Relay:
P125 (not available)
P126 (not available)
tCommand1
s
tCommand1
s
tCommand1
s
tCommand4
s
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
2.6
RECORDING MENU
2.6.1
CB MONITORING Record
Page 57/70
P126 & P127 only.
CB Monitoring Time
s
CB Closing Time
s
Σ Amps (n) IA
Σ Amps (n) IB
Σ Amps (n) IC
2.6.2
FAULT RECORD Record
Record Number
Fault Time
:
:
Fault date
/
/
Active Set Group
1
2
Faulted phase
None
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Earth
Threshold
Magnitude
A
IA Magnitude
A
IB Magnitude
A
IC Magnitude
A
IN Magnitude
A
VAB Magnitude (P127)
V
VBC Magnitude (P127)
V
VCA Magnitude (P127)
V
VN Magnitude
V
IA^VBC Angle
°
IB^VCA Angle
°
IC^VAB Angle
°
IN^VN Angle
°
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 58/70
2.6.3
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
INSTANTANEOUS Record
Number
1
2
3
4
Hour
:
:
Date
/
/
5
Origin
s
Length
Trip
2.6.4
YES
DISTURB RECORD record
Pre-Time
s
Post-Time
s
Disturb rec Trig
2.6.5
NO
On trip
On inst.
TIME PEAK VALUE
P126 and P127 only
mn
Time Window
2.6.6
ROLLING DEMAND
P126 and P127 only
mn
Sub Period
Num of Sub Per.
RECORDS
Fault Record
Record Number
N.A.
1
5
1
Pre-Time
N.A.
0.1
3
0.1
Post-Time
N.A.
0.1
3
0.1
Disturb rec Trig
N.A.
ON TRIP or
Time Window
N.A.
5 mn,
10 mn,
15mn,
30mn,
60mn
Rolling Demand
N.A.
5 mn,
10 mn,
15mn,
30mn,
60mn
Time Window
N.A.
1 mn
Disturb Record
ON INST.
Time Peak Value
60 mn
1 mn
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Page 59/70
3.
P126 & P127 FURTHER TESTS
3.1
Introduction
The following procedures are written for demonstrating the main protection functions of the
MiCOM P126 (where possible) & P127 relays using an Omicron test or similar. The tests do
not test the limits / boundaries of all available function characteristics. They do tests that the
function is operating at one or two chosen points an a characteristic. This document is not a
complete commissioning procedure but could be referred to when performing commissioning
tests in association with the commissioning section of the service manual.
The procedures will state if a deviation from the standard connections or default settings is
required for testing a particular function. For specific on site applications only enabled
functions would be tested using application specific settings.
3.2
Test equipment
The test procedure has been written on the assumption that an Omicron, or equivalent, test
set will be used. Auxiliary supplies of adequate rating will also be required.
3.3
Type used relay
The following tests have been done using a P127 with the following characteristic.
3.4
•
Earth Current :
0.01 to 8Ien
•
Voltage input :
57-130V
•
Auxiliary supply voltage :
130-250Vdc/110-250Vac
•
Communication protocol :
Mod Bus
•
HMI Language :
English
•
Relay software :
Current Version
Test configuration
Input the factory default settings. These settings shall then be downloaded and recorded in
the test results. Any changes to the settings required by this test procedure shall be recorded
in the test results. Any deviation from the default settings will be indicated for each test.
3.5
Connections to test equipment
The test equipment will be wired as described in the table below unless otherwise stated.
3.6
Test Overcurrent Protection
The following general settings for the relay are suggested
•
VT Connection :
3Vpn
•
Line CT primary :
1A
•
Line CT secondary :
1A
•
E/Gnd CT primary :
1A
•
E/Gnd CT secondary :
1A
•
Line VT primary :
0.10 kV
•
Line VT secondary :
100 V
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 60/70
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.7
Non-directional overcurrent protection
3.7.1
Overcurrent sensitivity tests
Object:
The following tests verify that the relay overcurrent elements operate at the set thresholds.
Test with the following relay settings (all thresholds set as non-directional):
•
ON
•
1 In
•
Characteristic
IDMT
•
Curve
IEC_SI (Standard Inverse)
•
TMS
0.025
•
Reset time delay
0.04 s
Inject current of 0.95 In into the A phase input. Increase the current in 0.01In steps, pausing
for 2.5s between each step, until the relay operates. The current must then be reduced in the
same manner until the protection resets.
Repeat the above tests for all phases.
Repeat the above test for other overcurrent stages taking in account that the delay time for
nthe second and third threshold is DMT (t=0s). Make the test before on I>> after on I>>>.
3.7.1.1
Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below.
Delay trip IDMT (inverse time only for I>):
•
Pick-up should occur at
1.1Is ±2%.
•
Reset should occur at
1.04Is ±2%.
Delay Trip DT (definite time for I>, I>>, I>>>)
3.7.2
•
Pick-up should occur at :
Is ±2%.
•
Reset should occur at 0.95
Is ±2%.
Overcurrent characteristic tests
Object:
The following tests verify that the relay overcurrent elements trip in the correct time.
Test with the following relay settings:
•
Is
1 In
•
Characteristic
DT / IDMT
•
Curve
IEC_SI (Standard Inverse)
•
TMS
1.0
•
Time Delay
1s
•
Directionality
Non-directional
•
Reset time delay
0s
Enable stage 1 overcurrent and prepare the tests set so that A phase current can be
instantaneously applied at 2In and 10In respectively. Measure the operating times of the
relay start and trip contacts. Repeat the test with the element set to IDMT. Repeat the test
with the element disabled and verify that no start or trip elements operate.
Repeat the above testing for all phases and stages (with the exception of IDMT which is only
for the first stage).
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.7.2.1
Page 61/70
Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below
•
DT operating time
1.0s ±2%
•
IDMT operating time:
10.070s ±2% at 2 In.
•
2.991s ±2% at 10 In.
3.7.3
Non-directional earth fault overcurrent protection
3.7.3.1
Neutral sensitivity test
Object:
The following tests verify that the relay earth fault elements operate at the set thresholds.
Test with the following relay settings:
•
0.1Ien
•
Characteristic
IDMT
•
Curve
IEC_SI (Standard Inverse)
•
TMS
0.025
•
Delay time
0s
•
Directionality
Non-directional
•
Reset time delay
0.04s
Enable stage 1of Earth Fault protection and inject current of 0.095Ies into the Ie current
input. Increase the current in 0.001In steps, pausing for 2.5s between each step, until the
relay operates.
The current must then be reduced in the same manner until the protection resets.
Repeat the above test for all stages of Earth fault protection (delay type is DT).
3.7.3.2
Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below.
3.7.4
•
Pick-up should occur at
1.1 Ies ±2%.
•
Reset should occur at
1.05 Ies ±2%.
Neutral characteristic tests
Object:
The following tests verify that the relay earth fault elements trip in the correct time.
Test with the following relay settings:
•
Characteristic
DT / IDMT
•
Curve
Standard Inverse
•
TMS
1.0
•
Time Delay
1s
•
Directionality
Non-directional
•
Reset time delay
0s
•
Is
1 Ien
Enable stage 1 of Earth Fault protection and prepare the tests set so that Ie current can be
instantaneously applied at 2 Ies and 10 Ies respectively. Measure the operating times of the
relay start and trip contacts. Repeat the test with the element set to IDMT. Repeat the test
with the element disabled and verify that no start or trip elements operate.
Repeat the above testing for all stages (IDMT is only for the first stage).
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 62/70
3.7.4.1
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below.
•
DT operating time
•
1.0s ±2%
•
IDMT operating time :
•
10.07s ±2% at 2 Ies
•
2.999s ±2% at 10 Ies
3.7.5
Directional earth fault overcurrent protection
3.7.5.1
Neutral sensitivity test
Object:
The following tests verify that the relay directional earth fault elements operate at the set
thresholds and boundary trip zone
Wirng scheme: 3Vpn for the voltage, Holmgreen insertion for the currents. The Ie current is
the output common of the phase current inputs.
Test with the following relay settings:
•
E/GND Primary
5A
•
E/GND Secondary
5A
•
Ie>
0.2 Ien
•
Characteristic
IDMT
•
Curve
IEC_SI (Standard Inverse)
•
TMS
1
•
Ue
1V
•
Trip Zone
-45°/+45°
•
Torque Angle
180°
•
Directionality
Directional
•
Reset time delay
0.04s
Set the phase voltage adn phase current as following
•
Ua=50V, Ub=57.70V, Uc=57.70V.
Set the Ia current to have the ratio Ia/Ie> as:
3.7.5.2
•
Ia/Ie> =2 Trip time in 10.08s
•
Inject the current and verify the delay trip time.
•
Repeat the test for the following ratio
•
Ia/Ie> =3 Trip time in 6.36s
•
Ia/Ie> =4 Trip in 5.022s
Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below.
Pick-up should occur at 1.1 Ies ±2%.
•
Time accuracy +/-2% or 20….40ms
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.7.6
Page 63/70
Reset time test
Repeat the test at the paragraph 6.8.1 using definite time setting the tIe> to 10s and Treset
to 10s.
Make the sequence:
On Input current 2A, after 5s inject 0 A after 5 seconds again 2A
3.7.6.1
Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass; it shall operate as detailed below.
The trip occurs after 5s.
Time accuracy: +/-2% or 20….40ms
3.7.7
Directional earth fault operating boundary
Object:
The following tests verify the operating boundary of the characteristic and to verify its pick-up
and drop-off.
Test with the following relay settings:
•
VT connection
3Vpn.
•
Characteristic
DT
•
t
10s (Operation to be determined by start contacts)
•
Is
0.2 Ien
•
Torque Angle(RCA)
180°
•
Boundary trip zone
+/-45°
Enable stage and configure the test set applying Ua=50V, Ub=57.70V, Uc=57.70V.
Apply A phase current of twice setting at 50° leading the A phase voltage.
Increase/decrease the angle between the phase A voltage and current in step of 1° every
2.5s and determine the angle at which the start contacts non-operate and operate, once the
element has started decrease/increase the angle and determine the drop-off.
Repeat the same test for IDMT delay trip time using the previous settings.
3.7.7.1
Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass the following must be satisfied:
The directional decision shall be from the following equations:
Directional forward
-45° < RCA (Torque angle) < 45°
The operating boundary shall be within ±3° of the relay characteristic angle ±45°.
The element shall drop off within 3° of pick-up.
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 64/70
3.7.8
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Neutral characteristic tests
Object:
The following tests verify that the relay earth fault elements trip in the correct time.
Test with the following relay settings:
•
Characteristic
DT / IDMT
•
Curve
Standard Inverse
•
TMS
1.0
•
Time Delay
1s
•
Directionality
Non-directional
•
Reset time delay
0s
•
Is
1 Ien
Enable stage 1 of Earth Fault protection and prepare the tests set so that Ie current can be
instantaneously applied at 2 Ies and 10 Ies respectively. Measure the operating times of the
relay start and trip contacts. Repeat the test with the element set to IDMT. Repeat the test
with the element disabled and verify that no start or trip elements operate.
Repeat the above testing for all stages (IDMT is only for the first stage).
3.7.8.1
Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below.
DT operating time
•
1.0s ±2%,
IDMT operating time :
3.7.9
•
10.07s ±2% at 2 Ies
•
2.999s ±2% at 10 Ies
Directionaloperating boundary – PHASE overcurrent (only P127)
Object:
The following tests verify the operating boundary of the characteristic and to verify its pick-up
and drop-off.
Test with the following relay settings:
•
VT connection
3Vpn.
•
Characteristic
DT
•
t
10s (Operation to be determined by start contacts)
•
Is
1 In
•
Characteristic Angle (RCA)
0°
•
Boundary trip zone
+/-80°
Enable stage 1of Overcurrent and configure the test set to apply balanced three phase
nominal voltages (57.7V) to the voltage inputs.
Apply A phase current of twice setting at 30° leading the A phase voltage.
Increase/decrease the angle between the A phase voltage and current in step of 1° evry 2.5s
and determine the angle at which the start contacts non-operate and operate, once the
element has started decrease/increase the angle and determine the drop-off.
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.7.9.1
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Page 65/70
Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass the following must be satisfied:
The directional decision shall be from the following equations:
Directional forward
-80° < RCA (Torque angle) < 80°
The operating boundary shall be within ±3° of the relay characteristic angle ±80°.
The element shall drop off within 3° of pick-up.
3.7.10
Earth directional wattmetric test
Wiring scheme is:
•
3Vpn for the voltage
•
Holmgreen insertion for the phase and earth current
•
CT phase and E/GND ratio primary and secondary to 5A
•
VTs primary and secondary set to 0.1kV and 100V
Relay settings:
•
Pe> 5 x K W -> 25W
•
Delay type IDMT: IEC SI CURVE
•
Reset time 0.04s
•
Torque angle 180°
•
Inject: Ua=57.7V, Ub= 57.7V, Uc=57.7V with these values the Ue is equal to 0.
Inject the Ia phase current with displacement 0° with Ua to have the following ratios Pe/Pe> :
2, 3, 4
•
Inject Ua=27.7V, Ub= 57.7V, Uc=57.7V
•
=
Ue 1/3(Ua+Ub+Uc) (vectorial summation)
The relay calculates the Pe as:
Pe= Ue x Ie x Cos(Ie^Ue + Torque angle)
Pe= (27.7-57.7)/3 x Ia x cos(180°) with Ia = 5A you have 50W the ratio is equal 2 follow the
other ones.
Inject 5A for a ratio equal to 2; theoretical delay time 10.03s, measured delay time 10,273s
Inject 7.5A for a ratio equal to 3 theoretical delay time 6.3s, measured delay time 6.43s
Inject 10A for a ratio equal to 4 theoretical delay time 10.03s, measured delay time 5.077s
3.7.10.1
Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below.
IDMT operating time :
•
Accuracy: ±2% or 30…..40ms
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 66/70
3.7.11
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Negative sequence overcurrent
Object:
To verify that the negative sequence overcurrent operation is recorded as a fault record.
Test with the following relay settings:
•
DT time Delay
10s
•
I2>
0.1In
Apply three phase currents to the relay at a magnitude of In. Step change the A phase
current to a magnitude of 0.5In. Verify that the fault record indicates that the negative
sequence overcurrent has started.
Repeat the above testing with the time delay set to 0s. The fault record should now indicate
trips.
3.7.11.1
Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed above.
3.7.12
Thermal overload
Object:
The following tests verify that thermal overload starts and trips applied to the relay operate
correctly.
Test with the following relay settings:
•
Thermal trip current Iθ>
0.5 In
•
Thermal alarm θ>
No
•
Time Constant Te
1 min
•
K
1
•
θ Trip
100%
Configure the test set to apply 3 phase balanced current to the relay
Reset the thermal time state of the relay. Inject three phase 0.55 In to the relay and measure
the operating time of the contact. Verify that the fault record indicates that the thermal
overload alarm has operated followed by a thermal overload trip after 107 s ±2%.
3.7.12.1
Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed above.
3.8
Voltage Protection (only P127)
The voltage protection 27 and 59 compare the line voltage to the setting elements of each
protection.
3.8.1
Under voltage
Object:
The following tests verify that under voltage starts and trips applied to the relay operate
correctly.
Test with the following relay settings:
•
Mode
OR
•
Characteristic
DT
•
DT
30s
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.8.2
Page 67/70
Phase to neutral under voltage element
Test with the following relay settings:
•
U<
50V
Enable stage 1 over voltage and apply rated three phase voltages (57.7V per phase) to the
relay. After 2s reduce the phase A voltage and phase B voltage to 20V. Measure the
operating times of the relay start and trip contacts. Repeat the test with the element disabled
and verify that no start or trip elements operate.
Repeat the above tests for stage 2 under voltage.
3.8.3
Over voltage
Object:
To verify that over voltage starts and trips applied to the relay operate correctly.
Test with the following relay settings:
3.8.4
•
Mode
OR
•
Characteristic
DT
•
DT
10s
Phase to neutral over voltage element
Test with the following relay settings:
•
U>100V
Enable stage 1 and apply three phase voltages (50V per phase) to the relay. After 1s
increase the phase A voltage and phase B voltage to 60V. Measure the operating times of
the relay start and trip contacts. Repeat the test with the element disabled and verify that no
start or trip elements operate.
Repeat the above testing for stage 2 overvoltage.
3.8.5
Residual over voltage
Object:
The following tests verify that residual over voltage starts and trips applied to the relay are
recorded as fault records.
Test with the following relay settings:
•
Ue
Derived (VT Connection setting 3Vpn)
•
Ue>>>>
10V
•
Trip Delay
10s
Enable stage of the residual overvoltage protection and apply balanced three phase voltages
to the relay (57.7V per phase) after 2s reduce UA phase voltage to 25V . Measure the
operating times of the relay start and trip contacts. Repeat the test with the element disabled
and verify that no start or trip elements operate.
3.8.5.1
Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below.
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 68/70
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
3.9
Automatic control functions
3.9.1
Trip circuit supervision
Connect the coil of the external auxiliary relay as the example in the Technical Guide
P12y/EN AP page 55.
+ Vdc
52a
2
6
Trip
order
Optoinput
MiCOM P126/P127
- Vdc
P0096ENa
Set the following parameters.
Set in the CB Monitoring TCS ON and
Input menu:
Assign Trip. Circ. to input 1
Assign an output relay to the 52 Fail
Procedure
Supply the input and verify that the led and the relay are OFF
Remove the supply from the input and verify that the output relay are ON after the set of the
TCS timer.
3.9.2
Circuit breaker failure
Object:
The following test verifies the Breaker Failure operation.
Test with the following relay settings:
Overcurrent:
•
Characteristic
DT
•
Time Delay
0s
•
Directionality
Non-directional
•
Reset time delay
0s
•
Is (I>)
1 In
•
Time Delay
0s
•
I<BF
0.5 In
•
tBF
5s
CBF:
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Page 69/70
The relay shall be configured with trip commands relay assigned to t_I>, with relay 2
assigned to CB fail function and with relay 2 assigned as latched.
Enable stage 1 overcurrent and apply three phase currents to the relay at 0.8 In for 1s;
instantaneously increase the currents applied to the ABC phase inputs to 2 In for 7s. Verify
after the increase that tat the relays number 2 change in the status display windows to level
1 after 5s.
3.9.2.1
Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed above.
3.9.3
Cold load pick-up
Test with the following relay settings:
Cold load pick-up:
•
t_I>
Yes
•
Level
200%
•
tCL
5.0 s
Overcurrent:
•
Characteristic
DT
•
Time Delay
2s
•
Directionality
Non-directional
•
Reset time delay
0s
•
Is (I>)
1In
Inputs:
•
Input 1
Cold L PU
Apply three phase currents to the relay at a magnitude of 1.5 In and supply the input 1.
Verify after 8 sec the trip of the overcurrent is recrided as a fault record
3.9.3.1
Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed above.
3.9.4
Broken Conductor
Object:
The following tests verify that a broken conductor condition causes the relay to operate
correctly.
Test with the following relay settings:
•
I2/I1 setting
20%
•
Characteristic
DT
•
Time Delay
10s
Apply rated three phase currents (1In). After 10 seconds have elapsed, reduce the current in
A phase to zero and measure the time taken for the relay to indicate a broken conductor trip.
Repeat the test with the element disabled and verify that no start or trip elements operate.
3.9.4.1
Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below.
•
DT operating time 10.0s ±2%
P12y/EN RS/Fa5
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Page 70/70
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
BLANK PAGE
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE
VERSION
HISTORY AND
COMPATIBILITY
P125 P126-P127 V15
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Page 1/28
CONTENTS
1.
INTRODUCTION
3
2.
MiCOM P125
4
3.
MiCOM P126
10
4.
MiCOM P127
18
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 2/28
BLANK PAGE
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
1.
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Page 3/28
INTRODUCTION
HARDWARE INSTALLED
HARD 4: First version of hardware (Px2x Phase 1)
HARD 5: Latest version of hardware (Px2x Phase 2)
SERIAL NUMBER HELP
The serial number (e.g. 0804253) informs about the date of manufacture and the version
of hardware. It printed on the front relay label. This number is read from left to right:
- 2 first number define the week (e.g. 08 is the calendar week 8).
- 2 number following define the year (e.g. 04 is the year 2004).
- 3 final is a consecutive number up to 999 to uniquely identify the relay.
E.g.: W W Y Y N N N
- W = Week 01 To 52
- Y = Year (19)94 To (20)93
- N = Product Arrang. 001 To 999
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 4/28
2.
MiCOM P125
P125 – Serial number – Hardware Correlation
Serial Number
Hardware installed
Phase 1
HARDWARE VERSION 4
Phase 2
HARDWARE VERSION 5
Relay Type P125
Software Date of
Version Issue
V3
2001
Full Description of Changes
Software changes implemented in this version
Backward
S1
Compatibility
Compatiwith previous
bility
hardware
V2.03
HARD 4
V2.03
HARD 4
V2.10
HARD 4
- Addition of Polish, Czech and Spanish
- Software corrections.
V4
2001
Software changes implemented in this version
- Addition of:
. cyrillic characters, Italian, German and Dutch,
. factory and battery alarms,
. energy reset by remote TC (Modbus),
. “parameter changed” event
. LED & output relays conf. on single pole current tripping,
. digital inputs supply & operating modes,
. 2nd settings group active on output relay conf.
. start protections alarms,
. IDMT curve on 1st threshold (32n, 46, 67 and 67n),
. rescue password,
. VDEW protocol,
- date & time IEC format implemented,
- Password request for energy reset,
- Software corrections.
V5
2003
Software changes implemented in this version
- EEPROM self test and management modified,
- Real time clock evolution,
- Modification during transmissions,
- Modification of hardware text alarms,
- Addition of Russian and Portuguese languages.
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Page 5/28
Relay Type P125
Software Date of
Version Issue
V6.A
09/2003
Full Description of Changes
Software changes implemented in this version
- Enhancement of EEPROM software,
Backward
S1
Compatibility
Compatiwith previous
bility
hardware
V2.10
Hard 2
or
Hard 4
V2.11
Hard 4
V2.12
Hard 4
V2.12
Hard 4
- Protection 67 and 67N, addition of IDMT time on 2nd threshold,
- For every protection with IDMT thresholds moved max RTMS to 3.2
from 1.5,
- For Automatism addition of:
. maintenance mode,
. tAUX3 and tAUX4,
. LED autotest on new fault,
- Threshold setting of 32N protection: K constant substitued by E/Gnd
CT sec value,
- Modbus - addition of 32N: Po, IoCos, Io^Uo angle.
- 67N: trip zone correction (secondary ground TC = 5A),
- Modification to fix FPGA upload,
- Correction of communication bug.
V6.C
09/2005
Software changes implemented in this version
- Protocol IEC60870-5-103:
. management of private/public address added,
. class 1 information corrected,
. no ASDU23 sent after disturbance creation if already connected
corrected,
. reset LED not updated information corrected,
. time synchro. correction,
- Cyrillic character display corrected,
V6.F
09/2005
Software changes implemented in this version
- In the Configuration / Group Select sub-menu:
. “Change Group By Input” becomes “Change Group By”,
. “LEVEL / EDGE” becomes “INPUT / MENU”,
. the setting “Start/Stop tAux_ by input” is removed,
- Creation of Hungarian language.
V6.F1
01/2007
Software changes implemented in this version
- IEC60870-5-103 communication, correction of:
. relay blocking after reception of a time synchronisation frame
(IEC60870-5-103),
. processing of Start In> event,
. period of sampling in disturbance extracted,
. scale factor for Ia,
. disturbance record upload of channels for U0 and frequency,
. ASDU 9 unused fields.
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 6/28
Relay Type P125
Software Date of
Version Issue
Full Description of Changes
Backward
S1
Compatibility
Compatiwith previous
bility
hardware
V6.G
02/2007
V2.12
Software changes implemented in this version
- Software corrections:
. Angle Ie/Ue,
. [67n]U>> and [67N]U>>> initialization (comm. Modbus),
. data copy address during initialization,
. elimination of offset of analog input in the displayed measurement of
IE & UE,
. Initialization of minimum threshold of I0 & U0,
. trip and auxiliary relays latches,
. implementation of commands of group 1 and group 2 (IEC60870-5103),
. IN event start (IEC60870-5-103),
. Correction alarm string display,
. minimum of amplitude to calculate frequency,
. IeCos calculation with verification of Ue voltage,
. “Control trip” and “Control close” french label,
. Initialisation of the process after CT and VT ratio setting with modbus
comm.,
. DMT temporization parameter “TiE>>” visibility,
. Io_cos & Po_cos when IR injected is near saturation,
. “Ue>>>” fault records french label,
. Ia, Ib and Ic channels scale factor in disturbance record extraction.
Hard 4
V6.H
01/2008
Software changes implemented in this version
- Correction of Phase I DTS,
V2.13
Hard 4
V2.13
Hard 5
- “RTMS Ie>>” and “tReset Ie>>>” reinitialisation if sent by
communication modbus,
- Correction of the reinitialization of settings (“RTMS Ie>>” and “tReset
Ie>>>”) sent by communication modbus.
V10.D
08/2006
V10.D software is equivalent to V6.H software based on the phase II
hardware redesign (Hard 4)
Software changes implemented in this version
- None.
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Page 7/28
Relay Type P125
Software Date of
Version Issue
V11.A
06/2007
Full Description of Changes
Backward
S1
Compatibility
Compatiwith previous
bility
hardware
V2.14
Hard 5
- Communication Modbus:
V2.14
. modification of the manual acknowledgement of oldest event and fault
record,
. modification of the disturbance record acknowledgement status,
. modification of the remote control for disturbances acknowledgement,
. disturbance record: correction of number of pages and number of
samples in the service frame.
Hard 5
Software changes implemented in this version
- Phase rotation: right computation with ACB phase rotation,
- Phase angle display: the order of phases (I & U) can be displayed in
the measurement menu,
- Improvement of offset: offset calibration values can be memorized for
each range and each gain,
- Auxiliary logic inputs: temporized and assignable to LED, trip order,
output relays and equations, and recordable in event file.
- Fail safe relay: possibility to deactivate a relay if associated
information is activated,
- The clock can be synchronized by logic input,
- TMS and RTMS step reduced to 0.001,
- Multi assignable logic inputs:
. assignable to several internal signal,
. full ascendant compatibilty with former system,
- phase of each signal can be calibrated,
- Addition of disturbance, event, instantaneous and default information
saving, saved statistics records functionality,
- logic inputs can be assignated to the outputs,
- 25 faults and 250 events recordable,
- 51V protection: I>>(>) minimum threshold value can be adjusted to 0.1
In,
- DNP3.0 protocol added,
- Correction of software defects:
. values error after disturbance avalanche. presence of nonacknoledged records bit in Modbus communication improved,
. communication Modbus addresses improved for reading
Software changes implemented in this version
- Addition of Turkish language,
- Event of latched relays: correction of the modbus address,
- “Disturbance trigger” event added in event records,
V11.B
12/2007
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 8/28
Relay Type P125
Software Date of
Version Issue
V11.C
06/2009
Full Description of Changes
Software changes implemented in this version
- logic equations: opto-inputs state added,
Backward
S1
Compatibility
Compatiwith previous
bility
hardware
V3.1
Hard 5
V3.1
Hard 5
V3.1
Hard 5
V3.1
Hard 5
V3.1
Hard 5
- new inhibited alarms (auxiliary timers and logic equations),
- German labels updated,
- Correction of:
. settings after password setting (front keyboard)
. communication port failure alarm,
. tAux alarm generation
. HMI trouble after local paswword entering during data edition with
offset,
. disturbance recording duration,
. events display during CPU load phases.
V12.A
09/2009
Software changes implemented in this version
- Possibility to operate the CB and to start a disturbance recording from
the relay HMI,
- Total trips number calculated with all the CB operations,
- Disturbance recorder time modified,
- IA, IB, IC & I0 displayed on the same time on relay,
- The result of a Boolean equation can be used in an other equation,
- Correction of:
. the decimal value of DMT temporisation when ≥ 20s,
. absolute time on disturbance record,
. Chinese text on “Output Relay” menu,
. 32bits value in E2PROM with MODBUS Protocol,
. problem of extraction of events with MiCOM S1 using MODBUS
protocol.
V12.B
01/2010
Software changes implemented in this version
- Correction of:
. default language selection,
. IEC60870-5-103 comm.: event transmission with ModBus,
. HMI translations,
. disturbance records: storage of start of disturbance,
V12.C
V14.A
General: New Schneider Electric brand
03/2011
Software changes implemented in this version
- Power supply and transformer offset self-test improvement,
- Correction of:
. the synchronous polarisation sometimes doesn’t work
. Date/time failure: no hardware alarm occurs
. the language parameter can be set to “Chinese” even the LCD not
supported
. Disturbance record doesn’t trig if the tEqu=0.0s
. IEC 103 comm.: writing address 0110h, 0111h, 0118h are not
forbidden
. Timestamp of the appearance of I> not correct
. IEC 103 comm.: the frequency in fault record is expressed in 100*Hz,
instead of Hz
. Protection may not operate when “changing group by logical input” is
selected
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Page 9/28
Relay Type P125
Software Date of
Version Issue
V15.A
10/2011
Full Description of Changes
Software changes implemented in this version
- "General reset" control added to "Orders" menu.
- Correction of:
. trip command to RL1 (IEC 61870-5-103 protocol)
. Chinese language: HMI errors.
Backward
S1
Compatibility
Compatiwith previous
bility
hardware
V3.1
Hard 5
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 10/28
3.
MiCOM P126
P126 - Serial number – Hardware Correlation
Serial Number
Hardware installed
Phase 1
HARDWARE VERSION 4
Phase 2
HARDWARE VERSION 5
Relay Type P126
Software Date of
Version Issue
V3.A
to
V3.J
2001
V4.A
to
V4.J
2001
2003
Full Description of Changes
Software changes implemented in this version
Backward
S1
Compatibility
Compatiwith previous
bility
hardware
V2.03
HARD 4
V2.03
HARD 4
V2.10
HARD 4
- Addition of Polish Czech and Spanish,
- Software corrections,
Software changes implemented in this version
- Addition of:
. cyrillic characters, Italian, German and Dutch,
. factory and battery alarms,
. energy reset by remote TC (Modbus),
. “ parameter changed” event,
. LED & output relays conf. on single pole current tripping,
. digital inputs supply & operating modes,
. 2nd settings group active on output relay conf.
. start protections alarms,
. IDMT curve on 1st threshold (32n, 46, 67 and 67n),
. rescue password,
. VDEW protocol,
- date & time IEC format implemented,
- Password request for energy reset,
- Software corrections.
V5.A
V5.B
V5.C
2003
Software changes implemented in this version
- EEPROM self test and management modified,
- Real time clock evolution,
- Modification during transmissions,
- Modification of hardware text alarms,
- Addition of Russian and Portuguese languages.
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Page 11/28
Relay Type P126
Software Date of
Version Issue
V6.A
09/2003
Full Description of Changes
Software changes implemented in this version
- Enhancement of EEPROM software,
Backward
S1
Compatibility
Compatiwith previous
bility
hardware
V2.10
Hard 2
or
Hard 4
V2.11
Hard 4
- Addition of matrix management for recloser,
- Protection 67 and 67N, addition of:
. IDMT time on 2nd threshold,
. peak detection on 3rd threshold
- For every protection with IDMT thresholds moved max RTMS to 3.2
from 1.5,
- For Automatism addition of:
. SOTF/TOR function,
. maintenance mode,
. tAUX3 and tAUX4,
. LED autotest on new fault,
. rolling demand on new fault,
. local/remote function,
- Addition of instantaneous records,
- tIA, tIB and tIC modification,
- Threshold setting of 32N protection: K constant substitued by E/Gnd
CT sec value,
- Modbus: addition of 32N: Po, IoCos, Io^Uo angle.
- Correction of alarms saving in backup RAM,
- Start tBF correction (breaker failure),
- Correction of delay between analog and logic channel (disturbance
record),
- Correction of P & Q calculation (3Vpn & 2Vpn+Vr wiring),
- 67N: trip zone correction (secondary ground TC = 5A),
- Modification to fix FPGA upload,
- Correction of communication bug.
V6.B
10/2004
Software changes implemented in this version
- Correction of the IEC60870-5-103 disturbance extracted from the
front Modbus port, correcting the logical information "GENERAL
START", "CB FAIL" and "tIe>>/tIe>>>",
- Addition of event record of alarm acknowledgement by push-button,
- Enhancement when phase A, B or C is near the hysteresis
threshold,
- Communication IEC60870-5-103: addition of management of
private/public address.
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 12/28
Relay Type P126
Software Date of
Version Issue
V6.C
12/2004
Full Description of Changes
Software changes implemented in this version
- Event record of alarm acknowledgement by push-button added,
Backward
S1
Compatibility
Compatiwith previous
bility
hardware
V2.11
Hard 4
V2.12
Hard 4
- Protocol IEC60870-5-103:
. management of private/public address added,
. Class 1 information corrected,
. no ASDU23 sent after disturbance creation if already connected
corrected,
. Reset LED not updated information corrected,
. time synchro. correction,
- Broken conductor: logic equation A, B, C and D corrected,
- Cyrillic character display corrected,
- Frequency tracking correction.
V6.D
09/2005
Software changes implemented in this version
- Correction of relay blocking after some tripping,
- Backup SRAM alarm correction.
V6.F
09/2005
Software changes implemented in this version
- In the Configuration / Group Select sub-menu:
. “Change Group By Input” becomes “Change Group By”,
. “LEVEL / EDGE” becomes “INPUT / MENU”,
. the setting “Start/Stop tAux_ by input” is removed,
V2.12
- Creation of Hungarian language,
V6.F1
01/2007
Software changes implemented in this version
- IEC60870-5-103 communication, correction of:
. relay blocking after reception of a time synchronisation frame
(IEC60870-5-103),
. processing of Start In> event,
. period of sampling in disturbance extracted,
. scale factor for Ia,
. disturbance record upload of channels for U0 and frequency,
. ASDU 9 unused fields,
V2.12
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Page 13/28
Relay Type P126
Software Date of
Version Issue
Full Description of Changes
Backward
S1
Compatibility
Compatiwith previous
bility
hardware
V6.G
V2.12
Software changes implemented in this version
- Software defects corrections:
. Angle Ie/Ue,
. “SF6” alarm text,
. [67n]U>> and [67N]U>>> initialisation (comm. Modbus),
. time synchronization frame reception (IEC60870-5-103),
. data copy address during initialization,
. verification of local mode to inhibit command (IEC60870-5-103),
. trip and auxiliary relays latches,
. IN event start (IEC60870-5-103),
. Correction alarm string display,
. minimum of amplitude to calculate frequency,
. IeCos calculation with verification of Ue voltage,
. “Control trip” and “Control close” french label,
. Initialisation of the process after CT and VT ratio setting with
modbus comm.,
. frequency of disturbance records is nominal network frequency
according to comtrade format,
. Equation logic for I2>>> and tI2>>>,
. DMT temporization parameter “TiE>>” visibility,
. blocking Logic of thermal state,
. protection thermal “Ith>” and “Te” initialization after setting,
. amplitude of IeCos fault,
. Io_cos & Po_cos when IR injected is near saturation,
. “Ue>>>” fault records french label,
. Period of samples of disturbance extracted (IEC60870-5-103),
. ASDU 9 unused fields,
. “recloser blocked” or “VTS” alarm after switching ON/OFF,
. Ia, Ib and Ic channels scale factor in disturbance record extraction,
. disturbance record upload of channels for U0 and frequeency,
. RAM content verification at starting.
V6.H
Software changes implemented in this version
- Possibility to start autoreclose from an external device using tAux1
and tAux2 without tripping the CB,
- Correction of Phase I DTS,
- recloser: information of definitive trip occurs if the matrix of cycle
does not set “nb cycle”+1,
- Correction of SF6 front face alarm text (same as logical input text
corresponding to “CB Ftt”,
- “RTMS Ie>>” and “tReset Ie>>>” reinitialisation if sent by
communication modbus,
- Communication IEC-60870-5-103: inhibition of command if the local
mode has been selected by logic input,
- the fault record number to display can be modified using Modbus
communication w/o affecting the displayed fault,
- Modification of the primary ratio for voltages channels with voltage
option 220-480V in disturbance records uploaded with IEC-60870-5103,
- Correction of the reinitialization of settings (“RTMS Ie>>” and
“tReset Ie>>>”) sent by communication modbus.
V2.13
Hard 4
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 14/28
Relay Type P126
Software Date of
Version Issue
V10.D
08/2006
Full Description of Changes
v10.D software is equivalent to v6.H software based on the phase II
hardware redesign (Hard 4)
Backward
S1
Compatibility
Compatiwith previous
bility
hardware
V2.13
Hard 5
V2.14
Hard 5
Software changes implemented in this version
- None.
V11.A
06/2007
Software changes implemented in this version
- Phase rotation: right computation with ACB phase rotation,
- Phase angle display: the order of phases (I & U) can be displayed in
the measurement menu,
- Improvement of offset: offset calibration values can be memorized
for each range and each gain,
- Auxiliary logic inputs: temporized and assignable to LED, trip order,
output relays and equations, and recordable in event file,
- Fail safe relay: possibility to deactivate a relay if associated
information is activated,
- The clock can be synchronized by logic input,
- TMS and RTMS step reduced to 0.001,
- Multi assignable logic inputs:
. assignable to several internal signal,
. full ascendant compatibilty with former system,
- I< configurable on opened circuit breaker (o/o),
- Addition of boolean equations with operators NOT, AND and OR,
- phase of each signal can be calibrated,
- logic inputs can be assignated to the outputs,
- 25 faults and 250 events recordable,
- 51V protection: I>>(>) minimum threshold value can be adjusted to
0.1In
- DNP3.0 protocol added,
- correction of software defects:
. values error after disturbance avalanche,
. date of event logic input improvement,
. presence of non-acknoledged records bit in Modbus
communication improved,
. the fault record number to display can be modified using Modbus
communication,
. communication Modbus addresses improved for reading,
. correction of auto-acknowledgement of disturbance.
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Page 15/28
Relay Type P126
Software Date of
Version Issue
V11.B
12/2007
Full Description of Changes
Software changes implemented in this version
- Addition of equation logic logic assigned to LED,
Backward
S1
Compatibility
Compatiwith previous
bility
hardware
V2.14
Hard 5
V3.1
Hard 5
- Modification of all equation logic labels (from Equ.x” to “tEqu.x”),
- Addition of Turkish language,
- Event of latched relays: correction of the modbus address,
- “Disturbance trigger” event added in event records,
- Communication Modbus:
. modification of the manual acknowledgement of oldest event and
fault record,
. modification of the disturbance record acknowledgement status,
. modification of the remote control for disturbances
acknowledgement,
. disturbance record: correction of number of pages and number of
samples in the service frame,
V11.C
06/2009
Software changes implemented in this version
- Addition of auxiliary timers in coherence with the number of opto
inputs. tAux5, tAux6 and tAux7 timers duration can be set up to
20000s (> 5.5 hours),
- logic equations: opto-inputs state added,
- new inhibited alarms (auxiliary timers and logic equations),
- German labels updated,
- Correction of:
. settings after password setting (front keyboard)
. ΣAmps(n) counter,
. communication port failure alarm,
. tAux alarm generation
. blocking by “CB fail” of “I> rev” and “Ie> rev”,
. display of protection (minimum amplitude) after boot or remote
setting.
. HMI trouble after local paswword entering during data edition with
offset,
. AR Cycle tAux settable to start and inhib,
. disturbance recording duration,
. events display during CPU load phases.
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 16/28
Relay Type P126
Software Date of
Version Issue
V12.A
09/2009
Full Description of Changes
Software changes implemented in this version
Backward
S1
Compatibility
Compatiwith previous
bility
hardware
V3.1
Hard 5
V3.1
Hard 5
V3.1
Hard 5
- New inhibited alarms added (possibility to inhibit alarm on tAux, I<,
U<, P<, Q<, F< and Boolean logic)
- Possibility to operate the CB and to start a disturbance recording
from the relay HMI,
- Possibility to start:
. SOTF using any control close information,
. Cold Load Pickup by 52A or “not I< & I>” or “I0< & I0>”,
- Total trips number calculated with all the CB operations,
- Possibility to program autoreclose blocking after a number of reclose
or a defined time,
- Possibility to assign any signal to any LED,
- Disturbance recorder time modified,
- IA, IB, IC & I0 displayed on the same time on relay,
- Front face Led resettable via a logic input selection,
- “79 internal locked” and “79 external locked” assigned to output
signals,
- Selectivity between two relays with tReset + autorecloser.
- The result of a Boolean equation can be used in an other equation,
- CB Fail added in Boolean equation,
- Correction of:
. the decimal value of DMT temporisation when ≥ 20s,
. absolute time on disturbance record,
. Chinese text on “Output Relay” menu,
. 32bits value in E2PROM with MODBUS Protocol,
. problem of extraction of events with MiCOM S1 using MODBUS
protocol.
V12.B
01/2010
Software changes implemented in this version
- Correction of:
. DNP V3.0 comm.: “multi-fragment responses” processing,
. default language selection,
. IEC60870-5-103 comm.: event transmission with ModBus,
. HMI translations,
. disturbance records: storage of start of disturbance,
V12.C
General: New Schneider Electric brand
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Page 17/28
Relay Type P126
Software Date of
Version Issue
V14.A
03/2011
Full Description of Changes
Software changes implemented in this version
Backward
S1
Compatibility
Compatiwith previous
bility
hardware
V3.1
Hard 5
V3.1
Hard 5
Power supply and transformer offset self-test improvement,
- Correction of:
. the synchronous polarisation sometimes doesn’t work
. Date/time failure: no hardware alarm occurs
. the language parameter can be set to “Chinese” even the LCD not
supported
. Disturbance record doesn’t trig if the tEqu=0.0s
. IEC 103 comm.: writing address 0110h, 0111h, 0118h are not
forbidden
. Timestamp of the appearance of I> not correct
. IEC 103 comm.: the frequency in fault record is expressed in 100*Hz,
instead of Hz
. Protection may not operate when “changing group by logical input” is
selected
V15.A
10/2011
Software changes implemented in this version
- "General reset" control added to "Orders" menu.
- Correction of:
. trip command to RL1 (IEC 61870-5-103 protocol)
. overcurrent protection: tIA>, tIB>, tIC> reset with directional
protection,
. Chinese language: HMI errors.
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 18/28
4.
MiCOM P127
P127 - Serial number – Hardware Correlation
Serial Number
Hardware installed
Phase 1
HARDWARE VERSION 4
Phase 2
HARDWARE VERSION 5
Relay Type P127
Software Date of
Version Issue
V3.A
to
V3.J
2001
V4.A
to
V4.J
2001
2003
Full Description of Changes
Software changes implemented in this version
S1
Compatibility
Backward
Compatibility
with previous
hardware
V2.03
HARD 4
V2.03
HARD 4
V2.10
HARD 4
- Addition of Polish Czech and Spanish,
- Software corrections.
Software changes implemented in this version
- Addition of:
. cyrillic characters, Italian, German and Dutch,
. factory and battery alarms,
. energy reset by remote TC (Modbus),
. “ parameter changed” event,
. LED & output relays conf. on single pole current tripping,
. digital inputs supply & operating modes,
. 2nd settings group active on output relay conf.,
. start protections alarms,
. IDMT curve on 1st threshold (32n, 46, 67 and 67n),
. rescue password,
. VDEW protocol,
- date & time IEC format implemented,
- Password request for energy reset,
- Software corrections.
V5.A
V5.B
V5.C
2003
Software changes implemented in this version
- EEPROM self test and management modified,
- Real time clock evolution,
- Modification during transmissions,
- Modification of hardware text alarms,
- Addition of Russian and Portuguese languages.
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Page 19/28
Relay Type P127
Software Date of
Version Issue
V6.A
09/2003
Full Description of Changes
Software changes implemented in this version
- enhancement of EEPROM software,
S1
Compatibility
Backward
Compatibility
with previous
hardware
V2.10
Hard 2
or
Hard 4
V2.10
Hard 2
or
Hard 4
- addition of matrix management for recloser,
- protection 67 and 67N, addition of IDMT time on 2nd threshold,
- For every protection with IDMT thresholds moved max RTMS to
3.2 from 1.5,
- For Automatism addition of:
. SOTF/TOR function,
. maintenance mode,
. tAUX3 and tAUX4,
. LED autotest on new fault,
. rolling demand on new fault,
. local/remote function,
- Addition of instantaneous records,
- tIA, tIB and tIC modification,
- threshold setting of 32N protection: K constant substitued by
E/Gnd CT sec value,
- Modbus: addition of 32N: Po, IoCos, Io^Uo angle,
- correction of alarms saving in backup RAM,
- modification of cos(ϕ) calculation,
- start tBF correction (breaker failure),
- correction of delay between analog and logic channel (disturbance
record),
- 67N: trip zone correction (secondary ground TC = 5A),
- Modification to fix FPGA upload,
- Correction of communication bug.
V6.A
09/2003
Software changes implemented in this version
- addition of periodic self test of EEPROM data,
- Optimization of the readings in E2PROM (writing of the value of
the checksums in internal RAM),
- Replacement of the data storage circuit breaker in E2PROM by a
storage in safeguarded RAM,
- IEC870-5-103 communication: addition of ASDU 3.4 for
measurement IN,
- in the management of the validity of the date and season in the
messages, modifications in acknowledgement of the orders and
time synchronization.
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 20/28
Relay Type P127
Software Date of
Version Issue
V6.B
10/2004
Full Description of Changes
Software changes implemented in this version
·Addition of the automatism 51V (Voltage controlled over-current
protection) for I>> and I>>> thresholds. The 51V blocks the I>> if
there isn't the U< or V2> detected. It blocks the I>>> if there isn't
the U<< or V2>> detected..
S1
Compatibility
Backward
Compatibility
with previous
hardware
V2.11
Hard 4
V2.11
Hard 4
V2.12
Hard 4
V2.12
Hard 4
· Addition of the automatism VTS (Voltage Transformer
Supervision). Addition of alarm and event associated. The VTS is
active if (V2 > 0.3Vn & I2 < 0.5In) or (V1 < 0.1Vn & I1 > 0.1In).
Possibility to blocks the 51V if VTS is active..
· Addition of the calculation of V1 and V2 (module of Fourier) for
use with 51V and VTS.
· Addition of the two settings of thresholds V2> and V2>> for use
with 51V,
V6.C
12/2004
-
correction of I> and I>> start when I> or I>> are in “yes” or “dir”
mode, and I>>> in “peak” mode,
-
Correction of the IEC60870-5-103 disturbance extracted from
the front Modbus port, correcting the logical information
"GENERAL START", "CB FAIL" and "tIe>>/tIe>>>"
Software changes implemented in this version
- event record of alarm acknowledgement by push-button added,
- Protocol IEC60870-5-103:
. management of private/public address added,
. Class 1 information corrected,
. no ASDU23 sent after disturbance creation if already connected
corrected,
. Reset LED not updated information corrected,
. time synchro. correction,
- broken conductor: logic equation A, B, C and D corrected,
- Cyrillic character display corrected,
- frequency tracking correction.
V6.D
09/2005
Software changes implemented in this version
- correction of relay blocking after some tripping,
- backup SRAM alarm correction
V6.E
09/2005
Software changes implemented in this version
- Recloser 79:
. modification of “auto-recloser in progress” management and
associated event generation:
. mofification of “final trip” information management,
. locked auto-recloser assignable to the output,
. manual close modified
. "Ctrl Trip", "tAux3", "tAux4" and "Trip SOTF" added,
- Communication IEC870-5-103: correction of scale factor RFA
calculated for Current and Voltage values
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Page 21/28
Relay Type P127
Software Date of
Version Issue
V6.F
09/2005
Full Description of Changes
Software changes implemented in this version
- In the Configuration / Group Select sub-menu:
. “Change Group By Input” becomes “Change Group By”.
. “LEVEL / EDGE” becomes “INPUT / MENU”.
. the setting “Start/Stop tAux_ by input” is removed.
S1
Compatibility
Backward
Compatibility
with previous
hardware
V2.12
- Creation of Hungarian language.
V6.F1
01/2007
Software changes implemented in this version
- IEC60870-5-103 communication, correction of:
. relay blocking after reception of a time synchronisation frame
(IEC60870-5-103),
. processing of Start In> event
. period of sampling in disturbance extracted,
. scale factor for Ia,
. disturbance record upload of channels for U0 and frequency,
. ASDU 9 unused fields
V2.12
V6.G
02/2007
Software changes implemented in this version
- Software defects corrections:
. Uc RMS and Uca RMS values (2Vpn+Vr and 2Vpp+Vr
connections
. Angle Ie/Ue,
. “SF6” alarm text,
. [67n]U>> and [67N]U>>> initialisation (comm. Modbus)
. time synchronization frame reception (IEC60870-5-103)
. data copy address during initialization
. verification of local mode to inhibit command (IEC60870-5-103)
. trip and auxiliary relays latches,
. IN event start (IEC60870-5-103),
. Correction alarm string display,
. minimum of amplitude to calculate frequency,
. IeCos calculation with verification of Ue voltage,
. measurement of hig power and energy display value,
. “Control trip” and “Control close” french label,
. Initialisation of the process after CT and VT ratio setting with
modbus comm.,
. frequency of disturbance records is nominal network frequency
according to comtrade format,
. Equation logic for I2>>> and tI2>>>
. blocking Logic of thermal state,
. “VT connection” parameter on “2Vpn+Vr” value,
. protection thermal “Ith>” and “Te” initialization after setting,
. amplitude of IeCos fault,
. Io_cos & Po_cos when IR injected is near saturation,
. “Ue>>>” fault records french label,
. Period of samples of disturbance extracted (IEC60870-5-103),
. “recloser blocked” or “VTS” alarm after switching ON/OFF
. Ia, Ib and Ic channels scale factor in disturbance record
extraction,
. alarm VTS with the closing or opening of the CB,
. VTS occuring after 3 phase default (3Vpn connection),
. RAM content verification at starting.
V2.12
Hard 4
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 22/28
Relay Type P127
Software Date of
Version Issue
V6.H
01/2008
Full Description of Changes
S1
Compatibility
V2.13
Software changes implemented in this version
- if U< and U<< protection is used with 51V, ther is no alarm and no
blocking of change group from this protection,
Backward
Compatibility
with previous
hardware
Hard 4
- Possibility to start autoreclose from an external device using
tAux1 and tAux2 without tripping the CB,
- Correction of Phase I DTS,
- recloser: information of definitive trip occurs if the matrix of cycle
does not set “nb cycle”+1,
- Correction of SF6 front face alarm text (same as logical input text
corresponding to “CB Ftt”,
- “RTMS Ie>>” and “tReset Ie>>>” reinitialisation if sent by
communication modbus,
- Communication IEC-60870-5-103: inhibition of command if the
local mode has been selected by logic input,
- the fault record number to display can be modified using Modbus
communication w/o affecting the displayed fault,
- Modification of the primary ratio for voltages channels with voltage
option 220-480V in disturbance records uploaded with IEC-608705-103,
- correction of change settings group,
- Correction of the reinitialization of settings (“RTMS Ie>>” and
“tReset Ie>>>”) sent by communication modbus.
V10.D
08/2006
V2.13
Hard 5
V2.14
Software changes implemented in this version
- 2nd harmonic blocking: For each three currents phases the
harmonic restraint compare the ratio of harmonic 2 to fundamental
with the ratio setting. Inrush detection could block I>, I>>, I>>>,
Ie>, Ie>>, Ie>>>, I2>, I2>> and I2>>>
Hard 5
v10.D software is equivalent to v6.H software based on the phase II
hardware redesign (Hard 4)
Software changes implemented in this version
- None.
V11.A
06/2007
- Improve measurements with VA & VAH: The apparent power and
apparent energy are available (as measurement) in the LCD
panel,
- Phase rotation: right computation with ACB phase rotation,
- Phase angle display: the order of phases (I & U) can be displayed
in the measurement menu,
- Improvement of offset: offset calibration values can be memorized
for each range and each gain,
- Auxiliary logic inputs: temporized and assignable to LED, trip
order, output relays and equations, and recordable in event file.
- Fail safe relay: possibility to deactivate a relay if associated
information is activated,
- The clock can be synchronized by logic input,
- TMS and RTMS step reduced to 0.001,
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Page 23/28
Relay Type P127
Software Date of
Version Issue
Full Description of Changes
- VTS:
. assignable to output relay.
. Overcurrent directional protection can be transformed to the nondirectional protection when VTS is cactive.
. Some protection blocking are extended when VTS is active
- Multi assignable logic inputs:
. assignable to several internal signal,
. full ascendant compatibilty with former system
- I< configurable on opened circuit breaker (o/o) and/or U<
- Addition of boolean equations with operators NOT, AND and OR.
- phase of each signal can be calibrated,
- addition of 6 instantaneous and temporized frequency min/max
protections (81< and 81>)
- overpower relay (alternator protection agains power inversion)
functionality added
- logic inputs can be assignated to the output s
- 25 faults and 250 events recordable
- 51V protection:
. I>>(>) minimum threshold value can be adjusted to 0.1 in
. if U< and U<< protection is used with 51V, ther is no alarm and
no blocking of change group from this protection,
- DNP3.0 protocol added,
- correction of software defects:
. values error after disturbance avalanche
. calculation of average measurement of UC
. date of event logic input improvement,
. presence of non-acknoledged records bit in Modbus
communication improved,
. the fault record number to display can be modified using Modbus
communication w/o affecting the displayed fault,
. communication Modbus addresses improved for reading
. Event tI> signalled after each instantaneous fault origin,
. correction of auto-acknowledgement of disturbance.
S1
Compatibility
Backward
Compatibility
with previous
hardware
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 24/28
Relay Type P127
Software Date of
Version Issue
V11.B
12/2007
Full Description of Changes
Software changes implemented in this version
- Addition of equation logic logic assigned to LED,
S1
Compatibility
Backward
Compatibility
with previous
hardware
V2.14
Hard 5
V3.1
Hard 5
- Modification of all equation logic labels (from Equ.x” to “tEqu.x”,
- Addition of Turkish language,
- Event of latched relays: correction of the modbus address
- Setting group can be changed when reverse current is present,
- “Disturbance trigger” event added in event records,
- Communication Modbus:
. modification of the manual acknowledgement of oldest event and
fault record,
. modification of the disturbance record acknowledgement status,
. modification of the remote control for disturbances
acknowledgement,
. disturbance record: correction of number of pages and number
of samples in the service frame,
V11.C
06/2009
Software changes implemented in this version
- Addition of auxiliary timers in coherence with the number of opto
inputs. tAux5, tAux6 and tAux7 timers duration can be set up to
20000s (> 5.5 hours),
- logic equations: opto-inputs state added,
- new inhibited alarms (auxiliary timers and logic equations),
- German labels updated,
- Correction of:
. settings after password setting (front keyboard)
. ΣAmps(n) counter,
. communication port failure alarm,
. tAux alarm generation
. blocking by “CB fail” of “I> rev” and “Ie> rev”,
. Inrush blocking submenu,
. LED affectation menu on VTS added,
. display of protection (minimum amplitude) after boot or remote
setting.
. HMI trouble after local paswword entering during data edition
with offset,
. AR Cycle tAux settable to start and inhib,
. VTS output display,
. disturbance recording duration,
. events display during CPU load phases.
Hardware changes implemented in this version
- New options added:
. 5 opto-inputs
. IRIG-B + + 2nd rear port,
. IRIG-B + 2nd rear port + 5 opto-inputs
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Page 25/28
Relay Type P127
Software Date of
Version Issue
V12.A
09/2009
Full Description of Changes
Software changes implemented in this version
- New inhibited alarms added (possibility to inhibit alarm on tAux,
I<, U<, P<, Q<, F< and Boolean logic)
- Possibility to operate the CB and to start a disturbance recording
from the relay HMI,
- Possibility to start:
. SOTF using any control close information,
. Cold Load Pickup by 52A or “not I< & I>” or “I0< & I0>”,
- Total trips number calculated with all the CB operations,
- Addition of a new derived earth overcurrent threshold,
- Possibility to program autoreclose blocking after a number of
reclose or a defined time,
- Possibility to assign any signal to any LED,
- Disturbance recorder time modified,
- Implementation of the adjustable directionality on the two
threshold independently P> and P>>, Creation of adjustable
directional threshold P< and P<< and four adjustable directional
Under / over reactive power threshold Q<, Q<<, Q>, Q>>.
- IA, IB, IC & I0 displayed on the same time on relay,
- Front face Led resettable via a logic input selection,
- “79 internal locked” and “79 external locked” assigned to output
signals,
- Selectivity between two relays with tReset + autorecloser.
- voltage protection thresholds settable with Ph / Ph or Ph / N mode,
- Possibility to Inhibit U< or U<< when CB is open,
- The result of a Boolean equation can be used in an other equation,
- CB Fail added in Boolean equation,
- Correction of:
. the decimal value of DMT temporisation when ≥ 20s,
. absolute time on disturbance record,
. Chinese text on “Output Relay” menu,
. 32bits value in E2PROM with MODBUS Protocol,
. problem of extraction of events with MiCOM S1 using MODBUS
protocol.
S1
Compatibility
Backward
Compatibility
with previous
hardware
V3.1
Hard 5
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 26/28
Relay Type P127
Software Date of
Version Issue
V13.A
01/2010
Full Description of Changes
Hardware changes implemented in this version
- New option added: measurement CT option,
Software changes implemented in this version
- Current transformer supervision added,
- Rate of change of frequency (df/dt) protection added,
- Currents, voltages, powers and energies metering display added
(with measurement CT),
- New record reset order,
- Eight protection setting groups,
- Possibility to copy settings from a group to a 2nd group,
- Communication settings adapted for 2 RS485 port using
IEC60870-5-103,
- “Communication orders” setting added.
- Correction of:
. DNP V3.0 comm.: cold restart and warm restart answer,
. DNP V3.0 comm.: “multi-fragment responses” processing,
. default language selection,
. IEC60870-5-103 comm.: event transmission with ModBus,
. HMI translations,
. disturbance records: storage of start of disturbance,
. frequency value storage after a frequency fault.
. Σ Amps (n) counter reset remote order,
. statistics data storage.
V13.B
11/2011
General: New Schneider Electric brand
Software changes implemented in this version
- Correction of:
IEC 103 comm.: the general command “Automrecloser On/Off”
doesn’t work for setting group 3 to 8.
IEC 103 comm.: most of GI information in the “Advanced GI” list
are not correctly transmitted
IEC 103 comm.: ACD bit is not set to 1 in the short message of
acknowledgementr after reception of a setting read or write(ASDU
140), or a general command (ASDU 20) , or time synchro
command (ASDU 6)
S1
Compatibility
Backward
Compatibility
with previous
hardware
V3.1
Hard 6
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Page 27/28
Relay Type P127
Software Date of
Version Issue
V14.A
03/2011
Full Description of Changes
Software changes implemented in this version
S1
Compatibility
Backward
Compatibility
with previous
hardware
V3.1
Hard 5
V3.1
Hard 5
- Power supply and transformer offset self-test improvement,
- Correction of:
* the synchronous polarisation sometimes doesn’t work
* Date/time failure: no hardware alarm occurs
* the language parameter can be set to “Chinese” even the LCD
not supported
* Disturbance record doesn’t trig if the tEqu=0.0s
* IEC 103 comm.: writing address 0110h, 0111h, 0118h are not
forbidden
* Timestamp of the appearance of I> and Ie>>>> not correct
* IEC 103 comm.: the frequency in fault record is expressed in
100*Hz, instead of Hz
* Protection may not operate when “changing group by logical
input” is selected
V15.A
10/2011
Software changes implemented in this version
- 2nd threshold added to derived earth fault protection ("Ie>>>>"
becomes "Ie_d>")
- Addition of [47] Negative overvoltage protection (2 thresholds),
- Alarm can be inhibited by tU>, tU>>, tV2> & tV2>>,
- Assignation of "communication orders" to the Logic equations.
- Correction of:
. trip command to RL1 (IEC 61870-5-103 protocol)
. Ie_d directionality calculation without Ie,
. overcurrent protection: tIA>, tIB>, tIC> reset with directional
protection,
. Summation of current (ΣAmps) after some events,
. Chinese language: HMI errors.
P12y/EN VC/Fa5
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P125/P126/P127
Page 28/28
BLANK PAGE
Customer Care Centre
© 2011 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone:
Fax:
+33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
+33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com
Publication: P12y/EN M/Fa5
Publishing: Schneider Electric
10/2011